Kantoku Means I Love You

Hyuuga Junpei could feel all his muscles protesting feebly as he hauled himself up the last step to the pedestrian overpass on his way home. The pain of the killer workout they’d all been put through for the first day of the new basketball club reminded him of other annoyances, and he glanced over his shoulder at his companion.

“And why is Kiyoshi calling you ‘Riko’, anyway?” he demanded.

Riko rolled her eyes so hard she nearly missed her own first step up to the walkway. “Because he said to call him Teppei, so I said to call me Riko. It would feel weird if he were ‘Aida-san’ing me while I called him Teppei.”

“So call him Kiyoshi, like everyone else in the school,” Junpei argued. Like, for example, he did, and then it wouldn’t seem like the too-perceptive, infuriatingly-determined bastard had stolen his childhood friend.

Alarmingly, Riko grinned. “Yeah, but he gets this sad expression whenever I do. It’s kind of cute, actually.”

Junpei hitched his bag glumly up over his shoulder and stumped down the stairs on the other side. Cute. Great.

“What’s the problem with it, anyway?” Riko demanded, elbowing him as they started down the street of little shops and restaurants that led toward home. “You call me Riko, after all.”

“Yeah, but…” Junpei stifled the rest of his sentence before but you invited him to could get out of his mouth. Even in his own head, that sounded stupid and childish, and if he said it out loud Riko would probably be annoyed at him. Actually, given how annoyed at him she’d been for most of the past year, she’d probably hit him. It was bad enough that she’d taken to calling him Hyuuga-kun months ago, and still hadn’t stopped. “Never mind,” he muttered. After a long moment, broken only by Riko’s predictable distraction over the Rilakkuma phone straps being sold at the stall beside the bakery, he added, “Besides, if you’re our coach, now, the whole team should be calling you Kantoku.”

Riko laughed. “I could get used to that, maybe. After all, I’m going to be putting you all through hell like a good coach should.”

The brightness of a good challenge lit up her whole face, and Junpei’s stomach did ridiculous flip-flops just to see that. “Well then.” He cleared his throat and tried to make sure he didn’t sound breathless at all. “I’ll rely on you. Kantoku.”

She grinned up at him, and linked her arm through his for a few steps, and Junpei smiled helplessly back. He had a feeling he was going to be calling her that a lot, just to see this sparkle in her. He was clearly, completely, and totally doomed.

He was maybe kind of okay with that, though.

“So, what are you going to inflict on us tomorrow?” he asked.

The sparkle turned to a gleam, and Riko cracked her knuckles ominously. “Well, I was thinking about that…”

He listened to her planning their death from exhaustion, and nodded along agreeably, and even made a few suggestions for the footwork drills. She teased him about acting all captain-ly already, and he smiled crookedly and agreed. Captain and coach had to work together a lot, after all. No matter how big and infuriating an idiot fate had inflicted on him to drag him back to basketball, and no matter how well Kiyoshi seemed to get along with Riko, Junpei and Riko would have this. For three years, if he wasn’t stupid enough to throw it away again.

Yeah, maybe he was okay with doomed.

End

Twelve Views of Summer

Kuroko Tetsuya

When they were together, Kagami wrapped himself around Tetsuya until Tetsuya felt like he might drown, go under the surface of all the Kagami-ness and not come back up. But he kissed gentle and hesitant, mouth moving lightly against Tetsuya’s, like he was never sure he was doing it right.

Tetsuya thought he was doing just fine, and reached up to wrap a hand around the back of Kagami’s neck and keep him there so they could do it some more.


Kise kissed the same way he looked at people, coaxing and charming, dropping tiny kisses at the corners of Tetsuya’s mouth until Tetsuya relaxed against him—relaxed into the hand on his back and arched his spine to tip his head back far enough to meet Kise straight on. Because, of course, that was the other way Kise looked at people, when he was ready to stop playing around: direct and hot. When he kissed like that, Tetsuya relaxed against him all the way.


Aomine twined around Tetsuya like a cat, until Tetsuya wondered lightly if Aomine was trying to mark him. Aomine laughed and purred against his ear until Tetsuya couldn’t stay still any longer and batted him away, and he was smiling when Aomine swooped in to catch his mouth. Aomine kissed as open as a laugh, but he tasted as wild as his game had gotten, and as they kissed he slowly pulled Tetsuya tighter and tighter against him.

Tetsuya let him, because Aomine wasn’t the only possessive one.

Kagami Taiga

It hadn’t taken Taiga very long to figure out that Kuroko’s bland expression hid something a little scary. Something unrelenting and fearless. It was still always a shock to actually see it, and it had been just as much of a shock the day Kuroko gave him a long, thoughtful look and then leaned down over the bench and kissed him. It hadn’t been an aggressive kiss, but the firm heat of Kuroko’s mouth against his had made him go still.

It was a shock every time, in a way, but he kind of liked it that way, and he was careful when he spread his hands against Kuroko’s back, careful so he’d stay close.


The first time Aomine had kissed him, Taiga had been in the middle of challenging him to a one-on-one, and now he couldn’t actually use the phrase without feeling his ears getting hot. Not around Aomine, at least. Which made Aomine smirk, which meant Taiga had no choice but to haul him closer and kiss it away. It took a little while to get to the actual game, sometimes, but that was okay. Aomine kissed just like he played, hot and wild and pushing until Taiga pushed back, pushed him against the fence or the post itself, which was when Aomine finally relaxed, tension easing away under Taiga’s hands. That was when Aomine played a lazy, wicked, drawn-out game, or a bright, fast-flying, laughing one.

Not always on the court, but that was okay too.


Kise should be a relaxing kind of guy to hang out with, as easy-going as he acted most of the time. But he really, really wasn’t, not once you saw what was on the other side of the easy-going. Taiga never really relaxed around Kise unless Kise was showing that flip side, the one where his eyes made you think of a fucking sword even when he was smiling.

Well, okay, he also relaxed when Kise was wrapped around him making soft sounds into his mouth, sounds that made Taiga go slow with him the way he never would have on the court. But kissing, he maintained no matter how much Kise teased him over it, was different. He knew he was right, because saying that made Kise’s eyes turn as soft as the sounds he made.

Aomine Daiki

The day Tetsuya let Daiki kiss him, something in Daiki that had been wound tight finally eased. It finally felt right, again. Maybe Tetsu wasn’t at his side on the court any longer, but this, it was like one of Tetsu’s passes. Something burning through the air. Something so heavy and direct it was impossible to catch, but Tetsu trusted him to catch it anyway. So he caught it and held it, held Tetsu to him, and licked at the tiny, familiar quirk in the corners of Tetsu’s mouth. The way Tetsu laced his hands around the back of Daiki’s neck told him everything was all right again.


Kise kissed like a challenge, and where they went from there was up to Daiki. If he stood firm and kissed back gently, Kise softened and leaned against him and smiled the private smile only friends got to see. If he caught Kise up, spinning him off his feet, laughing over the centimeters of advantage he still had, Kise would laugh with him, bright and happy and true. And if he held Kise hard, kissed back rough and wanting, Kise would turn wild in his arms until they were both wrung out and exhausted.

Sometimes Daiki thought Kise reflected, not a copy, but all the true bits of himself. When he thought that, he wondered a little at how much of Kise there seemed to be.


Daiki liked the way Kagami kissed, though he never said so out loud. He liked Kagami’s weight against him, liked how completely straightforward he was. No bullshit, no holding back.

Considering that, he also found it kind of funny that Kagami was so gentle about it. However wild they started, and Daiki liked wild after all, sooner or later Kagami’s mouth on his turned slow and hot and wet. And that made Daiki not miss the wildness.

Kise Ryouta

Kuroko was a godawful tease, was the thing.

It kind of got Ryouta hot, because he knew how that game was played, and Kuroko could play it right down to the hilt.

So it was a game to get kisses from Kuroko, to tease him back until he decided to finally respond. To feel him turn lightly aside until Ryouta gave in and turned serious. To feel Kuroko finally turn toward him and open his mouth under Ryouta’s.

He was never sure who won those games, but the intentness of Kuroko’s kiss made him not care.


There were times when Kagami scared Ryouta a little. Not because of his strength or his loudness or his vast social awkwardness, or any of the things that Ryouta knew probably alarmed other people. Because he never looked away. To Kagami, Ryouta’s charm for his fans and edge for his opponents and even his quietness for a friend were all the same. Kagami kissed him the same way, no matter what, always warm and steady. Ryouta loved it, and it freaked him out, and even then Kagami just held him.

What did you do with someone like that?

So far, the answer seemed to be: let him hold you and kiss you quiet.


Aomine kissed like a wind blowing through, no matter what mood he was in, always sweeping you up in itself. Bright and laughing or fierce and wild, it always swept Ryouta up. And when Aomine was holding Ryouta tight against him and whispering, between kisses, just what he was going to do to Ryouta, how hard it would be, how good…

…well, it was easy to say yes. To throw away caution and wondering about what this might do to his image and whether his agency would yell at him over it, and just kiss back. It was like swallowing fire, and he strained into Aomine’s arms for more of it.

The satisfied sound Aomine made, when he did, poured heat right down his spine.

This he had won, and he would not let it go.

End

For He Has This Grace

Aomine Daiki ducked back inside the Metropolitan Gymnasium side doors and stalked down the dim hall, wincing a bit when he went to slide his hands into his pockets. Shougo had a jaw almost as hard as his thick skull, and Daiki’s knuckles were bruised and stinging. It’d had to be done, though; Shougo was the kind of idiot who would keep going until someone stopped him. Daiki’s mouth tugged up at one corner. He really was kind of like Kise, that way, actually.

He stopped at the edge of the main concourse, glancing around the thinning crowd with a bit of resignation. He’d told Satsuki to go ahead, but he knew she wouldn’t have. She worried too much about him. And okay, yeah, the year had been unspeakably boring up until just recently, but Tetsu had brought him a very nice opponent (better than chocolate any day) and Kise might just be a serious challenge the next time they played. She didn’t need to keep freaking out. He glanced indecisively between the main doors and the corner with the vending machines. Where to start?

“Aominecchi!”

Daiki snorted softly. It had definitely been a bad year—he’d almost gotten to miss the stupid things his teammates called him. “Kise.” He leaned against the wall as Kise eeled out of the crowd and trotted down the side hall to meet him, still flushed from the game and grinning all over his face.

“You came to watch!”

“Of course I watched. Good game.” Kise actually turned a little pink, at that, and Daiki rolled his eyes. Wasn’t like that was some huge compliment. “About time you got over your damn block about the rest of the team.”

Kise waved his hands indignantly. “Well, it was hard! All you guys are insanely talented and I’ve only been playing for three years, gimme a break!”

Daiki swatted at Kise, laughing when he ducked back. “Why should I give you a break when pushing you obviously works so much better? Isn’t that what you’ve always insisted on anyway?”

“Aominecchi is mean,” Kise accused, practically pouting at him, the way he did when he was teasing someone. Daiki rolled his eyes even harder.

Which meant he wasn’t looking and started when Kise caught his wrist in a grip that was always stronger than it seemed it should be, when you watched him clowning around.

“What did you do to your hand?” Kise demanded, frowning down at Daiki’s bruised and scraped knuckles.

“It’s nothing.” Daiki tugged against Kise’s hold; Kise didn’t let go.

“That is not nothing! I know you don’t need to be as careful with your fingers as Midorimacchi, but what are you going to do if you mess up your grip?” Kise glared up from under those ridiculously long lashes before turning Daiki’s hand more into the light from the concourse. “If you lose our next game because you let your hands get injured, I’m going to be really pissed off at you.”

“What next game?” Daiki finally twisted his wrist free. “You’re the one who still has games to play in this tournament, not me. You’re the one who has to be careful.” Which was why Daiki had gone looking for Shougo in the first place, after all.

And maybe he’d been thinking that a little too loudly, because Kise froze, staring at him. “Aominecchi,” he finally said, low and wide-eyed. “That wasn’t… Shougo-kun?” Daiki ran an exasperated hand through his hair, stifling a wince because he’d forgotten not to use his left hand.

“Quit looking at me like that. You’d better not backslide on me, Kise.” He’d done it because it was right, not for Kise’s admiration, for fuck’s sake.

Kise’s face hardened and took a long step toward Daiki, away from the bright concourse and slowing bustle there. “I can do both,” he told Daiki, chin lifted with every bit of the arrogance his sweet manners usually hid. “I can admire you and still fight you with everything I’ve got. And next time we do have a game, you’d better keep that in mind.”

Daiki smiled slowly. Those bright eyes were narrow and sharp, the way Kise always looked when he quit clowning and got serious about something. “You can, huh?” he asked softly. Kise took another step, right up in Daiki’s space where he leaned back against the wall.

“I won’t ever hold back with you again.” Kise’s mouth curved like the edge of a knife. “I promise.”

There was something hotter in his smile than Daiki had seen even during their games this year, and he wasn’t completely surprised when Kise reached up and curled a hand around the back of Daiki’s neck and pulled him down. Daiki let him, laughing against his mouth until Kise pressed up against him, biting at his lower lip just enough to jolt Daiki a little.

“Mmm.” Daiki pulled Kise harder against him, settling him snugly between Daiki’s legs, satisfied by the husky sound Kise made. “Bout time you finally decided to make a move. I was getting bored with waiting.”

Kise’s eyes glinted up at him. “You get bored so easily, Aominecchi, I guess we’d better do something about that.”

Even knowing Kise, even having watched him wind people up with his adorable-clueless-model-boy routine, even knowing that Kise and Tetsu were dead even for who had the evilest sense of humor, Daiki didn’t expect the feeling of Kise’s hand sliding down the front of his jeans. "Fuck!"

“If I’m not holding back, you’d better not be either,” Kise told him, breathless, and squeezed.

“Ryou,” Daiki growled, and kissed him hard and hot. Kise made a wanting sound into his mouth, and when his hand tightened again Daiki sucked in a quick breath. Kise’s grip was warm and strong, and made him think about the same hand wrapped around a basketball. About how Kise was, just maybe, catching up. About that promise not to hold back. He reached down to close his hands on Kise’s ass, pulling him in tighter and grinding their hips together. This time they both moaned, and Kise left off groping him to grab his shoulders with both hands and grind back against him. Hot pleasure licked straight up Daiki’s spine, and he laughed, low and husky.

“The next time we play,” he breathed against Kise’s ear, “it’ll feel like this. Only better. Look forward to it.” Kise moaned low in his throat, and Daiki pushed a knee between his legs. “Give me everything you’ve got, Ryou.”

Kise made a desperate sound and dragged Daiki’s head down again, fingers buried in his hair as he rode Daiki’s thigh shamelessly. Daiki dug his own fingers into the tight muscle of Kise’s ass with every flex of his hips, grinding him ruthlessly close, hot and wild with the hope Ryou and Tetsu had held out to him this winter. The hope put an edge on the pleasure winding his nerves taut every time he rocked against Kise’s hip, and it didn’t take long before it all spilled over. When he came, he muffled his groan in Kise’s mouth, kissing Kise like he could breathe him in and hold him that way. Kise answered him, just as open and passionate as he’d been two years ago, already relaxing against him, and that sudden sweetness made Daiki’s hands turn gentle even as his body wrung itself out.

When they’d both caught their breath, and Kise lifted his head and smiled up at him, Daiki smiled back, only a little tilted. “Next year,” he said quietly, “I’ll be waiting for you.”

“Or maybe before then.” Kise’s eyes glinted. “Come to the semi-finals and see how it goes. I have some revenge to get on Kurokocchi and Kagamicchi, after all.”

Daiki snorted, remembering how he’d been hauled to the Tokyo preliminary finals. “Doubt I’ll get out of it. Imayoshi-senpai’s being a complete bastard about that.” Even after he was supposed to be retired.

“You should have more respect for your senpai, Aominecchi,” Kise told him, contriving to look virtuous even while rumpled and flushed and straddling Daiki’s thigh. “Like me. I always do what Kasamatsu-senpai wants me to.”

“Kise!” someone yelled out in the concourse, sounding irate.

“Mostly,” Kise added with perfect aplomb.

Daiki had to laugh. He really had missed his old teammates, idiocy and all. “Go on, then.” He kissed Kise one last time, softer, and pushed him away. “I’ll be watching.”

Kise flashed a true smile, so much brighter than his model-smile. “Watch me win.” He brushed his uniform mostly straight, and trotted back around the corner calling, “Coming, senpai!”

Daiki slumped back against the wall and ran a hand through his hair, still smiling a little. That had been an impulsive thing to do, and now he had to find a bathroom and get cleaned up a little before he went looking for Satsuki. But he was glad he’d done it. Kise had spent a long time following him around, looking at his back. It was about time he started walking alongside, instead. Daiki made a pleased sound at the thought and pushed off the wall, stretching. For the first time in a long time, he was looking forward to the next game.

Maybe afterwards he’d find go find Kise again.

End

The Single Akashi Seijuurou

A Side

When Akashi Seijuurou heard that Tetsuya had quit the basketball club, even before the official retirement of third years was announced, he shrugged.

“He’s only anticipating events.”

Ryouta rubbed the back of his head, looking uncertain. “Well, I suppose we’re all quitting, in a way, but…”

“That wasn’t what I meant.” Seijuurou looked around the spare classroom where he had called his team to him. Shintarou was sitting neatly at one of the empty desks, hands folded lightly, still careful of his fingers even now that the tournament season was over. Daiki was sprawled along the boxy sill of one of the windows looking out, one hand draped over his knee, open and empty and desperately wanting. Ryouta had perched on the desk whose chair Atsushi had taken, swinging his feet while Atsushi nibbled pineapple pocky and waited silently. They were the most brilliant players he’d been able to find and train; he thought they would do.

“It’s time for us to separate.”

Shintarou frowned faintly, adjusting his glasses as if that would help him understand Seijuurou more clearly. “What do you mean?”

Seijuurou leaned back against the teacher’s desk and spread his hands. “We’ve won. We are the strongest team in Japan. Where else will we find competition, now, but in each other?”

Daiki’s dangling foot, which had been tapping restlessly against the wall, stilled.

“As you choose your high schools,” Seijuurou continued, suppressing a smile, “choose separate ones. I want your words that all of you will cease to think of each other as teammates and instead play each other as opponents.” Something he had already prepared them for, after all.

They glanced at each other, and he waited patiently for the obvious logic of the thing to register with them. Atsushi was the first to shrug and nod, fishing out another stick. “If you think it would be good.”

“I suppose you have a point,” Shintarou allowed, slowly. “It would allow for more balanced competition.” He was still watching Seijuurou narrowly; of all of them, Shintarou was the one who knew him well enough that he might intuit the point of this exercise. That was all right. It wouldn’t keep him from carrying through the exact sequence of moves Seijuurou mapped out for them.

“Might even be interesting,” Daiki put in, still looking out the window as if he didn’t care, but the hand on his knee was clenched now.

Ryouta was the last, as Seijuurou had known he would be. Ryouta was the only one besides Tetsuya himself who still played by his emotions. “I’d miss the team.” He pouted briefly at the room in general, and Shintarou gave him an exasperated look. “But I guess that could be fun too, playing against you all.” His play-pout dissolved into a genuine smile, edged and glinting. “Let’s see who wins.”

Seijuurou nodded, satisfied. “Very well. Then, for the last time, the team is dismissed.”

They stood and stretched and clattered out, Ryouta already asking Daiki for a practice match while they still had the chance, Atsushi turning away down this newly named path of separation with cheerful ease, Shintarou lingering for a last long look over his shoulder before sliding the door quietly shut behind him. Seijuurou leaned back on his hands and smiled up at the ceiling through the motes of dust dancing in the air. He knew who would win, of course; it would be him. He was the one who had pushed these players to become what they were, and they had never made a move he hadn’t seen coming. The opening was concluded. Now it was time for the middle game to begin. And when the end game was reached, the rightness of all his moves would be revealed for all to see.

It would be a victory worth winning, just as he had planned, for years, that it should be.

B Side

When Akashi Seijuurou heard that Tetsuya had quit the basketball club, even before the official retirement of third years was announced, he frowned. Obviously, Tetsuya wanted to make a point of his disapproval, not that Seijuurou had missed it in the first place.

He expected tracking Tetsuya down to take a little while; it wasn’t an easy task, even for Seijuurou, when Tetsuya wanted not to be found. In the end, though, a single question to a classmate led him straight to the roof where Tetsuya was leaning against the safety rail all alone. Seijuurou contemplated this move, standing in the doorway. Tetsuya had always been the easiest to handle, of his players, but today he clearly wanted a confrontation. Very well.

“A formal resignation seems a bit overdone, considering we’re all retiring in a week.”

Tetsuya didn’t turn around. “A week is too long.”

Seijuurou came away from the door to stand at the rail beside him, watching him. “Do you really think I haven’t seen it?”

“You haven’t done anything about it.” Tetsuya’s tone was even, as always, but it was still an accusation. Seijuurou hid a smile; perhaps this pawn would reach gold after all.

“What would you have me do? Try to reduce their strength? Force them to cooperate when their talents make individual play the most natural thing?”

“I don’t know!” Tetsuya actually raised his voice, fingers a little white with the force of his grip on the rail. “I just know it’s wrong. Something’s missing.”

Seijuurou sighed. Tetsuya was the one he had the highest hopes of, in some ways, the one whose perception might let him control a game as surely Seijuurou himself did. His tactical awareness was already superb. His strategic sense, on the other hand, still had a ways to go. “Are you going to quit basketball itself?”

“I…” Tetsuya stopped there, unable, even now, to say that he wanted to leave the game, and Seijuurou let his smile show.

“Then I’ll have the same promise from you that I’ll take from the others, when we retire. Choose a high school none of the rest of the team is going to and give me your word you’ll play with all your strength for your new team.”

At last Tetsuya turned to look at him, blinking. “…you want to split up the team?”

“How else will they keep playing?”

Tetsuya was quiet for a long moment, and finally turned back to the rail and the bare trees below. “I still don’t think this was the right way to do it.”

Seijuurou felt a moment’s exasperation. Tetsuya still had yet to understand that the only way to prove a strategy or approach right was to win. Seijuurou’s methods of developing his players had won steadily, and this new strategy shape would continue to win the ultimate game, the one in which all of his players achieved ‘promotion’. This way won; therefore it, and he, were right. Sometimes Seijuurou got tired of having to point that out. Well, perhaps by the end of the game Tetsuya would see it himself. “Will you come?”

“To a school without any of you,” Tetsuya said slowly. “To… the tournaments. With a different team.”

“All of us in different teams,” Seijuurou agreed patiently. “To play against each other, now.”

Slowly, Tetsuya’s back straightened, and his gaze was level when he nodded. “Yes. I’ll do it.”

“Good. I’ll see you there, then.” Seijuurou turned briskly toward the door and the stairs down from the winter chill of the roof. He glanced back, once, before he went in. Tetsuya was standing straight and steady at the rail, one hand closed into a fist. Seijuurou smiled.

He still expected to be the one who would face Daiki, and give him back the life of his game. Ryouta had the potential to match Daiki, but he still let his emotions get in the way of his playing. Tetsuya would have to find suitable pieces of his own to work with before he had a chance, and that wouldn’t be easy. But Seijuurou wouldn’t discount them. They might do it after all.

They were, after all, his players.

End

New Style

Ink Burns has a new default style (old style is still available on the Change Theme page) to go with all the other little updates. This one is a bit more elaborate than the last, and will look its best in modern browsers, but should devolve gracefully in older ones. Navigation is variable, in this one, and story pages have navigation at the top instead of the side, to give all the focus to the story itself. If anyone runs into any problems with it, as always, please met me know!

Stones In the Road

Ogata Seiji had once been informed that it was entirely normal for people to have sexual fantasies that had nothing to do with the person or things they actually desired. Admittedly, the person who told him this had been trying to explain away why she’d called someone else’s name in bed with him, but he thought it was true enough. He did not, after all, have the slightest desire to actually take most of his go opponents to bed, and yet the one thing that would reliably get him off was remembering a heated game. The click of stones onto the board, so faint and so intense when a decisive move was made; the line of smooth white or black, curling around space itself, so subtly that the opponent should not even notice until it was too late; the sudden stillness of an opponent’s fingers on their stones when they did see; those were the things he thought of that made him purr into a lover’s ear so promisingly that most of them seemed surprised to be tossed out the next morning as soon as he needed to study.

Those were the things he thought of when he was alone, too, spreading his legs and leaning back against the cool softness of hotel sheets, fingers wrapped around his cock. He closed his eyes, stroking slow and firm, and remembered today’s game. The cut he’d waited eight turns to make, lulling the opponent into thinking he’d missed the possibility. The attack he’d made during the endgame, right when his opponent had thought he had the upper corner all wrapped up, oh yes. Seiji tipped his head back against the give of the pillows, panting as heat curled slow and heavy in his stomach, fingers working harder. The fury in the click of the next stone, mmmm yes. The narrowing of his opponent’s eyes…

An image of Kuwabara’s evil old eyes, narrowed amid their wrinkles and bags flashed into his mind. Seiji choked, eyes flying open, and snatched his hand off his cock. He felt like he’d run into a brick wall and been doused with freezing water into the bargain.

Seiji rolled over as his erection wilted, and groaned into the pillows. Damn it, damn it, damn it. That picture was a more effective libido-killer than anything, up to and including being laughed at. He sighed, muffled; really, he should probably know better than to use his games with Kuwabara for this. It was too easy to slip, and there went his evening’s pleasure.

But they were the best games.

He couldn’t help laughing at himself a little, because he could see the humor in his dilemma, and rolled back over to stare up at the ceiling, smiling faintly. All right, so today’s game was off limits. Shame, that, it had been a good one. Perhaps all wasn’t entirely lost for the evening, though. Opponents came and went, but go itself never abandoned him. If he just thought of the board, still and golden with all the possible moves hidden in its simple lines. Of the stones, cool to his touch and silky smooth, weighing so little to carry all the force they did.

Mmm, yes, that was better.

Seiji fixed his mind on the flow of smooth stones through his fingers and stroked his cock slow and hard, smiling with closed eyes.

End

Ebooks

Ebooks are here!

All arcs and individual stories now have epub and mobi versions available. Look above the title and under the breadcrumbs, for the buttons to download the epub or mobi. All arcs have individual covers, for easy recognition on your bookshelf, while single stories have the story title on an archive-generic cover.

If you find any files that are unreadable or corrupted, please let me know so I can fix it.

Taste of Steel

“Why won’t you allow Tetsu-kun to have a katana? Why won’t you let him decide for himself?”

“Are you brainless? He’s just a brat of fifteen.”

“Nine years. I was nine years old. So that’s how it is. You don’t want him to end up like me, do you.”


Souji didn’t leave when they reached Hijikata’s rooms, only opened the outer screen and stood there in the night breeze. Hijikata sat and emptied his pipe and repacked it, mouth tight; what, after all, could he say at this late date?

“Do you hate what I am so much?”

The question was soft, the tone wistful, but it still struck him like a cut from behind. “No!” he snapped, and then took a breath. “Don’t be a fool, Souji. I know whose the responsibility is,” he said more evenly. “It was my hand that brought this to you.”

Souji spun away from the open screens, as lightly as if he were fighting, and took two steps across the room to sink to his knees in front of Hijikata. In the dimness, two pale hands closed around one of his, clenched on the stem of his pipe.

“Yes. It was.” The whisper of Souji’s hair sliding over his shoulders as he bent his head was scarcely louder than his voice. “They’ve called you the demon more than once. Am I not the demon’s child?”

Hijikata closed his eyes for a breath and then let it out. “Yes,” he said, low, sliding his other hand over Souji’s shoulder and up under his hair. “You are.” The other things he had done for the sake and in the name of the shogunate, he had made his peace with; they might stain and damn him forever, but that was the choice he’d made when he placed himself in Matsudaira’s service. This, though. This was a choice he’d made for another, before Souji’s spirit was grown to understanding. The sword, his sword, had consumed Souji’s soul until he was an unthinking weapon in Hijikata’s hands. And content to be so. It didn’t help to have Tetsu always before Hijikata’s eyes, these days, reminding him of how a real child thought and felt. Or to see Souji reaching out for companionship, seeing no reason why Tetsunosuke should not become what he was.

Souji was looking up at him now, and even moonlight showed the falseness of his smile. “Do you wish for me to leave this way of life?”

The false smile flicked away in a gasp, and Hijikata realized his grip had tightened fiercely on Souji’s nape. His voice was lower than usual when he said again, “Don’t be a fool.”

This time, Souji’s smile was sweet and brilliant. “Yes, Hijikata-san.”

Hijikata snorted with rueful amusement, at both of them really. He set his pipe aside and pulled Souji closer, one hand finding his waist to tug loose his obi. He accepted the heat that ran through him at the way Souji sighed, the way slim, strong arms wound around his shoulders and Souji’s mouth opened under his. If Souji was too much like him he knew exactly why it was, and perhaps it had been fate after all. The troop might whisper of his unbendable will, but he didn’t think there had ever been a time when he could have refused this—Souji’s pliancy, lying against his chest, or the pureness of Souji’s response to Hijikata’s hand on the sleek skin of his hip and back.

“Hijikata-san,” Souji whispered, and there was a plea in it that he couldn’t fail to answer. He kissed Souji deeper, intent, until he was flushed, skin heated under Hijikata’s fingers.

“Demon child,” he murmured back, and closed his eyes as Souji pressed closer with a breathless sound. Souji was his. His sword; his mirror. Without conscience.

But hadn’t Hijikata found his conscience again, in another’s spirit and voice? He could only pray that the same would come to Souji in time.

Because he would never give this up.

He tumbled Souji down to the tatami where he lay laughing softly, kimono spread out around him in disarray. “Hijikata-san,” Souji said, voice dancing over the syllables of his name, light and confident again as he stretched out his arms. He made a satisfied sound as Hijikata came to them, covering Souji and pulling him tight against the length of Hijikata’s body.

Hijikata had never once been able to question that this was Souji’s desire as well as his own. It was the one hint of cleanliness in this polluted life they led, and he cherished it, cradled Souji’s eagerness against him and tasted it, kiss after slow, hard kiss, until Souji was rubbing against him, gasping with every wanton flex of his body, hands pushing Hijikata’s kimono open as they spread against his chest. “Hijikata-san…!”

Hijikata smiled and tipped Souji’s chin up with his thumb, kissing down his neck, open mouthed. Subtle tension threaded Souji’s body at that; even in bed, even with him, Souji was a warrior. And that made his yielding sweeter. Hijikata bit down on Souji’s throat, firm enough to mark, and heat tightened his stomach at the sharpness of Souji’s gasp, the way his body pulled taut and trembled, needing to respond, to defend, even as Souji held himself back from it, left himself open only for Hijikata.

He could never refuse this.

“You’re mine,” he whispered to Souji as he turned him over, and Souji pressed his forehead against his folded arms, panting as he lifted his ass.

“Yes, Hijikata-san.”

The salve Hijikata fished out of his wall cubby was cool as he spread it over his cock, and Souji twitched as Hijikata drew slick fingers between his cheeks. The little sound of want he made nearly snapped Hijikata’s control, and he wrapped his hands around Souji’s hips and murmured, “Now.”

Souji moaned openly as Hijikata pushed into him, hands flexing against the tatami, catching in the muddle of their clothing. He was trembling again, and Hijikata held him firmly, pressed deeper into the tight heat of him slowly, until Souji gasped and the tension flowed out of his body.

“Please.” Souji’s voice was low, husky, sensual as even a good fight didn’t make it, and a growl caught in Hijikata’s throat. He answered with his body instead, driving deep, hard thrusts into Souji’s ass again and again, faster and harder as Souji moaned under him. Hot pleasure gripped him tighter and tighter, and when Souji shifted, one hand reaching between his legs, the heat blinded him. He buried himself hard in Souji, gasping as pleasure shook him, holding Souji tight against him even as Souji gasped and bucked in turn.

The stillness of the evening slowly descended on them both again.

Finally Hijikata drew back, pressing a kiss to Souji’s neck. “Stay tonight,” he said quietly.

Souji turned on his side, pushing his hair back to smile up as Hijikata, languid and sated. “Always.”

Hijikata paused, looking down at his lover, his sword, and finally nodded. Souji’s smile turned contented, and when Hijikata had spread the futon, he snuggled close, as unabashed as ever.

Hijikata held him and watched faint night shadows move over the ceiling. He would not disavow anything he had done. He would not deny his love for what Souji was. However it troubled his conscience, his spirit rejoiced in Souji’s reflection. He loved the demon child with all the fierceness and pain of his heart.

There would not be another.

End

Euphemistic Touch

Souji lay on his stomach, spread out against the futon, kimono pulled down off his shoulders and pushed up over his hips. He could feel another body’s heat where Hijikata-san leaned over him, and his breath caught in little gasps as strong fingers worked in and out of his ass.

He’d completely lost track of how long Hijikata-san had been doing this. Long enough to make Souji warm and open around his fingers. Long enough to find just the place to stroke to make Souji moan. Long enough to drive him to helpless heat because two fingers, slow and easy, wasn’t enough. And Hijikata-san wasn’t giving him any more.

Those fingers curled inside him and Souji made a sharp, wanting sound. “Hijikata-san…”

Hijikata-san’s voice was even deeper than usual against Souji’s ear, and Souji could hear the smile in it. “I did tell you that I’d punish you for stealing my haiku book.” He drew his fingers out slowly and plunged them in again.

“I beg your forgiveness,” Souji gasped with utter sincerity. “I was very wrong to offer such impertinence to my master.”

Hijikata-san snorted. “It’s been two years already, Souji. I’m not your master any longer.”

Souji looked over his shoulder, meeting Hijikata-san’s eyes for a moment, and felt another twist of heat at the dark intent look focused on him. “You are always my master.”

Hijikata-san smiled sardonically. “Except when you feel like mischief, apparently.” He drew his fingers all the way out and a whimper caught in Souji’s throat. Maybe, finally…

But it was still two fingers that drove into him again, cool and slick with another scoop of salve. Souji pressed his forehead against the futon and pushed up into the touch, taking Hijikata-san’s fingers deeper. He was achingly hard and even just rubbing against the futon might bring him off. Hijikata-san chuckled against the nape of his neck, though, and held him down effortlessly with a hand at the small of his back.

“Hijikata-san!” Souji couldn’t help struggling for a moment, even though he knew perfectly well he was no match for Hijikata-san in raw strength. And it wasn’t as though sword skill was going to help him here, he admitted ruefully; this would have been far easier if Hijikata-san had chosen to exact his punishment on the training floor. Finally, though, he made himself lie still again, panting, and moaned as long fingers drove into his ass deep and hard in reward.

It still wasn’t enough.

He was past expecting mercy, or an answer to his low gasps and pleading moans, when Hijikata-san finally moved, kneeling swiftly behind him and pulling Souji’s hips up into the cradle of his. Souji cried out with the welcome hardness of Hijikata-san’s cock pushing into him, stretching the hot muscles of his ass wide around his thickness. “Yes!”

Hijikata-san’s arms pulled Souji back tight against his broad chest as he leaned over Souji, curling them both up over his knees. “Be still,” he ordered, low and velvety, and heat scalded through Souji again.

“Yes, Hijikata-san,” he whispered.

Hijikata-san fucked him slowly, and Souji lay obediently quiet and savored the feeling of being stretched and filled with the hardness of Hijikata-san’s cock, over and over until he was shuddering. Until he didn’t know how much more he could take. “Please,” he gasped, at last, unable to be quiet any longer. “Hijikata-san, please…”

When one large hand closed between his legs, relief made him dizzy, and after all this it only took a few rough strokes of his cock before he was shaking in Hijikata-san’s arms as pleasure wrung him out ruthlessly, again and again and again until the edges of his vision wavered and turned dark.

He didn’t catch his breath until Hijikata-san was finishing, and they were still for a little while, curled up together. “So?” Hijikata-san finally asked, breath stirring the fall of Souji’s hair.

“I’ll definitely remember the lesson,” Souji murmured.

“Good.”

Souji gasped as Hijikata-san drew out slowly. He’d remember it for more than one reason, he thought wryly. He stretched out slowly and let Hijikata-san pull him close again, cheeks heating just a bit as a strong hand kneaded his sore ass.

“And the next time you forget,” Hijikata added trenchantly, “perhaps I really will spank you and see if that lasts longer.”

Souji laughed against his shoulder. “Mm. I like it when you make me behave, Hijikata-san.”

Hijikata-san just snorted at that, but Souji could see his smile in the dimness, and snuggled closer, content with the all-around success of his day’s activity.

End

A/N: The manga version of the haiku-book theft features Hijikata threatening punishment if Souji doesn’t return it at once. The punishment turns out, after a dramatic pause for Tetsu to fear it will be seppuku, to be one hundred spankings and no dinner. Souji doesn’t seem to take the threat very seriously.

Seven, Eight, Lay Them Straight

It had, Shinji thought, been a pretty good day, so far. The chill of winter was still hanging on, but it was sunny and crisp out. Everyone was pretty much recovered from the battle with Aizen. There was a new volume of manga out for Love and Lisa to argue over, and Rose had been talking about making something ‘experimental’ for dinner which was always good for a laugh or two.

It could have kept on being a good day if they hadn’t gotten a visitor.

Shinji sat very still on one of their salvaged couches, eyes fixed on the dapper First Division vice-captain standing calm and collected in front of him. “He wants us to what?”

Sasakibe didn’t even have the grace to look ashamed of his message. “Yamamoto-soutaichou asks that the captains of the Third, Fifth, and Ninth divisions return to take up their positions again,” he repeated, hands clasped easily behind him. “May I bring him your reply, Hirako-taichou?”

Shinji lifted a brow and looked around at his fellow Visored, perched here and there on the ledges and second-hand furniture of their home in the mortal world, all stopped dead in the middle of reading or cooking or mending to stare down at Sasakibe. They looked about like he felt. “Well, ladies and gentlemen?” he purred. “Do we have an answer for the illustrious Captain-General?”

Predictably, it was Hiyori who first snorted. “Fuck it,” she spat, arms crossed.

“About like that, yeah,” Lisa agreed, turning back to her manga. “Notice he didn’t ask for any of the rest of us; just three to replace the captains his own damn blindness lost. Selfish bastard.”

“And I can’t say I enjoyed the Court’s last reaction when they thought I didn’t fit into a proper division any longer,” Love added, leaning against a pillar, “I don’t really want to see what he’d try to do with a spare captain this time.”

Rose’s eyes were hard, flamboyance left aside for once. “We served Soul Society loyally and were wounded in that service, and your precious Council would have killed us out of hand like mad dogs. Why should we go back to that?”

“They were told who was at fault and all they did was make the bastards captains,” Kensei growled, muscles flexing ominously as he clenched his fists. “Now they want us to clean up their mess?”

Mashiro took another bite of the dumplings she was demolishing and turned a hand palm-up at her captain, shrugging her agreement.

Shinji smiled. “So there you have it,” he told Sasakibe cheerfully. “Our answer is that Yamamoto should fold his offer into corners and shove it. Anything else?”

Sasakibe sighed quietly. “I will take your reply back. May I say, personally, that I would welcome your presence in the Court of Pure Souls, setting things to rights once more. I don’t believe I’m alone in that.” He bowed to them, deep and courteous, before picking his way back to their door.

“Huh.” Lisa squinted after him. “That was kind of half-hearted. I expected him to argue more.”

Shinji frowned to himself, thinking about the way Sasakibe had phrased that last bit. He wasn’t so sure the argument was over.


When their next visitor from Soul Society was Kuchiki Rukia, Shinji figured he’d been right.

“If he thinks he can twist us around to this by sending one of Ichigo’s friends,” he started, low and hard, as Hachi quietly sealed the barrier again behind her. Rukia instantly looked guilty and Shinji nearly growled.

“It isn’t like that,” she insisted, eyes wide and earnest, and Shinji slashed a hand through the air, cutting her off.

“You can tell Yamamoto, we said no and we mean no. He made his damn bed, and now he can sleep in it! Not once in a freaking century did anyone even…” he trailed off because Rukia had stopped looking guilty and was looking puzzled.

“Yamamoto-soutaichou doesn’t even know I’m here.” As soon as the words were out of her mouth, her eyes widened and she waved her hands, black sleeves flapping. “I mean…! He approved the project, of course, and Ukitake-taichou knows where I am, so it’s not like…”

Shinji ran the last few minutes through the ‘Juushirou-san or possibly Rukia is putting something over on Yamamoto’ filter instead of the ‘Yamamoto is putting one over on us’ version. “It’s not like you’re sneaking around behind Yamamoto’s back to do something for Ichigo?” he hazarded and laughed when Rukia’s cheeks turned pink. “Well that’s different. All right, what are you here for?” He strolled back to his couch and sprawled out comfortably.

Rukia gathered herself and bowed to him formally. “Hirako-taichou, I’m here to beg a favor on behalf of Kurosaki Ichigo, who you have named your ally.” She pulled a wrapped bundle off her shoulder and knelt down on the concrete to unwrap it at his feet.

It was a sword. A nameless sword, and yet… Shinji frowned and held his fingers close to it, testing that sense of power. He’d never seen a nameless sword that radiated reiatsu like this one. He’d also never felt such a gathering of reiatsu that wasn’t marked with the sense of a single soul. “What’s this?”

Rukia sat back on her knees, hands folded. “Yamamoto-soutaichou ruled that, because Ichigo had lost his shinigami powers in defense of Soul Society, it would be proper to restore them if we could. Many have contributed their reiatsu already.”

Contributed their reiatsu to a sword. Shinji thought about that for a long moment and finally called, without looking up, “Hachi, is this what I think it is?”

Hachigen came and leaned over Rukia’s shoulder, eyeing the sword with interest. “Indeed. As a named zanpakutou can be the channel for a single shinigami’s spirit power, this one could theoretically channel the power of all the contributors into the recipient.”

Shinji caught a glint in Rukia’s eyes before she lowered them demurely, and grinned. “You like the irony?” he asked softly.

That spitfire glint flashed again, along with Rukia’s teeth, before she composed her expression. “It was judged the most stable solution, and the one likeliest to succeed,” she observed coolly.

Shinji laughed out loud. “You convinced them to let you do it, didn’t you?” The very ‘crime’ she’d nearly been destroyed for, and here she was sanctioned to perform it right out in in front of gods and men.

“It was judged Ichigo’s spirit, having accepted my reiatsu once, would most readily accept this infusion from me as well.” Rukia was really bad at looking innocent. Shinji approved.

“Give it here.” He held out a hand, gathering his own strength. In one swoop he could help Ichigo, who had gotten almost as raw a deal as the Visored had, and put a thumb in Yamamoto’s eye. Show the old man he couldn’t control everything and everyone.

Because he might have been wrong about why Rukia was here, but he didn’t think he’d been wrong about what the old bastard was scheming.


When their third visitor arrived, Shinji knew he’d been right, because their third visitor was Hisagi Shuuhei, vice-captain and acting leader of the Ninth Division. The man who had Kensei’s numbers tattooed on his cheek. It didn’t take a genius to spot who must have inspired the kid to become a shinigami, and a dispassionate corner of Shinji’s mind wondered just how badly it had rubbed Tousen the wrong way, that his own vice-captain had a previous loyalty to the captain Tousen had betrayed. Or, hell, maybe he’d been sick-minded enough, by then, he’d thought it was funny.

Kensei was the only one Hisagi had eyes for once Hachi let him in, at any rate. He went straight to Kensei, like he didn’t even notice the rest of them, and after a moment’s hesitation he bowed all the way to the ground. Shinji’s lip curled, because that was exactly the kind of gesture he’d expect from someone on a mission of manipulation, treating Kensei like he was already the kid’s captain. But if that was the case, Shinji didn’t know why the hell the kid was so stiff and awkward about it.

“Muguruma-taichou.” Hisagi’s voice was just as stiff. “The Captain-General sent me to ask that you take up leadership of your division again.”

Shinji propped one foot up on his windowsill perch, considering that phrasing while the other Visored started to slip closer through the concrete and shadows of the building.

Kensei folded his arms with a snort. “So he can betray us twice? I don’t think so.”

Hisagi bent his head. “Your reservations are only sensible,” he agreed quietly.

Shinji pursed his lips. Interesting. If he had to guess, he’d say Hisagi hadn’t wanted to come here, and might just be resenting the way Yamamoto was using him to pressure Kensei, despite wanting Kensei back himself. “So if it’s only logical we refuse, why are you here forking over this steaming crap?” he prodded.

Sure enough, Hisagi’s shoulders tightened, all the more obvious in that sleeveless kosode of his. “The Captain-General sent me,” he repeated flatly.

“The Captain-General can kiss my ass,” Kensei said, rough. “Go back and take the damn division yourself, already.”

Hisagi’s head dipped a little lower. “I’m not qualified as a Captain. It… it will have to be someone else. I’m sorry, Muguruma-taichou.”

Shinji exchanged a long look with Love, brows raised. Love nodded faintly back to him, leaning against the pillar across their ‘entry hall’. This kid had it bad for Kensei, just like Kensei’s whole seated complement always had, except for Mashiro herself and that poisonous bastard Tousen.

And maybe that was exactly why he didn’t want to be here pressuring him. Shinji chewed on a nail and frowned. This could be bad; Kensei had a soft spot for earnestness and honesty.

Kensei blew out a breath, running a hand through his hair as he looked down at Hisagi. “Not like it’s your fault.”

“Thank you for saying so.” Hisagi didn’t look up, and Shinji thought he was leaning harder on the hand he had braced on the ground, now; anyone with less of a poker up his spine would have been slumped. “I won’t trouble you further, sir.”

Kensei shifted his shoulders, tapped his fingers on his belt, and finally asked abruptly. “How are they? The Ninth.”

Shinji swore silently at Yamamoto for having the brains to send a messenger who so transparently wanted not to manipulate them that his very earnestness manipulated them. Or at least Kensei.

“Unsettled,” Hisagi admitted, low. “Not as badly as the Fifth, but… no one likes being without a captain’s strength to guide us. Even if Renji or Ikkaku can be pried away from their captains… I worry that it won’t be enough. Renji is still very new to his bankai, and Ikkaku has been holding himself back; neither of them has the confidence that would make me willing to follow them.” Not the way he’d followed the bare memory of Kensei. The thought hung unspoken in the air.

Kensei’s eyes were dark as he glanced over at Shinji, and Shinji’s mouth tightened. “You know the risks,” he said levelly.

“No one knows them better, except maybe you.” Kensei turned away and banged his fist against a cracked support beam. “My people weren’t the ones who fucked us up, though!”

Hisagi’s head came up and he stared at Kensei’s back with wide eyes, suddenly hopeful, suddenly hungry before he got himself back under control and looked down again. Shinji watched the performance and sighed. He knew Kensei would never deny that kind of loyalty and need; it was exactly how he made them so loyal to him in the first place. “Your choice.”

Mashiro rolled onto her stomach on the couch she was sprawled across and dangled her arms over the edge. “Are we going back?”

“I’ll think about it.”

Shinji rolled his eyes. Deny it as he would, Kensei still thought of himself as a captain, and of Mashiro as his vice-captain, someone he had the right and responsibility to direct without a second thought. “You’re too good for that place,” he muttered.

Kensei smiled at that, tight and thin. “Tell me something I don’t know.” He turned back to stand over Hisagi, who looked up at him with fragile calm. “Tell the old man I’ll think about it.”

“Yes, Taichou,” Hisagi answered, husky, and bowed his head almost to his knee. “Thank you.”

Shinji flopped back onto his elbows with a sigh as Hisagi got up to go. He wondered glumly who Yamamoto would find to pry at their resolve next.


“We have another visitor,” Hachi announced from the ramp down to the red stone floor of their cavern and Shinji puffed a soap bubble from the basin of dishes he was washing away from his face.

“Who is it this time?” he called, dunking the next plate in the rinse water and drying it on his red striped apron. Hachi sounded a little weirdly formal, but he got like that sometimes. “Did the old goat send Retsu-san to scold us or something?”

“Nothing that grand, I’m afraid.”

Shinji jerked around, suds dripping off his hands, to stare. No, his ears didn’t deceive him, that was Kyouraku Shunsui stepping down the ramp all right. From the corner of his eye he saw Lisa’s latest manga hit the ground, pages fluttering as the lurid pink cover flapped closed. He tossed the last plate back into the water, snapping the suds off his hands like blood off his blade. “Kyouraku,” he said, low and warning. Lisa had never been one of his division back in Soul Society, but she was one of his people now and he wouldn’t have her hurt by Yamamoto’s damn politicking.

The man held up his hands, looking apologetic. “I would have told Yama-jii to walk off a cliff, really I would have, but I did want to make sure Lisa-chan was okay.” He looked over Shinji’s shoulder, eyes deceptively soft. “And it is true you’d be welcome, if you ever decided to return.”

“You have a vice-captain,” Lisa pointed out, stifled. When Shinji glanced over his shoulder, she was standing still and straight-shouldered, but her hands were fists half hidden in her skirt.

“Nanao-chan would step aside for you,” Shunsui told her gently. “You have to know that. She idolized you.” His mouth tilted wryly. “Still does.”

“Why should you care?” Lisa lashed out, fists tightening until they trembled. Shinji fell back a few steps to be in support range. Or range to restrain her if she broke and attacked Shunsui, because it would only piss her off more when she couldn’t even hit him. “You never did anything! You never even looked for us!”

Shunsui sighed and tucked his hands in the sleeves of his extravagantly flowered kimono. “Lisa-chan, we didn’t know. None of us knew what had happened until Yoruichi had already gotten all of you to the mortal world.” His eyes never left Lisa. “If we had known, we would have acted. I swear that to you.”

“He and Ukitake-taichou are the ones who destroyed the Kikou-ou, rather than see Rukia-san destroyed unjustly,” Hachi put in quietly from where he sat on the end of the ramp.

Lisa crossed her arms tightly over her stomach, hands gripping her elbows. Shinji ran a damp hand through his hair with a disgusted huff. Lisa was strong and capable, and as pissed off as any of them about the way they’d been sentenced sight-unseen by the damn Council, the way Yamamoto hadn’t done a single thing to save them. But he also knew she’d spent the past century missing her captain. “Go on, if you can trust him,” he told her quietly.

Lisa worried her lip between her teeth, glaring daggers at Shunsui, but Shinji could see the helpless hurt behind the anger. Obviously Shunsui could too, because he took one step that flashed across the cavern and folded Lisa in his arms. “I’m sorry, Lisa-chan,” he murmured against her hair. “I’m sorry I couldn’t find you sooner.”

Lisa didn’t make a sound, but her hands lifted to close tight on his sleeves.

Love came to prop himself against the washing stand and said quietly to Shinji, “Two to zero?”

“Three, counting Mashiro, as soon as Kensei makes up his mind to go.” Shinji fished out the last plate and scrubbed it viciously. “Shunsui-san will look after Lisa, at least, but what the hell do we do to keep Kensei and Mashiro safe?”

Love considered for a long moment and finally suggested, “Kill Kurotsuchi before he gets too curious for our own good?”

An unwilling smile tugged at Shinji’s mouth. “That’d be a start, yeah.”

He was beginning to have a bad feeling about where this would end, though.


When Hinamori showed up, he went right through ‘bad feeling’ and landed on ‘blazing fury’ instead.

“I am going back to Soul Society after all,” he said, very quietly, “so that I can kill that old bastard with my own two hands.” The edge of concrete under his hand was slowly crumbling and the air was ringing around him. He was aware of the uneasy looks the others were exchanging, the way Hachi’s hands were slowly folding into the form for a restraining kidou, and couldn’t bring himself to care right at the moment. How dare Yamamoto use the girl Aizen broke? How dare he send her here, as if to tell Shinji to take responsibility for the messes his alleged subordinate left behind?

It was Hiyori who stuffed her hands in her pockets and snorted as if she hadn’t noticed the weight of his rage. “Yeah, well, he deserves it. I mean, what kind of moron tries to play the sympathy card on you?”

After a long, taut moment, Shinji let out a breath of harsh laughter and hauled his reiatsu in before he destroyed any more of their home. “No one, you’d think.”

“I asked to come.”

Shinji eyed Hinamori, really seeing her for the first time. The thought wandered through his head that she couldn’t be as delicate as she looked if she was still on her feet after the way he’d just cut loose. “You asked?”

She bobbed her head earnestly, hands clasped in front of her. “After I spoke with Hisagi-san.”

Shinji’s brows rose. “And exactly what did Hisagi say, that made you think coming here was a good idea?” he drawled.

“He ah… well…” Her steady gaze wavered and slid away from his. “You see, Rangiku-san was, er, counseling Kira-kun again, and Hisagi-san said that if he was going to have to take anyone to Fourth afterwards he wanted to at least get some of the sake for himself, and he ah… might have been just a little drunk.”

Shinji crossed his arms and leaned back against a fallen block, still showing the sword-cuts from where Ichigo, or maybe Hiyori, had carved it up during their first fight. Kensei had a hand over his eyes, and Love and Rose were both trying to stifle snickers. “Go on.”

Hinamori cleared her throat, cheeks faintly pink. “Well, he mentioned that, if Muguruma-taichou did decide to return, it would be for the sake of his division. After the story Renji-kun and Rukia-san brought back, about what had happened to you… it seemed to me that was likely the only reason any of you might be willing to come back. And that the best person to make the Fifth’s need clear would be me.” She spread her hands, looking up at him steadily once again.

“Ah, I see,” Shinji said lightly, temper simmering again. “So it was your own personal idea to guilt-trip me, not Yamamoto’s.”

“No, sir!” Hinamori started forward a step, chin up, color high. “I would never…!” She stopped, hands clenching tight on each other. When she spoke, her voice was husky, broken around the edges. “I would never try to… to manipulate someone’s heart like that. Never.”

The shadows slinking behind her eyes and turning them dark were painfully familiar, and Shinji’s temper collapsed in a heap. This girl obviously hadn’t even had his own native suspicion and nasty-mindedness to help her understand what Aizen was. “No,” he said a bit more gently, “I can see you wouldn’t.” He propped a foot against his broken perch with a sigh, slumping a little. “It’s true enough; if I came back for anyone it would be for the Fifth. What happened wasn’t their fault. But the Council and Yamamoto are still there, and… Hinamori?” She was staring at him wide-eyed, hands clasped tight against her mouth.

“He got it from you,” she whispered. “That’s how he made everyone believe it, he was pretending to be you…”

“Hinamori!” Shinji straightened up, reaching out as she started to slide down to the ground, wondering what the hell was wrong with her and why Retsu-san had let her out of Fourth’s clutches in this shape. Mashiro was already there, though, easing Hinamori to the floor in a rustle of hakama. Shinji frowned down at them, unsettled. “Hinamori, what are you talking about?”

She gulped and scrubbed her hands over her face. “I wondered how Aizen-taichou could act like he cared, when he obviously didn’t,” she said, nearly whispering. “I couldn’t understand it. It seemed so real! If he could do all those things, to Rukia-san and the people of Rukongai and you and… and me… If he could do that, how could he even understand kindness well enough to fake it?!” She heaved another breath in and out and looked up at Shinji. “But just now… when you spoke more softly, you sounded just like him. I mean, he sounded like you. He’s been acting like you, all this time, that’s how he did it, that’s how he made everyone believe it!” She was shaking in the casual circle of Mashiro’s arm, but her voice had risen, hard and steady, and her eyes were blazing.

Shinji had to take a few breaths himself, swallowing down his gorge at the thought of Aizen using him, or at least his memory, that way. “You still sure you want me to come back?” he finally managed, almost as lightly as usual.

“Yes!” Hinamori leaned forward on her knees, tense and broken and looking more alive than she had since she’s stepped in the door. “The Fifth was under Aizen for too long, believing lies for too long. Help us re-learn what’s real, what that looks like.” She finished softly, “Please, Hirako-taichou.”

Shinji looked down at her, absently damning his own sense of responsibility. Hinamori had a good instinct for the target, that was for sure. The opportunity to reclaim his division from the traitor who’d stolen them beckoned temptingly, and the determined beginnings of trust in the wide brown eyes locked with his promised silently that things would be different this time. Shinji sighed, reminding himself to do something extremely unpleasant to Yamamoto for letting Hinamori come and close this net around him.

He stalked over and held a hand down to Hinamori. “All right, come on, then. Up!” He hauled her to her feet. “Hiyori!” he called without looking around.

“Yeah?” The single word was toneless and Shinji grinned just a little, guessing what she was thinking.

“Didn’t figure you’d want to go back to the Twelfth, so decide which of us you want to stick with. If it’s me, you and Hinamori need to hash things out between you. Can’t have more than one vice-captain, after all.”

Hinamori blinked up at him for a second before a smile broke over her face like sunrise. “Yes, Taichou!”

“What’s to hash?” Hiyori fired up instantly, which had been more or less the idea. “I have seniority!”

Hinamori peered around Shinji with a flash of calculation in her eyes before she folded her hands and smiled, sweet and steely. “If you’d like to decide it that way, I’m sure that will be fine. How long was your tenure as vice-captain, Hiyori-san? And how recent is your administrative experience?”

“My what?!”

Shinji faded back to lean against a pillar beside Rose while they watched the show. “So, should we wait for them to send your vice-captain after you, too?” he asked. “Just to have the full set.”

“Since it seems I’ll need to rescue mine from alcohol poisoning, I think we’d better not.” Rose tossed back his hair, looking around at the rest of them. “I suppose this is the best way to take care of everyone in the family.”

Shinji’s mouth curled up. “Yeah, I think you’re right.” And he didn’t think Yamamoto had really considered that part of it—that he was taking into Soul Society a group who would never be turned against each other, no matter who ordered it. Not after what they’d been through. Well, too bad for him if the old bastard hadn’t. Yamamoto had asked for this; he’d get it.

The Army of Masks was coming to Soul Society.


Shinji shook his white haori’s sleeve straight with an annoyed twitch of his arm. He hadn’t counted on the uniforms they’d worn for centuries feeling so awkward, though it made sense enough once he thought it through. None of them had had any trouble putting the uniform off, even outside of their gigai—not after the way Soul Society had condemned them to death without a second thought. In face of that betrayal, they’d all taken on the clothing of the mortal world with bitter speed and finality.

But the people who’d condemned them were dead of what Shinji could only think of as the world’s biggest karmic boomerang, and the people who really mattered wanted them to come home. So here they were, gigai packed away, new manga stockpiled, pantry handed over to Tessai, standing in their cavern and looking at each other. Back in uniform. Wondering who was going to be the one to test their welcome and try to open the senkaimon.

“So?” Hiyori crossed her arms, glowering at nothing. “What are we waiting for?” Shinji’s mouth twitched up at the corner.

“For someone to get impatient,” he told her and drew his sword. His tilted smile turned true for a breath at the way everyone else breathed out with relief. When he slid his blade through the edges of the world, he felt it catch at once. The turn to unlock the gates was as smooth as ever, a familiar sense of vastness shifting around that tiny motion, and then the gates were in front of them, silently sliding open one after the other.

When eight butterflies flittered through the light of the gates to hover in front of them it was Shinji’s turn to sigh as relief ran through him in a warm rush. Their reiatsu imprints had been reinstated, and they were recognized. Official. Accepted.

He was still going to flip Yamamoto off the first chance he got. But he couldn’t deny the comfort of having one of those delicate, black messengers hovering at his shoulder, a silent and unmistakable sign of belonging.

“Let’s go, ladies and gentlemen,” he said quietly.

The walk through the passage was silent, so silent the rustle of haori and occasional clink of swords seemed loud. Shinji halted when they came to the bright horizon of the second gate. “Everyone ready?”

“Ready as we’re going to get,” Kensei muttered.

“Let’s go see what our welcome is,” Love agreed, one hand resting on his sword’s hilt.

“They’d better be damn grateful to see us after a hundred years of this shit,” Hiyori growled and hitched her sword up on her hunched shoulders and stomped through the gate. Shinji smiled at her back, far more gently than he’d ever let her see since they shouldn’t really pause in the middle of the passage between worlds to have a brawl.

“Like she said.”

They stepped out of the gate and into the pillared staging plaza of Soul Society.

There were more people waiting than he’d expected.

He’d been sure their vice-captains would be there, because Yamamoto wasn’t the kind to change what was working, and Shunsui-san would be there to pick up Lisa of course. But Juushirou-san and Retsu-san were both standing back among the circle of pillars also, and he spotted the white haired mini-captain lurking back there too. He almost didn’t recognize Kuchiki Byakuya, standing still and poker-faced under another column, and wondered yet again just what had happened to turn Kuchiki House’s mouthy little firebrand into this.

Shunsui-san tipped his hat up, smiling quietly at them. “Welcome back, all of you.”

“We’ll say whether it’s nice to be back once we find out,” Shinji returned dryly and rolled his eyes a little at the dramatically mournful look Shunsui-san gave him. “Lisa.”

She stepped forward, and Shunsui-san’s clowning softened at once into something almost tender. “Lisa-chan.” And then Shunsui-san grinned. “We have a present for you.”

The Ise girl stepped out of his shadow and came forward, holding something clasped against her chest and giving Lisa such a starry-eyed look that Shinji almost laughed. “Welcome back, Yadoumaru-fukutaichou,” she said softly and held out the vice-captain’s badge with both hands.

Sure enough, the stiff line of Lisa’s back eased and she smiled a little. “Are you sure, Nanao-chan?”

“Of course!” Ise was actually blushing. “It will be an honor to serve under you again.” Shinji raised a brow at Shunsui-san, who just looked smug.

Lisa laid her hands over the badge, resting them on Ise’s for a moment. “Well. Thank you, then.” She snugged the badge around her arm with a still-practiced flick and tug and straightened to give Shunsui-san a familiar half-glare. “Well? What are you waiting for? There’s work to do.”

“I’m sure there is, somewhere,” Shunsui-san murmured, probably just to see both of his vice-captains give him matching dark looks. The man definitely had bad hobbies. Well, it wasn’t like anyone nice got to be a captain around here, except possibly Juushirou-san and in his case it just made him more alarming. Why had they thought this was a good idea, again?

Finally, the vice-captains who had been waiting started to come forward, and Shinji’s mouth quirked. Ah, yes. That had been why.

Hisagi stepped up and knelt down at Kensei’s feet, formal and proper, but the husky edge in his voice when he said “Taichou” made Shinji shake his head. Just as well they’d come back, maybe; this one wouldn’t have lasted much longer on his own. The weighing look Kensei gave his vice-captain said he saw it too, and his voice was quiet as he reached down to touch Hisagi’s shoulder. “Yeah. Come on and let’s go see about kicking things back into shape.”

Hisagi took a breath. “Yes, sir.” He stood and gave Mashiro, standing at Kensei’s shoulder, a respectful nod despite the alarmingly thoughtful look she was turning back and forth between him and Kensei. Shinji bit back a snort of amusement, anticipating the volume of Kensei’s arguments with her if she started trying to matchmake.

Even as Hisagi stood, the other vice-captain, a lean blond with a noble-family look to him, stepped up and bowed down to the ground before Rose. “Ohtoribashi-taichou,” he greeted Rose, quiet and contained.

“Kira-kun, yes? Kira Izuru?” Rose smiled with just a hint of mischief. “No hang-overs today, I hope?”

Kira looked up at that, losing his closed expression to a quick blush and a sputter. “Taichou!”

The mini-captain’s curvy, amber haired vice-captain was leaning against a pillar giggling under her own captain’s resigned eye and Kira shot her a slightly harried look.

Rose chuckled and beckoned Kira up with a tilt of his head. “I didn’t have that long with the Third before everything came apart. You know them better, now. Tell me about them.”

Kira composed himself a bit and stood. “Of course.” He answered the silent crook of Rose’s fingers and walked beside him as they stepped away from the gates, and Shinji’s brows lifted. Rose’s gestures were open and welcoming, but he was being very careful not to touch Kira at all.

Was there a single damn division that hadn’t been left broken in the wake of Aizen and his merry psychos?

Certainly not his own. Shinji eyed his own vice-captain ruefully as she came to him. There were still dark smudges under her eyes, and he was pretty sure it would take some serious work before she was truly ready for duty again. Well, that was his job now and he’d do it.

“Hirako-taichou,” she said, low and a little hesitant, starting to kneel formally, head bent.

“Hinamori,” he returned, quietly, hands folded into his sleeves. They’d have to work on her self-confidence when she wasn’t in a blazing temper, for starters. She obviously needed the forms for her own comfort, right now, but he wasn’t about to spend the next hundred years with his vice-captain popping up and down from her knees at every turn. He’d say something once she was a little calmer.

She paused, though, looking up at him. Biting her lip, she slowly straightened. Shinji cocked his head and watched her, keeping his expression neutral, waiting for her to decide what she was going to do. Finally, she nodded, folded her hands in front of her and bowed from the waist. “Welcome home, Taichou,” she said firmly.

Shinji smiled, slow and pleased. “There, now. That’s more like it.” Maybe there wasn’t quite as much work to be done as he’d thought.

Hinamori’s back straightened a little and she nodded back, determined.

“Are we done yet?” Hiyori growled from where she was sprawled out on the steps to the gate.

“Since the old man didn’t show up so I can bawl him out right away, yeah, I think so.” Shinji strolled for the stairs down. “Come on, you two.”

Hinamori and Hiyori closed up at his shoulders as they followed everyone else out into the Court and Shinji grinned. He could practically feel the suspicious looks Hiyori was shooting his new vice-captain behind his back, and he might still be going to regret having made this choice, but right now he was glad he had. Politics and broken divisions and all.

Hinamori was right. They were home.

End

Advanced Search

Advanced Search is now available on this archive! Follow the “Advanced Search” link in the sidebar and you will be able to search combinations of genres, fandoms, characters, and pairings. You may, for example, want all the stories that are in Drama and include either Tezuka Kunimitsu or Roy Mustang. Now you can get them, by selecting “Drama” from the Genre list and “Tezuka Kunimitsu” and “Roy Mustang” from the Character/Pairing list and setting the Search Type “To search for stories that contain ANY selected terms.”.

Use the ALL search type for single selections per section, for example searching for the Drama stories in Fullmetal Alchemist.

Use the ANY search type for multiple selections per section, for example searching for the Drama or Romance stories in Fullmetal Alchemist or Bleach.

(Unless, of course, you really do wish to see ALL the stories that include both Drama and Romance and are in both Fullmetal Alchemist and Bleach.)

For those who care about the nitty-gritty, the ANY search will look for (Genre X OR Genre Y) AND (Fandom X OR Fandom Y) AND (Character X OR Character Y OR Pairing Z). It’s pretty spiffy if I do say so myself, and involves a good deal of comparing objects and re-indexing arrays and things that got way more complicated than array_intersect. Go me.

To the Silver Night Sky

In Frau’s considered opinion, Heaven sucked.

He’d been here for most of a day, as near as he could tell, stalking around endless gardens. It was like someone had turned Labrador loose and told him to knock himself out.

He was trying not to think about Labrador, or Castor, or anyone else, but the flowers made it kind of hard to avoid Labrador-thoughts.

And there were people here. Other souls, he guessed. But none of them had approached him, he didn’t recognize anyone, and he really wasn’t in the mood to chat up distracted looking strangers. The melodious birdsong was getting on his nerves, too. His hands felt too light, without his scythe.

But Zehel was gone, now, and the scythe with him. He could feel that much, that stunning weight lifted from the center of his soul. It should probably feel like freedom, but right at the moment it felt more like failure.

He finally slumped down onto the lip of a fountain, hands dangling between his knees. He was dead. Teito wasn’t. He was pretty sure Castor and Labrador weren’t. That was good.

What the fuck did he do now though?

“Here you are. Been looking all over for you, brat.”

Frau jerked like he’d just touched a live wire; that was kind of what it felt like. He knew that voice, or he had a long time ago. Slowly he looked up, hands closing tight on his knees.

There was a man standing in the entrance to this garden, elbow propped up on the ornamental gate. Tall and lean and powerful with black hair and a wry smile with a cigarette dangling from one corner of it. Frau had to swallow twice before he could speak.

“Gido?”

“Large as life,” the man said easily. “Figured I should come find you. Give you a chance to get the yelling over with early.”

“Yelling?” Frau echoed, husky. Slowly he stood up, almost stumbling as he stepped forward.

Gido lifted his brows. “I was figuring, yeah. For having died. For dropping Zehel in your lap.” He blew out a stream of smoke, looking thoughtful. “Damned if I know who’s going to take it up now; I don’t even know who else is alive, from our House. So, yeah. You can go ahead and yell.” Frau just stared at him, completely at a loss, brain spinning with memories he’d tried to put away to keep old pain from eating him hollow. “Or maybe not,” Gido finally said quietly. He dropped his cigarette and stepped on it, and held out a hand. “C’mere, kid.”

He dragged Frau close, and oh god he was warm, warm, and solid when Frau wrapped his arms around him. Frau was shaking, throat tight, and something alarmingly close to a sob ripped out of him when Gido’s hand settled on his head and ruffled his hair like he used to. Frau buried his head in Gido’s shoulder, level with his own now, just to make it all even stranger. “You fucking idiot,” he gasped, raggedly, swept up in old pain that swamped the new. “You should have run! Why the hell didn’t you run when they came?!”

“Ah, there’s the yelling.” Gido sounded amused, a little indulgent, so familiar it nearly broke Frau. Gido sighed, settling a hand on the back of Frau’s neck. “If I’d run, I wouldn’t have been me,” he said simply. And then he shook Frau gently. “And don’t try to tell me you’d have done any differently if it had been you in charge of the ship. You never ran when you were shepherding Tiashe around the Empire with the entire military on your trail.”

Frau lifted his head and glared. “That was different! That was to keep Verloren from awakening, and he was Pandora’s Box and I was Zehel for fuck’s sake! There was no way out of it.”

Gido gave him that faint smile with the steel edge that meant he wasn’t going to let Frau bullshit on this one. “And you wouldn’t have run even if there had been a way.”

Frau’s eyes fell under that piercing look. Gido snorted softly. “We can’t watch all the time, but I’ve kept an eye on you when I could, Frau.” He chuckled. “Might even have said a few prayers for Bastien, after he picked you up.”

Frau flinched.

“Frau.” Gido’s hand tightened on his shoulder. “Don’t let the end of that make you forget everything that came before. He loved you. And you saved him.” Quietly he added, “I’m grateful to him for looking after the last of my crew.” And then he pulled Frau’s head down to his shoulder again, which was good, because more tears were forcing their way out. Frau had forgotten how easily Gido could undo him, how clearly this man had always seen him.

They ended up sitting in one of the mossy nooks by the fountain, boots and coats getting a little tangled up because Frau couldn’t quite bring himself to let go. Gido just smiled and settled Frau against his shoulder. Eventually Frau cleared his throat. “So. You stayed up here?”

“Mm.” Gido ruffled his fingers absently through Frau’s hair. “Yeah, about that. Most souls can turn right around, if that’s what they want, but those who have been Ghosts… well, it takes a while to wash that out for most of us. Asyl, the Zehel before me, she’s almost ready to go back down I think.”

Frau shot upright and stared at him. “I’m stuck here?!”

Gido’s smile tilted ruefully. “Figured that was the next bit you’d yell about, yeah.”

“But… but… Teito!”

“He’s got Mikhail plus the master of Raphael to help him, doesn’t he?” The smile spread into a grin. “She reminds me of Magdalena, a little. Only scarier.”

“But…!”

“And every last one of the God Houses owes him, and knows it,” Gido added. “Last I saw, it looked like the Oaks, in particular, were on his side.”

“But…!”

Gido gave Frau a level look. “Frau. You protected him. You kept him alive. You were why he remembered a lot about love. But your part down there is done for now. And,” he added practically, “it would be anyway, even if you could turn right around. You really want to wait to grow up again, all antsy and not remembering why?”

Frau let himself fall back against Gido’s shoulder with a deliberate thud. “You don’t have to have an answer for everything right away, you know,” he grumbled.

Gido laughed, wrapping an arm more firmly around him. “What else was I supposed to spend my own time here doing, besides thinking? Well,” he allowed, softening, “that and missing you.”

Frau ducked his head a little, feeling very young again and a little flustered to hear that from his mentor and leader.

Gido’s hand slipped down his neck, thumb running over his choker. “So you kept this, huh?”

And that reminded Frau sharply that he really wasn’t all that young any more, because the brush of Gido’s fingers over his throat sent a shot of heat right down his spine. Gido’s brows rose at the faint sound Frau couldn’t quite keep back. His fingers traced over the line of the choker again, slower this time and more deliberate. Frau’s chin lifted helplessly as another husky sound caught in his throat.

Gido’s mouth quirked up at one corner and Frau swallowed a little nervously. Gido was a good man, a kind one, and Frau’s personal model for honor and compassion. But there was no denying he also had a wicked sense of humor. “Gido…”

“Well, that’s certainly one way to get you settled down, here.” Gido bent his head and dragged his tongue up the line of Frau’s throat. The slow, wet warmth made Frau gasp, hand fisting tight in Gido’s coat. His head was tipped back again, and he couldn’t remember doing that but he wasn’t going to complain when Gido was tracking open-mouthed kisses back down his throat and over his chest… and when the hell had Gido gotten Frau’s coat undone?

“Gido…” he tried again, though it came out husky and breathless as Gido eased him down against the sun-warmed moss and settled his weight over him.

“Yeah?” Gido asked, leaning on his elbows while he carded his fingers through Frau’s hair.

Frau wet his lips, looking up at him. He couldn’t deny that he’d had a few dreams that went kind of like this, and when he finally spoke what he said was, “Lose the coat?”

Gido laughed. “That’s my Frau.”

Frau closed his eyes. “Always,” he admitted, softly. At that, Gido’s hands closed around his face and Gido kissed him, slow and gentle.

One benefit of dressing the way they both did was that it took less time to get out of. The boots took the longest, because by that time Gido had gone back to nipping and sucking on Frau’s throat which made fireworks run right down his spine to his cock and distracted him thoroughly from the buckles. When they were finally both bare, Frau pressed close, winding himself around Gido and drinking in his slow kisses as Gido’s hands stroked soothingly down his back. They were so familiar, those hands, that touch, just… not quite this way around. It stunned Frau to realize he’d even shaped his behavior in bed after his captain, his hero, and done it without Gido ever touching him like this before. He had to bury his head against Gido’s shoulder and laugh for a while over that. “Always,” he whispered again, and Gido’s arms tightened around him hard and strong.

“I’m proud of you,” he said quietly against Frau’s hair. When Frau pressed closer with a soft sound, he set his fingers under Frau’s chin and lifted it, kissing him slow and deep. “So proud of you.” He ran a hand slowly down Frau’s body. “You never left us behind. You kept the laws of your people in your heart all your life.” He wrapped a hand around Frau’s cock and stroked him, strong and sure. “Don’t ever believe you failed us Frau. You never did.”

Frau was shaking in the curve of Gido’s arm, wide eyed and shocked by the warmth of Gido’s words twining around the hot pleasure of his touch. “Gido…!” He was clinging to Gido’s shoulders, overwhelmed like he never had been with any other lover. Gido smiled down at him, that very same smile he’d given Frau when Gido had first accepted him on board, and Frau arched up against him, moaning as he came completely undone. Heat tore through him, and Frau shuddered with it, trusting himself blindly to the hands that held him and worked him through it.

When he finally stilled, panting against Gido’s shoulder, Gido stroked his hair back and pressed a kiss to his forehead. “I’ve wanted to tell you that for a long time,” he murmured.

Frau stirred and smiled up at him. He’d wanted to hear that for a long time; he hadn’t realized quite how much. “Thank you.”

Gido gathered him a little closer, and held him quietly as Frau lay against him in the boneless warmth of the garden. Eventually the faint sound of Gido’s heartbeat eased Frau into a doze.


When Frau woke up again, for a second he didn’t remember where he was.

And then he did. Teito, Castor, Labrador, no…

Arms tightened around him when he flinched, and a strong hand slid up his back to knead his neck. “Easy, Frau. Easy.”

“Gido.” At least that part was real too.

“Right here.” There was a grin in Gido’s voice as he added, “Done with your beauty nap?”

Frau growled and gave him a shove, which just made Gido laugh.

“Well, in that case, maybe you want to get cleaned up?” Gido sat up and brushed at the flower petals stuck to his chest. “The flowers do kind of get everywhere,” he muttered.

“Is there actually such a thing as a shower around here?” Frau wanted to know, rather skeptical. “I haven’t seen a damn thing but gardens, fountains, and more gardens since I got here.”

Gido’s smile curled up in a way that made Frau instantly wary. “I’m sure we can find something that will work.”

When he led Frau, through a few more gardens, to what apparently passed for a bath in Heaven, Frau had to just stare for a while. “This place is fucking nuts,” he finally stated.

“It’s Heaven, it goes a little overboard sometimes,” Gido said easily, tossing his boots under one of the benches.

“A little?!”

They were standing at the edge of an insane cross between a fountain, a hot spring, and a reception hall. There were pools and pillars, steam and miniature waterfalls, basins of soap and towels and jars and bottles and (of course) flowers scattered all over.

“Quit being such a wuss and come scrub off,” Gido ordered, wading into a pool with water spilling down from a spout shaped like a fucking dragon’s mouth, and that was just disturbing. Frau glared, but followed after him.

“Who thought all this up?” he grumbled, ducking under the spout for a moment. He picked up a sponge a little dubiously, but that, at least, seemed to just be a normal sponge.

“You get used to it.”

Frau paused, staring at the falling water for a moment, because Gido’s voice seemed softer than it needed to be. “Gido—”

Arms wrapped around him from behind, pulling him back against Gido’s chest. “You’ll never get clean at this rate,” Gido murmured in his ear. “Want some help?” A soapy cloth, rough and nubbly under the suds, ran down his chest.

“Gido,” Frau muttered, face a little hot. “For fuck’s sake, I’m not a little kid.”

“Mm, you know, I noticed that.” Gido’s hand, covered by the cloth, slid between Frau’s legs, over his cock, to cup his balls gently.

“Fuck.” Frau leaned back against Gido, breath suddenly short again. Gido just laughed, softly.

“Turn around, I’ll get your back.”

Frau thought that was backward, but he turned around anyway, and understood when Gido pulled Frau up tight against him. The cloth did scrub over his back, though, and Frau gave in and bent his head, laughing against Gido’s shoulder. Slowly he ran his hands, and the sponge, over Gido’s back in turn, tracing long, lean muscle and bone. They really were built a lot alike. Not surprising, he supposed, for two of the same House, no matter how wild and scattered that House was. He wondered who would be Zehel now, and whether they would get along with Castor and Labrador. Whether Zehel would protect Teito and that little firebrand Ouka, and their personal Oak, Hakuren.

“You’re thinking too much,” Gido said against his ear, and Frau gasped as the cloth slid down to rub slow and hard between his cheeks.

Frau leaned against him, hands splayed against Gido’s back, and moaned as a finger pressed into him, wrapped in the wet roughness of the cloth. The sensation, the soft-and-rough texture pushing inside him, turned his legs shaky, and he was glad when Gido eased them both down to their knees in the heat of the water. “Stop worrying about the world,” Gido murmured to him. “You’re done with that responsibility for now.”

“But everyone,” Frau started, only to gasp as Gido gathered him closer and worked his fingers deeper into him.

“You love them,” Gido whispered against his ear. “You saved them. You served them well, and now it’s time to trust them, Frau.”

Frau wrapped his arms around Gido’s chest, panting against his shoulder. “I do,” he insisted, ragged as Gido worked the cloth slowly in his ass.

“Then miss them,” Gido told him gently. “But don’t fear for them.” He drew his hand and the cloth back, and Frau slumped against him, breathless.

“Will it really be all right?” he asked, low, and Gido took his face in both hands, dripping warm water as he lifted Frau’s head to meet his eyes.

“It will be all right,” he answered with such absolute certainty that Frau couldn’t help but believe him. Frau nodded a little, accepting his leader’s judgement, and Gido kissed him warm and easy. “Come on.”

Frau was still just a little shaky around the knees, which Gido, predictably, took as an opportunity to draw him close again as they dried off. “Notice you kept this too,” Gido murmured, leaning in to close his teeth lightly on the ear cuff Frau had inherited and tug gently.

Frau leaned against him with a soft moan, eyes half closed. “Fuck, Gido…”

“Well of course; you didn’t think we were done yet, did you?” There was a definite gleam in Gido’s eyes, and Frau thought about the way Gido had just cleaned him and had to swallow.

“Why?” he finally asked, quietly. Gido didn’t pretend not to understand, just smiled and ruffled his fingers through Frau’s drying hair.

“Because you need the distraction.” His teeth flashed in a grin. “And because you’ve grown up very nicely.” His hands slid down Frau’s back to grip his ass and pull him in tighter, and Frau went because, really, he was pretty damn willing to be distracted now and figure out what he was being distracted from later. Teito had put his finger right on the truth, that one night; Gido had been like a god to Frau. Frau had loved Bastien, but it was Gido he’d dreamed about. Being bent over on his knees under Gido, in a muddle of velvety grass and wet towels, had him light-headed and panting even before long, strong fingers spread his ass.

When Gido’s tongue dragged slowly over his entrance, response tightened so hard through Frau that he thought he might come from this alone. Gido was taking his time, tongue circling lazily, wet and hot and soft, until Frau was gasping against the towels and pushing back against Gido’s hands. When he finally pushed his tongue into Frau, opening him up, Frau could only clutch at the grass and moan. It was good, soft and strong and hot, but it also made him hungry for more.

“Gido,” he gasped, pushing back against him and shivering when Gido’s hands tightened to hold him still.

“Mm.” Slow thumbs worked circles over his ass. “More already?” Gido purred, teasing.

“Fuck yes, please.” Frau made a low, wanting sound in his throat as Gido’s cock pushed into him, hard and slow and slick with something. Probably from one of the goddamn bottles and jars around here, and oh god, ten years from now would Frau know what was in all of them too? He didn’t want to think about that.

Fortunately, there were better things to concentrate on.

“Gido, fuck me,” he half begged and half ordered, rocking back into the slow slide of Gido’s cock. Gido laughed.

“Demanding, aren’t you?” But his grip on Frau’s hips shifted and he thrust into Frau so hard Frau saw stars.

“Yes,” he moaned as Gido took him at his word and fucked him hard and sure. Gido was not a small man, and the burn of being stretched and filled by him ran down Frau’s nerves sweet and hot. It was here and now and perfect, even if here was a bunch of fucking impossible gardens and he’d thought now was too late. It was hope, ground into his skin with every thrust, every stroke of Gido’s hands down his ribs, that he’d come back to this, to this man, and maybe that meant the rest of his life and love wasn’t gone forever either.

“It’s all right, Frau.” Gido’s voice was husky and breathless, now. “It’s all right. Let go.” His hand wrapped around Frau’s cock, strong and sure, and he drove into Frau’s ass hard enough to lift him up off his knees. “Let go. You know I’ll catch you.”

The words raced through him like lightning, bright and wild, an explosion when they hit the building fire of body-pleasure. Frau cried out with the shock of it as sweetness scythed through him, so sharp it almost cut. It wrung his body out like a rag until he could barely breathe, only shudder with the force of it, of his response to Gido’s care. Gido’s low, vibrant moan answered him, deep as a kiss, and Frau gasped as Gido thrust hard into him and stilled.

“Fuck,” Gido sighed, finally, and Frau could only make a wordless noise of agreement. He collapsed on the towels as Gido drew back and let him down, ass throbbing very pleasantly. The brush of Gido’s lips over the back of his neck made him bend his head, shivering softly. Gido’s hand stroked down his back, gentle.

“Too bad you weren’t that quick to follow my orders back on the Aegis,” he teased lightly.

Frau stirred and turned his head to look up at him, mouth quirking. “I always obeyed you.”

Gido snorted and reached over to fish two cigarettes out of his coat pocket, offering one to Frau. “Bullshit.”

Frau stole his lighter and sucked in a slow breath of smoke. “It’s true,” he insisted as Gido snatched the lighter back and cuffed him lightly. “I yelled at you and argued with you and called you every name I ever learned, when you were being stupid. But I never disobeyed you, once you actually gave an order.”

Gido looked down at him for a long moment. “Yeah,” he finally said softly, fingers sliding through Frau’s hair. “I know.” When he pulled Frau close again, Frau went willingly, content for a while to just soak up the warmth of being here, of being with Gido once again.

He figured they’d probably get around to the yelling again in time, but for now this was much better.


Eventually, after another couple cigarettes and another dunk in the crazed baths, they finally got around to getting dressed again. Frau thought about that for a while, leaning against Gido’s knees. Gido was sprawled back on the marble edge of a fountain, which made a handy bench Frau supposed, but Frau had settled on the much softer grass at his feet. It had been a while since he’d been fucked that hard, after all. Besides, this meant Gido was combing his fingers slowly through Frau’s hair, and Frau kind of wanted that comfort while he thought.

He thought he might know what Gido had been doing for the last few hours, and his guess warmed him and, at the same time, scared him that Gido had thought it was necessary. What had gone on right after he died, that Gido thought he needed to be braced or cushioned against it? Only one way to find out.

“So,” he said quietly. “Am I calm enough, now? For you to let me see whatever it is that lets us watch the mortal world? To see what’s happened to them?”

Gido’s hand in his hair paused for a moment. “You always were sharp,” Gido murmured. “Look at me.”

Frau raised his head from Gido’s knee and looked up to meet his eyes, dark and steady and serious. “Do you think you’re ready?” Gido asked. “To see the people you love, ones you probably won’t see in person for a long time?”

Frau remembered Gido asking him, in exactly that voice, if he was coming along, when he agreed to let Frau fly with him. He remembered that had been the last time he’d seen Magdalena. And then he had to close his eyes for a second and swallow hard.

“This was the first thing you taught me,” he finally said, husky. “To gain something, you usually have to give something else up.” And then he laughed, a little unsteady but true, remembering something else. “Well, maybe the second thing.” He opened his eyes again and looked up at Gido with a tilted smile. “The first was If no one else will reach out their hand, I will. If it’s important enough… you do it anyway.”

The light of Gido’s slow smile, the open pride in it, in him, made Frau glance aside, face a little hot. It was a small calm in his heart, though—a little place to stand and rest. He had done what needed to be done, what he knew was right, and he’d found one of his homes again on the other side of that choice.

“If you want to see it, I’ll show you,” Gido said, softly. Frau nodded silently and Gido stood, tugging Frau up with him.

As they walked through yet more of the endless gardens, Gido explained quietly. “There’s a lake. We’re pretty sure it’s what the Lord of Heaven uses to keep an eye on the mortal world, but other souls can influence it around the edges, too. If the ones you want to see are present enough in your heart and mind, the lake will show them to you.” His mouth twisted, eyes fixed ahead of them. “It’s a mixed blessing, if it’s a blessing at all. It nearly destroyed Kreuz. The last Vertrag,” he added, glancing over at Frau. “Tiashe’s guardian. What happened to the kid was… well. It was pretty bitter, even for those of us who’d only met the kid once. Kreuz was Tiashe’s second dad; he nearly tore his soul apart, watching what those Barsburg bastards did to him and not being able to do a thing about it.” He sighed and stuffed his hands in his pockets. “In the end, Gala grew some mary-flower and made him sleep. These gardens listen a little to the blood of Profe, even when they’re not Ghosts any more. Good thing, too. He’s doing better these days, at least.” Gido smiled over at him. “Helped when you and the kid met up.”

Frau could understand, now, exactly why Gido had wanted to make sure Frau was settled down before showing him this lake, even if he was tempted to call the man an overprotective old hen. But then the bits of information rearranged themselves in his head and his feet froze to the ground.

“Frau?” Gido looked back over his shoulder, brows raised.

“So, um. Kreuz. Has been watching again, huh?” Frau swallowed. “Just how much has ‘Teito’s second dad’ been watching?”

Gido blinked once or twice before it seemed to click for him too and he threw his head back and laughed, open and rich. “Oh, don’t worry.” That would have been more reassuring if Gido hadn’t been snickering. “He thinks the two of you are cute. Got downright doting about it whenever Tiashe started bossing you around in bed.”

“He did not…” Frau glared as Gido broke up laughing again. Gido just slung an arm around his shoulders.

“Yeah, kid, he really did. It was cute.”

Frau let himself be towed along, growling under his breath.

The lake, he had to admit, was a little unnerving, when they got there. There were other people gathered here and there around the edge, and the looks on their faces made Frau’s nerves tighten. The first thing he thought, seeing them, was Kor. All too many of them wore the expression of someone listening to a Kor. “Gido,” he said, tight and quiet.

“A mixed blessing,” Gido answered, low, not looking at him. “Ghosts aren’t the only souls that can get stuck, here.”

That tone, that not-look, were a warning Frau recognized from the Aegis. There was, perhaps, someone listening that they shouldn’t speak too freely in front of. Some things were constants, whether in the celestial world or the mortal one. Considering they’d all figured it had been a celestial messenger that had really convinced the Pope to make Teito Pandora’s Box, it wasn’t all that surprising. Frau nodded, disarmingly casual, and knelt at the edge of the water.

The lapping wavelets stilled, smooth as glass, and Frau’s breath caught to see Teito reflected there. He’d thought he would have to do more. But no, there was Teito, sitting with Hakuren and Ouka around a small round table stacked with paper and cluttered with carafes and glasses, as Kururu chased Mikage from chair back to chair back. Frau didn’t realize how tight his fingers had closed on the grass of the shore until Gido’s hands settled on his shoulders and squeezed.

He watched the three of them trade lists and portfolios around, listened to Ouka’s opinion of this noble and Hakuren’s thoughts on that priest and Teito’s quiet remarks on some general, soft and clear as if they were in the next room. It hurt, like a fist closed around his heart, to see them, so clear and so distant. And it soothed too, to watch them, safe and alive and obviously planning to take over the world though none of them would probably put it that way.

And then Hakuren said, without looking up from his file, “A message came from Castor-sama today. They’re safe back at the cathedral.”

Teito flinched.

“Teito,” Ouka said softly, reaching across to catch one of his hands.

“I’m all right,” he said hastily. “It’s fine.”

Hakuren threw his folder on the table and glared at him. “You are not. When are you going to take your own advice and let yourself mourn for him?”

“We don’t have time.” Teito didn’t sound very sure, though, and he was clinging to Ouka’s hand.

“The world isn’t falling apart this instant,” Hakuren said firmly. “We have time.” He pushed his chair back and came to kneel beside Teito’s, hand on his shoulder. More gently, he added, “I miss Frau-sama too.”

As if the name had been all it needed to unlock Teito’s resistance, he slumped back in his chair with a stifled sound of grief, curling in on himself. Hakuren promptly pulled him out of the chair and into his arms, and Ouka came around the table to wind her arms around both of them.

“You loved him,” she said softly, stroking Teito’s hair as he shuddered. “And he was a good man. It’s all right.”

“So dark without him,” Teito whispered roughly against Hakuren’s shoulder, and Hakuren’s arms tightened hard.

“Open your eyes,” Hakuren ordered, rather husky himself. “Some of the light he showed you was your own, Teito, don’t ever doubt that. Don’t you dare.”

Some muttering answered that, out of which Frau could only hear bossy. “Miss him,” Teito added, a little more audibly. Ouka rested her cheek against his hair.

“You should miss him,” she said softly. “When someone leaves, of course we miss them. It hurts less, with time, but we always miss them.” She took a deep breath. “But that’s just the proof that your heart and your light are alive. And that means you can keep on loving people, and they can help you when it hurts.”

Teito broke down for real, then, shaking in their arms, and Frau watched them, eyes burning, as Hakuren and Ouka sat on the floor and held him through it. Mikage joined them to burrow against Teito’s cheek and make anxious chirps at him, and when Teito finally lifted his head it was Mikage who got a damp smile. “Thanks,” Teito said quietly, scrubbing a sleeve over his face. Hakuren tsked at him and pulled a handkerchief out of his pocket, and Teito rolled his eyes, and Ouka giggled, and they all relaxed a little.

Teito straightened and stretched slowly, and accepted a glass of water Hakuren poured him. “So." He glanced up reluctantly at the table full of paper. "Who should we be supporting for Field Marshal?”

“I think it will have to be Myers,” Ouka said practically, tucking her skirts in around her knees and staying beside him. “He’s the only one willing to even think about releasing the Raggs Kingdom slaves, even now we’re betrothed.”

Frau drew back from the water, softly as if they could hear him in turn, and their image faded, still arguing. The last thing he saw was Hakuren’s hand brushing Teito’s hair protectively. “Idiot,” he whispered, husky. “The light was all your own.”

“Who’s the idiot, again?” Gido’s voice startled him, and he squawked a bit when Gido pulled him in close and Frau more or less collapsed against him. He was shaking, he realized, tremors like a bone-deep chill. Gido’s hand closed on the nape of his neck, strong and warm, kneading a little of the shaking out. “I swear, each of you brats is just as bad as each other.”

“What… what do you mean?” Frau asked, pressing his forehead against Gido’s shoulder and trying to catch his breath.

“I mean,” Gido told him dryly, “that both of you have souls that burn so pure it’s amazing you don’t blind innocent onlookers; and neither of you seem to believe it.”

The words brought back the brilliance of Teito’s soul, the taste of it on his tongue, the warmth of it that promised to call Frau back from any darkness, and loss clawed at Frau all over again. Gido held him close and quiet as Frau’s hands twisted tight in his coat, and Frau’s breath caught and heaved with the pain.

“Listen to the girl’s wisdom, Frau,” Gido murmured to him. “And know that you’ll see Tiashe again.”

“But he won’t stay, and I can’t leave.” That thought hurt almost as badly as losing Teito already had—it was going to happen again, and there was nothing he could do…

Gido sighed. “Idiot.” He rapped Frau briskly over the head. “What did I just say about your soul?”

“But…” Frau pushed upright against him, staring. “You said the Ghosts…”

“Are stuck here for a while. But unless he dies unimaginably young for a master of the Eye of Mikhail, you’ll be ready to go back with him.” He smiled and ruffled Frau’s hair. “Do try to remember why you’re the only one of us who could handle that damn scythe. I’m not the foreseer among us, but I’ll tell you this much of your future: Zehel’s mark will be burned from your soul in plenty of time.”

Frau leaned back into the shelter of Gido’s assurance, shaken worse than ever by the thought that he might find Teito again, as he’d found Gido. “Thank you,” he whispered. He didn’t like to think about what might have happened to him at this lake if he hadn’t had Gido to ground him and guide him through it.

“None needed,” Gido told him gently. “Come on, then.” He stood, urging Frau up with him. “Let’s find you a place to stay.”

“Is it going to be as insane as the baths?” Frau asked, casting a suspicious eye around at the unrelentingly out-doorsy landscape. Gido snorted.

“Not that bad. Most people aren’t here long enough to need anything, and a lot of the ones who stay aren’t in any shape to notice,” he didn’t look back at the captive souls by the lake, but Frau shivered anyway, “so there are only a few of us who use it. We’re back in a corner by the woods.”

It took a while to get anywhere near the woods, but eventually they came into sight of some very tall walls and spires. Walls which, as they got closer, formed a building very like the sector seven Cathedral—arched walkways here, open courtyards there, pillared halls leading inward. Gido chuckled as Frau craned his head back, taking in the complexity of it. “There’s no record of which came first, this or the Cathedral, but we think it was probably this.”

He led Frau inward. There were none of the distracted souls Frau had seen in the rest of the gardens, here. Instead they passed a handful of people who felt just a little familiar. A light haired man with Castor’s nose looked up from a book and smiled as they passed his rooms. A slight, beautiful woman with Labrador’s eyes waved to them from an enclosed courtyard and fountain. A man with the gold hair of the Oaks winked at them over the shoulder of a tall man with Teito’s faint accent strong in his vowels, who was contemplating a chess board set between them.

“Welcome home,” Gido said quietly, setting a hand on Frau’s shoulder to guide him through another arch and into a wide room with a few heavy chairs, a table and shelves, a deep bed. It was so much like the bedrooms in the cathedral that Frau’s breath caught.

“I was going to say this will take some getting used to,” he said, looking around at the smooth, pale stone walls. “But maybe less than I was thinking.”

“Usually,” Gido agreed, leaning in the arch of Frau’s new doorway. “You’re not alone here, Frau. We’re all in this together.”

Frau rested a hand on the wall by his bed nook. It had half a dozen pillows, and a stack of silky, folded blankets at the foot. That silent welcome and the knowing eyes of the ex-Ghosts they’d passed settled around him, warm and steady, and he took a long, slow breath. For the first time since he’d arrived in Heaven, he felt like he had a stable place to stand.

Maybe he’d make it until his other loved ones came back to him after all.

Which reminded him of the one he’d found here, all unexpected, and he cocked his head at Gido thoughtfully. “So, hey.”

Gido’s brows rose as Frau strolled back over to him. “Hm?”

“You said you wanted to get me settled, here, when you found me earlier.” Frau reached out to rest a hand on Gido’s chest, smiling to feel the beating heart under his hand. “Think you might help me get used to the new place?” He tilted his head at the bed.

Gido laughed and reached out without moving from his casual lean against the door to pull Frau up against him. “I really did miss you, brat,” he said, resting his forehead against Frau’s, eyes warm. “It’ll be my pleasure.”

“Well, then.” Frau relaxed against him with a soft sigh, finding the words easy at last.

“I’m home.”

End

All Our Times Have Come

When Muguruma Kensei returned to take back the Ninth Division, it had caused a stir. Compared to the various rejoicing, gossiping, suspicion, and the shock suffered by anyone who had to deal with Mashiro, Shuuhei knew that finding himself working in the same room with his captain was a very small change to be fretting over. On the scale of all the stir caused by the captains’ return, it was really a very minor thing that Muguruma-taichou liked to have his vice-captain close at hand. It could certainly be worse. Mashiro might have wanted her own seat back, and while Shuuhei wouldn’t have fought her for it he knew that would have caused a great deal more upset in the lower ranks. It comforted the people who had never known Muguruma-taichou to have Shuuhei remain.

Even if that did put him in the same office as the man he had a hopeless and ridiculous crush on.

The chair across the room creaked and Shuuhei glanced up, catching the long flex of muscles as Muguruma-taichou stretched his arms overhead. Shuuhei fixed his eyes firmly back on his paperwork, trying to remember the next thing he needed to write.

“About time to knock off for the day. You done with those yet, Hisagi?” Muguruma-taichou’s voice didn’t rumble the way some deep voices did, but there was a roughness to it when it was low. Shuuhei spent a lot of time in this office stopping himself from shivering, just listening to his captain.

“I should finish up a few more pages,” he said calmly, not looking up again. “Please go on ahead, Taichou; I’ll close the offices up.”

“Hm.” Muguruma-taichou’s steps whispered across the wood floor to the window behind Shuuhei’s desk. He could see his captain out of the corner of his eye, bare arms crossed as he looked out. “You know, if there’s one thing that I really do hate Tousen for, it’s this. For teaching my people to be afraid.”

Shuuhei’s head jerked up at that, shocked; Muguruma-taichou hadn’t spoken Tousen-taichou’s name once, since he’d returned. It took a moment to realize what else he’d said, and then Shuuhei flushed, caught between shame at being found wanting by his captain and the need to defend the philosophy of his other captain. “Sir, we aren’t—” He broke off abruptly as Muguruma-taichou turned and one warm, strong hand caught his chin. Dark eyes held his.

“Aren’t you?”

Heat rushed over Shuuhei as he realized what his captain was talking about. He could feel his heart beating against his breastbone like it wanted to get out. “It’s not,” he started, husky, and had to swallow and try again. “It’s not Tousen-taichou’s fault that…”

Muguruma-taichou’s thumb stroked over his mouth and Shuuhei’s words choked off in the shudder of want that ran up his spine. “You won’t get what you want if you don’t ask for it, Hisagi,” Muguruma-taichou said quietly.

Shuuhei closed his eyes, because that was the only way he could look away from the levelness of his captain’s gaze. “It isn’t my place to ask.”

“Bullshit!”

Shuuhei’s eyes flew open again, wide at that barked word, to find Muguruma-taichou frowning down at him. “This is why I say it’s Tousen’s damn fault,” Muguruma-taichou growled, though his hand was still gentle, wrapped around Shuuhei’s jaw. “You hold back with me exactly the way you hold back with your own sword. ” He shook Shuuhei a little. “I haven’t seen you release that damn sword once, since I got back, and everyone says that’s business as usual for you. You’re ashamed of the shape of your own soul, Hisagi! You think I’m going to leave one of my people in that state?”

Shuuhei swallowed and shook his head, wordless. No, he couldn’t imagine the captain he’d come to know letting that go.

“You are what you are,” Muguruma-taichou told him, flat and inflexible. “And what you are is a man of the Ninth. My Ninth. You marked yourself with it, so don’t try to tell me otherwise.” His thumb brushed over Shuuhei’s cheekbone, where the numbers 69 were tattooed, and Shuuhei flushed. A corner of Muguruma-taichou’s mouth tilted up. “I haven’t had much luck yet getting you to release your sword. But I’m betting Tousen never touched this part of you.” He braced his other hand on the back of Shuuhei’s chair and leaned over him, voice turning low again. “So tell me. Shuuhei. Do you want this?”

Shuuhei’s thoughts were tangled up in a knot. It was Tousen-taichou’s words that had kept him in the Division, had given him a way to fight with honesty. That’s what he’d thought, even after Tousen’s betrayal. But Muguruma-taichou… it had been his imagine in Shuuhei’s head that led him to the Division to start with, that made him try over and over to get into the Academy until he did it, that made him work and train until he’d found Kazeshini’s name and shape, and closed his hand on that strength.

Do you want this?

“Yes,” he whispered, hands closed into white-knuckled fists on top of his desk, remembering the first time he’d held Kazeshini’s grips and spun his blades free, the terror and thrill both. Remembering the first time he’d seen Muguruma Kensei standing proud and easy after a battle, and the flash of desire to be like that himself. Maybe it was true; maybe he had stopped at the easy answer. If anyone could teach him to walk in the dark shadow of Kazeshini’s edge without losing himself, it was this man. So he looked his captain in the eyes and finished, “Please.”

Those eyes were hot as Muguruma-taichou smiled. “Yeah.” He lifted Shuuhei’s chin and kissed him, hard and sure.

Heat twisted through Shuuhei’s stomach and he reached up to fist his hands in Muguruma-taichou’s haori; he didn’t want to hesitate, he didn’t want to hold back from fear, and his captain didn’t want him to either. Realizing that one thing, feeling it in the force of Muguruma-taichou’s mouth on his, pulled a faint moan out of him.

He wanted it, yes.

Muguruma-taichou made an approving sound and pulled Shuuhei up out of his chair. “Come here.” Shuuhei had to swallow as he found himself pressed up full length against his captain, feeling the hardness of his body, the solid weight of Muguruma-taichou’s muscles under his hands as he slid them up his captain’s arms. He flushed hot as broad hands slid through the sides of his hakama and under his kosode to grip his ass firmly, and couldn’t help grinding wantonly against Muguruma-taichou in answer. “Taichou!”

“I think,” Muguruma-taichou murmured against his neck, “that when I have my hands on your ass you can leave off the titles.” He dragged his tongue along the edge of Shuuhei’s choker, sending a jolt of heat up Shuuhei’s spine. “And I don’t want to hear my family name from someone I’m fucking, okay?”

Shuuhei pulled in a quick breath; that was the kind of intimacy he hadn’t expected, the kind that made this more than just a captain resorting to unorthodox methods with a subordinate. “…Kensei-san,” he answered, low and hesitant, unsure again if it was really all right for him to have this.

Muguruma-taichou lifted his head and caught Shuuhei’s chin again with one hand, looking at him steadily. “Do you think I haven’t been watching all of you, the same way you’ve been watching me? Looking around to see who still has some goddamn fire in their guts? I didn’t leave you in the vice-captain’s seat just to soothe anyone’s nerves!”

Shuuhei stared back at him, closer to being overwhelmed by this than he was by the heat of his captain’s hands on his skin. “You really think I’m like that.” And it wasn’t a question, but he could hear the wonder in his own voice. “You really think I can handle it.”

Muguruma-taichou slid his thumb over Shuuhei’s cheekbone again, tracing the numbers slow and firm. “You know the answer to that already. You have for a long time, I’m thinking.” A little gentler, he added, “You just forgot for a while, is all.”

Shuuhei took a slow breath, feeling something in his spine release. He lifted his head and looked back levelly. “I’ll try to remember, then. Kensei-san.”

His captain smiled with a flash of teeth. “That’s better.” He wrapped his hand around the back of Shuuhei’s neck and pulled him into a slow, hot kiss. This time, Shuuhei pressed into it, moaning softly as those powerful hands slid under his hakama again, pulling him up the thigh Kensei-san slid between his legs. Shuuhei shivered and let himself rock against that solid muscle, hands groping over Kensei-san’s shoulders and back.

“Yeah, that’s it.” Kensei-san’s hands kneaded Shuuhei’s ass, strong enough to make him gasp a little, low in his throat. “Don’t hold yourself back, Shuuhei.”

The quiet coaxing, the promise of an anchor in the powerful body unmoving against his, undid Shuuhei’s reserve strand by strand until he was riding Kensei-san’s thigh, grinding wantonly against him, kissing back hot and wet and open. He barely recognized his own voice when he groaned, “Kensei-san, fuck me…”

Kensei-san chuckled against his ear, low and rough. “Right here? You want me to put you down over your own desk and fuck you right here and now?”

Shuuhei shuddered and ran his open mouth down the line of Kensei-san’s neck, tasting salt on his skin, and bit down on the curve of his shoulder. Those hands tightened hard on his ass, digging into his muscles and spreading him open, and want twisted a little tighter. Want he didn’t have to hold back. “Yes!”

Good.

Shuuhei leaned over his desk as soon as Kensei-san let him go, breath coming hard; he wanted this. He wanted to feel the easy confidence of his captain’s hands on him until that confidence soaked into his skin. As his hakama slid down and warm palms pushed his kosode up over his hips, he sagged down to his elbows and rested his head against the smooth wood, a little light-headed with anticipation. “Kensei-san…”

“Easy.” One hand closed firmly on his shoulder, holding him steady, and tension eased out of Shuuhei’s shoulders, unwound down his back. There was nothing hidden, nothing held back in Kensei-san. He could trust that hand on him, the way he hadn’t been able to completely trust anything for a very long time. When Kensei-san’s fingers pushed slowly into him, Shuuhei laughed against his folded arms, breathless; those fingers were slick. Kensei-san had apparently planned for this.

“I made you impatient with me,” he said, husky with the slide and stretch of being opened up.

There was a faint chuckle in Kensei-san’s voice. “Not impatient quite yet. But I did think about what might get through to you, since training alone obviously isn’t enough.”

Shuuhei flushed a little at that reminder. “Forgive me.”

The hand on his shoulder shook him gently. “None of that. I’m your captain. It’s your job to follow me, yeah, but it’s also mine to know what it takes to get you there.” He sank two fingers all the way into Shuuhei and twisted them slowly. “Not like I object,” he murmured as Shuuhei moaned with the heat tightening his stomach. Kensei-san’s hand stroked down his back and both of them wrapped around Shuuhei’s hips, holding him. “You have what it takes Shuuhei. You spent a long time being sabotaged, right down inside, and you still have what it takes. Remember that.”

Shuuhei reached out to grip the far side of his desk, panting for breath as Kensei-san’s cock pushed into him, thick and hard. “Yes, sir,” he gasped. It felt like the words were as solid as Kensei-san was inside him, and he held tight to that feeling.

And then he just held on as Kensei-san fucked him, hard enough to rock him up off his heels if Kensei-san hadn’t kept a good grip on his hips, pulling him back into each stroke. It was hot and slick and secure, and Shuuhei moaned openly with the feeling of his captain’s heavy cock driving into his ass over and over, deep and sure.

“Let go, Shuuhei,” Kensei-san ordered, rough and husky. “I’ve got you. Stop holding back.”

Shuuhei shuddered like that order was a hand stroked down his spine and let himself cry out at the next thrust, at the burst of heat up his spine, let himself spread his legs wider and push back against Kensei-san, taking his cock deeper, hungry for more. An approving gasp answered him and Kensei-san moved with him, fucking him harder, bracing his hands against the desk on either side of Shuuhei and leaning over him, pounding deep into his ass. Shuuhei let thinking go and just moved, just felt the hot pleasure of being fucked open so hard, abandoning himself to it under the solid shelter of his captain’s body over his. When heat finally rushed him over the edge and wrung him out, he groaned in an already-raw throat and ground his ass back against Kensei-san wantonly. Kensei-san fucked the tightness right back out of his body until he was sprawled over the desk, barely able to moan when Kensei-san finally buried himself deep in Shuuhei and shuddered against his back.

“Yeah,” Kensei-san said softly against his ear. “Like that. Hold on to that, Shuuhei.”

“Yes, sir,” Shuuhei agreed, rather dazed. He felt Kensei-san’s lips curve against his neck.

“I’ll be glad to remind you, of course.”

Shuuhei’s face turned hot. “Kensei-san…”

Deft fingers combed through his hair, stroking damp strands back. “Yeah?”

“Thank you,” Shuuhei said softly. “For this. For coming back at all.”

Kensei-san’s hand slid down to rest on his nape, which pulled a soft sound out of Shuuhei as he bent his head under that warm weight. “I’m never going to trust the Captain-General all the way again, that’s for sure. But you’re not him. For you, for my division, for the job we actually do when moronic conspiracies and politics aren’t getting in the way… for that I’ll stay.” He tightened his grip for a moment and pushed upright. “So come eat dinner with me and keep me from actually strangling Mashiro the way she deserves.”

Shuuhei slowly pushed himself back to his feet, feeling his muscles burn with the reminder of his captain inside him. “You don’t hold back, Taichou,” he allowed wryly, “but you’re not always completely honest either.” Everyone in the division knew how fond Kensei-san was of Mashiro.

“Oh shut up. One of these days I really will strangle her.” Kensei-san didn’t look at him, but a corner of his mouth was curled up and he rested a hand on Shuuhei’s shoulder again as he tied his hakama. “Come on.”

Shuuhei smiled a little too, feeling himself settle into this new shape of things. “Yes, Taichou.” After too long, it felt like there was light for his way forward again.

And a hand to steady him on it, too.

End

Crossing Every Boundary Line Between Earth and Sky

Frau

Every time Frau went to bed with Castor he remembered why he’d sworn the last time would be the last.

“You’re a sadistic fucking bastard,” he panted, body arched taut under Castor’s hand on his cock, which was stroking very, very slowly. Frau strained against Castor’s strings wound around his arms and pulling them up over his head, which did about as much good as ever.

Castor smiled down at him, cool and collected as if they weren’t naked in bed, and as if he weren’t slowly driving Frau out of his mind. “Now, now, simply because some of us prefer to savor the good things in life instead of rushing through them, that’s no need to be insulting.”

You think it’s a compliment, you—” Frau broke off in a moan as Castor rubbed a thumb slow and hard over his head. He wasn’t going to last much longer at this rate.

“Language, Frau,” Castor murmured, eyes glinting behind his glasses. “Patience is a great virtue; you should cultivate it.” He leaned down to trace tortuously light, wet circles with his tongue over Frau’s nipples and Frau pulled harder against the strings holding his arms, trying to get more of that soft, wet touch. When Castor closed his teeth, ever so delicately, Frau finally broke.

“Please,” he gasped, “Castor, please, stop screwing around and fuck me!” He groaned as Castor made a thoughtful sound, long, slick fingers tightening around his cock.

“Since you ask politely, I suppose I could, yes.” Castor caught Frau’s knees and lifted them, spreading Frau wide open. More strings wrapped around his legs, keeping them there, and Castor trailed his fingers down Frau’s cock, behind his balls, to rub softly against his entrance. Frau was half crazy with the heat and the teasing, and nearly aching with how badly he wanted Castor inside him.

“Please, Castor, now,” Frau begged, knowing Castor was perfectly capable of drawing this out even more. “Fuck me now, you know goddamn well I can take it!”

Castor smiled, the knife-sharp smile he never showed in public, and ran his hands up Frau’s spread thighs. “You want it that much?” he asked softly.

Frau shuddered in the hold of Castor’s threads. “Castor,” he whispered, openly pleading. “Please.”

Castor leaned over him and kissed him, slow and hard, tongue sliding deep into his mouth. “Yes,” he murmured against Frau’s lips. And just like that he was pushing into Frau, barely slick. The harsh stretch of taking him in stole Frau’s words and he groaned low and loud.

Castor fucked him rough and slow, and his eyes on Frau were finally hot, finally done with teasing and concealing. That was what made Frau let go at last and give himself up to Castor’s control without reservation, moaning with every stroke and begging shamelessly for more whenever he had the breath. It was so good to feel this, the raw fire at the core of Castor. Frau didn’t even mind being caught so helplessly in Castor’s power, as long as it meant Castor would open up, open Frau up and fuck him hard. The pounding of Castor’s cock into him, the strength of Castor’s hand wrapping around him, drowned him in sensation until Frau was nearly screaming with it, every muscle hard and taut against the strings holding him. When the tension finally snapped, it wrung Frau’s body so hard he could barely breathe, shuddering with the rake of pleasure through and through him.

The sound of Castor’s moan, as he drove deep into Frau, pulled an extra gasp from him, and even dazed as he was he smiled at the look on Castor’s face as he caught himself over Frau: at peace for a while, washed clean of the darkness that lived behind his eyes for just a little bit.

When Castor finally released him, it was Frau’s turn to moan again. His muscles felt like jelly as Castor eased him back down to the bed, and he sighed with pleasure as Castor’s hands kneaded gently over his thighs. “Mmmm. You know,” he sighed, “you’re a complete bastard. And a flaming control freak.” Frau’s lips curled up. “That was fantastic.”

Castor laughed softly, and settled down against the length of Frau’s body. “You say that every time.”

“It’s true every time,” Frau pointed out, and made a contented sound as Castor’s arms wrapped around him. His arms were still shaky, as he settled them around Castor in return, but he really liked the cuddling afterward.

Every time they went to bed, he remembered why he’d sworn not to any more. And every time, he also remembered why he still did.

 

Castor

One of the things Castor liked best about his bed games with Frau was when Frau stalked him. He was perfectly aware that Frau considered this evidence that Castor was every bit as perverted as himself, but Castor enjoyed the crinkle down his spine that told of eyes watching him, of a body moving up behind him on quiet feet. A part of him missed the bright edge of a threat to his life, and he didn’t hesitate to take his pleasure in this softened version of it.

And for all that Frau mocked, he had a fine sense of drama about the whole thing.

Witness how patiently he had waited for Castor to take off and neatly hang his vestments, tonight, waited for the precise moment Castor was turning away from his wardrobe and shrugging off his shirt. A swift snatch, almost faster than Castor could have escaped if he’d been trying to, and he was pressed up against the wall, bare chest brushing the cool stone. Frau’s hands were wrapped around his wrists, pinning them against the wall over his head, and Castor could feel the hard muscle of Frau’s body against his back, holding him in place.

Willing or not, the reflex of years sent him jerking against that hold as soon as he was caught, but his hands didn’t move an inch. Frau was stronger than he was, hand to hand, and his grip was like iron. Learning that all over again made Castor have to swallow in a dry throat.

“Shh,” Frau said softly against his ear, pressing closer to cage him more firmly against the wall. “It’s your turn.”

A shadow of heat curled through Castor’s body, and after another tense breath or two, he surrendered to Frau’s hold, resting his forehead against the stone. “Yes,” he murmured.

He never resisted Frau for long.

And Frau’s grip never loosened, even as he gathered both Castor’s wrists in one hand and slid the other down Castor’s chest to undo his pants. Castor’s breath came shorter as Frau kept him stretched against the wall and closed his hand between Castor’s legs, kneading slow and strong. Castor’s knees were shaky already, and the perfectly assured way Frau handled him made him moan. “Frau…”

“Shh,” Frau told him again, quietly, and Castor shivered, bending his head. Frau was a gentle man. A kind man. And he was all the more inexorable, when they did this, because he knew it was what Castor wanted.

And he did want it. To have to give way, to let Frau’s taller, harder body confine and shelter his while Frau fondled him until he was shaking. Little wanting sounds caught in his throat, but he knew Frau would only hush him again if he spoke. Castor enjoyed hearing Frau beg; Frau wanted Castor to know that even begging wouldn’t do any good.

Finally, Frau slid his hand out of Castor’s open pants with a final squeeze. As Castor sagged against the wall in his grip, he caught Castor’s chin, turning his head back and up until Frau could kiss him, slow and wet and deep. Castor leaned back against him, acquiescent, and Frau made a satisfied sound into his mouth. Frau’s hands were still firm, but gentler now as he brought Castor’s down and caught them behind his back instead. Frau guided him a few steps to bend over the side of his bed and pulled his pants down off his hips. Castor moaned softly as Frau held him in place, just as helplessly caught as he’d been up against the wall and far readier for Frau. He turned his cheek against the sheets, watching as Frau rummaged one-handed in his wall nook.

What rubbed slickly between his cheeks, though, wasn’t Frau’s fingers. It was the thickness of Frau’s cock, and Castor’s breath caught. “Frau,” he whispered, eyes wide.

Frau leaned over him, caging him against the bed. “Shh,” Frau murmured a third time, lips brushing the back of Castor’s neck. “It’s all right, Castor. Be still.”

Castor closed his eyes, breath leaving him as he went limp against the bed. The quiet authority in Frau’s voice was the same tone Castor heard when Frau was most intent on his duties, the one that sometimes made Castor think Frau was the truest Bishop among them. It was a voice that told him he was safe in Frau’s hands, and he trusted it now, lying pliant under Frau’s hold as Frau slowly, so slowly, pressed into him.

It felt incredible.

His body opened in a slow, endless stretch, hard and breathless, until Castor was panting against the sheets, trembling with the intensity of it. And Frau just kept moving, easing back and then in with such iron control Castor couldn’t help moaning just to feel it. He didn’t know how long Frau fucked him like that, bent over his bed; he couldn’t keep track of anything but the moment, the hardness of Frau’s cock inside him, stretching and filling him relentlessly, the gentle unbreakable grip that pinned his hands behind his back.

When Frau’s hand closed tight around his cock again it pulled a hoarse sound out of him, muffled by the sheets. Three hard, demanding strokes and he was gone, mindless in the wave of pleasure that dragged him down. He felt Frau drive into him harder, deeper, rocking him up off his knees, and heard Frau groan, felt the grip around his wrists tighten and pin him down ruthlessly.

It felt so good.

He didn’t move when Frau let him go, just lay there and floated in the aftermath of pleasure. He didn’t get to relax this completely very often and he didn’t want to let it go. Frau chuckled softly and dropped a kiss against his shoulder before rising. A few breaths later, he returned with some of Castor’s towels to clean up with, and helped Castor the rest of the way out of his clothes. He let Frau move him, and roused enough to make a soft, pleased noise when Frau joined him in bed and pulled Castor firmly against him. “Sleep now,” he told Castor, and kissed him gently.

They would go back to fighting and sniping in the morning. But for now, Castor closed his eyes and settled meekly into the shelter of Frau’s arms.

Morning would come soon enough.

End

Plaudits

The Quick Comment function has been revised. After considering the current trends of internet reading, I’ve turned it into a one-click button for sending Plaudits (as in applause). There is still an optional box for the name of the plaudits-sender, but the rest is very trimmed down. I hope this will make things easier and more intuitive.

The Name of the Sound

Hyuuga strolled down the halls of headquarters with a bounce in his step. He always liked it when he got an assignment that was actually fun. Or could be made fun.

“Is Ayanami-sama actually going to accept the idea that you were honor bound to engage in single combat with the whole Gibraldan home guard?” Konatsu asked dubiously, at his elbow.

“Sure he will!” Hyuuga asserted with perfect confidence. In fact, Aya-san would believe nothing of the sort, but he would roll his eyes on the inside and be amused, which came to more or less the same thing. “Just let me do the talking while we report.”

“I wouldn’t dream of doing anything else.”

Hyuuga fancied Konatsu’s grim tone covered up a certain amount of amusement there, too. Or at least anticipation. Konatsu always seemed to feel vindicated when Aya-san squelched Hyuuga’s teasing. He didn’t realize yet that was just Aya-san’s way of teasing back. Hyuuga was kind of looking forward to getting to see Konatsu’s expression the day he did figure it out. He was smiling as he threw open the door of Aya-san’s office. “Aya-tan! We’re back from our trip and we brought you souvenirs!”

Ayanami turned away from where he stood at his window, and Hyuuga stilled abruptly at the icy distance in his eyes. Something very close to panic sizzled through him as he looked into the bottomless gaze of Verloren’s memories. If he were alone, he could tease or coax or yield, whatever it took to get Aya-san back from the depths of the past, but he wasn’t alone today.

“Konatsu,” he said quietly, “I’ll make our report myself. Go. Now.”

Konatsu looked up at him, puzzled. He didn’t recognize what Ayanami was right now; Hyuuga had taken some care to keep him away when Ayanami got like this. Perhaps that had been a mistake.

“But…” Konatsu cut off, eyes widening as Hyuuga’s hand closed hard on his shoulder.

Now.”

“You overstep yourself.” Ayanami’s voice was cool and dangerous, and it was rage that flickered behind his eyes today. Not something teasing or coaxing was going to work on.

Not something Konatsu should be present while Hyuuga dealt with.

Hyuuga took a step forward, hoping he could distract Ayanami’s attention. “Lord," he said, level and firm, "Konatsu is your own blood and he serves you well. Your anger shouldn’t fall on him.” From the corner of his eye, he saw Konatsu stiffen, startled and still. Yes, he should definitely have told Konatsu that sometimes the Black Hawks truly did deal with their Lord directly. Hindsight was distressingly acute. Hyuuga stiffened a little himself as Ayanami approached them with a faint, dark smile. His hands curled into fists at his sides as Ayanami stopped beside him, looking at Konatsu.

“You have the arrogance to tell me what I should and should not do, Hyuuga?”

Hyuuga winced; he’d known that was a provocation with Ayanami in this mood, but he’d hoped it would focus Ayanami on him. That… seemed to have backfired. Ayanami took Konatsu’s chin in his fingers, looking down at him with cold eyes. Konatsu stood without resistance, barely breathing, eyes wide and alarmed. “Are you saying,” Ayanami asked Hyuuga without taking his eyes off Konatsu, “that you don’t serve me well? In contrast to Konatsu.”

Hyuuga swallowed, relief and tension winding together down his spine. Ayanami was playing with him; he wasn’t really focused on Konatsu. This could still go well, if he could guess what would satisfy Ayanami, and call it on himself alone. He took a slow breath, considering his options. “If you break me, I’ll survive it and live to serve you after,” he finally said, alternately hot and cold with what he was naming and offering, but he suspected that, after challenging Ayanami in this temper, nothing less would suffice. He bent his head down, underlining his offer. “If it’s me.”

“Indeed.” There was a smile in Ayanami’s voice, a dark one. “Go, Konatsu.”

Hyuuga glanced over from the corner of his eye to see Konatsu, visibly shaking, bow deeply and back to the door. He let out a deeply relieved breath as it closed behind the boy. And then he had to swallow with the heat and apprehension coiling through him as Ayanami turned to him.

“Look at me, Hyuuga.”

Hyuuga lifted his head and his lungs locked. The force of Ayanami’s gaze on him was like a blow, and he felt breathless, unbearable pressure at the core of himself. An increasing pressure. Rather like someone with a sheet of mica between his hands, pressing on the center with both thumbs.

Like the sheet of mica, it wasn’t long at all before Hyuuga’s soul snapped into glittering shards in Ayanami’s hands.

That was only the beginning.


“…and I’ve never seen the Major do anything like that before, what’s going on?! Ayanami-sama was… I mean, he was…”

Katsuragi ran a hand through his hair and sighed as Konatsu faltered into silence. “There are times our Lord’s memories are stronger in Ayanami-sama than others. And our Lord has both great sorrow and great fury in him. Hyuuga is the one who can deal best with him, when he’s like this.”

Konatsu frowned, worry plain in his face. “But what—” He jerked to his feet and spun toward the door of the Black Hawk’s small common room as the first scream rang down the corridor. Katsuragi grabbed his arm before he could run.

“Haruse,” he said calmly. “Close the door.” He scolded himself for not thinking to do that sooner; as soon as Konatsu started talking, it had been clear just how dangerous a mood Ayanami-sama was in. Konatsu whirled on him, outraged, even as Haruse pulled the door firmly to, closing out the sounds from down the hall.

“Katsuragi-taisa!”

“Hyuuga knows what he’s doing,” Katsuragi stated flatly. “He got you out of the way for a reason; there’s nothing you could do that would help. Don’t interfere.” He softened a little at the stricken look Konatsu gave him and guided the boy to a seat and poured him a cup of coffee. The heat would do him good. “I know it’s hard to believe, right now,” he said as Konatsu wrapped shaking hands around the cup, “but Hyuuga does this willingly.”

“Hyuuga and this,” Kuroyuri said softly, curled up on the couch with her arms wrapped around her knees. “It’s kind of like me and flavors.” She cocked her head at Konatsu. “You know how it needs to be really strong for me to taste? Like that.”

Konatsu bit his lip and Katsuragi rested a hand on his head. “Wait here for him. You’ll see.” He fetched a cup of coffee for himself and inquired how Konatsu and Hyuuga’s last assignment had gone, keeping the boy talking so he wouldn’t listen too hard to the faint, desperate sounds still coming through the closed door.


For a long time he drifted in the darkness of his mind and soul. Broken bits of excitement, fear, unbearable and unidentifiable response flickered through and past him. Eventually, slowly, he came back enough to remember a few things. Who and where he was. Who was with him. That sent a jolt of heat and dread through him, though he couldn’t put words to why, yet, even in his own head. Anxiety wrapped around him, sourceless until he finally recognized that there were hands on him, an arm around him, fingers brushing back his hair and gently removing his glasses. When Hyuuga managed to open his eyes, seeing Ayanami looking down at him gave him another jolt.

“Lord,” his lips formed, driven to respond though his throat was too raw to really say it.

Ayanami pressed two fingers lightly against his lips. “Shh. Be still, Hyuuga. It’s all right.”

Hyuuga sagged back, relaxing. That was Aya-san; it was Aya-san’s hand that rested warm on his chest, Aya-san’s zaiphon that curled delicately around long fingers. After another few, dazed moments, he realized that Aya-san must be healing him.

After a time, while he lay in Aya-san’s hold, quiet and contented under the hand piecing his body and soul back together, Aya-san asked quietly, “Why did you provoke me?”

Hyuuga shrugged just a little, still shaky with reaction to what Ayanami had done to him. “I wanted to be sure you focused on me and not Konatsu.”

Aya-san gave him a slightly reproving look. “You know perfectly well how to turn my anger aside, if you were worried about Konatsu.”

Hyuuga smiled up at him, relaxing more as Aya-san’s power smoothed away the strain in his body, the lingering twinges of pain in his soul. “Yeah, but I’m the one you don’t have to hold back with. I’m not going to change that.”

Aya-san looked down at him for a long moment, hand resting against his chest. “Everything changes eventually.”

Hyuuga’s mouth quirked and he let his head rest against Aya-san’s shoulder as his body and soul settled back into solidity. “I’m yours,” he answered simply. “Everything I am is in your hands. If you choose to break me, I’ll submit. If you choose to heal me, I’ll submit. Always” He smiled. “Some day you’ll believe that.”

“‘Always’ is an illusion, Hyuuga.” Hyuuga wrinkled his nose at Aya-san’s stubbornness but held his peace and let Aya-san help him back to his feet. “Can you walk?”

Hyuuga stretched his legs a bit cautiously and nodded. “Yeah.” He smiled wryly. “And I’d better walk wherever Konatsu got to and reassure him the world isn’t ending.”

Aya-san held his eyes for a long moment and finally drew him down gently and kissed him. “Rest once you’ve done that,” he ordered quietly.

Hyuuga smiled. “Yes, Aya-tan," he lilted.

Ayanami looked very nearly exasperated and Hyuuga made his slightly wobbly way to the door, grinning.


Konatsu was trying hard not to bite his nails. The screaming had stopped some time ago, but his imagination insisted on filling in things that might still be happening, each more alarming than the last. When Hyuuga finally appeared in the door of the common room, pale and shaky, Konatsu knocked over his mug springing to his feet. “Hyuuga-san!” He skidded to a halt in front of Hyuuga, checking himself, unsure whether it was safe to touch him.

Hyuuga smiled and ruffled his hair. “I’m fine Konatsu, don’t worry. Aya-tan wouldn’t let me go without making sure of that.” He was leaning heavily against the doorway as he spoke, though, and Konatsu gave him a very dubious look.

“We heard…” he murmured, and trailed off, uncertain how to describe sitting here listening to the muffled screams of his superior officer, knowing they were wrung out of him by the commander they both followed.

Hyuuga winced. “Oh man. Okay, look.” He pushed himself more or less upright and Konatsu finally couldn’t stand it any longer and ducked under his arm to support him. Hyuuga smiled down at him. “Aya-tan wants me to rest. Help me back to my room, and I’ll try to explain, okay?” He waved over his shoulder to Katsuragi, who nodded calmly back.

Konatsu steered them to Hyuuga’s rooms, increasingly puzzled. The Major didn’t really seem like he was injured—more like he was drunk. When Konatsu finally got them as far as Hyuuga’s bed, the man rolled off his shoulder and flopped onto it, limp and relaxed.

“Oof! That was an intense one.” He made mournful puppy-dog eyes at Konatsu from where he lay. “Help me off with the boots?”

Konatsu silently unbuckled the Major’s boots and set them neatly by the bed, and went to fetch a glass of water too. When Hyuuga smiled and patted the mattress beside him, he came and sat, waiting.

“The thing is,” Hyuuga said quietly, after drinking, “Aya-tan only lets himself do this because I like it.” Long, mobile lips quirked up. “Once or twice I’ve even begged for it.” Konatsu felt his eyes widening, and Hyuuga chuckled. “You’ve felt what it’s like at the edge, Konatsu, at least with the sword. This is the same thing, to me.”

Konatsu’s eyes nearly crossed, thinking about it, but he could almost—almost—understand that. “But Ayanami-sama,” he said, low. “He wasn’t just… he wanted to…” Ayanami-sama had wanted to hurt something; it had been right there in the cold eyes looking down at him.

“Mmm.” Hyuuga looked up at the ceiling. “You know the stories our families pass down, about Verloren, right?”

“That he lost his love and followed her soul to the mortal world, mad with grief?” Konatsu guessed. He’d kind of been thinking about that ‘mad’ part, today, he had to admit.

“Think about what the story really means, though,” Hyuuga told him softly. “Before he ever left Heaven, he was blamed for Eve’s death and his power was broken from him. That’s not just a metaphor, for a being of spirit, is it? It’s like he had his hands cut off.”

Konatsu stilled, struck by that. He hadn’t thought about what that meant before, no.

“And on top of that,” Hyuuga went on, holding up a finger, “once he gets here and starts searching for her, his own hands get sent after him to tear his soul and body apart.” Hyuuga looked over at him, eyes grave for once. “You’ve felt what it’s like to have your soul divided, and that was by someone who cherishes you and was careful with you. Imagine having that done by force, by someone you hate, someone you’re fighting with all your strength.”

Konatsu slowly pressed a hand against his mouth, swallowing convulsively as his gorge rose. “Ayanami-sama… I mean, Verloren-sama…”

“Yeah.” Hyuuga folded his hands over his stomach, looking at the ceiling again. “All of that is what’s inside him. And once Raphael’s seal broke, he remembered it.”

“Hyuuga-san,” Konatsu whispered, shocked. This, this was what his superior had put himself in the way of!

Hyuuga smiled, crooked. “He’s the most dangerous thing in all the worlds. And I’m the one person he knows, right down to his soul, he doesn’t have to hold back with. You understand?”

Konatsu was silent for a long moment, thinking. He did understand Hyuuga’s passion for danger, for the edge of life and death; he even shared some of it. He could see why his superior would court Ayanami-sama’s anger. And he thought he could understand why someone who held such anger in his soul needed a way to free it before it overflowed. But there was something else to it, he thought.

“You love him,” he said, finally.

Hyuuga blinked at him and then laughed. “Don’t we all?”

Konatsu smiled a little. He thought he also understood why Hyuuga had explained all this to him, and it wasn’t only for Konatsu’s sake. “Yes, sir. We do.”

Hyuuga yawned and stretched against the bed, curling up into his disordered blankets. “Mm, think it’s about time for me to get some sleep, like Aya-tan said, then.”

Konatsu stood. “Sleep well, Shousa.” He drew the blinds and turned off the lights, closing the door softly behind him.

And then he made his way back to Ayanami-sama’s office.

“Ayanami-sama?” He tapped on the frame of the open door respectfully. Ayanami looked up from where he stood by his desk, and Konatsu didn’t think it was his imagination that that still face turned stiller. He’d had a few years, now, to get used to Ayanami-sama’s expressions, minimal as they were under his unbending control. This one was shuttered. Konatsu nodded to himself and came to stand before his commander, almost as close as Ayanami-sama had stood when he was toying with Hyuuga earlier, looking up at him. “I don’t think you had a chance to hear our report, earlier, sir,” he said quite calmly. “Shall I make it now?”

In comparison to the stillness, the faint smile that suddenly curved Ayanami-sama’s lips, the light of pride and satisfaction in his eyes, was so clear that Konatsu couldn’t help blushing. He ducked his head and glanced up shyly at his commander; he had hoped to offer what reassurance he could, but he hadn’t expected to be shown this kind of approval. It settled his heart.

Ayanami-sama finally stepped around his desk and sat, hands folded on the expanse of polished wood. “Yes,” he murmured, leaning back. “Tell me how it went.”

“Yes, sir.” Konatsu settled himself before the desk, hands clasped lightly behind him. “We reached the Gibraldan Duchy late yesterday…”

Ayanami-sama listened, and in the warmth of his regard Konatsu thought that maybe he truly did understand how Hyuuga could go to such lengths to serve this man and never fear or doubt that he would survive it and be well.

Perhaps Konatsu couldn’t serve in quite the same way, but the next time he saw that fury he didn’t think he’d be afraid either.

End

Strength in Trembling

One of Hyuuga’s great entertainments in life was to tease his commander. Aya-san spent way too much of his time being serious, and Hyuuga felt it was his solemn duty to make sure Aya-san’s face didn’t freeze like that. And, while Aya-san made a great show of being annoyed by the teasing, he always played along. It was always his whip he went for, when Hyuuga was teasing, never his sword, never his zaiphon, not a brisk backhand; actually, when Aya-san responded with only a quick cuff, that was when Hyuuga knew he was genuinely supposed to straighten up and take things seriously. No, when they were playing it was always the whip, which was frankly the show-off option. Aya-san’s speed and control with it were things of beauty.

And, to be honest, it made Hyuuga a little hot to watch. It sometimes made him regret that they only ever played to first touch, in those little matches. But he’d take what he could get, and that was why he was teasing Aya-san again today, lounging beside his desk in the most relaxed attitude possible while Aya-san worked methodically through a stack of tedious-looking paperwork. Aya-san’s eyes were already just a little narrowed with annoyance, which was a good start.

“I’m sure you have work of your own to be doing, Hyuuga,” Aya-san told him, not looking up from the papers.

Hyuuga took a cheery bite out of his candied apple. “Nope! Konatsu will catch anything that really needs attention. So I don’t have anything that needs doing this afternoon.” He slouched more comfortably into the chair, keeping an eye on Aya-san’s hands; after a crack like that, he expected today’s game to get off to a quick start.

So he was nonplused when Aya-san paused and looked up at him. “In fact,” his commander murmured, “you have an assignment on your desk to take care of a little noble’s rebellion in the Third District. I know because I put it there.” Hyuuga blinked, startled, and Aya-san folded his hands contemplatively on his desk. “You don’t ordinarily ignore that kind of work in favor of your games.”

Hyuuga opened his mouth and closed it again, ruefully remembering that he was speaking to one of the premier strategists of the Imperial Armed Forces. “I wouldn’t want you to feel neglected, Aya-tan.”

Aya-san gave him the faintly exasperated look he seemed to save especially for Hyuuga. “I’m not in that much need of a break, Hyuuga.” And then his eyes narrowed and he added, softer. “Are you? Is it a sparring match you’re after?”

Hyuuga smiled at him sunnily. “You know I’ll always take a match with you.” Which was only the truth.

“Hm.” Aya-san stood and came around the desk, arms folded, looking down at him thoughtfully. As if absently, his fingers brushed over the coil of his whip, and Hyuuga really couldn’t help the way his eyes flickered down to it for a single instant. When he forced them back up, Aya-san was smiling, amused. “So that’s it.”

Hyuuga felt his face heating a little. He did try not to be too demanding. It wasn’t his fault that Aya-san could read him like a book.

“Come with me,” Aya-san ordered briskly, and turned toward the door. Hyuuga trailed after with a wry smile. He should really stop thinking he could hide things from Aya-san.

They weren’t headed for any of the training halls that the Black Hawks sometimes used for pure weapons work, though, and puzzlement tugged at Hyuuga as they passed through the offices and into the halls of the officer’s quarters. Was there something Aya-san wanted from his rooms? When they arrived, Aya-san beckoned Hyuuga in with a tilt of his head. Hyuuga shrugged and slipped in after him.

Aya-san’s rooms were neat and orderly, almost painfully so; even the cushions on the couches were carefully squared up. At this hour the wide windows were in soft shadow as the light of the setting sun streamed past from the other side of the Fortress. Aya-san liked to have the morning sun instead. The indirect light was warm and low and a little unworldly.

In that light, Aya-san turned to face him, and Hyuuga was struck all over again by his commander’s beauty and danger, balanced as a fine blade. When Aya-san said quietly, “Come here, Hyuuga,” he did. He wasn’t sure where this was going, but, then, he didn’t need to know.

Aya-san smiled up at him, eyes sharp, and murmured, “If you want the whip, Hyuuga, all you need to do is ask for it.”

Shock and heat struck through Hyuuga like lightning grounding.

“Do you?” Aya-san asked.

Abruptly breathless with what Aya-san was offering him, Hyuuga wet his lips. “Yes,” he answered, husky. “Yes, I want it.” And not just to first touch, this time.

Aya-san’s smile curled a bit wider. “Tell me,” he said softly, and Hyuuga had to close his eyes for a moment.

“I want to feel it,” he whispered. “More than just one touch. I want to feel what you can do with it, god I want…” He took a shaky breath. He hadn’t honestly thought Aya-san would ever offer him this, and the thought being on the other end of Aya-san’s whip, not as a game but purely so that he could taste the intensity and artistry of it, made his knees a little weak.

Aya-san nodded. “Get undressed, then.”

Hyuuga had to take a few seconds to steady his fingers on the buckles of his own uniform, but eventually he peeled himself out of everything and tossed his clothing over the arm of Aya-san’s couch. When he turned around he had to take another second, because Aya-san had stripped off his cap and gloves, his sword and coat, even his shirt, and the shift of muscles in his back as he drew the length of his whip slowly through his hands made Hyuuga swallow hard. When Aya-san turned around, he was smiling.

“Stand here at the window,” he directed quietly, and Hyuuga did as he said, breath picking up as he turned his back to Aya-san and looked out over the glow of the city. A shiver brushed through him as Aya-san’s hands slid slowly down his arms. It came back, stronger, when strings of light coiled down after Aya-san’s fingers and lifted his arms over his head. They were weightless, there was no pressure on his arms at all, but he couldn’t move them. More curled down his legs, holding him spread open in place.

“Aya-san,” he breathed.

A new touch slid over his back, rough but butterfly light against his skin. The whip, he realized, light-headed, snaking in ceaseless S curves, side to side.

“What I can do with it,” Aya-san murmured thoughtfully behind him. “Yes. I’ll show you that, Hyuuga.” The whip snaked over Hyuuga’s ass soft as a promise and he heard Aya-san stepping back a few strides. His senses strained, poised and waiting, and he tensed hearing the soft hiss of the whip through the air.

It barely kissed his back, a single delicate sting, light and teasing. Another. Another, tracking down his body like a scatter of sparks. They flirted with Hyuuga, each bite tiny and promising, until he he was hard, arched against the strings binding him, and making pleading sounds through his teeth. “Aya-san…”

Aya-san laughed softly, and the next stroke didn’t sting; it laid a stripe of pressure against his skin, sharp and defined but almost soft in contrast. Again, and again, and Hyuuga could feel the way Aya-san was loosening each stroke at the last moment, easing the force from it. It made him flushed, a little dizzy, because this wasn’t the way they sparred. This was the way Aya-san made love.

On the next stroke, the whip cracked and Hyuuga moaned as another spark bit the inside of his thigh, just high enough to make his hips jerk futilely against the hold of Aya-san’s strings. "Aya-san." The whip fell on his back again, harder and slowly harder, each stroke driving deeper into his muscles, heating them, burning his skin, printing Ayanami’s mark on him.

Hyuuga was starting to lose everything but the feeling of the whip against his body, the hard, burning lines of it across his back and ass and down his thighs. He could see the city spread out in front of him but he couldn’t pay attention to it. He could hear the sounds of the Fortress around them but none of them mattered except the sound of the whip cutting the air and licking his skin. He could feel sweat on his skin and didn’t know whether he was hot or cold. He was achingly hard and all he wanted was for Ayanami not to stop.

The whip was heavy on him now, jerking his body in the hold of Ayanami’s strings stroke after stroke, and he was panting with it. It was sweet and intense, electric and maddening, and he yearned toward it even as it rose toward an unbearable crest. There was only raw sensation, now, a vast, hot weight of it built up under the blows of Ayanami’s whip, poised to crush him and lifting him up with every gasped breath. A hard crack of the whip across his back sent him arching senselessly against the strings, body trembling. Another stroke. Another. Breath was rasping in his throat and he wavered, senses on the edge of falling into darkness.

Quiet fell. There was warmth against his back, solid and resilient, and hands stroking slowly up and down his body, easing him back to the world. He couldn’t stand, but the strings held him up. Gradually, he recognized Ayanami’s words against his ear.

“…easy, Hyuuga. We’re done.”

Hyuuga rested his head against one of his bound arms, lips parted as he panted for breath. “Ayanami-sama,” he finally whispered, hoarse. It was the only thing that even started to get at how he felt in this time and place, after being brought to the edge like that.

“Yes,” Ayanami murmured to him. His hands moved gently over the slowly settling burn in Hyuuga’s back. “Was that what you needed?”

Hyuuga nodded quietly. He felt more wrung out than even sparring usually left him.

“Good.” The strings moved, moving him with them to turn and face Ayanami, who smiled slowly and drew his head down to a gentle kiss. Gentler than Ayanami usually was with him, and Hyuuga was grateful for it. He felt too raw and open right now to take anything else.

Ayanami looked at him thoughtfully for a moment before going to the sideboard for a glass of water. He came back and fed it to Hyuuga a sip at a time without freeing him; Hyuuga remembered Konatsu doing rather the same thing the last time Hyuuga had woken up from getting a sword through him, and wondered if Ayanami had told him what to do. Finally, Ayanami led him to the bed and let him down onto it, releasing the strings. Hyuuga curled up on his side, still dazed, content to let Ayanami draw a blanket over him and sit beside him, fingers combing through his hair. “You’re going to be marked from this,” Ayanami remarked, eventually, and Hyuuga shivered a little, eyes closing.

“Yes,” he murmured, husky. “I want that.” He wanted to carry this with him for a while, the memory of that amazing touch, so skillful and so intense. The memory of Ayanami’s gentleness, after the ferocity. “Ayanami-sama,” he said again, softly, almost entreating, on the edge of apology. Normally, he was the one who never called Ayanami that, who never demanded, by word or sign, that his friend act as his superior, the responsible leader. But right now, marked so hard and deep by Ayanami’s skill, he couldn’t do anything else.

Ayanami was silent for a moment. “I value your friendship, Hyuuga,” he said at last, quietly. “But your reverence is not a burden to me. You don’t need to hide it. Remember that.”

Hyuuga’s breath caught and he found himself trembling under Ayanami’s hand, under that permission and release. He bowed his head under Ayanami’s fingers and whispered, “Yes, Ayanami-sama.”

For just a little while he wanted to show this openly, his love and, yes, reverence for this man. Soon, he knew, he’d go back to wanting to tweak his oldest friend’s nose and tease him out of his seriousness. But for now, he could be as the other Black Hawks were, could worship the man as much as the god.

His friend would still be there on the other side.

Hyuuga lay quiet under Ayanami’s touch and let the moment be everything and all that it was.

End

Take Me to Yourselves Shamelessly

Konatsu was used to Hyuuga teasing him. Hyuuga teased everyone, including Ayanami-sama, which sometimes led the rest of the Hawks to quiet debates at the break table over whether Hyuuga really was completely insane or just faking it for his own purposes. Konatsu argued that there wasn’t really a difference. Besides, Ayanami-sama seemed quite used to it, which was actually the scariest part.

Konatsu was used to it, also, though, so when the Major’s hand descended out of nowhere to ruffle his hair as he filled out action reports (the Major’s action reports, of course) Konatsu just sighed and kept writing. “What is it, Shousa?”

“Just thought I should congratulate you on keeping up so well with the paperwork,” Hyuuga said in his most annoyingly cheery tone as he wandered past to lean on the completely empty desk that was, technically, his. Konatsu looked up with a glower.

“This is the paperwork you should be doing, Shousa,” he scolded.

He knew that the regular forces also thought he was crazy for the way he talked to the Major. But it had been obvious as the sun in the sky, right from the moment they’d met, that Hyuuga would never respect fear. So Konatsu never showed it. He wasn’t really sure he’d ever even felt it—not fear. Stunned amazement, fierce delight, genuine respect, incredible frustration, all of those, but not fear.

He supposed the regular forces might have a point, by their own standards.

Hyuuga ignored his scolding and just widened his eyes earnestly over the edge of his glasses. “But you do it so much better! Would you like a reward?” He produced a candy apple from the bag in his hand and held it out with a flourish.

“I’m not sixteen any more, Shousa,” Konatsu sighed, filling in another line. “The candy has lost its novelty, and even as a child I never had that much of a sweet tooth.”

“Hmmmm,” Hyuuga mused around a bite of the apple. “True, true. I suppose you are growing up.” A corner of his mouth curled up wickedly. “Perhaps you should have an adult kind of reward, now?”

Despite knowing, knowing, that Hyuuga was doing it to get a rise out of him, Konatsu couldn’t help sputtering. “Major!” As the Major laughed, obviously pleased with the results of his teasing, Konatsu pulled a new form in front of him and concentrated on it ferociously, trying to will the heat out of his cheeks.

Stupid Majors and their stupid jokes, making him think of things he tried to avoid thinking of.

“Hm.” That was such an alarmingly thoughtful sound that Konatsu looked up, wary. And then he had to swallow, because Hyuuga was watching him across the room with sharp, glinting eyes. That wasn’t the teasing look, that was a lot closer to the way Hyuuga watched him when they sparred—the look that made Konatsu have to catch his breath and hope everyone took his flush for exertion. Three long strides brought Hyuuga back across the room to lean over Konatsu’s chair and catch his chin, and Konatsu really couldn’t help the sound he made, staring up into that knife-edge focus.

No. Not knife-edge. Sword edge.

“Looks like you are ready for adult things,” Hyuuga purred, running his thumb over Konatsu’s mouth, and Konatsu snatched in a gasp of breath.

“Shousa…” He could hear how husky his voice was, and thought that was probably what made Hyuuga smile. The smile was what struck a spark of anger in Konatsu—that was the way Hyuuga smiled at prey, and that simply wasn’t acceptable. He stood, hands flat on Hyuuga’s chest to push him back a step, and then fisted in his uniform coat as Konatsu stepped into him and leaned up to kiss him.

“Mmm.” That was an approving sound, and Konatsu gasped again as Hyuuga’s hand on his back pulled him in tight. Hyuuga kissed Konatsu again, hot and intent, tongue sweeping deep into his mouth, and Konatsu lost his breath on a soft moan. “Are you sure you want to try to spar with me this way, though?” Hyuuga murmured into his mouth.

The words brought the heat rushing through Konatsu into gleaming focus. Sparring. Daring the Major’s edge and deadly brilliance. “Yes.”

Hyuuga smiled, dark and sharp, and leaned in to breathe against Konatsu’s ear, “Even though you know I don’t stop, when we fight?”

Konatsu swallowed, torn between another surge of heat at the thought and a twinge of alarm; that was what made sparring with Hyuuga so incredible, but Konatsu knew how to use a sword. This… he didn’t know; did that mean he couldn’t hold his own?

“Shh.” Hyuuga’s fingers slid through his hair. “I won’t hurt you, Konatsu. But I won’t hold back, either.”

Konatsu snorted and relaxed against him; that was all the reassurance he needed. “I don’t want you to hold back.”

Hyuuga laughed. “That’s what I like about you.” He kissed Konatsu one more time, fierce and deep, and drew back with a smile that teased the same way he teased Konatsu with the sword. “Come on.”

Konatsu tried to catch his breath on the way down the halls to the Major’s room, right next to his own, hoping his face wasn’t as flushed as he thought it probably was. It was Konatsu’s room the Major paused at, though. “Go take a shower; I’ll be waiting for you,” he said, and brushed a kiss over Konatsu’s forehead before vanishing in his own door.

Konatsu ducked into his room, face flaming, hugely thankful there’d been no one else to see. “Okay,” he said to his empty room, taking a deep breath. “Shower. Fine. Nothing to worry about.” He firmly ignored the way his fingers fumbled a few times as he took off his uniform and hung it up. He turned the shower on hot, also trying to ignore the sound of water in the pipes on the other side of the wall.

He was used to Hyuuga teasing him, he reminded himself.

The memory of the Major’s eyes on him, as he’d prowled across the office, made Konatsu have to lean against the tile wall for a moment, though. He was going to have all of that ferocity and glee focused on him—and not on the training floor this time.

Which brought up another thought, actually.

Konatsu was aware of the mechanics, of course. There’d been enough exploration going on at the Academy, it was hard not to be. But he’d never tried it himself, not with a man or a woman. He chewed on his lip as he soaped his back, thinking. He’d kind of like to have some idea about this, before he stepped into Hyuuga’s room. How it felt. Finally, he took a little soap on one finger and reached back to press it between his cheeks, probing in. It felt a little odd—unfamiliar. Intimate, maybe, touching inside himself.

He thought about intimacy, and about the Major’s hands doing this, and had to put a quick hand on the shower wall when his knees shook. Maybe… maybe he’d try a little more…

Two fingers was different, that stretched like muscles during a warm-up. He could feel, now, how this might push him, especially with something bigger. And Hyuuga had said he wouldn’t hold back. Konatsu leaned his head against his forearm, on the wall, moving his fingers slowly and panting for breath in the clouds of steam. This… he wanted this, yes. Oh yes.

Once he’d dried off, he hesitated for a few moments, looking at his uniform. In the end, he closed the closet door again, wrapped a towel around his waist, and stuck his head out his door for a quick look to make sure the hall was empty before he dashed over to the Major’s door and inside.

The Major, he couldn’t help noticing at once, hadn’t even bothered with a towel.

“There you are.” Hyuuga strolled toward him and pulled Konatsu up, casual and hard, against his body. “You took a while. No second thoughts, though?” He slid a hand up under Konatsu’s towel to knead his ass.

“No,” Konatsu said, husky, reaching up to wrap his arms around Hyuuga’s bare shoulders.

The Major’s eyes narrowed a little, far more visible than usual with the dark glasses tossed on top of his uniform on the couch. His fingers spread Konatsu’s cheeks, pushing between to rub slow, hard circles over his entrance. Konatsu leaned against him, knees shaky again as his muscles gave way easily. Slowly, Hyuuga smiled. “Ah. You were just getting yourself ready, I see.” The smile was turning dark and hot. “Good.” He backed toward the bed, drawing Konatsu along with him, hand still working over Konatsu’s entrance slow and firm. Konatsu was very glad when they got to the bed, because his knees were giving out completely. “Shousa…”

Hyuuga tugged away the towel and pushed him down onto the sheets. “Use my name, when we’re doing this.” He prowled after Konatsu, bearing him down against the bed.

Konatsu swallowed and murmured, “Hyuuga-san.” He pressed closer, hands tight on Hyuuga’s back, and leaned up to catch his mouth. The force of the kiss he got in answer drove his breath out, and he barely noticed as Hyuuga fished for something among the pillows; it was far more important to pay attention to the way Hyuuga’s tongue fought with his, just as overwhelming as it was when they fought with swords. When Hyuuga slid a thigh between his legs, Konatsu rocked shamelessly against it, gasping with the heat tightening his stomach. When long, slick, sword-calloused fingers pushed deep into his ass, he moaned out loud.

He’d been completely right about how amazing it felt to have Hyuuga’s hands doing this instead of his own. Hyuuga’s fingers worked his ass mercilessly, until he was panting for breath, pressing kisses and sharp bites along Hyuuga’s shoulder. “Hyuuga-san… mm, oh please…” Hyuuga had said he wouldn’t hold back, and Konatsu didn’t want him to, wanted to feel more, to feel everything, right now.

“Hmm?” Hyuuga purred, dark and teasing. “You wanted something?”

Konatsu lifted his head and glared at him. “Fuck me,” he snapped, in no mood for being played with and not intending to let Hyuuga get away with it.

Hyuuga’s smile showed his teeth. “Yeah.” He kissed Konatsu hard and sure before pulling Konatsu onto his side, back pressed against Hyuuga’s chest. Konatsu wet his lips; he could feel Hyuuga’s cock sliding between his cheeks, hard and thick. Hyuuga pushed one of Konatsu’s knees up until he was spread open, half on his stomach, and pressed another kiss to the nape of his neck. Konatsu could feel the curve of Hyuuga’s lips. “Now,” he murmured, and Konatsu’s breath caught at the fierce stretch as Hyuuga pushed into him.

He panted for breath, fingers kneading Hyuuga’s sheet, and Hyuuga didn’t stop—he was deep inside and then pulling back and then driving in again, hard, and he had an arm wrapped around Konatsu to keep him pulled in snug against Hyuuga’s body where he couldn’t get away.

He didn’t want to get away. He wanted Hyuuga to keep going.

Hyuuga did, laughing low and breathless as Konatsu moaned and pushed back against his thrusts, taking him in deeper. Now it was Hyuuga’s teeth that were marking Konatsu’s shoulders, sharp and sure.

When Hyuuga’s hand wrapped around his cock, all Konatsu could think of was Hyuuga’s hand wrapping around his sword hilt, and that sent such a wild rush of heat through him that he was over the edge before he knew it, nearly screaming as pleasure raked down his nerves hard and fast. Hyuuga’s hand slid up and down his cock, quick and rough, and Konatsu shuddered, hips bucking. Hyuuga growled against his ear and pushed him all the way over onto his stomach, hands on his hips pulling him up in the air. Konatsu gasped as Hyuuga’s cock drove back into his ass and fucked him hard and fierce. He moaned into the sheets with every stroke, hands finding a pillow to fist in, gasping with the aftershocks of heat that rocked through him.

The sound Hyuuga made when he finally buried himself in Konatsu and stilled, the low purr of satisfaction, sent a shiver down Konatsu’s spine.

When Hyuuga let him down to the bed again, Konatsu just lay there for a little, catching his breath. Eventually, Hyuuga kissed his shoulder, the solid heat of his body stretched out against Konatsu’s back, and murmured. “Good?”

“Mmm,” Konatsu answered, still floating a little. “Yeah. Lots.”

Hyuuga laughed and gathered Konatsu back against him again, nibbling on his ear. “Good. So, the next time I want to drag you back to my room after practice, I don’t have to hold back?”

Konatsu nearly moaned again at the thought of Hyuuga’s hands on him right after he’d been holding his swords. “No, go ahead.”

“Mmmm.” Hyuuga’s mouth curved against his neck. “And the next time you’re working too hard on the paperwork, I can bend you over your desk and open you up until you’re begging and then fuck you until you scream?”

Konatsu almost said yes before he remembered where and when Hyuuga had just proposed to do that, and choked. He twisted around in Hyuuga’s arms to glare at him. “Shousa!”

Hyuuga sighed. “Guess that’s a no? Too bad.” And then he grinned, dark and gleaming, and traced a finger over Konatsu’s mouth and down the line of his throat. “Well, maybe I can convince you anyway. It works on Aya-tan.”

Konatsu tried not to, but he couldn’t help imagining Hyuuga, this wild, sharp Hyuuga, doing… something with Ayanami-sama in Ayanami-sama’s office. “Shousa…” he protested, strangled.

He was never, ever again going to be able to ignore or explain away the times Hyuuga came back from the office suites shaky and grinning.

He banged his head against the Major’s shoulder a few times, hopelessly, and growled when Hyuuga laughed. The Major owed him for that, and he knew, now, exactly how he was going to demand payment.

Just… not over the desk.

End

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Twenty-One

Hidden Sound had to find a bigger room, this time, to fit in everyone who wanted to attend the summit. Or perhaps, Kakashi amended as he settled beside Jiraiya at one of the tables making up a large, hollow square, everyone who wanted to hear this after-action report. Even Hanzou of Hidden Rain had come, though it was always possible he just didn’t want his heir going without him; as it was, Kanon sat demurely beside him, hands folded on the table in reassuringly plain sight, while Hanzou smirked at anyone who showed discomfort. Even the Master of the Waterfall had shown up, which only left…

The Raikage stormed into the room and pointed at Kakashi and Jiraiya. “Where is she?” he bellowed. “Where is that thieving little—”

Kakashi winced.

“Senju Tsunade,” Jiraiya cut over A, straightening up with a forbidding look, “is still unable to travel after defeating Uchiha Madara by her own hand.” Sacrificing herself for the sake of us all, his tone implied, and don’t you feel like a horrible person for attacking a woman wounded in the line of duty. Kakashi had to admire his delivery.

It wasn’t a complete lie, either. Tsunade had torn her chakra pathways with the jutsu she’d used on Madara, and Naruto’s chakra transfusions did little good if they couldn’t mesh with her coils. He and Shizune had worn themselves to rags trying, and Tsunade was walking around and even yelling at her Council again. But it would be a while before she recovered her full strength, so here Kakashi was to deal with the leaders of the other villages in her place. He suppressed a momentary desire to swap himself for a handy scarecrow and take to his heels while he still could. Truthfully, it was far too late for that.

A opened his mouth and closed it again, glowering at them. B, coming in behind him, tossed Jiraiya a two-fingered wave and clapped his brother on the shoulder. “Come on, Aniki, it isn’t that bad. You’ve still got us.”

“Indeed,” Terumii of the Mist said, raising one elegantly arched eyebrow, “considering that Hidden Cloud is one of only two villages to still have any Sacrifice at all, I think other considerations come first.”

A grumbled audibly, but did stomp over to take a table, brother trailing behind him. Naruto grinned and waved from Jiraiya’s other side, and B returned a thumbs-up.

“Since this is clearly a major concern,” Naridasu of Sound murmured dryly, “may I ask how many villages have seen their erstwhile beasts at all?”

“The Six-tails has been seen on the islands again, not far from Mist’s boundaries,” Terumii volunteered. “The Three-tails… well. It has been sighted in the ocean, but seems determined to stay away from humans. It has been without a host for some time already; I suppose it isn’t all that surprising.”

“Interesting.” The Tsuchikage rested his chin on his clasped fists, eying the rest of them under bushy brows. “The Four-tails has also returned to Earth, and he seems determined to roam over the whole damn country. He’s scared one or two settlements empty, but he hasn’t attacked anything yet. The Five-tails, we haven’t seen.”

“The One-tail will attack if he’s approached,” Gaara said quietly, “but, if left alone, he too he seems content to roam the country.”

“The Seven-tails has not been seen at all.” The Master of the Waterfall folded his arms, giving the room an impartial glare.

A’s glare topped it effortlessly, and the muscles of his arms flexed menacingly as he folded them. “Our Two-tails is malingering around Leaf.” He looked at Kakashi’s delegation like he suspected them of luring the Two-tailed Cat with a gigantic bowl of milk or something.

“She appears to enjoy the company of one of our jounin,” Kakashi told him smoothly, all innocent smiles. “I believe,” he added, over the Raikage’s strangled sound, “that the man in question was fond of Nii, the previous host. Two-tails appears to remember her with some fondness as well, and enjoy his reminiscence about her. If you send a few potential hosts of similar temperament, to contract with her, I imagine she might be willing to return.”

Most of the room was staring at him, and he smiled impenetrably back, stepping discreetly on Naruto’s foot when it seemed like the boy might just stand up and cheer or something equally unsubtle. The other villages need to be coaxed, or possibly stampeded, into this. Warning the target ahead of time was always bad tactics.

“Contract?” the Kazekage asked quietly, fingers steepled, dark eyes sharp.

Kakashi flicked his fingers at Naruto and B. “Beasts in cooperation with their hosts get better results. That much is well demonstrated by now, I think.” The other village leaders looked promisingly thoughtful at this appeal to self-interest.

“It’s not just that,” Naruto spoke up into the quiet, and Kakashi stifled a sigh. Timing. They had to work on Naruto’s timing if he was ever going to do this political thing. “The tailed beasts… they all have their own stuff going on, you know? They have their own lives. Their own purposes.” Naruto looked down and added softly, “I think that’s why things have been so bad since the beasts were captured.”

“So bad?” Oonoki was watching Naruto like a rock-cat about to pounce.

“Well, I mean!” Naruto waved his hands. “Sixty years, right? And wars every time you turn around! The villages were supposed to make things better, to keep everyone from fighting everyone else all the time, right?” He made an expressive face. “Yeah, that really worked. I asked Hinata; the Hyuuga records go way back. She said there are even more casualties now than there used to be, and even more destruction!”

“What do you think the beasts have to do with that?” Oonoki probed. “I suppose the greatest destruction comes when they’re used but they haven’t been used often at all.”

“That’s not it.” Naruto pulled his hands through his hair, looking frustrated. Kakashi really wondered if he’d ever have the patience for diplomacy. Naruto was doing better than he’d expected, though, incorrigible honestly and all, so he leaned back and just watched.

“Nine-tails says his purpose is to destroy corruption,” Naruto said finally. “He says that’s what he is. An… an embodiment of that. And the last thing he wanted to destroy? Was Madara. You see?”

“Naruto.” Gaara leaned forward. “Are you saying that the tailed beasts controlled our corruption, before they were sealed?”

“Along with everything else.” Naruto spread his hands wide. “It’s hard to put into words. The fox… when he talks about it he gets all mystical and shit.” And then he made a face and glanced just over his shoulder. “You do so,” he muttered, and a moment later, a bit more loudly, “You talked out loud, so I get to talk out loud!”

Kakashi had to admit, the expressions on the faces around the table, as they watched Naruto backtalk to an ancient spirit of destruction, were pretty priceless. Business before pleasure, though. He crossed his ankles, looking as relaxed as possible. “Of course, this brings up the point that even the Nine-tails needed human assistance to defend it from human interference. That logic was sufficient to lead he and Naruto to form a contract. Surely similar logic would be compelling to the other tailed beasts.”

“We would all have to be quick about it, before the beasts lose human language again,” Terumii put in, thoughtful. “But it seems worth an attempt, especially considering the casualties that a forceful sealing usually entails.”

“And the Five-tails hasn’t been seen back in Waterfall, hm?” Amused malice gleamed in Hanzou’s smile. “I imagine it would find Rain just as congenial.”

The Master of Hidden Waterfall started up in his chair. “You dare!”

“On a related subject,” Naridasu interjected smoothly, “several of the villages have expressed a desire for new treaties between us, for the extraction of S-rank criminals. I’m sure none of us wish something like Akatsuki’s recent campaign to happen again.”

As the Masters and Kage started bickering over this new topic, Kakashi murmured, “Naridasu’s good.”

“So are you,” Jiraiya returned, just as quietly. “I think they’ll all at least try the contract route.”

Kakashi had to admit, that did seem to have worked. Which implied that, yes, he was going to be good at this.

Damn.

He sighed and slumped lower, hands shoved in his pockets.


“So?” Tsunade demanded, leaning over her desk, which made Shizune shift like she wanted to bundle Tsunade back into a recliner or something. “How did it go?”

“We got everything you really wanted,” Kakashi reported. “Though I shudder to think what the first few actual cases of extradition are going to look like.”

“Like a hot mess. Welcome to politics.” He couldn’t help twitching at that, and she relented a bit. “Good job. Go on, then, pick up a nice mission to settle your nerves. There are a few A-class missions gone begging while everyone heals up.”

“Thank you, Tsunade-sama.” He bowed a little and escaped. Maybe he’d see if ANBU needed an old hand along on something strenuous. They were almost back to treating him like a normal captain, now Tsunade was back on her feet.

Almost.

He landed on the railed walkway around the administration building’s sixth floor and gripped the rail, head lowered. The really terrifying thing was, he’d started to not mind.

“Starting to catch up with you, hm?”

Kakashi berated himself for being so far gone he had let even someone of Jiraiya’s skill sneak up on him; he’d better not go into the field in this condition. “What is?” he asked as evenly as he could, looking over at the older man leaning against the rail beside him.

Jiraiya gave him a stern look. “The fact that you’re pretty much a born leader, Kakashi-kun.” He softened it with a small smile. “You’ve never been a loner, looking for the solo missions. Not like me.”

Kakashi raised his visible brow. This from a man who’d been part of the village’s most famous and stable team, at least until Sakura, Sasuke, and Naruto came along? “Neither are you, Jiraiya-sama,” he murmured.

Jiraiya actually grinned. “There, see? How many people in this village would call me on that to my face?”

Kakashi was starting to have a little sympathy with Sasuke’s complaints about how sneaky Jiraiya could be, when he wanted to get a point across. “I know I’ll be able to do it,” he said quietly, looking out over the town’s bright roofs again. “It’s just… the whole village, this time.”

Jiraiya sighed extravagantly. “Does no one actually listen to a word I say?” he asked the sky mournfully. “It isn’t something you do alone!”

Kakashi’s mouth quirked behind his mask. “Minato-sensei listened. I listened. Eventually.” Quieter, he added, “But I’m not sure I’ll have a choice, when Tsunade-sama steps down. Even if it’s before her death, she won’t want to interfere with my authority.”

“Mm. I expect she’ll retire to take over the hospital, yes.” Another moment of quiet, and then Jiraiya added, softly, “I’ll still be here for you, though.”

That startled Kakashi enough to look over at him. “You…” He hadn’t thought he was anything to Jiraiya that would call for that kind of promise.

“What’s so surprising?” Jiraiya asked, brows arched. “You’re the student of my student. That makes you my grand-student, so it’s part of my job to look out for you.” While Kakashi was blinking at this line of logic, he rubbed his chin. “Hmm. You’re also Sasuke’s teacher, so you’re my teacher-in-law too. Two significant bonds! I don’t see what you’re startled by.”

Kakashi opened his mouth and closed it again, feeling unbalanced. He wasn’t used to being on this end of that kind of teasing.

Jiraiya smiled wryly and reached out to close a strong hand on the nape of Kakashi’s neck. “Kakashi. I’ll be here.”

Kakashi froze, eyes wide. This… this was his gesture. His reassurance to his students or subordinates. It wasn’t something for him. But as Jiraiya shook him gently, he could feel his own shoulders relaxing, his head bending, feel himself leaning into the kind of support he hadn’t felt in too many years. Not since… not since Minato-sensei; perhaps he should have wondered where Minato-sensei had gotten it from. He had to swallow before he could speak, and even then it was husky with that sudden awareness of connection. “Yes, Jiraiya-san.”

“We’ll find the ones to help you carry it, Kakashi,” Jiraiya told him quietly. “Don’t worry about that.”

Kakashi just nodded, wordless, and let that reassurance soak in.

Maybe it would be all right, after all.


Sakura walked quietly down the river path to the Memorial Stone, fingers wrapped lightly around a spray of white bell-flowers.

This was the first time she’d visited the Memorial Stone like this, and Sasuke and Naruto had offered to come with her, but she’d told them to stay at home so she’d know where to find them afterwards. Neither of them were comfortable with the Stone. Sasuke had too many family names on it, and Naruto always felt guilty for the years when he hadn’t recognized his own father and mother’s names there. Sakura had no family on the Stone. The Haruno family had always been civilians; her grandparents had moved off the farms and inside the village bounds to keep shop, but none of their children had felt called to the field the way Sakura had.

But there were a handful of new names on the Stone, this season, and one of them had been a friend.

Noriko had been part of the Torture and Interrogation unit. Sakura had known her in passing for years, and she’d been present at Sakura and Ino’s debriefing about interrogating Sai, when they’d returned from the Island Turtle. She’d taken them out, afterwards, and poured drinks into them until their hands stopped shaking. And she’d been there a few days later, when Sakura had come face to face with Sai in the entrance to Intelligence and frozen like stone, torn between the urge to attack him and the guilt of having screwed with his head to get information out of him. Noriko had been the one to know it was going to happen and the one who’d been there to talk Sakura down. To tell her she wasn’t a horrible person for having done it, or a weak person for being disgusted by it.

"You did what you had to, when you had to," she’d said softly, watching the stream of water as she’d run a glass for Sakura. "That’s the best any of us do." It had helped.

And now she was dead. She’d been killed by one of the black and white attackers, creating an opening for her team to destroy it.

Sakura stepped out from under the trees and hesitated, seeing someone else already at the Stone. But the slanting afternoon light struck messy silver hair that she recognized, though she hadn’t known Kakashi-sensei was back from what Sasuke had dryly called his vacation mission. After a moment she walked up softly and knelt down in silence beside him. She laid down her bell-flowers by the lilies already there and bent her head for a breath, whispering Noriko’s name in her heart and wishing her spirit all luck and speed. When she looked up, Kakashi-sensei was watching her, visible eye dark and quiet.

"She told me," Sakura said into that quiet, "the best we can do is what we have to, when we have to."

"Wise words," Kakashi-sensei murmured.

"I thought so." She looked down at the flowers. "So I wanted to thank you."

"Hm?" He cocked his head. "What for?"

Sakura slid her hands through the eighteen seals for silence, stilling the air completely for a meter in all directions. Into the faint flatness of their sphere of sound, not moving her lips, she said, "For killing Danzou."

Kakashi-sensei went completely, dangerously still beside her.

"I know I shouldn’t speak about it, even with safeguards," she said, eyes still on the pale flowers. "But I needed to say this to you, and this seems like the right place to say it. Thank you. He was poisoning our village. What he did to Sai, what he wanted to do to Naruto…" her teeth set hard just thinking about it. "So. It needs to be said." She scooted around on her knees and bowed over them, formally. "Thank you for the care you have taken of us."

After a long moment, Kakashi-sensei sighed and touched her shoulder. "Where did you hear of this, Sakura?"

She straightened up and shook her head. "No one speaks of it. Not directly. But I think someone in ANBU is pulling for you, because it’s all over half the village that you braved Madara’s sword to rescue Danzou. Even though he had already taken fatal damage." She smiled crookedly. "And that’s something you would do, Kakashi-sensei, which is why people are buying it. But I was there when you spoke to Sai, when you swore to bring Danzou down. I saw how furious you were. I can believe you didn’t want Madara to kill him. But you would never have left him alive." Her hands clenched in her lap, and her voice turned harsh. "And you were right not to!"

She could just see the faint quirk of his mouth behind his mask. "You’re going to be the strict one of Naruto’s first councilors, I can tell."

Sakura smiled. It was the first time he’d teased any of them properly in weeks. "Yes, Kakashi-sensei," she said demurely, and dismissed her soundproofing. Mission completed, on all counts. She stood, dusting off her pants, and nodded to the Stone. "It was here, wasn’t it, that you told us, the first time: those who abandon their comrades are less than trash. You’ve never done that before; and you haven’t now either."

"I suppose not." Kakashi-sensei traced one name with light fingers before he stood too, and strolled with her back down the river path. "So what were the three of you up to while I was gone?"

Sakura laughed. "We’re starting a campaign to get Nine-tails accepted by the village." She smiled up at him, sidelong and coaxing. "I don’t suppose you have any thoughts about that?"

"Hmm." Kakashi-sensei rubbed his chin thoughtfully, and Sakura could tell that he was smiling. "Well, I suppose you need to get people used to seeing him around, for starters…"


Nine-tails bounded across the trees of another forest valley, and behind his eyes Naruto laughed; he could feel the wind blowing past Nine-tails ears, could smell the scents of trees and earth, damp from a recent rain, of quick forest animals, of smoke from a nearby town. Sakura, perched on Nine-tails’ neck whooped with glee at the speed, and when Nine-tails was in his own form like this Naruto could feel the brilliance of excitement in her chakra, and the warmth of Sasuke’s pleasure, just behind her. Even if Sasuke refused to yell with the fun of it like him and Sakura.

Hmph. Foolish kits. The fox sounded very nearly indulgent, though. Naruto had already figured out that he liked Sakura, especially after getting a good whiff of her when her seal was activated, that night at the south gate. Sasuke and the fox seemed to have reached a mutual agreement to ignore each other, but that was way better than the growling and snapping, so Naruto called that a win too.

And, okay, so the shinobi on the walls still tended to check their weapons when Nine-tails strode up under the sunlight like this, but Naruto was working on that. When he and the fox switched, today, he kept the tails out.

“Naruto?” Sakura rose from her landing and cocked her head at his waving tails. “Did you want to spar for a few rounds before lunch or something?”

He grinned. “Not exactly. Come on, let’s see what’s at the market.”

Sasuke gave him a sidelong look. “You’re volunteering to shop for real food instead of agitating for ramen. Definitely up to something.”

Naruto grinned, innocent as could be, and grabbed their hands to drag them through the gate. People turned and looked, but, hell, Naruto had been used to that all his life. He concentrated on trotting cheerfully among the produce stalls and arguing volubly with Sasuke over which fish to get for dinner. Finally, after he’d hooked one of the shopping bags over a tail to carry, ignoring the incredulous noise the fox made in the back of his head, the lady with the turnips and potatoes dared to ask, “Er. Uzumaki-kun. The… the tails? Why?”

Naruto blinked at her, wide eyed. “Oh, well, they’re kind of handy you know. Like extra hands almost.” He squinched up his face, thoughtfully. “Course that isn’t always an advantage. I mean, sometimes the fox gets pissy about me using them, and then he…” he yelped as a tail slid under his arm. “Hey, hey, cut that out!” Another snaked up under his shirt and he batted at it. “Cut it out, that tickles!”

What are you doing?! the fox demanded, outraged.

I’m fixing your reputation, shut up and let me work, Naruto answered briskly and continued tickling himself with their tails, ignoring the fox’s sputtering. The stall keeper had her fingers pressed to her mouth, but her eyes were starting to dance.

Sakura had a hand over her face, which Naruto could tell was totally hiding snickers, but probably looked exasperated to anyone else. Sasuke just rescued the bag from Naruto’s tail and rolled his eyes. “We’ll take three of the sweet potatoes,” he said, ostentatiously ignoring his squirming, laughing teammate; which, of course, was perfectly normal.

There was disbelief on a lot of faces, but the start of amusement also. Possibly even vindication on a few, the people Naruto had pranked most often as a kid. Naruto bundled the tails up in his arms and grinned, breathless, at Nine-tails’ appalled silence in the back of his head.

Total win. He’d have to see if Kakashi-sensei had more ideas. Or maybe Iruka-sensei. Yeah; he’d ask Iruka-sensei. He laughed as Sasuke turned back for home, shaking his head, and Sakura linked arms with him, pulling him along.

They were going to change things.


Tsunade wandered through the Residence library, contemplating the shelves of restricted scrolls and smooth, burled wood pillars. She paused in one corner to trail her fingers along the personal records of the ones who’d come before her. Minato-kun, Sarutobi-sensei, her great-uncle. Her grandfather.

“You didn’t know what would happen,” she told his memory quietly. “You were doing the best you could for your people. All of us… just doing the best we can and keeping on.”

And by that measure, Naruto might really be the best Hokage they’d ever had.

“Tsunade-sama?” Shizune called from the doorway. “It’s almost time for the monthly meeting.”

Tsunade sighed and pulled her mind back to business. “Anything I need to know before we go in?” she asked, striding for the door.

“A message from the Mizukage just got in, saying Suigetsu might show up here soon and would we please send him home again.” Shizune handed over the message strip for her to read as they paced down the Residence halls to the front doors.

Tsunade laughed out loud as they came out into the chill of the afternoon air. “Tell whoever takes that mission to wait until he’s finished his drink; we don’t want more busted up bars than we can help.” She had to admit, she liked that kid’s style.

“Yes, Tsunade-sama,” Shizune said repressively. “There’s one other thing. The master of the last Fire caravan to pass through Hidden Rain says that he saw someone matching the description of Yakushi Kabuto.”

Tsunade’s eyes narrowed, seeing for one moment that lying smile instead of the trees that lined the way to the administrative center. “So the little snake has surfaced again. Don’t let Sakura hear about this,” she ordered. “Not until we confirm it. I don’t want her taking off after him into the middle of Rain, and most likely her team with her, without full information.”

“Yes, ma’am,” Shizune murmured.

Tsunade paused at the gates to the administrative center and looked back out over her village, hands on her hips. The streets were busy at this time of day, and a handful of shinobi had taken the roof path, flickering from shadow to shadow. “We’re not doing too badly, are we?”

Shizune smiled. “Not badly at all.” Of course, then she had to add, gently, “The meeting, Tsunade-sama?”

Tsunade sighed. “Yeah, yeah. I’m going.” She straightened her haori and prepared for yet another hour or two of frustrating wrangling. “At least this time the old goats won’t be able to claim Naruto and Sasuke haven’t earned every bit of their promotions, along with Sakura.”

She tossed one last smile over her shoulder, at her busy, lively village full of busy, fractious people, all of them living on that thin line between service and selfishness. Sometimes they fell, one way or the other. Sometimes she fell, like she had for years before Naruto pulled her back. The point wasn’t not falling. The point was taking the hand that reached out to pull you up again.

Maybe it was time for her to start keeping her own personal record, as the Fifth. Maybe that would be what she wrote down, to start it.

“Let’s go, Shizune,” she said, still smiling.

End

The Command of Those Who Ask of Me

Hyuuga peeked into his commander’s quarters and sighed. According to reports, Aya-san had been standing at the picture window in his rooms for a very long time, looking out on the city as dark fell and all the lights that lived on conquered zaiphon twinkled on. That was usually a bad sign. Sometimes, when Aya-san brooded for too long, he lost himself a little, and when he lost himself to Verloren’s memories of pain or anger it wasn’t good for anyone. Not unless there was something on hand he could kill to regain his equanimity.

When there wasn’t, well, that’s when getting him back out became Hyuuga’s job.

Hyuuga waved to Katsuragi, waiting down the hall, and slipped in, closing Ayanami’s door behind him. Katsuragi would keep everyone clear until he was done. He came up behind Ayanami on quiet feet and slid his arms around his waist. The straightness of Ayanami’s spine went a little stiffer.

“Hyuuga,” Ayanami said, cold and low. It was the voice of death, sharp as the edge that could cut a soul, and if Hyuuga hadn’t already guessed he’d have known right then who he had his arms around.

He bent his head under the dark weight of that voice and murmured against Ayanami’s shoulder, “You are my Lord. I was born to serve your will, like every other one of the Fallen families that come from your blood.” Ayanami’s stiffness settled a little with what Hyuuga suspected was satisfaction, and he went on, soft and coaxing. “But you’re also my commander, who leads and cherishes us. And my oldest friend, who I love.” Very low, he finished, “Let me take care of you tonight?”

As he spoke he could feel Ayanami relax, slowly, until the body in his arms leaned back against him with a human sigh. “Hyuuga,” his friend’s voice said, quiet and level but warm again.

“Thank you.” Hyuuga smiled against Aya-san’s ear. “Come to bed, Aya-san? You’ve been standing here a long time.”

“I suppose I have.” Ayanami stirred and straightened, and if Hyuuga kept a sharp eye on him and a hand on his shoulder until he was sure his friend wouldn’t fall after so long ignoring his mortal body, Aya-san pretended he didn’t notice.

He did snort a little bit when they got to the bedroom and Hyuuga brushed his fingers aside and undid Ayanami’s sword belt himself.

“Let me, Aya-san,” Hyuuga said softly, eyes on the buckles. He wanted to keep Ayanami focused on the here-and-now-and-human tonight, until whatever he’d been brooding about receded a little and he was in a better temper.

He hung the sword and belts over Ayanami’s weapons rack and delicately undid the hidden clasps of Ayanami’s uniform coat. Aya-san’s lips were ever so faintly curving up, which was a good sign. Hyuuga shook out the coat and hung it carefully while Ayanami sat down on the edge of his bed. He knelt swiftly at Aya-san’s feet, glancing up at him admonishingly over the edge of his glasses, as he loosened the buckles of Ayanami’s boots. Aya-san let Hyuuga tug them off and sat patiently while he put them in the closet and came back to unbutton Aya-san’s shirt.

“You’re starting to look overdressed,” Ayanami finally murmured, and Hyuuga laughed.

“Am I? I’d better take care of that, then.” He laid his sheathed swords across Ayanami’s table and folded his coat over the back of a chair. Boots, shirt, and pants followed quickly, and Aya-san was definitely looking amused when Hyuuga came back to kneel by the bed in nothing but his shorts and socks.

“Less so now,” he allowed, and let Hyuuga undo his pants, tugging them off, and the shorts with them, with brisk, gentle hands.

“Lie down,” Hyuuga directed. Ayanami’s brow rose, eyes turning hard again, and Hyuuga gave him a wry smile, still on his knees. “You command me, Aya-san. In every way. You know that. But let me be your old friend for tonight?”

After a long moment, Ayanami nodded and stretched out on his stomach, head pillowed on his crossed arms. Hyuuga slipped up onto the bed and knelt beside him. He spread a hand against Aya-san’s back, leaning just a little weight on it until he finally felt Aya-san breathe out and relax a hair.

That was enough to start with.

He slid his hand up into Aya-san’s unruly, silver hair to knead his fingertips over where the band of the uniform hat fell. He worked his fingers lightly over Aya-san’s wrists where the cuff of the gloves bound sometimes. He ran his hands slowly down Aya-san’s body to knead his calves where the boots buckled tight and his feet where the hard boot heels made cramps. All the little places where the uniform chafed or pulled, he soothed and he didn’t even try to work on Aya-san’s shoulders until he’d had a while to calm under the slow touches.

Finally, though, Aya-san’s arms unfolded and he settled a little more easily against the bed, and Hyuuga smiled. Now he could lean over Aya-san and put some force into it as he kneaded his friend’s shoulders and back. Tonight Aya-san was even at ease enough to let his breath hitch and gasp as Hyuuga worked his muscles loose.

“There,” Hyuuga murmured, when the muscle and skin under his hands was warm and flushed and flexible again. He leaned down and brushed a soft kiss over the back of his neck. “Ready to sleep?”

“Mmm.”

Hyuuga very carefully did not chuckle at the drowsy sound. He’d save up this triumph to tease Aya-san with the next time he wanted to match his speed against Aya-san’s whip. He just raised the covers and held them for Aya-san to slide under before tugging off his shorts and socks and joining him.

It wasn’t all that often that Aya-san let him do this, and Hyuuga hoarded the memories of nights that Aya-san let Hyuuga hold him, nights he consented to rest his head on Hyuuga’s shoulder and drift off while his oldest friend watched over him.

Hyuuga carded his fingers slowly through Aya-san’s hair and smiled into the dark.


Hyuuga woke with most of the covers kicked off and no Aya-san anywhere near. That wasn’t unusual for these mornings, and he just stretched and yawned, rubbing sleep out of his eyes as he glanced around for his commander. He half expected to see Ayanami already in his uniform and finishing breakfast, but instead he was standing in the sun from the windows in only a robe.

“Morning, Aya-tan.” Hyuuga leaned up on an elbow, lazily. “Taking it easy today?” Maybe he could even tempt Aya-san back into bed for a little…

The thought cut off abruptly as Ayanami turned and Hyuuga saw his eyes, brilliant and distant and sharp as knives over a curl of lips even sharper. Ayanami had clearly gotten over his brooding, Hyuuga thought with incongruous calm, which didn’t mean he would be any less volatile as long as he stayed like this. Merely less inclined to outright bodily harm.

“So,” Ayanami murmured, chill and velvety. “You say you serve me?”

Hyuuga swallowed against the scald of adrenaline through his veins, seeing that edge in Ayanami’s smile, hearing it in his voice. Both focused on him, and his cock was hardening in response. “Yes, Lord,” he answered, husky.

Ayanami’s eyes raked up and down his body, and a curl of amusement threaded through their sharpness. “Hmm.” He reached out a hand and beckoned, and Hyuuga came up off the bed in one swift movement to stand before Ayanami.

It was crazy to stay in the same room with this man, with the memory awake behind Ayanami’s eyes right now, turning them inhuman. Nothing Hyuuga had ever met on any battlefield would ever be as dangerous as that soul’s attention, as what Ayanami could do to him with a gesture. With a thought.

Hyuuga’s breath came short and fast as he thought about that, and he was so hard he was getting light-headed.

The curl to Ayanami’s lips was definitely amused, and he wrapped his hand around the nape of Hyuuga’s neck with casual, inhuman strength. “Not as much to say for yourself as usual, this morning,” he observed.

Thrill sang through Hyuuga and he grinned, teeth bared as he stepped up to dance with death. “Well, if you want your own personal jester, of course I’ll be happy to oblige. Aya-tan.”

Ayanami laughed once, low in his throat, and his hand pressed down, bearing Hyuuga down to his knees with terrifying ease. “Not today.” He slid his hand up the line of Hyuuga’s jaw and brushed a thumb over his lips.

“Yes, Lord,” Hyuuga agreed, husky, eyes lifted to Ayanami’s. Ayanami held them as he pulled loose the tie of his robe and stepped closer. Hyuuga didn’t look away as he opened his mouth for Ayanami’s cock, wrapping his lips around the thickness of it. This was familiar, and so was the possessiveness of Ayanami’s fingers threading through his hair. But the casual force that drove Ayanami’s cock deep into his mouth was something he had only tasted a few times. When Ayanami was like this, when the age of his soul walked abroad laughing, he used Hyuuga as off-handedly as if it was his right to do so.

It was, of course.

Hyuuga slid his hands up to close tight on Ayanami’s hips, not trying to move him at all but still a bit of presumption, a teasing challenge to Ayanami’s authority. He moaned low in his throat as Ayanami’s fingers tightened, holding him perfectly still while Ayanami fucked his mouth hard and thorough. There was no other thrill, no other danger, quite like this. Hyuuga savored the edge of it as he worked his tongue over Ayanami, never looking away from the cold, brilliant eyes that looked down at him with distant amusement.

It was the eyes that finished him in the end, he thought. The way Ayanami watched his body pull taut, his breath come fast and short, with nothing but that sharp amusement. The way Ayanami held his eyes and didn’t let him look away while his cock filled Hyuuga’s mouth. Even when the raw heat of being pinned under that gaze finally raked through Hyuuga, sending his hips bucking helplessly against air as pleasure wrung him out, Ayanami didn’t let him look away, and his moans were chopped short by the deep, hard thrust of Ayanami’s cock into his throat.

When hot, salty flatness spilled across the back of Hyuuga’s tongue, it wrung one last shudder of pleasure out of him.

Ayanami finally pulled away, fingers loosening and sliding through Hyuuga’s hair. “That will do,” he murmured.

“Yes, Lord,” Hyuuga panted, voice husky, but still teasingly smug. He shivered as Ayanami drew his head all the way back and leaned down to kiss him, sharp and possessive. He didn’t move from his knees as Ayanami turned and walked through his rooms to the bath, just slumped back to catch his breath.

And grinned.

He knew even the other Black Hawks thought he was a little crazy, but that was okay. It meant he got mornings like this all to himself.

And there was nothing like it.

End

A Kiss Upon A Tide

Years of living in Midgar had blunted Tseng’s senses, but there were still times of the year that tugged at him. The seventh moon, when the lovers bridged the skies. The tenth moon, when a tiny wooden canal wound its way through Little Wutai for a single night to bear lanterns down its length before being packed away in sections for another year. The turning of the year was the worst of them, but normally even that was no more than an itch in the back of Tseng’s head, a memory of smoke on the night air and the sway of human bodies tracing the path of life through every city in the land, a faint tug at him to go and mark that path for the dancers as he’d been trained to for so many years. Normally, he could bear it with, if not perfect equanimity, at least outward calm and perhaps an inward rude gesture or two in Leviathan’s direction on the bad years.

That, however, had been before Rufus had set his hand on his own destiny.

Tseng stepped back from the door of his city apartment, resisting the urge to keep backing up or to let his eyes follow the light trailing from Rufus’ every gesture as he stepped inside. No moment of Rufus’ presence had been without a faint glow, ever since they’d come back to Midgar, but the new year had fanned that fire, and their journey itself had stripped away the dimness from Tseng’s sight. That light pulled at him, like the desire to mark the paths of the city’s life only far stronger; it closed over him like water as Rufus stepped past him into his home.

“You’re sure I’m not interrupting?” Rufus asked him, head cocked, eying the dark, patterned kosode1 that Tseng wore. “Were you going out?”

Of course Rufus knew about the festival; these days there were very few things about Midgar he did not know. Tseng shook his head, trying to focus on the question instead of the burning of Rufus’ will and soul. “That would be… uncomfortable for everyone.” The most traditional immigrants would be the most torn between begging the only fully trained priest in the city to officiate, and ignoring the exile as law dictated. Tseng had just wanted the little extra comfort of rightness that proper clothing could offer tonight. “Besides,” he added lightly, closing the door, “you sounded a bit desperate when you called.”

Rufus kicked off his shoes and stalked into the living room, movements restless. “Not desperate, I just… needed to be somewhere every little thing wouldn’t be a fight.” He thumped down onto the couch in a slouch that threatened to put yet another tear in the battered jeans he’d worn over.

Tseng had to admit that, even with the worst of the old guard removed, Shinra was still a constant struggle to rebuild. He couldn’t blame Rufus for wanting time and space away from that, however overwhelming his company was to Tseng in this season. “I can’t promise never to argue with you,” he murmured, “but at least you know you have the final word.”

Rufus glanced at him, mouth quirked. “Do I?”

Clearly, Rufus was remembering some of their more epic arguments. Any other day, Tseng would have said something dry, something to tease Rufus’ sense of humor, but tonight, with the brightness of Rufus’ spirit in his eyes, he said simply, “You are my lord, and I am your servant.” He almost had to close his eyes as the words took up the resonance of the changing year and rang his own spirit like a struck bell, true and pure and right.

When he looked up again, Rufus’ eyes on him had turned dark, and he held out a hand. “Tseng. Come here.”

Caught by the brilliance that followed Rufus’ hand, Tseng came to him and sank down to the floor before him, smoothing his robe under his knees with an old, practiced sweep of his fingers. He knelt there, surrounded by the brightness of Rufus’ presence, waiting to know what he required.

Rufus leaned forward and caught his chin, stroking his thumb along the line of Tseng’s jaw. “Are those gods of yours really that strong?" he asked. "That they could make you leave everything that ever formed your life, to come here?” The flick of his fingers took in the apartment, with its mats and screens and discreet shrine, and Tseng’s words and actions this night, none of them part of the ways and customs Shinra had shaped in Midgar.

Tseng smiled faintly, ruefully; Rufus saw so much, and yet he still seemed to find this hard to believe. “The gods were not that strong. You were. You are.”

Tseng had understood young that he had greater strength than his brother and lord, and his disquiet at that had grown along with his strength, year after year. His training in the Temple had only given the disquiet sharper form. So many of the signs that showed a firm minister and a yielding prince were signs of overturning or stagnation. Biting Through, The Power of the Great, Opposition, The Preponderance of the Small.

The Wanderer.

That had been the sign in Tseng’s heart when he’d finally fought his way through his fears and doubts to a decision to leave. He had hoped, among other things, to remove one danger from his brother’s house. And that was why, underneath the incandescent rage when he’d first set eyes on Rufus and understood he had been manipulated by the gods from start to finish, there had been a seed of relief. Tseng was a powerful man, thoroughly trained in mind and spirit and body, but Rufus was stronger yet. Serving that strength, Tseng could finally take his rightful part, could yield to his lord without fear, could be at ease in the proper order of the world that even the gods and their machinations must be subject to.

“When I am at your side,” he said softly, looking up at Rufus, “you make the world right.”

Rufus’ eyes on him softened. “Tseng.” There was pleasure and possession in that naming, and Tseng wasn’t surprised when Rufus slid off the couch to kneel over his folded legs, both hands coming up to close around Tseng’s face and tip his head back so Rufus could kiss him. Tseng leaned into it, pliant in Rufus’ hands, mouth opening under Rufus’ demand. He almost swore he could feel the heat of Rufus’ aura burning around those hands as they slid down Tseng’s throat to his shoulders, pulling loose his robe and stroking it down to hang from his arms. When Rufus finally drew back it was hard for Tseng to let that heat go, and Rufus smiled down at him as he swayed forward. “We will make the world right, yes,” he said, and Tseng swallowed at the force of Rufus’ spirit flaring around him.

“Yes, Lord,” he answered, just a little breathless, giving himself to Rufus’ will without reservation, and he nearly moaned with the surge of rightness through his senses.

Rufus brushed a kiss over his forehead and murmured, “Turn around.”

Tseng turned, hands spread against the denseness of the mats, starting to stretch out under Rufus. He flushed a little to realize just how disordered his clothes were as he felt his hair sliding over his bared shoulders and back.

And then he felt Rufus’ hand on his skin pushing his hair aside, baring his nape and closing firmly over it.

A shudder of heat shook Tseng so hard his arms gave out and he collapsed down to the floor, breath completely gone. He still didn’t know whether Rufus understood everything this gesture meant, but he certainly knew it was the mark of his command over Tseng. And to feel Rufus laying such definite claim, knowing or not, to his rights over Tseng’s life and death undid Tseng every time. Tonight, feeling so clearly the weight of Rufus’ spirit, it nearly struck him senseless. He lay still under Rufus’ hand, panting softly for breath.

“You’re mine, Tseng,” Rufus said quietly, fingers tightening until Tseng gasped. “I won’t let go.”

The words fell together with Rufus’ kiss, earlier, the brush of his lips over Tseng’s mark of exile, and wrote their meaning in sweetness and fire down Tseng’s spine. The bone-deep knowledge of place, of belonging at this man’s side, broke through Tseng like a wave cresting and set him trembling. “Yes,” he whispered. “Please.”

Rufus’ thumb stroked against the skin of his nape gently. “Shh.” His other hand slid up the back of Tseng’s thigh, pushing his robe with it until Rufus was pushing slick fingers slowly into him. The small corner of his mind dedicated to irreverence managed to wonder whether Rufus had brought his own lube or had fished Tseng’s out of the couch cushions. It eased Tseng back from the edge a bit, the familiarity of Rufus’ hands on him like this, though the hand on his neck, holding him down, still put a hot shudder through him. The slow stretch and slide of Rufus opening him up eased the desperation of that need, comforted him with the assurance that it would be met. The promise of Rufus’ fingers driving deeper steadied him.

He still made a faint sound of protest when Rufus released his nape to slide a hand down his back and pull his robe the rest of the way off. “Shh,” Rufus told him again, low and sure. “You belong to me, whether my hand is on you or not, Tseng. Remember that.”

Tseng bent his head, flushed with the heat of his response to those words. “Yes, Lord.”

“Good,” Rufus purred, fingers twisting slowly deep in his ass. “Now, once again—come here.” His hand on Tseng’s hip urged him up.

It took a moment for Tseng to gather himself enough to move, under the weight of Rufus’ spirit in this small space, but after a breath he rocked back onto his knees in the muddle of his robe, resting his forehead on his crossed arms. The delicate brush of air over his still-bared nape made him shiver. This too felt right, though, to be spread out and opened, all of him offered to Rufus. He moaned softly when he felt the roughness of Rufus’ jeans against his thighs and ass and realized Rufus hadn’t bothered to undress himself while he’d been stripping Tseng naked, body and heart. “Rufus, please,” he whispered, hot and breathless.

“Yes,” Rufus answered him, bedrock surety in his voice, and then he was pushing into Tseng, stretching and filling him. Body-feeling ran deep and fast alongside spirit-feeling, wrapping around each other into a current of pleasure so heavy Tseng groaned with it, hands clutching at the floor, at his robe, at anything to anchor him while Rufus fucked him hard and slow. But there was no anchor in this except Rufus himself, Rufus who held Tseng still for every stroke the same way he held Tseng in his right place in the world. Tseng gave himself to that strength, spread himself wider for Rufus, surrendered his soul and senses into those hands, and cried out as they closed on him tighter.

Pleasure wrung him out hard, and the velvety edge of Rufus’ moan swept an extra shudder through him. Rufus kept him up on his knees, fucking him harder even while Tseng’s muscles melted as all the built-up tension in him released at once. Tseng panted, cheek pressed against the mats of the floor, and groaned softly when Rufus buried himself deep, hips pressed tight against Tseng’s ass. When Rufus finally eased him down again he just lay there for a while, savoring the slow stroke of Rufus’ fingers carding through his hair. “Thank you,” he said at last, softly.

“Shouldn’t that be my line?” Rufus asked, leaning over him on one elbow, smiling. “Thanking you for your service?”

Tseng turned slowly onto his side, looking up at Rufus. His shirt was pulled up and his jeans hung open, and his hair was rumpled. He should have looked like a college student in the middle of an energetic party.

He didn’t.

Tseng bent his head before the radiance Rufus wore so easily, before the knowledge and responsibility that shadowed those bright eyes after the last year. This was his lord, the one who made a true place for him in the world. “My service is your right.”

After a long, silent moment, a firm hand lifted his chin and Rufus kissed him gently. “Know that I will never take that for granted.”

Tseng shivered as the words slid over him, sure as Rufus’ touch. “And that’s why,” he murmured.

Rufus snorted and stroked Tseng’s hair back over his shoulder with light fingers. “After all your hard work, I should hope so.” His fingers slid up to caress Tseng’s nape again, easy and possessive, and a thread of heat wound down Tseng’s spine.

He could still feel the changing of the year, but it didn’t pull at him any more. The year, and the world, turned now on the one prince great enough for Tseng to yield his will and service to.

Tseng bowed his head again and rested under Rufus’ hand.

End

A/N: Tseng’s casual wear should probably be a noushi (casual or visiting wear for kuge), not a kosode (only outerwear by the period when the buke had already taken power), but we’re already making a glorious mishmash of times and cultures, and kosode are sexier than noushi, so there you go. Picture a fairly casual kimono.back

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Twenty

Alarms were ringing through Konoha’s night, hurrying the civilians to the shelters, raising the lights in the village center, calling the close patrols in to defend their homes. Shinobi of the village ran to guard the wall and ranged through the training grounds beyond, searching for the attackers.

“Where the hell are they?” Naruto demanded tightly, crouched on the wall over the east gate, glaring out into the night.

“I think the question is what are they,” Sakura said quietly, standing against Sasuke’s back to guard him as he swept the Sharingan over their assigned sector.

“Not here yet, apparently,” Sasuke answered, though he didn’t stop looking for a moment. “The trees and earth seem empty. Do we know, yet, if they can camouflage themselves at all?”

“Unknown,” Aburame Muta reported after a moment, from below the lip of the wall where he waited and listened to his bugs. “No one reports it so far.”

“Injured coming in,” Sasuke said, voice flat. Naruto hissed through his teeth. This was the third injured party and they still hadn’t been able to kill whatever was out there.

He dropped down inside the wall to his medical station to meet the two stretchers, hands moving fast as he cut away cloth and sutured deep cuts like claw rakes. That was the easy part, though. Most of the injuries he’d seen tonight were broken bones and crushed organs from where people had been punched or hurled into trees.

Or by trees. The reports were a little fuzzy on that.

Naruto held his hands over the side of the worst-hit one where ribs had shattered and a kidney was ruptured, and fought one more time to control the wild rush of the fox’s chakra through his own. It was exhilarating; he wanted to lose himself in it, and that was the hardest part. He had to concentrate, had to keep his mind on the mirror between his body, his chakra, and his patient’s.

You do seem to match me well in this, Nine-tails observed, and Naruto had the impression of an ear cocked at him curiously. Unusually so.

Sakura says that’s what Leaf’s seal is made to do, Naruto answered, leaning against his table and panting as he waved to two of the inner line to come take his patients to a recovery station until they woke up. To shape your host a little, with the chakra that seeps through. I guess it took really well on me, because it was done so young.

Perhaps it was not entirely a bad thing then, the fox murmured, and Naruto wanted to take the time to tease him, to be loudly shocked by the admission, but he didn’t have time right now. He shook his head sharply, trying to throw off the floaty glow that healing left these days, and sprang back up to the wall. Can’t you see where these guys are? I mean, you’re a spirit of the land and they’re moving through earth and trees!

And they appear to belong there, the fox answered dryly. There is corruption on the night’s wind, yes. But not from these attackers.

Naruto growled in frustration as he landed beside Sasuke again and got a raised eyebrow. “Nine-tails can’t feel them,” he answered it. “He says it’s like they really are wood and earth or something.”

“Some kind of summons?” Sakura wondered. “Or even a jutsu, like the Shadow Clones, only with an elemental chakra?”

“Or a bloodline limit,” Sasuke suggested. “But I don’t think that matters as much as the fact that the Sharingan and Byakugan can still see them!” On those last words, he launched a flight of Chidori Senbon, catching the arm of a figure emerging into the shadow of a tree. It vanished back into wood at once, but left blood on the ground as it did.

“Team at the east gate has marked one of the white ones,” Sakura relayed to Muta. “Left arm is injured.” She frowned and added, “And this doesn’t make sense. They’re injuring us more than we are them, but mostly because it’s night. As soon as there’s more light we’ll have the advantage, and however many there are, they aren’t attacking strongly enough to finish us off by dawn. Not by a long shot. They’ve got to be softening us up for something else. Muta-san, ask that a warning be relayed, please. Everyone needs to keep an eye out for whatever the real attack is.”


Tsunade’s mouth quirked. “How many was that?”

“Four, more or less at the same time,” Aburame Katou murmured, looking just a little amused himself, even behind his high collar. “Haruno, Nara Shikamaru, ANBU’s Deer, and Nara Shikaku.”

Tsunade scowled. “Shikaku put himself on the wall, didn’t he? No, don’t answer that. I suppose I knew he would.”

Katou coughed delicately. “He, ah, also requested that we relay his observation that you are on the wall as well, Hokage-sama.”

“The Hokage isn’t chosen from among the strongest so she can always lead from the rear,” Tsunade said with dignity, glancing only a little guiltily down at the tall main gate below them. “In any case, yes, relay the warning to be on guard for a second attack. I wish Jiraiya hadn’t taken a wide patrol this week,” she added quietly.

“I imagine the attack came now because he’s gone,” Kakashi murmured, watching the trees with his Sharingan uncovered beside her. He winced just a little at the creaking explosion of wood to the west of them. “Short of the Swordsmen being gone, Madara probably thought this was his best opportunity to see the village weakened at all.”

Tsunade grinned with rather more appreciation at those sounds of enthusiastic destruction, remembering a few bars and other landscape she’d busted up in her time. “They are energetic, aren’t they? I like that in a ninja. Maybe I won’t give them back to Terumii.” Her designated successor gave her a rather dour look, and she laughed, patting his shoulder. It was good for him to be on the receiving end of teasing, she thought; it seemed to have been far too long since he last had been.

In fact, the more deeply she dug into Kakashi’s background, the more guilty she felt about choosing him. He was undeniably the right choice, by every measure of strength, of responsibility, of care for the village. But he had far less of a support network than he was going to need when he became Hokage. She’d been thinking about how to alleviate that, but it would be a slow process.

She was turning over the other jounin in Kakashi’s age range in her mind when she felt the faint stickiness of her train of thought. The stubborn clinging to a topic that wasn’t the one she should be concentrating on right now. Her breath hissed in and her hands flashed out to touch Kakashi and Katou as she surged her chakra, spilling it through them too. “Kai!”

There was a shadow in the trees across the cleared zone from the gate and a kunai singing toward her, trailing a seal behind it. She caught the knife between two fingers and shaped her chakra to lightning to char the seal. “Subtle,” she observed, clearly enough to be heard in the trees. Behind her, the subliminal hum of Katou’s insects rose a notch, no doubt relaying word that the second attack had appeared.

“Clearly an approach that’s wasted on you,” answered the shadow, an old voice but still a strong one. And edged with contempt. Even without the flash of red eyes, that would have told her who this must be.

“Madara.”

The old man—who should be dead damn it—strolled along a branch into the wash of light from the walls. The red-cloud robes of Akatsuki were abandoned. He wore a short, indigo robe now, and a battle fan she remembered from the picture her grandfather had kept until his death. He was smiling. “It will be satisfying, after all this time, to watch the last of Hashirama’s line die. All of you have been far too wood-headed to appreciate subtlety. The village deserved better.”

From the corner of her eye, she caught a glimmer of light down wire and found herself abruptly in the heart of a dome of seals. All in a breath, a cyclone howled down around her, edged with knives of flame, deadly force pouring through the seals and darting for her in a hundred strikes, poised to tear aside her defenses.

Tsunade smiled.

Lines of ink flared up under and around her feet as she stood where she was, and twisting streams of force rose to wrap her in the second stage of the Sun on the Ocean seal. When the clap and thunder of chakra faded, she stood untouched and Kakashi was looking up from where he knelt behind her, hand pressed to the seal’s activation point.

“I appreciate subtlety just fine.” She held Madara’s eyes, level and challenging, daring him to try an illusion technique on an alert medic of her caliber. “I’m afraid you’re just not very good at it.”

His smile twisted. “Shimura-kun,” he ordered softly.

Danzou emerged onto the branch behind him, and as much as she hated the man it was still a blow to see him standing calmly there beside Konoha’s attacker. Exactly as Madara had meant it to be. She locked down her reaction fiercely. Behind her she heard the soft hiss of Kakashi’s breath.

“A preset trap only works once.” Danzou nodded to them, casually. “But so does a preset defense. Let us test your expertise.” His hand flickered and three kunai with seal tags slammed into the top of the wall in a triangle around Kakashi, and Danzou raised two fingers in the activation seal.

As tearing vacuum wrapped around Kakashi, Tsunade kept her eyes locked on Madara, watching for an opening, and prayed that Kakashi’s rage at Danzou would strengthen and not weaken him tonight.


Sai slipped down from the roofs and landed lightly in front of Cat, their current Commander. “No sign of the intruders in the inner village on my sweep,” he reported.

“Strange that they’re refraining from that,” Cat murmured. “The black one that goes through earth could reach the civilian shelters; it would be a far more efficient strike than all this.” He flicked disdainful fingers at the faint commotion beyond the walls they could hear even in the administrative quarter. “All right. Grab another route.”

Sai nodded and picked another paper slip out of the bag tacked to the mission board with a kunai. It might not be the most sophisticated way to randomize their patrols, he thought with that new mental lilt that sounded just a little like Kakashi-senpai in his head, but it was fast, portable, and unbreakable and ANBU knew the value of that. “Section six, outer ring,” he read off the slip and looked over at Torune. “Tracker bug still good?”

“Good for two more sweeps,” Torune agreed, perfectly calm even though Sai knew it probably frustrated him to be relegated to communications during an attack like this. He approved. All of Root was held back from the most critical work right now, but that was no excuse for losing discipline. Which was, after all, why Fuu was confined completely at this moment and likely several times as frustrated as any other member.

And then Torune stiffened. “Second attack at the south gate,” he said, voice sharpening. “Targeting the Hokage and Kakashi. It’s Madara.” He cut off abruptly for a moment, and Sai saw him swallow and breathe in slowly. “And Danzou with him.”

Mission awareness spiked in Sai’s senses, sharpening them, crystallizing the night around him. “Are all of Root accounted for?” The question whipped out before it was even complete in his mind.

Torune’s mouth tightened faintly as he listened to his network of insects. “Fuu. Hyou. Shin.” A pause. “Kana. Terai, yes.” A longer pause. “Dajimu and Tera are out of their patrol areas and near the south wall.”

“General signal,” Cat snapped, “all ANBU to the south gate!”

Sai was already running.


Kakashi danced with his opponent, the deadly, precise dance of the elite who were trained to silent and perfect death. ANBU’s dance. He had never thought to take up these steps again, but for tonight, for this death, he would return.

This was the dance of fine techniques, of calculation and timing that slid down the edge of a knife, of silence and cunning, each move set against the shape and weight of the opponent with utmost care and blinding speed. Half the jutsu they started were never initiated, turned aside into another path as the ground between their minds shifted and shifted again.

There had been a time when Kakashi had found this exhilarating, better than any drink or drug. Tonight, it was water to a thirsty man, more necessity than pleasure but the only thing that would satisfy him nevertheless.

The Tiger’s Teeth closed on nothing but the Diving Fisherbird, and in the wake of that clap of annihilation Kakashi and Danzou paused for one breath. “You’ve grown subtle indeed in your use of seals,” Danzou observed, breathing considerably harder than he had when they’d started this Kakashi was mildly pleased to note. “But you still trust the wrong things.” The twist of his fingers summoned, not only another seal from under his robe, cast straight on at Kakashi, but a flash of weapons on either side, ones Kakashi recognized—Dajimu’s wire-strung kunai and Tera’s darting flames. Kakashi’s calculation of his possible counters sped down the lines of decision, and he bared his teeth behind his mask. He was going to get hit; Dajimu’s wires could change the trajectory of his kunai too unpredictably to try to dodge when Tera’s flames were waiting, shuriken buried in their hearts more often than not. And Danzou was too canny to be casting a bluff at him. That seal absolutely must be met.

He would be hit, as Danzou wished. But it wouldn’t stop him. Danzou had forgotten who and what Kakashi was; Hound had been stopped by nothing when Kakashi had worn that mask. He pulled the Phoenix seal from his vest and activated it in a single motion, threw it to consume Danzou’s attack, and spun into the oncoming kunai, preparing to choose which one he took as his hands flashed through the seals to shape water and counter the flames.

And then Sai was there.

It reminded Kakashi of the years he had loved this dance, the clean, perfect line of the leg sweep that brushed aside the wires and spun Sai through a complete turn to meet Tera’s flames with a precise dousing seal. Sai touched down, poised, at Kakashi’s feet and looked up at Danzou and his companions in Root, cool and distant. Kakashi heard others landing on the roofs inside the wall and dared a glance back, relaxing to see familiar masks and equipment. ANBU.

“Sai!” Danzou barked. Sai ignored him, not so much as an eyelash flickering in response.

“Dajimu. Tera.” Sai’s words dropped into the night light as leaves into a pool. “You break your oaths to think only of the good of the village.”

“We aren’t the oathbreakers,” Tera shot back. “Danzou-sama acts for the good of the village. It’s you who’ve lost your way, Sai.”

“On the contrary,” Sai answered quietly. “Hatake Kakashi will protect Konoha and all its people at any cost. He will wield ANBU correctly, when it comes into his hands.” He stood, fluid, still ignoring Danzou, and stepped around to Kakashi’s shoulder. “Do whatever is necessary," he said softly. "I will hold Dajimu and Tera."

Kakashi touched Sai’s arm lightly as he stepped past. “I will.” And he was grateful. Sai’s words pulled him a little back from the edge, reminded him of what he was now as well as what he had been. The absolute ice of calculation eased a little around his heart, flowing again instead of freezing. ANBU, he was pleased to see from the corner of his eye, was deploying to cover Tsunade but leaving him room.

Danzou was scowling. “Your interference makes this less complete than it could be,” he told Sai roughly. “But so be it.” He pulled off his overrobe, with its woven-in wards and dozens of sequenced seals and flipped it open on the night wind, good hand flicking out to unfurl a seal scroll.

And as the robe fell to Danzou’s side, covering him, he turned and cast the Lion Closing Roar straight at Madara.

Except that Madara was already gone, flickering out of the seal’s center, and the sweep of his fan caught the lash of Tsunade’s lightning whip even as a kick threw Danzou back against the tree trunk with bone crushing force. Kakashi could hear, in the agonized edge as Danzou coughed for breath, that ribs were probably broken.

“Shimura-kun, I was really hoping you would be more effective before it came to this,” the old man sighed, strolling casually along the branches toward Danzou. “Ah, well, I suppose old age comes to us all. I’m sure you understand, though, why I can’t leave you alive behind me now.” He smiled down at Danzou, hanging his fan back over his shoulder with an easy swing that belied the remark about old age. “A shame that none of your erstwhile comrades will have any interest in leaving you alive at their backs either, hm?”

Sai stirred at Kakashi’s side, and the hand that held his tantou was white knuckled in the lights of the village.

“Danzou-sama!” Tera lunged over the wall.

Madara turned his head and, without forming a single hand seal, blew an actinic torch of flame over him. What fell out of that fire wasn’t breathing any longer. “Now then,” he murmured, turning back to Danzou.

Calculations wound through Kakashi’s mind, taking in the tautness of Sai beside him, the suddenly unbalanced stances of some of ANBU around them, the tightness of Tsunade’s lips, so clearly torn between her own rage at what Danzou had done and her awareness of why he had done it this night. Kakashi had no doubt Danzou was a traitor, that he had truly been trying to kill both Tsunade and Kakashi. But it was ANBU watching this, and they also knew the stakes that a deep cover mission played for, knew by that last attack that Danzou hadn’t completely abandoned Konoha. Death on a mission like that was also known and accepted, and Tsunade would never allow anyone to risk themselves saving Danzou now. Madara might even be distracted by killing Danzou and give them another opening to attack.

ANBU could do it. Could stand and watch and do nothing but hope for an opening. But what they were capable of wasn’t always what they should be asked to do. A single conclusion locked into place, sure and solid, and Kakashi set his feet, watching Madara’s chakra with his Sharingan.

He waited while Madara drew his sword, waited while it was lifted, listening to the uneasy silence around him, and as Madara committed to his downward cut, Kakashi moved.

The world telescoped as he flickered forward and he wound chakra through his feet to stop him on the branch between Madara and Danzou, around his arm to brace him against the force of Madara’s cut as it rang off the steel on the back of Kakashi’s raised fist.

In the shocked moment of silence that followed, he said quiet and clear, “You are not the executor of any Konoha shinobi who has not yet been declared traitor. Not any.” He yanked Danzou over his shoulder by the front of his robe and leaped back for the wall, past a flight of kunai hastily thrown to cover his retreat.

And in the middle of that suspended moment when Danzou’s own body was covering Kakashi’s other hand from sight, he opened it and struck with the Gentle Fist, half crushing Danzou’s heart.

The next moment he was past the wall and down on the first roof inside it, letting Danzou slide off his shoulder. The old man glared up at him, gasping, breath already laboring, face already gray. “Kakashi…” he rasped.

“You die as a shinobi of Konoha,” Kakashi told him, cold and soft. “It’s more than you deserve. But I won’t have their hearts tainted by giving your life to Madara.” He flicked a hand at the still figures of ANBU all around them, watching.

One of ANBU’s medics flitted up to the roof with them and ran quick hands over Danzou before wincing behind his mask. “It’s too much,” he reported, clear enough to carry to all of them. “Tsunade-sama or Shizune-sama might be able to save him but this is beyond me.”

Tsunade’s jaw clenched, and she spoke without turning. “Shimura Danzou chose his actions, and I cannot endanger my village to let him avoid their consequences. Offer him mercy.” Her voice was rough; no medic liked the last resort. But she was focused wholly on Madara again, unwavering, and Kakashi nodded to himself, satisfied.

“Shimura-san?” the medic asked quietly, knife in hand and glowing with the edge of his chakra.

Danzou’s mouth twisted for a breath, but finally he nodded, eyes fixed on Kakashi. Kakashi watched him in return, standing straight and still, and carefully hid his rush of furious vindication as the knife went home.

A faint rustle ran through ANBU.

Cat joined them on the roof and told the medic, “Take his body back to the inner line and rejoin us as soon as you can.” As the medic gathered Danzou’s body up, Cat turned to meet Kakashi’s eyes for a long moment. “Senpai,” he said at last.

Kakashi’s mouth quirked behind his mask. “Not for a long time, now.”

“You have been again, tonight.”

The thread of tension in Kakashi relaxed. Tenzou, at least, guessed what he had done and accepted it. “I will be what is necessary,” he said quietly, the core of his service that had brought him to ANBU in the first place. Cat nodded, touching his fist to his chest in brief salute before they both turned and sprang back up to the wall. Sai met him there, turning back from handing off the securely bound bundle of Dajimu to another ANBU. He paused one moment to look up at Kakashi, dark eyes not quite as blank as usual.

After a long, still breath, Sai bowed in a formal salute.

“No need for formalities on a battlefield,” Kakashi murmured, a little wry, suspecting Sai had realized too. Sai nodded and slipped around to guard Kakashi’s back again.

Madara was standing with folded arms, engaged in his staring contest with Tsunade again. Kakashi watched the flare and jab of their chakra and thought Madara was still trying to lay illusion on her, even as ANBU was flickering through the trees around him, closing in. “Stubborn girl, aren’t you?” Madara sighed at last, “Well, I suppose I’ll need this after all.”

The only seal he made was the basic activation, but Kakashi suddenly had to squint his Sharingan shut, nearly blinded by the vast upwelling of chakra that gathered in the forest behind Madara.

When it erupted upward into the shape of a nine-eyed demon, Kakashi couldn’t quite manage to be surprised.


Sakura had just returned from stringing an extensive trap through the trees and Naruto was arguing with Nine-tails over why they couldn’t abandon their post to go hunting the corruption he scented when Muta suddenly stiffened.

“Second attack, at the south gate, on the Hokage and Kakashi-san,” he relayed. “It’s Madara.”

I told you so! the fox snapped, and Naruto whirled, poised to sprint and never mind the damn white and black bastards. That was his teacher over there!

Sakura snatched his arm. “Naruto, we can’t abandon our position! If the first attackers get through a hole in the line here they have a clear path to the civilian shelters!”

“Perimeter to hold their positions,” Muta confirmed. “ANBU is moving to support the Hokage.”

The fox whined and Naruto nearly whined with him, vibrating with both their needs to go, to find Madara and destroy him.

“Naruto.” Sakura slid both hands into his hair and turned his head toward her, holding his eyes. “Listen to me. Tsunade-sama isn’t reckless. She has our very best going to help her, and Kakashi-sensei is there too. Right now, we’re needed more here.”

Naruto took a shaky breath and leaned into her, steadying himself against her presence. “Okay,” he agreed, husky.

Interfering female, the fox growled, glaring in the back of his head. He kept tugging Naruto’s eyes toward the south, straining to see/smell/hear/know what was happening there.

Sasuke was tense, too, jaw set even as he kept scanning their assigned area in silence.

Seconds dragged past like minutes, like hours, and Naruto waited. Jittered. Flexed his hands and tapped his toes, and briefly wished for the tails so he could lash them. Bit his lip and wondered what was happening, and fidgeted until Sasuke growled at him to cut it out before Sasuke cut something off.

When chakra/scent/light exploded at the south gate, it was so massive it was still a shock.

“Naruto?” Sasuke grabbed for him as he stumbled and fell to his hands and knees on the top of the wall. “Naruto!”

A tremor shivered the wall under them.

“Summons,” Muta snapped, crouched and tense. “It’s Madara’s summons, at the south gate!”

My kin, the fox whispered in Naruto’s head like the first whisper of a typhoon wind. He’s bound my kin!

“Oh fuck,” Naruto said, very low. “It’s the tailed beasts!”

It only took one glance between the three of them, and they were running, racing south over the roofs of the village.


Nara Shikaku swore viciously under his breath. He’d already had to leave his old teammates at the wall and pull back to the roof of the Hokage’s Residence to coordinate while his Hokage was busy fighting monsters out of history with her own two hands. Now word came in that Uzumaki had left his position and was making for the south gate too, and that this might be a very good thing.

“Pull Kawanishi’s team off the inner line to replace them,” he snapped, “and Endou’s to replace Shikamaru’s team. Tell Shikamaru to get down to the south gate and coordinate that mess as best he can. At least,” he added, exasperated, “there’s a chance Uzumaki will listen to him. Have the Hyuuga found the core of that damn black and white thing yet?”

“Not yet,” Aburame Shibi reported calmly, head cocked just a bit as he listened to his insects.

Shikaku weighed needs in his head and blew out a breath. “Hiashi swore that some of his clan could protect themselves against Madara’s insane illusions. Tell him to break some loose from the search and send them to the south gate, too. Contact Chouza and tell him to follow with any other Akimichi that can be spared to see about this summons. Ask Cat to send me back at least ten ANBU to search outside the wall for the first attackers.”

And he would just have to pray, he thought, staring over the black slate tiles of the roof and toward the south, that he wasn’t about to lose his Hokage. Again.


Naruto and his team cut through the commotion in the south quarter like it wasn’t there, but all three of them jerked to a halt when they hit the top of the wall again.

“Oh shit,” Sakura said, very quietly.

Too many things burned in Naruto’s senses. The vast demon-shape with seven glaring eyes and two more closed was tearing through the ribbons of the biggest binding seal he’d ever seen with appalling ease. The vast trees of Konoha’s valley bent like saplings under its feet. And in the increasing clearance, Tsunade lunged between lashes of fire, fighting hand to hand against a man in a shadowy robe with a huge fan. ANBU masks ringed them, but Tsunade and her opponent were moving too fast for anyone to intervene unless she pulled back.

“Madara,” Sasuke said, low, sounding like someone had just hit him in the stomach.

Sakura caught his shoulder. “If anyone can beat him it’s Tsunade-sama,” she said, low. “It’ll be all right.”

Sasuke shook his head sharply. “I know, but… you don’t know what he was! I don’t know if even Tsunade can take him!”

“Trust her.” Naruto wanted to say more, but the fox’s attention kept dragging his eyes back to the demon. The demon who, he was starting to realize, must be holding the seven captured tailed beasts. Hosting them? Or were they bound down, the way some villages did between hosts?

Kakashi-sensei and an ANBU with a cat mask flickered up to the wall from the forest, both of them breathing hard.

“It’s got their strength,” the cat mask said, grim. “I can barely trip it, and I won’t be able to hold it for more than an instant. We need someone to hit it right then, hard enough to stop it.”

The summons was drawing on them, then. The fox snarled, and Naruto took a step forward. “We can hit it," he said quietly.

“That’s what Madara is probably counting on.” Kakashi looked over at them, one eye black and one red, but both hard. “It’s too risky.”

“But I can help Nine-tails keep him out!” Naruto argued, waving a hand sharply at the demon. “How else are we going to beat that?!”

Kakashi actually smiled, if a lot more grimly than usual. “I think the answer to that is just coming.”

Shikamaru’s team touched down beside them, and another Akimichi was a breath behind them. One more breath, and Hinata and Neji arrived too. Shikamaru glanced around, taking in the destruction and the litter of broken techniques. He grimaced and turned to Kakashi-sensei. “Do we know what that summons can do, yet?”

“We know it’s got seven of the tailed beasts sealed inside it, and can use their power, if not their particular abilities,” Kakashi said, looking out over the increasingly flattened swath of forest, fires starting here and there from Madara’s deflected attacks. He nodded to the cat mask. “Cat can bind it, but only for a few seconds before it breaks free.”

Shikamaru took a slow breath, in and out, eyes dark. “Chouji. Chouza-sama. Can you coordinate an attack on it at that speed?”

Chouza laid a hand on Chouji’s shoulder. “We can.”

Cat nodded. “Signal me when you’re ready to strike, then, and I’ll hold it still as well as possible.”

“Go,” Kakashi told them and turned to the Hyuugas as the three of them vanished over the wall. “You’re here to back up Tsunade-sama.” His eyes flickered toward the trees through which Tsunade and Madara were stalking each other. “I don’t know, yet, what you’ll be able to do; keep an eye on them.”

Neji nodded silently and drew his cousin a little way down the wall, both of them watching Tsunade and Madara with Byakugan activated.

“This is the biggest clusterfuck ever,” Shikamaru muttered, kneeling on the wall beside Ino, eyes flicking over the forest and their forces. “I’m just mentioning.”

“Eloquent,” Kakashi noted dryly. “And likely accurate.”

Naruto was chewing his lip, trying to listen to the mission banter, trying not to let the fox’s lengthening silence alarm him. He had such a bad feeling about this.

A red flare burst over the trees, and suddenly Chouji and Chouza were rising out of the trees, almost as tall as the demon. Lines of darkness whipped up from the ground, wrapping around the demon’s legs, thickening as they went.

“Wood jutsu,” Sakura said, sharp and startled.

“Induced,” Kakashi answered, voice distant. “And not even Hashirama himself could have held seven of the beasts at once.”

For one breath, though, it was holding, and Naruto bit down harder on his lip, hoping. Chouza charged the demon from the front, massive arms wrapping around it. “Chouji!” he thundered. Chouji was coming from behind, and even Naruto could see the perfect timing of it, the moment when Chouza braced to keep the demon from recoiling, from wasting any of Chouji’s strength. The crack of Chouji’s fist hitting the demon’s back echoed off the wall.

For a moment, Naruto thought it might work.

In the next, though, the demon roared wordlessly and threw both the Akimichi back, snapping the wood binding like string. Sasuke cursed under his breath and Shikamaru’s jaw tightened.

The fox was still silent.

You don’t think anything but us can stop it, do you? Naruto asked.

I am the strongest of the tailed beasts, and there are seven of my kin locked in that thing. It wasn’t an answer. Except that it was.

So we’ll do this for them, Naruto promised. And for my important people, here. Okay?

The fox stirred, the sense of him uncoiling up Naruto’s spine and down his fingers. Naruto reached out and touched Kakashi-sensei’s arm.

“Tell Tsunade-sensei I’m sorry I couldn’t get her permission first, okay?” he asked softly.

Kakashi was still for a long moment, in which Chouji, Chouza, and Cat landed back on the wall, all of them wincing and moving carefully. Kakashi finally sighed. “Try not to step on any of our people while you’re out there.”

“We’ll follow as soon as you’re done changing,” Sasuke said, stepping up beside Naruto. “If the Nine-tails will accept it, I can help shield you from Madara.”

The fox snarled and Naruto winced, and Sakura put her fists on her hips, glaring. “I’m very sure that such an old and experienced spirit will have at least as much sense as a yearling squirrel and will accept that assistance,” she said in a dire tone.

The fox didn’t quail, which was better than Naruto managed when Sakura spoke like that, but there was a sense of grudging respect from him, if not exactly agreement. “We’ll try,” Naruto promised.

“Sasuke, what are you going to have to do, to shield them?” Shikamaru interrupted. After a silent moment, Sasuke sighed.

“I’ll have to be… with Naruto and the Nine-tails. In our minds and spirits.”

“Thought so.” Shikamaru was actually smiling, just a little and crookedly. “Well, we’re used to that. We’ll cover you.” His eyes locked on Sasuke’s, almost as black as his in the darkness. “So don’t hold back.”

Sasuke smiled back, dark and sharp. “I never hold back.”

Shikamaru snorted. “Yeah, Team Overkill, that’s the three of you.” He beckoned Ino and Chouji closer with a tilt of his head and the three of them whispered and gestured among themselves for a minute, hands tracing sight lines and formations.

“Be careful,” Kakashi told Naruto and his team, quietly. All three of them nodded, and Naruto would bet that all four of them knew how little that would probably help.

Naruto stepped to the edge of the wall in the flickering night, hearing Kakashi-sensei behind him, telling the Aburame here to call the shinobi in the south forest back behind the wall and warn everyone the Nine-tails was on their side this time. He breathed slowly, stepping ‘down’ in that way that took him to the place the fox lived. This time, not blinded by the pain of tearing out the inner seal, he could feel the fox rising past him, a brilliance of fire and wind and the power of mountains, and he leaped out from the wall, arms spread like he could embrace the night itself. As the fox rose over him he felt like maybe Nine-tails was doing just that. The fox’s chakra swept through him, around him, merciless and wild, and now it was the fox’s head lifted in the wind, the fox’s paws on the ground.

And yet… this time it was Naruto too. He wasn’t in darkness. He felt the wind, the ground, the lash of the fox’s tails. It was a little softened, a little distant, but it was all there.

So he saw when Madara turned from his fight with Tsunade. She took the opening instantly, landing a punch that tore away Madara’s arm and shoulder and slammed him into the ground hard enough to crater it. Black fire blasted out from where he landed, speeding away in two directions, ringing in the demon and Nine-tails. And Madara.

And when Madara stood up, he was whole again.

The only thing that shook Naruto out of his shock was feeling Nine-tails’ chakra slowing, around him. They were looking right at Madara, he realized, and yelled, “Nine-tails! Oi, stupid fox, look away!”

He got only the faintest, distracted grumble back.

“Oh fuck.” Naruto reached out with immaterial hands and seized the fox’s chakra, the chakra he was as familiar with now as his own, or Sakura or Sasuke’s, and fought to surge it and shake off the Sharingan, to reclaim his partner’s mind.


Kakashi-sensei slammed a fist down against the wall, actually cracking the capstone. “Regeneration,” he spat, red eye fixed on where Madara had vanished behind the black flames.

“We have to get through,” Sasuke said tightly. “I’m going to try to go over.”

Sakura snapped out of her suspended moment of horror, and closed a hand around his arm. “Wait.” She took a slow breath as he rounded on her, staring out at those flames. “Wait. I’ll get you through.”

“How?” Shikamaru demanded sharply. His fingertips were set together and Sakura could almost see the thoughts racing behind his eyes.

Her mouth quirked. “Why do you think I asked Jiraiya-sama to teach me some of his sage techniques?” she asked softly. From the moment she’d seen Amaterasu for the first time, from the moment she’d heard Madara still lived, she’d feared they would see it again if Madara ever came; it was the perfect answer to the problem of keeping Leaf’s shinobi away while Madara subdued the Nine-tails.

Her response wasn’t as perfect, but she thought it would work.

“Sakura,” Kakashi said, low, from the edge of the wall, eyes fixed on the still figure of the Nine-tails, “you don’t have any helpers for that one.” It wasn’t a denial; just a reminder of the risk she ran.

“It doesn’t matter.” She let Sasuke go and stepped to the edge of the wall herself. “Don’t count on me for anything after this,” she tossed over her shoulder at Shikamaru and didn’t look back around until he nodded slowly.

“Sakura.” Sasuke’s hands slid over her shoulders as he came to stand close against her back. “Tell me what you’re going to do.”

She stood straight, breathing deep and steady to ready her chakra. “I’m going to remind the world that this fire doesn’t belong in it. I don’t know whether I’ll be able to put it out or just suppress it for a while, so when I tell you to go, go fast.”

His hands tightened. “All right.” Softer, “I’ll keep him safe.”

Sakura smiled into the night, heart sure and strong even as her breath wavered in her throat. “Yes.” She took one last breath and let her hands flow through the familiar series of her activation and spread them out toward the half a ri of land she needed to protect.

Using nature energy was not a matter of rote, where the right seals and concentration would always produce the same form. She thought perhaps Jiraiya-sama was right when he called it a matter of faith. She opened her own spirit to the inrush of utter wildness and shaped it with her heart, with her need, with the bared strength of her own life and will, holding the open spiral of this jutsu’s seals, its shape, steady in her mind. Her three-ply chakra flowed into the shape easily; too easily. The danger of this technique was not burning out her subject, this time. No, this time it was the momentum, that it might sweep her away in the exaltation of being one with everything the world was, here on this night. This was a technique to touch, not only the energy of the land, but it’s own chakra.

“Earth,” she whispered into the bell of her jutsu, and almost cried out as it resonated, rang out over the forest drawing her chakra to it’s own, recalled the very soil to itself. “Wood,” she gasped, trembling, wrestling back the need to open her heart wider, to give all of herself to the trees as the smallest particles of them recalled what world they belonged to and shrugged free of the hell-grip of Amaterasu. “Wind…” It was almost a moan, and she sank to her knees as the air sang before the gate, dancing away from the all-consuming black fire, spreading her chakra just as fine and thin as it was.

Amaterasu guttered and sank, and finally flickered out.

Sakura gulped a breath, and pulled herself just far enough back to gasp, “Go!” Sasuke shot forward off the wall without question or hesitation, flickering across the seared strip to land at the Nine-tails’ feet. Tsunade-sama was already lunging straight for Madara again. Shikamaru’s team followed Sasuke, and relief swept through her. That was the last thing she needed to wait on. Sakura prepared to pry herself out of this wild jutsu before she forgot why she should want to.

An intrusion slid through the earth that her chakra embraced, and she flinched.

“Sakura?” Kakashi asked at her side, low and sharp, and she could feel his chakra too, like this, could almost see the hand seals poised and waiting in his palms to try to pull her out.

“Intruder,” she gasped, and, after a moment’s struggle to remember the word, “First!”

“The first attacker is coming into this area?”

She nodded, distantly relieved that Kakashi-sensei had understood, and closed her hands into fists, trying to hold onto that trace, to track it, even as it seemed to split.

“Earth,” she rasped again, fiercely, to her jutsu and rocked back on her knees with shock when nothing happened. Her control wavered for a ragged breath and she gritted her teeth.

“I’ll try to see them,” Hinata’s voice said softly on her other side. “Sakura-san, can you hold on?”

Sakura swallowed and nodded, and almost lost her grip anyway when Hinata pressed gently against her back and her hands came to rest on Sakura’s forearms, three fingers down from her wrists. “Permit me,” Hinata whispered. “Life of our land, Will of Fire, permit me.”

The words resonated delicately through Sakura’s technique, and Hinata’s chakra slid down the path they made, light as a bird on the wind. Sakura reflected distantly, through her amazement that anyone else could affect the technique without burning them both out, that now she understood why Neji had consented to follow his cousin.

“All of them,” Hinata murmured, distant. “All of them are coming. But they are only two. Only two that we need to find.”

Yes. Yes, that made sense of what Sakura felt from the earth, from the trees. Two, and then a… haze around them. She could feel exactly where those two were, like she’d have felt a knife against her skin, but there were no words for it! Nothing she could tell them!

“I see it,” Hinata whispered, and then, sharper. “I see them! Neji! They’re coming for the Hokage!”

Abruptly she was gone and it was only Kakashi speaking to Sakura, low and sure. “Bring it down, Sakura. The technique. Let the pattern go. Come back, Sakura, your team is going to need you. Can you hear me? Naruto and Sasuke are going to need you.”

Kakashi-sensei, Sakura decided, really fought dirty. But he had a point. She let go one finger at a time, pulled herself away bit by bit from the wild, singing being of the world’s chakra and finally, with a deep, sobbing breath, snapped her hands together in her deactivation.

The brilliant awareness of the world went away and it was only with her eyes that she saw Hinata and Neji land on either side of Tsunade, spin like water flowing, and strike in perfect unison. A black figure and a white one flew back from their hands and were pounced on by ANBU as Tsunade bared her teeth at Madara and punched the tree he was in hard enough to fell it.

Sakura shuddered as the cold of chakra depletion hit her and heard Kakashi calling sharply for a medic as she fixed her eyes on the enormous, nine-tailed fox that was finally moving again, rearing up as if to claw the moon from the sky.


Sasuke barely spared Madara a glance as he landed at the Nine-tails’ feet, barely even noticed Shikamaru’s team following him. He had more important things to worry about right now. The fox had shaken its head a little when Amaterasu died, and he hoped that meant Naruto was already pushing Madara’s control back. He sucked in a breath and shouted up at them, “Naruto! Nine-tails!”

After a moment of heart-sinking stillness, the fox turned its head and looked down at him.

There were no seals associated with what Sasuke did next, no gestures to key it, but he reached out anyway, open hands stretched up toward the huge red eyes that met his as he cast his chakra out to touch the Nine-tails’ and walked forward along that path.

There was another chakra already there, icy and sticky, flowing in strange curls and hitches to Sasuke’s sight. He slipped past it, contorting to avoid its touch like he would have climbed through a thicket of poisonous vines. When his chakra met the Nine-tails’ at last he gasped with the blaze of it and stumbled through brightness for a few steps before Naruto’s hands caught his arms.

“There you are, finally, Sasuke we gotta hurry up, this asshole’s Sharingan almost has a grip on Nine-tails!”

“Yes, I noticed that,” Sasuke muttered, straightening. He was standing on a plain of water, broken here and there with rock formations, under a brilliant sky. It was the first time he’d walked into a mind so clear and unconstrained.

There was also a constant, harsh growl rolling out far over his head. He looked up to see the Nine-tails again, glaring down at him with furious suspicion. “Look,” he said, running a frustrated hand through his hair, “I swear I don’t want to control you! You’re contracted with my own teammate!”

Naruto looked up at the fox, bouncing urgently on his toes, “Yeah, it’s okay, really! I mean you’re kind of like me right now, and Sasuke wouldn’t do anything bad to me, right?”

“Humans who have power use it,” the fox snarled.

“Not like this,” Sasuke snapped, cutting his hand through the air, abruptly almost as angry as the fox; he was living his life as best he could to make himself and Uchiha into something that wasn’t Itachi, wasn’t Madara, and no furry, nine-tailed menace was going to say otherwise. “Not to harm my own!”

Narrowed red eyes stared down at him. “Your own?” the fox finally rumbled, low and dangerous. “You would dare claim that I am your own?”

“You live inside someone who is,” Sasuke growled back. “You’ve helped him. For that, I’ll protect you as I would him.”

The fox’s glare sharpened. “As you would him?” Abruptly, he leaned down, and a nose half as tall as Sasuke was sniffed at him, hard enough to tug at his clothes. When the fox drew back, it actually sat down and cocked an ear at him. It looked thoughtful. “I see.” A lot of the snarl was gone. “You love him.”

Sasuke stared, caught entirely flat-footed. “I… what?” The thought that the Nine-tails had figured that out from how he smelled rose embarrassingly in his mind.

“My idiot kit of a host,” the fox specified, watching him closely. “You love him. That’s why you do this.”

Sasuke flushed, really not wanting to have this conversation with a demon beast, for crying out loud, and also not while Naruto was listening, watching them with wide eyes. The intuition his clan sharpened on the Sharingan was jabbing him hard, though, so he took a breath and made himself say out loud, “Yes.”

The Nine-tails lay down on the surface of the water. “Hm.”

“Is that what it takes, for you to accept?” Sasuke asked quietly.

Naruto’s eyes widened further, and he spun around to point at the fox. “That’s it! That’s what it is! That’s why you keep getting all mellow and shit at the weirdest times!”

The fox eyed its host with some exasperation, and Sasuke was reminded of all the times Naruto had compared the two of them. “I would say, rather, you keep having love-fests at the strangest moments. Though I suppose life and death combat does tend to remind one of the important things.” His eyes narrowed. “And if you’d just said that my part of the bargain was to help you protect what you love, instead of blithering on about your ‘important people’, this could all have gone much more smoothly. Humans.”

Naruto turned a little red. “You don’t just say things like that outright, that’s… that’s… I mean…”

“Idiot kit,” the fox growled, ears at a resigned angle.

Sasuke took a slow breath and stepped forward to rest a hand on Naruto’s shoulder, looking up at the fox. “I love him,” he admitted, low. “And I love Sakura. My teachers. A lot of the village is full of total idiots, but I… I love the quarter where I live. I never thought I would, again. Will this let you accept my protection?” Part of him flinched to be saying all this out loud; this was the truth he held silent in his heart. But if this was what it took to guard his place and his people, he would do it.

The fox’s lip curled and it glanced away over the water and stone of this space. “As long as you don’t start thinking I’m yours or any such nonsense. Yes, yes, get on with it.”

Naruto smacked the fox on the shoulder affectionately. “Well then you have to look over here, already. Quit being difficult.”

Nine-tails bared his teeth at Naruto, but Sasuke could tell it was mostly for show. “Insolent brat.” He did meet Sasuke’s eyes again, though, and this time when Sasuke cast forward his chakra it sank into the fox’s and the Sharingan’s marks faded up into the Nine-tails’ eyes. The fox shuddered the whole length of his body, ears flat against his skull.

“My protection,” Sasuke promised, very softly, already feeling the drain on his chakra of holding this seal over such a vast being, and feeling too the cold corruption of Madara’s chakra against his, like rotting flesh pressed against his own. He pushed back against that violently, and the fox’s ears unfolded just a little. That gave Sasuke an idea, and before he could think better of it he pulled Naruto tight into his arms. “My protection,” he whispered again, against unruly yellow hair. “Our strength is your shield. Defend our home.”

Naruto’s arms locked fiercely around him, nearly crushing his ribs, but that was all right. Besides, the fox’s ruff was smoothing, no longer bristled. Sasuke smiled, wryly; whatever worked. He pushed Naruto a little away. “Get going, then.”

Naruto laughed and Sasuke found himself back kneeling on the dirt and splintered wood outside the south gates with Shikamaru’s team standing guard over him. One of the black intruders was melting into the dirt a little ways off. Ino glanced down at him.

“He’s back,” she said, clipped, and then, seeing the direction of his gaze, smiled tightly. “One of them tried to attack you just before Neji and Hinata nailed the two that controlled them all. Not a problem.”

Having seen the three of them work together, their whiplash speed and precision, Sasuke could believe it.

“Is your technique still running or done?” Shikamaru asked, eyes still scanning the woods around them.

“Still running,” Sasuke said, breathing slowly and focusing the outflow his chakra to keep his seal on the Nine-tails, over the flowering of its rage and against the increasing pressure from Madara.

“We’ve got you,” Shikamaru said quietly. “Just work.”

Sasuke nodded and focused his eyes on the fox and nothing else as it bounded toward the nine-eyed demon.


Tsunade’s heart had turned to ice for one moment, when the marks of the Sharingan appeared over the Nine-tails’ eyes. But in the next she heard Madara’s snarled curse and saw the fox lunge toward the demon to rip at its arms, and knew they might just win this one after all. She spun in between Madara and Sasuke as the old man turned to make for his descendant with an unholy light glaring in his eyes, and threw him back with a scything kick.

And she knew, knew damn it, that she’d broken his breastbone with that kick, but it was whole when he came back at her and she couldn’t sense his chakra doing anything that would account for it! Madara smiled nastily at her bared teeth as they closed again in a whirl of fire and knives and the wild strength that had always lived in her bones.

“Ironic, don’t you think?” he breathed. “Senju’s strength undone by… Senju’s strength.”

“What the fuck are you babbling about?” Tsunade pulverized the ground under his feet to dust and leaped after him as he retreated.

“Before I left Hashirama at the Falls, I took a sample, you see.” Madara spread his arms wide and she felt the hideous, insinuating strength of his chakra again, shaped by that damn Mangekyou Sharingan. Forcing it out of her own chakra pathways distracted her for one crucial moment and she snarled as she pulled his shuriken out of her leg.

And then she actually heard what Madara said. A sample. From her grandfather, the strongest user of Wood natured chakra the world had seen in generations. Something that could defeat her own combat strength. Decades of knowledge in the healing arts gave her the key that connected the two things. “Regeneration,” she whispered.

“You always were a clever child, if led carefully enough,” Madara murmured.

Fury blazed up in Tsunade’s heart like the sun, fury too wild for any shouting to encompass and so her voice was low when she spoke. “First you betray him, and then you steal from his very blood.”

“I would never have had to if he’d just seen sense.” Madara’s words were soft and calm and mad. “But it’s all right. I will rule the world, once all the tailed beasts are mine, as it should have been from the start. And he will be with me, as it should have been.”

Tsunade locked down a shudder of horror. There was no time for that; she had a duty to perform, here. Not only for her village but for her blood.

Yes. Her blood. That was the way.

She screamed as she lunged at Madara, letting her punch go slightly awry, letting him retreat with a laugh. While he was laughing, she sliced her fingers on her own kunai and swiftly traced seals in blood over her palms, down her arms. She drew the last one over her own heart.

“You shouldn’t have told me that,” she said softly, gathering her chakra and her will.

“Ah?” Madara hovered just out of range, taunting. “And why not?”

Tsunade’s hands flashed through twenty-eight seals and ended in the Snake. “Because blood calls to blood.” She lifted two fingers in the initiation and, as fire spread down every vein from her heart, released her Yin seal. The lines on her arms blazed up and there were no more words.

Blood Song was a forbidden technique, locked away for three generations since the villages were first founded. It was a legacy of the warring clans period, and the cruel expedients that century of conflict had driven the clans to, to protect their own blood. To control their own blood.

Madara fought her, silent and vicious now. She could feel his chakra prying at hers, feel the dizzy warping of the world as he tried to tear himself free of her grip, and she spent her own chakra like water into the desert to hold him, to reach into his body and claim what was hers. To tear it away from him—all that was blood of Senju.

And perhaps the years had taken their toll on this one of the most powerful ninja ever known, regeneration or no, because at last she felt it. As her vision darkened, she saw it. The red eyes fixed on hers lost focus, and the steel and stone chakra that wrestled with hers slackened. The blood of her clan slid into her control and she tore it free in one last burst of rage.

When she could see again, she was on her hands and knees, breath heaving hoarsely in her chest. In front of her was a withered body, barely more than skin stretched over bones, with red eyes. Still conscious eyes.

Tsunade’s long years of training prodded at her, and her grandfather’s teaching joined in. The way of Senju was one of honor and compassion. That was why she had become a healer. Every breath Madara took was wracked, cut short with the pains and breakdowns of decades all catching up at once. She should, at least, ease Madara’s passing. The practical part of her knew she didn’t have the strength to offer any kind of mercy, but breath, at least, remained to her. Breath and time for a few words. “My grandfather loved you,” she whispered.

And then her lips pulled back off her teeth in a hard smile. “I don’t.”

Madara’s eyes glinted at her past the Sharingan for a moment, before he closed them. Another shuddering breath, and the body before her was still and empty.

Tsunade let her head fall, sliding down to the ground, suddenly aware that her transformation had drained away and every bone in her body ached like something was gnawing on them. A rest would be good. Yes.

“Hokage-sama!” Gloved hands caught her, turning her gently, and even through the masks she could hear the hisses of her ANBU around her, shocked. She imagined she didn’t look too very different from the dead body right now.

It took two attempts before she managed to swallow and husk out, “Kakashi.”

“I’m here.” Her chosen successor knelt beside her, and she smiled just a little to see the straightness of his spine, the mission awareness that wouldn’t let him show his fear for her or his relief that she still lived. Stubborn brat that he was.

“In command,” she whispered through dry, cracked lips, vision starting to gray again. “Shizune. To me.”

“She’s coming.” Kakashi looked up at the masks surrounding them among the dark trunks. “Will you accept my command until the Hokage recovers?”

Cat stepped forward. “We will.”

“Then get the civilians out of the shelters and up to the roofs, and call the patrols in to guard them. I want every citizen of Konoha somewhere they can see what’s happening at this gate. Bring the twenty strongest shinobi still uninjured here to the gate to support Naruto and the Nine-tails. Go.”

ANBU vanished, except for the two medics already working on her, and Tsunade made a mental note to tease Kakashi later about what a good leader he would make. And then Shizune was beside her, eyes furious and wet, swearing at her in three dialects as her glowing hands pressed over Tsunade’s heart. Tsunade just smiled, looking up past the trees as her vision faded, to where a giant fox lashed nine tails across the sky and attacked the demon that threatened their village.


This time it was different. This time Naruto wasn’t in darkness, catching moments of action here and there. Instead he felt like he was sitting on a boulder on the water plain and at the very same time standing right behind Nine-tails’ eyes as the fox leaped through Konoha’s forest, savaging the demon. He could feel the flex of the fox’s haunches, the clench of his jaw as he seized an arm and tore at it. He could certainly feel the shift of their chakra as the fox breathed a blast of fire at the demon, wild and exultant.

“How can you be calmed down by someone’s love and still like destruction this much?” he wondered as they leaped to evade the demon’s fist and the fox lashed out with a tail to throw it backwards.

You call this destruction? the fox sneered. Pah! I raise tsunami and level mountains, kit. I bring fire and death and change, and I sweep corruption from this world. That’s what I am!

Tailed beasts, Naruto decided, were even weirder than noble clans. “Well you’re not being very much yourself, then, are you?” he prodded. “I mean, after a mountain, one demon shouldn’t be too hard to level.” Secretly he was kind of wondering if the fox was drawing it out so he could keep his own form for longer. And he couldn’t blame Nine-tails at all, but they had work to be getting on with, here!

You were the one who wanted me to be careful where I put my feet, the fox shot back, silkily. And then, with a deeper growl, And watch. He caught hold of the demon’s arm again, shaking his head fiercely, and this time he actually ripped the arm all the way off.

There was no blood or anything like it. Nine-tails might as well have torn the arm off a statue, except for the weird, shifting glow that showed through the gap. “What’s that?” Naruto asked warily, experienced enough by now to be suspicious of anything that looked this strange. It was usually bad news.

That demon is only a container. The fox’s tails lashed grimly. It is animated by the strength of my kin, but it is not host to them or anything like. And what truly binds them lives inside it.

Naruto planted his hands on his hips, annoyed. “Well then why haven’t you busted it up yet?”

There was enough roar in the fox’s response that Naruto winced. Because, you insolent brat, the moment I shatter the container the binding dragons will escape it! Even I can’t catch seven fleeing prey in the same instant!

And, if Naruto was any judge, the fox was immensely pissed off about that. “Okay, okay.” Naruto patted the air soothingly with raised hands. “We’ll figure something out. Look, what if we switch really fast, and I can do binding seals…”

Someone coughed. It was a teacherly, pay-attention-children cough, and so startling in the circumstances that Naruto and the fox both blinked. The fox turned his head and there, standing on top of a tall pine, was Kakashi-sensei.

“Do excuse my cutting in on the conversation,” he said blandly, “but if the binding elementals are not drawing a great deal of power from their captives, I believe we can help with that.”

Naruto nearly fell off his boulder laughing. “You said it out loud! After all that pissy growling at me for talking out loud, you said it out loud!”

Shut up, kit, the fox rumbled, examining Kakashi-sensei, and Naruto heard him when he spoke, just a little bit distant or muffled. “Help how, little shinobi?”

Kakashi spread his hands. “If you can shatter that demon, I think we have enough people to catch seven dragons at once.”

“Only to bind my kin again.” The fox’s lip curled up in the start of a snarl, and Naruto was really kind of impressed that Kakashi-sensei was still looking the fox steadily in the eye instead of backing up.

“Have you gained nothing from your own contract, youko-san?”

Naruto actually felt the fox’s ear tilt with startlement, and then Nine-tails threw up his head and laughed like thunder. “I see where the kit gets his insolence from.” He looked down at Kakashi again, teeth bared. “Very well, shinobi. Ready your people.”

This time Naruto felt clearly the wild surge of chakra as the fox tipped his head up and breathed out, building a ball of force over his mouth. He really hoped Kakashi-sensei wouldn’t let people get too close too soon. The demon had pulled itself back to its feet and was coming for them again, remaining arm spread wide, mouth gaping as if it wanted to take a bite out of Nine-tails. The hunger in that silent charge send a shiver of nerves down Naruto’s spine, and he found himself reaching out, adding his chakra to the fox’s until the ball of it roiled. He could feel the fox’s approval and all nine of the fox’s tails spread in a fan to shape their attack.

The demon was three strides away when the fox whipped his head down and released the sky-shattering blast of power.

Demon-shattering, too. Naruto punched the air, right along with the fox’s howl of triumph, as blasted fragments scythed outward into the forest.

And then they were surrounded by nine huge dragons, colorful and transparent like glass ornaments, seven of them wrapped like knots around seven tailed beasts.

That, and by shinobi leaping out of the trees.


Temari was the first one to call out her target, as the colored dragons started to rush apart from each other. “Indigo!” and Shikamaru knew exactly what the imperious glance she flicked at him meant.

“Massive pain in the ass,” he muttered. They’d only just gotten Sasuke back up to the wall, after all, and the stubborn bastard refused to terminate his seal on the Nine-tails and hadn’t been any help at all. "What do you need me for?"

"To hold it still so I don’t hit the One-tail," Temari snapped. "Hurry up."

Shikamaru groaned. He’d known it.

“Oh quit complaining,” Ino told him, hip-checking him in Temari’s direction. “I’ll make sure Sasuke doesn’t kill himself with stubbornness. Go on.”

Shikamaru muttered under his breath about pushy women, glumly reflecting on how much his father was going to tease him about this when he heard. But he knelt by Temari as she coiled into a leaping stance and set his hands in the seal to initiate Shadow Binding. “Someone give me a flare!” he called. At least seven people sent up bursts of fire from the roofs behind him, and he knew in that moment that Kakashi-san had been wise. The village wanted to save itself, not just be saved, and those who helped in this last part of the fight would remember fighting alongside the Nine-tails.

He drove his shadow across the broken trees to lock around the indigo dragon and set his teeth hard at the tearing resistance. “Do it fast,” he gritted out.

Temari sprang into the sky like lightning in reverse, and her fan cut the air into vast knives around their target, over and over, slashing the dragon summons into pieces until the beast it held broke free with a roar. The One-tail was just fine, Shikamaru noted distantly, catching himself with a hand on the wall as he released his technique, panting for breath. She hadn’t even scratched it.

Maybe that was why the tanuki just glared around before dissolving into a gritty blast of sirocco wind.


“Whoohoo!” Suigetsu hollered, leaping from the wall, and Choujuurou winced. He really hoped Suigetsu wouldn’t get too carried away, and would remember what they were and weren’t supposed to kill. That was always a bit of a problem with him.

“Tsururi-san, I think the light green dragon is for us,” he told his other companion politely, seeing Suigetsu headed in the general direction of the dark green one wrapped around the Three-tails.

Tsururi, who had retrieved and thus inherited Ringo-senpai’s Fangs, flexed her hands around the grips, grinning. “Let’s do it.”

The dragon they targeted was actually starting to unwind a little, perhaps understanding that it had enemies to face. “Pin the head!” Choujuurou called as they leaped, unbinding Hiramekarei. They needed to do this fast.

“I’ll fillet it, you tenderize it!” Tsururi called back, and Choujuurou only refrained from rolling his eyes because this was the middle of a fight and despite what Ao-san thought, he was as dedicated a swordsman and shinobi as any of his lost senpai. So he just narrowed his eyes, shifting his balance in the air to let breath, chakra, force flow through him, through his sword.

Tsururi drove straight up from below the dragon, swords crossed, and caught it under the jaw, slicing in deep. “Now!”

There was no need for words. Choujuurou felt the moment, like a cord snapping taut, pulling his arm down. Chakra blazed around his blade, and he bared his teeth with satisfaction as he struck the dragon’s spine and the force of it whiplashed along the summons’ length. It uncoiled from the Six-tails like a pulled string and shattered into shards of green light.

And Choujuurou swore that, for one moment, the Six-tails looked at them. At him. Perhaps even recognized them. It was only a single moment, though, before the great slug was diving through the sky, making east for the lakes and the sea. He shook himself, flicking the bindings back around his sword as he touched down on one of Konoha’s great trees and looked to see how Suigetsu was doing.

Suigetsu was laughing among the fading mist of the dark green dragon, and Choujuurou thought he might be reaching out to pat the Three-tails as he went past. At any rate, the Three-tails spun on one foot, amazingly fast for a huge sea turtle, and smacked Suigetsu out of the air with one of its tails. Choujuurou winced at the plume of debris that rose from Suigetsu’s landing and sighed as the Three-tails raged off through the woods and a squad of Leaf-nin darted over the wall to fetch Suigetsu.

He knew his unit was still rebuilding itself, and that the Mizukage was far too wise and compassionate to expect perfect decorum out of the Swordsmen in any case. But he wasn’t entirely looking forward to reporting this to her.


Kiba had never seen his mother quite as pissed off as she was tonight. Apparently obaa-san hadn’t been joking when she’d said Tsume had the instincts to lead the clan after her, and that mostly meant a whole damn lot of Mine. First it was hide and seek with those damn black and white things, then demons, now dragons and tailed beasts scattered all over their damn territory; it was enough to make his claws itch, too, and he wasn’t any kind of alpha. His mother hadn’t stopped showing her teeth all night.

“Yellow,” Tsume snarled, and Kiba and Hana both sprang on her heels without protest, bounding over the trees toward the yellow dragon with their partners. Everyone was growling low in their throats as they leaped up to slash and worry at the dragon, pulling it loose from the beast coil by coil even as it hissed silently and slashed back with long talons.

When one of those talons hit one of the Haimaru triplets, Tsume threw her head back and howled, absolutely outraged by the scent of her pack’s blood. Kiba yelped a little under his breath, and sprang with Akamaru to pin down the dragon’s tail while his mother and Kuromaru whirled into a stupendous Fang Passing Fang and hit the dragon just behind its head.

And that was pretty much that.

The Four-tails shook itself loose from the fading coils and shot for the sky like a comet going home, and Tsume looked just a little calmer when she landed. Enough that Kiba and Hana both straightened up and smiled at her. She smiled back, showing her teeth lazily, and rested a hand on Kuromaru’s back. “Well, come on, then. Let’s see if any of these other slackers need help.”

His mom was definitely scary, Kiba reflected as they bounded back toward the wall, but that was okay. He kind of liked it that way.


Kakashi watched, taut, as Konoha’s uninjured jounin and their support dove outward from the south gate to catch the dragons the Nine-tails had broken loose. In some cases, that support was less than he would have liked.

“Come, my student! Let us defeat this foe with the fiery passion of youth!”

“Yes, Gai-sensei!”

Okay, not in that case, he had to admit. Kakashi spared a hidden smile for the sight of his ‘rival’ and Gai’s student, spinning through Gai’s extravagantly proclaimed Leaf Coiling Whirlwind with perfect synchronization. He’d almost swear the dull blue dragon’s eyes bugged out as two explosive kicks landed on either side of its head. At any rate, it toppled, already fading, toward the ground, and the sleek form of the Five-tails sprang free and galloped east toward the faint beginning of dawn.

No, Kakashi wasn’t worried about Gai. What he didn’t like was Genma’s insistence on taking on the orange dragon that held the Two-tails alone. He knew Genma had known that host, had respected her, but the hard light in Genma’s eyes when he’d brushed off any assistance suggested there was something deeper there than he’d thought. That didn’t make Kakashi a happy commander. Genma’s expertise was with small weapons, and while his water knives were cutting deep, they weren’t enough to disperse the dragon.

Just enough to enrage it.

Coil on coil slid free from the Two-tails as the dragon struck after Genma again and again. It was a virtuoso performance of speed and precision to evade and strike, over and over. Even so, Kakashi was poised to call for long-distance support from the watching shinobi whether Genma liked it or not. Just before the measure in his head that weighed Genma’s need for revenge against his life tipped, though, one last coil slipped loose.

And the Two-tails struck.

With a yowl that echoed through the valley, the demon cat pulled free and spun to sink claws and teeth into the dragon, ripping it into orange mist. Finally, it stood, stiff-legged and bristling, glaring around the torn ground, and Kakashi had to bite back a curse as he realized Genma was standing right in front of it, out in the open at the top of a half-seared pine. He was talking to the enraged Two-tails, and Kakashi’s eye widened a little as he read the movement of Genma’s lips.

I remember her. I remember you. We didn’t realize, in time to save her. I’m sorry.

The cat stared down at him, and slowly it’s hackles lowered. It leaned down to sniff at Genma, and Kakashi’s hands wove through the long distance body-switching seals as fast as they ever had in his life, ready to swap himself for Genma, who seemed to have lost his mind.

The cat blinked and slowly dispersed into mist, curling through the trees and away.

Kakashi slumped, leaving the seals just barely uncompleted. “Going to give me a damn heart attack,” he muttered, and gave Tenzou, standing beside him, a dour look at his faint breath of a laugh. “Easy for you to laugh. ANBU was never this kind of trouble.”

From the angle of Tenzou’s head, he was smiling behind Cat’s mask. Only for a moment, though, before he stiffened. “I wouldn’t be too sure of that.”

Kakashi’s head snapped around to see Anko diving down, short sword first, on the red dragon currently wrapped in the grip of her snake summons. It would have been the perfect finishing attack if the dragon hadn’t torn its head free, jaws opening to meet her.


Anko bared her teeth as the dragon pulled its head loose. It was too late to alter her attack in any way but by aborting it completely and she was damned if she was going to do that. Down the throat it was!

She almost lost her aim when a water rope snaked around the dragon’s muzzle and cinched it closed in one yank. In the next moment, she had to focus on her strike, knifing the dragon through the spine with all the force of her descent, but as soon as the damn thing burst into red shards she got a foot against the Seven-tails and pushed off to leap for the wall, ignoring the outraged insectile hiss behind her.

She touched down in front of Kurenai and glared. “What the hell was that?!”

Kurenai was bent over, hands against her knees, breathing hard. “That.” A breath. “Was me saving.” Another breath. “Your ass. You’re welcome.”

“You only got out of the hospital a few weeks ago!” Anko hollered, gesturing with her sword, other hand jammed on her hip. “You’re still on restricted duties! You’re still in the middle of postpartum chakra drain! Goddamn it, Kurenai!”

Jounin, honestly! She swore there was nothing as much of a pain in the ass as a jounin!

Kurenai straightened slowly, tossing her hair back. “I’m a shinobi of Konoha, and I was here when my comrade needed help.”

Anko stared at her for a long moment and finally sighed. “Fuck.” She slung an arm around Kurenai’s shoulders. “Thanks. I owe you one.” She watched as Kurenai relaxed, and promptly re-focused her chakra and swept the other woman up in her arms.

“Anko!” Kurenai yelped.

“And I’ll just repay you now,” Anko said sweetly as she sprang down inside the wall, “by taking you to the medic station to be checked over. Just to be sure.” She grinned as Kurenai growled in her ear. A little irritation would help Kurenai recover faster. That was her story and she was sticking to it.


The fox watched the last of the other tailed beasts making tracks away from Konoha and shook himself all over, settling his fur. Well? he asked. Satisfied with our bargain, kit?

Naruto looked through the fox’s eyes at the slowly lightening sky and the mess of torn ground and splintered trees, at the shinobi lining Konoha’s wall, and the ones who had just arrived on the cliff over the valley. All alive. He felt a last, weary brush of Sasuke’s chakra as the Sharingan seal withdrew, and spotted the pink of Sakura’s hair at the top of the wall. “Yeah,” he said softly. “Yeah, I am. Thank you.”

One more thing, then, before you go back to those ‘important people’ of yours. The fox bent his head down to something on the ground, and Naruto made a disgusted face as he realized it was Madara’s body, all withered and yuck.

“Eew!” he yelled as Nine-tails closed his teeth lightly over the body. “Ew, ew, ew, what are you doing?”

What I live for, the fox rumbled, and tossed his head up, throwing the body up in the air, battle fan and all. Naruto felt the ingathering of chakra as the fox inhaled, and then Madara’s body was seared out of existence by the exhaled burst of fire against the sky. Mm. Better, Nine-tails growled, tails lashing with satisfaction.

He tilted an ear at the faint cheers from the wall and snorted. Humans. You can deal with that nonsense, kit.

Again there was a strange, sliding moment of rising, of feeling the fox brush past him, and Naruto was standing in a newly made clearing, blinking with his own eyes. Hearing the rising cheers of victory with his own ears. He laughed out loud as he took a running leap up two trees to the top of Konoha’s wall and catapulted into Sasuke and Sakura’s arms. He held on tight as the first rays of light slid over the horizon and touched Konoha’s roofs to color and life again. His village. His people. Alive. He felt the fox settle, in his soul, and smiled.

His home, now and always.

Shadows that Won’t Disappear

Castor was back from a tour of the Fifth District, and Frau had brought him a welcome-home bottle of wine. (Castor had rolled his eyes and asked, “Do you even know what the word ‘abstinence’ means?” but he’d also accepted the wine.)

“So?” Frau asked, taking a long swallow and tipping the chair at Castor’s reading table back on its legs. “How are they?”

“Falling,” Castor said shortly. “Like all the God Houses. We shouldn’t be falling again so soon after Vertrag redeemed the Houses on the road to Seele.” He looked down into the glass cradled between his hands, settling a little deeper into the room’s single, worn armchair.

“Not normally,” Frau agreed, narrowing his eyes at the ceiling. “You think it’s because Mikhail is missing? Or because Raphael is…” He hesitated, groping for the right word.

“Unbalanced,” Castor finished, eyes dark. “Perhaps. If so, it will fall to us to correct that, in the end.”

Frau winced. This wasn’t the first conversation the Ghosts had had about this. No one liked the thought of cold-blooded killing, but if Raphael’s master really was as insane as the destruction of the Raggs War seemed to indicate… they might not have a choice. “Have another drink and cheer up,” he directed. “It hasn’t come to that yet. You’re home for now, back to drinking Labrador’s tea and nagging me about my perfectly natural urges and pretending to your flock that you’re actually a nice guy. Relax.” Castor gave him a deeply exasperated look and he laughed, hooking an elbow over the wooden back of his chair. “You need some help doing that?” he asked casually.

Castor didn’t always ask for what he needed. Personally, Frau thought he’d taken the whole abstinence and penance thing way too seriously. This evening, though, Castor made a thoughtful sound and took a sip of his wine, eyes fixed on Frau over the rim. “There’s something I think I want to try,” he said at last.

Frau lifted his brows; okay, maybe Castor really was learning that too much repression was bad for the soul. “Hmm?”

Castor rose from his chair, setting his glass aside on the window ledge, and came to lay his fingers lightly on Frau’s wrist. Feste’s strings wrapped slowly around it, and suddenly Frau’s arm wasn’t his to move. “This,” Castor said softly.

Frau looked up at him, turning that over in his head. Part of him tensed up, resisting the idea. The plain fact was, Castor was a dangerous man; he hadn’t been raised to even recognize kindness much less practice it. Against that, though, was the part of him that knew Castor hated that fact, knew he embraced the Church’s mandate of compassion with all his heart. So he asked quietly, “What were you planning to do with me once you had me?”

The smile that curved Castor’s lips and lit his eyes was pleased and just a little shy and more than a little wicked. “I think… take my time.”

Frau leaned back, laughing. He knew Castor, and he had no doubt he’d be cursing himself for agreeing at some point tonight, but… he knew Castor. And he didn’t actually object to being teased, by the right person. If anyone he knew was going to have a talent for it, it was almost certainly Castor. He set his drink on the reading table and smiled up at him. “Okay. Go for it.”

Castor’s fingers stroked over the back of his hand and the strings came loose. “You’re getting out of your own clothes.”

Frau smirked; he imagined that part would change in time. Once Castor had a taste of this, Frau was pretty sure he’d want more. Castor liked being protected, but he really liked being in control. For tonight, though, he shrugged out of his surplice and undid the fiddly cassock buttons quick and easy. And then he took a moment to stretch, nice and slow.

“Show off,” Castor murmured behind him, and Frau grinned as long fingers stroked down his spine.

“Maybe.” He kicked off his pants and turned to see Castor watching him. He was perfectly happy to take the chance to watch back. Castor was beautiful, not with Lab’s unearthly beauty, but like someone had taken a current of wind and given it human form: lean and poised and sleek. Frau smiled and held out his hands, offering. He was looking forward to this.

Castor took his wrist and tugged him onto the bed. Weightless, unbreakable strings followed after Castor’s hands, winding around Frau’s arms and down his thighs until he was kneeling on Castor’s sheets, legs spread, arms drawn up over his head. “You sure you haven’t been reading my porn?” he asked, a bit husky. It was no strain, being held by Feste’s strings; he just couldn’t move, and that put a sheen of sweat over his skin.

“Most certainly not,” Castor murmured, settling behind Frau with a rustle. “I’ve simply been… thinking.” His hands spread against Frau’s stomach and slid up his chest, and Frau shivered.

Castor, true to his word, took his time. His hands stroked over Frau’s body, down his thighs, long fingers trailing softly back up the insides. Frau’s muscles drew taut in answer, but it didn’t do him a bit of good. He could barely even flex his hips as Castor slid his palms over Frau’s flanks and down to knead his ass gently; Frau’s breath caught as fingertips carelessly brushed his entrance. He swore he could feel Castor’s smile as the teasing touch drew away only to be replaced by the equally teasing slide of Castor’s cock between his cheeks as Castor pressed up against his back. He moaned softly as Castor’s hands kneaded over his shoulders and up his arms, easing the tautness of Frau’s muscles back into waiting warmth. The strength of Castor’s hands was always a little surprising.

And then Castor undid that relaxation all at once by reaching down and running his nails slowly up Frau’s inner thighs. Frau gasped, arching hard against the strings holding him as heat shot up his spine, and Castor made a satisfied sound, nearly a purr. “You’re enjoying this,” Frau panted.

“Mm.” Castor trailed light fingers up and down the hard line of Frau’s cock. “It seems you are, too.”

Frau laughed, breathless. He had to admit it was true. “Yeah.” Castor’s mouth curved against his shoulder and Castor’s fingers wrapped loosely around his cock, stroking him. Frau moaned low in his throat; that touch coaxed and promised, but it wasn’t nearly enough and Frau could barely move his hips an inch. “Fuck, Castor…”

“Eventually,” Castor murmured, teeth closing on Frau’s earlobe. “Probably.”

Frau nearly whimpered as Castor’s thumb rubbed soft circles over his head. Yeah, Castor was definitely good at this. The especially unfair part was how firmly the heat of Castor’s cock was pressed up between his cheeks, the slow strength of his hand kneading over Frau’s stomach, all in desperate contrast to the delicate way Castor fingered his cock, his nipples, rubbed a light fingertip behind his balls. Frau was a little light-headed from panting for breath by the time the strings shifted and moved him, bending him over on his knees, bound arms stretched out toward the top of the bed.

“Oh my god, Castor, tell me you’re going to fuck me now,” Frau groaned against the sheets. Castor’s husky laugh sent a hot shiver down his spine to tighten his stomach.

“Perhaps.” Frau could hear that evil smile hanging in the air, again. “If you ask nicely.”

Frau couldn’t actually be surprised; on the other hand, it was possible that two could play this game. “You want me to beg for it?” he asked, husky. “All right, then. I want it, Castor, I want your cock inside me. I want it so bad I can taste it, to feel how thick and hard you are working in and out of me. I want you to fuck me until I scream, and hold me still for every second of it.”

“Then I imagine this will be very satisfying for you,” Castor murmured, and Frau had a moment to congratulate himself on the breathless tone in his voice before one cool, slick finger pressed into him and Castor added, “Eventually.”

Frau’s groan was heartfelt, as Castor worked that one finger slowly in his ass. “Castor, please,” he finally begged.

The point was pretty clear when that got him two fingers.

“You are such a bastard,” Frau told him fervently, and Castor laughed.

“Now, is that asking nicely?”

“God, fine, please Castor, fuck me already before I go fucking insane, here!”

Castor’s fingers twisted slowly, deep in his ass, and Frau shuddered in the hold of the strings. “In time,” Castor said, soft and dark as velvet.

When Castor started stroking soft fingers up and down the line of Frau’s cock, he broke and begged again, breathless variations on please and now. Castor gave him three fingers all right, but slowly, so slowly that Frau’s whole body was taut with trying to push back onto those long fingers. Castor ignored his straining and just kept fucking him very slow, very easy while Frau panted and whined low in his throat.

“Please Castor, please, oh god, fuck me like you mean it, I need it so bad, please,” Frau pleaded shamelessly. Being spread open like this and not getting more was driving him crazy.

“Yes. I think now is a good time.”

Frau didn’t quite manage to process that before Castor’s cock was driving into him, hard and thick and so incredibly good after being teased for so long that Frau could only moan wordlessly. Castor’s strings held him quite still as Castor fucked him ruthlessly, long hard strokes pounding deep into his ass and finally, finally letting all the built up heat go somewhere. Frau gasped and panted under it, more and more desperately as pleasure coiled tighter and tighter, and nearly screamed when it finally snapped. Every sensitized nerve in his body caught fire as orgasm ripped through him, shaking him under Castor, and it went on and on as Castor fucked the tightness right back out of his body. The last few strokes would have driven him into the mattress in a boneless heap if the strings hadn’t held him.

He collapsed anyway when Castor finally released the strings and let him down to the bed.

“Fuck,” Frau mumbled into the sheets after a little while, dazed. He could feel Castor laughing against his back.

“I take it you approve, then.” Castor sounded extremely smug, and Frau managed to turn his head and look over his shoulder. Yep. Castor’s smile was very definitely smug.

“You,” he declared, still husky, “are an evil bastard.” He couldn’t help the grin, though. “And, yeah, that was pretty incredible.”

Castor’s smile softened and he ran his fingers through Frau’s damp hair. “Does that mean you’d be interested in doing it again some time?” he asked. There was a hint of diffidence lurking behind the smugness, and Frau got an arm to hold him long enough to turn himself over and tug Castor down to a kiss.

“Yeah,” he said quietly, against Castor’s mouth. “Yeah, I think I would.”

Castor made a pleased sound and settled against Frau, one hand spread against his chest. Frau smiled and draped an arm around him.

He’d have to return this favor some time soon.

End

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Nineteen

“Where is the man?!” Tsunade pounded a fist on her desk, which creaked in protest even through Shizune had gotten it reinforced with metal and stone supports. Kakashi couldn’t really blame her.

“He’s letting us wear ourselves out,” he said from his perch atop her filing cabinet, out of the way of any shrapnel. “We’ve found a few Akatsuki bases in nearly every country, but I doubt we’ve found them all. He’ll stay hidden in one until we’re exhausted and he’s ready.”

“And this is Uchiha Madara,” Jiraiya added, stretching out his long legs and slumping further down into Tsunade’s guest chair. “The Hyuuga can’t be everywhere, there aren’t enough of them strong enough to see through that grade of illusion." His mouth quirked in wry acknowledgement of Tsunade’s anger. "At least this delay is giving Naruto time to re-learn his techniques.”

Tsunade sat back in her chair looking sour. “Yes, and that’s another thing.”

Kakashi grinned a bit behind his mask. “He’s still nagging you to let him manifest?” He’d been witness to one of Naruto’s pitches to be allowed to try, three weeks ago, and Naruto had already been waving his arms and ranting at that one.

“He’s a medic himself!” Tsunade sounded aggrieved. “He should know perfectly well that a patient’s chakra must be allowed to reach equilibrium after major surgery.”

“Besides, which,” Jiraiya murmured, “it would cause chaos and panic throughout the village if he did it here.”

Tsunade sighed. “That too. The two old goats made much of that.”

“Yes. I don’t think I’m their favorite any more, either, after not stopping you or telling them what you planned.” Jiraiya cocked a brow at Tsunade. “You must have been keeping your temper with them a lot better than I’d thought, if they could think for one instant than I or anyone else could stop you once you’ve made a decision.”

“I’ve been attempting to compromise reasonably between the governing factions of the village.” Tsunade frowned, hands tracing over the cracked surface of her desk. “I don’t want to become what too many clan heads and Elders are, thinking that having power means they must be right.”

“You aren’t them,” Kakashi said quietly. “You’re Tsunade of the Leaf. We follow you because you’ve always cared for what’s right.” And sometimes the pride and terror of thinking that he might, just might, be able to live up to that legacy himself stopped his breath.

Tsunade met his eyes with a crooked smile. "I’d apologize for the weight of that, that I’ll leave to you," she said gently, "because I know damn well how heavy it is. But I’d be lying; I’ll do my best to make it even heavier, because that’s my duty."

Kakashi bent his head. "I know." She’d spent years running away from that weight, just like he had, and it hadn’t done either of them a bit of good in the end. Hopefully, they’d do better against Madara than against their own demons.

Whenever he finally got around to showing up.


In a wide, rounded, stone room underneath Fire country’s eastern lakes, a black and white body stepped out of the wall.

“Well?” asked the dim figure sitting quietly away from the single lamp.

The back and white head shook. “The boy’s been working his way up to complex techniques again, but he hasn’t manifested so much as a tail, much less the whole fox.”

Red eyes narrowed in the shadows. “How unusually cautious. I would like to be sure the demon is in top shape before I extract it. I suppose we might go fetch the Eight-tails first, but I don’t want to miss a good chance at the real prize. Perhaps it’s time to provide some… extra motivation." Teeth flashed for a moment. "I can spare you enough chakra to create, perhaps, six full clones."

Both the black and white sides of the face split into a smile.


The duties of a jounin were always irregular. A mission here, a season of teaching there, administrative jobs tucked in whenever a body was recovering from some injury, and sometimes political duties when someone retired from the field. Kakashi had known all of that, and though he’d done his best for years to stave off the political duties he’d never expected to avoid everything.

What he hadn’t expected was to be doing all of them at once.

He watched over Naruto’s re-training whenever Jiraiya-san wasn’t available. Shikaku-san had started insisting that Kakashi sit in on mission application hearings. He appeared to be one of Tsunade-san’s new de facto first councilors since she was nearly at knife-points with Mitokado and Utatane over Naruto. And here he was with an escort mission, of sorts, albeit a self-assigned one.

But he’d be damned before he let Sai go talk with Danzou alone.

He slouched along beside the boy, hands stuffed in his pockets, and caught the eye of the outer perimeter guard hidden in the garden a few houses down from Danzou’s apartment building. She nodded and let them pass.

“ANBU was tasked to guard Danzou-san, even though you might not have found all of Root’s members yet?” Sai asked, and Kakashi reminded himself wryly that this was the ANBU genius of the younger generation he was walking beside. Of course Sai had noticed.

“Would you tell us if you recognized a Root member we haven’t found?” he asked in return.

Sai gave him a look whose very blankness clearly suggested that even respected senpai could be complete morons, and touched his lips. Kakashi chuckled. “Exactly." Until they found the key for that seal, they couldn’t release mission information about Danzou to Sai, including information about who guarded him.

Sai cocked his head. “Ah. You think the seal may have another element?” A compulsion, of course, or else why worry what information he had. The blank, dark eyes turned considering. “I do not know.”

Because he had never disobeyed Danzou.

Kakashi liked talking with Sai. It kept him sharp and in practice with field speech, where the most important things were left unsaid. It also kept his rage with Danzou fresh, which was its own kind of advantage when going to speak to the old snake.

The inner perimeter, currently the doorman, let them through and Kakashi led the way up to Danzou’s apartment. He rapped his knuckles on the plain wood door and, after a long moment of waiting, was bidden to enter.

Danzou was sitting in a straight chair by the windows without, Kakashi was pleased to see, his over-robe and its stock of nasty surprises and pre-drawn seals. He didn’t think Danzou would bother to attack him, but he still didn’t know what Sai planned to do here today; if anything turned explosive, he’d rather not have Danzou’s full array of weapons to deal with. Danzou’s plain, white kimono showed his withered right arm more clearly than usual; Kakashi wondered if the man was brazen enough to try to play on the sympathies of his guards with that old injury, despite what all of ANBU knew was still deadly skill.

“Sai,” Danzou greeted the boy, without any apparent surprise. “What is the status of Root?”

“All members are accounted for,” Sai answered promptly, automatically, “and are under evaluation by—” here he stumbled, eyes suddenly shifting between Danzou and Kakashi. “By the Hokage’s command,” he finished slowly.

“Under which,” Kakashi noted dryly, leaning against the wall with crossed arms, “you have no right to command any of them. Including Sai.”

Danzou’s fingers flicked as if to brush that aside. “And how, without me to require the report, could you be sure everyone was accounted for?”

“Nor is that information you should have, now.” Kakashi gave Danzou an affable, eye-crinkling smile. If Danzou really wanted to convince him that little security breach had been some kind of helpful gesture, he shouldn’t be fishing for whether or not the rest of ANBU had found a way to identify Root.

Danzou shrugged his whole shoulder, looking careless. “As you wish. What is the purpose for this visit, then?”

Kakashi opened his hand at Sai, who took a few more steps away from the door, into the clear center of the room. “I wanted to ask,” the boy started, expressionless and hesitant both, somehow, “why you ordered me to kill Naruto.”

Danzou’s brow rose. “I gave orders to keep him out of enemy hands, or to stop the demon if the seal began to fail.” He made it sound so reasonable that Kakashi had to stop his fist from clenching.

“No,” Sai said quietly. “You are the greatest master of seal techniques in ANBU, possibly in the whole village. You could not be ignorant of the nature of Naruto’s seal. You ordered me to kill him if there was any change; but the seal was bound to change if Naruto ever gained full command of the demon fox, is that not correct?”

Kakashi straightened just a fraction, stifling a grin as Danzou’s shoulders turned stiffer. The problem with training an operative like Sai, of course, was that he never stopped noticing things.

“Why did you consider that such a dangerous possibility?” Sai went on, hands folded behind him as if he were reporting and not interrogating. “You always said that Root serves to defend the village. What was the danger, there?”

Danzou’s face settled into hard lines and his left hand closed tight on his knee. “What danger? You’re too young to have seen it, but I was there when the demon fox freed itself from the grip of a woman better trained and more experienced than that boy. Hiruzen kept him ignorant and trusted to his heart.” Danzou’s short laugh of disbelief was harsh. “The demon is too dangerous. It will escape him eventually, and there will be more of this,” he twitched his scarred right arm, showing how stiff and strengthless it was even after the best efforts of the Leaf’s healers, “and the village cannot afford that!”

“The village?” Kakashi murmured, “or Shimura Danzou?”

“The shinobi are the village’s strength,” the old man said firmly, and Kakashi’s eye narrowed.

“Then why are you so willing to sacrifice individuals?” he asked, soft and dangerous. “Individuals who aren’t you, at least.”

“Everyone has their role to play, Kakashi-kun.” Danzou settled back in his chair.

Kakashi wasn’t sure whether he was more impressed with Danzou’s relentless ability to shift the ground of any argument to his favor, or more appalled by the man’s self-centeredness and the growing suspicion that Danzou had lost track of reality and honestly believed all his own shifting, contradictory statements from moment to moment.

“Danzou-sama,” Sai said into the silent tension between the two men, and they both turned to look at him. “If you still commanded me, what mission would you give me next?”

The faintest smile hovered at the corners of Danzou’s mouth, and it was Kakashi’s turn to stiffen; just what contingencies, he wondered coldly, had Danzou thought to condition or compel his people to?

“I would say that you should finish the mission you were already given.” Danzou watched both of them with a hooded eye. “The threat to the village has not been removed yet.”

Not yet, no, Kakashi thought, careful of his breathing to conceal his rage; but it would be soon even if he had to kill Danzou without sanction. And then he raised a brow as Sai turned to him.

“Kakashi-san. If all goes as the Hokage wishes, you will command ANBU soon. Under these circumstances, what order would you give me?”

Kakashi actually blinked, and a slow smile tugged at his mouth. Sai was testing them. Raised to follow his orders without question, no matter what they were, still the boy was feeling his way toward judging his superiors. He wanted very badly to smirk at Danzou, but Sai deserved an answer first.

“Hmm. I’d also say to go on as you have been, if for somewhat different reasons.” Danzou’s ever so faint snarl warmed his heart, and he beamed at Sai behind his mask. “As far as mission orders,” he continued, more seriously, “I would hesitate to send you out again before I was sure you were fit to judge your orders and choose how to carry them out.”

“A shinobi has no need of such judgment,” Danzou snapped. “Not until they are experienced enough to step back from the field and give orders themselves.”

Kakashi didn’t look away from Sai. “Shinobi are the weapons of their villages. Their nations. Their employers. True enough. But a shinobi without the will to evaluate orders, and even modify them if field conditions demand it, is a blade without a sheath. And members of ANBU are ground to a sharper edge than any others. That’s what you’ve been waving around your own village, Danzou.”

“Your sentimentality is your great failing, Kakashi-kun,” Danzou growled.

Sai hadn’t looked away from him, and Kakashi smiled at the shadows of thought shifting behind those dark eyes. “From your perspective, I have no doubt that’s true. But that’s also why I was chosen by the Fifth.” The unspoken and why you were not rang in the quiet air of the apartment. Danzou’s good arm tensed, and Kakashi got a foot under himself, ready to move if he had to.

Slowly, Sai nodded. “I believe I know what I need to.” He turned again and bowed to Danzou. “Danzou-sama.”

Danzou sat back, good hand spread against his leg again. “Take that one with you when you go, then.” He jerked his chin at Kakashi.

Sai went promptly to the door and held it open, looking over his shoulder. “Kakashi-san?”

Kakashi let himself be ushered out and watched Sai from the corner of his eye as they made their way back down three flights of well-lit stairs and out to the street. It was two blocks before Sai spoke.

“I do not believe there is a compulsion element to the seal,” he said, quite casual, “but you should come with me to see Naruto, to be sure.”

Kakashi whistled. Sai might have been trained never to question or think about his orders, but he had a quick mind, that was clear. No one without one could have come up so speedily with a plan to test the seal for compulsion. No one who didn’t want to be able to question would have tested it by asking for orders he intended to disobey, or attempt to.

No one who wasn’t ANBU to the bone would have used himself as the test material in so dangerous a trial so unflinchingly.

Kakashi nodded to himself; he thought he knew where Sai stood, now. “I’ll come, yes,” he agreed. “Hopefully I’ll even get to you before Sakura, if there turns out to be a compulsion after all.”

“That would be helpful,” Sai agreed, with no trace of understanding the joke, dark as it was. Kakashi sighed to himself. They would have to work on Sai’s sense of humor.


Naruto flopped over in the scrubby grass of the eighth training ground with his arms thrown out. “That’s six Rasengan in a row,” he panted, “while channeling chakra to Sakura and avoiding those fucking Chidori Senbon. Can I manifest now?”

You have the patience of a bird, the fox rumbled, sounding amused. A small one. In spring.

The fox was getting a lot more mellow, now he was healed, but Naruto wasn’t completely sure this was an improvement, at least as far as the smart remarks went.

“I think you and the Nine-tails are both stable,” Jiraiya said from where he was lounging against a tree with a jug of sake, overseeing Sakura’s work on some of his sage techniques, “but Tsunade will have to check you over to be sure. You know she’ll skin us both if I tell you you can try before she’s had a look.” He wagged a finger at Sasuke. “And you! Stop resting on past accomplishments! It’s about time you started working on some new applications; you perfected Chidori Senbon over a year ago.”

Sasuke gave his teacher a bored look from where he was sitting cross-legged in the grass. “What, like this?” His hands, which Naruto suddenly realized had been stealthily forming the Boar and the Monkey in his lap, flicked out and a net of fire burned toward Jiraiya. The old pervert yelped, dropping his jug as his hands clapped into the Snake and a wall of earth surged up to block the net. Sasuke leaned back on his hands, smirking.

“That’s a decent start, I suppose, yes,” Jiraiya said thoughtfully from behind his wall.

Sakura came to haul Naruto out of the grass, laughing breathlessly. “You should have known you wouldn’t catch Sasuke out like that, Jiraiya-sama.”

The old man was smiling as he dismissed the wall. “I suppose I should.”

Sasuke looked aside, just a little flushed at the compliment, and Naruto grinned. “You two are so cute,” he cooed, eyes dancing wickedly.

“Cute?!” Both Sasuke and Jiraiya protested, but it was Sasuke’s hands that were flashing up into the Tiger, and Naruto prepared to dodge, laughing.

“Guys,” Sakura’s voice cut through the horseplay, suddenly level. “Heads up.”

Naruto and Sasuke spun to flank her, alert, and Naruto blinked when he saw the two coming towards them. “Sakura, that’s just Kakashi-sensei and… oh.” Okay, no wonder Sakura was tense. The other one was definitely Sai.

“Mm.” Sasuke touched Sakura’s shoulder and stepped back to cover them both.

“Guuuys,” Naruto groaned. He didn’t usually have any problem at all with how protective his team was, but this was silly. Kakashi-sensei wouldn’t bring Sai around if he was dangerous!

“It’s our job, Naruto, quit complaining,” Sakura ordered coolly, and he gave up. That was her mission voice, and there was no arguing with it.

Kakashi-sensei ambled up, hands in his pockets, so elaborately casual that even Naruto gave him a suspicious look. A Kakashi that casual was a Kakashi who was up to something, most likely some kind of object lesson. The only question was, who for? The old pervert seemed to have the same question, because he went to meet them and exchanged a few quiet words with Kakashi-sensei. He didn’t look entirely happy as he glanced back at Naruto and his team, but he sighed and waved three fingers at them before turning and strolling back toward the village with his sake jug dangling from one fist.

“All clear sign,” Sasuke murmured from behind them.

“Hm.” Sakura didn’t sound entirely convinced, and Naruto sighed.

“Ah, good,” Kakashi-sensei said as he came into ear shot. “You’re all here.”

As if that were a cue, Sai stepped forward, smiling his weird smile. “Naruto-kun. I wanted to apologize.”

The fox growled as soon as Sai spoke, and Naruto couldn’t help wincing himself. There was something wrong about Sai’s voice, his smile; Naruto could actually feel it, like a pebble in his sandal or something.

Corruption, the fox said in his head, crackling like fire. Rot. Twisting. This is what I live to destroy.

Well you can’t kill him, Naruto answered sharply. It’s not his fault!

Sai was watching him, head cocked. “Naruto-kun?”

Naruto winced again, helplessly. “You… you don’t have to do that, you know. The smiling. I mean… you don’t have to.”

No one moved at all for one moment and then the alarming smile slid off Sai’s face like it had been wiped away with a sponge. What was left was a little unnerving; even shinobi weren’t often that still, just watching like that, but at least it didn’t make him twitch inside. The feeling of the Nine-tails calmed a little, too, the pressure of his growl easing. Even Sakura eased back off her toes a bit. Naruto breathed a sigh of relief.

“That makes you uncomfortable?” Sai asked, sounding a little curious even if he didn’t look it much.

“Well it was a little weird already, but since Nine-tails got better we’re… not closer, I mean he’s still kind of a jerk, but I sense some of the things he does. And when you smile like that it’s just wrong. You don’t want to. You don’t mean it. It’s…” Naruto rubbed a hand through his hair, looking for a different word and finally sighed. “Yeah, okay, he’s right. It’s twisted.”

“And yet neither of you seem to feel that way when Sai isn’t bothering with emotion at all,” Kakashi-sensei murmured, eye sharp on them both. “Interesting.”

Naruto thought about it. Now he was kind of curious himself. “It’s… he feels a little… cold,” he said at last, slowly. “But it’s not bad. Just cold.” It actually felt a little the way Sakura did, beside him right now, focused like a burning glass on Sai.

“Very interesting.” Kakashi-sensei glanced over at Sai. “Well?”

Sai reached up to touch his tantou, and Sakura’s tension cranked back up a notch. “I feel no compulsion to attack. I believe we may conclude the seal is a restraint only.”

Sakura pulled in a breath like the hiss of a snake, and whirled on Kakashi-sensei. “You tested this using Naruto and Sai without telling us…?!” Her hands hovered, ready to form seals, and Naruto had a queasy feeling she would go straight for her activation.

“Um, Sakura-chan…”

“Sakura,” Kakashi-sensei cut in firmly. “Stand down. That’s an order.”

Her eyes narrowed, but slowly she lowered her hands. “Tell me why,” she said, low and hard.

“Sai chose to test this on himself, knowing that if there was a compulsion, and if I couldn’t subdue him first, you and Sasuke would kill him. Think about that.”

If anything her glare intensified. “Kakashi-sensei…” she grated through her teeth.

Sai had been standing quite calmly and without reaching for a weapon all through this, and Naruto shivered. “How can you do that?” he asked softly. “How can you be so calm about something like that?”

Sai shrugged one shoulder a fraction. “ANBU is the sword of Konoha,” he said, perfectly tranquil. “Whatever is required, we will do. It was necessary to test this.” He slanted a glance at Sakura. “Anger is not necessary.”

Sakura rounded on him. “You think I want to kill one of my own village?” she yelled at him, eyes blazing. “Anger is damn well necessary, over something like this! We should have been warned! There should have been more controls, to keep both of you safe during the test!”

Sai blinked and cocked his head at her. “You are angry… because I was in danger? I was the threat.”

“You’re a shinobi of the Leaf, you absolute moron!” Sakura’s hands were flexing like she was about to wrap them around his neck and shake him. “You’re loyal to this village! You deserve to be protected too! And I’m really damn angry that you weren’t!”

Sai looked even more puzzled and Naruto was torn between laughing and yelling a little himself. “Look, you’ve already been hurt, and that really sucks,” he put in. “None of us would be happy with the idea of hurting you more, especially if it’s not your fault.”

“Distress over another’s pain,” Sai murmured. “This is what is called empathy?”

The fox flinched and whined, and Naruto didn’t blame him at all. The cold was getting more noticeable.

The grass rustled as Sasuke came back up beside them, sliding a handful of shuriken back into his pouch, eyes level on Sai. “You know what it is,” he said, quiet and confident. “When your brother was in pain, you were distressed.”

Sai jerked a little, as if he’d started to step back and stopped himself. “Shin,” he whispered, eyes suddenly distant. “I don’t…”

“You were,” Sasuke insisted. “Otherwise, you wouldn’t have tried so hard to make it stop.”

“Oh,” Naruto said, eyes widening. Now he got it. “That… was that why?” Heat gathered in his chest, burning and growing, and the fox’s growl resonated through it. This time he welcomed it, because his own fury was in there too. “That was why Danzou made them fight?” To hurt Sai so badly he’d freeze himself to stop the pain?

Sai wasn’t tranquil any more. His face was drawn and his arms were pulled in tight. “Shin.” The cold deepened.

Naruto couldn’t stand it any longer. He stepped forward and grabbed Sai’s forearms. “You don’t have to do that!” he burst out. “It won’t happen again. I won’t let it!”

Sai stared at him for a long moment. “You’re very like him,” he finally said quietly. “I remember… he said things like that, too.”

“If you remember,” Kakashi-sensei finally spoke up again, “then he is still with you. That’s why we remember, and care, even when it hurts.”

Sai turned his head to look up at Kakashi-sensei, though his arms still hung without resistance in Naruto’s hold. “Is it worth it?” The thoughtless innocence of the question made Naruto’s anger with Danzou burn hotter, even though the fox was slowly settling again.

Kakashi-sensei looked down at Sai gravely. “Yes, it is.”

Sai bowed his head. “I see.” He looked back at Naruto for a breath, considering, and finally smiled. It was small and faint, but real.

Naruto grinned back with vast relief as the sense of coldness eased. “There we go,” he said softly. “See? It’s okay.”

“Perhaps,” Sai murmured.

Sasuke stepped forward and rested a hand on Sai’s shoulder for a moment, nodding. Sakura clasped the other shoulder hard and shook Sai just a little. “Not every moment is a mission,” she told him, a bit husky. “When it isn’t, that’s when you relax so you don’t go crazy, okay?”

Sai looked at her for a long, thoughtful moment, and finally nodded. "I suppose I can try."

Naruto thought maybe Kakashi-sensei’s lesson today had been for all of them.


Danzou sat at his window, watching the people passing in the street below as dusk softened the shapes of the village’s roofs, and turned plans over in his head. There had been no commotion in the village today, so he had to assume that Sai had been unable to complete his mission. Again. There was an outside possibility that the boy really had broken his conditioning sufficiently to refuse the mission, but he considered that very unlikely. Root’s training had taken very completely with Sai, doubly so once the turning point of killing his “brother” had passed. Most likely, then, Kakashi had stopped Sai.

For all Kakashi had been silent in Council, as befit a mere potential Hokage candidate, Danzou knew perfectly well whose hand had truly driven his downfall. Contrary to his lazy airs, Kakashi was hot blooded; it was little wonder he’d left ANBU, in the end. Perhaps Danzou should have tried harder to acquire Kakashi for Root when he’d been orphaned, though ten years old was late to start that training. For a while, Danzou had thought it didn’t matter—that Kakashi would live for nothing but the village and abide purely by the Code, whether he was formally of Root or no. Namikaze Minato had much to answer for, not only for failing to destroy the Nine-tails but for turning one of Konoha’s most powerful shinobi away from his right path. One bare year as Kakashi’s jounin-sensei and his hooks had been set, pulling the boy further and further from his duty. It was uncanny.

And Namikaze’s brat clearly had some of the same nature, in addition to his mother’s temper. Why could no one but him see the danger that posed?

“Brooding again, Shimura-kun?”

Danzou jerked up out of his chair in shock. No one should be able to enter this room without his knowledge! Not through the seals he’d placed on every wall, on the ceiling and floor, on the door and each window. But there was another standing there in the center of his floor mats, arms folded, wearing a mocking smile. The seamed and wrinkled face was only vaguely familiar, but there was no mistaking the man’s eyes, red even in shadow, and marked with three black curls. It took long seconds for Danzou to believe the only possible conclusion, to even consider the idea, but there was only one man of the Uchiha who could be this old and still alive.

“You’re dead,” were the words that came out of his mouth, nevertheless, in his shock. “The First killed you.”

Uchiha Madara spread black gloved hands, indicating his solid and living body in its loose, night-blue clothing. “As you can see, he did not. Indeed, I like to think that I won that day. After all,” he smiled bright and terrible in the dimness, “I’m still here and Hashirama is not.”

Danzou took a slow breath and straightened up. “Not for long.” His outer robe, with all its seals and tags, was hanging across the room, but he was not helpless.

Madara waved his fingers. “Not so quickly, Shimura-kun. After all, you’re now in my position too, aren’t you? Thrown away by those you tried to warn. Exiled from the place you should have. Ignored by those you should lead.”

“I am no traitor,” Danzou snapped, trying to think whether he could convert the barrier seal under the floor mats to a binding seal quickly enough to catch a shinobi of Madara’s power.

“Is it treachery to wish to lead your own people?” Madara purred. “You have more experience and wisdom than the Senju chit that leads now, surely.”

Danzou’s stomach was sinking; he remembered Madara’s crushing strength, and none of the seals he had to hand, or the techniques he could perform without preparation would hold or kill him. The most he could do was probably to raise an alarm, and if the man had gotten in here undetected, that might not be enough.

At least not if he attacked here and now.

“What are you suggesting?” he finally asked, harshly. “You’ve tried more than once to destroy this village, and now you expect me to believe you’ll leave anything for me to actually lead?”

“I’m willing to make reasonable bargains,” Madara murmured, pacing toward him and turning to circle him. The skin between Danzou’s shoulder blades crawled, and he held himself fiercely still. “If you aid me in capturing the Nine-tails, I will undertake to leave the village in your hands. Intact. As long,” he stopped in front of Danzou, red eyes boring into his, “as you make no move against me in the future.” He smiled. “Don’t you want the demon fox to go away, Shimura-kun? Hasn’t that been the idea all this time?”

Madara must be used to dealing with madmen, if he thought that kind of logic would work. But if he was used to his blandishments working, perhaps it would give Danzou enough time. “What do you want?” he asked, low.

“Why, nothing you wouldn’t already be doing, if you only had the opportunity!” Madara swung away from him, spreading his arms as if to indicate his generosity. “Kill Tsunade. And the Hatake pup. Use that Root of yours to cut the Sacrifice out of the herd so I can take the Nine-tails. And then you can be seen to drive me off, and the village will be yours.”

True temptation welled up in Danzou’s heart for a moment. For the price of two lives, the very two who were leading the village astray, he could have Konoha and protect it properly.

If only Madara could be counted on to keep his bargain, he might really have done it.

“You’ll need to get me out of here without raising any alarm,” he said slowly.

“Nothing is easier,” Madara said softly, turning to face him again with that gleaming smile. “Come along, then, Shimura-kun.”

The room around them twisted impossibly, spinning and sinking on the still point of Madara’s right eye, and then everything went dark.

A/N: No, Danzou and Madara did not meet during the Third War, in this continuity. No, Madara doesn’t wear a mask. Tobi = Madara was either the clumsiest Author Had A Better Idea ever or else the most ridiculous character detour ever, and in either case I deeply dislike that design choice. So Madara gets a face, here. As for Tobi =/= Madara… that was the most pointless “twist” imaginable, and I hereby ignore it entirely. Tobi doesn’t exist, in this continuity, Madara does. Also, implanted Sharingan has been done, so Danzou’s arm and eye were plain old stricken in the Nine-tails’ attack and his abilities are his own.

The Word Whose Appearance Is Multiple

For the purposes of writing in English, and based on a few indications in the manga, I’ve interpreted Kuroyuri as a girl.

Kuroyuri

Kuroyuri was a prodigy. She’d heard it from her family, she’d heard it from her teachers, and once she’d gotten to the Academy she’d seen it in the eyes of her classmates. Whenever they looked down far enough, anyway. She was the youngest person in the whole school by almost five years.

It wasn’t that she was a brilliant strategist, because she wasn’t. She just always won anyway. With the kind of zaiphon she commanded, she didn’t need to “marshal her resources” or “coordinate with her partners”. She just blew apart whatever was in her way. It worked.

So on the day of the exam, while everyone else whined and sweated, she stood apart from her “team” and leaned back against the clear wall of the arena with crossed arms. She tapped her toe, waiting impatiently while the proctor read out the rules and reminded everyone this was for real. It had better be for real; she hadn’t had a single good match since she left home.

When the far door snapped up and the over-muscled target raged through, she pushed off the wall, filled her hands with power, and blew a hole where his chest had been.

The proctor, who hadn’t even gotten all the way out the other door, hesitated. “Er. This team… passes?” She looked over her shoulder at the head of the academy and the fancy generals who’d come to watch exams with him. Kuroyuri sniffed.

“You know I passed,” she said, waving a hand at the rest of the students. “If you want to know about them, go get another target.” She wasn’t part of any “team” of students; they’d all made that clear, and she’d expected it already. She’d been poisoned for existing when she was five, where was the surprise that people grudged her her life and power?

“There might be some justice to that, yes,” the Chairman allowed, fingers flicking at the proctor. She guided Kuroyuri out with a hand on her shoulder, tossing a cheery, “Wait right here!” at the rest of the students.

“You have the strength for battle, certainly,” the Chairman observed, giving Kuroyuri a stern look. “But I’m not entirely sure you have the discipline. Perhaps it would be better to keep you for another year.”

Kuroyuri stiffened, starting to glare. She’d die of boredom if she had to spend another year around here! The general standing beside Miroku stirred, though, and lifted a hand.

“That won’t be necessary,” he said calmly. “I will take this one.”

The Chairman cocked an eyebrow at him. “You will, hm? Well, Kuroyuri was certainly slated for the Black Hawks eventually, but are you sure, Ayanami-kun?”

“Quite sure.” The general stepped forward and rested a hand on Kuroyuri’s shoulder. A possessive hand, she thought, looking up at him, which made a little thrill of hope and surprise run through her. “Kuroyuri will do better among our own kind.”

That was when the unit name clicked, and Kuroyuri’s eyes widened. This was the Warsfeil general! This was the man all the families like hers were talking about! He used his power right out in the open, he and the Black Hawks, and no one dared say a word! “I’ll do my best!” she exclaimed, looking up at him starry-eyed. “I promise!”

He smiled faintly, glancing down at her. “I trust you will.”

Kuroyuri wandered through the rest of graduation and processing in a daze, seeing again and again that tiny smile, hearing that low, sure voice saying he trusted her.

Her new post was so exciting it nearly made her squeak. Okay, fine, it did make her squeak, but only once! And that was just because Hyuuga could do really cool things with his swords. There was lots of blood, on that assignment; she approved. In fact, she kind of loved it. She was with other Warsfeil, she was one of the official ones. And, so, yeah, the rest of the military whispered about them, and crossed the hall out of their path, and moved away from any table one of them ate at. It wasn’t all that different from how she’d already been treated at the Academy, and at least now she had a unit she belonged with!

It took a while for her to realize that there was something wrong.

She didn’t always use her soul sight. It had been really strong when she was younger, and really distracting, so she’d learned to ignore it mostly. The first time she used a Wars in her new duties, though, she’d noticed that Hyuuga was half-souled. It hadn’t taken much thinking to figure out who held the other half, and it made perfect sense that Ayanami-sama could do something that amazing. He was Ayanami-sama! She’d looked, when they came back to the ship, just to be sure she was right.

That’s when she’d seen that Katsuragi was bound the same way.

Both the other Black Hawks’ souls belonged to their commander. Hers didn’t, and Ayanami-sama hadn’t made any sign he expected to take hers. She searched his face when he told them they’d done well; she couldn’t see any difference in how he looked at them and how he looked at her. But there must be one. Because otherwise, she’d be bound to him the same way, wouldn’t she?

She brooded on that all the way back to the Fortress, curled up on her seat with her arms around her knees. Was it just because she was so young? Did he think she wasn’t strong enough? But he knew her strength, he’d seen her in battle!

Was she… not suitable somehow?

That was the thought that finally drove her to his office to ask. She couldn’t stand the thought she might not be what he needed. Once she’d kicked that clown Hyuuga out the door and slammed it behind him, she spun around to face her commander, biting her lip.

Ayanami-sama set down his pen and folded his hands with that faint smile of his. “What is it, Kuroyuri?”

“Am I… not what you want, Ayanami-sama?” she asked, soft and shaky. “Am I… am I failing in some way?”

His brows rose. “Why would you think that?”

“You haven’t… I’m not… You haven’t bound my soul!” she burst out. “You have both the other two, but not me! Am I… not good enough?” she finished in a whisper, blinking hard to hold back tears.

He rose and came around the desk to her, and she clenched her hands at her sides, trying to be brave in face of whatever he was going to say. When he knelt down level with her and touched her cheek, a sob almost broke loose.

“Be calm,” he told her quietly. “Your place is here at my side. Do not doubt that.”

Kuroyuri nearly gasped with relief, pressing her locked hands to her chest. “Ayanami-sama…”

“I hadn’t thought to take your soul until you’re older, and sure in your heart that you belong to the Black Hawks.” Sharp violet eyes held hers. “To me.”

“I do,” she protested. “I am! You gave me a place, you let me fight, you let me use my power! You make everything right! I do belong to you!”

“Is a contract binding your soul something you really wish?” he asked softly. “This is your life bound to mine, and you are very young, Kuroyuri.”

“You gave me a place,” she said, soft and sure, because he’d just confirmed it. Her place was at his side. He was the one who let them command darkness right out in the light, and not fear for their lives. “I’m sure in my heart, Ayanami-sama. I swear it.”

He held her eyes for another long moment, but finally he nodded. “Come here.” He held out his hand to her and she stepped forward, trustingly, into the circle of his arm.

When his fingers reached into her chest, chill and sharp like a blade cutting her open, she bit her lip hard to keep silent. She wrapped her hands in his uniform coat and swallowed down the whimpers that tried to force their way up her throat. This was Ayanami-sama, and her soul was his to take. Everything that was her stretched, and stretched some more as she gasped for breath, until part of her settled into his hand.

“Ayanami-sama,” she whispered, rough and shaky.

“Shh,” he murmured to her, soft and cool, rubbing her back. “It’s done. Be still, now.”

She quieted obediently, leaning against his shoulder, and slowly the ache of dislocation eased under his soothing hand. “Thank you,” she finally said, low.

He chuckled softly. “Thank you, as well.” When she looked up shyly, her breath caught. She could see it, raw in his eyes, the possessiveness she thought she’d sensed when he’d claimed her from the Academy. Her. He wanted her to be one of his people, not despite what she was but because of it. She smiled back, cheeks warm.

“I belong with Ayanami-sama.”

The satisfaction in his eyes made her blush harder, right down to warm her heart.

“Yes.”

And that became her world.

 

Haruse

When Kuroyuri announced, “I want to see you more often. Is that okay with you?” Haruse answered as honestly as he always answered her:

“Of course.”

He wasn’t sure why this caused her to grab his cuff and tow him promptly off down the halls of the Fortress, but she obviously had a destination in mind so he followed after willingly enough. When they went up an elevator into officer territory, he did wonder whether he was really cleared to be there. Kuroyuri had to use a keycard to unlock the elevator doors. But, he reasoned, he was in the company of someone who clearly was authorized, so it should be all right. Maybe she wanted to spend some time together in her own rooms instead of down in the common areas where people did tend to look askance and whisper.

So when she finally announced, “Here we go!” he was expecting the door to open onto an officer’s suite.

Instead he found himself looking across a large office at a large desk, behind which was, unmistakably, General Ayanami, the Chief of Staff of the entire Imperial Armed Forces.

Reflex jerked him into a salute as Kuroyuri trotted blithely across the office. “Ayanami-sama,” she said, leaning familiarly against the man’s desk, “can we have Haruse for the Black Hawks? Please?”

Ayanami’s brows rose, and his mouth quirked with unmistakable amusement as he returned Haruse’s salute and nodded for him to stand a little easier. “This is a unit of Warsfeil, Kuroyuri,” the General pointed out, quite reasonably.

Kuroyuri, though, just looked up at him and said softly, “You can change that, though. Can’t you? You can, Ayanami-sama. Please?”

They looked at each other for a long, silent moment. Haruse didn’t know what passed between them in that silence, but finally Ayanami looked up to regard him thoughtfully. “Is this your wish, Haruse-kun? To join the Black Hawks?”

“I… I didn’t… I never thought…” Haruse took a deep breath, trying to get control of himself past his shock. “I hadn’t thought it would ever be possible, sir. I never considered it.”

Ayanami glanced back down at Kuroyuri, a little chiding. “Kuroyuri…”

“But!” Kuroyuri spun back to him, eyes wide and pleading. “You said you wanted to see me more often, too! You said it was okay.”

“I did. I do!” he agreed earnestly. “I would love to be able to serve with you, it’s just… I mean…” He ran a hand through his hair, flustered enough to be falling out of attention. He looked over at Ayanami, who was watching them quietly. “Is it really possible, sir? For me to become… what you and Kuroyuri-chuusa are?”

“Possible, yes,” he murmured. “Is it your will to become that?”

Haruse took a deep breath, thinking hard. Dozens of childhood horror stories about Warsfeil clamored in the back of his head: anathema, unholy, they’ll eat your soul if you’re not good. But against that clamor was the pressure of Kuroyuri’s eyes on him, their honesty and determination, their purity. He knew by now that the duties of the Black Hawks were dangerous and bloody, but he hadn’t become a soldier because he thought it would be a safe, clean job. He had enlisted to serve his people and his country with his life. Slowly he straightened and nodded. To become as she was… “It would be my honor, sir,” he said quietly.

“Even if you lose your soul?” Ayanami asked casually, and Haruse froze.

“Ayanami-sama!” Kuroyuri protested, scowling. “You’re trying to scare him.”

He cocked a brow at her. “Your soul is no longer entirely your own, Kuroyuri.”

She huffed, arms folded. “That’s because it’s you. This is the place you gave me. You’re my place; of course my soul is yours.”

Haruse felt like the world tilted. She said it so calmly, so matter-of-fact. Warsfeil truly did deal in souls, then, but… not as a horror, it seemed? She said it as easily, and as earnestly, as if it was her loyalty she’d given. Perhaps… perhaps they were the same thing in a way.

Perhaps to “give your heart” just meant something a little more tangible to Warsfeil than to most people.

And this man, who had given his dearest friend the belonging Haruse knew she needed so very much, was offering to let Haruse see the world the same way. Offering him a place beside her.

Haruse drew himself back up to calm and proper attention. “Even so, sir. It would be my honor.”

Ayanami smiled faintly. “I think you’ve found someone suitable, yes,” he told Kuroyuri, and stood from behind his desk. “Come, then, Haruse-kun. If you would make this pledge with us, I will show you the first part of it.” He stripped back the glove from his left hand and drew his sword, taking the end in his bare hand and closing his fist tight. Haruse flinched in shock. Ayanami’s face was calm. He held out his hand, cupping it as red gathered in his palm. “My blood,” he said, softly. “Take and drink of it.” He smiled, and this time it was sharp. “If you would be raised up.”

Haruse swallowed a little hard, but a glance at Kuroyuri showed her only smiling, happy and hopeful. If he was going to look at the world as they did… then his commander’s blood was not a threat or a mark of pain. It was the offer of life—a new life. Haruse gathered himself and walked across the room to Ayanami, and knelt down at his feet; it seemed only proper. He cupped his hands under Ayanami’s and touched his lips to the blood in his palm.

It slid down his throat and straight through his chest like a burning sword. Haruse doubled over, gasping harshly for breath. It felt like his heart was being pulled inside out, and each tug sent a stab of fire through him.

“Haruse! Haruse, it’ll be all right.” Kuroyuri’s arms, small and strong, wound around his shoulders. “Let Ayanami-sama in, and it will be all right.”

She was his guide in this, so he clenched his teeth and did as she said, fighting to surrender to the force twisting through him. And it was true—the more he yielded to that pressure, the easier it got, the less it hurt, until he felt like he recognized his own body again. Or maybe it was his soul. Slowly he looked up, and met Ayanami’s eyes with a shock of connection. His lips worked as he tried to sort out, in his spinning head, what this man was to him, now. One title after another shaped themselves: General, commander, patron, Lord. Master, his soul whispered.

Ayanami’s bloodied hand settled on his head. “Call me by my name, now,” he said quietly.

Haruse shivered, panting for breath as Kuroyuri hugged him around the neck and made encouraging noises. “I…”

“Give it time to settle in you,” Ayanami told him, more gently than he’d spoken yet. “Rest while I take care of your transfer to the Black Hawks. Kuroyuri can show you some of how to use our power once you’ve recovered.”

Haruse’s breath caught, because that new gentleness was open to see in Ayanami’s eyes. It was quiet, but it was there, and it plucked at Haruse’s devotion. “Yes, Ayanami-sama,” he said softly. A part of him couldn’t help wondering, though, whether the loyalty he knew he couldn’t help giving Ayanami would take from what he’d already given Kuroyuri.

A few days later, when he was given his transfer papers to sign, he saw that his new post was listed as Kuroyuri’s Begleiter. Haruse smiled.

He had chosen rightly.

 

Konatsu

Ayanami watched his newest member of the Black Hawks salute smartly and march out of his office with a straight back, and turned a thoughtful eye on his oldest member. “You didn’t ask.”

Hyuuga shrugged a shoulder casually, still looking out the window over the city. “Konatsu’s a Warren, and word’s gotten around the Fallen families, you know. I imagine he knows who you are. If he wants to be given that power, he’ll ask himself.”

“He may know,” Ayanami agreed mildly, “but you certainly know. And you didn’t ask.”

Hyuuga sighed, a wordless admission that he wasn’t going to get out of answering this one, and turned around, leaning his shoulders against the glass. “Yeah, I didn’t. Aya-san, this kid grew up without power in one of your bloodlines. The Fallen families aren’t nice, any more than the God Houses are, and no one’s hand but yours ever redeems us.” His mouth quirked, faint and sharp. “He lived and fought and never bowed down. I like the kid’s spirit.”

Ayanami snorted softly, amused. “Yes, that was what convinced me he was deadly enough to join us, power over Wars or no.” He cocked his head at Hyuuga. “Why would you not wish to see him with greater power, then? I doubt he’d abandon the sword, not if he already fights such that you approve of him.”

Hyuuga lowered his eyes, examining the toes of his boots. “It’s something he said, when he woke up,” he finally said, low. “That what he wants has no meaning if someone gives it to him.” When he looked up again, his eyes were burning, they way they did in battle. “I want to watch him keep fighting for whatever it is he really wants.”

Ayanami didn’t think he’d ever seen Hyuuga this interested in anyone, before. Perhaps Ayanami himself held Hyuuga’s attention that way, at least once Hyuuga had teased him out of patience, but certainly no one else. “Very well,” he said at last. “I think I’ll assign him as your Begleiter, then. Since you take an interest in his progress, you may stand as his superior and mentor. He seems very dedicated, so he may,” he added dryly, “even be a good influence on you.”

Hyuuga grinned at him, running a hand sheepishly through his hair. “Whatever you say, Aya-tan.”

Long past being deceived by any apologies or promises to be more diligent at anything except field work, Ayanami waved dismissive fingers at his oldest friend and follower, and turned back to his own paperwork.

Over the next few weeks, though, he watched his new subordinate. Konatsu was, indeed, very diligent, and also quite practical. It took only a few days before the boy evidently concluded that nothing would cause Hyuuga to do his own paperwork, and took it over completely. Konatsu was courteous, capable, and deferred to his seniors, with the developing exception of Hyuuga. Ayanami could only approve of both his manners and his good sense.

And never, by word or look, did Konatsu suggest he hoped or desired to be offered the power of a Warsfeil. Hyuuga appeared to have read his protege correctly.

Something else Hyuuga had said lingered in Ayanami’s mind, though. No hand but yours ever redeems us. For the God Houses, redemption came in the form of the Traveler to Seele, for as long as he or she was strong enough to bear the burden of cleansing the Houses. What did redemption mean for the families who had flowed from Ayanami’s blood, down his lifetimes?

To judge from the responses of his Hawks, it meant his acceptance. His mark.

This boy of his spirit’s blood, born without the touch of his power, still stood straight and walked without hesitation at Ayanami’s side, of his own choosing. Perhaps the simple mark of blood and power would not be sufficient to Konatsu’s pride. But there was another mark Ayanami could give him. If Konatsu was strong enough to bear it.

When Konatsu had been with them two months, and through one field assignment without faltering, Ayanami decided it was time.

“Come in,” he called at the respectful tap on his door, and looked over Konatsu’s shoulder at Hyuuga. “Kuroyuri and Haruse were just looking for you, Hyuuga. I think they said something about taste-testing.” Hyuuga’s eyes widened behind his glasses.

“Ah. I’ll just… ah, there was something… yes, that I had to do.” Ayanami smiled to himself as Hyuuga vanished rather than make himself an easy target for Haruse and Kuroyuri’s experiments. Or perhaps he was simply obeying his commander’s evident wish that he leave them alone; with Hyuuga it could be hard to tell. Konatsu blinked after his superior for a moment before shaking his head in mystification.

“You wished to see me, Ayanami-sama?” he asked, stepping inside and coming to precise attention.

“I did.” Ayanami leaned back in his chair. “It has become my practice, over the years, to create a soul contract with my Black Hawks.” He tilted his head, curious about how much this boy had or could observe without the senses of a Warsfeil. “Were you aware?”

Konatsu nodded slowly. “Something Kuroyuri-chuusa said made it seem possible. But… with the whole unit?” Softer, as if to himself, he murmured, “It’s true, then.” He lowered his eyes and bowed deeply, not a military salute but as a son of the Warren line to his Lord. Ayanami found that satisfying.

“Indeed. I see no reason to break that practice in this case. You are not Warsfeil, but you have a strong soul. I believe you could bear the contract.”

Konatsu shot upright, eyes wide. “Me?” he nearly squeaked, and Ayanami’s mouth quirked with amusement. He nodded silently.

“Yes,” Konatsu whispered, nearly glowing with sudden excitement and determination. “Yes, Ayanami-sama. Let me serve you, I won’t fail your trust, I swear!” He lifted a hand as if to offer Ayanami his soul in that palm.

Ayanami rose, pleased. Hyuuga had chosen well for them when he’d brought Konatsu’s courage and faith to Ayanami’s attention. “Come, then.”

Konatsu came to him and stood straight and proud, bright eyes fixed on Ayanami’s face even as Ayanami set a hand on his shoulder and reached for his soul.

Most of any soul was simply brightness and darkness, but each had it’s own faint texture, the impress of the mind and heart born from it. Konatsu’s was soft to his touch, not guarded with the fire and edge that so many Warsfeil gained. It was strong, though. Some souls tore when he took them to himself, but not this one. Half Konatsu’s soul settled into his grasp like a bird landing on his hand, warm and living and surrendered into his hold without question or doubt. Ayanami smiled and stepped closer, drawing Konatsu in to lean against him as he marked that soul for his. The boy gasped for breath in the wake of the binding, trembling a little. “Ayanami-sama…”

“I was not mistaken,” Ayanami told him quietly. “You have strength for this and more.”

Konatsu actually blushed, and Ayanami chuckled, resting a hand on his head for a moment. “It’s done. Go and rest, now.”

“Yes, sir.” Konatsu was still glowing with quiet happiness as he left, despite his shaky knees, and Ayanami contemplated the new soul in his keeping with some pleasure. He had missed this, the binding and sealing of souls.

He would have to find the rest of the Ghosts as soon as possible, and regain the rest of his rightful powers. Perhaps with them in his hands once again, he would be have what he needed to fill the loss at the heart of him that even his Black Hawks only soothed a little. He had searched since Raphael’s hold had first been broken, and he had a feeling that the pieces of his self would come within his reach again soon.

Soon he would make himself whole again.

End

True as Gold and Iron

It was one week before Shinra Corporation’s Yule ball, the offices were gaudy with decorations, the backstabbing over seating arrangements had reached its annual fever pitch, and Tseng was airing out his formal robes.

Indications of the season indeed.

He lifted each layer carefully out of its drawer and unfolded delicate, crackling paper, spreading his armfuls of silk and shining embroidery out on the floor mats so he could inspect the seams before hanging them to air.

“I never realized just how much fabric that is,” Rufus said thoughtfully from where he was curled up on the end of Tseng’s couch. “What’s it like to wear?”

“Heavy,” Tseng told him dryly as he pulled out the last layer, that being the most pertinent part of the answer for Rufus. Before Tseng had gotten his shoes and jacket all the way off or undone his cuffs to roll them up, this evening, Rufus had already shed his linen suit in favor of an ancient T-shirt and sweat pants that had migrated to Tseng’s apartment in the city. He could, he supposed, imagine Rufus putting up with formal court garments if there was some overriding reason to do so, but he had no doubt whatsoever the complaints before and after would be epic. Rufus didn’t even like the mere two or three layers of Midgar suits.

So he was a bit surprised when Rufus made an interested sound. “They look easy to move in, though.” He rested his chin on folded arms across the arm of the couch. “Do you have any others I could try on, just to see?” Tseng raised his brows, and Rufus smiled. “You always look… different in them, at the Yule ball. I’ve been curious.”

“Hm.” Tseng sat back on his heels, considering the silk spread out around him. He did have casual cotton robes in this apartment, but that wouldn’t answer Rufus’ question, not really. And while a lingering part of him was shocked by the idea of dressing Rufus in these, another part of him was very entertained by the suggestion. It was the same part of him that kept thinking about taking Tifa on a tour of Wutai’s temples just so he could watch her wipe the floor with every master of their arts that she met.

And after all, weren’t Imperial robes appropriate to Rufus Shinra? Tseng knew he was smirking a little, and Rufus grinned back at him, straightening up. “We can use these,” Tseng said, picking up the short innermost robe and shaking it out gently. “You’ll need to undress again, though. Believe me, you don’t want to be wearing any extra layers under all this.”

Rufus shrugged and promptly stripped out of his shirt and sweats, tossing them over the back of the couch. He didn’t have anything under them, and Tseng reflected with some amusement that now he knew what Rufus had originally planned for the evening.

Perhaps they’d get to that later.

He stood Rufus in the middle of the room and draped him in one layer after another, fingers stumbling now and then as he knotted ties and folded belts because he was so unused to doing them this way around, now. They weren’t exactly traditional in any case; he had long ago cut each and every tie and belt somewhere unobtrusive and sewed in break-away snaps. The hems were cheated, too, carefully taken up so his feet were free under the last two layers. On Rufus they were actually far closer to the proper, floor-dragging, foot-muddling length. Even on these altered robes, though, the details were still fine enough, and many enough, to distract him from the point of the project until he tied the last, ornate knot and stepped back to regard his handiwork as a whole

And then the breath went out of him.

Rufus stood in the center of the room, straight and still under the weight of the robes, a straightness Tseng’s gut recognized; it was the way every noble child learned to stand, under those layers, and the sudden sight of Rufus standing with a noble’s still poise made Tseng’s chest tighten. The lift of Rufus’ chin was the same determination Tseng saw every day, but he now saw, abruptly, that it was also the straightness of honor fit to accompany the imperial seal embroidered into those robes. This, the silk whispered to him as Rufus shifted slightly, was indeed his rightful ruler, and the faint smile that grew on Rufus’ lips as he watched Tseng was weighted with all the knowledge a lord should have of his man.

The weight of blood and history, of need and duty, pressed down on Tseng until his knees hit the floor. Rufus’ eyes followed him down and the acceptance in them was not only the possessiveness of a son of Shinra. In the light reflected up from that rich silk and gold, it was also a ruler’s awareness of obligation, to and from those he commanded. It was everything Tseng had longed passionately to believe Rufus could do and be. Everything he’d told himself he must not dare hope for. It felt like falling and catching himself to complete his bow, hands spread out against the floor before him, head bowed down.

Lord,” Tseng breathed in his own tongue, the single word bare of extra honorifics that proclaimed, not merely formal, but personal loyalty. The one word that paraded for all to hear that he belonged to this man, body and blood. He knew, he knew, Rufus wouldn’t understand all that it meant, but he couldn’t help offering it anyway. Offering it and claiming the rights of honor and service that went it.

Robes rustled with slow steps toward him, and the rhythm was off, more uncertain than any noble Rufus’ age would be. Even so, it was the sound that told him his lord approached, and it kept him down like a hand on his nape.

Until Rufus’ hand cupped his jaw and drew his head up.

Tseng was breathing fast, shocked by the intimacy of his lord stooping to touch him and raise him. Rufus didn’t mean it that way; he touched Tseng freely all the time. But feeling the weight of Rufus’ wide sleeves against his shoulder made Tseng shiver with his nearness, with the sweetness of being permitted this familiarity. There was heat in Rufus’ eyes, the heat that Tseng’s surrender always lit there. Tonight, though, Tseng finally thought he saw the measure of his own loyalty reflected, weighed justly by the one he’d given it to. As Rufus’ thumb stroked down the line of his jaw, he prayed to every god he’d ever tried to turn his back on that it was true.

“You’re mine,” Rufus told him, and Tseng couldn’t help the tiny sound that wrung out of him, because Rufus’ voice was quiet. It wasn’t Rufus’ triumph that Tseng heard in that claim tonight—it was his answer to Tseng’s need, and Tseng almost slid away from his hold to bow his head again in acknowledgement and gratitude. But resisting Rufus’ hand would be unthinkable, in this moment. “Yes,” he whispered instead.

Rufus’ eyes were dark. “Come and take these off,” he said, very softly, straightening up again to stand quiet and poised. Tseng shivered and nodded, wordless. He rose from his knees and began to undo Rufus’ robes, lifting each one off his shoulders with careful hands. When the last one was laid aside, Rufus leaned back against Tseng, and Tseng’s breath caught. He folded his arms around Rufus’ waist, bending his head to press his mouth to Rufus’ bare shoulder, a little dizzy with the feel of Rufus relaxed in his arms. This was a gift, not merely of Rufus’ trust but of his understanding. He’d seen what Tseng needed.

I beg you to permit me,” he murmured against Rufus’ skin, and he knew Rufus wouldn’t understand the words but the language of Midgar didn’t have the words, the forms of submission and obligation, to shape his entreaty in.

Rufus seemed to hear what he meant anyway. He leaned his head back against Tseng’s shoulder, smiling, body language perfectly at ease in the curve of Tseng’s body. “Yes,” he said, and the word was permission and command. It shivered through Tseng and he gathered Rufus closer, one hand sliding up to press over Rufus’ heart, offering his own body as Rufus’ shield and shelter. This was his role, this was his place, and he was fighting not to flinch with the memory of every time the instincts of his upbringing had cried out for him to destroy whatever offered Rufus insult—and had to be stifled. This was his lord, and Tseng’s heart told him he had failed in what he owed far too often, despite his mind’s insistence that it was necessary, that Rufus himself would never have allowed Tseng to upset Shinra’s delicate political balance to answer those slights properly.

“Tseng,” Rufus said softly, and Tseng prepared to draw back, to box up this part of him again because he knew full well it was too passionate to let run free in this land. But Rufus didn’t move away. He lifted his arms up and reached behind him to twine them loosely around Tseng’s neck, uncovering himself completely. There was nothing to guard him at all, now, but Tseng’s arms around him, and Tseng’s breath nearly stopped.

“Rufus,” he whispered, shaking. Terrifying warmth curled through his stomach, that Rufus would give him this, trust him like this, see him like this. His hands stroked over and over Rufus’ body, helplessly protective, and Rufus relaxed into them, eyes closed. Tseng was speaking in his own tongue again, phrase after rippling phrase in the most abject form, begging humbly for the favor Rufus had just shown him because he couldn’t quite believe it was this simple.

It took a long time for Tseng to quiet himself again, and Rufus leaned in his arms the whole while, apparently perfectly content. His fingers combed lightly through Tseng’s hair now and then. “It’s okay,” he said at last, quietly, not opening his eyes. “It’s okay, Tseng. You’re mine.” He said it like it explained everything about this night, and after what Rufus had given and shown him Tseng couldn’t deny that it did. That Rufus was, indeed, a ruler who would give all of himself in return for the swords and souls his followers laid at his feet. The very one Tseng had wanted him to be, taught him to be, and never dared believe in.

It was shame for that lack of faith that put him back on his knees when Rufus finally straightened and turned—not something Tseng had expected to ever feel again in his life, but the steadiness of Rufus’ eyes on him told his heart that he should have known before this. He pressed a kiss to Rufus’ palm, and bent his head. “My life and honor are in your hand.” The words, finally spoken out loud, hung in the air of the room like a bird hovering.

Rufus’ other hand rested lightly on his head. “And my honor is in your care,” he answered. It drove a gasp out of Tseng, the gesture, the words, so perfectly right even in the clumsy language of Midgar.

“Tseng.” When Tseng looked up, Rufus was smiling. “Take me to bed.”

Tseng had to swallow. There was knowledge in Rufus’ eyes. Not the laughing victory he’d sometimes seen there when Rufus first understood his power over Tseng, nor the pleasure that had remained for all the years since. Only knowledge. This night Rufus knew, he understood the exact measure of Tseng’s surrender to his mastery. And he offered Tseng back his trust in the same measure.

Tseng rose silently and followed Rufus into the bedroom. Rufus stretched out on Tseng’s bed, relaxed and waiting, and Tseng had to swallow again against the tangle of desire and tenderness and reverence that rose in him. Slowly, every movement precise under the weight of Rufus’ eyes on him, he stripped off his clothes and folded each item. When he turned back to the bed, Rufus was smiling with the pure appreciation he so often showed for Tseng’s body. He held out a hand, offering and commanding, and Tseng came to him.

He was shocked all over again by Rufus’ pliancy against him, and found himself rolling Rufus underneath him, driven to shelter him. Rufus laughed quietly and settled against the covers, arms draped easily around Tseng’s shoulders. Tseng shivered at the sound, at the acceptance in it, and pressed his mouth to the curve of Rufus’ neck, open and deferential. “Will you tell me,” he asked, husky, “what it is you wish of me?” Because he wasn’t sure how much more he could bring himself to do without Rufus’ word. Not tonight.

“Mmm.” Rufus tipped his head back, relaxed, fingers stroking delicately up and down Tseng’s nape under the loose spill of his hair until Tseng was breathless. “I want you inside me. Slowly.”

Tseng gathered him closer, steadied by that direction. “Thank you.”

Rufus stroked a thumb over Tseng’s cheekbone, eyes dark; he understood, Tseng thought, how much the demands of this trust unsettled Tseng. Understood and required it anyway, and Tseng could only bend his head as Rufus pressed home that proof and reminder of just how complete Tseng’s submission to him was. That reminder was exactly what Tseng needed, and he was so hard from it that he was a getting little light-headed.

He went slowly, though, as Rufus had told him, gradually opening the tightness of Rufus’ body with slick fingers. The husky sounds Rufus made against his shoulder as he held Rufus close and sank two fingers deep into him made Tseng’s breath come quicker. And Rufus, almost without precedent, wasn’t pushing. Wasn’t urging Tseng on. Was relaxed in Tseng’s arms and moving against him with slow abandon, following the guidance of Tseng’s hands on him.

He closed his eyes and just breathed, trembling with the weight of everything Rufus laid so easily in his hands. No, perhaps not easily. But deliberately and without hesitation. “Please, lord,” he whispered against Rufus’ hair, not even sure what he was pleading for.

“Yes,” Rufus sighed, eyes half closed as he let his head fall back. “Now.”

The command, soft as it was, eased Tseng back from the edge again and his hands were steady as he laid Rufus back against the sheets and settled between his thighs. The vulnerable arch of Rufus’ body as Tseng pressed into him nearly undid him again. Even after taking so long in preparation, Rufus was tight and fiercely hot around Tseng’s cock, and his unrestrained moan cut Tseng’s breath into gasps. His eyes were locked on Rufus’ face, on the softness of his parted lips as Tseng drove into him with long, slow thrusts. To be given this, and to have this required of him… it was like a hand, Rufus’ hand, reaching down into him to grasp all the things that he held behind a proper reserve and bring them up to the light, laid bare. Tseng groaned wordlessly as Rufus’ fingers slid through his hair, down his throat to grip his shoulders. He was dizzy with the pleasure of burying himself in Rufus’ body and the sweetness of submitting to Rufus’ will.

Rufus moaned as Tseng drove into him deeper, hands stroking over his shoulders, down his chest. “Tseng.” The next words were a husky whisper, “This. Needed this. Need you.”

That admission, that need, broke Tseng open at last, broke through him in a graceless tumble of words gasped out between kisses as he gathered Rufus tight in his arms. “Yes, my lord, my love, I swear I’m yours, yours for all life and time, body and soul and blood, I belong to you…” Rufus’ arms locked around him and his body tightened on Tseng hard. Tseng fell right after him, shaking against Rufus as heat shuddered through his bones in hard, gasping waves and the acknowledgement of Rufus’ dominion wrapped around his heart.

Eventually they just lay together, panting for breath. After a few moments, Tseng stirred and murmured against Rufus’ neck, “Forgive me. Forgive me for not seeing, for doubting the heart of you. I offer no excuse.” This time, at least, he managed to translate his apology.

Rufus’ fingers stroked through his hair. “I should have asked,” he said quietly. “I was just… afraid of what the answer might be.” His voice turned wry. “I mean, there are all kinds of reasons you could choose to serve me without… belonging to me. Willingly, at least.”

Tseng swallowed and made himself lean up on his elbows to meet Rufus’ eyes. “I serve you willingly, with all my strength and soul,” he said, low. “I have belonged to you since the moment we met.” And before that, truth be told, but saying that would only distract Rufus right now. “I made that choice in full knowledge.” That, at least, was the whole truth.

Rufus looked up at him, eyes clear and bottomless as the sky. “Do you really…” He hesitated, eyes suddenly flickering aside as his fingers stroked lightly over Tseng’s chest.

Over his heart.

Tseng really did blame a great deal on the language of Midgar, which was so gracelessly frank about these things that it made Tseng downright embarrassed to speak openly of love. He pressed a kiss to Rufus’ brow and another to his lips and murmured, eyes closed for a moment. “Yes. I do. As my student. As my lord. As my friend. As my life.”

Rufus shivered and pressed closer letting out a slow, slightly shaky breath. “Thank you,” he said against Tseng’s shoulder. And then he added, rueful. “I don’t know the right words for any of it. But, yes.”

Fine tension Tseng had barely even noticed relaxed all at once, and he settled against Rufus with a soft sigh of his own. “Thank you,” he whispered back.

He might find the language of this city awkward and distressingly blunt for expressing heart truths in, but Rufus had never even really known the meanings of his own native words. To recognize love, loyalty, trust nevertheless… Tseng was grateful for that as he would be for any miracle. The fact that Rufus had worked this one out of the pure steel of his soul was exactly the reason every word Tseng had spoken tonight was true.

For the knowledge that Rufus truly cherished his people, that he knew the true measure of Tseng’s loyalty and could return it, Tseng might just be willing to offer up true thanks. At least, he would if he’d thought Leviathan or any other god had had a damn thing to do with it, which he most assuredly did not.

No, what he offered up was himself, and only to Rufus’ hands.

Which was why he wrapped himself around Rufus, close and protective as was his right. And smiled into the half-light of the city’s night through his window as Rufus settled against him.

He belonged to Rufus Shinra, and this was his.

End

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Eighteen

Sakura leaned on the rail of the ship as they swung away from the Island Turtle and turned toward the coast of the Fire Country. It had been a curious experience, working with so many shinobi from so many different nations. It had tugged at her memories of working in Sound, undercover, except that no one had pretended any allegiance but their true one.

Except for Sai.

She leaned down to rest her chin on her folded arms, staring over the choppy waves, growing into swells as they drew away from the Turtle, and turned over her thoughts about Sai. About ANBU and Root. She was pretty sure that she’d been given to Miuhara as his mentee because he was ANBU, and her mission to Orochimaru had been one that ANBU would normally have handled—as had a handful of others since. But she’d never asked, because you didn’t. Even if you suspected, even if you were pretty sure you knew, you didn’t ask. ANBU needed that bit of uncertainty and ambiguity, even in their home village, to do their work and still come home from it.

It must have been so easy to hide yet another secret group inside that.

And there’d been a lot of orphans after the Nine-tails’ attack. How easy would it be, in the confusion after that, to take in a handful, to raise them and train them.

And kill half of them. It made her shake every time she thought about it, thought about what Danzou had done, made her vision haze with red.

“Still wound up from the attack on Naruto?”

Sakura started a little, straightening to find Temari beside her. “Temari-san.”

The other woman smiled a bit crookedly. “It’s not surprising if you’re still angry, you know. He tried to kill your teammate. Your family, as close as the three of you are. You’ll be angry for a while.”

Sakura scrubbed her hands over her face, trying not to shudder; if anyone would know that, Temari would. “I know. I’m… trying to save it up for the people who are really responsible.” She snorted softly. “There’s going to be a lot of anger to go around, on this one, for a lot of reasons.” Enough that it was affecting her—impairing her—she suddenly realized, feeling the wound-to-snapping tension in her shoulders. Enough, obviously, that outsiders could see it. Which was the other thing Temari was telling her. Shit. She looked up at Temari with a sigh. “Thanks.”

Temari only nodded quietly and turned her head to look out over the gray-green texture of the water. “I owe Naruto,” she murmured. “My teams from Sand will protect him like our own.”

Every little bit helped, and Temari was very strong. Sakura reminded herself of that, and took a breath, and acknowledged that she was enraged, furious enough to spit nails, ready to slice Danzou open like a piece of fruit. She felt and accepted that, and then she set it aside, the way Miuhara had taught her to. There was work to do. Anger might strengthen her, but it must not blind her. She would do what was necessary with cool judgment, and spit on the corpse later. “Thank you, Temari-san,” she said quietly, feeling her shoulders finally fall. “That does help.”

“Good. Well, then.” Temari glanced at her sidelong with a tiny smile. “I hear you pulled out something kind of special during the fight on the Island. Is it something you can tell me about?”

Sakura laughed. “Did Fuunotora-san put you up to asking?” The older kunoichi had spent years trying to winkle the details of her seal out of her.

“She might have mentioned something in passing.” Temari turned, leaning back against the rail on her elbows with a grin that showed her teeth.

Sakura hesitated, actually considering it. They were allied with Sand. Naruto and Gaara were friends; she couldn’t see that changing. But every iota of her Intelligence training was screaming at her that one did not share that kind of information with another nation’s shinobi, be they ever so allied. In the end she sighed. “Maybe someday. I’d like that.”

Temari considered her for a long moment and finally nodded, firm. “We’ll work on it, then. It’s what Gaara wants too; the more I see, the more I approve.” And then she straightened, tilting her chin to gesture past Sakura’s shoulder. “Looks like your team is here. Time for me to go and write more dispatches for home, and you to remember what you need to do with that anger of yours." She smiled faintly, pushing up from the rail. "It is your team that’s always talking about protecting what’s precious to you, isn’t it? Everything that’s precious to you?” She saluted Sakura lazily and strolled away down the deck.

“What did Temari-san want?” Naruto asked, looking after her curiously as he and Sasuke leaned against the rail beside her.

“To remind me that we have help, and to deal properly with being really fucking pissed off,” Sakura admitted ruefully. “Good thing, really, otherwise I might have tried to slice open Danzou’s belly with my nails as soon as we got back.” Which would relieve her feelings a lot but wouldn’t necessarily protect Naruto very much, and would definitely upset the village. A village that was also precious to her, no matter how stupid some members of it sometimes were.

“Yes,” Sasuke murmured, “we’ll have to wait until he’s been officially denounced to do that, so no one complains. And until we have a little free time to devote to it.” They smiled at each other, complicit and bloodthirsty. Naruto turned rather red, the way he always did when someone else got protective of him, and Sakura threw an arm around his shoulders. She really did love both of them.

“So we’re about to be busy. One demon fox to heal. One traitor to uncover. One madman to prepare for.” She nodded firmly. “Let’s do it.”

She held up both hands, and Naruto laughed and did the same, and they both stared at Sasuke expectantly until he sighed and held up his as well.

“Team Seven, go!” Naruto declared, and they smacked palms, all three at once.

Sakura smiled, true and light for the first time in days. They would make this happen.


Sasuke didn’t want to be sitting where he was. It was a nice room, wide and airy with comfortable chairs of sleek wood set around a polished ring of table. He didn’t even have anything against most of the company. He wasn’t fond of Hyuuga Hiashi, but Hinata was at his side looking alert instead of crushed; Akimichi Chouza had given him a solemn and welcoming nod; and Aburame Midori had murmured, as she passed behind his chair, that it was good to have all four clans present again. Certainly his encounters with Nara Shikaku, the Jounin Commander, had been encouraging; the man seemed level-headed and just as intelligent as his son. And Sasuke was fairly sure that the ANBU Commander was the same man who had let him and Naruto into the Intelligence complex once or twice to pick up Sakura when she’d had a hard debriefing. Tsunade, with Kakashi-sensei standing in attendance behind her shoulder, was almost comforting; her temper was, if anything, worse than Naruto’s, and he’d learned to trust that kind of straightforwardness. He didn’t like how any of the three Elders looked at him, but he’d known for a while that that was the faction who had been against him since the massacre and would likely stay that way for years, no matter what happened today.

Under other circumstances, he might have enjoyed being here, his first Council as the acknowledged head of Uchiha. But he didn’t want to be here today, looking at that smug bastard Danzou across the table. He wanted to be with his team, helping Sakura and Naruto research something it was already clear would be a dangerous procedure. And making sure no one made another attempt on Naruto.

If there was one thing he’d learned as a child, though, it was his duty as a son of Uchiha, so here he was. Not killing Danzou even a little, either; he hoped everyone appreciated his restraint.

“We are here,” Tsunade said, hands folded on the sleek wood in front of her, “to consider the actions of Shimura Danzou. You have all seen the report of Sai’s attack on Uzumaki Naruto, and what was learned from him. You have seen the lists of Root members and missions we have been able to confirm. I will hear what the Council has to say.”

The ANBU Commander clasped his hands under the chin of his cat mask. “ANBU is divided,” he said quietly. “It’s true that Root members are skilled and have a high success rate. And we all understand the need for what we do. But if we can’t trust our assigned teammates, if any of them might have secret orders… it will tear all our working teams apart and imperil our missions themselves.”

“Divided loyalties are something the rest of us already had to deal with,” Aburame Midori pointed out dryly. “I don’t see a great deal of difference between Torune being ANBU and being Root. He is divided in his loyalty to his clan already, and he chose that himself.”

“He chose that, yes.” Shikaku frowned darkly across the table at Danzou. “I’m considerably more disturbed by the handful of younger members, who seem to have been drawn from the orphans of the village and then set against each other in deadly trials. As if we were Hidden Mist! Where’s the excuse for that?”

“That was done before the Third proscribed Root,” Danzou answered, quite calm.

“That was why the Third proscribed Root,” Tsunade cut back. “That much is clear, now. ‘Actions Hidden Leaf and the true Will of Fire could never condone’ indeed.”

The lines around Danzou’s eye tightened. “I acted always for the good of the village.”

“And for your own,” Sasuke drawled, folding his hands over his stomach as he leaned back, remembering the things Kakashi-sensei had said and implied during Sai’s interrogation. “You set yourself up with the power of Hokage, without even any pesky Elders to restrain you, and you didn’t want to give that up.”

Danzou drew himself up. “I would have the Council note that Uchiha Sasuke is biased particularly against me because Root’s last mission, of unfortunate necessity, targeted his friend.”

Sasuke’s eyes narrowed. Now he understood what his father had said to his mother, one night over dinner: that meetings of the full Council were just another kind of combat, where you had to keep your eyes activated for the openings. What counter would strike through the defense of bias… ah! It was what Kakashi-sensei had once told him. “As it should be,” he returned, as matter-of-fact as he could. “That’s why we fight, every one of us: for friends, clan, loved ones.” He curled his lip. “No one gives their life this way for an abstract. ‘The good of the village.'” He snorted with contempt. “No human fights with all their strength for that.” And there, there it was, the opening he’d felt, and he glared at Danzou. “You had to take away their humanity before they’d do that, didn’t you? So they’d fight for whatever you told them the good of the village was.”

Danzou’s mouth thinned, and Sasuke knew he’d connected.

Chouza leaned his elbows on the table, vest straps creaking over his shoulders. “You mentioned Root’s last mission. You say it was necessary, Danzou, but I don’t see why. The Uzumaki boy had not lost control of the Nine-tails; quite the contrary, from what I hear.”

“And you believe we should have risked it?” Danzou asked, with every appearance of injured dignity. “We have all seen what happens when the demon escapes. You were there that night, Chouza!”

Every older face at the table tightened, and Sasuke had to stifle a growl; Danzou was skilled at this. Risk, risk, what would counter… hm. He smiled faintly and leaned an elbow on his chair arm. “So, you believe we should all trust your assessment of the risk?” he asked.

“The Elders are appointed so that their experience may serve the village,” Danzou answered, smooth and calm again.

“And your experience told you that the Nine-tails was too great a danger to risk the chance of it breaking free,” Sasuke murmured. “I see.” He waited one silent beat and inquired casually, “So, you were in contact with the mission after all?”

Danzou frowned. “Of course not. That would endanger Leaf shinobi unnecessarily.” There were tiny nods and judicious looks around the table, and Sasuke had to work very hard not to let his smile spread. He had him!

“Ah? But if you weren’t in contact, how could you possibly judge the danger?” He frowned. “Are you telling us that you gave non-discretionary orders before a mission even began and made no provision to alter them based on what actually happened?” As the listeners stilled, he added, very softly, “Are you telling us that you let your fear dictate your orders?”

“No!” Danzou was half standing, glaring at Sasuke.

“Ah.” Now Sasuke smiled, holding Danzou’s gaze. “So, it was only your complete arrogance, that gave those orders blind and never once thought that you might be wrong, or even that the situation might change.” He swept his eyes around the table. “I think everyone who’s ever worked in the field may have some thoughts about the kind of experience and judgment that indicates.”

Even Midori was frowning now, and Sasuke sat back. He was breathing light and fast, and his legs were actually trembling with the urge to stand, to strike, to do something. He’d have preferred a field mission to this! He’d never spoken during clan meetings; he’d been the second son and it hadn’t been his place. He’d only listened. He’d had no idea it was this hard! Kakashi-sensei, standing quiet guard behind Tsunade, caught his eye for an instant and nodded just a fraction. Sasuke took a slow breath, steadying himself on that silent assurance that he was doing all right so far.

“There was indeed judgment lacking there,” Hiashi agreed, and frowned at Danzou. “More than that, you have acted entirely alone. You have not consulted the Hokage or the other Elders.”

“I have access to all intelligence materials.” Danzou looked a bit ruffled now.

“Unauthorized access,” Tsunade-san pointed out coolly. “The Third, at the risk of repeating myself, proscribed Root. You still have that access only because you suborned members of the Intelligence division to your personal use.”

“Personal use, yes.” Hiashi’s glance at Danzou was also cool. “We have a Council for a good reason. And while the noble clans are not often involved in the orders the Hokage gives to ANBU, the Elders are. Even the leader of our village does not act unrestrained. But you have.”

“We might well say that Danzou has been restrained, or at least guided, by his dedication to the good of the village,” Mitokado put in, looking sternly over the rims of his glasses at Hiashi.

“Should the Council take note the the Hokage’s first councilors have a bias in favor of Danzou?” Shikaku murmured dryly, brow raised. A faint gust of laughter ran around the table, stealing the edge from Mitokado’s defense, and Sasuke made a note of the tactic to himself.

“He has been guided, but he has not been restrained,” Hiashi said firmly. “This is unacceptable.”

“Then the answer would seem to be to revive Root as an accepted arm of the village,” Utatane suggested, frail fingers laced in front of her, spine straight. “That will bring Danzou back into the stream of decisions reached by, at the least, the Hokage and her first councilors”

“Making it three against one, hm?” Tsunade looked very sour, and Sasuke had to wonder just how much friction there was between her and those two Elders.

The rest of the table was looking alarmingly thoughtful, though. Sasuke sighed to himself; he’d have to attack first this time, and hope he could defend himself as he went. “The question of whether Danzou’s guiding principles are acceptable remains unanswered,” he pointed out. “So far, it’s merely been evaded.”

After a long, silent moment, Shikaku stirred. “I am not pleased with Danzou’s decisions. They’ve been too extreme.”

“If Root is accepted as a hand of the Council, even if it remains proscribed to outside eyes, that problem will be alleviated,” Utatane argued.

Chouza tilted his head at Tsunade. “The Hokage appears to feel differently. It seems that you and Mitokado are already sufficient voices for direct action.”

“Are you displeased with the outcome?” Mitokado snapped. “The village has been kept safe and made strong!”

“The village was almost fatally weakened by his actions!” Sasuke snapped back, and in the silence that followed tried to catch up to his own thoughts. He was right, he knew he was, because Naruto… ah. Yes, of course.

He spread his hands on the glossy wood in front of him and glared at Danzou. “You would have killed our host for loosening the Nine-tails containment. You still would, if you could convince us!”

“Of course I would,” Danzou answered calmly. “It is a threat, and must be contained as strongly as possible. If the Uzumaki boy cannot keep it bound, then it must be killed. I regret that he must die with it, but that is the nature of the Sacrifices.”

“Contained, you say,” Sasuke returned, quiet now, seeing the moves he needed unrolling in front of him. “Contained and doubly bound, that’s how you would keep the Nine-tails?” At Danzou’s solemn nod, he showed his teeth. “You would have us be weaker than enemy villages? I have to wonder about your precious dedication to Konoha. You would weaken us against Hidden Cloud! Who betrays the village, then?”

“What do you mean?” Mitokado demanded, frowning at him. Sasuke leaned back.

“Cloud’s hosts, in this generation, are known to be the strongest, the ones best able to manage their beasts and the ones who can gain the most of their power to fight with. That is done, not by binding the beast completely, but by holding it lightly contained and reaching an accommodation with it.” He paused to let that sink in and struck. “Naruto has done this, and that’s the only reason we won against Nagato and Konan of Akatsuki. We have a host as strong as Cloud’s now!” He lifted a hand to point across the table at Danzou. “And his judgment would have stolen that strength from us and left Cloud the only hidden village with a host. What do you think would have happened then?” He flicked a meaningful glance at Hiashi and Hinata.

“No one knew this at the time,” Utatane started, only to be cut off by Midori.

“That is the point Uchiha-kun is making, I believe. Danzou did not know, and yet he took it upon himself to act.” She gave Utatane and Mitokado a keen look. “And you would not have stopped him, would you?” The two first councilors were silent at that.

“Very well.” Tsunade straightened, lifting her head, and every eye in the room went to her. “The Council has debated this issue, and I have heard your words on it. My judgment is that Root must be truly disbanded. The conditioning of the members will be undone as far as possible, and if there are keys to release it, those must be surrendered. Further, Shimura Danzou has demonstrated a lack of trustworthiness that I cannot accept.” She met the eyes of each person in turn. “If he meant to place Root in the service of the village, why was I told nothing of it, when I became Hokage? Why did he continue to operate on no authority but his own? That is not the act of a man who seeks to serve anything at all. I say that Shimura Danzou must be stripped of his office as an Elder of Konoha. What does my Council say?”

“Agreed,” Shikaku said promptly.

“Agreed,” Hiashi murmured.

“Agreed.” Chouza nodded firmly.

“We will need to address the fate of Root members further, and how they can be returned to duty,” the ANBU commander said quietly. “But that will not require the full Council. For the matter of Danzou: Agreed.”

Midori sat back with an air of satisfaction, and Sasuke remembered her first words, that a son of her clan was a Root member. “Agreed.”

“Agreed,” Sasuke murmured, nearly holding his breath as everyone looked at the other two Elders.

Utatane’s mouth was tight. “There will need to be another Elder appointed, then. If you are concerned that no one person shape policy too much, then let your first councilors approve the appointment.”

Tsunade’s eyes flashed, but after a scowling moment she nodded sharply. Sasuke wondered if it was his imagination that a corner of her mouth flickered upward for just an instant.

Utatane sighed. “Agreed.”

Mitokado was frowning ferociously, but after a taut moment he sat back, not looking at anyone. “Very well,” he said, low.

Sasuke didn’t think for one moment that he imagined the flash of rage on Danzou’s face before the old man stood from the table. “If that is the will of the Council, very well.” He bowed shallowly to them and whirled around to stalk from the room.

Sasuke let out his breath, feeling his muscles trembling with the tension of this new form of combat. He hoped it wouldn’t always be this bad. Everyone was stretching and sighing as they rose, though, and he had a bad feeling that it got to everyone this way.

Great.

He pried himself up out of his chair and tried to discreetly shake out his legs only to find Aburame Midori looking at him with a faintly amused curve to her lips. She patted his arm as she passed. “Not a bad first appearance.”

“Thank you,” Sasuke managed past gritted teeth.

When he emerged from the room, the last one so he could walk with one hand on the wall to prop him up in decent privacy, Tsunade and Kakashi were lingering. Faint smile-lines creased the corner of Kakashi-sensei’s eye and he rested a steadying hand on Sasuke’s shoulder. “Good work.”

“I need to practice this,” Sasuke answered, even though his teacher’s approval warmed him.

“Ask Shikamaru,” Kakashi-sensei advised.

“You might also speak with Hinata.” Tsunade leaned against the wall, arms crossed, with a crooked smile. “She’s learning this, too, and I suspect the two of you will be allies in Council, when she takes over.”

Sasuke took a deep breath and let it out. He had a plan for training. That helped. “Thanks.”

Despite that affirmation, he was still very glad to get back through the falling dusk to his own house, and even more pleased to find people there and the lights on. Normally, he might feel called on to needle his teammates about spending more time at his house than they did at their own apartments, but tonight he was glad for the company waiting.

Naruto was sitting cross-legged at the low, round table in the living room with books and scrolls spread out around him and his fingers buried in his hair as he read. As Sasuke came in he was groaning, “How can we power this twice? Fuck, maybe we should just summon some demons or something.”

Sasuke blinked. Demons?

Sakura stuck her head through the doors from the kitchen, half-full bowl of rice in one hand. “I don’t think we want to do this by sacrifice; I mean technically the Nine-tails is a demon and I don’t think he’d like that.” She spotted Sasuke through the wide entry hall, kicking his sandals off in the genkan, and eyed him for a long moment. “You look wrung out. Sit down and I’ll dish up some food for you, too.” She vanished back into the kitchen with a grin over her shoulder. "It’s your rice, after all."

Naruto looked around and smiled, just a little wan. “Hey.”

Sasuke trudged over to the table, slumping down half over it. “You look about like I feel.”

Naruto reached over to rub the back of his neck. “Was it bad?”

“Well, Danzou is booted off the Council and Root is really, seriously disbanded this time. Supposing that can be done. So there’s definitely progress.” He sighed as Naruto’s fingers found a knot.

“And it was a pain in the ass to get there,” Naruto guessed, and made a face. “When I’m Hokage, I’m gonna fire all the Elders.”

“Maybe they’ll die off before then,” Sasuke muttered, half serious.

“No revolutions at the dinner table,” Sakura declared, dumping bowls of rice and pickled vegetables in front of both of them as she settled down with her own.

“Yeah, save ’em for dessert.” Sasuke levered himself back upright and picked up his bowl. “So how’s the research coming?”

Naruto glared at his scrolls and growled around a mouthful of rice.

“We know approximately what has to happen,” Sakura supplied. “The part we’re stuck on is how to actually do it.”

Sasuke made an inquiring sound, scooping up some more pickles.

“There’s two parts to it,” Naruto said, swallowing. “For one, we need to give the Nine-tails a huge” he waved his chopsticks demonstratively, “transfusion of yin chakra. But in order for it to take hold properly, first we have to deal with his scar.”

Sasuke frowned. “The severing left a scar? Even though there wasn’t a specific physical counterpart?”

“That’s the hardest part.” Naruto propped an elbow on the table, frowning. “It wasn’t a specific ‘part’ of his chakra. It was a little bit of all of it. So the scar is… well, it’s everywhere.”

Sasuke made a thoughtful sound, even as he absently batted Naruto’s elbow off the table. “I can see that would be a hard one, yeah.”

“We need to soften or dissolve it,” Sakura said, leaning back on one hand with a sigh, pushing her feathery hair back with the other. “And that will take almost as much power as the transfusion. I can probably supply the second part, and Tsunade-sama says she can transform it into yin chakra. But I don’t quite have the endurance to pull up that volume of power twice. So what are we going to do for the first part?”

Sasuke swallowed his last bite staring at the wall as he thought. Power like Sakura’s seal gave her access to wasn’t common, it was true. In fact there was only one other person he’d ever seen do anything at all similar. Slowly he said, “You know. Jiraiya also uses nature energy sometimes.”

Naruto sat up straight. “Jiraiya!” His face was bright and excited, weariness forgotten.

"That’s right, I completely forgot! Orochimaru even mentioned that, once!" Sakura’s eyes gleamed. “He should be back from escorting Konan and Nagato home soon.”

“Yes!” Naruto punched the air and snatched up a pencil and paper, sweeping their bowls out of the way to scribble diagrams across it, tip of his tongue sticking out one corner of his mouth in his concentration.

Sasuke looked up at Sakura from the floor where he’d dived to catch the bowls, and they grinned at each other. "Maybe, when we’re done, I’ll ask him if he can teach me any of his sage techniques, too," she said, reaching over to relieve him of one bowl. "I remember hearing he has some really interesting ones, and if Madara comes for us we can use the edge."

"He’s a good teacher," Sasuke admitted, "as long as you can keep his eyes where they’re supposed to be."

"Yeah." She grinned. "Tsunade-sama has had a few things to say about that, now and then. I think she’s really glad he’s back with the village, though."


“You’re back. Good.”

Jiraiya paused just inside the door, and Tsunade wondered if she should have tried to sound less fervent. She might have just warned him what was coming. Oh well.

“Sit,” she ordered, pointing at a chair with one hand and sealing paperwork with the other. Jiraiya sat, eyeing her warily. “So, how did it go? Are they back safe?”

Jiraiya cleared his throat. “Rather safer than I expected, really.” That made Tsunade look up, brows raised and he shrugged, looking a bit bemused. “Hanzou… well, he’s made Konan his successor.”

Tsunade blinked at that. “His…” Her eyes widened. “He made her the next Master of Ame?”

Jiraiya waved his hands helplessly. “You know how he is, when he decides he likes someone’s fighting spirit.”

Tsunade buried her face in her hands. After a moment, she started laughing. “Master of the Rain! An S-rank criminal! One of Akatsuki!” She laughed herself breathless and finally leaned back, wiping her eyes. “Oh, I can hear the other villages howling already. The old bastard probably did it just for that.”

“Not just for that,” Jiraiya said, a little reproving. “Konan is a powerful shinobi, and she cares deeply for her village. I think, now she’s come home properly again, we’ll be able to work with her.”

“Mm.” Tsunade folded her arms, considering what she knew of that pair. “And Nagato?”

Jiraiya sighed, straight shoulders slumping just a fraction. “He… will take longer to recover. Part of Konan’s bargain with Hanzou was complete amnesty for Nagato as long as he stays out of village politics until Hanzou’s dead.”

“Wise of them both, perhaps.” It would give Nagato time to get himself together, after all, and give Konan time to stand on her own and let the village see her doing it. Tsunade wondered whether Konan had understood all that; it was a given that Hanzou had, of course. “Well, we’ll see. In the meantime, and speaking of village governance,” she pointed a finger at Jiraiya, “we finally kicked Danzou out. So you’re going to replace him as Elder as soon as I can get those other two old goats to agree; shouldn’t take too long, they always favored you over me anyway.”

Jiraiya gaped at her. “Me?!”

“You.” She glared at him. “And don’t think you’re getting out of this one. You stuck me with the job of Hokage. In fact, you dodged that one twice. But I need someone I can trust to have my back on that damn Council, instead of reaching for a bigger sword every time there’s a problem, and that means you. Suck it up.”

“But… but… my research,” he started plaintively.

“You’ve traveled enough to have all the background you need for another eight books at least,” she told him ruthlessly. “And you’ve peeped at the baths enough for another ten. So don’t give me that.”

He hesitated, one hand lifting slowly to touch his forehead protector. “My allegiance is to Mt. Myouboku, Tsunade,” he murmured, eyes dark. “Is that really acceptable, for Konoha’s Council?”

Tsunade spent a moment fighting the urge to shake him until his teeth rattled; she didn’t need more obstructionism, she needed him to say yes! But the truly troubled lines of his face softened her frustration. When she spoke, it was more gently than she had thought she could. “Jiraiya. You never abandoned your allegiance to Konoha. Your hunt for Orochimaru, your books, your travels, none of those changed what’s truly important to you.” She stood and came around the desk to lay her hands on those broad shoulders, the ones she’d cried on when her brother died, the ones she needed now to help her carry the village. “What is the most important thing to you, Jiraiya? Truly the most important? Tell me.”

He had looked up when she came to him, but his eyes fell, at that. His mouth twitched a few times with unspoken words, but at last he sighed, deep and quiet, and closed his eyes. “The village of Hidden Leaf,” he admitted. “When I ask myself, what is the most important thing… I see the sun over the roofs of Konoha.”

She smiled, eyes prickling with sudden water. “You’re such an old sap sometimes,” she said, husky. “It’s pitiful. Really.”

He smiled crookedly up at her. “Yes, I suppose so.”

“Do you still wonder if the Council will approve of you?” she asked, soft.

He sighed again, rueful this time. “I suppose not. Can I still have vacations now and then for research?”

“Only after Utatane and Mitokado are dead.” She wasn’t entirely joking about that, and judging by his wince he knew it.

“That good, hm? How thrilling this will be, I’m sure.”

“Well, if it’s any comfort, your student will be there, too,” she said a bit dryly. “And he’s a little firebrand.”

Jiraiya looked pleased, and she laughed. “Tell me what they’ve been doing,” he said, smiling again. “I know Naruto was pretty determined to heal the Nine-tails, when I left.”

“Oh yes.” Tsunade hitched herself up onto her desk and grinned down at him rather wickedly, feet swinging. “That was the other thing.”


“Are you absolutely sure this is a good idea?” Jiraiya asked one more time as he settled in the nested circles of Tsunade-baachan’s channeling seals, and Naruto rolled his eyes. “I mean, aren’t we rushing this a little?”

“Madara is still out there,” Tsunade-baachan said, so acidly that Naruto knew she didn’t like moving this fast either.

Well that was just too bad. He knew what had to be done, and they were going to do it just as soon as possible.

As soon as possible without killing yourself was the deal, the fox pointed out, filling Naruto with the sense of being eyed suspiciously. I have no desire to be scattered through the land’s chakra when I’m flung free of your unraveling spirit, and take who knows how long to pull myself back together.

I’m so touched by your concern, he sniped back. Now shut up and let me concentrate. He ignored the faint growls about insolent brats and triple-checked the seals that led from the old pervert to him.

“So how are those combined patrols going?” Jiraiya asked as he inspected the seal rings around him.

“There are no signs of him yet, but no one really trusts that.” Tsunade-baachan sighed as she shrugged out of her jacket and hung it by the door, rolling her shoulders to loosen them. Sakura, still studying the seal diagrams, absently whacked the old pervert on the back of the head when he paused to ogle the way that made Tsunade’s boobs bounce. “Temari is especially suspicious, considering how Akatsuki got past Sand’s sentries. She went and harangued Hiashi herself to get experienced Hyuuga assigned to each patrol, to look out for illusions.”

Sasuke, leaning by the door, chuckled. “No wonder Shikamaru was looking like he had a headache the other day. I bet he wishes you’d assigned someone else to be liaison to the volunteers.”

“It could be worse.” Tsunade smiled, wryly. “It could have been Suigetsu busting up the bars again.” She pulled tight the cord tying her hair up in a high tail and sighed. “All right, I think we’re as ready as we can get, short of another few months of research. Jiraiya, get started. Sakura, be ready, I’ll want you as soon as the channeling seal is closed. Sasuke,” she looked up, sober, “keep watch over us. If one of us falls into chakra exhaustion, pull them out. If any technique will let you do it without disrupting the seals, it’s the Sharingan.”

Everyone nodded seriously, and Naruto couldn’t resist piping up, “What about me?” His teacher gave him a familiar glower.

You get in communication with the fox and quit giving me lip, brat.”

Naruto grinned as Jiraiya’s two oldster toads popped into being at his sides. “Quit worrying, old bag, we’re gonna be brilliant.” He touched his fingers to the small, simple seal in front of his crossed legs. “I’ll signal when we’re ready to go.” He closed his eyes, still grinning, and Tsunade-baachan’s yell of Naruto! followed him down to the place he met with the fox.

Nine-tails was lying on the surface of the water, there, chin resting on his crossed paws. “Your teacher is a reasonable being,” he said, as ripples followed Naruto’s steps across the water to him. “I suppose it wouldn’t have been completely dreadful to be sealed to her. At least then I’d have been spared the appalling exhibitionism.”

“Hey!” Naruto defended himself. “That was a stroke of genius! Sexy no Jutsu got a whole bar full of Mist Swordsmen and border patrollers to quit fighting!”

Nine-tails curled one enormous lip, but all he said was, “Are you ready?”

Naruto straightened and took three breaths, the way Tsunade had taught him to before any procedure, clearing his mind and preparing his body. He laid one hand on the fox’s shoulder and focused, tighter, wider, until his chakra was flowing in the smooth pattern of Mystic Palms, ready to provide a template for the one he would heal. With his other hand, he traced the opening for the signal seal.

One breath, and Tsunade-baachan’s chakra touched his, perfectly parallel; Naruto never stopped being amazed by the absolute control she had, even though he’d never say it out loud. She matched his chakra flow so closely he could feel their hearts beating in the same time, two of them as one to heal Nine-tails’ scar: Naruto to connect and Tsunade to direct.

Two breaths, and their paired flow swept out to the fox, and that almost shocked Naruto loose. The fox’s chakra pattern was structured like any other vertebrate’s, but it was huge, wild, a raging torrent like nothing Naruto had ever seen. It was like a forest-fire with a soul.

Three breaths, and another energy surged through Tsunade’s hands and into his, just as wild, just as raw, and somehow it fit. Dizzy, Naruto wondered if this was what Sakura felt every time she activated her seal, thought that now he understood what Nine-tails meant when he said he was a spirit of the land. This wild, inhuman power, untempered and uncaring, matched him perfectly.

He shook himself and kept breathing, holding his contact with Nine-tails and fighting to stay in rhythm with Tsunade-baachan’s technique, to move with her, bit by bit through the fox’s body and spirit. Or spirit-body. Or whatever. The shoulder under his hands flinched constantly and the fox whined as they touched bit after bit of torn or unnaturally smooth chakra and struck it like a bell, forced a resonance with the flow of their own chakra, dissolved the scar in the raging stream of nature energy. The fox’s body drank it in like parched ground under rain.

Naruto was light-headed with the strain of another bit and another and another, but with each tiny scar-bit they dissolved, with each rush of nature energy that vanished into the fox without slowing, the more he was angry too. He knew the attack eighteen years ago had had to be stopped, he knew that, but this was wrong. There had to be a better way to keep the fox from Madara. He would find a better way! He gritted his teeth with that resolution and kept going.

One more bit. And one more. And one more. And… there wasn’t one more? Naruto wavered on his feet, stumbling against the fox’s shoulder, as the rush of wild power tapered off. Oh. They were at the second part already.

He could feel that they had to be fast about it, too. The Nine-tails’ chakra was unscarred now, flowing under his hands, but it wasn’t whole. It was tilting, shuddering, on the edge of falling into disorder or consuming itself, and his eyes widened as he realized how much that scar had stabilized the fox’s chakra.

“Oh shit, oh shit, oh shit, Sakura, Tsunade-baachan, hurry up,” he chanted, pressing his hands tight to the fox and reaching out desperately to try to steady his contract partner, feeling every fiber of his chakra creak under the wavering weight of Nine-tails. “Hurry up, hurry up, come on you guys…”

All at once, chakra fell on him like a collapsing cliff face, blasted from Tsunade’s hands into his, and his teeth locked on a groan as the force of it tore at him. His hands, here, were spirit, without the shield of a body, and the new flow of chakra froze them even as the fox’s spirit sucked it out of him as fast as it arrived, ravenous for this dark, sinking chakra. It went on and on until he thought he might be screaming and couldn’t even hear himself to be sure.

And then it stopped.

Naruto slumped, panting and dazed against the Nine-tails’ side, trying to understand why the world suddenly felt strange around him. Something… something had changed. Was he back in the outer world? No, there was colorless and opaque water under his feet, and under the paw next to him.

…the really huge paw.

“Nine-tails?” he mumbled, squinting.

“Sit down before you fall down, kit.” The fox’s voice rolled and rumbled like it never had before. Naruto looked up and sat down, all right, falling along with his jaw.

The fox was huge! He was taller than the cliffs around Konoha! “Oh wow,” Naruto whispered.

The fox laughed, and threw up his muzzle and howled like a storm, like mountains breaking, and Naruto laughed too, delighted. This… this was what the fox was meant to be.

They’d done it!

He grabbed the fox’s fur and scrambled up his leg and over his vast shoulder to stand on his head, and the fox let him with only a few disgruntled noises. Naruto was pretty sure he didn’t mean them. He waved his arms at the white sky, triumphant and breathless and happy.

And… not tired?

“Um. Wasn’t I exhausted just a minute ago?” he asked, curious.

An ear taller than he was flicked. “You and I are bound by our contract,” the fox rumbled. “Until you die, our chakra is as one.”

And they’d just fixed the fox’s chakra; okay, that made sense. And also, wow. Naruto grinned. “This is going to be so cool!”

Nine-tails snorted and laid down, lowering his head so fast Naruto yelped and grabbed for a handhold in his fur. “Get back where you belong, kit. I imagine there’s some cleaning up to do after all this.”

Naruto pouted, but not very hard. He’d get to try all their moves out with this new strength soon. “I can tell when I’m not wanted,” he declared, and grinned over his shoulder at the fox as he jumped down. “See you soon!”

The fox just watched him, enormous red eyes steady, as he closed his own eyes and walked forward, up, out, and was sitting crosslegged on the hard tile floor of the operating room.

“Tsunade-sama! Tsunade-sama!”

The frantic edge of Sakura’s voice snapped Naruto’s eyes open, and he started up onto his knees. “What…?” There was Sasuke at the edge of the seals looking shocked, and there was Jiraiya with an old woman in his arms, and there was Sakura with her hands wrapped around the old lady’s, and… where was Tsunade-baachan?

“Tsunade, please, hang on!” The dreadful urgency of Jiraiya’s entreaty shook Naruto’s heart and he was talking… to the old woman.

“Tsunade… -baachan?” Naruto whispered, staring. It wasn’t possible. But the old woman opened her eyes slowly, and they were Tsunade’s eyes, warm and brown and sparkling with sharp annoyance.

“Quit standing there with your mouths hanging open, looking like idiots,” she husked, voice suddenly old and fragile. “I’m not dead yet.”

Sakura let out all her breath, bending over to press her head against Tsunade’s hand, looking as dizzy with relief as Naruto felt. Jiraiya, on the other hand, inhaled deeply, the lines around his mouth carved deep and hard.

“You didn’t tell me you risked your transformation, you idiot!” he bellowed, voice echoing off the walls. “What the hell were you thinking?”

She reached up one thin hand and smacked him on the shoulder; it barely rocked him at all, and Naruto bit his lip, eyes wide with worry. She was so weak, now!

“I thought that I’m the Hokage of this damn village and this is what had to be done,” she snapped, and at least the tone sounded like her, even if the voice was husky and unsteady. “And I knew you’d argue and yell, and we didn’t have time.”

Jiraiya sputtered indignantly until she smiled up at him. Then he sighed. “I’m doomed to be surrounded by reckless fools,” he muttered, lifting Tsunade up to rest against his shoulder.

Sasuke and Tsunade exchanged a very speaking look over Jiraiya’s head, and Sasuke’s lips twitched as a grin tugged at them. Naruto supposed it was kind of funny to hear Jiraiya accusing anyone else of recklessness, though the humor was hard to see right this moment. He took a few breaths to stop his head spinning and glowered inward at the fox. Some cleaning up? he asked, hard.

A little, the fox agreed in his new, deeper rumble. Idiot kit. Are you a healer or aren’t you?

Naruto stared at thin air for a startled moment before smiling sheepishly. Okay, maybe he deserved the “idiot” this time. “Okay, we’re okay,” he assured the rest of the room. “Here.”

Tsunade-really-baachan’s eyes widened as he held his hands over her. “Naruto, don’t do that ye—”

Chakra punched through his system like a fist, not the usual flow of healing but a wild burst of it, and they both gasped. The diamond on Tsunade’s forehead snapped into being again, and it was only then that Naruto realized it had been gone. Tsunade’s hands locked around his with all her usual strength, even if she still looked old.

Her voice was as loud as ever, though, when she hollered, “Naruto! No chakra techniques until you’ve practiced them at least three times each!”

“Um. Yes, sensei,” Naruto mumbled, dazed. He shook his head briskly, trying to clear out the buzz in his thoughts, and swore he could feel the fox rolling his eyes.

Tsunade-baachan straightened up, years melting away with every breath. “Your chakra is linked tightly to the Nine-tails, and your system has an entirely new balance now,” she scolded as she elbowed away from Jiraiya. “You’re my most advanced apprentice after Shizune, these days, you should know this!”

“It worked,” Naruto defended himself.

“Only because I had enough control to harness the surge, and channel it into my reservoir seal.” She frowned at him sternly until he held up his hands.

“Okay, okay, I’ll practice first! Promise!”

“Good.” She patted her hands over herself quickly. “Okay, all back together.” She eyed him and relented far enough to say, “You shaped the technique reasonably well. Just remember to slow down, in your work, for a while.”

Naruto nodded meekly, and accepted Sakura’s hand up off the floor, leaning against her shoulder as Sasuke came to rest a hand on his back.

“And we’ll hope that Madara gives us time for that,” Jiraiya said quietly.

The One Who Fashions You on the Outside

The Black Hawks weren’t really suited to training in enclosed areas, at least not if those areas were supposed to stay enclosed. So as often as Ayanami could wring permission out of the government, they stopped in at the small floating island, F34, just outside and a long way above the capitol.

It was not, Hyuuga thought, much of an island. It only had a name because the military used it for weapons testing.

And for Warsfeil to train, which was kind of the same thing.

Today, he’d sent Konatsu off to stalk Katsuragi through the wind-twisted stone of the island’s west side, practicing how to track an opponent who could hide his presence. It was something his Begleiter needed to work on and Hyuuga was looking forward to seeing how he would solve this problem without power of his own. Besides, Ayanami had agreed to a work out with Hyuuga himself, and that always required some extra space. It wasn’t that Ayanami was profligate with his zaiphon; far from it, actually, he was as precise with those attacks as Hyuuga was with his swords. But if Hyuuga didn’t have room to move, Aya-san would pin him down in short order and that wasn’t much use for training.

Or much fun, either.

Hyuuga laughed as he twisted aside from Ayanami’s attack, caught his sword on Hyuuga’s wakizashi and spun to strike for Ayanami’s back with his long blade. A single line of zaiphon threw him back and Hyuuga showed his teeth, landing light on his toes and driving his own zaiphon out through his katana to carve apart the rock where Ayanami stood. Ayanami didn’t move; his zaiphon spiraled around him, tight and perfect, and Hyuuga’s broke against it.

After two more exchanges whose simplicity drew Hyuuga’s nerves tighter, Ayanami finally flicked his sword out level, one hand against the flat of the blade. Hyuuga had known it was coming, and he crossed his swords before him to catch it, hot lines of zaiphon scribing down the blades as he sprang back to put some distance between himself and Ayanami’s focused attack.

That did about as much good as ever.

Ayanami’s zaiphon cracked his like a chisel hammered into steel, and the burning force of it wrote itself across his body. Hyuuga hit the ground hard and rolled up to his feet, breath heaving in his chest as his cock hardened. When a strike like that connected he could taste Ayanami’s power on his tongue, and he had to work to keep his focus. It was good practice; no one else he’d encountered had been able break his focus for years, now.

Though it might, on reflection, have been a mistake to admit that to Aya-san.

The quirk of Ayanami’s mouth made Hyuuga brace himself warily. Ayanami started casting line after line of zaiphon against his defense, bursting against the zaiphon wrapped around Hyuuga’s swords until it was nearly a scent in the air. Hyuuga lunged into it, fighting to close with Ayanami, to get back into range where his swords would have the advantage, but now Ayanami was moving too, keeping out of weapon’s reach while his zaiphon bound Hyuuga’s.

And eventually started breaking through.

Hyuuga gasped as Ayanami’s power bit into him, burned into his skin, brutal and sharp, so precise he could almost read the words that formed it. No… he could read them.

…my hunters….

…my chosen…

Hyuuga’s head whipped up and he stared across the field of stone between them. Ayanami smiled, a slow curl of lips, and lifted his hand again, zaiphon twined around it in threat and promise. Another line, another, and Hyuuga could feel his defense faltering, fatally undermined by his hunger for Ayanami’s power and the temptation Aya-san had put in his path today. Another line that traced my sword against his ribs, and Hyuuga knew he was defeated. He stood square in the path of Ayanami’s zaiphon and let his swords fall and took it.

It burned like fire, with the icy slash of a sword cut, and Hyuuga’s body jerked under the force of it. He could taste blood. But now he could read the words clearly.

…soul that belongs to me…

…my sword to draw and use…

Line after line struck him and left Hyuuga gasping desperately for breath. He didn’t know if his eyes were closed or if he was blinded by the darkness of Ayanami’s zaiphon. All he knew was the bite of that power into his body and the wild intensity of pain and pleasure and need that it etched into him.

…who surrenders all that he is to me…

…your master…

It was the cutting caress of that last line across his skin that finished Hyuuga, and he screamed as heat raked through him like claws, on and on and on, until it left him collapsed on the ground barely able to breathe. He couldn’t even lift his head as Ayanami’s footsteps approached, until Aya-san’s fingers wrapped around his chin and drew his head up.

Ayanami was smiling. “You’re so demanding, Hyuuga,” he murmured.

Hyuuga managed a shaky grin. “But Aya-tan, you like me that way.”

“Mm.” Ayanami’s thumb stroked over his mouth. “I suppose I do.”

Hyuuga’s lips parted under the touch, and he closed his eyes as Ayanami leaned in, surrendering without question to the slow kiss. He wasn’t sure he knew how to do anything else, when Aya-san was involved. He did know he didn’t want to.

Ayanami’s zaiphon had spoken the truth.

End

Say Nothing and Close Your Eyes

The first time Castor and Frau had a fight, after their promotion to bishops, it didn’t go quite the way Castor expected.

He and Frau had fought pretty much constantly ever since they’d met. Castor was, not just the son of a aristocratic house, but it’s heir. He’d been raised to strict courtesy, reserve, and precision in his work. Frau was an air pirate brat who Castor was reasonably sure, from a few things Frau had let drop, had been raised in a bordello. He was loud, casual, and careless in almost everything. Castor had no idea whose notion it had been to room them together, but the result had been predictable.

After over three years, their fights had worn some of the edges off. They had cooperated very well, in the exam, at least once Castor had taken away Frau’s porn, tied him to a library chair, and drilled him on enough scripture to pass the first part. Castor had actually been a little touched that Frau had refused to leave him, when they reached the last two doors, though he did think Frau could have been a little less crude in the response he’d inscribed to the examiners. They had helped each other out when their paths crossed during their apprentice periods. They were friends by now, albeit friends who fought constantly.

None of that, however, meant Frau frustrated him any less.

So when Frau leaned against the window of Castor’s new (thankfully single) room and fished his Seal from around his neck to light a cigarette with, of course Castor growled and snatched for it.

“Frau! Is there no end to your disrespect? Give me that!”

Frau caught Castor’s wrist and grabbed his lighter-cum-Seal back. “Oh come on, it’s still the holy Seal. Who cares if it’s also something actually useful?”

Castor elbowed Frau in the ribs, though it didn’t land quite as squarely as usual; he still wasn’t entirely used to their new vestments. Frau grunted satisfyingly and lost his cigarette, though, and they scuffled for the lighter for a few seconds.

“Don’t even try it!” Frau panted, snatching Castor’s other hand before Castor could get a good grip on the chain of his lighter. “You stole my porn, but you’re not getting my goddamn cigarettes!” He swung Castor up against the wall by the window, trying to pin him, and Castor gave him a disdainfully curled lip and twisted his wrists against Frau’s completely unscientific grip.

He couldn’t break it.

Castor froze for one second in shock. It wasn’t as though he hadn’t noticed that Frau was taller than him now, or that Frau had been filling out a lot this past year, but Castor had been trained to fight nearly from the moment he could walk. That Frau would have the raw strength to stop him anyway…

He couldn’t help remembering the last test of the exam, the stunning light that had washed through the entire hall, breaking open the candidates’ isolation, erasing everyone’s shadows. Erasing his father. The hands that held him were the ones that wielded that light, and that put a strange shiver through Castor.

He tried, more by reflex than intention at that point, to throw Frau off balance with a twist of his hips. And then he really couldn’t help the sound he made when Frau pressed a thigh between his legs to pin him in place. Frau stilled, looking down at him with sudden question, and Castor stared up at him, shocked at his own response. He was hard against Frau’s thigh.

“Castor?” Frau asked, voice low and steady.

“I…” Castor swallowed. “I don’t…” He couldn’t forget that light, and when Frau’s hands tightened his breath caught. The piercing eyes on him softened.

“Shh,” Frau said quietly, pressing Castor back against the wall. “It’s okay.” His mouth quirked. “Could have figured you wouldn’t know what to do with it.”

Castor rallied a bit at that, bristling. “What exactly do you mean by—” He broke off with a choked gasp as Frau’s thigh rocked up between his legs. He tried to reach out, to steady himself at least, and couldn’t; Frau’s grip kept his hands pinned up against the wall, and Castor moaned softly as his stomach tightened with heat.

“That,” Frau murmured. Castor’s eyes widened as Frau leaned down and closed his teeth, delicately, on the edge of Castor’s veil, lifting it until he could catch Castor’s mouth. His mouth on Castor’s was slow and gentle and utterly ruthless, and Castor was trembling by the time Frau let him go only to catch him again. This, yes, this was what he’d felt in the light that touched them all, and Castor finally surrendered to it and tipped his head back, mouth open under Frau’s.

Frau kept him up against the wall, kissing him until Castor was breathless and gasping as the hard thigh between his legs rocked steadily against him. Frau’s strength held him, steadied him, took him slowly apart, and Castor could only trust in Frau’s assurance that it was all right. When pleasure finally snapped and shot through him, Frau’s body against his was the only thing he could hold on to.

And when he finally relaxed, panting for breath, Frau still held him. Secure. Castor had to swallow against the tightness in his throat. “Frau…”

Slowly, Frau let him go, thumbs stroking gently over his wrists as that steel grip on them eased. He let Castor down and drew him a little away from the wall, gathering him close. “All right?” he asked softly, long fingers spread against Castor’s back.

“I…” Castor hardly knew. But he leaned against Frau.

Frau cupped his cheek, lifting his head. He kissed Castor very gently, through their veils this time, giving Castor back that little distance. “Next time you want to do that, let me know.” He smiled. “And we can keep the fighting for the real arguments. Like where the hell you stashed my porn.”

Castor finally laughed, even if it was a little husky. “Don’t tell me you haven’t replaced it already. I know you better than that.”

Frau drew himself up indignantly. “That’s not the point.”

“Yes, it is,” Castor answered precisely, “because now I have to go looking for the new stuff too.”

And they were back to normal, except for Frau’s hand still resting on his back, steady and sure. Supporting him. Offering a strength that Castor couldn’t break away from. Castor wasn’t sure how he could ask for this again, but he suspected he was going to figure it out.

End

Come Along With Me

Teito really liked going to bed with Frau. It was hot and alive, and if it was strange that he’d found those things with a technically dead man… well, no one knew better than he did that life was weird that way.

Now if he could just work Frau past his over-protectiveness.

Teito moaned into Frau’s mouth as long, strong fingers slid deeper into his ass, and nipped at Frau’s lower lip. “Frau, come on.”

“Teito…”

He could already tell, just from the tone, that Frau was about to insist on preparing him for longer, and glared. “Shut up.” Teito wrapped his legs around Frau’s hips and rocked up against him hard. He smiled when Frau forgot to be careful for a moment and ground down to meet him, pinning Teito against the bed with his weight, one hand closed tight on his ass.

“Nngh…” Frau glared back at him, eyes dilated and dark. “Damn it, brat.”

Teito grinned, rubbing up against the hard line of Frau’s cock. “Come on and fuck me,” he half coaxed and half demanded. “Fuck me now.”

Frau growled and kissed him, deep and hot, and Teito relaxed. Now they were getting somewhere. He let Frau lay him back against the sheets, because he really did know that he had to be relaxed to take Frau in. He made a husky sound at the blunt, thick press of Frau’s cock between his cheeks, the promise of it, and, when Frau hesitated, he looked up and murmured, “Please.”

Frau gave in, the way he almost always did when Teito asked like that, and pushed into him slowly, eyes sharp on Teito’s face.

Teito tossed his head back and moaned openly, hands working against Frau’s shoulders. “Yes… oh yes… Frau…” His breath was broken into gasps by how fiercely Frau’s cock stretched his body, so intense he wondered every time if he’d be able to take it for long enough. And then, every time, the stretch turned into a hot slide into his ass, and feeling the hardness of Frau inside him, holding him open, made him shudder. “God, Frau, this,” he panted. “This, please, fuck me.”

And however he complained about Frau’s over-protectiveness, he liked the feeling of Frau’s arms gathering him up and holding him while Frau’s cock worked in and out of him. Sheer sensation washed away the rest of the world; he couldn’t think of anything except how big Frau was inside him, the sharp flare of heat every time Frau drove in again, the flex of Frau’s hard muscles under his hands, the tenderness of one large hand cradling his head. When the other hand closed around his cock, sure and strong, Teito moaned openly at the pleasure tightening his whole body.

When he came and heat wrung his body hard around the unyielding thickness of Frau’s cock, Teito couldn’t even moan, only gasp open mouthed. It went on and on, until the edges of Teito’s vision started to close in, and even when the intensity snapped and drained away he was still full of Frau. And that was good.

Frau wasn’t long behind him, and Teito sprawled under him with a satisfied smile as Frau fucked him with hard, short strokes and finally stilled over him, shuddering. He reached up to pull Frau down against him before Frau could decide he was too heavy. Teito liked Frau’s weight holding him against the bed.

Frau smiled down at him wryly, eyes laughing as he panted for breath. “One of these days, brat, you’re going to get yourself into trouble.”

“So maybe that’s what I like,” Teito pointed out, reaching up to brush Frau’s hair out of his eyes.

“Yeah, okay.” Frau kissed his forehead gently. “Just… try not to go looking for it, okay?”

Teito smiled up at him. “Only with you,” he promised.

From the rueful quirk to Frau’s lips, he thought he might finally have gotten through this time.

End

Heavier Than A Mountain

Happens just post-Advent Children, but assuming some Lullabye for the New World Order history.

Tseng was sorting his desk. An attack on the city always meant re-sorting his information, prioritizing the small fears and unrests that would always flare in the aftermath. The focus of the task was soothing.

Given the basic equation of fears and unrest, of course, it was predictable that he would be interrupted.

Rufus didn’t bang the door open. He opened and closed it behind him very precisely, the only sound a soft click of the latch. That was a far stronger danger sign than overt temper, and Tseng prudently laid down his files and pen, well out of the way. Rufus crossed the office with a measured step and laid a hand on the back of Tseng’s desk chair.

Tseng calmly tucked his knees back to keep from banging them on the desk as Rufus swung the chair sharply around and leaned over him. “Yes, sir?” he asked, leaning his head back to look up at the President. Rufus was steady on his feet, and the chair creaked under his grip; he looked entirely recovered from the Geostigma, and Tseng spared a moment of thanks to Aerith, wherever and whatever she had become now.

“You miscalculated the risk of going to the Northern Crater,” Rufus stated flatly. “Don’t let that happen again.”

“I will certainly endeavor not to,” Tseng answered dryly. Being tortured by broken fragments of Sephiroth’s spirit was not an experience he wanted to repeat.

“Do more than that,” Rufus ordered. “Understand me, Tseng. You do not have my permission to die.”

Tseng froze in his chair, staring up at Rufus. Even in this language, the words dove down into the center of him and rang there. Death, and the manner of it, were the final right of the humblest warrior. To safeguard his family and secure his honor, to deny the enemy, to choose his own end, all that was the right of any warrior whose determination did not fail him. To surrender it…

Protest struggled with a curl of hot response, wrapping around each other in his chest, and Tseng’s hands tightened on the arms of his chair.

Rufus caught his chin, burning blue eyes locked with his, fixing him in his chair sure as a sword thrust. “You do not have my permission, Tseng,” he repeated softly. “Not while I live.” Tseng could feel the force of Rufus’ will like the heat of a fire on his face, and the part of him that had waited so many years for Rufus to grow into his own soul couldn’t help but answer.

I receive your command,” he murmured in his own tongue, measured and formal, acknowledging Rufus’ right. A corner of his mind remarked dryly that his family would have mass heart failure if they ever learned of this. A larger part was ruefully aware of how hard he was.

“Good.” Rufus’ thumb stroked along Tseng’s jaw slowly. “Then come here.”

Yes, Rufus had definitely noticed.

Tseng rose from his chair, and Rufus’ hands were on his belt, and as quickly as that he was bent over his desk with Rufus’ fingers in his ass. Tseng moaned low in his throat at the rough, slow stretch. The dry corner of his thoughts observed that the door was not locked and Reno never knocked. The part of him that was hot and hungry with his surrender to Rufus half hoped someone would come in, that someone else would witness the fire that Rufus was burning with and understand why Tseng offered his life and soul to it.

Rufus fucked him slow and hard, leaning over Tseng, hands running up and down his body. He could not have more clearly marked his possession without tattooing property of Rufus Shinra, do not touch across Tseng’s back. Possession… and protection. Even as Tseng panted with the hard, driving thrusts of Rufus’ cock into his ass, he could feel the gentleness in Rufus’ hands as they slid up under his shirt, careful of Tseng’s injuries even now they were healed. It was the care that drove a soft, unvoiced, “Lord,” out of Tseng, and when Rufus leaned down, chest against Tseng’s back, and whispered in his ear in the same language, “Yes,” Tseng came completely undone.

Rufus worked him through it and it wasn’t until Tseng was a limp, boneless mess sprawled across his desk that Rufus took his own pleasure. He had, Tseng reflected through the haze of satiation, learned a gratifying degree of control.

They rested against the desk for a while, quiet, and Tseng was content to stay there. He could feel the steadiness of Rufus’ heartbeat against his spine, and the easy heat of his body. Not fever-hot and not chilled. Healed and well again. The fear and fury that had, Tseng knew, kept him searching the Northern Crater long after the signs of danger would normally have sent him back to fetch reinforcements, finally eased all the way. He was relaxed enough to make a contented sound as Rufus’ fingers rubbed slowly up and down the nape of his neck.

“Remember,” Rufus said quietly.

“I won’t forget what I am,” Tseng returned, voice steady.

Rufus’ man. Life and soul.

There was an extra leash on what he could do in that cause, now, but that was all right. Fighting fate was already more or less Tseng’s job. He could add this to the list of things he tried to circumvent. And if that happened to cause a disagreement or two, or give Rufus reason to reassert his command…

Tseng smiled into the crook of his arm.

End

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Seventeen

The only reason Sakura didn’t kill Sai immediately was that Ino got in her way.

“Interrogation,” Ino reminded her, clipped, as she pulled her garrote tight around Sai’s throat and nodded to Chouji, who slowly took his weight off Sai’s back.

Sakura snarled softly, aware that her lip was curled up off her teeth and not bothering to lower it. How dare he. After they’d survived the Akatsuki attack, after Naruto had finally woken up again, how dare one of their own people turn on him like this!

“Easy, there,” B rumbled from behind her, where Sasuke was guarding Naruto. “Not saying it’s a good reason, but maybe he had family in the last attack by the Nine-tails? Wouldn’t be surprised if it came out now, after a full manifestation.”

Sai looked up at them, perfectly blank, as if he didn’t even feel Ino’s garrote. “Family?”

Or as if he didn’t understand the words. Quiet rippled out through the dining hall again, cutting through the soft scrapes of people starting to pick up their chairs. Quiet, especially, from the Mist-nin.

“I hadn’t heard Leaf did that kind of thing,” Ushio, Mist’s senior chuunin, said, eyes shifting between Sai and the rest of the Leaf-nin.

“We don’t,” Shikamaru answered, frowning. “At least not that I’ve ever heard before.”

“Omoi went for the Commander and Kakashi-san,” Karui said, golden eyes dark. “Guess we’ll know soon.”

“Naruto!” The dining hall door slammed open and the entire command group spilled through, Jiraiya in the lead.

“Speak of him and he appears,” Sasuke murmured, and Sakura let the dry humor in his voice calm her, reassure her that it was all right, because otherwise Sasuke wouldn’t sound that calm. She straightened slowly and stepped back to Naruto’s side; it didn’t escape her notice that several of the shinobi around them sighed with relief as she did.

Okay, so maybe she was a little more on edge than usual.

“I’m okay!” Naruto piped up from behind his human bulwark. “Sasuke saw him coming and Sakura kicked his knees out and he missed completely and everyone piled on.”

Jiraiya blew out a long breath and nodded to the knot of people around Sai. “Thank you all.” He frowned at the restrained and weirdly calm Sai. “Anyone have any idea why?”

“I’m afraid I probably do,” Kakashi-sensei murmured, stepping through the crowd to come and crouch in front of Sai. Quietly enough that only the nearest people heard it, he asked, “Are you a member of Root?”

Sai just looked back at him, silent and blank, and Sakura frowned. She’d heard of Root, but it had been disbanded years ago. If he had been Root, though… that meant he was ANBU.

“Nearly as good as a yes,” Kakashi-sensei sighed, standing, and turned to Jiraiya. “Commander. I’m afraid this is likely to get deep into matters of Konoha politics. Can we get some privacy?”

Jiraiya’s mouth tightened, lines deepening on either side. After a long moment he nodded. “Very well. But if anything you find out has any bearing on this mission, I will expect you to report it to the command group.” At Kakashi-sensei’s nod he jerked a thumb at the door. “Take him back to the Leaf quarters, then. No one will interrupt.”

Good, Sakura thought coldly.

Ino got Sai onto his feet with an efficient heave and aimed him out the door, garrote still snug. The rest of them stayed close all the way back to their own building and bent suspicious looks on the rest of Ino’s team, who piled down the stairs, talking over each other to find out what had happened.

“He’s a traitor,” Ino said bluntly, and watched the stunned expressions on the faces of other four for a long moment before nodding, apparently satisfied. “We’re going to use the inner room on the second floor. Watch the exits.”

Genma-san was watching from the top of the stairs, eyes dark. He exchanged a long look with Kakashi-sensei and bowed his head wearily.

“If we’re lucky, this will be the break,” Kakashi-sensei answered, as if Genma-san had said something, and the other man nodded.

“Hyuuga’s team has perimeter watch this shift,” he said quietly. “Should I keep them away when they get back in?”

“No, send them up. We need witnesses, if this is what I think it is, and the heir to Hyuuga, the favorite grandson of the Inuzuka matriarch, and the first cousin of the Aburame heir would be hard to disappear.”

Sakura swallowed her startlement at that, suddenly aware that, whatever Kakashi-sensei suspected, it must go far beyond one crazy ANBU.

Kakashi-sensei waved Sasuke and Naruto, and Shikamaru and Chouji, back against the walls of the room they brought Sai to, the one that Ino’s team had been sleeping in. “The first thing you all need to understand is that there are questions Sai will be unable to answer.” He glanced at Sai, now sitting calmly in a chair with Ino behind him. “Will you show them why?”

Sai shrugged and stuck out his tongue, and Sakura pulled in a hard breath at the mark on it. “A mission seal?” That meant someone had sent Sai to do this. She frowned. “Do you still have the keys to ANBU seals, Kakashi-sensei?”

“In fact, I do,” he murmured. “But I don’t have the key to this one.”

A chill stroked down Sakura’s spine. Was he implying that Sai had been suborned by outsiders? Or… by insiders?

Kakashi-sensei met her eyes and nodded just a fraction. “There’s other information he can give, but first we need to make sure he isn’t going to die in the middle of this.”

Sakura bit her lip and nodded silently. Bit by bit, she and Kakashi and Ino searched Sai for poisons or death seals under Kakashi-sensei’s quiet direction. Sakura’s stomach felt shaky by the time they were done, and not just because it was a hard thing to do to a fellow Konoha shinobi. It was also Sai himself; they might have been handling a doll for all his response or expression.

“Last thing,” Kakashi-sensei started as he closed cuffs back around Sai’s hands and stood, only to look up as Hinata, Kiba, and Shino piled through the door. “Ah, good timing. Hinata, can you check Sai for any implanted devices or techniques that might cause his death?”

Kiba shut the mouth he’d already opened, eyes wide. Shino rested a hand on Hinata’s shoulder for a moment before nudging Kiba back against the wall like everyone else. Hinata, after an uncertain breath, nodded. “Yes, Kakashi-san.” She engaged her Byakugan and examined Sai closely for a few moments. “Nothing that would cause death,” she reported steadily, "but he carries a paralyzing seal in his mouth.”

“That one we knew of. Thank you.” Kakashi-sensei looked around at them and sighed. “I had hoped this could be resolved without involving your generation, but it appears not. What we know for sure is that Sai attempted to kill Naruto in the dining hall this afternoon, and that he carries an irregular mission seal which will very likely prevent him from speaking about who sent him or why. We are here to find out whatever else we can.” Meeting Sai’s blank gaze directly, he added, “I believe I know the answers to who and why already, in any case.”

Ino frowned. “Then why…?”

Kakashi leaned against another chair, arms crossed. “What if I told you that I believe Sai was assigned this mission by one of our village Elders? And that this Elder leads a proscribed group, of which Sai is a part, answering only to him and carrying out whatever secret operations he decides?”

“I would say that was speculation and hearsay,” Shikamaru said quietly, from where he stood directly behind Sai. “At least, that’s what I’d say if I was an Elder.”

Sakura thought Kakashi smiled behind his mask, and that it probably wasn’t a happy smile. “Precisely. What is not speculation is that someone sent Sai to do this, someone with the ability to place that seal on him. And that the records of the Intelligence division show that, not too very long ago, there was a subdivision of ANBU called Root which was under the sole control of Shimura Danzou. Sai’s membership is similarly a matter of record. And Danzou-san has, more than once, said publicly that he does not trust the Hokage to take all the measures necessary to guard the village properly. Either the Third or the Fifth.”

“That’s a stronger case, yeah,” Shikamaru allowed, eyes fixed on Kakashi-sensei. Sakura, watching, caught a faint settling in Sai’s posture and had to look down to hide a moment of realization and admiration for her teacher’s deft touch. He was setting Sai up to cooperate with them, to think there was already no reason not to. “Well,” Shikamaru continued, voice perfectly casual, “if Sai can’t talk, maybe the things he packed can.” Sakura caught his glance at her and picked it up.

“Let’s see, then,” she said coolly, kneeling by Sai’s bedroll to sort briskly through his things. Weapons, mostly, including his drawing supplies, and… hm. She sat back on her heels, holding what looked like a picture book between her hands, watching Sai out of the corner of her eye. He didn’t tense, but something changed in the set of his brows, like the tiniest flicker of a frown. She paged through the book slowly, wondering if it was some manner of code. It read in two different directions. Two different mission plans? But the center pages were blank. She frowned over that, considering. Two boys, fighting the same things from two different directions, and… well, they should meet in the middle, except that they didn’t. One of the boys looked a bit like Sai.

Abruptly, she remembered the way the Mist-nin had looked at them, in the dining hall, and the things they had heard from Zabuza and Kakashi-sensei, years ago. Two boys…

“Did you know him?” she asked, turning to Sai to show him the side of the book with the other boy. Softer, she added, “Did you fight him? Is that what happened, in those blank pages?”

“That’s what happened,” Sai confirmed, face blank as ever. But his voice was a little tighter, now.

“Who was he?” she asked, watching him. Yes, there was definitely more tension around his eyes now.

Sai looked down at the book in her hands for a long moment and finally shrugged. “My brother.”

Sakura’s stomach twisted, despite every attempt at discipline and calm, and she closed her eyes as the pattern clicked together in her mind’s eye. “You were trained together. Right up until the day you had to fight him. To the death.” It wasn’t a question. Kiba and Naruto choked, and Hinata made a distressed sound. Sakura opened her eyes and looked at Sai as steadily as she could. He looked back, expressionless. Or almost. It didn’t take Shikamaru’s nod to know this was something they might use as a lever, here, but the thought of using such a tragedy as a lever—again, after the way Danzou had obviously used it once—sickened her. She hoped with all her heart Kakashi-sensei had another way in mind.

On an impulse, she leaned forward and laid the book in Sai’s lap. “This is yours,” she said, quietly.

Slowly, his fingers wrapped around it.

“No wonder the Third outlawed it,” Naruto said, low and rough.

Over the sounds of agreement, around the room, Kakashi-sensei’s voice was level and calm. “The organization known as Root was officially dissolved, yes. But it was never suppressed. Remember that.”

“What are you saying?” Naruto started low, but his voice was picking up volume by the syllable. “The old guy would never have let anything like that happen, not if he knew!”

A little to Sakura’s surprise, it was Hinata who answered. “The kind of responsibility the Hokage has can lead people to do… things they don’t like.” She was twisting her fingers together, but her soft words were steady. “The Third was also the one who refused to confirm Sasuke-san in his place as the head of Uchiha. It had to be him, because the other noble clans didn’t oppose it.”

“The Third acted however he felt was needed to protect the village and the people in it,” Kakashi-sensei agreed, quiet, almost hypnotic. “And Danzou has always said he acted for the same principle. I suspect that’s why he uses that seal, hm?” He cocked his head at Sai, casual and understanding.

“It’s best if our missions are sealed,” Sai said, still looking down at the book. “We have done things to protect the village that would be considered questionable.”

Questionable even by the standards of ANBU meant something a little more extreme than most of the others would assume, and Sakura exchanged a quick, grim look with Ino.

“So, Danzou is trying to make himself a second Hokage, is he?” Ino asked, contempt in every word. “With his very own ANBU that reports just to him. I suppose corruption and ambition are always with us.”

“It can’t just be that!” Sakura started up on her knees to play the opposite part, supporting Kakashi-sensei’s lead. She glared at Ino, which came easily given how often they fought. “If the Third knew, then they really must be doing what’s right for the village!”

“What’s right?” Ino’s brows and voice both went up in disbelief. “Try to remember that it’s your own teammate who just nearly got killed!”

Sakura flinched back. “That… but…” She stared at Sai as if torn, and, right on cue, Kakashi came forward again, resting a hand on her shoulder as he crouched down in front of Sai.

“You can’t speak of it,” he said quietly. “But perhaps you can at least indicate if my guesses are right. I think Danzou probably sent you along to make sure Naruto didn’t fall into Akatsuki’s hands. You were to strike if he did?”

After a thoughtful moment, Sai nodded silently. Sakura bit her lip harder, which had the useful side effect of hiding her surge of exultation at this break.

“And if one of the other villages tried to take him?” Kakashi went on. Another nod answered that. “But neither of those happened. So there must be a third condition. Something to do with the Nine-tails and the seal, I imagine.”

Sai nodded again, quiet calmly.

“But the seal didn’t break!” Sakura leaned forward, pleadingly, resting a hand as if by accident on the book in Sai’s lap, the reminder of her sympathy (a true sympathy, even if she was using it as a tool now). “The Nine-tails didn’t escape, Naruto is still in control! So why…?”

“If the seal changed at all?” Kakashi-sensei asked softly. Sai smiled his alarming smile as if pleased that they’d finally gotten it and nodded again.

Sakura leaned back again, frowning. “But it’s a double seal, so the Nine-tails would still be under control even if it were changed or damaged. Why give an order like that?”

Kakashi-san sighed. “Because Danzou’s ideas of what will protect the village are very rigid and very strict. And not what would make good policy as a Hokage. Since the Third died, Danzou’s decisions have been untempered by any larger view. The Fifth has had no proof of what he was doing, not something she could convince her whole Council with.”

Until now, at least, and that made Sakura very, very happy. She was going to see that old man die for this, one way or another. The attack on her teammate had clearly been his doing, and it had come close enough to send adrenaline sizzling down her nerves every time she thought about it. And while part of her still howled to kill Sai now just to be on the safe side, a growing part was just as enraged over what had been done to him.

Kakashi-sensei stood silently and rested a hand on Sai’s head. “Questionable things must sometimes be done, to protect what we care for,” he said. “But Danzou forced you to kill what you cared for, didn’t he? I suspect he did it to make you unable to care. How, then, could you possibly judge for yourself what is necessary and what isn’t?”

Sai blinked up at him. “I don’t need to judge. Only act.”

Sakura swallowed, and reached abruptly for Naruto and Sasuke, to reassure herself they were still there, still her anchor, her reason for fighting. To assure herself that she had something to hold her back from the pure, uncaring edge she could hear in Sai’s words—the edge she remembered hearing, whispering to her soft and tempting, in Orochimaru’s voice, telling her not to let herself be held back by sentiment. Someone had said that to Sai until he had believed it. Their hands closed on hers, and the three of them clung together.

“If only one person judges, and yet his judgments become the action of many, the result is madness.” Kakashi-sensei slid his hand down to Sai’s shoulder, gripping it tightly. “You had no way of learning this, I know, but try to listen now. That’s why we have a council, to advise the Hokage. That’s why the Hokage and the Elders and the division commanders and the noble clans are all involved. So that no one person can act beyond their individual strength without convincing others that they are right. Danzou never convinced you. He only shaped and conditioned you. That’s anathema to what our village is. Even ANBU leaves its operatives their own will and judgment.” Kakashi-sensei’s voice turned dark and cold for a moment. “For breaking that faith with all of you, I will bring him down.”

Sai had a faint frown now. A puzzled one. “I don’t understand.”

Sakura shuddered. Of course he didn’t. Having to kill his own brother, a brother he’d probably loved… she would have done her best to turn off her heart, too!

A brother he’d probably loved…

Sakura straightened, assumptions suddenly shifting. “Sai,” she said, husky. “That book. What did you mean to draw in the middle? It couldn’t have been the two of you fighting each other. You couldn’t have known that was coming.” She felt Sasuke shiver against her, and wrapped her arm around him.

Sai blinked slowly. “I… don’t remember.” He looked down at the book, distant and curious.

“Maybe,” Naruto had to stop and clear his throat to get the roughness out of his voice, “maybe you were going to draw the two of you fighting together. Instead of against each other. I mean, if he was your brother and you grew up training together.”

Sasuke flinched and Sakura tugged him into the middle, so she and Naruto could both hold him. When she looked back at Sai, he was staring at the book with more expression than she’d seen yet—something dark and hurt, and still a little wondering. “Together,” he murmured. “That was… yes. I wanted to give it to him, once we both passed our final trials for fieldwork.”

Hinata made a quick, pained sound, muffled behind her clasped hands; her team had closed in around her, too.

“For him and for you,” Kakashi-sensei said, very soft and cold as ice, “I will bring Danzou down. Fight for the village your brother would have wanted to live in, if you continue to fight.”

Sai actually seemed comforted by that deadly tone and lowered his eyes. “Yes, Kakashi-senpai,” he said, meekly.

Sakura watched Kakashi-sensei take a long breath. “This mission has failed,” he continued, more briskly. “Will you attempt to keep carrying it out, if you’re released?”

Sai shook his head. “I wasn’t told to complete it at all costs, and I could only complete it at the cost of my life, now.”

Kakashi-sensei nodded to Ino, who unwound her garrote and turned at once to her team, to be gathered into Chouji’s arms while Shikamaru watched Kakashi-sensei with dark eyes. Kakashi-sensei undid the cuffs and stood back with a sigh. “I don’t think there’s anything that needs to be reported to our mission’s command. But when Tsunade-sama gets here, I imagine she’ll want to hear it all. It may alter how we continue this mission, too. Everyone get as much rest as you can.” He swept a stern eye around the room. “Don’t speak of this with anyone else.”

A murmur of agreement went around the room, and Sakura was very glad to be released. She wanted their own room, and her team with her, and to sit and shake for a while. She’d taken part in a few interrogations, but never of someone from her own village before! “Come on,” she whispered to Sasuke and Naruto, tugging Naruto along when he looked back at Sai, hesitating. “Let Kakashi-sensei take care of it for now.”

Naruto nodded reluctantly, and followed, and was perfectly willing to wrap her and Sasuke up and fuss over them for a while. Sakura huddled with Sasuke, on their piled bedrolls, and thought about this comfort that was so readily hers, and thought about Sai and his brother, and put her head down on Naruto’s shoulder while she cried.


Kakashi knew his voice was too hard, as he finished his report to Tsunade. Too serious. Too demanding. But he’d felt like he had fire under his skin for a day and a night, now, waiting for her to arrive so he could give her the proof, finally, of Danzou’s actions. The proof that was sitting in his room across the valley, waiting with inhuman calm, exactly like a weapon sitting in its rack.

“Send me home,” he finished, harsh. “Send me home with this, and assign me to eliminate him. All of ANBU will understand why it was me, and that he died by the same sword he lived by.”

Tsunade didn’t look up from her hands, clasped on the black oval table of the command HQ room. “And then how am I different from him, Kakashi?”

He slashed his hand across the words, violently. “You don’t ask that about Akatsuki! How is what Danzou’s done any less of an attack on the village?”

Her hands tightened. “And if I have one of my Council killed out of hand, how will the village feel any safer for that?!” She finally looked up, mouth sick and set in a pale face. “No. It will be in Council, with a public record. Danzou will be heard. He’s mad enough to take pride in what he’s done, if it comes to that.”

“Playing publicity games with your people’s lives, Tsunade-hime?” Kakashi asked very softly.

She stood up slowly, and for a breath he wondered if he’d let fury drive him too far. But when she came to him she only closed her hands on his shoulders, strong and steady. “Their lives were already played with. All we can do is try to set them straight again and hope. I know it hurts you,” she whispered. “I know you want to do something now to fix it. I know. But we have to care for everyone, as best we can, and that’s never as easy as killing off the threat. Never.”

He bent his head, shuddering under the weight of that. “Wasn’t there anyone else you could have chosen?” he asked, very close to pleading.

She lifted a hand to touch his cheek. “It’s because of this that I chose you,” she told him, terribly gentle. “Because you love them. Because it hurts. I’m sorry.”

There would be a day, Kakashi saw with abrupt clarity, when he would have to do this to Naruto. And that thought felt so much like a dagger under his ribs that he reached out and pulled Tsunade close, holding her tight, the way he would one of his own team. He’d been ANBU, and he understood cruel necessity, but she was a healer; it had to be half killing her to do this to him. “I’ll survive,” he assured her, low and rough. “And I won’t kill Danzou until you say I can. Well. Not unless he attacks first.”

She snorted against his chest, half laughter and half her usual annoyance. “Oh, that’s reassuring.” She pushed him away and reached up to muss his hair, grinning at his elaborate indignation, and they both eased away from the pain of the moment. “Well, I suppose the first thing I need to do is take a look at Naruto’s seal and see what my idiot student has gone and done this time.”

As if his name had summoned him, or, far more likely, as if Naruto’s patience had finally run out, Naruto himself barged through the door before the last word was all the way out of her mouth.

“Tsunade-baachan! You have to help me heal the Nine-tails!” he declared.

Tsunade stared at him for a long moment before pointing to a chair. “Sit.” When Naruto had thumped down into the chair with bad grace, she hitched a hip up onto the table and crossed her arms. “Now. Try that again, starting at the beginning this time.” Kakashi faded back to lean against the wall and watch.

Naruto propped his elbows aggressively on the table. “Okay, so. When my dad sealed the Nine-tails into me, he also cut away half the fox’s chakra. His yin chakra. And he’s really pissed off about it,” here Naruto waved his arms widely as if to indicate the size of the temper in question, “and I don’t blame him! And it was the Ten Stems Twelve Branches seal, so I know we can’t get his chakra back, but we can heal him can’t we? Help him regenerate it?”

Tsunade opened and closed her mouth twice before she managed to say, “Okay, one,” she held up a finger, “yes it is sometimes possible to heal a wound to chakra, especially if the body is still intact. I have no idea how that would be complicated by working on an elemental spirit who doesn’t have his own body right this moment. But before that there is two,” another finger, with some emphasis, “which is, what the hell are you thinking, trying to strengthen a spirit that will take you over and burn you out if it gets much stronger?!” She planted her fist on her hip and glared at him.

He glared right back. “He won’t do that! We have a deal.” He crossed his arms stubbornly, chin jutted out.

“A little more beginning might have been helpful,” Kakashi put in before they could get any deeper into their deadlock. “Naruto appears to have reached a truce, and possibly even a friendship with the Nine-tails.”

Naruto winced as if at a sudden noise and wiggled a finger in one ear. “Thanks, Kakashi-sensei. That was loud. He says he’s totally not friends with some idiot human kit.”

“Rather like Naruto’s relationship with Sasuke, really,” Kakashi added blandly, with just a tiny bit of malice aforethought. Naruto and his new friend had been the cause of enough stress this week, he felt he deserved the indulgence.

Naruto glowered at him, though the corners of his mouth were twitching. “Kakashi-sensei, that wasn’t very nice. You made him howl.”

Kakashi spread his hands innocently.

“Let me get this straight,” Tsunade said, a little muffled past the hand pinching the bridge of her nose. “The scourge of our village, the terror of many a person’s nightmares, the most appallingly powerful of all the tailed beasts… and Naruto has made buddies with it.” She slid back down into her chair and buried her face in her hands. “I’m not even surprised, you know.” She heaved in a deep breath and looked up to fix an eye on Naruto. “And you want to heal your friend.”

“It’s the right thing to do,” Naruto insisted. “He didn’t choose to attack us. He got injured in a fight that wasn’t his fault, and we were the ones who did it!”

“There were a lot of people injured in that fight, and we can’t fix all of them either, Naruto,” she told him quietly.

Naruto looked back at her, not angry now but very serious, and answered just as quietly. “Sensei.”

That was all he said, but everything was in that one word. Her responsibility as the one who had taught him to heal as well as fight. His belief in the principles she’d given him. His faith that she would stand by those principles now and do the right thing. Kakashi was impressed; Naruto truly had matured lately, and he had to wonder how much the demon fox might be responsible for that.

Tsunade locked eyes with her student for a long moment. Finally she folded her hands and spoke soft and level. “Think about this, and answer me truthfully. If the Nine-tails is healed, can you still remain yourself?”

Naruto got the inward look he’d developed recently, the one Kakashi was starting to suspect indicated a conversation with his resident spirit. “No,” he murmured finally, “no, you’re right. Okay.” He looked up at Tsunade. “I’ll still be me. Yes. We really do have a deal, and he’s, um, kind of pissed off that everyone seems to be doubting his word. But you know… I’m not exactly the me I was before I graduated. Or before I was teamed with Sasuke and Sakura. Or before you taught me. It’ll be like that. He and I can talk, now. We really are getting to be friends.” He paused and added pointedly, glancing just a little aside, “No matter how much he growls and yells about insolent mortal spawn with no respect.”

Kakashi straightened up against the wall abruptly, catching something he hadn’t before. “Naruto,” he said, cautious, “when you talk about your deal with the Nine-tails… do you mean that the two of you have a contract now?”

Naruto blinked and paused, head cocked. “He says,” he reported a bit wryly, “that he’s not some damn animal summons, but that the essential principle is not entirely dissimilar, though I shouldn’t go getting a swelled head about it.”

Kakashi had to admit, through a bit of a daze, that Naruto’s verbatim quotes of the Nine-tails really did sound a bit like a much older and even more irritable Sasuke.

“It’s a promise between us,” Naruto added, smiling. “We’ll both keep it. Which means,” he added, looking pugnaciously at Tsunade again, “that I’m going to heal him!”

Tsunade looked just as shocked as Kakashi felt. “If it’s a contract…” she murmured, and trailed off. After a moment, though she shook herself and straightened. “If it’s a contract, of course you have to abide by it.” She nodded just over Naruto’s shoulder, the same direction he glanced when talking to the Nine-tails. “I apologize for misunderstanding the weight of this bond.”

Naruto cocked his head again and then turned red. “I, um. I think maybe I won’t say what he just said? Especially the part about your grandmother. Eheh.” He rubbed the back of his head. “He, um, well in general he says thanks.”

Tsunade glowered and muttered something under her breath. “All right, fine. But this is going to have to wait, because I can’t stay here as long as the research for this would take. I have to get Sai back to the village and deal with Danzou.”

“Then we’ll come home now and I can get started while you take care of that,” Naruto said firmly.

“You are not coming out of this mission’s protection,” Tsunade snapped.

“They already found us, though!” Naruto protested. “And it’s an island, we’re sitting ducks!”

“Naruto!” They were leaning over the table, nearly nose to nose, when someone cleared his throat.

“If we aren’t intruding on the debriefing, Hokage,” Darui said, leaning in the doorway, “the mission command team actually has some thoughts about that.”

Tsunade threw herself back in her chair. “Yes, everyone might as well add their bright ideas,” she said a bit sourly.

Kakashi took it as a comment on the general temperament of village leaders that everyone filed in without minding her ire in the least.

“Naruto makes a reasonable point,” Darui started, when everyone was seated around the great oval table with Naruto scowling beside Tsunade. “The greatest strength of the Island Turtle, for the purposes of this mission, was concealment. If that’s breached, and it seems likely it was, then it might be better to surround our hosts with their own people again while we search for Madara. The strength of Akatsuki is now considerably reduced, after all.”

“We’ve seen better cooperation here than I would have imagined,” Yuzuki put in, “and I truly believe that will have benefits for a long time to come. But each village always knows any of the others may be an opponent at any time. Everyone feels more secure in their own place. That is also an advantage.”

Tsunade nodded slowly. “It’s true that two Akatsuki teams have been removed since this mission started. Madara and perhaps one supporter are all that’s left. I suppose there’s a good case to be made for a home ground advantage, now.” She folded her hands under her chin. “Would you all have this mission separate again, then?”

“Sand is the ally of Leaf,” Temari said, chin lifted. “We will send support to your village, to defend Naruto, if you’ll have it.”

Tsunade smiled warmly and Naruto’s scowl was slipping away, replaced by a tiny grin. “That will be welcome.”

“I believe the Mizukage would be willing to send the Swordsmen to aid both Leaf and Cloud,” Choujuurou put in, lifting his hand a bit shyly.

“I have no idea whether my father will permit it, or the Raikage accept it for that matter,” Kitsuchi said a bit dryly, “but I will put forward the idea of sending Rock’s aid to Cloud, as well. Many of our people have been favorably impressed with B-san, on this mission.”

Tomita of Sound stirred, looking up from his folded hands. “When Orochimaru died, we took some of his network intact. Sound will search for word of Madara among the smaller countries.”

Tsunade was nearly glowing. “Thank you,” she said, looking around the table and spreading her hands as if to encompass them all. “Thank you all. I am honored by your willingness to aid us in this time, and I’m sure the Raikage will be as well.” She pursed her lips thoughtfully and added, “Once he’s done shouting, of course.” She smiled at them again, edged and bloodthirsty now. “Together, we will put an end to Madara.”

A soft rumble of agreement ran around the room. It was heartening, and yet, for Kakashi, also frightening. He saw how she did this, how she moved them, and he knew it was because she offered them her own trust. Her own heart. She was Naruto’s teacher, no question. Someday, he would need to do this too, and the thought was both tempting and terrifying, because he knew that he could. If he dared.

Someday wasn’t yet, though, and he turned his thoughts, with some relief, to the simpler task of ordering and withdrawing the Leaf contingent. She was still his Hokage, one of the Legendary Three, the leader and shield of Konoha. There was comfort in that, even as they prepared to heal one of Konoha’s worst nightmares and face down another long thought dead and gone.

A/N: Canon says that Shin died of disease before he and Sai fought, but that isn’t nearly as narratively useful. Since the poor schmuck’s dead in any case, I’m going to say he and Sai were, in fact, set against each other as planned. It makes Sai’s complete asocial feralness that much more believable.

Silence That Is Incomprehensible

Hyuuga met Ayanami his first week at the Academy, and that meeting set the tone for everything that came after.

The whole class was out in a courtyard for beginning zaiphon training, and the teacher was yelling at Hyuuga. Nothing unexpected.

“Hyuuga-kun! You’re here to learn to use your zaiphon, not to learn ballroom dancing!”

“But sensei,” Hyuuga lilted as he sprang aside from yet another clumsy stroke by his training partner that barely left a scorch on the flagstones, “it’s more fun this way! Besides,” he added, as Shigetsu-sensei started to turn red in the face, “why should I wear myself out when a sword is so much faster?” He sprinted lightly forward and spun to come up at the Ochi kid’s back, sword laid lightly against his neck.

More to the point, why should Hyuuga show his zaiphon here, where it was just possible someone would recognize what he was by seeing it? Not that he could say that out loud.

“What are you going to do if you can’t use that sword of yours and never trained in this?” Shigetsu-sensei snapped back while Ochi swallowed tightly. Hyuuga would have to admit it was a good point, if he were actually untrained. Since he wasn’t, he was just summoning his sunniest smile and another good line of bullshit when another of his classmates cut in.

“Perhaps a greater challenge is in order, then?” It was the cool boy with the silvery hair who stepped up to stand beside him. Ayanami, that was it. Who proceeded to push Hyuuga’s sword away from Ochi’s neck with precise, gloved fingers, using just enough pressure to move a lightly-held blade without cutting himself. Hyuuga’s brows rose. This one was pretty observant. “May we switch partners, sensei? I believe Hiroki-kun would be better served to start with someone closer to his own experience.”

Hyuuga sheathed his sword and glanced over his shoulder to see Ayanami’s training partner, who was standing in the middle of a swath of deeply etched stone and shaking. Shigetsu-sensei looked too and sighed. “Yes, yes, fine. You take Hyuuga-kun, then. Maybe you’ll rub off on him. We can hope,” he grumbled as he herded Ochi and Hiroki off to the side to work on some basic focusing exercises.

Ayanami didn’t speak, just beckoned to Hyuuga and turned to pace gravely through the, mostly pretty small, explosions their classmates were managing. Hyuuga blinked as he trailed after; had this guy been raised in a monastery or something? Or maybe he was from one of those noble families that was really strict and formal. Ayanami led the way through an arched arcade and into a smaller court, off to the side of the general training melee, before he stopped and turned to fix an intent look on Hyuuga. “You favor the sword?” he asked, after a moment.

The sharpness of his eyes, the pinpoint focus in them, tugged at Hyuuga, sent a tingle down his nerves. He slid his hands along his hilts and decided, impulsively, to give a true answer. “I am the sword.”

Ayanami didn’t frown or look puzzled, the way most people did. He just nodded. “Then we should train with both.” He drew his own, perfectly regulation, sword with one hand and a swift coil of zaiphon circled the other. “Guard yourself.”

The instinct he’d been born and trained to jabbed Hyuuga sharply, and both his own swords swept out to meet the fast lick of Ayanami’s blade even as he leaped to avoid the lash of zaiphon that could have taken his leg off. Another three exchanges of steel, and zaiphon came scything in again. Hyuuga’s lips drew back off his teeth as the world sharpened around him and he rolled down and back up in a scissoring attack on Ayanami’s casting hand. This was good. He hadn’t thought to find a real opponent among the other students, but this one… this one might have the edge he craved. The edge his sword needed to stay true.

He danced and spun through the storm of Ayanami’s sword and zaiphon, starting to feel the pattern of them and know where he needed to strike. Ayanami was strong, but a straight sword couldn’t counter the subtle binding of a curved edge, and the harshest, most precise zaiphon was no use if it didn’t connect. There was an opening. Here. Here.

Hyuuga spun, wakizashi coming up from below as his katana bound Ayanami’s sword, and Ayanami’s last zaiphon attack would go just past Hyuuga’s shoulder. He could see it, feel it, see the reflection of it in the widening of Ayanami’s eyes. Hyuuga laughed with the absolute purity of the moment as he struck.

Just before his short blade touched home, the circle of zaiphon around Ayanami’s hand snapped into an expanding sphere.

Hyuuga didn’t have time to yelp, barely had time to cross his blades and channel a desperate burst of zaiphon through them, before the lash of Ayanami’s power struck him and blew him back into the unforgiving stone wall of the courtyard with crushing force.

His swords rang on the pavement in the sudden quiet as he collapsed to his hands and knees, coughing for breath. He stared with blank, stunned eyes down at the flagstones under his palms. His defense had been good for a last-minute effort, but it had broken; he’d felt Ayanami’s zaiphon against his skin. The taste of it couldn’t be mistaken. “You,” he rasped, and stopped, because there was a cool edge of steel under his chin. He looked up the length of Ayanami’s sword to meet those still, intent eyes.

“Do you yield?” Ayanami inquired calmly.

A shiver ran down Hyuuga’s spine, hot with recognition and chill with excitement. His teachers had told him, repeatedly, that a swordsman must always be prepared to meet someone stronger. He’d been torn between hoping and scoffing; it was already clear that he would be stronger than his teachers very soon, and they were the best in Barsburg. He still hadn’t met a stronger swordsman, today. But Hyuuga had spoken the truth then he said he was the sword.

And the greatest of swords required, not just another sword to meet, but a hand to wield them.

“I yield to you,” he said quietly, and watched Ayanami’s brow quirk. Yes. Ayanami heard at least some of what Hyuuga meant. He pushed himself upright, grinning as Ayanami sheathed his blade. “Aya-san is sneaky.”

Ayanami actually blinked at that. “I beg your pardon?” Hyuuga’s grin widened. Good; he liked Ayanami’s seriousness but it was possible to have too much of a good thing.

“I bet you knew what I was all along,” he accused with a playful pout. “You could have just said.”

“I was reasonably sure,” Ayanami agreed, unruffled again. “My family keeps track of these things. But it’s well to be entirely sure, when possible. For that, I needed to see your zaiphon.”

Hyuuga hauled himself back to his feet, one hand against the wall to steady himself as he bent to retrieve his swords. “Even using mine, I couldn’t hold you off," he acknowledged ruefully, feeling his ribs creak. He’d have some spectacular bruises tomorrow.

“You’re not weak, though. That’s good.” Ayanami stepped closer, voice turning softer and deeper. “There are indications that the Emperor is considering sanctioning some of us, to serve the Empire. The strongest of our generation are being sent to the Academy for that reason.”

Hyuuga sucked in a quick breath, eyes wide. “Sanctioning us?” he whispered. “But, the Church…” Warsfeil were anathema. Unholy. Both Barsburg and Raggs executed any proven Warsfeil. In fact, the Empire had been getting even more stringent about that, lately, enough that the Fallen families had stopped talking even with each other for fear of drawing the Emperor’s attention.

All except Ayanami’s family, apparently.

Ayanami’s eyes were cool and level. “The Pope has been favoring Raggs increasingly, of late. If the Empire finds itself in need of a counterweight to the Church’s strength, then we will serve that purpose.”

Hyuuga whistled softly. “You think it’s really coming?” He’d hears whispers of war for years, but only ever half believed them.

“Whatever comes, I will meet it in the Empire’s service.” Ayanami might have been remarking on the chance of rain later that day, but Hyuuga had tasted his edge now, and heard the fire underneath that coolness. “And you?”

Hyuuga grinned; he thought he would like being Ayanami’s sword. “Anything you say, Aya-san.”


Hyuuga wasn’t really surprised when both he and Ayanami were posted inside headquarters after graduation. Someone among the higher-ups must know what he and Ayanami were; his personal pick was Field Marshal Miroku, who seemed to be making a hobby of Ayanami’s career. Miroku had a reputation as a cunning strategist who knew when to gamble and when to stand pat. He was gambling on the Academy-trained Warsfeil, but not so wildly that he’d let them out from under his eye. Hyuuga understood that. It just didn’t make the first handful years before their real assignment came through any less boring.

And their real assignment wasn’t actually that much of an improvement.

“Oh come on,” Hyuuga groaned, flopping over the back of his chair and letting the letter of appointment flutter down to the table beside his crossed boots. “We need Imperial permission to leave headquarters?” On pain of having their dispensation to, you know, keep living revoked. Great.

“We will have plenty of work in the field,” Ayanami said, hands folded composedly on the table. Hyuuga’s mouth quirked at the cool look Aya-san was giving his propped up boots.

“Well, at least you got a promotion out of it. A Major in just three years!”

Ayanami flicked his fingers. “An administrative promotion.”

“Mm.” Their third member was watching them, leaning on his elbows with his clasped hands against his mouth. “I must presume that the Field Marshal judges you will be a better leader for this unit than I would.”

Since Masaru had been a Captain before Ayanami, Hyuuga filled in silently; it had been pretty blatant, to promote Aya-san over him so abruptly. He eyed Masaru, wondering if this would be a problem, fingers tapping thoughtfully against his katana hilt.

“I expect formal rank to mean little among us,” Ayanami answered evenly, banked fire in every word. “All that truly matters is our strength, and ability to serve the needs of the Empire. That is the purpose of this unit, and we will fulfill it. Titles mean nothing beside that.”

Masaru’s eyes had narrowed at Ayanami’s first words, a faint haze of almost-zaiphon flickering around his fingers as if he expected a challenge to follow them. By the last words, though he was staring, wide-eyed. Hyuuga grinned; he supposed it could be a little hard to believe, the first time a person came up against that true steel dedication.

“I understand,” Masaru said slowly, and bent his head a little. “Ayanami-sama.”

“Yep, that’s our Aya-san,” Hyuuga agreed expansively, leaning his chair back on two legs. Ayanami’s hand twitched for a moment, as if with the urge to give Hyuuga’s boots a brisk shove and topple him all the way over, and Masaru gave him a mildly admonishing look for his familiarity with their commander. Hyuuga grinned, lacing his hands behind his head.

Maybe their confinement wouldn’t be quite such a hassle as he’d thought.


A year later, the Black Hawks had four members, the newest fresh out of the Academy and assigned as Ayanami’s Begleiter. Hyuuga, long familiar with Ayanami’s desperately workaholic habits, approved mightily.

Besides, Yukikaze was cute.

“Yuki-chan!” he sang, swooping in over the back of Yukikaze’s desk chair only to stop short with a grin at the extremely sharp letter opener that was suddenly pressing up under his chin. He liked this kid.

“Yes, Hyuuga-san?” Yukikaze asked calmly, still writing in Ayanami’s schedule book with his other hand.

“I got you some of that candy you were drooling over the other day,” Hyuuga told him, dropping the paper bag onto the desk so that a few hard candies rolled temptingly out of it. Yukikaze flushed.

“I was not drooling!” He gathered up Ayanami’s schedule, ignoring the candy, and marched it over to their commander’s desk.

“Hm? Must have been mistaken, then.” Hyuuga picked up one of the spilled candies and unwrapped it with a deliberate crackle. Yukikaze spun back around just in time to see Hyuuga popping it into his mouth. “Mm! Oh, hey, these are good.” A little sweet, a little tangy: actually he kind of liked that. Maybe he’d have to snitch some more.

Yukikaze was back at his desk in a flash, sweeping the rest of the candy into its bag and whisking the bag into his desk drawer. Hyuuga laughed. “See, I knew you liked them.”

“I never claimed I didn’t like them,” Yukikaze pointed out. “I just said I wasn’t drooling.”

“Yukikaze,” Ayanami’s murmur cut through their byplay, “didn’t I have an appointment with Procurement after the meeting with the Committee on Military Research this afternoon?”

“Yes, Ayanami-sama.” Yukikaze straightened up from locking his drawer. “I spoke with the General’s secretary, though. Your meetings with Military Research usually run long, and it turns out that Procurement only really needs your signature.”

Ayanami’s brow rose. “I believe that was my decision to make.”

Yukikaze stood even straighter, nearly at attention, but his tone was firm. Almost scolding. “You’re over-scheduled, Ayanami-sama. The other departments take advantage of your conscientiousness. There’s no excuse for it.”

Ayanami sat back in his chair, eyeing Yukikaze coolly, but the corner of his mouth had quirked up with what Hyuuga could tell was amusement. “I see. That’s your considered and experienced opinion, hm?”

Yukikaze bowed without losing one bit of his stubborn expression. “Please forgive me if I’ve overstepped myself, Ayanami-sama. But it’s my duty to look after your work and health both, and I will do so to the very best of my ability.”

After a long, silent moment of locked stares, Ayanami set down his schedule book and picked up the report he’d been reading again. “Bring me the document Procurement needs me to sign, then,” he directed.

Yukikaze lit up with a soft smile that wasn’t even a little triumphant. “Yes, Ayanami-sama.”

Hyuuga drifted over to lean on Aya-san’s chair. “Aya-tan is so cute with his Yuki-chan,” he cooed, and just had to laugh at the identically annoyed looks they both gave him.

It really was kind of adorable.


Five years after the Black Hawks were founded, Hyuuga was pretty satisfied with life. They were a tight unit, and they had enough sweeping successes under their collective belt that the fear he saw every day in the halls had turned from “monsters from under the bed” fear into “deadly elite unit” fear. People got out of their way, and Generals quaked in their boots when they saw Ayanami coming. Hyuuga approved.

So when Yukikaze came to him with the news that Ayanami had locked himself into his rooms and wasn’t answering the door, it was a bit of a shock.

He smiled for Yukikaze, though, and patted his shoulder. “Don’t worry about it. I’ll go see what’s up. You just make sure his paperwork stays caught up.” He strolled down to their quarters, tucked away in a spare corner of officer territory so they could all stay close, even though it meant a smaller room than Ayanami was entitled to by now. Sure enough, Aya-san’s door was closed and locked.

Hyuuga shrugged and pulled out his wakizashi to bang on the metal door with the metal guard. “Aya-tan!” he caroled loudly. “Open up for your evening serenade! This is your five minute warning!” He checked his watch and leaned against the wall, whistling piercingly and tunelessly just to make sure Ayanami knew he hadn’t gone away.

At four minutes and thirty-five seconds, the lock clicked.

Hyuuga frowned a little when the door wasn’t opened, but it slid open at his touch. All the lights were off, when he stepped in, and his eyes narrowed. He slipped aside, back to the wall, and let the door hiss shut again. “Aya-san?”

One of the shadows beside the polarized window stirred.

“What is it?” Hyuuga asked quietly. It wasn’t like their driven commander to brood, much less lock out his own unit. Had they gotten a suicide mission or something?

Ayanami’s voice was low and velvety in the dimness. “How many demands on your loyalty will you accept, Hyuuga?”

Hyuuga cocked his head, watching details emerge as his eyes adjusted. Aya-san had his back turned, as if looking out the darkened window. “As many as you make, you know that.”

“And if I demanded your eyes and your hands?” Ayanami asked, so distant and casual it made Hyuuga’s neck prickle. That was how Aya-san sounded when he talked to Generals: disengaged. He shouldn’t sound like that with his own people. “If I demanded your body to move to my command?”

Hyuuga crossed his arms, leaning his shoulders back against the chill of the wall. “You have those already,” he pointed out. “I’m your sword. You can wield me as you wish.”

Finally, Ayanami turned to face him, eyes gleaming in the half-light. “And if I demanded your life? Your soul in my hand?”

Hyuuga blinked. Was that what this was about? “Aya-tan,” he sighed, running a hand thought his hair. “We’re all Warsfeil here, you don’t have to dance around the question. If you want a soul contract to act through me, all you have to do is say.” Never mind that such a thing was legend. This was Aya-san; if he thought he could do it, Hyuuga would believe he could.

Ayanami stepped away from the window. “Are you saying you agree?”

Hyuuga snorted and shoved off the wall. He crossed the room to Ayanami in a few firm steps and dropped down to his knees, catching Ayanami’s hand and pressing it to his chest. “Don’t insult me,” he said low and fierce, looking up. “You’ve had my soul in your palm from the day we first fought. If you choose to close your hand now, that’s your right. Take whatever you want from me.”

Ayanami stood very still for two long breaths before his other hand finally lifted and threaded through Hyuuga’s hair, fingers gentle. “Yes,” he murmured.

That was all the warning Hyuuga got before ice was driving into his chest, into something that wasn’t his body. Burning cold fingers kneaded the very core of him, unbearably intimate, and he was distantly aware of his body, pulled into a bone-cracking arch of tension, of his voice, hoarse and wordless. It was more intense than any pain or pleasure he’d ever felt and in the roaring silence of his mind he prayed for it to continue and begged for it to stop. One of Ayanami’s hands cradled his head carefully while the other touched him, traced him, pulled his soul in half, stretching his life and breath agonizingly thin as part was taken away from him into darkness.

Slowly, he noticed he was shaking. That his throat was raw. That the darkness around him was the dimness of Ayanami’s rooms. That he was being held against Ayanami’s shoulder as every muscle shuddered helplessly. His soul, the part of him that commanded Wars and shaped zaiphon, ached and burned, but he could still feel, just a little, the coolness of Ayanami’s fingers stroking it.

The key of his life belonged to Ayanami, now.

Which made today no different than yesterday, really.

“Told you so,” he finally managed, husky, and Ayanami’s shoulder trembled against his chest with a silent chuckle.

“Indeed.” Aya-san’s voice was warm again.

A bare few weeks later, it was Masaru’s turn to spend several days pale and wobbly, and that was when Hyuuga started to wonder, and to remember just who it was that legend said could do such things to living human souls. Let alone two or three at once. It wasn’t until years later that he remembered that the week Ayanami had taken Hyuuga’s soul to him had been the same week that the Emperor’s chief researcher had received a medal for unspecified services to the Empire, and the week that young Princess Ouka had been confirmed as heir.

The princess who would eventually wield the Eye of Raphael in war—or, at least, who would be used to do so. The researcher who tampered with the Eye and its master so that another could command it. The Eye that was said to seal the power of Verloren.

Knowing made no difference to him, of course.


Hyuuga didn’t think the soul division had any side-effects, under most circumstances. But the day Ayanami came to them and said, “War is declared,” he knew the driving fire of dedication that licked at his heart wasn’t his own. That was the taste of Aya-san.

He could see it catching in all of them.

Masaru bowed, hand on his sword hilt. “What are our duties, Ayanami-sama?” he asked, eagerness burning through his usual smiling courtesy.

“We are tasked with capturing or killing the Raggs royal family.” Ayanami’s face was still and intent. “Nothing must be permitted to interfere or hinder us. Nothing.”

Even Yukikaze, normally the gentlest of them, was hard-eyed. “Nothing will. We swear it, Ayanami-sama.”

Hyuuga bent his head, smiling. “Don’t worry, Aya-tan.” He met their commander’s eyes over the edge of his glasses. “It’ll be our pleasure.”

Ayanami’s fire flared in his blood, and Hyuuga’s breath caught softly. “Entirely our pleasure,” he purred.


The war was over. It had taken a hard toll on the Black Hawks. Masaru was officially dead and had returned to them only in the guise of an enemy: Katsuragi.

Yukikaze was dead for real.

“You didn’t release his soul, did you?” Hyuuga asked quietly, leaning in the door of Ayanami’s office, watching his oldest friend standing at a darkened window again. “Yuki-chan’s.”

Ayanami didn’t even shrug, and his voice was remote. “I was not holding it closely at the moment he died.”

“You always held his soul pretty damn closely,” Hyuuga said bluntly.

Ayanami didn’t stir. “You will not speak of this, Hyuuga.”

Hyuuga rolled his eyes. Aya-san could be so damn stubborn sometimes. “Look—”

This time, Ayanami answered him with steel. Hyuuga froze, keeping his hands still at his sides as Ayanami’s sword pressed delicately against his neck.

“You will not speak of this.” There was a ragged edge under the coldness of Ayanami’s voice, now, and Hyuuga closed his eyes.

“All right,” he said softly, and waited for the pressure to come off his throat before he lowered his chin and sighed. “Remember you still have us, though,” and his mouth quirked as he finished, “Aya-tan.” As Ayanami’s eyes narrowed, he fished in his pocket and pulled out a candy to ceremoniously unwrap and pop into his mouth, lounging back casually in the doorway. He raised his brows at Aya-san. “Hmm?”

Ayanami gave him a tight-lipped look for the obvious reminders of their lost member, but in the end he only turned abruptly to his desk and picked up a pen. Hyuuga smiled around his candy.

He would, he assured Yuki-chan’s memory, take care of Aya-san.


The headquarter Generals were getting to be an increasing pain in the ass. It didn’t matter to them that the Black Hawks had the best success record of any unit in the entire Armed Forces. It didn’t matter to them that Aya-san could actually deal with the Military Minister and even the Emperor and make sense of their orders. All they saw was how fast Ayanami had risen in the ranks, and that his appointment to Chief of Staff had been Miroku’s last action before retiring, and they howled about favoritism and upstarts.

It really got on Hyuuga’s nerves.

Today, that officious little insect Ogi had come into the actual field with them, along with a handful of his bootlicking staff, to “independently evaluate their performance” on the boring little rebellion the Black Hawks had been sent to put down. He’d been making sure to let them see him scribbling on his little clipboard and frowning judiciously.

Hyuuga didn’t like boring missions that wasted their time and didn’t have any good fights for him, so he was already in an edgy mood. When Ogi actually started berating Ayanami for getting his uniform bloody in battle he decided enough was enough.

“Ooo, Aya-tan,” he interrupted when Ogi paused for breath, eyes theatrically wide behind his glasses. “He’s right! Just look at all that blood on your sword hand!” Which was true, even after Ayanami had stripped off his soaked gloves. Hyuuga smiled, slow and wide, and murmured, “Well, we can’t have that can we?” He strolled up to Ayanami’s side and sank fluidly down to his knees, catching Ayanami’s hand in his. He slanted a sidelong glance at Ogi, lip curled wickedly as he licked a line of blood from the back of Aya-san’s hand.

Kuroyuri squeaked and Ogi choked, and Hyuuga smirked as he turned Ayanami’s hand and ran his tongue slowly up Ayanami’s blood-streaked palm. He took his time about it, enjoying the way Ogi’s eyes got wider and wider, and his little pack of jackals started edging backwards. A quick look up at Aya-san told Hyuuga that he was amused; he didn’t show it, of course, but he was standing there quite calmly, looking down at Hyuuga without surprise, just as if his subordinates licked the blood off his hands every day. Under the amusement was hint of heat.

Hyuuga definitely took his time after that. No sense doing a job half-way, after all. Besides, the sharpness of blood was already in his mouth from their brief battle, and he liked the taste of it on Ayanami’s skin. It was cutting and real, more satisfying than any opponent he’d found today. He half closed his eyes and wrapped his mouth around Aya-san’s fingers, savoring the way they flexed against his tongue.

By the time he was done, Ogi and his staffers had retreated in disorder. Hyuuga chuckled as he slowly sucked the last iron trace off Aya-san’s middle finger. “There, now,” he said brightly. “All better.”

“Indeed,” Ayanami murmured, fingertips brushing Hyuuga’s mouth before he drew back and turned away. Hyuuga laughed as he stood and caught sight of Kuroyuri and Konatsu, both red as beets and staring with eyes the size of saucers. It was Konatsu who finally managed a strangled, “Major…!”

“Don’t worry,” Hyuuga told him, ruffling his hair. “You’ll understand when you’re older.” He grinned as his new Begleiter sputtered in outrage, and tucked his hands in his pockets, strolling back toward their ship in Ayanami’s wake.

Aya-san’s touch lingered on his lips.


Hyuuga considered it his special job within the unit to make sure that Ayanami didn’t go too crazy. Usually this was simple—just a matter of hanging over Aya-san’s shoulder on days when they were especially straight or his mouth got a little too tight, teasing until Ayanami snapped and went for his whip. It was fun, like sparring only different. A game they played.

Sometimes they played it harder than others, of course.

“You know, Aya-tan,” Hyuuga remarked, draped over the back of Ayanami’s chair, “you should take a break from the paperwork now and then. Live a little! Go out for dinner instead of eating in the cafeteria!”

Ayanami’s fingers were getting tighter on his pen.

“You could go to one of the restaurants where the officers hang out, and the girls come to sigh over the heroes,” Hyuuga continued, watching for the moment Aya-san would drop the pen. “You could even get laid!”

He expected that crack to be the one that sent him rolling aside from Ayanami’s whip, but what he felt instead was a cold twinge in his chest and stomach. It made him still for a moment, eyes widening behind his glasses. That was Aya-san’s hand on his soul, tightening his grip for just a moment.

That was his warning, on nights they played a harder game. If Hyuuga kept pressing, what he faced wouldn’t be a weapon he could avoid or blow he could roll with.

Hyuuga smiled, slow and dark.

He pushed himself off the back of Ayanami’s chair and strolled around the desk, keeping his face turned away so Ayanami would see only his back. His uniform. “Come on, Ayanami,” he taunted, dropping all the familiar forms he usually called his commander by, calling him what his enemies did, “you can’t really be an automaton, the way they say you are. It’d do you good!”

Over his shoulder he watched Ayanami rising slowly to his feet and stepping out from behind the desk also. Good.

“Or maybe that’s not it,” Hyuuga murmured, thinking about the vicious gossip he’d heard most often lately. “Maybe you just don’t want to be around the other officers and hear people saying it again. That you slept your way to the top.”

The first lash of Ayanami’s rage sliced into his soul, burning like frozen metal, and he staggered under it, gasping. Ayanami’s face was set and still, but his eyes were bright. Gleaming. Furious.

Beautiful.

“With Miroku-sama, isn’t that how it goes?” Hyuuga managed, lowering his head to keep Aya-san focused on his uniform and words, not his face, not who he really was. “Or the Emperor. Maybe both.”

Ayanami’s grip licked out between the halves of Hyuuga’s soul, wrapping around him like a fist and squeezing until Hyuuga’s sense of himself broke and ran between those steel fingers. His legs gave out under the force of it and he stumbled down to hands and knees, chest heaving. The fingers of Ayanami’s control thrust into the very core of him, ruthless and precise. The chill and fire of Ayanami’s presence inside him, wild and furious, set his body twisting, trying to get away and trying to press into the punishing intrusion.

The raw strength of it made him hard.

“That’s why they all think you’ll be their dog, now,” he gasped, and moaned out loud as Ayanami’s will raked his soul harder. His arms gave out and dropped him down, prostrate on the rug at Ayanami’s feet. There was no part of him that wasn’t in Ayanami’s grip, now. He was pinned down under the sword of Ayanami’s power driven into him to the hilt, flayed open by its edge. It was absolute intimacy, unnatural, almost unbearable except that it was Aya-san’s hand on him. Hyuuga was a Warsfeil, born to be a sword drawn by this hand, and his hips jerked helplessly against the floor in response to that taste of blood and steel in his soul.

His voice was gone now and he was lost in immaterial sensation, the reason for it nearly forgotten, but he recognized when Ayanami’s touch started to turn less harsh, started to caress as well as cut. “Aya-san,” he whispered, in answer. The touch on his soul softened still more, shaping him gently back to himself, stroking the taut, trembling fibers of his being until they eased. His body gradually turned limp and boneless against the floor as his soul quieted under Ayanami’s hand. He heard quiet steps approaching, heard the rustle of fabric, felt light fingers brushing his hair back, and drew a slow breath as his mind started working again. He cleared his throat softly.

“Forgive me.” He always asked for Ayanami’s forgiveness, these nights, because he hated the thought that Aya-san might take the things he said to heart even for a moment.

“There’s nothing to forgive,” Ayanami murmured, fingers still carding through his sweat-damp hair. “Not for you.”

Hyuuga smiled wryly into the carpet. This was the other thing that was always said.

Sure enough, Ayanami added, quietly, “This is a dangerous game, Hyuuga.”

“Aya-tan.” Hyuuga pushed himself onto his side with a shaky arm so he could look up at his friend, amused and exasperated. “You know I love doing it.” There was a wet spot on the front of his pants to bear witness to that.

He figured Aya-san had noticed when he raised a brow at Hyuuga.

Hyuuga laughed. “What?” he lowered his voice to a husky purr. “My soul likes to feel its master’s hand now and then.” He looked up at Ayanami, half teasing and entirely serious, and smiled as Ayanami’s shoulders relaxed all the way.

Aya-san always offered him an end to their games, offered the kind of cherished safety he held the other Black Hawks in. None of the others would ever be wrung like this by their commander’s will. Neither would Hyuuga, unless he chose it. He knew that.

He chose it every time.

He chose the ice and steel, and the burning lash of Ayanami’s fury. He was the sword, and those were the things that made the world come alive in his mouth and heart. He also loved the soft caress of Aya-san’s fingers against his soul, of course, but that wasn’t what made the world brighter.

He caught Ayanami’s hand and kissed his fingers. “I will serve you in every way, in every time, with my heart and soul. I will defend you with my life.”

Ayanami’s touch on his soul warmed, though he was silent for a long moment. At last he murmured, “If it comes to that.”

Hyuuga smiled up at him, content with that permission.

He knew it would come to that, eventually.

End

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Sixteen

Kakashi sat by Naruto’s bed, reading and watching the clock, and wondering who was going to appear next. He calculated that his order for Sasuke and Sakura to get some more rest would hold for another two hours or so, Hinata was on duty keeping watch on the sea, Chouji was watching over Shikamaru, and Ino had been in three people ago. According to the averages he’d calculated over the past thirty-eight hours, the next person to stop and check on Naruto should be another from Leaf, but who was most likely?

It was a usefully distracting thing to think about while Naruto lay unconscious, and Kakashi had further calculated that he was getting almost three times the information, sitting here talking to visitors, that he otherwise would have heard as commander of the Leaf contingent.

Right on time, plus or minus five minutes, there was a tap at the door and it was Iruka who looked in. Kakashi nodded, satisfied; he’d guessed either Iruka or Sai, and the latter probability wasn’t for reasons he would like. Sai had been watching Naruto the entire time they’d been here, and Kakashi had his suspicions about exactly whose orders the boy was under.

“How is he?” Iruka asked softly.

Kakashi smiled behind his mask; definitely better a visit from Iruka. “Still asleep. Still recovering. Maeda has invented, at last count, five new names to call Naruto while attending him, and that seems like a good sign.” At Iruka’s blink he elaborated, “Maeda only yells at his patients once they’re out of danger, I’ve noticed."

Iruka came to sit carefully on the edge of Naruto’s bed, as if he didn’t want to wrinkle the rough, blue blanket, and brushed some unruly blond hair back with a gentle hand.

“How is Shikamaru?” Kakashi asked, offering a little distraction in turn.

Iruka flushed. “Ah. That’s what I was coming to report, actually. He’s conscious, and the other medic from Mist says he’ll be fine once he recovers his strength.” Iruka’s eyes darkened. “He drained himself completely, holding that Shadow Binding so long. But,” Iruka brightened a little, “I think it helped in the long run. Being so instrumental in defending Naruto from Akatsuki, I mean. He seems a little more at peace, now.”

“Good,” Kakashi said, and meant it. He hadn’t been thrilled with the idea of having another revenge-mad shinobi under his command right after Sasuke had finally settled down. “And how are the prisoners?”

Iruka frowned down at the bed. “Nagato is still out, even deeper than Naruto. Maeda-san judges that he’s in a coma and can’t say whether he’ll actually come out of it. There’s been some discussion of asking Motoki-san, the interrogation specialist Valley brought, to attempt entering his mind.”

“Hm.” Kakashi crossed an ankle over his knee, leaning back in his rickety camp chair to think about the things Valley’s Yuzuki had said when she’d visited yesterday. “From what I hear, Konan might be a surer target. As long as we agree to keep Nagato alive, I expect she’d be willing to tell us whatever we want.” He tapped a finger on his knee and ordered, “Mention that to Darui-san, when you go back out.” After a moment of hesitation he added, “It is still Darui-san, isn’t it?”

Iruka bowed his head. “Jiraiya-sama still says that he isn’t objective enough to make decisions about Nagato and Konan, yes.” He sighed, one hand sneaking out to close on Naruto’s forearm. “It must be extremely difficult for him, to face one of his own students who’s run so very mad.”

Bad luck had certainly seemed to attend the students of the Hokage and candidates for generations, Kakashi reflected. Sarutobi and Orochimaru. Jiraiya and Nagato. Minato-sensei and Obito, and the Fourth hadn’t lived long enough to teach his own son at all. Kakashi could only hope he and Tsunade had broken the chain. “Maybe I should send Sasuke to see Jiraiya, next time he shows up down here,” he mused.

Iruka laughed at that. “Sasuke has been in to see him more than once. There’s usually yelling. I’m surprised you haven’t heard it all the way across the building, here.”

“I think they chose this for the hospital building because of the thick walls,” Kakashi murmured, amused. “Speaking of yelling,” he added, cocking his head. Yes, that sounded like Karin’s voice coming down the hall, all right.

“…don’t understand, what I do is a bloodline talent,” she was saying as she swept into the room followed by Darui. “I wind it up and let it go, it’s not like what a medic does! So what if Naruto’s system is too messed up to send the chakra where it needs to go? What if it goes to the Nine-tails instead?! That would just screw the guy up even more! It’s not a good risk until he’s awake again.”

Darui sighed. “Well, it was worth asking.” He nodded to Kakashi. “How’s the kid doing?”

Kakashi checked the clock; this was earlier than the next visitor was due, by his estimate. Darui must have a particular reason for coming. “He’s sleeping normally, if unwakeably. Has something come up?”

Darui leaned against the wall, arms folded, as Karin drifted over to fuss with Naruto’s blanket. “I hear that his seal changed, after he transformed. Is that normal for Konoha’s hosts?” Unspoken was the second half of the question or is it something to worry about?, and Kakashi set his book aside and folded his hands as he considered how best to answer.

“The Leaf’s hosts have not, previously, manifested the Nine-tails,” he said at last. “So this isn’t exactly normal, no. But I don’t think it’s cause for alarm. The Eight Trigrams seal is made up of two subsidiary seals. One of those was released, but the other remains.” He hesitated, but the fact was there was only one person on the Island who knew more, no matter how much that person wanted privacy right now. “I didn’t know his mother well, but Jiraiya-san did. He can tell you if I’m right or not. I suspect the seals are layered, one to contain the Nine-tails in the body of the host, and the second to hold it back from the host’s spirit. I believe Naruto released the second one.”

“Shredded it is more like,” Karin muttered, looking down at Naruto penetratingly. “Just look at this mess! It’s like he just went and ripped it apart with his bare will!”

Kakashi’s mouth quirked ruefully. “Yes. He probably did.”

Karin looked up to glower at him. “Well, teach him how to do it better!” She went back to fussing with the blanket, eyes softening. “He has lovely chakra, it deserves better.”

Kakashi stored that observation away to repeat to Naruto when he woke up, in case he needed to fluster his student into compliance with the medics. He opened a hand at Darui. “So I don’t think there’s any risk to the Nine-tails’ containment, though I imagine it and Naruto will benefit from some further instruction if B-san is willing.”

The hard line of Darui’s shoulders relaxed. “Good,” he murmured. “That’s good.” He closed his eyes for a moment, looking as if he wanted to just go to sleep right there against the wall. Clearly, it had been a hard day and a half for him, cleaning up after Akatsuki’s attack. Kakashi sympathized completely, and with a reasonable amount of terror as he stared down the length of a blade named “Rokudaime Hokage”, which was going to be even worse.

A rap on the door interrupted them, and B stuck his head through. “So, hey, how’s the kid?”

Kakashi checked the clock reflexively and smiled. Right on time.


For the first little while, Naruto thought he was dreaming. He was standing on bottomless water, and every movement stirred ripples across it. The sky was light; not blue, just light. There were huge rocks here and there, like some kind of rock garden only with water instead of gravel under it. And that was all.

At least he thought that was all. But eventually he realized that the Nine-tails was lying next to him apparently sleeping, chin resting on one paw, and had been for a long time; he had no idea how he could have not noticed.

One huge ear flicked at him. “Awake at last?” the fox rumbled.

“I… guess so?” Naruto looked around. “Is this real?”

The fox snorted, rippling the water in front of his nose. “It’s your spirit, idiot kit, you tell me.”

“Huh.” Naruto sat down crosslegged beside the fox’s head. “So how come we’re both in here?”

“Because your spirit hasn’t repaired itself sufficiently for your consciousness to touch the world again.”

Naruto puzzled at that. “So… I’m injured, huh? From the seal?”

“Indeed.” One red eye opened and looked at him sternly. “What kind of fool tries to tear apart a seal instead of releasing it?”

“Well, I don’t know how to release it,” Naruto explained reasonably. “I’m not much good with seals, really, and besides no one ever taught me Eight Trigrams.”

The fox actually clapped a paw over his face.

Naruto rubbed a hand over the back of his head, sheepish. “I’ll, um, learn it, okay?” He supposed he really should if he meant to release the fox before his death, which he kind of did at this point. “Oh, hey, that reminds me.” He leaned back on his hands looking up at the fox. “You said your yin chakra was sealed, right? What seal is that? I’ll look that one up too.” Maybe the fox would be less cranky once his chakra was properly balanced again and not chained up or whatever.

The fox lifted his head to look down at him, unreadable. “The Ten Stems Twelve Branches Seal,” he said after a long moment. “It creates a separate world to contain whatever is sealed, and that world is forever severed from this one.”

Naruto stopped still, eyes wide. “My dad… did that?” he asked in a small voice.

The fox turned his head away to look out over the water and stone. “Minato of the Leaf apologized,” he said at last, the rumble of his voice distant. “He said he knew I was being controlled. But that seal was one of the few that would last beyond his death, and the only one of those that would not cause me great pain.”

Naruto slumped a little. “I guess I can understand that, considering Madara was still trying to get you,” he said slowly. Abruptly he sat back up. “Hey, wait a minute. If it’s completely separated, and that was your spiritual strength, that means…” He stared up at the fox, face cold as his blood drained out of it and the magnitude of that kind of amputation on a spirit creature hit him. “Nine-tails!”

A shudder ran through the length of the fox and he threw up his muzzle. “Why the hell do you think I’ve been so damn infuriated all this time?!” he howled, fit to break the sky with the sound.

Naruto winced, but he also reached out again, gripping the fox’s foreleg with both hands. “I said I’d heal you and I will,” he yelled, and sighed as the echoes of the fox’s howl died away across the water. “Tsunade-baachan will know how to do it. She could even heal someone from something like the Dead Demon Consuming seal. I’ll get her help.”

The fox’s ears and brows both went up. “You think she’ll actually consent?”

Naruto scowled, folding his arms stubbornly. “It’s not right! It’s not right to keep your chakra unbalanced like that! I don’t care how important it was to stop you then, it isn’t right!” He set his jaw. “I’ll convince her.”

After a moment, the fox snorted and settled back down beside him. “Somehow I’m not surprised.”

Naruto grinned a little and leaned against his shoulder, ignoring the growl he got for that. “Good. You’re learning.”


Sasuke sat perched in the broad stone window of Jiraiya’s room in the makeshift hospital, watching his teacher brood. It wasn’t really obvious, he supposed, not like the way he brooded himself, or the way Kakashi-sensei sometimes did. But Jiraiya’s eyes were distant and despite his smooth expression there were tiny, tight lines at the corners of his mouth. Yelling hadn’t worked so far, to stop those lines. It was time to try something more serious, and hope he got it right. He wished Naruto were awake to help; he always seemed to get it right without thinking.

Sasuke sighed and pulled up a knee and wrapped his arms around it, looking out the window at the sun falling over smashed trees and walls. “So he’s more important than we are?” he asked quietly. From the corner of his eye he saw Jiraiya start.

“Of course not,” the old man said gruffly. “Nagato is just… a little more obtrusive at the moment. He’s the one who just tried to kill the lot of us, after all.”

“Ah.” Sasuke let that lie for a moment before he added, “So failure is more significant than success. After all,” he went on before Jiraiya could protest. “Naruto just saved the lot of us.” And Jiraiya was one of Naruto’s teachers, too.

Jiraiya closed his mouth and slumped back against the pillows folded up behind him. “I think I taught you a little too well,” he grumbled.

A corner of Sasuke’s mouth tugged up; he had to admit there was some definite satisfaction in turning his teacher’s annoyingly thought-provoking techniques back around on him. “Yes, you did. So obviously you can’t be a failure as a teacher.”

Jiraiya hunched down a bit, a lot the way Naruto did when he was getting stubborn, and Sasuke snorted. He was quiet for a while, watching the Island’s gray and brown birds flitting through the rearranged forest around the encampment. At last he said, quietly, “When we caught up with Itachi… to make it right, to make it the justice of my clan as well as my village, I had to outlaw him. I had take responsibility for Uchiha to do that, and for a while I thought that meant I was responsible for him too. But I wasn’t. I’m not. It was his choices and actions that outlawed him and no matter…” Sasuke stopped and had to swallow before he could go on, husky, sunlight blurring in his eyes, “no matter how much I loved him, that was him. Not me. And not Uchiha.” He blinked his eyes clear again, still looking outward while he listened to the silence inside the room. Finally he added, softly, “It was something you said that made me realize that.”

When he finally looked around, Jiraiya had his head bowed over crossed arms. “Are you saying that there’s responsibility I need to take here?” the old man asked.

Sasuke thought about that, about what it meant to teach. To lead. “Yes,” he said at last. “Just not the kind you’ve been thinking of.”

“Ruthless, aren’t you?” Jiraiya murmured. A laugh caught Sasuke, at that.

“Yeah. That’s one of the things Uchiha is.” He swung his legs off the window and came to stand beside Jiraiya’s bed, looking down with a tiny smile. “I decided that it would be.”

Just as Jiraiya had told him to decide.

The answering smile, when Jiraiya looked up, had a wry tilt to it, but the tight lines at the corners of his mouth were easing. Jiraiya unfolded his arms and flexed his shoulders. “All right, you’ve said your piece. Don’t you have some duty or other to get to?”

Sasuke let himself thump back against the wall with a sigh, reminded. “Not really, not until—”

The door crashed open, hard enough to chip the stone of the wall, and Sakura stood panting in the opening, eyes wide and hair wild. “Sasuke! Naruto’s awake!”

Fear that Sasuke had been pushing relentlessly down for two days snapped loose and shot Sasuke forward at a dead run, sprinting down the halls and pushing off walls as he took the corners. Sakura was right on his heels as they piled into Naruto’s room, and a corner of Sasuke’s mind was pleased to note that Jiraiya was right behind her. But most of him was lit up with the pure relief of seeing his friend, his family, sitting up in bed with blue eyes open and tracking what was around him. There was a yelp from somewhere as Sasuke skidded to a stop by the bed and seized Naruto’s shoulders. “Are you okay?” he demanded.

Naruto blinked at him. “Um…”

“That,” Maeda-san grated from where he was wedged up against the wall by the force of Sasuke and Sakura’s entrance, “is what we were determining. If you don’t mind.”

“I’m okay,” Naruto assured them as Sasuke reluctantly let go of him and edged back. “Honest. Taking off half the seal was just a lot of work on top of everything else.” He looked past them and broke into a sunny smile. “Ero-sennin can wiggle his toes and everything, though, right?”

“I’m completely fine,” Jiraiya assured him, smiling back with his own relief clear in his eyes. “Thanks to you, I understand.”

As I told you already,” Maeda pointed out. “Now if everyone doesn’t shut up and keep out of my way, I’m going to throw all of you out of the room until this examination is done.”

Sasuke and Sakura reluctantly backed off under his medical glower to stand against the wall next to Kakashi-sensei, who was watching the whole performance with amusement clear in the crinkle of his eye. As Maeda prodded at Naruto and made him stand on one foot and grip things, though, Sasuke and Sakura exchanged a questioning look, starting to be worried again. Naruto wasn’t acting like himself. He was cooperating quietly and hadn’t demanded food once, so far.

“All right,” Maeda said at last, “your chakra seems to have replenished itself and you have less weakness than I’d have expected after fifty hours asleep.” He stood back with his hands on his hips, surveying his patient. “I guess all the legends about the Uzumaki clan were true.”

Naruto winced just a little at that, and Sasuke frowned. He knew that wince—knew it from the inside. Naruto was worried about his family or clan for some reason.

Naruto nodded along quietly as Maeda listed the things he wasn’t supposed to do (exert himself) or was supposed to do (eat and exercise lightly) for the next week, and, as soon as Maeda finished, Naruto looked over at Jiraiya.

“Hey. You… you knew my parents, right? Pretty well?”

“Very well, I’d say,” Jiraiya answered, brows raised. “Is there something you need to know?”

Naruto chewed on his lip and Sasuke abandoned the wall to come lay a hand on his shoulder even as Sakura tugged Naruto back down to the edge of the bed and sat beside him with an arm around him. Naruto’s shoulders were tight under his hand.

“It’s… I mean, I know you weren’t there, and no one really saw much of the fight, but…” Naruto wound his fingers together and clasped them between his knees, looking down at them. “Nine-tails says my dad cut away his yin chakra. Sealed it with Ten Stems Twelve Branches. And I just… why? Why would he do something that extreme, that permanent?”

Maeda’s breath hissed in past his teeth, and Kakashi-sensei’s smile-crinkles vanished into a level, waiting look. Sasuke slid onto the bed behind Naruto, pressing close along with Sakura to support their partner.

Jiraiya let out a slow breath, leaning forward to rest his elbows on his knees. “Naruto. Tsunade has taught you compassion and the strength to heal, and those are good things. But she’s also taught you to kill hasn’t she?”

Naruto nodded, watching Jiraiya with dark eyes. “When there’s no other way.”

“When there’s no other way, yes,” Jiraiya repeated, gently. “The Nine-tails had just attacked the village for a second time, and killed all too many of our mature shinobi. If he was being controlled, it was, in a way, all the worse. That meant it might well happen again, because we hadn’t caught his controller yet. And once Madara had escaped… what else could Minato do, to protect his village, but ensure that the Nine-tails would be weakened? And I know he would have wanted to protect you as much as possible, to ensure the Nine-tails couldn’t overwhelm you while you were a baby.”

“If he worried that much, why did he seal it in me at all?” Naruto muttered. “Why not someone who could agree to it?”

Jiraiya sighed and rocked forward in his chair to lay a hand on Naruto’s knee. “I believe there were two reasons for that. One was that your bloodline was the only one in the village with a proven ability to hold the Nine-tails without damage to yourself. And the other…” Jiraiya smiled a little. “He believed in you. I know that for certain.”

Naruto swallowed hard and Sakura tightened her arm around him. “When there’s no other way,” he said, husky. “That… that’s why my dad apologized to Nine Tails, I guess.”

“You know,” Sakura said, hesitantly, “he might have thought it wouldn’t be permanent. Chakra does regenerate, a lot more often than the body alone. And Ten Branches Twelve Stems wouldn’t have the complications some of the other permanent seals do. That would just… cut it away. Maybe he thought the fox could grow it back in time.”

“It’s not impossible,” Maeda agreed, watching Naruto with a medical sort of frown. “It would take hundreds of years, most likely, for an amputation on that scale and for something as powerful as a tailed beast. But it’s not impossible.”

Naruto straightened up, and Sasuke breathed a silent sigh of relief, feeling his tension turn into more familiar determination. “Right, then. I hope he did think that; but, whatever he thought, I’ll make it happen. And a lot faster than a few hundred years, too!”

“Not right away!” Maeda snapped, looking seriously alarmed. “Not this week, not next week, not this month! You will not engage in major healings for at least six weeks, is that clear?”

Naruto looked over his shoulder at the man, pouting. “I wasn’t gonna do it right away.”

“Yes,” Maeda said, eyes narrowing. “You were.”

Naruto hunkered down guiltily and Sakura broke into helpless giggles against his shoulder. “He’s gotten to know you,” she said, grinning.

“We’ll make sure he doesn’t overtax himself,” Sasuke assured the medic. And, when Naruto stirred under his hands in protest, added blandly, “I’m sure the Hokage will want to be involved.”

Naruto winced, probably in anticipation of what his teacher would say about everything he’d been doing lately, which had been more or less the idea. Sasuke nodded to himself, satisfied, and glanced over at his own teacher.

Jiraiya was sitting up straight again, like he knew what his spine was there for, and his smile was finally more than just a stretch of his mouth. Sasuke settled against Naruto’s back, finally relaxing. All his people were better, now.

“So, hey,” Naruto said, straightening up again. “Is B-san okay? What happened with him? What happened while I was sleeping?” His stomach growled, and he added without pausing for breath, “I want food, you can tell me what happened over food, right?”

Jiraiya laughed. “He’s recovered,” he told Maeda, and stood up. “Sakura and Sasuke can fill you in over lunch.” His eyes met Sasuke’s for a moment. “I have some other things to see to, right now.”

Sasuke smiled a little. “Come on,” he told Naruto, and added as they turned down the hall, “B is fine. Not that the Akatsuki woman was easy to deal with, from what everyone said, but it sounds like Temari and Kurotsuchi of the Rock make a very good team against a paper user…”


Kakashi watched Jiraiya watching their three young shinobi leave, shadowed by Maeda, most likely to make sure Naruto ate as well as talked. The old man looked more awake and alive than he had for days; good.

“So,” Jiraiya murmured, folding his arms. “When is Tsunade getting here?”

Kakashi straightened in his chair, startled. “Ah…”

Jiraiya turned to look at him, one corner of his mouth quirked up. His eyes were sharp again. “Her student does something most think is impossible and then knocks himself unconscious transforming completely? Don’t try to tell me you didn’t send a bird to her immediately. When’s she due?”

Kakashi relaxed back into his chair with a sigh of heartfelt relief at the return of that sharpness. “Day after tomorrow, I expect, as close as the Turtle is to the Fire coast.” And he’d been going to set her on Jiraiya if Sasuke hadn’t been able to get through before then. He smiled behind his mask. “Something you wanted to do before then?”

“Not particularly, but it’s something I need to do anyway.” One of Jiraiya’s hands drifted back to touch his main scroll. “I need to talk to Nagato.”

“He’s still unconscious,” Kakashi observed neutrally. Would Jiraiya really…?

“There are ways to deal with that.”

Kakashi searched Jiraiya’s face, finding lines of determination and a little grimness, but not the shock and despair that had made the man’s eyes so empty and distant lately. “Is this something the whole command group should hear?” he asked quietly.

Jiraiya sighed. “Yes, I expect it is.”

Kakashi bowed his head to their commander, vanishing his book. “I’ll get them.”

By the time he rounded everyone up and came along with Darui and Samui to the low building that had been turned into the mission’s prison, Jiraiya was already finishing his argument with the younger of Mist’s two medics.

“…clearly understood that I think this is unwise,” the young man was saying, frowning as he stood in the doorway to Nagato’s room.

“It is. It’s also necessary,” Jiraiya told him flatly, and the boy finally sighed and stood aside.

“Jiraiya-san is recovered?” Darui murmured to Kakashi, very quietly. Kakashi nodded just a bit, and smiled to himself as the tight line of Darui’s shoulders eased. Jiraiya had led them well so far, on this mission, and just about everyone had gotten to at least respect him. Half the inquiries he’d fielded about Naruto’s recovery had somehow managed to include a segue to Jiraiya.

And now, he suspected, they were about to get another reason for that respect.

The woman, Konan, looked up from her chair at Nagato’s bedside as they all filed into the long room where she and Nagato were being held. She looked different without her Akatsuki robe, less like a cipher and more familiar to them all—a mature kunoichi in snug halter and pants that showed hard muscles and the straightness of her spine. Her mouth flinched when she saw Jiraiya and she looked back down at the Wood cuffs that Yasumori Takuma was currently holding on her wrists. “Jiraiya-san,” she said, level and quiet.

“Konan,” he greeted her steadily and looked down at the figure on the bed, face still hollow with the chakra he’d consumed and expended. “Nagato is still unconscious?” At her nod he sighed. “I’m going to have to wake him.”

Her head jerked up at that, cloud-gray eyes wide. “I can tell you whatever you need to know!” she protested. “Don’t…!” She bit it off as he touched her hair gently, where she had worn her paper flower.

“No, Konan,” Jiraiya told her gently. “I’m afraid you can’t tell me this.”

“It was Yahiko’s death,” she whispered, staring up at him. “And if Nagato’s plan could keep that kind of thing from happening—over and over again!—how could I not help?”

“Even when your own hands made it happen, over and over again, ever since you joined Akatsuki?”

“And how are you different?” she ripped back at him.

Jiraiya crouched down in front of her, wrapping his hands around hers. “I’m different because I keep trying,” he said softly. “Instead of giving in to despair because there’s no simple answer.” He gave her a wry, tilted smile. “Not one that doesn’t involve destroying everything, at least. Destruction is simple, I’ll give you that. But it won’t actually fix anything. I don’t know whether I can fix this either,” he went on, nodding to Nagato’s still body, “but I’ll try. That’s the only thing that truly lets us move forward. Remember that, all right?”

She bit her lip hard, staring at him with fierce, wounded eyes, and finally, slowly nodded. Kakashi watched the gathered shinobi, the smile on Kitsuchi’s face and the impatience on Kurotsuchi’s, the relief in Darui’s eyes and the respect in Haruto of the Grass’, Tomita of the Sound’s quiet waiting and the way Kankurou drew nearer his sister and rested a hand on her back though neither of their expressions changed in the slightest. The part of him that had still been on guard, waiting to see whether Jiraiya’s incapacitation these past days would break his ability to command the mission, finally eased.

Jiraiya straightened and turned to the Yasumori siblings. “Will you be able to hold your bindings on him, if I can wake him?”

“Both of us together should, since they’re already in place,” Yuzuki answered, folding her hands into the Snake to match her sibling. “Go ahead.”

Kakashi perked up when Jiraiya summoned two small and old-looking toads. He’d heard that Jiraiya had a technique he used with his summons, but he’d never seen it or spoken himself with anyone who had.

He thought, with some hidden amusement, he might understand why when Jiraiya changed, eyes turning slotted, chin hairy, nose large and warty, because at the first muffled “Eugh…” from Samui Jiraiya’s shoulders slumped. He actually looked mournful, alarming face and all, until the female toad jabbed him in the ear with one purple elbow.

“Get your mind back on the job,” she ordered briskly, and Jiraiya sighed and straightened.

He looked far more imposing when he stepped forward and held his hands out over Nagato, and those strange eyes turned distant. Karin gasped, one hand pressed tight over her mouth when Kakashi glanced over at her.

“What?” Souta of the Grass murmured.

“He’s… that’s… that’s nature energy,” Karin whispered, staring. “Unformed! Unchanged! How is it not… oh.” She pushed her glasses up her nose with a slow breath. “The toads are channeling it for him, so it doesn’t burn him out. Still. To handle that much of it—” she broke off with a choked sound as Jiraiya lowered his hands to Nagato’s chest.

“Nagato,” Jiraiya called, and Kakashi flipped his forehead protector up abruptly to watch with his Sharingan because he swore the name had made the room ripple, even to normal sight. With the Sharingan, he could see the riptide of chakra Jiraiya was handling more clearly and understood why Karin was leaning back against the stone wall, trembling.

He could also see that Konan was tense and poised on the edge of attacking, cuffs or no cuffs, and when he spoke it was as much to her as to the rest of the command group. “He’s reminding Nagato’s body and mind of how it fits into the world. Like digging a hole deeper so water flows down into it.” And if he lost control of that chakra-form he was holding to make the space of Nagato’s body-and-soul resonate, Nagato would burn out like tinder in an instant. But he didn’t think this was the moment to mention that part.

Seconds ticked by, stretching the atmosphere of the room tighter and tighter, and when Nagato finally stirred and Jiraiya lifted his hands, a shiver ran through the entire group. Konan pushed forward off her chair to kneel by Nagato’s bed, bound hands closing tight on his shoulder.

“Nagato,” Jiraiya called again, quietly this time. Slowly, Nagato’s eyes opened, blank and dark as he stared up at Jiraiya.

“Why am I alive?” he finally asked, voice rough and cracking.

“Because Naruto is more stubborn than you and the Nine-tails put together, I’d say,” Jiraiya answered dryly, which provoked a rustle of amusement from everyone who’d had to deal with Naruto during this mission. More soberly, he asked, “Did you intend to die?”

Nagato’s eyes shifted to look up at the ceiling. “That would be one form of peace.”

“Nagato,” Konan whispered, fierce denial ringing through even that single word. After a fumbling moment, Nagato lifted both his bound hands to rest on hers, on his shoulder.

“I would have stopped it,” he husked. "The pain."

“No,” Jiraiya said quietly, “you would only have changed the shape of it. Just as many would have died. Just as many would have grieved. Nothing would truly have changed.” He sighed and released his technique, melting back into his familiar form, and now Kakashi could see more clearly the sorrow etching age’s lines deeper into his face. “Nagato,” he said, softly, reaching out a hand to the thin young man on the bed, “if you can’t do any more than what you have, you don’t have to. It’s all right.”

Kakashi frowned behind his mask, trying to make sense of that, hearing a whisper of puzzlement from the command group behind him.

“What else is my life for, then?” Nagato asked. “Why else am I alive and not Yahiko? Why else do I have these eyes? You said it yourself.”

Jiraiya sat heavily on the side of the bed. “I never meant to lay that kind of fate on you. To find peace for the world isn’t the kind of burden any one person can carry alone. We all carry it together.”

Nagato laughed at that, breathy and bitter. “The only place everyone together is carrying the world is down into blood and death.”

Jiraiya looked down at him thoughtfully. “After so long with Akatsuki, I’m not surprised you think so,” he finally said, “but consider that you are still alive. That was Naruto’s doing, and Naruto himself is still alive and sane because of his team, his yearmates, his teachers, the friends he’s made in his village and in others.” Jiraiya’s mouth quirked. “He’ll tell you, if you ever ask him, that he’s going to become Hokage and change things. Everything. The village and the ninja and international politics and the nature of humanity. But he’s only added all those bigger things once he started making more friends and allies.” He reached out and rested one broad, roughened hand on Nagato’s chest, over his heart. “What friends and allies do you have, to help you carry this?”

Nagato was looking at Jiraiya again, instead of the ceiling, uncertain now, clinging to Konan’s hands. “After Yahiko died? Konan.”

“And me,” Jiraiya added gently, and Nagato’s chest heaved with the abrupt breath he sucked in. Kakashi thought those fixed, ringed eyes filmed with water for a moment. “But even then,” Jiraiya went on as though he hadn’t noticed, “that isn’t enough to carry such a large burden.” He smiled. “So it’s all right to put it down. It’s all right.”

Now Kakashi understood what Jiraiya had said earlier, and was impressed all over again by Jiraiya’s compassion and insight; truly, this was the teacher who had saved Sasuke from his own demons. All around the room, he saw shoulders fall and crossed arms loosen and eyes widen with similar understanding. Karin, he was a little amused to note, was positively blushing as she watched Jiraiya.

“It took Naruto to remind me, and Sasuke to make me listen,” Jiraiya said quietly, “but all we can do, any of us, is the best we can at the time. And then we have to keep trying to make the outcome better. That’s the trick. Whether it’s the results of our own actions or our parents’ or even our opponents’, we have to keep trying to make it come out better. That’s how we move forward, Nagato; not carried on the back of one person, but hand to hand down the years, all of us going on as best we can.” He leaned forward and rested his hand over Nagato’s and Konan’s. “All you have to be is your own pair of hands, alongside all those of your friends. That’s all.”

“Is it really all right, after all this? Can I really stop?” Nagato asked, suddenly sounding very young. He looked from Jiraiya to his partner. “Konan?”

Konan’s lashes were wet and Kakashi saw Yuzuki’s hands slide quietly into the Ram as Konan wrapped her suddenly freed arms around Nagato. “You can stop,” she whispered against his hair. “It will be all right. I’m sorry I didn’t see.”

Nagato laughed unsteadily, pressing his face against her shoulder. “I’m the one with the eyes, and I didn’t either,” he said, soft and muffled. Jiraiya rested his hand on Konan’s head, watching them with soft eyes and for a long moment there was no other sound in the room than the two partners finding each other again.

Finally, though, Darui stirred. “I hate to be the one who breaks this up, but… I really don’t think the Kage and Masters will be all right with two ex-Akatsuki members wandering around loose, even if they say they’re not interested in world conquest any more.”

“Ah.” Jiraiya looked just a little shifty. “Well, as to that. I thought, you know, there are theoretical techniques that can suppress chakra expression. And I expect Tsunade will be here to check on Naruto any day. If she could do that, they could return to Leaf with me…”

Konan sat up, wiping her eyes with the back of a hand. “We don’t belong to the Leaf, though,” she said softly, still looking down at Nagato, one hand stroking back his hair.

“No, you don’t.” Choujuurou stepped forward from the back of the group where he usually wound up, and people parted before the levelness of his gaze. “You belonged to the Rain once. Is that still so?”

Nagato frowned a little, and it was Konan who met Choujuurou’s eyes, just as steady as he was. “Hidden Rain is still my home.”

Choujuurou nodded as though he’d expected to hear that, and looked around at the command group. “Even when Kisame-senpai was one of Akatsuki, even when he was killed in their service, he was still of the Mist. His body and sword were welcomed home. Let them return to Hidden Rain.”

“Hanzou will just kill them,” Jiraiya objected, and then paused. “Well.” He scratched his nose thoughtfully. “Probably. It’s hard to tell with him, sometimes. He does respect fighting spirit.” He smiled crookedly, looking down at Konan’s lifted chin and straight back.

“You said change was the work of many hands.” Konan looked back at Nagato, hands tightening around his. “We were not alone, in Rain. You know we weren’t.”

“I don’t think I know what I’m doing any more, though.” Nagato’s eyes were fixed on her as if the two of them were alone.

She smiled and leaned down to kiss his forehead. “That’s all right. Rest and think until you do. I carry on Yahiko’s spirit too; I’ll do the planning for this one.”

Nagato’s smile was soft and trusting, and Kakashi felt a bit like an intruder just seeing it. “All right.”

Jiraiya nodded quietly and stood. “Will the villages trust me to see these two back to their own land, then?” he asked, looking around at the gathered representatives.

“Be good for Hanzou to have something at home to worry about,” Souta grunted, and, despite an admonishing look at his second in command, Haruto nodded agreement.

Yuzuki gestured to her brother, who flicked his hands through five seals, separating Nagato’s hands as well though the Wood cuffs remained. “Hidden Valley agrees.”

“However it comes out, it seems like a just solution,” Tomita said.

“Nagato seems little more danger than Hanzou already was,” Kitsuchi allowed dryly, hands on his hips.

“Our brother will find this acceptable, I believe,” Temari agreed quietly.

Darui was silent for a long moment, staring down at his crossed arms. “I doubt the Raikage will be very happy with it,” he said at last. “But as the other villages all seem to agree I’m going to go ahead and say do it.” A corner of his mouth quirked up. “A-sama will yell no matter what; when he calms down he’ll probably talk himself around to the idea.”

Jiraiya smiled and Kakashi could see the tension easing out of his arms and face. “Good. Once Tsunade gets here, then, I’ll take these two home.”

Kakashi winced at the thought of the Hokage being stressed over what her student had been doing to himself and not having her old teammate there to take out her temper on. “You just want to be out of range while she shouts and pounds on people,” he muttered.

“With age comes wisdom, Kakashi-kun,” Jiraiya told him sententiously, not denying a thing, Kakashi couldn’t help noticing.

Konan and Nagato broke into stifled laughter against each other’s shoulders, and Kakashi gave his half-formed argument up for lost, watching the gentle look Jiraiya bent on his long-ago students. His mere bodily integrity was no match for that kind of expression. He’d just have to stand Tsunade’s ire as best he could and hope something distracted her.

The command team was just starting to turn away, preparing to leave again, when the door to the room slammed open.

“Commander!” Omoi leaned in the doorway, panting and a little wild-eyed. “Jiraiya-san! One of the Leaf-nin just tried to kill Naruto!”

A/N: So, Minato supposedly used the Shiki Fuujin to seal Kyuubi’s yin chakra; and yet we still see his spirit running around merrily, apparently quite at liberty. Yet another continuity fail, which leaving bits of chakra behind does not explain terribly well. Also, what kind of bastard severs half of a (relatively) innocent creature’s soul and condemns it to torment as it’s soul rots? *shudders* No, that technique just doesn’t fit here. So I made up a new one that does fit the actual results we’re shown.

The Blue Lights, The Scent of Water

Translation into Deutsch available: Die Blauen Lichter, Der Geruch von Wasser by JanaTearce

A translation into Russian is available here, by Opossums

One

Frau leaned back on the hostel bed they’d secured for the night, every pillow in the room wadded behind his back, and lit a cigarette. They’d made it to Pirna by dark and the border and Neal were a day away. Capella was safe with his mother, no one was chasing them, and he’d gotten the shower first. Things were going about as well as could be expected.

He hadn’t failed in the people under his care, yet, anyway. None of the ones that really mattered, at least.

Some days, especially lately, he felt like there were too many of those. But compared to most of the Church’s bishops he had very few responsibilities. Host Zehel’s spirit in his own. Keep Verloren’s damn scythe contained. Protect Teito. Oh, and banish all the Kor he came across. Just a few, but they were heavy enough he didn’t have room for any of the others more normal bishops carried. Not any more.

Well neither did the brat, come to that.

So, yeah, it was probably a good thing that he’d been the one sent out with Teito. Sure as hell no other bishop would understand what the kid was carrying on his shoulders. And Frau admitted it: it was good to be flying again. He’d felt so fucking grounded the last nine years, locked up in that cathedral.

The end of his cigarette glowed as he breathed in the rough heat of smoke, eyes distant. If he could just keep the brat safe, he’d almost feel like this trip was a good thing.

Teito emerged from the bathroom rubbing a towel over his head, with the spare one slung around his hips. “You’re hogging the pillows,” he accused Frau after one look. “Hand over mine.”

Frau blew smoke at the ceiling. “Since I’m paying for the rooms,” he mused, “I think they’re actually all my pillows.”

“The Church is paying, you leech. Gimme.” Teito made to grab some of the pillows out from behind Frau, dodging his elbow. “Mortification of the flesh is supposed to be virtuous, isn’t it? You’re the bishop, act like it!”

“Since when do I give a shit about virtue?” Frau demanded, grabbing for those thieving hands.

Teito froze in his grip and his bared teeth slowly faded into a frown. “How long have you been sitting there in nothing but a towel?” The frown was turning into a real glare. “You’ve gotten cold again!” He stomped around the room pulling blankets out of the cupboard and threw them over Frau, tugging them roughly around him. Frau watched the performance with a certain sardonic amusement. Having Capella around had turned on the kid’s mothering instincts for good, it looked like.

“You do realize that, without body heat to start with, these aren’t going to do any good?” He took a drag on his cigarette, mouth quirked as Teito glared some more.

“Fine, then!”

Frau blinked as the kid marched over to the bed and slung a leg over Frau’s thighs, settling firmly onto his lap. Teito pulled the blankets around both of them and gave Frau a look that dared him to object. “There.”

Frau sighed. “You’re too damn stubborn for anyone’s good. It doesn’t hurt or anything, you know.”

“It isn’t right,” Teito said, low and fierce and not looking at him. “It isn’t right for you to be cold.”

Frau rested a hand on the kid’s head, ruffling his hair. “Yeah, it is,” he said quietly. “Because this is what I am.”

Teito frowned at him. “Well…! Well, then, fine! But…” he wrapped his arms firmly around Frau’s neck, “then this is warm too, isn’t it?” He leaned in closer and brushed his lips over Frau’s, unpracticed and unhesitating.

Frau stilled, eyes widening at that soft and completely unexpected pressure. “Wha…” He closed his hands on Teito’s shoulders, moving him back a little. “Haven’t you ever heard of a metaphor, you little maniac?” he demanded. All his damn church training was suddenly screaming in his ear. It was usually only the tedious rules about chastity that got him in trouble, and he didn’t give a damn about those. But the one law about what a person got up to in his own bed that he agreed with wholeheartedly was that no one should ever, ever abuse the trust of the children sheltered by the Church.

Teito gave him one of those rare, clear-eyed looks that made Frau think maybe Castor hadn’t been completely insane to nominate the kid as a bishop. “You’re not dead,” he stated, like it was a known fact, and shook his head as Frau opened his mouth to protest. “You died, but you’re not dead. I’ve made a lot of dead bodies, Frau, and this,” he put a hand flat against Frau’s bare chest, “isn’t like that. Your heart doesn’t beat, but your blood still flows. You move and breathe, but you don’t have any body heat. That’s impossible.” He gave Frau a look like the laws of physics were his personal fault. “So. You’re a spirit-body, aren’t you?”

Frau settled back. He was just a tiny bit impressed. Maybe. “That’s pretty much what we figure, yeah. I mean, with the transforming into huge skeletons and all.”

Teito nodded, satisfied. “I thought so. So, it isn’t just physical heat that can help, right?”

Frau opened his mouth and closed it again. And here he’d thought they’d gotten safely onto theology and away from disturbingly warm kisses. “That doesn’t mean…” He trailed off.

Teito smiled, smugly aware he’d won that point, the little shit. “Yes, it does.” And he hauled off and kissed Frau again, more confident this time.

Frau got a hold of the kid’s nape to pull him back, which… didn’t actually help as much as it should, because Teito made an extremely distracting sound. “Look,” Frau said as flatly as he could, “you’re too young.”

Teito arched both brows, clearly unimpressed. “It’s the new year, right? So I’m sixteen.” He prodded Frau in the chest with a finger. “What were you doing when you were sixteen, huh?”

From the way the kid suddenly smirked, Frau was pretty sure he’d turned a little red. He considered it evidence of a cruel universe that that still happened to a dead man. “Yeah, and maybe if I were sixteen, like the girls I was, yes, okay fine, sleeping with whenever I could escape the damn robes, that would mean something. So how about we just say I’m too old?” And why couldn’t the brat have jumped his partner, like half the baby bishops always wound up doing once the exam heated up?

Teito folded his arms on Frau’s chest and remarked. “Funny you should mention that. I asked Labrador-san, you know. Turns out you’re only twenty.”

Frau closed his eyes, silently cursing Labrador to… to… to an annoying leaf-wilt problem or something. “Teito…” He broke off, breath catching, because Teito had taken the opportunity to press up close against him, skin to skin. The kid really was warm.

“I want you to be warm,” Teito said quietly against his ear. “And I want… to know what this is.” He rested his temple against Frau’s and muttered, “And I trust you, okay?”

Frau gave up and wrapped his arms around Teito, holding him tight and stomping as hard as he could on the stirring interest of the scythe. Sometimes the kid really did remind him so much of himself that it hurt. “You’re an idiot.”

It was time to deal with this logically, Frau told himself, ignoring the way he couldn’t make himself let go. The brat really was sixteen, scrawniness notwithstanding, and that was the age of consent across the Empire. So the rules could shut up. The brat was also world-bendingly stubborn (and kind of unfairly cute when he wasn’t growling and snapping like a bear after winter). So Frau needed a good reason, if he wanted to get out of this. Did he have a good reason? Did he want to get out of this?

Only silence answered that question, inside of him. Waiting silence.

Teito finally drew a shaky breath and pulled back enough to grin at him, almost as convincingly annoying as usual. “I mean, aren’t you supposed to know all about this stuff? Or do you just talk a good line?”

Just because a man’s heart wasn’t beating any more didn’t mean it couldn’t squeeze tight. Frau hadn’t loved all that terribly often, in his life, but he knew when someone was getting to him. This one… had gotten to him. His mouth quirked and he slid a hand up to cradle Teito’s head. “Brat,” he said, just a little husky.

For once, Teito didn’t take a return shot. Just looked at him, eyes dark and questioning. Frau didn’t know what the question was, or what answer Teito saw, but after a moment Teito smiled a little and leaned forward again. This time Frau kissed back, gentle and careful.

Frau had known from the moment he saw the kid move that Teito was trained, and trained to kill. Teito moved fast and sure and fluid, when he wasn’t in a rage, always poised, always ready. The readiness had quieted slowly, over the last few months, and Frau had hoped it meant Teito was relaxing from that edge. Maybe he was, but now, feeling how long it took Teito to unwind as he settled against Frau’s chest, Frau thought he still had a long way to go.

Which made him feel ridiculously fucking protective of the little brat.

So he kissed Teito slow and easy, with helplessly exasperated tenderness, until Teito was flushed and pressing close. Maybe it was just the heat of Teito’s body against his, skin to skin under the blankets; or maybe it was the way Teito’s tongue stroked over his and Teito sighed as he relaxed and stretched out against Frau’s chest; or maybe it really was Teito’s living heart touching his. Whatever the truth, Frau was warm again.

In fact, Frau might just have been a little flushed himself by the time Teito drew back and tucked his head down against Frau’s shoulder. “You okay?” he asked, husky, running a hand slowly up and down Teito’s back.

“Yeah,” Teito answered softly, not moving. After a moment, Frau felt Teito’s lips curve against his shoulder. “I guess you’re not all talk. It might be nice to do that some more some time.”

Frau snorted, trying to stifle the enthusiastic votes yes from both his cock and the scythe. “Damn brat.”

“Now give me half those pillows.”

Frau grinned against Teito’s dark hair. “What if I say no?”

The fight for the pillows left the room a mess, but Frau had to admit it took care of any awkwardness.

 

Two

Frau had managed to kick Castor and Labrador out of his room in F3’s frozen tourist trap by the time Teito was done with his bath, and had stretched out in his bed, arms folded behind his head. He watched the kid through half-closed eyes as Teito neatly and automatically folded and hung his towel and laid out his clothes for the next day of the race. He didn’t look too much the worse for his encounter with the scythe, even though Frau’s fingertips still tingled with the sensation of reaching into Teito’s chest, stretching out after his bright soul.

Well, Frau had always known Teito was a tough little bastard, and too stubborn to quit.

Every inch of that stubbornness was in Teito’s eyes as he pulled on his nightshirt and made for Frau’s bed instead of his own. Frau stiffened. “Teito…”

“Shut up,” Teito told him, burrowing under the blankets and wrapping around Frau like one of Labrador’s climbing vines. “You’re an idiot, you know that? The more I think about it, the more obvious it is.”

Frau breathed in and out, carefully, holding down the leap of the scythe’s hunger. “Are you actually trying to get eaten?" he bit out. "After you saw yourself what can happen…”

Teito pushed himself up on one elbow, glaring. “I told you! I’ll pull you out of that scythe as many times as it takes! So quit using it as an excuse!”

“Excuse?!” Frau was glaring now, too. “Listen, brat—” He had to break off, jaw tight, and fight down another surge of hunger from the scythe. It growled silently, nearly drooling in Teito’s direction.

As if he could hear it, Teito growled back. His right hand flashed over to clamp tight on Frau’s forearm, over the name incised there. “You,” Teito said, low and cold and deadly, “back off.” A flicker of red shone around his hand for one breath, and Teito’s grip tightened. “He’s mine.”

That was outrageous enough that Frau opened his mouth to protest. His jaw just hung there, though, when the scythe grudgingly settled under Teito’s hand. “What the fuck?”

Teito’s grip eased a little and he glanced aside. “Mikhail,” he muttered. “There’s still a connection even when we’re apart. I guess I don’t have to do anything formal, when I really need him.”

That did, actually, explain a few things. Just not the one about why Frau should mean enough for Teito to risk stressing his soul that way. “And you have the nerve to say I’m an idiot,” Frau scolded, closing his other hand on Teito’s nape to shake him. Teito shrugged and looked up again with a tiny smile.

“It was important,” he insisted, completely unabashed.

“Important, huh?” Frau narrowed his eyes, an expression that sent lowlife of all kinds running in terror and had no effect whatsoever on Teito. Damn it. He tried another tack. “And what’s this about me being yours?”

Teito lifted his chin stubbornly. “You are. My bishop. My mentor. Mine, not the scythe’s!”

Frau let his head fall back against the pillow, groaning. “Fuck. And I always thought Castor was joking when he said God would punish me some day.”

Teito pressed close again, arms wound around Frau’s shoulders. “I’m sure He’ll get to it eventually.”

Frau’s mouth quirked and he slid a hand into Teito’s hair. “Think He has already.” He sighed, more or less resigned to being the kid’s pillow and just glad that Teito hadn’t gotten all metaphysical about warming Frau up again. Castor really would break in and try to strangle him, then.

On the other hand, it was awfully cold out there, and temper was supposed to heat people up too, right? Frau smirked at the ceiling for a moment before reaching down to lift Teito’s chin and kiss him, light and gentle. He forgot the part about yanking Castor’s chain for a moment as Teito relaxed against him, eyes softening as he smiled up at Frau.

“Go to sleep, brat,” Frau said quietly.

Teito made an agreeable sound and snuggled down into the blankets and Frau, and a completely helpless smile tugged at Frau’s mouth.

It turned wide and wicked a moment later, when he heard faint, muffled yelling over the sound of the storm outside, rather as if some manipulative bastard of a bishop was losing his grip and being wrapped up in ice roses by his partner to keep him from breaking in.

Frau closed his eyes, still smirking, and composed himself to sleep.

 

Three

Frau was aware of all the reasons that restoring the Eye of Mikhail to Teito was necessary, both for Teito and for the rest of the world. He didn’t exactly regret it.

But the first time he looked down at Teito, curled up against him in bed, to see a pair of vastly unimpressed red eyes glaring up at him, he swore his heart started beating against just so it could stop.

“You,” Mikhail declared, as if it were the worst insult possible. “You have been taking liberties with my master.”

That was unfair enough to snap Frau out of his shock. “I damn well have not! Do you have any idea how stubborn the brat is? It’s all I could do to convince him he’s still too small to be fucked by someone my size!”

Mikhail tossed the covers back and looked him up and down disdainfully, which was the kind of thing that could give a man a complex. “Hmph.” He settled back against the pillows like they were a throne, crossing Teito’s arms sulkily. “Well, since you seem to belong to my master now, I suppose I won’t do anything about this.” He held up a finger and eyed Frau sternly. “As long as you don’t get above yourself!”

And then he was gone, and it was Teito’s eyes staring up at him again.

Teito, who promptly dissolved into laughter. “Your face!” he managed.

Frau sputtered. He couldn’t help it. “Belong to you?” he demanded, outraged. “The cat-eyed bastard doesn’t mind as long as I don’t get above myself?!” His voice was echoing off the walls. Teito was still laughing, collapsed among the pillows with his arms wrapped around his stomach. Frau gave him a dour look. “And if you think you’re getting anything out of me tonight…”

Teito caught his breath and crawled into Frau’s lap, grinning. “Would that count as getting above yourself, if you don’t do what I want you to do?” he asked, winding his arms around Frau’s shoulders.

Frau growled and flipped them over, pinning Teito to the bed under him. “…show you ‘above myself’…” He caught that laughing mouth and kissed Teito deep and hard.

Of course, given the breathy sounds Teito made and the way he arched up against Frau, that might have been the whole idea. “Mmm. Frau.” Teito wrapped his legs around Frau’s hips and rubbed his ass against Frau’s cock.

“Not until you’re five inches taller, goddamnit,” Frau gasped, and tried not to show his response when Teito growled. If the brat ever realized just how close he was to getting his way, Frau knew he’d be doomed. And the fact was, Teito was way too impatient to keep from hurting himself, so Frau was the one who had to have self control for both of them.

Frau expected a goddamn sainthood out of this, he really did.

Fortunately, Teito was also pretty distractible, as long as you came up a good enough alternative. Frau slid down his body, tracing the hard muscles of Teito’s stomach with his tongue by way of suggestion. He grinned when Teito let his legs fall back to the bed with a pleased sigh. Teito wasn’t actually unreasonable in bed; he just had a knee-jerk reaction to being told he couldn’t do something. Frau actually kind of sympathized, at least when the brat wasn’t driving him crazy.

Which was why, when he closed his mouth around Teito’s cock, he didn’t tease, just sucked wet and hard until Teito’s hips came up off the bed. Frau smiled around him a little and flicked his tongue back and forth over Teito’s head. Teito moaned, hands working hard against Frau’s shoulders, and rocked up into Frau’s mouth.

It was always moments like these that made Frau reconsider his “not for five inches” rule. Teito was pretty well developed, and there wasn’t an inch of childish softness anywhere on his body. When the weight of Teito’s cock was sliding over his tongue it was a little hard to remember why he kept insisting they wait.

“Frau,” Teito gasped, body pulling taut. Frau made an approving sound and sucked Teito down all the way, and swallowed slowly around him. The cut-off moan that answered as Teito came undone, shuddering under him, would have made him purr except his mouth was full. So he just thought it.

Well, that and smiled smugly down at Teito once he’d kissed his way back up his body, head propped up on one hand. Teito laughed, breathless. “You look like one of the cathedral cats who just stole fish from the fountain,” he told Frau.

“I got you to stop arguing,” Frau pointed out. “I think that’s pretty damn impressive, myself.”

“So why are you reminding me of it again now?” Teito wanted to know, reaching up to trace his fingers over Frau’s mouth.

Frau smiled wickedly. “Never said I didn’t think the arguing was fun.”

Teito growled, and locked one leg around his and flipped them over. Frau smirked up at him, folding his arms behind his head. “Yeah? Something to add?”

“I think so, yes.” Teito’s eyes glinted down at him, and then he was sliding down Frau’s body and pushing his legs apart to settle between them. The look he gave Frau as he leaned over was nearly as wicked as the one Frau’d given him.

Frau managed to stay relaxed and casual right up until Teito’s mouth closed on him, and then he had to grab for the headboard. It was the same every time and he never got used to the heat of a living mouth. If fire could be slick and wet, it was like having fire slide down his cock, and Teito took his time about it. Frau moaned, low and open, and rocked up a little; Teito moved with him, lips wrapped just around Frau’s head. Frau swore, breathless, and Teito snickered.

Evil little bastard was learning Castor’s sense of humor.

When Teito finally slid his mouth further down, Frau shuddered. The heat, the life, the intensity of it were like nothing else, and the strength of Teito’s hand working up and down his cock, slick and confident, felt like the only thing anchoring him to the world.

“Teito,” Frau gasped, warning. He never lasted long when they did this. Teito drew back reluctantly, tongue flicking over him one last time.

“Mm. Just think what it would be like if you were inside me,” he murmured thoughtfully, hand stroking hard down Frau’s cock.

Frau couldn’t quite help thinking, about heat and tightness, and the headboard creaked under his hands as pleasure hammered through him. “Teito…!”

When he caught his breath, the brat was still laughing. “I’ll have to try that again,” he grinned, elbows braced across Frau’s chest. Frau growled and hauled him down to a rough kiss that Teito leaned into readily.

A fucking sainthood, Frau swore.

 

Four

It hadn’t been Frau’s idea, the first time he wound up in bed with Teito Klein. It hadn’t been his idea to start sharing a bed, whether they did anything more interesting with it than sleep or not. It had been his idea to teach the kid how to use his hands and mouth, but only in self defense. Because the biggest thing that wasn’t his idea was actually fucking someone as slight as Teito with what was, no undue modesty, a damn big cock. He’d held tight to a rule of “not until you’re five inches taller” and insisted that he was not going to fuck someone who didn’t at least come up to his chin.

Teito had pouted. He’d called Frau a chicken. He’d done some really, really unfair things with his mouth and asked Frau again immediately afterward. And eventually he’d gotten quiet and looked up at Frau all clear-eyed and said, “Please”.

Which was how Frau had come to be leaning back against a handful of pillows with Teito straddling his lap and lying against his chest while Frau rubbed slow, gentle fingers between his cheeks. “We’re taking this slow, understand?” he murmured against Teito’s hair.

Teito nodded against his shoulder, arms tightening a little around his neck. “I know. I won’t push.”

Frau’s lips quirked; he didn’t trust that to last very long at all. It was a good start, though. “Okay. Try to stay relaxed, then.” He dipped his fingers in the jar of gel he’d wedged against their pillows, because he’d damn well bought economy size this time, and circled his fingers over Teito’s entrance, slow and hard. Teito’s muscles clenched and gradually relaxed as he breathed out. Frau kept his fingers moving slow and easy, and after a few more breaths Teito gave a soft moan. Frau took a tighter grip on his self-control and pressed a finger into Teito.

Teito’s muscles tightened again sharply, and Frau waited for him to relax again before moving. “All right?” he asked quietly, stroking that one finger inside Teito.

“Yeah.” Teito sounded a little breathless. “Yeah, it’s okay.”

“How does it feel?” Frau pressed, because if Teito was uncomfortable with the length of his finger, he’d need to hold himself back hard from thrusting into the kid later.

A breath of a laugh, and another quick clench of muscles. “It feels like you.” After a moment, Teito added, “I like feeling you.”

Frau closed his eyes and pressed his mouth against Teito’s hair. He’d long ago given himself up for lost. Teito had gotten to him, all the way into him, right down to the heart. Just knowing didn’t mean it wasn’t new and terrifyingly warm, though, every time Teito said something like that. “Glad for that,” he said, husky. Teito looked up at him with a small smile and flushed cheeks, and Frau smiled back wryly. “Ready for more?”

Teito nodded and laid his head back down on Frau’s shoulder, breathing in and out and deliberately relaxing. Frau gathered him up a little closer and pressed a second finger in. It went easily, and Teito made a low sound that Frau was pretty damn sure wasn’t discomfort. He worked them in and out slowly, and Teito stretched against him a little, muscles working around his fingers easily now. He could feel Teito was half hard against him, and spent a moment breathing deeply himself.

“Mmm.” Teito pushed his hips against Frau’s. “Frau…”

“Yeah, okay.” Frau pulled out carefully and scooped up more of the gel. “Tell me if it hurts at all, right?”

“I will,” Teito promised, and Frau could just about hear him rolling his eyes. He snorted softly and pulled Teito close, so he could listen to his body as well as his words, and pushed three fingers into his ass. It was tight, and Frau went very slow, listening to each hitch in Teito’s breath, waiting out each clench of his muscles. Eventually, though, his fingers were all the way in and Teito was moaning softly against his shoulder.

“Frau, move.”

“Pushy,” Frau muttered, a bit husky. But he did as Teito asked, sliding his fingers out to the knuckle and then slowly back in. And again. Teito moaned every time his fingers slid all the way home, and Frau was starting to wonder if he was going to have to eat his words because it sure as hell sounded like Teito really liked being stretched open hard. And it felt like he could take it.

“Not pushy,” Teito panted. “Just… ohh… want to feel you.” He ground his hips against Frau’s and they both groaned.

“Fuck, all right, you win, okay?” Frau kissed the start of a grin off Teito’s mouth, fiercely, and Teito wound his arms tighter around Frau’s neck and kissed back, eyes dark and half closed. Frau groped for the gel again, still kissing Teito, and slicked it over his cock. Teito obligingly slid up a little, and Frau’s arm tightened around him. “Slow,” he growled against Teito’s mouth, guiding his cock against Teito.

Teito huffed, but let Frau set their pace. His head tipped back and he gasped sharply as Frau started to push in. “Ahh… oh…” His arms tightened as Frau hesitated. “Don’t stop.”

Frau, already breathing hard with the burn of pleasure down his nerves, clenched his jaw and pushed up into Teito bit by tiny bit. And then he was in, sliding in smoothly, and Teito’s gasps turned into a throaty moan. The alarming tightness of his body eased and he lay against Frau’s chest panting as Frau pressed most of the way in.

“You okay?” Frau managed, husky, holding him tight, lightheaded with the burning heat of Teito’s body.

“Mm, yeah.” Teito slowly pushed himself upright against Frau’s chest, lips parted as he settled down a little further onto Frau. “Oh…”

Frau swore fervently, hands tight on Teito’s hips, and Teito grinned breathlessly at him, the little bastard. “I am going to be so glad when you are five goddamn inches taller,” Frau growled, “so that I can pound your ass into the mattress like you fucking well deserve.” In lieu of that, he flexed his hips slow and hard, drawing back and driving up into Teito again, careful not to push in too far. Teito lost the grin, at least, as he clutched Frau’s shoulders and moaned out loud.

“Feels good,” Teito breathed as Frau fucked him slowly. “Hard…”

And, yeah, Frau could feel how hard Teito was stretched around him, and it was driving him a little crazy to have all that living, branding heat locked so tight around him. “Teito…”

Teito arched over him and sighed, eyes half closed as he pushed down to meet Frau, and Frau groaned. One of these days, he swore, the kid really was going to kill him.

Today, though, was his first time doing this, and Frau knew going too long would be a mistake. So he stroked a hand down the leanness of Teito’s body to wrap around his cock and pump it slow and hard.

“Ahh!” Teito’s hands clenched on Frau’s shoulders again, and Frau watched him, drinking in the life and brilliance of him, the abandon as Teito rocked wantonly between his hand and his cock. The way his name spilled from Teito’s lips made something hot and possessive tighten through him. When Teito’s body finally clamped down around him, he growled, driving up into that tightness with short, hungry thrusts until pleasure raked him over the edge.

When the fire finally stopped wringing his nerves out, Frau gathered Teito back down against him and eased carefully out. Teito winced, and Frau rubbed a hand up and down his back. “Okay?” he asked softly.

“Yeah,” Teito answered, just as soft. And then he poked Frau in the chest. “And it didn’t hurt.”

Frau snorted and slid his hand down to cup Teito’s ass gently. “If you can ride the damn hawkzile tomorrow and still say that, I’ll be impressed.” He could feel Teito’s face heat against his shoulder and chuckled, threading his fingers into Teito’s hair. “I’m a little impressed already,” he admitted.

Teito glanced up with a rare, unguarded smile, bright and sweet. Frau held him closer and tried not to self-evidently melt into a puddle of pathetic gooeyness.

Teito would seriously be the death of him, some day. Frau was becoming increasingly sure of this, and not in a metaphorical way, because life was a bastard like that.

For as long as he had, though, Frau would stay close to the pure warmth and insane stubbornness of Teito’s heart, and be grateful.

End

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Fifteen

Naruto stared up at the man from Akatsuki, frozen even as Sasuke and Sakura flickered to stand in front of him and Hinata snapped her hands together at his side, Byakugan live again. The man had… really strange eyes. Purple, like Naruto had never seen before and ringed. Stop looking, he told himself, it has to be a bloodline talent, he might be able to do something to you, stop looking. But at the same time he didn’t want to take his eyes off that creepily intense stare for even a second.

“So you would be the Sacrifice of Konoha,” the man said, finally, and that shook Naruto out of his stillness.

“I’m not anyone’s sacrifice,” he scowled.

The man blinked slowly. “Of course you are. Sacrificed the day you were born, according to our members from Konoha."

“Fuck that,” Naruto said, blunt and rude. If this guy was trying to hypnotize him or something, it wasn’t working! “Somebody else made that choice, yeah, but the ones since then are my own!”

“Whatever peace you may have made with your beast does not change the actions of your village,” the man said in a weirdly classroom-lecture kind of tone. “They sacrificed a newborn to make a weapon of the land’s spirit and further sacrificed your life every day after that to their own fears. Is that not so?”

Sakura’s lip curled and she slid her hands into the first seal of her release. Lightning chakra was starting to gather around Sasuke’s fingers as he glared over them. Maeda-san had melted back around the corner of the building toward Jiraiya, mouth tight, eyes burning. Shadows were starting to rustle and flicker around the edges of the plaza as people fought through whatever the hell was out in the woods to reach him, and Hinata was whispering the tally of names beside him.

“Kiba and Shino. Baki of the Sand. Choujuurou and Suigetsu of the Mist. Shikamaru, Chouji, Ino and her team. Kitsuchi of the Rock and three of his people. Iruka-sensei…”

Naruto took a long breath and looked up at the Akatsuki guy with a grin. “No,” he told him. “You’re totally wrong.” He spread his arms out, as if to take in the whole island and all the ninja on it. “Yeah, it sucked for a while. But they got over it, and I got over it, and there are a lot of important people to me in the village, now. And, um.” He let his arms drop, face getting a little hot as he glanced around at the growing rustles and emerging shinobi. “I guess I’m kind of important to them, too. So it’s good.”

Iruka-san landed off to his side, face grimmer than Naruto had ever seen it, glare fixed on the Akatsuki guy. Naruto could hear Kiba’s growl at his back. Ino glanced at him and rolled her eyes but she was smiling. Chouji nodded without looking away from their opponent, one hand resting on Shikamaru’s shoulder. Sasuke and Sakura edged a little tighter in front of him, and Naruto sure wouldn’t have wanted to be the target of the looks they were giving their enemy. The fox sniffed in the back of his mind, and Naruto thought Nine-tails was amused, probably by how warm and fluffy the whole thing made him feel, Akatsuki or no Akatsuki. He flushed deeper and stuck out his tongue at the fox, in his head, and got only a brush of a laugh in return. The fox seemed strangely mellow considering who they were facing, and he reminded himself to ask why when they had time.

The man sighed. “And in your comfort you become the willing tool of your village and its wars. I suppose that’s only to be expected.” Those strange eyes fixed on Naruto again. “Perhaps, then, it will comfort you that your last sacrifice will serve to bring peace to your village.”

“What do you mean?” Sakura snapped.

The man might have shrugged under his robe, careless of the cordon of shinobi surrounding them and him. “Once the nine tailed beasts are gathered into a single container, and its power is demonstrated to every village, there will be no more wars.”

Silence slammed down over the plaza. Every face Naruto could see was horrified, and the fox’s sudden growl was resonating down his spine to set his tails lashing.

“Nagato,” Jiraiya rasped from behind Naruto, “that won’t be a real peace.”

Naruto whipped a look over his shoulder to see Jiraiya coming slowly around the corner of the broken building, leaning heavily on Kakashi-sensei’s shoulder.

“It will be the most real peace there is,” the man—Nagato?—returned coolly. “An unbreakable one.”

“Only until people start fighting for possession of the beasts!” Jiraiya paused for a moment to catch his breath. “And didn’t you once believe that people must understand pain before they will genuinely seek peace and value it? People have to find that for themselves!” Another pause to breathe, and Jiraiya finished, sadly, “You can’t just order peace and have it stick.”

Nagato nodded calmly. “Indeed. This is a world of suffering. Pain leads to hatred and revenge, which only gives more pain. This is the nature of life, of humans, and it can only be stopped by force.” He smiled, faint and unnerving. “I will show the people what true pain is, and they will be unable to turn it toward revenge. Because that pain will be inflicted by a god. This is the only thing that can break the cycle and lead people to transcend the nature of the world.”

This guy was starting to remind Naruto of Itachi, and the creepy way he kept saying obviously crazy things in a totally normal way. Maybe all of Akatsuki was crazy.

“Nagato,” Jiraiya whispered, brows drawn in tight and pained, “what happened to you?”

“When Yahiko was killed by treachery, my eyes were opened to the nature of life.” Nagato cocked his head. “You were the one who first told us to search for peace. My answer will bring peace. Do you have any other way that will?”

“I…” Jiraiya’s jaw clenched and Nagato nodded.

“Of course not. This is the only way.”

“No it’s not!” Naruto burst out indignantly. “Hey, hey, wait a minute! You mean you used to know the ero-sennin?” Naruto’s tails lashed again, furious with his growing understanding. “You killed him! How could you do that? How could you do this?” Jiraiya had taught both Naruto and Sasuke, for crying out loud, he was amazing and he’d never have taught anyone to think like this!

“I freed him,” Nagato said, like that made any kind of sense. “My last act of respect. Release from this world is the greatest mercy, and those who die to show their people pain will be the most blessed.”

“The hell you say!” Naruto was nearly sputtering, his training piping up to join in the general outrage. “You don’t just up and kill someone who can still live! That’s for—” he broke off abruptly and swallowed. “That’s for when the pain is too much,” he finished, husky. “You… what are you thinking?” Did this guy… did he honestly think the whole world was in that kind of pain? That the whole world needed a mercy killing? That was crazy, it wasn’t peace he was talking about here it was… was… something Naruto didn’t even have words for.

Nagato looked completely serene. “Ah. You do understand, then.”

Naruto shuddered, and backed up a step, eyes wide. “No.”

He heard Jiraiya draw in a slow breath, behind him, and when the old man spoke his voice rang over the plaza, rough but clear. “Shinobi of this mission. You will stop Nagato of Akatsuki by whatever means are necessary. For this mission and for our world.” Another breath. “Nagato holds the Rinnengan bloodline talent, and can summon animals and demons, consume chakra attacks, use gravity to attack and defend, and fight with individual strength beyond anything you’ve ever seen. Kitsuchi-san, Sakura, Shikamaru, Choujuurou-kun! Coordinate attacks!”

Naruto saw a flash of rage on Nagato’s face before he was leaping aside from Kitsuchi’s fist, now sheathed in rock. “Use the time,” Kitsuchi barked and struck again, only to be met hand to hand and blocked this time, without even a tremble of Nagato’s wiry arms. Sakura hissed.

“Only chakra attacks would be strong enough to get through, but that must give him what he needs to keep this strength up,” she muttered. “Damn it!”

Suigetsu had joined Kitsuchi, sharp teeth bared as he and the massive length of his sword whirled and struck, again and again.

“The Rinnengan takes a huge amount of chakra,” Jiraiya rasped, and Naruto looked back to see Kakashi-sensei lean him against the wall and prepare to join in himself. “If we can wear him out…”

Sakura’s eyes flicked around, tallying up their force and she bit her lip. “We don’t have enough people strong in taijutsu… can we afford to call in any more from the forest and protecting B-san?”

“Not really,” Kakashi-sensei supplied dryly. “B’s dealing with the other Akatsuki, and the island is crawling with small demons and giant animals.”

One of Ino’s intelligence team popped up beside them, saluting. “Shikamaru says to overload Nagato, and that he will hold him still for it.”

Sakura’s eyes lit, and she looked at Kakashi-sensei. “If we pour in more chakra than he can take, and he can’t do anything with it… It’s like my seal! He’ll have to use his own chakra to convert and manage it, and if he can’t use the influx right away to attack, we might burn him out!”

“It’s our best chance,” Kakashi-sensei agreed and slapped the messenger on the shoulder. “Get to the other two teams and tell them to prepare a chakra assault on Nagato as soon as he’s nailed down. But keep one person back in each group, to attack after.” As the man flickered off, Kakashi lifted his forehead protector, both eyes fixed on Nagato as his fingers drifted over the scrolls in his vest.

“I can see his rate of chakra consumption,” Hinata reported, her eyes fixed on their opponent also. “I think I can tell you when he overloads.”

“That will help,” Sakura murmured, flexing her hands. “Say it loud, when he does, so those of us who have to close for this can hear you.”

Hinata nodded sharp and sure, and Naruto set his feet, feeling for his own chakra reserves. He wasn’t exactly recovered yet, and this really would hurt, but he could definitely get in at least one Rasenshuriken.

Sasuke was watching Shikamaru sliding through the rubble, angling to connect his shadow, both of them poised and taut.

Nagato finally threw Suigetsu away with an upraised hand, and the line of his sword cast a black bar of shadow on the ground, and for one moment it bridged between Shikamaru and Nagato. Lightning sprang up in Sasuke’s hand.

“Now!” Chouji bellowed. “Fall back!”

Kitsuchi sprang away and Nagato, after one frozen moment, looked down and smiled. Slowly, slowly, he started to pull his feet free of Shikamaru’s shadow. Sasuke threw a flight of Chidori Senbon at Nagato, who only laughed. The needles struck and sank into him without a trace.

“Chakra increasing,” Hinata reported tightly.

As if Sasuke’s attack had been an agreed-on signal, chakra attacks struck from all sides. Choujuurou’s sword blazed as he swung a huge hammer shape down. The knives of the Lightning Dragon sank into Nagato’s chest and legs, and Sasuke sent lightning raging down the wires. Sakura flickered forward faster than thought and slapped her hands against Nagato’s back, pouring unformed chakra through her seal and into him. Fire, Water, Earth, Ice, forms Naruto had never seen struck from every side. Naruto whipped his tails forward to shape Wind into a throwing knife that felt like it was cutting him from the inside as he dragged the chakra up, and hurled it with a yell.

Shikamaru’s shoulders were heaving with every breath, and he was curled down almost to his knees and elbows, but his hands were locked in the seal of his technique and his eyes were blazing over bared teeth.

“Still going. Still going,” Hinata called out, almost chanting as the storm of chakra whirled around Nagato, sucked into him. “Elasticity declining! Threshold! Threshold approaching!” Her eyes widened, and she suddenly screamed, “Scatter!

Everyone sprang back and and hit the ground, and Naruto spun toward Jiraiya only to feel his knees start to buckle. He only had time to pull in a desperate breath of protest before someone caught him around the middle and he was back against the wall next to Jiraiya with Hinata, Kakashi, Sasuke, and Sakura. And… there was another wall on the other side. He puzzled over that for a dizzy moment before he was set down and realized that Kitsuchi had carried him back and was sheltering them.

An explosion rolled over and above them and silence followed it.

Kitsuchi-san and Kakashi-sensei exchanged a frown, and Kitsuchi lowered the stone wall with a gesture.

Nagato stood in the middle of a plaza scoured and cracked, swaying a little on his feet and smoking. He wasn’t smiling any longer, but his eyes were as fixed and crazed as ever. Shikamaru was sprawled in Chouji’s grasp, where it looked like he’d been thrown, unconscious. Chouji looked up as they emerged and nodded once. Naruto relaxed things he hadn’t known were tense. Shikamaru was okay; good. Slowly, the other shinobi of the mission stood up from cover, on their own or over the shoulder of a comrade.

“Do you think you still have the strength to face me after that?” Nagato snarled. “Ha. And for what? Your mission? Your villages? Those who are important to you?” He drew himself up, and something Naruto couldn’t name shifted around him. “None of you have known enough pain to understand!”

“His body,” Hinata said sharply, “his muscles and bones! They’re… sheathed in his chakra!”

“The Asura path,” Jiraiya said, eyes dark. “His strongest hand to hand technique. At least we seem to have disrupted his control of the outwardly directed techniques, the summoning and gravitational ones. I hope.” He straightened and called out. “Reserve, attack!”

Kakashi’s scrolls snapped open and his pack of nin-dogs leaped to harry Nagato, to slow and distract him as Kakashi sprinted to drive a Chidori into his gut and sprang back. He was almost too late, and Nagato’s elbow strike caught his shoulder, throwing him nearly back to where Jiraiya stood.

As he was thrown back Ino’s team struck as one under her snapped orders, weaving a shifting circle of steel and elements around Nagato, dashing in again and again at any opening to slash with a knife or tear with an ink creature’s jaws or scorch with fire. Those attacks didn’t seem to penetrate very deeply, though, and Ino’s mouth was tight as she caught Kitsuchi-san’s eye. Her team made way for his rock punch, feinting a pincer from the sides to distract Nagato.

Naruto hoped when he saw Kitsuchi’s fist hit Nagato’s spine, even though it made him sick to his stomach to hope for an injury like that, like the one he’d just finished healing at such cost. But even though Nagato cried out and stumbled, he was still standing, still moving, and he took Chouji’s huge fist on his crossed arms and threw him back.

Choujuurou and Suigetsu struck together, catching Nagato in between the sweep of their monstrous swords, or they would have if he hadn’t dodged out from between them faster than Naruto’s eye could follow.

“He’s still too strong,” Kakashi-sensei murmured, kneeling beside Jiraiya, preparing for another try. “We can’t fit enough people in close enough to land a clean strike.”

That made sense, even to Naruto’s weary mind. Piling on wouldn’t do any good if no one had room to swing a fist and they didn’t have any one or even two people strong enough to match Nagato. Not even him, not right now. If B were here, maybe he could get the Eight-tails to do it, but…

Quiet fell inside Naruto. If the Eight-tails could do it, maybe the Nine-tails could.

“So,” the fox rumbled. “You have a favor to ask, hm?”

Naruto took a moment to realize that he was standing in front of the Nine-tails’ gate. He looked up at the huge red eyes glaring down at him and said, simply and quietly, “Yes.”

The fox sniffed. “And just how do you think that’s going to work?”

Naruto leaned against the wall with a tired splash of the cold water underfoot. “I don’t know. I’ve tried everything I can think of and none of it has worked.” He crossed his arms and bit his lip, trying to think. He was so tired. Finally he looked back up at the fox and asked hopefully, “I don’t suppose you’d tell me?”

“Hm.” The fox looked down his very long nose at him for a moment.

“I mean,” Naruto rambled on, “we have to stop him, right? We can’t let him take you. And we sure can’t let him kill the world!”

“Is that what he’s going to do?” the fox asked thoughtfully.

“He calls it peace.” Naruto snorted. “But then he turns around and talks about showing people more pain! And then about how the only escape is dying!” Naruto shook his head, slumping down against the wall. “He hurts. He wants to stop hurting. I’ve seen that so often, now. And sometimes, yeah, there’s too much damage and the right thing to do is let someone go fast. We’re taught how to do that. But this…!” He met the Nine-tails’ eyes, the steady burning of them. “It’s like what he really wants is to make the whole world hurt like he is. And part of him thinks that will make everyone stop doing bad things. But another part knows that will just make everyone want to die as much as he does. And then he can let them and that will be the right thing to do. But he only gets to it by doing everything wrong first!”

“Hmph. You have some wisdom after all, kit. I’d wondered.”

Naruto glowered; that sounded like an insult. “This is like… it’s like a normal thing that can be good has gotten totally out of control.” He hesitated, because that was like something else, too. “Tsunade-baachan… she’s never let me work on anyone with cancer. She said that the chakra I had from you might make it worse.” He glanced at the fox under his lashes. Did that mean using the Nine-tails’ power could make Nagato worse, too?

The fox reared up, snarling. “Well of course it would! That blond bastard sealed my yin chakra! With nothing but yang chakra to use, you can’t undo a cancer; you’d have to burn it out to the last speck or else you’d just have it back twice as fast.” Slowly, he settled back and added, “So you want to heal this cancer, do you?”

Naruto opened his mouth and closed it again, eyes wide. “Oh. I, um. I guess I do, yeah.” He hadn’t quite put it together himself, but now that the fox had he thought it was true.

The fox rolled his eyes and tilted his ears back. “Idiot kit.”

Naruto shuffled on the water. “Well, he’s hurt! I mean, that’s obvious. We have to stop him, but…”

“But they made you into a healer.” The fox looked dubious, one ear tilted back. “Which is what caused you to very nearly kill yourself just now. Are you sure you’re so eager to do it again?”

“Why should it kill me?” Naruto asked cautiously. “I mean, it doesn’t kill B.”

The fox looked down at him for a long moment. “You have something that B doesn’t. You’ll need to give it up, for this to work.”

Naruto blinked a few times, trying to shake his brain into making sense of that, and finally resorted to a plaintive, “Huh?”

The fox looked pointedly at the gate. “And what do you see here?”

Naruto stared at the gate. The gate itself? Or…

The seal.

“I have to undo the seal?” he squeaked. “Wait, wait, but…!”

The fox made a deeply exasperated sound, reminding Naruto all over again of Sasuke, and snapped, “Not the whole thing, but this half!”

“Half?” Naruto frowned at the paper seal.

“You have two of those on you, idiot kit,” the fox growled. “The first you can’t undo without killing yourself, most likely, but this one you can. And must if you want me to emerge.” He glared off to the side with both ears laid back and his teeth a little bared. “That’s how it was made. So I couldn’t take you over when you were still a baby. Making the second layer internal instead of woven into the surface seal makes it possible to undo that one. It leaves the choice up to you. You’ve already changed it a little, but for me to manifest? You have to undo it.”

A whirl of thoughts spun through Naruto’s head, wondering if his father had hoped he and the fox would trust each other eventually, wondering if it was just a fluke, wondering again why this had been done to him as a baby instead of to someone who could volunteer. The one that made it to his mouth, though, was, “So… are you saying undoing the seal will kill me?”

“It’s a powerful seal." The fox still wasn’t looking at him. “And you won’t be able to use any of my strength to undo it. If, that is, you choose to do so.”

Slowly, it came to Naruto that the fox was pissed off. Really pissed off. Not in the howling-growling way he usually was, but quietly. Because of the seal. He couldn’t be angry that Naruto was thinking of breaking it, could he? Or maybe…

Maybe because it was Naruto’s choice.

Naruto looked down at the surface of the water he stood on, frowning. The fox, he slowly realized, hadn’t had any more choice about this than he had. Every second of resentment or anger he’d felt, the fox must have felt too. Worse, probably. And three times over, now.

“I’m sorry,” he finally said, softly. “I mean, not personally exactly, it’s not like I volunteered for this either, but…” He looked up, and the Nine-tails was finally looking back at him again through the bars. “I’m sorry this happened to you at all.” He came forward hesitantly and laid a hand against the gate. “I guess it was selfish of people, to lock you up just so you’ll be their weapon or threat or something. That’s wrong.”

The fox stared at him silently for several breaths before he lifted his head and shook it until his ears flapped. “It wasn’t without precedent, in a way,” he admitted. “Spirits have sometimes agreed to be embodied in humans, because even as it lends you our strength it lends us your thoughts and understanding. But that was an agreement between one human and one spirit.”

Naruto thought about that. “So… can we have one? Between us?”

“If you dare to release the seal,” the fox said, deep voice rumbling through the whole inner space, “then we will live together. As long as you live.”

That wasn’t exactly a yes or no, but Naruto was getting kind of used to that from the fox. Nine-tails didn’t say the important things right out; you had to think about it and probably guess a little.

And… trust.

Naruto took a deep breath. Hell, it had worked with Sasuke, hadn’t it? And he needed the fox. And the fox needed this, for things to be set right even a little. He still hesitated as he reached for the seal. It might kill him, the fox said. Which the fox might not mind, he’d be free after all. But Sakura and Sasuke… Iruka-san and Kakashi-sensei… his yearmates, Tsunade and Jiraiya, the village… Naruto bit his lip hard, wavering, trying to figure out what he should do, what he should risk, what was the right thing to do here and now. The fox watched silently.

It’s a choice that comes to very powerful healers in time of war, all too often.

It was Chiyo-san’s voice that whispered through his memory, and Naruto’s eyes widened. He’d made that choice for Jiraiya, but that had been easy. That had been to save someone he loved. To make the same choice now, he would have to make it… because it was right. Because the duty and ethics his teacher had given him told him this was what he needed to do. “And they do,” he whispered, looking up into the Nine-tails’ eyes and all the rage and yearning locked behind them. “I have to heal you, too.”

The eternal burn of rage died in a moment of utterly blank shock, and the fox stared at him with, Naruto would swear, absolute disbelief. That made him smile. This was right. It felt right. This was what he should do.

No matter what happened.

He smiled up at the fox and reached up and tore the paper seal off the gates.

Light and sound exploded around him. All he could see was the paper, and it was clinging to the gate stubbornly. He gritted his teeth and pulled harder. Harder. His muscles felt like they might give way first, but he braced himself and pulled harder, growling. Come loose, damn it! he thought fiercely at the bit of paper. I don’t want you here, come loose!

One of the lines of inked characters started to unravel like thread.

Spurred on, Naruto pulled harder, jaw clenched, whole body screaming with the ache of the seal’s resistance. Line by line, bit by bit, it came part, and he kept pulling even as his vision went cloudy and red. The only thing left was his determination to do this thing, to Lift. This. Damn. Seal!

And it came away in his hand.

Naruto thought he was falling, but he couldn’t tell. Couldn’t see. Wasn’t sure he could breathe. Everything was red, and his ears were ringing.

No, wait. That was a howl.

Slowly vision crept back, but it was a strange kind of vision. He saw scenes, like pictures projected here and there around him. He saw the plaza from above. He saw Jiraiya slumped against the broken wall below, staring up at him. He saw Sasuke, eyes red with the Sharingan, and felt a sudden spike of wary annoyance.

Oh. It was the fox.

He was the fox. He remembered, distantly, that he’d intended that. Well good, then.

He saw Nagato and was aware of the Nine-tails pouncing. He didn’t exactly feel it, not like it was his body. But he knew it was happening.

This was really weird.

He also knew that huge, clawed feet were being set down with at least a little care not to step on the scattering shinobi, so that was okay. Actually, wait, maybe he did feel something. Several somethings that were… waving. Lashing.

He could feel the damn tails.

I told you to have a little respect, the fox growled, and at least that sounded like normal.

Well they feel weird, Naruto defended himself, and then winced. Now he could feel his body, at least his head. Or… maybe the spirit of his head. Whatever it was, it hurt.

Shut up and rest, kit, the fox told him, for once sounding something besides annoyed. Not much besides, but a little. There’s work to be done. My work.

There was a reason that should alarm him, Naruto thought, but he couldn’t remember what it was. Something about what the fox’s work was. His purpose. To… to cleanse rot, he’d said.

To destroy corruption.

Destroy… but that wasn’t…!

Naruto tried to sit up or stand up or something, tried to see and hear, tried to reach out and find the fox again in this strange, formless darkness around him. And what he saw was a ball of seething power blasting away from him, from them, and smashing into Nagato.

No!

He heard the fox sniff, disgusted. Yes, yes, I heard you the first time. You want to heal. You want to heal everything. Your perverted teacher, this Akatsuki cancer, me, who knows what all else. The knowledge of a shrug. You made a deal with me, when you released the seal, and I hold by my word. He’s still alive. Mostly. We’ll see what you make of him. The knowledge of a smile, full of huge teeth, still just a little malicious, and a moment of sight, of Iruka-san, pale and tense, looking up at him, mouth shaping Naruto’s name. Once you wake up.

The world turned inside out again, and Naruto’s senses rushed back, every one of them screaming with pain that clubbed him right back into darkness as he collapsed into Iruka-san’s arms.

A/N: I never thought much of Nagato’s six-corpse stable, and the emaciation that resulted struck me as just another way to bid for our sympathy with a mass murderer. I find it much more interesting to let Nagato use all his paths in his own body, and confront other combatants instead of dropping the chakra-Bomb on a village full of civilians—and then going back on it in the most contrived deus ex machina imaginable. I prefer to let him get his ass righteously kicked and his eyes thereby opened in proper shounen tradition.

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Fourteen

Naruto bounced on his toes in the middle of the rocky clearing B had said he could practice in without tripping over the Island’s animals. He was having So. Much. Fun.

Grinning idiot, the fox muttered in the back of his head. Naruto ignored that; Nine-tails spent a lot of time saying things like that to him lately.

“Hey, hey, ero-sennin,” he grinned. “I bet I can do that move you told me not to do, now.”

“Naruto,” Jiraiya said warningly, starting to get up from his spot under a tree where he had agreed to watch over Naruto’s training when Kakashi-sensei insisted he needed a break. And a drink. But Naruto was sure he could do this one.

He grabbed two clones into being and held out a hand for the Rasengan and concentrated. This was the hard part. As he fed in chakra, one of the clones transformed it to the Wind nature and the other… he grinned wider.

Are you crazy, you idiot? the fox barked, and Naruto felt the hasty rush of the Nine-tails’ power to his arm, shielding him from his own creation.

This will work, he said back, silently the way he’d learned to after a couple of caustic comments from the Nine-tails about babbling Leaf brats.

Only because I’m using half of my power to keep your fool arm in once piece! The fox actually yelped as Naruto pulled a little more power to hold the re-shaped Rasengan’s form. There’s nothing left for anything else if you still want to power that damn thing. You’re completely vulnerable!

“That,” Naruto said out loud, through his teeth, “is what a team is for!” He turned and hurled the Rasenshuriken at the peak of the crag behind him. It held form and struck in an explosion of pulverized rock, and he punched the air in triumph. “Yes!”

“What,” Jiraiya demanded, frozen halfway to his feet and staring at Naruto narrowly, “did you do?”

Naruto grinned some more. “Well, see, if Nine-tails gives me his chakra, I get a lot more than I do just through the seal normally. So there’s enough to protect my arm and still form a Wind Rasengan into a throwing shape!”

Jiraiya frowned. “That has to take a great deal of chakra to accomplish.”

“That’s what he said too,” Naruto agreed. “He says there isn’t any left over. But, like I told him, that’s what a team is for. So I can still use that if I have to.”

Jiraiya sighed, and rubbed his forehead. “Maybe it was a mistake to let Kakashi have the three of you for so long,” he muttered.

Naruto smiled up at him. “Nah, it was just right. Because we’re going to need our teamwork now, aren’t we?”

Jiraiya stood the rest of the way, only to lean back against the tree with a thump. "Not unlikely." His mouth quirked. "You really do remind me a lot of her, sometimes." When Naruto blinked he clarified, "Tsunade. Best healer you ever saw, and absolutely terrifying in the field. The things she would come up with! There was this one time, up at the border of River and Sky. We’d retreated so she could take care of my broken ribs and lung, and a flanking group of Rain-nin just about tripped over us." He took a long drink. "Idiot woman wouldn’t let go of me since she was in the middle of healing, so she electrified herself. Anyone who touched her got their neural signals scrambled like an egg, and she actually magnetized her damn knife with the current, so it drew all the shuriken and kunai." He sighed. "Of course, that strained even her control and reserves, and she nearly passed out when she finished with me. Try not to imitate that part."

Naruto nodded, wide-eyed. She’d never told him that story.

Jiraiya clapped Naruto’s shoulder in passing as he turned them both back toward the encampment, “You’re right, used with a team to support you it should work. I think, since it’s your idea, you should be the one to explain it to Sakura and Sasuke.”

Naruto swallowed hard. “Oh.”


Perfectly concealed in the shifting shadows of the trees, the one who was currently called Sai watched them go and looked back thoughtfully at the broken rubble Naruto’s strike had left. That had been a remarkably powerful attack. He could understand why Danzou-sama had assigned him to keep watch on the Nine-tails and its vessel.

Not that he really needed to understand, of course.

With a flicker, the shadows were empty again.


Another day, another training session. This time, Sakura had insisted very firmly that she and Sasuke were coming along. If he was going to need them to cover him, they would all practice together.

By the time she got to that part, Naruto’s ears had been ringing hard enough from the rest of her reaction that he’d agreed meekly. Of course, that meant that the fox spent a lot of his time growling sidelong at Sasuke. Naruto couldn’t decide whether that was better or worse than having the fox telling him off for sloppy technique.

Sakura flashed over the rocks, playing opponent for this round, nearly glowing the the power of her seal, and her fist punched right through Naruto’s half-formed Rasengan. He yelped as Sasuke dove in front of him, driving Sakura back for an instant with a burst of flame.

“Where’s your concentration today?” Sasuke demanded, rounding on him. “That was pathetic.”

The fox actually whined.

Naruto sighed. “Nine-tails keeps glaring at you; it’s distracting. Though it is kind of funny when you both get pissy about my technique and he gets all pained about having to agree with an Uchiha,” he added reflectively.

Mouthy brat, the fox snapped.

“What?” Naruto asked, looking aside so the other two would know who he was talking to. “It’s totally true.”

Sasuke sighed. “Would it help if I swore to him that I would never try to bind him unless it was to save you?”

No, the Nine-tails answered sharply. That was how I wound up sealed in the first place. Damn humans.

“I think that would just mean he growls at you because you’re like Mito-san, instead of because you’re like Madara,” Naruto relayed, mouth quirking. “He just likes throwing tantrums.”

BRAT! the fox howled, and Naruto snickered.

“I’m glad to see the two of you are getting along so well,” Sasuke said, a bit dryly. “If it’s distracting you, though, we’d better work on it some more. I don’t want to think about what he’ll be saying if we ever do come up against Madara.”

“Bet Naruto would pick up some new names to call his opponents,” Sakura put in, obviously amused by the whole thing. “Come on, then. One more time. Sasuke’s turn to attack.” She tugged up her gloves and set herself beside Naruto.

Naruto took a deep breath and formed a new Wind Rasengan, readying himself to hold it against Sasuke’s Fire techniques. He was getting faster at forming them, no question, but pushing in enough of the Nine-tails’ chakra without bursting the sphere—that was the trick.

The sun slanted down the high blue sky as they worked, one Rasengan after another holding or bursting. It was hours before both Sasuke and the fox were grudgingly satisfied. Naruto collapsed to sprawl out on the thin turf. “I don’t know why you don’t like him better,” he panted at the fox. “You think way too alike.”

“Well no wonder you tease the Nine-tails so much, then,” Sakura laughed, sitting next to him a lot more gracefully. She had a lot more endurance these days, and activated and deactivated her seal like breathing. Naruto was kind of envious; he wished he could do it that easily with the Nine-tails’ chakra.

“He’d better understand that it’s just teasing,” Sasuke muttered darkly, handing the water bottle over to Naruto. Naruto smiled up at him, with the warm feeling in his chest that Sasuke’s little moments of protectiveness always gave him. And maybe the fox was worn out by all his growling or something, because he seemed to settle, too.

They rested in quiet for a while, but it wasn’t long before Sakura cocked her head. “Listen. Is someone coming?”

Sure enough, Iruka-san appeared through the trees, from the direction of the encampment. “There’s a messenger from Konoha coming!” he called to them, waving. “Do you want to be there to see who it is?”

Naruto bounced up to his feet at that. “Yeah!” They had messenger birds pretty regularly, but they hadn’t had a person since they all got to the island and it started moving. Personally, he was dying for some gossip from home.

Most of the Leaf contingent was gathered at the shore to see who’d come, and almost as many people from the other nations. Naruto supposed this was a pretty boring assignment, so far, for people who weren’t figuring out to how fight with a crotchety old fox growling in their ears.

The blue-sailed boat running up the island’s flank was one of the Lightning Country’s, and Naruto could see the sailors hustling around the deck already but he couldn’t see anyone he knew with them. He managed not to sigh, but he did slump a little, only to be nudged by Sasuke.

“The passengers will stay out of the way until landing,” Sasuke said quietly. "I learned that fast, traveling with Jiraiya."

Naruto perked up again. “Oh.” He grinned a little and leaned against Sasuke’s shoulder in silent thanks.

Sure enough, as the boat eased up against the rocky inlet, more heads appeared and Ino squealed. “Shikamaru! It’s Shikamaru and Chouji!”

Watching her light up, Naruto wondered if Sakura was really right, and Ino would be easier to deal with now her real team was here. He sure hoped so. He bet her Intelligence team hoped so too. Everyone crowded down toward the boat as Shikamaru and Chouji climbed up to the shore.

“Shikamaru?” Ino whispered, stopping short. Naruto’s head snapped up and around to stare at her. She sounded afraid.

Abruptly, Ino was elbowing ruthlessly through the small crowd, shoving other ninja out of her path with no regard for rank. She caught Shikamaru’s shoulders. “What is it? What happened?”

Everyone quieted at that, and Shikamaru’s voice was clear in the silence, though he didn’t raise it.

“Two of Akatsuki were in the Fire Country. They attacked the Fire Temple before we found them. Asuma-san…” Shikamaru closed his eyes. “Asuma-san was killed.”

Ino made a small, sharp sound, biting her lip hard enough to turn it white.

“Raidou-san’s team joined us,” Shikamaru went on steadily. “We picked up Mitarashi-san’s team when we reported in, and Hyuuga Tokuma located the Akatsuki pair when they came back toward the village again. That time, we stopped them.”

“Jiraiya-san should hear about this,” Kakashi-sensei said quietly, coming to rest a hand on Shikamaru’s shoulder. Shikamaru just nodded and caught Ino’s hand when she started to protest.

“I’ll be there after I’ve reported.” Their eyes held for a long moment, and Ino nodded like he’d said something more.

“C’mon, Chouji,” she said briskly. “I’ll get you guys settled in the Leaf building.”

The crowd broke up and followed slowly in Kakashi-sensei and Shikamaru’s wake back toward the encampment. Naruto’s team closed up around Ino and Chouji, along with Kiba, Hinata, and Shino, silent support for their yearmates.

“Shikamaru’s still really torn up,” Chouji was saying as they climbed. “He almost scared me, when he was setting up the ambush for Hidan, the one who killed Asuma-sensei. But, you know, I think what really hurts is that he can’t do more for Kurenai-san.”

Ino winced. “Fuck. Is she…?”

“She’s pretty broken up,” Chouji said softly, looking down at the path.

“Kurenai-sensei,” Hinata whispered, hand pressed against her lips.

“What?” Naruto asked her, worried by all this cryptic concern. “Is there something wrong with Kurenai-san?”

“Kurenai-sensei is going to have a child,” she said softly. “By Asuma-san.”

Naruto’s eyes widened. “Oh shit.” Unwanted information cascaded through his brain, about pregnancy and stress and all the really bad things that a shinobi’s usual coping methods could do to a developing baby. “She’s got a good doctor, right?” he asked anxiously. “I mean, she’s got someone who knows what they’re doing, right? They’re not going to let her drink too much or spar till she falls down or anything stupid like usual, right?”

All seven of them stared at him for a blank moment before Sakura and then Ino started laughing, and Kiba rolled his eyes. “Who was it decided Naruto should be a medic, again?” he asked thin air. “I think you mean ‘stupid like you’.”

Naruto planted his fists on his hips and glared. “I’m serious! There are, like, lectures on all the crazy stuff shinobi do and how you have to remind them not to if they’re pregnant!”

“Kurenai-sensei is more sensible than that,” Shino remarked.

“And I asked Neji-niisan to look after her, when we had to leave,” Hinata added, reassuring.

“Well all right, then.” Naruto tried to put hospital horror stories out of his mind while they found a room for Chouji and Shikamaru, and settled down to wait for Shikamaru to return.

It didn’t take long. Ino pulled him down onto the bedroll between her and Chouji almost before he was all the way through the door, and Naruto couldn’t say she was wrong. Shikamaru looked older, today. Harder and darker. Naruto felt the Nine-tails stir inside him.

“Chouji and I will be part of Raidou-san’s team, for now,” Shikamaru said quietly. “We’ll keep looking for Akatsuki’s bases in Fire Country.” He looked up at Naruto and there was fire in those dark eyes, the kind of fire Naruto was a lot more used to seeing in Sasuke’s. “They won’t get past us.”

Naruto clenched a fist, frustrated. “We should stop hiding, me and B. They’ll come to us, if we stop hiding, and then this wouldn’t have happened!”

For a moment Shikamaru seemed to waver, and then he closed his eyes with a sigh. “Yes, it probably would,” he said, low. “Unless we’d had information beforehand about what those zombie freaks could do. The one who killed Asuma-san couldn’t die. I mean really couldn’t die. And his ritual meant every wound to him happened to his opponent too.”

Sakura pressed a hand to her mouth. “Shit,” she hissed though it.

A corner of Shikamaru’s mouth twitched up in a grim not-smile. “Yeah. I didn’t see it fast enough.”

Ino smacked him on the shoulder, hard. “You stop that! It wasn’t your fault!” She paused and glanced over at Naruto. “It wasn’t anyone’s fault but Akatsuki’s,” she finished, soft and steady. “So you shut up too, Naruto. We’re not going to hang you out for bait.”

“Asuma-san,” Hinata whispered, voice shaky, and leaned into Kiba when he wrapped an arm around her shoulders. More firmly she repeated, “Asuma-san’s memory does honor to his clan. We shouldn’t… shouldn’t take that away.”

Naruto scrunched up his face, trying to work that out. “Huh?” he finally asked.

A breath of a laugh escaped Shikamaru, though he still looked down at his hands. “Yeah. Even if we’re not part of a noble clan… we’re still shinobi of the Leaf.” He looked up at last. “We took down two of Akatsuki and only lost two lives. We did that without risking them getting their hands on our host. We did it to protect our village and country—the lives in our care.” He took a slow, trembling breath. “Including our village’s children. Asuma-san died to keep those things safe—not happily, but willingly.” He smiled, a little crookedly, at Naruto. “You need to let other people do that too, you know; it’s not just you.”

Naruto opened his mouth to protest, and closed it again slowly. If Asuma-san had felt the same way he did, about protecting precious things… he looked down, swallowing against the ball of sadness and pride swirling inside him like one of his own Rasengan. “Yeah,” he said, husky. “That’s… that’s something that should be honored. You’re right, Hinata.”

“It will be,” Sasuke said, resting a hand on Naruto’s shoulder. “Like the others who have gone before.”

Hinata nodded against Kiba’s shoulder. “He left this in our hands. Now it’s our turn,” she said softly.

That hot spark of fury flickered in Shikamaru’s eyes again for a moment. “Yes. It is.”

“When we get back,” Chouji spoke up firmly, laying one big hand on Shikamaru’s back, and Shikamaru smiled at him, rueful and sidelong.

“Yeah, I hear you.” He stretched his arms up and let out a breath and looked a little more his usual self as he asked Ino, “So, how’s your Intelligence team here doing?”

“Oh my god, never speak of them to me, ever!” Ino waved her hands wildly. “Sato and Tanaka broke up right before we started this mission, and they’ll barely even speak to each other unless there’s actually a blade coming at one of them. And then there’s Sai, who makes Naruto look well-socialized!”

Kiba blinked. “Wow.” Naruto growled and Shino quietly drew Hinata against his own side, clearing the way for Naruto to jump on Kiba and scuffle.

Ino pointed at them. “That! He’s even worse than that!”

Everyone was laughing a little by the time Naruto finished knuckling Kiba’s head and sat back down with his own team, and he congratulated himself on a job well done. Ino looked satisfied, too, and he figured she’d had the same thing in mind as he had. It wasn’t long before they all broke up to their own rooms to sleep, and he hoped they might just all manage to get to sleep, now.


On the mainland, a lean man with hypnotically ringed eyes lifted his hand from the head of a slumped Cloud ninja. Slowly, his eyes focused again. “They’re on Cloud’s Island Turtle, out on the sea. They’ll be moving constantly.”

The silent-footed woman beside him cupped her hands, staring into them for a moment. When she parted them a flock of paper birds fluttered up into the sky and swooped east, toward the coast. “Don’t worry, Nagato. We’ll find them.”


Being in the temple really weirded Naruto out, but it was the only place where he could practice full transformation. At least, the only place he could practice it without totally freaking out the whole encampment, so the temple it was.

Not that he had much to freak anyone out with, so far.

“This is ridiculous.” Naruto lashed the fan of furry tails trailing behind him.

That’s my pride you’re waving around, Nine-tails snapped. Have a little respect, brat!

“No, no,” B waved a hand. “It’s a good sign that you can manifest all the tails. That’s the last step before a full transformation.”

Naruto sighed. At least he was getting somewhere. Even if Sakura had really, truly lost her mind, when he started working on this, and said the tails were cute. Cute! As if! The Nine-tails had hunkered down inside him in a disgusted huff after that one, and he hadn’t been able to get a damn thing more done that day.

“You’re gonna need time for this.” B leaned against the temple wall, large arms folded. “It takes a lot of trust to really transform, and you and the Nine-tails haven’t been talking for long.”

Naruto scowled and kicked a stone stair; he knew it was probably true, but that didn’t mean he had to like it.

Omoi, sitting cross-legged at B’s feet, looked up at that, completely solemn. “Hey, you should be careful. I mean, what if you accidentally kicked a secret switch and set off the self-destruct for the temple and then that set off an avalanche down into the valley…”

Karui rolled her eyes and promptly put him in a headlock. Naruto grinned a little as Omoi flailed theatrically; she sure was easy to wind up. He could see why Omoi did it so much.

“Stop complaining, Naruto,” Sasuke called from the steps off to the other side. “Just work on your Rasengan while you’ve got the tails out.”

Naruto sighed. “Yeah, yeah, fine.” He supposed practice was good even if it wasn’t quite full power yet. And, in a way, the tails were a bonus. He chewed on his tongue with concentration, arching two of the tails forward to press against the chakra gathering in his palm.

As long as he had the tails, he didn’t need clones to do this. That part was kind of cool.

He had just completed a Rasenshuriken with his tails when the temple door slammed open. One of the Sand genin stood in it, panting. “Akatsuki,” he gasped, “they’re here! Commander Jiraiya is down!”

The Rasenshuriken came undone in a clap like thunder as Naruto sprinted for the door, jumping straight over the Sand-nin. He barely noticed Sakura and Sasuke coming up on either side or his forgotten tails streaming behind him as he streaked down the path toward the encampment, heart in his mouth. The crags and trees around them were alive with blasts and crashes, and Naruto wondered for a flashing moment whether Akatsuki had somehow had way more people than they’d all thought.

Leaping down the last steps on the temple path, Naruto looked around wildly, head whipping back and forth as he searched through the chaos for Jiraiya.

“There!” Sasuke snapped, red eyes narrow and sharp, pointing to the cracked wall of the building the Mist shinobi had taken over.

A body with long white hair lay at the base of the wall.

Naruto pounded over and threw himself down, only vaguely aware of Sakura spinning around to guard his back, of Darui standing on the broken wall and barking orders, of B coming behind them, of Sasuke on his knees on the other side of Jiraiya with wide, haunted eyes, hands reaching out helplessly. Jiraiya was barely breathing, each faint breath caught short. Broken ribs, then. Internal bleeding probably. Heat under Naruto’s fingertips as he ran them delicately over Jiraiya’s skull warned of bleeding there too, sluggish now because Jiraiya had almost no blood left. His throat was half crushed. And…

Naruto bared his teeth, hands pausing over Jiraiya’s stomach.

“B,” Darui was saying, voice hard, as Naruto looked up, “there are giant animals all over the island. Can you get the native animals after them without killing us too?”

“On it,” B rumbled, running past them without breaking stride.

“Darui-san,” Naruto said, low. “I’m going to try something. Don’t stop me.”

Darui frowned down at him. “What are you going to do?”

Naruto’s hands were already lighting up with chakra as he reached down, down, crying out in wordless demand to Nine-tails. “I’m going to heal him.”

Sakura knelt down beside them with her back to the wall. “Get me Hinata,” she snapped, “and we can cover him.”

“Like I would stop a healing?” Darui muttered before yelling for someone to find Hyuuga Hinata. Naruto shut all of that out. Sakura and Sasuke would take care of it; he trusted them. He had to, because what he was about to try wasn’t actually possible. Jiraiya had a broken spine. Nerve injuries could sometimes be fixed, especially if the nerves were intact and just not signaling, or signaling wrong. A spinal cord that was physically torn couldn’t be. It wasn’t possible.

Well, neither was reviving someone who was dead.

He was going to do it anyway.

He focused down and down again, tighter than he’d ever done before. His hands were glowing with the fine patterning of chakra that made the base for Mystic Palms. The bleeding was stopping, and new blood was generating fast. Good. Jiraiya would live long enough for him to do this, though he’d be a while recovering the body mass being eaten up by this healing. Naruto reached deeper into himself, and felt the fox’s agreement, casual but ungrudging. Naruto gritted his teeth as that wild chakra rushed through him, sharp-edged, fighting to hold it, to work it…

His tails reached forward.

As they fanned and wrapped over Jiraiya, the raging pressure, the ragged pain of handling so much fox chakra smoothed out. Naruto rested his forehead on Jiraiya’s chest, dizzy and panting, vision starting to go fractured and dark with the clash of alien and familiar as he molded chakra with his tails, wove it finer and finer, until he could string it between the snapped ends of spinal nerves, teasing them back together. Slowly, slowly, and he was gasping for air now, human hands fisted in Jiraiya’s shirt as the signals of human and fox body warred up and down his own spine. The torn nerve ends crept closer, closer as he poured all his power into this most delicate of work, chakra scattering out of his control around the edges.

He was losing too much energy for the work he was accomplishing. The pace of healing was too slow. This would take too much to finish, more than he had. But he couldn’t stop now, he couldn’t, he wouldn’t! Jiraiya had been one of the first to believe in him, to trust him and teach him, been the one to pass on the things his parents couldn’t. His teacher and Sasuke’s, one of the people who had helped put Sasuke back together. Naruto didn’t care how much it cost him. He would find a way!

His own strength was giving out, but the fox’s strength was still raging through him, threatening to overwhelm him, and there were still gaping canyons of micrometers to go, and he screamed, half at the fox and half at Jiraiya and mostly at the universe to let this work. The fox snorted, in his head, and the inhuman chakra he shaped steadied for five precious heartbeats more.

And it was done.

Naruto collapsed over Jiraiya, breath sobbing in his lungs. You owe me one, idiot kit, whispered in the back of his battered-feeling brain, and a laugh wracked his body. Yeah, he agreed.

“It’s done!” he heard someone cry, and hands slapped down on his back, steadying his faltering heartbeat, easing his clenched lungs. Two more hands lifted his shoulders up and another set traced lightly over his chest, down his arms, pressing sharply here and there. He could feel that easing the tremble of his overextended chakra and opened his eyes wearily to smile at Hinata. She smiled back, tremulous though her hands were steady.

“…absolute idiot,” the medic behind him was saying through his teeth. “Miraculous fucking moron, I can’t believe you did that, what kind of absolute brainless wonder…”

Naruto sat up mostly under his own power as his chakra and the fox’s settled slowly back into balance. “I’m okay,” he said, breathless.

“You are insane,” the medic snapped, and Naruto craned his head around to see that it was the blue-haired senior medic from Mist. “And the Hokage is insane too, to teach you something that dangerous!” He sat back on his heels with a long sigh, finally lifting his hands from Naruto’s back. “But you do seem to be recovering; that’s some amazing vitality you have. If we get our beasts back, perhaps I’ll suggest to the Mizukage that we should train one as a medic.” He scooted around Naruto and checked Jiraiya. “He’ll be all right too, I think.”

Jiraiya stirred and Sasuke’s hands, which Naruto finally recognized as the ones holding him upright, tightened hard on his shoulders. Sasuke was looking down at his teacher with fear lurking at the back of his eyes. Jiraiya coughed painfully and pried his eyes open to squint up at them. “Need a drink,” he husked.

Sasuke inhaled alarmingly and Naruto ducked on reflex. “Shut up you absolute idiot!” Sasuke’s voice echoed off the buildings. “You nearly died! Stay where you are and recover like you have more than two brain cells under all that hair!”

Naruto grinned down at Jiraiya as the man’s eyes started to dance, sunken as they were. “What, don’t I even get a pretty nurse?” Jiraiya asked in a pitiful tone, only slightly marred by the lingering hitch in his breathing.

“No,” Sasuke said, very definitely.

Naruto was snickering and the Mist medic was rolling his eyes and Hinata was edging away cautiously when the second in command for Sound came skidding around the corner. “Darui sent me back. Where’s the casualty?” she barked.

“Karin-san.” The Mist-nin brightened. “Perfect.” He waved a hand at Jiraiya. “The Commander needs to be on his feet again, and he’s still missing a lot of blood and all his stamina. Can you do it?”

Karin snorted, throwing back one of her loose sleeves as she strode to Jiraiya’s side. “Of course I can. Out of the way, you.” She hip-checked Naruto aside and held out her bared arm to Jiraiya while Naruto sputtered. “Bite me,” she ordered brusquely.

Jiraiya blinked. “This is a bit sudden, isn’t it? No dinner first, no drinks even?”

Karin turned nearly the color of her own hair. “Shut up and bite me, you old pervert,” she yelled, “before I smack you into next week!”

The Mist medic drew the rest of them back, around the corner into the overgrown stone plaza between buildings. “Karin-san can heal very bad injuries very quickly, this way,” he murmured. “Best to let her get on with it.”

Naruto snickered. She did seem to have the right bedside manner for someone dealing with the ero-sennin. “Okay, so…” he looked around, wobbling only slightly. “Hey, wait, where’d Darui-san go?”

“He left about the time your tails caught fire,” Sakura said dryly. “He said he’d try to decoy Akatsuki long enough for you to come out of it. He didn’t seem too happy at the time.”

“I did warn him what I was doing,” Naruto mumbled.

“No, you really didn’t. But that’s okay.” She gave him a beady eye. “It is okay, right? You’re recovered? You’re not holding out on the team strategist or anything?”

Naruto held up his hands hastily. “I promise not! It’s gonna hurt if I have to shape too much chakra soon, but Hinata and, um,” he stopped and looked at the Mist-nin guiltily.

“Maeda Kazuki,” the man supplied, mouth quirked.

“Hinata and Maeda-san got me stable and all,” Naruto finished. “So as soon as Jiraiya-san is better, we can go find these Akatsuki guys and kick ass.”

“No need to find us,” a hoarse, quiet voice said from above them, and Naruto spun around, heart tripping, to see a man in one of those damn red cloud robes standing on top of the command building and looking down at them.

Or rather… at him.

Iron Under Water

Sparring could be a lot like sex, for some shinobi. And there was no question that most ninja out dancing were more or less sparring to a beat. But this was the first time Sakura had ever seen two people dancing, sparring, or having sex so intensely without ever touching.

“Mmm, look at that,” she murmured, leaning back against Sasuke’s chest.

“Hm?” Naruto asked around Sasuke’s earlobe.

“I think she means Hinata and Neji,” Sasuke said, husky, gathering her closer on the bench they were all sharing.

Hinata and Neji were on the dance floor, moving around each other just a breath apart, flowing like water, like one person breathing in and out. It was the Gentle Fist, and yet it really, really wasn’t. Naruto’s breath drew in audibly as Neji twisted his hands around Hinata’s outstretched arm, skimming just above her skin, and she turned with it, sinking right down to the floor under the not-force of that move. In the next beat she twisted fluidly on her knees and rose up again inside Neji’s arms, hands pressing them open as he gave back a fraction before her palms. The way Neji’s lips parted on a silent gasp as he yielded to the not-pressure of her hands and stood for one instant utterly exposed, if only Hinata had chosen to let her hand touch him, made Sakura swallow dryly. She could see the bone-wrenching force of those moves, but perfect control that held them back, made them flirtation instead of threat.

“Wow,” Naruto whispered, and she could feel his hand tightening against Sasuke’s stomach.

Neji turned to let Hinata’s hands sweep past him as she stepped in. She recoiled in a long, whiplash curl from his returning hand not quite against her ribs, bending backward until her hair brushed the floor and his hand passed over her and it was Neji’s turn to give way as her arm swept up. They moved fast as the music ran, but never hurried, never touching, utterly aware of each other. As they pivoted around each other, chest to chest, their parted lips were so close Sakura felt like she was watching them kiss. Or maybe something more intimate than that. Those pale, locked eyes were burning in the lights of the dance floor.

Hinata smiled with a flash of mischief as the beat paused, and the quirk of Neji’s mouth answered her. On the downbeat, she drove a palm straight for his chest and he swirled around her, fingers striking at her back only to be flung wide by the sweep of her arm as she spun. Every movement was unrestrained, now, full force strikes thrown aside by counters that still never actually touched skin. It was as arrogant a display of power and control as Sakura had ever seen, and heat tightened her stomach as she watched them tease each other with that force, always caught back at the last second.

They didn’t touch until the very last, as the music faded. Hinata’s hand flashed out and Neji’s arms fell to his sides at last, accepting her blow, trusting her control. Hinata’s palm hovered a breath away from his chest for one last beat and finally, softly, came to rest against him. Sasuke made a low, husky sound in Sakura’s ear and she shivered. Hinata smiled up at her cousin, soft and open, and his rare smile answered her, careless of anyone who might be watching. Neji’s hand caught hers as they finally stepped apart a little, and their fingers stayed twined as they left the floor.

“What… what was that about?” Sakura asked softly. "I’ve never even seen them spar together in public, much less do something like that."

“Well, she’s won Neji, hasn’t she?” Sasuke murmured. “He probably wanted everyone to know it, and see why.”

“I was right the first time.” Naruto slid his arms around both of them. “Nobles are weird. But that was really hot.”

Sasuke laughed and leaned back against him. “You thought so?” he purred. “Come on, then. Let’s dance.” He flowed up to his feet, pulling them with him toward the floor, and Naruto’s teeth gleamed in the lights as he followed.

Sakura laughed too, as Sasuke pulled her back snug against him, and she pulled Naruto tight against her, feeling the ripple of movement slide from one to another of them. It was good, the open release of just moving together, and all the more so tonight after watching all that passionate not-touching. She caught a glimpse of Hinata leaning in Neji’s arms among the tables, hands laced possessively behind his neck, and smiled.

Maybe she’d stop worrying quite so much about Hinata.

End

A/N: The soundtrack for this story is unquestionably Kuroki Meisa’s "Wired Life".

Cloud Hands

When Hyuuga Hinata was three years old, her playmate Neji-niisan went away for two weeks. When he came back his eyes were darker than they had been. He still smiled at her, though, and tugged gently on her hair, and told her he would protect her, and she loved him more than anyone.

When Hinata was five, she was stolen out of her room in the middle of the night, and woke to darkness and confusion and falling—falling bodies all around her. But her father was there, and took her home again, and everything was all right. It was that year, though, that Neji-niisan stopped smiling at her.

When Hinata was seven, she fainted from exhaustion during training. Her father was frowning when she came back to awareness, groggy and limp-muscled.

When Hinata was eight she entered the Academy and, for the first time, trained with other children who were not Hyuuga. They were loud and cheerful and rude, and never waited long enough to hear her answers when they asked questions. She tried to find Neji-niisan during lunch, to sit with him, but he always vanished as soon as he saw her.

When Hinata was ten, she lost every match in a week to Hanabi, and her father told her she was no longer Hyuuga’s heir, and turned away.

When Hinata was eleven, she fell in love a second time, with one of the loud, rude, cheerful boys, because she saw how every back was turned toward him and how, still, he never gave up.

When Hinata turned fourteen, she gathered all her courage in her hands and walked into the training hall while Neji-niisan was working, and asked to train with him. Quietly, face shadowed by the wooden slats of the window, he agreed.

That was the year she began to wonder whether she could change fate, too.


“Chichi-ue?” Hinata hovered in the door to his rooms, nervous. “May I ask for a key to the clan archives?”

Her father looked up, brows rising. “The archives? Why?”

Hinata looked down and murmured, “So that I may learn more of my ancestors. And I thought, perhaps… perhaps there are techniques I might be able to use…”

He sighed, laying down his ink brush. “I doubt there is anything that will help you. But if you wish to search, very well.” He rose and went to one of the small boxes along the wall, sliding it open and selecting a small key. “Don’t take it out of the house.”

“Of course not,” Hinata murmured, still cringing from the remark about nothing helping her. “Thank you, Chichi-ue.”

“Mm.” He had already returned to his writing, and she slipped out silently, clutching the key. This was her chance—her hope.

She stole down the halls, away from the noise of conversations, of training, of food being prepared, toward the still quiet of waiting words.


At first, the sheer volume of the records intimidated her. She’d never be able to get through all of them, at least not quickly; it would take months, years even to read all of these. But she remembered Naruto and his determination. She took a breath full of paper dust, and stood on her toes to take down the scrolls from the clan’s founding from their shelf. She would start at the beginning. And she would keep going until she found what she was looking for.

She unrolled the crackling scroll with a delicate hand, only opening a few lines at a time.

…these eyes see to the heart of the world. They may see, also, to the heart of our enemies. My sister is willing, for the sake of our family, to try if we can fix these eyes in our line. We will give the hearts of our enemies into the hands of our children.

And what, Hinata had to wonder, were the children of Hyuuga supposed to do with those hearts once they held them?

She read on, frowning a little, in the steady light of her lamp.


“Hinata? Oi, Hinata! You awake?” Kiba waved a hand in front of her face and Hinata stifled a yawn.

“Of course I’m awake, Kiba-kun.” She smiled at him, reassuring.

He hmphed and sprawled next to her in the grass of the hill where they waited for their teacher. “Training is good, but don’t do so much of it you’re asleep at mission briefings, yeah?” He glanced at her sidelong as Akamaru flopped down between them. “That bastard Neji isn’t being too hard on you, is he?”

“No, no, it’s nothing like that,” Hinata said hastily. Kiba still growled at Neji-niisan whenever they met; even a year later, he hadn’t forgiven what happened at their first chuunin exam.

“Well okay, then.” Kiba leaned back on his elbows, head tossed back in the sunlight. He looked so much like Akamaru, now flopped over on his back with his paws in the air, that Hinata had to smile. She rubbed Akamaru’s tummy gently and he wriggled with pleasure, panting up at her with a dog-grin.

“Kiba-kun?” she said slowly, thinking. “Do you… does your clan breed your nin-dogs? Breed them for the things they are?” She could feel Shino’s eyes on her, from where he leaned against the tree at the top of the hill.

“Well we keep track of their breeding, yeah.” Kiba reached over and tugged on one of Akamaru’s ears, smiling the way he only did for his dog. “But the intensive breeding… that was a long time ago.”

“Has your clan mentioned a marriage to you?” Shino asked quietly. Hinata’s mouth quirked, a little sad. Of course, another noble would think of that immediately.

“No. No, it’s just… I’ve been reading some of our old records these last couple months. Some of the things that were done to fix the Byakugan in our bloodline were… more than I was expecting.” Brother and sister hadn’t surprised her, but breeding children to their parents… she was glad she lived in a more civilized time.

Shino just nodded, understanding, but Kiba’s eyes darkened. “Hinata…” He subsided with a growl when she shook her head at him. Really, she’d already known that ruthlessness ran in the Hyuuga blood, along with their eyes.

“All right, everyone!” Kurenai-sensei waved at them from the bottom of the hill. “I have the briefing, let’s get going! Hinata,” she added, as they scrambled up and trotted down to join her, “is everything all right?”

Hinata set aside her reading and the thoughts it brought with a soft toss of her head and smiled up at her teacher, shyly reassuring. “Yes, Kurenai-sensei.”

This was a clan matter. She was a daughter of Hyuuga. She would find her own way.


Neji-niisan stopped with his palm against her diaphragm and Hinata straightened with a sigh. “I was too slow blocking,” she murmured.

“It isn’t speed you need there, Hinata-sama,” he said, frowning a little. “You could have avoided that simply by shifting your stance forward and turning your body.”

She blinked and ran through the sequence in her head, and blushed hotly. “Oh.”

Neji-niisan studied her, head tipped to the side. “You’ve been missing that more often, lately, and trying to block when you don’t need to. I think perhaps you’re focusing too tightly.”

Hinata clasped her hands together, looking down; even her determination seemed to go wrong when it came to her own clan’s techniques. She’d hoped, once, that reading the old records might help her with that also, but after most of a year she understood no better. She started when Neji-niisan touched her wrist. “You’re not flinching any more,” he said gently. “That’s the important part. If you only have the courage to close in, that’s when you can use the greatest strength of our art.” With a faint smile, he added, “Ignore the hand…”

“Control the space,” she recited automatically. Though how a person was supposed to counter a strike by ignoring it she had never understood and no one had ever explained. She sighed softly.

After a quiet moment, Neji-niisan said, slowly, “I think perhaps you were never taught quite what that rule means, Hinata-sama.” He beckoned her back in and took up a stance opposite her, nearly knee to knee. She obediently matched him. “Watch my eyes, Hinata-sama,” he said quietly. Very, very slowly his hand moved toward her in an open palm strike, and she tensed, arm twitching, ready to strike it aside. “Not my hand, my eyes,” Neji-niisan reminded her, and she fixed her eyes back on his hastily.

And started.

She could see his whole body. With her eyes fixed on his, she could see the movement of his whole body—almost as if she had the Byakugan activated!

Neji smiled that faint smile of his again. “There. Now you can see, right?”

Breathless, eyes very wide, Hinata slowly shifted forward. His hand brushed right past her ribs and hers drifted forward through the open space his strike made until it came to rest against his chest. They stood that way for a long moment until she gathered enough of her wits to step back. She was breathing fast.

“That’s the nature of our entire art,” Neji-niisan told her calmly. “To see the whole space, and to move based on that whole pattern.” He held up his hand. “Not just this one part of it.”

“Oh.” Hinata pressed her clasped hands to her mouth, shaking a little. She understood. She understood! She’d seen! “A…” Her voice broke and she had to clear her throat. “Again?” she asked, husky.

This time, Neji’s smile was a full one.


The door to the Hyuuga archives opened and Hinata looked up, blinking in the sudden flood of light. Her father stood in the doorway.

“What have you found today, daughter?”

It was the question he asked every time he came here. She thought he meant it kindly, meant to say to her that what she did interested him as it had not for so many years. But it felt more like a challenge—a cross-examination, to determine whether her work had any worth. She tried to answer anyway.

Hinata looked down and touched the book spread out before her with delicate fingers. “I’m reading the records of the eighth head of the clan. He…” She nibbled her lip. “He took the leadership of the clan from his older brother.”

“Ah. Yes, that used to happen, I’m afraid.” He came and rested a hand on her shoulder. “Some of this must be very disturbing to you to read.”

“It’s very different,” she said diplomatically. To herself, she thought it had probably worked better. In that day, Neji would have been the clan heir. And wouldn’t that have been better for everyone? She certainly wouldn’t have fought him for it! And he was just as much Hyuuga blood as she, so shouldn’t the strongest lead, if that was what mattered?

And if that wasn’t what mattered, why had Hanabi been made heir in her place? Reading the archives made her think of these things.

“Well, it’s time to eat soon,” her father said, hearing none of her thoughts. “Come.”

Hinata nodded obediently and marked her place and followed him out.

The archives made her think. The curse seal dictated much about how their clan lived. But she had found no mention of the seal at all, yet. It made her nervous, and it made her hope. They had lived for so long without the seal. Surely, then, they could find a way to live without it now.

Surely, if she just searched far enough, she could find a way. If she could just see enough of the larger pattern—not the single hand of the seal, but the whole space of their history—surely she would see the space where the Hyuuga could move next.

She thought of Neji-niisan’s instruction, and smiled down at the floor of the corridor.


Kiba cursed under his breath. “Lost them again!”

They’d been tracking a group of strange shinobi through Leaf’s territory for hours, and the intruders were proving themselves skilled. Kurenai-sensei’s mouth tightened with clear annoyance and she paused on a branch. "Hinata."

Hinata nodded silently and put her back to a tree trunk, folding her hands together and activating her Byakugan. “Nothing close,” she whispered, and widened her field. Wider. Wider. She was unfocusing, which used to be where she stopped, thinking that was the end of her range. Now she knew to keep going. Wider. There. “Three point two kilometers,” she reported, “Northwest, fifteen degrees.”

“Can you tell how many of them?” Kurenai-sensei asked.

Hinata took a breath and narrowed her field of vision, pressing back harder against the tree. This always made her dizzy. “Five,” she gasped.

Kurenai’s elegant brows drew down in a frustrated scowl. “Too many of them for us to take on ourselves without observing more closely. We’ll close up slowly, then. Kiba! Send Akamaru back to the village to bring back another team to support us.” While Kiba was talking softly to Akamaru, she laid a hand on Hinata’s shoulder. “We’ll rely on you to track them until we’re close enough for Shino’s bugs to go on ahead.”

Hinata straightened, determined. “Right.”

She kept her focus tight on the intruders as they moved, slowly closing the distance between them. She was getting better at this, at holding the Byakugan and even altering her field of view a little bit while moving.

Suddenly, though, the distance was closing a lot faster.

“They’ve turned around to meet us,” she reported, and Kurenai spat a chopped off curse as she landed.

“Kiba, stay up here,” Kurenai ordered. “Hinata, Shino, down on the ground. We’ll hold them if we can, but if we can’t then we’ll retreat back toward the village and draw them down our backtrail to meet our support team.” Her hands came together in the Monkey and she vanished from sight.

From all sight but Hinata’s, that was.

Hinata set herself at the foot of a tree, reminding herself to breathe deep and slow. She could do this. She could. She spread her focus out again, encompassing all of her team, reaching outward. The intruders were coming fast; she let the edge of her range shrink again on their heels, back to a more comfortable two hundred meters. She saw Kurenai’s chakra flare and two of the intruders suddenly stumble, wrapped in her illusion. “One on one,” she called to Shino and Kiba, and then one of the intruders was on her, dropping from the trees to crouch, poised, in front of her.

She wanted to freeze. She wanted to hide. But she wouldn’t do that; this was a mission and she was a shinobi, and she could do this. Watch his eyes, she reminded herself, not his hands!

And she could see. She could see the path of the kunai coming toward her in the shape of her opponent’s arm, and swayed aside from it easily. Easily! A breath of excitement joined her determination and she ran forward to close with him.

It doesn’t matter how much power the enemy strikes with, Neji-niisan’s voice said in her memory, calm and quiet, because you won’t be there. That is our defense, Hinata-sama. She kept her eyes on the intruder’s, watching the shape of his movements, and slid aside from blow after blow, stepping through the openings his attacks left again and again. Her return blows didn’t have great power, but, she reminded herself, they didn’t need to. Her enemy was stumbling, now, organs laboring under the jarring shocks of her open palm, chakra sliding out of his control. He was starting to leave himself more and more open.

There!

Before the thought even finished forming in her mind, her hand had closed into a fist and she’d taken one perfect step forward, shifting with all the momentum of her entire body, and driven that fist into his solar plexus. And he fell.

Hinata stood over him for a breath, almost stunned. She’d done it.

Abruptly, she noticed that there were far more chakra signatures in her field of vision than there should have been, and she spun around, looking frantically for her teammates…

Sakura dropped out of the trees beside her, breathless and smiling. “Good job, Hinata! We’re just finishing up with the rest of them. Two got away, but we’ve still got three of them for Interrogation to deal with.” More Leaf ninja gathered around them, including Hinata’s team. Kurenai had another of the intruders slung over her shoulder and was talking quietly with one of the new team. Hinata only recognized them vaguely; perhaps they were from Intelligence, if Sakura-san was here too.

She squeaked as Naruto came dashing through the trees and landed in a huff. “Lost them. They must have someone who’s good at illusion with them.” He glanced down at Hinata’s opponent and then up at her with a grin. “You got one?”

Hinata just nodded wordlessly, blushing at that smile.

“She did.” Sakura put a toe under the man’s shoulder to flip him over. Her mouth tightened as she looked down at him. “Hidden Sound. Again.” She beckoned to another of the newcomers. “Tie them securely, and we’ll take them back right now.”

“Is this… is this your team?” Hinata managed, softly, glancing between Sakura-san and Naruto-kun. They were both chuunin, now, after all, and they’d passed last season, only two years after graduation. She wouldn’t be at all surprised if one of them were put in command of a new team. Sakura snorted.

“Well, most of them are my team for the moment. That one,” she waved at Naruto, “invited himself along.”

“Hey, I was bored!” Naruto-kun protested.

“Is that what you’re going to tell Tsunade-sama, when she asks why you slacked off your exercises?”

Naruto sputtered for a moment before turning back brightly to Hinata while Sakura gave him a mock glare. “So, hey, you guys are going to take the next chuunin exam, aren’t you?” He nudged her with a friendly elbow, making her squeak again. “It’ll be a cakewalk this time, you’ll see!”

“Course it’ll be a cakewalk,” Kiba declared, coming up behind Hinata to loom protectively.

“Oh, I know it will be for Hinata,” Naruto said innocently. “Dunno about you, though.”

Hinata just stood and blushed while Naruto and Kiba’s teasing degenerated into wrestling. Eventually, Sakura waded in and pulled Naruto out, rolling her eyes. She was so at ease with him, Hinata thought wistfully, the way Hinata herself never had been. If Naruto-kun took up with anyone, it would probably be Sakura-san or Sasuke-kun. She’d known that for a year and more. But it still felt good to have Naruto smile at her, encourage her. Maybe… maybe he would even be there to cheer her on again, if her team did take the exam again next season.

She would like that. Naruto-kun made her feel like she could do things. Maybe even the things she wanted the very most to do.


Hinata stared down at the page before her with some astonishment. Just when she thought she understood the shape of her clan, something different revealed itself.

The fourteenth head of the clan had been blind.

She’d spent almost two years reading volumes of journals and chronicles from the founding of the clan forward, and the records that filled some of the early pages had been… harsh. For much of their early history, a child who was flawed would have been killed. And, to the Hyuuga clan, blindness was about as great a flaw as one could have. In later years, of course, that had changed. They had become more civilized. The flawed children, if they were whole enough to live, were only… solitary. To be honest, Hinata had wondered more than once if that was to be her fate—to live with neither husband nor lover, that her weakness not be passed to her children.

By all precedent, that should have been the fate of Hyuuga Ririko. Instead, she had risen to lead the entire clan!

She took a breath and sat back. See the space, she reminded herself. This was one more part in the bigger picture. Perhaps…

Perhaps the clan of that day had become too focused, the way Hinata herself had been until Neji-niisan explained things for her. Perhaps Ririko had been the one to step back and broaden their vision again.

Perhaps she had been the one to show that not looking at something helped one to better perceive its movement. Perhaps she had been one of those who had changed the clan.

Hinata leaned over the book table again and turned the page eagerly. Perhaps Ririko could help her.


Hinata shifted her weight on the packed earth of Konoha’s arena and ruthlessly stifled a wince as her wrenched knee protested.

The chuunin exam had not precisely been a “cakewalk” but she had gotten this far, along with all her team. The first test, to shadow a chuunin unseen across the fourteenth training ground, had been easy for all of them. They had gotten their ‘rescue subject’ out of the Forest of Death alive, for the second test, despite Hagane-san’s complete lack of cooperation and apparent dislike of Akamaru. Hinata had entertained a faint hope that the last round might actually be the simplest, this time. She had learned a great deal in the past couple years, after all, and even her father seemed to approve of her progress in training lately, though he hadn’t said anything. She was starting to actually be good at her clan’s arts!

And here she was, facing an opponent that turned those arts into a disadvantage.

The Rain-nin across from her laughed, completely hidden in a shifting mist that fogged both his body and his chakra into an indistinguishable blur. “You should give the match up,” he called. “Maybe you’ll even get points for knowing when the opponent is too strong to beat.”

That annoyed her and she frowned. “That would only be true if my objective were expendable or a distraction,” she pointed out sharply. “Neither of those conditions is set, here.”

And no un-sealed child of Hyuuga dared surrender, in any case.

The seal, always the seal, and she didn’t even know where it came from yet! She gritted her teeth, pushing her Byakugan harder, trying to see past the mist of dispersed and refracted light and chakra. The blur was giving her a headache just to look at. She tensed as it rushed toward her and stepped forward to meet it, spinning on her good leg to catch anything that might be coming. A fist glanced off her arm, and a foot caught her weak knee, and she went down with a gasp, rolling clear to come back up spitting dirt and twice as angry as before.

There had to be a way! Some way to see!

…gift of our clan is not sight alone, or even first. Rather, it is understanding.

Hinata could almost see the page in front of her, the slanting strokes of Hyuuga Ririko’s words, of the blind clan head who had written so powerfully of the vision, not the eyes, that Hyuuga passed down generation on generation.

Control the space.

Hinata dodged aside from another rush and chewed on her lip, thinking furiously. She knew the human body, knew it better than anyone but a medic might. She knew where to strike and how, whether she could see or not. If she could just find her opponent in the middle of that fog of…

Her eyes widened.

She could do it. It would work. The plan settled in her mind and she knew it, like she knew the weight of her own kunai. But… Her eyes flicked up to find her father in the galleries, and Hanabi beside him. She was sure he wouldn’t approve. Would think it was another failure. What if…

“Hinataaaaaa! Kick his ass! You can do it!”

The yell pulled her gaze over to the next gallery, where Naruto was half standing on the rail, waving his arms as Sasuke-kun kept a casual grip on the back of his jacket to keep him from going over. Determination sparked through her heart again; doubt hadn’t stopped Naruto! And behind him… behind him was Neji-niisan, standing still and quiet, arms folded. Their eyes met for a single breath, and he nodded to her, firm and confident. Warmth wrapped around her heart and she straightened with a slow breath.

And released her Byakugan.

A rustle like wind through the leaves passed around the galleries. “Ha! You forfeit?” her opponent called.

“Not at all,” Hinata answered calmly. The headache had eased as soon as she released her sight and she let her eyes unfocus too, watching the small bank of mist but not trying to penetrate it.

Merely watching where it moved.

And she’d been right. Without the distraction of details, of seeing the shifting chakra laced through that blind of mist, she could see that it always ‘faced’ toward her in exactly the same orientation, even as the Rain-nin circled, as if it were a stiff form he pulled along with him.

The sound of his steps, though, said that he was moving to the side of that masked space.

She smiled and kept her eyes open—no sense giving him a hint by closing them. But she spread her attention out to her other senses, just the way she spread her sight out to see the whole field of movement when she and Neji sparred. She could hear the faint scuff of his feet, feel the shift of air as he moved the mist bank, and she stood, stable and relaxed, and waited.

Another rush, and this time she swore she could feel his steps, through the air and the ground, and she turned lightly to meet him. His arm was high, his knee was against hers, and it was so simple to step and turn and strike, hard and sure, hand open and precise as befit a daughter of her clan.

The chakra mist raveled away under the sun and Hinata stood, breathing slow and deep, with her opponent crumpled at her feet.

A roar went up from the galleries, and the referee appeared beside them to turn the Rain-nin over and check him. “Unconscious, but uninjured,” he reported to the approaching medic, and glanced up at Hinata. “Smooth.” While Hinata was still blushing, he raised his voice and declared her the winner.

She stole a look up at the galleries, at Naruto, who was jumping up and down and waving his clasped hands over his head; at Neji-niisan, who was smiling, faint and satisfied; hesitantly, a little fearfully, at her father. Who nodded to her a fraction, expression cool but not disapproving. She released a silent breath of relief and made her shaky knees support her up the stairs to the examinees’ gallery.

Where Kiba caught her up in a hug and swung her in laughing circles until Kurenai-sensei scolded him to let her get a look at Hinata’s knife cuts. Hinata was laughing too, though.

She’d done it.

Not even the news, three days later, that she had passed and was promoted could quite compare to that first moment of knowing and triumph.


Hinata sat at the table in the archive room with her head on her folded arms, the last journals spread out around her.

She had her answers now. She knew where the seal had come from and why. She had read from start to finish, from the beginning to the present, and having reached the present she had arrived at the end of other people’s words and understanding.

Now she had to make her own.

A shiver ran through her. She had to act, and she was afraid to. Afraid because she knew what she wanted to do but had no idea whether her father would agree. Whether her sister, after him, would agree. Whether this was even possible to dream of.

But she was the one who knew. And so she was the one who must act.

A faint sob caught in her throat, and she huddled closer in on herself. She was so afraid. But the weight of twenty generations was behind her, and she knew them now, felt them. And, set aside or not, she was a daughter of the main house; it was her duty and no other’s.

She twitched upright at the soft scrape of the door opening.

“Hinata? It’s time to eat soon…” Her mother looked in and frowned, coming across the room to lay a hand on her head. “Hinata, are you well?”

Hinata summoned up a smile for her mother, afraid that it was still rather drawn. “I’m well Haha-ue. I just have a bit of a headache from my reading, I think.”

Headache, heartache, it was close enough, surely.

“Well, come out of this close room for a while, then,” her mother ordered, chivvying her out the door. “Eat a little and have a walk, and see if that doesn’t help. You’ve been spending so much time here, I’m not really surprised. You have to remember to take care of yourself, even when the research is calling!”

Hinata went meekly, casting only one last glance behind her before she closed the door on the archives.

What she had to do next moved beyond this room.


It took over a week to nerve herself to the only course of action she thought had a chance of working, and another two before she and Neji were home at the same time. She crept through the halls of the compound, tiptoeing around patches of moonlight from the windows, until she reached Neji-niisan’s door and could tap delicately on it. She had to tap twice before he heard and came to open it with a small frown.

“Who is… Hinata-sama?” His brows rose. He wore a sleeping robe and he’d taken off his forehead protector and her eyes flickered up once to the seal, clear and dark on his forehead.

“May I come in?” she whispered.

One brow rose higher, but he stood aside and slid the door closed behind her. “Is something wrong?” he asked, eyes lingering on her hands, and she realized she was twisting them together. She took a deep breath.

“Neji-niisan, would you… would you let me try to take the seal off you?”

For the first time since they’d been five or six, Neji completely lost countenance and stared at her in clear shock. “Take the… but… Hinata-sama, what are you saying? That’s,” he swallowed and finished, husky, “that’s not possible.”

“It is,” she insisted, firm with the surety of her years of research and the copied counter-seals tucked into her sleeve tonight. “I found it, in the archives. Where it came from. Why we used it. It isn’t what anyone thinks!” She took a breath and lowered her voice again. “And it was made with a counter-seal that cancels it.”

His fingers brushed over the mark on his forehead before he clenched them and lowered his hand. “It’s good of you to attempt this, Hinata-sama,” he said, very level, “but it would only be re-made.”

“That’s… I…” her fingers tightened on each other again. “I want this for more than just you. I want it for the whole clan. But I need to know for sure that the counter-seal works, first, that there wasn’t anything left out of the records about this.” She lowered her eyes to stare at the mats, at his bare feet under the hem of his pale robe. “It isn’t just that I know you want to be free. It isn’t just that you… you’ve helped me so much. My reasons aren’t that kind or… or good. It’s that I know you want this enough to try, even if there’s a risk of it not working or going wrong. And if it doesn’t work, I’m fairly sure you’ll keep quiet while I keep looking.” She didn’t want him to think better of her than she deserved.

She looked up, startled, when he laughed.

“You still think like the clan heir,” he murmured, smiling crookedly, and her face heated with formless shame. He shook his head. “That isn’t a bad thing." He looked at her in the half-light for a long, thoughtful moment. "If you’re talking of the whole clan, then I imagine you have a plan. Under-thinking a thing has never been your weakness."

Hinata nodded, hesitantly.

Neji-niisan nodded back, looking quite calm. "Very well. If you think this has a reasonable chance, I’ll be your test subject. What do you need?”

She swallowed, twice as nervous now that it had come down to the actual technique. “I need to write the counter-seal on you, on your chest.” And, having read the records of the eighteenth head of the clan, she had her suspicions why. They would see if she was right. Neji merely nodded and moved over to sit with his legs folded in the fall of moonlight from his narrow window, shrugging his sleeping robe off his shoulders and down to his waist.

Hinata took a deep breath, and then another, concentrating on the movement of her diaphragm, the slow slide of oxygen into her blood, letting the familiarity of it still the trembling in her hands. Slowly and carefully she knelt in front of Neji-niisan, taking the copy of the technique out of her sleeve to read over one more time. She took brush and a slim stone bottle of ink out of the thigh pouch she’d worn under her own indoor kimono and dipped the brush and took one more breath for courage. She rested one hand lightly on Neji-niisan’s straight shoulder and bent to trace the counter-seal, character by character, over his heart, careful to keep the radiating lines of it at precise intervals so that they would cross the proper tenketsu in the proper order. Neji was still under her hands, tranquil as if he were meditating.

“All right,” she said at last. “Now the activation.” She nibbled on her lip and asked again, “You’re sure…?”

Neji nodded, eyes dark. “I’m sure.”

Of course he was sure. He hated the seal. That was why she had chosen him for this, that and the surviving shadow of trust between them. Hinata laid down her brush on a fold of soft paper and closed her eyes for a moment; this was it. After this there would be no going back. She clung to the knowledge of what she’d found in the archives and brought her hands together in the Ram.

Seal followed seal, Horse and Tiger and Bird and Boar and Bird, on through the full set of thirty-seven. She shaped each one carefully, smoothly, concentrating her chakra on the form of the counter-seal and the building energy of it. And with the final Bird she felt the quick drain on her chakra, like water past a broken dam, and heard Neji gasp. Her eyes flew open, sudden panic breaking past her calm. Had it worked, had it gone wrong, was he all right?

Neji-niisan sat in front of her, eyes wide in the dim room, one palm pressed over his chest. His forehead was unmarked.

“It’s gone,” she whispered.

“It is,” he agreed, husky. “I felt it come undone.” They stared at each other for a long moment, neither daring to stir, both maybe a little shocked by how swift and simple it had been. When he did move, at last, it was to gather up her hand and kiss her ink-stained fingers softly. “Whether this works or not, Hinata-sama,” he said quietly, head still bowed. “I will always thank you for this moment.”

Another time, she might have blushed at such a gesture from Neji, the clan’s most brilliant son. In this moment, though, it was all she could do to catch back a tiny gasp of fear at the thought of what she had to to next, stifling it desperately, though she couldn’t keep her fingers from clinging to his. “Can you hide it?” she asked, a little shaky. “I want to try to find a good time to speak with my father about this.”

His mouth pulled into a crooked smile at the manifest unlikelihood of that that, but he nodded. “I can hide the seal’s absence as well as I usually hide the seal itself.”

“Thank you.” She swallowed, hands trembling as she stuffed her materials back into her pouch. “I… I should get back to my room.” He started to say something, one hand lifted toward her, but stopped and nodded silently and escorted her back to the door with a careful hand on her arm. He watched after her, eyes shadowed and thoughtful, as she stumbled down the hall in a daze. Only one thought was clear in her mind.

She was really going to do this thing.

She fell asleep that night praying fervently that the spirits of her ancestors, all the ones she’d spent so long reading and trying to understand, would favor her in what she needed to do next.


It took over a month to find her time. She kept going to the archives every night she was home, partly so no one would ask why she had stopped, but partly to read over the records of the eighteenth clan head again and hold those words to her like a talisman against fear.

Because, of course, what she’d finally realized was that she couldn’t possibly speak to her father about this alone. If she did that, he would almost certainly ignore her, and tell himself it was for the good of the clan to keep things just the way they were. No. Not alone. There would have to be witnesses.

Ideally, the entire clan.

So she told over the words of the last few generations to herself and memorized the counter-seal line for line, and waited until the waiting and the secret she carried with her wound together into a hard, dark weight in her chest.


The negotiation of a marriage contract to an outsider involved only the principles and the clan head, but they never went forward until the whole clan had a chance to meet the prospective incomer. The Hyuuga were not as numerous as the Uchiha had been, and small quarrels had torn shinobi clans apart in the past.

And, of course, any outsider must know of the clan’s seal, and agree to take it for themselves and their children.

Fushiyama Ran seemed a little troubled by the idea, but had, in the end agreed. And she mingled easily with the rest of the clan. Hinata thought it very likely she would be approved; Hinata’s mother, the strongest of the clan in the healing techniques and their best medical researcher, said that Fushiyama’s blood carried nothing that would harm a child she bore to Hyuuga.

The hard weight of Hinata’s duty to her clan sat behind her breastbone all through the afternoon and evening.

As the welcome feast wound to its close, in bottles of sake for many, Hinata shifted on her cushion at her father’s far side. “Chichi-ue,” she murmured, “I would speak to the clan of some history I’ve found in the archives, if you’ll allow.” When he raised a brow at her, she clasped her hands in her lap so they wouldn’t tremble. “I have found some very great things in our past. A time of celebration seems appropriate to remember them.”

His expression turned from questioning to tolerant, and he rose. “Very well, then.”

She didn’t hear a great deal of what he said to call the attention of the clan; she was trying to make the sudden butterflies in her stomach and the tips of her fingers go away. When her father gestured to her, she managed to stand and walk out into the center of the hall on steady legs at least. She raised her head and looked around at the crowd of eyes so like her own, and took a breath.

“I have read in the archives of our clan, and found much pride in the history written there,” she started, voice husky despite all her attempts to raise it this once. The rustle and clinking of cups hushed courteously for her, and she took another breath, folding her hands. “We are an ancient bloodline, as all know,” she went on more steadily. “This is our twenty-first generation as a noble clan, and our history reaches back even before that. But we have grown and changed over that time as well. In the scrolls and journals, I found that some of our traditions are new.” She had to swallow before she could go on. “Indeed, the seal of our clan is only four generations old.”

A startled murmur ran around the hall, and her father’s mouth tightened faintly. He didn’t stop her, though. Hinata held tight to that.

“In my reading, I found the journal of the eighteenth clan head, Akemi. It was she who developed the seal. It was made for times of war.” She snuck a quick glance around; some looked startled still, but others were nodding thoughtfully. “It was made to give our clan strength, so that none need fear being forced to give up clan secrets, even in death; so that none need fear betrayal by their own blood, or fear to be turned against their clan and village. It was made to let us fight with our whole hearts and souls, without reservation.” The hall was still around her, and she could see shoulders straightening at her words—but she could see that many eyes were also shadowed, in the lantern light.

“This too, I found.” Now her voice was husky with something besides nerves. “In that first generation, when peace returned, the seal was removed.”

The stillness broke into sharp rustling and muffled exclamations. Even the head table stirred. Hinata avoided her father’s eyes and hurried on. “The nineteenth clan head made the decision that war was coming too often to allow the seal to lapse, but Akemi, who created it, wrote this: The bonds of clan are silk, spun from heart to heart. They are strong but not proof against all; when the fires of war threaten, we will wrap them in the steel of this curse seal that the clan may survive anything that comes with whole hearts. When the cool of peace returns, we may strip back the steel and let the silk fly free again, for it is the silk that lets a clan grow strong enough to bear the steel.

“In the archives, I found the technique for releasing the seal,” Hinata said into the absolute silence of the hall, and held out her hands toward her father, pleading. “Chichi-ue… we have been at peace for almost twenty years! I beg you, will you not hear the wisdom of the eighteenth head, and undo the steel now?”

Her father laid his hands flat on the table, and his face was stern. “In your own lifetime, Hinata, we have had proof that the seal is still needed to guard our secrets from other villages.”

“It was not the seal that protected me,” Hinata whispered. “It was my father.”

“The seal was what allowed us to avoid war and yet protect our bloodline,” her father answered, inflexible. “Even without war, the life of shinobi is one of risk. The seal protects us.” A shade softer, he added, “My daughter, you must see how suspect your position is, knowing that you will be marked yourself when Hanabi inherits.”

Hinata met her sister’s eyes for a moment, and the blank lack of response there made her shudder—no hope, no reprieve, no love showed in Hanabi’s gaze, only determination without heart. “How can you not see this is killing us?” she burst out. “My sister’s heart is dead! I would have died at the hands of my cousin if not for the intervention of outsiders! All because of that seal!”

“Hinata,” her father said, voice flat with denial of her words, “calm yourself and sit down.”

The memory of Naruto waving his arms to cheer her on during her exam flashed before her mind’s eye. Never give up. She inhaled hard, hands clenched, increasingly wild thoughts of what she might do next circling in her mind.

And then Neji stood. “Hinata-sama.” He paced gravely around the end of his table and out into the center of the hall, toward her. “You must calm yourself, Hinata-sama,” he said quietly, as he came, and her heart wrenched at that completely unexpected echo of her father.

Until he came close enough for her to see the wicked glee hovering at the corners of his eyes and mouth.

“Calm yourself,” he repeated. “You are not alone.” He sank gracefully down to kneel at her feet in full salute, and his voice dropped clearly into the utter silence that gripped the hall. “Hyuuga Hinata-sama. I will follow you, and only you.”

A roar like surf swept the hall and Hinata’s father rose swiftly to his feet. “Neji!” His hand closed and flickered, half hidden by his sleeve.

Nothing, of course, happened, and hush rippled out from the head table, whispers following after.

Neji raised his head and looked over his shoulder with a not entirely nice smile. “You tried to force me, didn’t you? It will do no good. Not anymore.” He stood and tugged off his forehead protector, and the whispers turned to hisses of shock at his unmarked forehead. “Did you think Hinata-sama would offer such a thing without confirming it?” he asked, mildly. “She has freed me. Even after I attempted, in all sincerity, to take her life, she freed me.” His stance shifted and he added, voice darker, “This is the lady who would free our whole clan. I will serve and protect her with my life.”

“Neji, don’t—!” Hinata gasped. The very last thing she wanted was to see her clan fighting over this, let alone over her.

“Hush, Hinata-sama,” Neji told her, and the smile was back in his voice, though he didn’t take his eyes off the head table and was still poised in front of her. “I swore to protect you when we were barely walking, before the seal ever touched me. You’ve simply proven that I was right to do so.”

“Silk.” Fushiyama Ran stood from the right-hand table, eyes wide as she stared at Hinata. “Your eighteenth head said it. The bonds of silk are what make a clan live, make them strong enough to bear the steel.” She reached down and caught Hiroko’s hand urgently. “This is true loyalty. This, I can give my life and the lives of my children to!” She and Hiroko exchanged a long speaking look, and even in the midst of tension and anger Hinata wished, wistfully, that someday she might find someone whose heart could speak to hers that way. Hiroko rose slowly and wrapped his arm around Ran’s shoulders.

“Sometimes,” he said softly, “an outside view sees clearest. Even with our vision,” he added, rueful. A huff of laughter answered him here and there, and he met Hinata’s eyes for a long moment. “I don’t think there’s any question that your heart lives, Hinata-sama,” he said. “And if Neji will serve you, then perhaps the rest doesn’t matter. You have the strength to release the seal. Let that be enough.” He led Ran around the table and knelt down in front of it. “Hinata-sama, we will follow you, and our children after us.”

“My children…” the whisper was from more than one mouth, and slid around the room like a breeze. One after another, four more women stood and came out into the hall to kneel and bow their heads to Hinata. In fits and starts, their husbands joined them, two with the speed of desperate relief. A knot of the unwed men a double handful of years older than Hinata herself followed. Panic fluttered under her ribs. She’d only meant to convince her father, not start a revolution!

Or a civil war.

Remembering some of the other things she’d read in the archives, of generations split against themselves, she spun back to the head table, hand stretched out in entreaty again. “Please,” she whispered. Her father stood staring at the hall, just as shocked as she. It was her sister who slowly stood and came out to face her.

Hanabi’s eyes were as shuttered as ever, and Hinata waited, biting her lip, with no idea how this moment would turn.

“You would really never set the curse seal on anyone again?” Hanabi asked, almost without expression.

This, at least, Hinata had already thought on. “Only by consent, and only in extremity,” she said firmly. “It was made for a reason, a good one. But never as a weapon against our own clan.” She hesitated and added, low, “And if it marked anyone in a team, in a family, in the clan… it must mark all. Including those of the main house. When it was first made, no one went unprotected. Or unrestrained.”

“You’ve thought this out,” Hanabi noted, and looked down at her toes for a long moment. “All right.” She looked back up and added, “You’re still weaker than me. But all right.”

Hinata let out a shaking breath, stunned by unlooked for hope, and reached out timidly. “Hanabi… may I hug you? Please?” She hadn’t for so very long.

Finally, the flatness of Hanabi’s stare broke for a moment, and she stepped hesitantly closer. “I… guess so.”

Hinata gathered her up in a tight hug, swallowing hard. “I never wanted you to hurt because of me,” she whispered as tears prickled under her lids. “I never wanted to control or rule over you. I swear.”

Slowly, haltingly, Hanabi’s arms came up to close lightly around her. “You… really want to take care of everyone,” Hanabi whispered back.

“Yes. Yes, exactly. Everyone. You too.” Hinata dared to stroke Hanabi’s sleek, soft hair.

Hanabi sniffed at that. “I expect I’ll end up taking care of you. Me and Neji-san.” She stayed close for another moment, though, before she pulled away, and she had the faintest of smiles curling up the corner of her mouth when she looked up and added, “Ane-ue.”

Hinata had to wipe her eyes hastily. “I’m glad you will.” She looked up at their father, feeling a deeper calm in her heart, now. “Chichi-ue,” she said, and this time her voice filled the hall, husky as it was. “I beg you again to hear the wisdom of Akemi, eighteenth head of our clan, your great grandmother. The seal is a great strength, but it will weaken us if we let it become a crutch. Please. Let it be released while there is peace.”

He swept a glance around the room, at the people who had come forward in support of her, and said dryly, “It appears I have small choice, unless I wish to split the clan.” Hinata winced, and he snorted softly. “Very well. I will examine the documents you have found and consider how this might be done. And,” he added, more dryly yet as a whisper of excitement spun around the hall, “it also appears that my eldest daughter will once again be our heir. Congratulations, Hinata.”

“I didn’t mean…” she said in a tiny voice, and he waved a hand as if to brush the words away.

“You did well.”

On that stunning statement, he turned and paced calmly from the room.

As some of Hinata’s more distant cousins came forward to ask eagerly after how this could be done, whether it was really true, Neji rested a hand on her shoulder and said very quietly. “Remember. I follow you and no other, now.”

That support and responsibility settled around her shoulders and she straightened under them. Neji-niisan believed in her. They could never get back the past, the sweetness of their childhood, she knew that, but he had never stopped being her dearest cousin. His support meant something. “I’ll remember,” she promised.

He smiled and stood at her back as she faced her clan and tried to find answers for them.


Hinata made her way down the hall to the archives, one finger tracing down the lists in her hands. The archives were the right place for these, surely, even if her father hadn’t officially decided yet.

Haruka wanted his seal removed, but his partner, Kanon, wanted to keep hers so the seal’s trigger needed to be kept from Haruka for now. Arata wanted to keep his, which made perfect sense to Hinata given how much time he spent working at the borders, but he wanted his son’s removed immediately until the boy was old enough to make his own choice.

And that brought up the question of when the choice should be made. Hinata supposed it would have to be at twelve, on academy graduation. And under what circumstances should the clan head be able to command it? Only in war? During any mission into non-allied territory? She sighed as she pushed open the archive doors, eyes on her lists.

“Difficulties, daughter?” her father’s voice asked.

Hinata looked up, startled. Her father was in the archives, with Akemi’s journals spread around him; she recognized them. He was also waiting for an answer. “Oh… well, yes. Or, at least, complications. I suppose that was to be expected.” She came and offered him the lists. “This is a record of everyone’s wishes regarding their seals. I can see already there will have to be some compromises, and some new policies about how and when the seal is called for.” She hesitated, eyes falling. “If… if you approve it, that is.”

He sighed and leaned back in his chair, rubbing the bridge of his nose. “Sit, Hinata.” When she’d pulled up another chair, he waved a hand at the journals. “You made a good point, and Akemi had more. I believe that you spoke for the good of the clan, as you see it.” At her soft sigh of relief, he smiled just a little. “Once I calmed down, I remembered how long you’ve spent in here. Were you looking for information on the seal all along, or did that come to you as you went?”

Hinata nibbled her lip, hands laced together on the table. “I started out looking for the seal. I wanted to know how we came to use it. And as I went on and there was such a long time when we didn’t… I started to think perhaps it wasn’t nearly as central as we feel it is now. Perhaps it shouldn’t be.” She nodded at the journals beside them under the amber lamplight. “When I came to Akemi-san’s journals, I was sure. But… I was sure because of everything else I’d read before then.” She looked up to meet her father’s eyes. “We have been many things, over the generations of our clan, Chichi-ue. We have changed, often and greatly. We have bred ourselves and killed ourselves and fought each other for power and for love. We have had leaders of great vision and leaders who were blind. I believe we have become narrow, over these last few generations under the pressure of the great wars. I fear we have turned away from much that we could be.”

Her fathers brows had risen along with her voice, as she spoke more and more passionately. “Indeed,” he murmured at last. “You are not lacking in vision, that much is clear.” He nodded toward the lists. “How, then, would you deal with those?”

Slowly, Hinata pulled her thoughts together. “The seal was made to support us in danger. At war, in enemy territory. I believe it should still be used then. And if any of our clan wish for it, to keep our secrets safe, they should have it.” She took a deep breath. “But it must not be the main house’s way of controlling the rest of the clan. That’s wrong. It creates division, when we need unity!”

“There will always be division,” he said, more gently than she expected, “but I understand your point.” It was his turn to hesitate, but at last he said, quietly. “There is justice in it.” He reached out to touch one of the journals. “Silk as the foundation for steel. Not the other way around. Akemi-san was wise.”

There was sadness in the still line of his mouth, the darkness of memory in his eyes, and she reached out impulsively to touch his sleeve. “I’m sure your brother loved you,” she said, soft and shy. “Even as Neji-niisan and I still love each other despite it all.”

She wasn’t sure why that made him chuckle, but at least the sadness was gone. “He’s certainly loyal to you.” She blushed, and he patted her shoulder and stood. “Keep those lists a while, daughter. Study them. I will wish to hear your proposals for how to address them.” He looked down at her with a tiny smile. “After all, you’ll be the one who has to deal with the system you come up with.”

Hinata stared up at him, stunned by that subtle vote of confidence in her as heir, and broke into a brilliant smile. “Yes, Chichi-ue!”

She had succeeded. And now… now she had to keep going.

For once, the thought didn’t make her afraid.


Hinata had been aware that leading the Hyuuga clan involved a lot of training and overseeing the development of their arts. She had known that it involved overseeing every negotiation for marriage or children, consulting the line records and the clan’s medics to ensure as few stillbirths as possible. She had even been aware, in a general sort of way, that the clan head was the custodian of a great deal of property held by the clan as a whole.

She hadn’t quite realized that there would be so much bank paperwork involved, though.

She added and subtracted carefully down the rows of tiny figures to confirm that the final figure was correct, and cross-referenced with the clan’s own paperwork for that quarter, the records of rents and produce. When she was finally sure it all matched, she took the seal her father had left with her and carefully stamped the bottom of the page.

And then it was time for the next page.

She was reasonably sure that her father was not petty enough to have given her this work as some kind of revenge. It was clear that this really was something that had to be done. But she couldn’t help feeling that he was getting a certain satisfaction out of teaching her this particular task.

“Ane-ue!” Hanabi pushed the door of the office open and leaned in. “Chichi-ue wants you. He’s in the room by the south gardens.”

Hinata smiled. “Thank you, Hanabi-chan.” Her sister made a face at the pet-name, which Hinata had started using again, despite Hanabi having just graduated from the Academy. Hinata wanted to regain something they’d lost a long time ago, though, and for all Hanabi’s face-making, she never told Hinata not to.

Hinata cleaned her brush as Hanabi ran back toward the training hall, and made her way through the dim, quiet corridors to the large room that faced onto the water gardens at the south of the compound.

Her father and Neji-niisan were both there.

“You wished to see me, Chichi-ue?” Hinata asked, sliding the inner door closed behind her.

“Indeed.” Her father sounded rather dry as he waved a hand at the cushion beside him. “Neji has something to report about his latest mission, and feels he can only report to you.”

Hinata blushed and hurried to settle herself on the cushion. “Neji-niisan,” she protested softly.

“You are my lady,” he said, quite imperturbable. “I would hardly report to another.”

Hinata blushed and stole a glance at her father. He seemed peculiarly amused by this insistence of Neji’s; she supposed she was glad for that, but she did wonder why. His glance in return reminded her that this was, in a way, another lesson, and she straightened with a breath. “You have something of significance to the clan, to report, then?” she asked Neji-san.

“I had occasion to speak with your voice, on this mission,” he said soberly. “My team was with Kakashi-san’s, attempting to retrieve the Kazekage from Akatsuki, and we encountered Uchiha Sasuke’s brother.” He frowned. “For a madman, Itachi argued like an Elder. First he insinuated that I should be helping him, for the sake of the alliance between Uchiha and Hyuuga. When I pointed out that doesn’t apply to outlaws, he said he wasn’t; that he couldn’t be, because Sasuke was the only one left to pronounce it and he’d never been recognized as the head of Uchiha.” Neji-niisan cut a questioning look toward her father, who made a thoughtful sound.

“Indeed, he wasn’t. At the time of the massacre, of course, he was too young, but it’s true that his confirmation should have come up when he graduated. In the absence of any other heir, Sasuke had the right as soon as he was a working shinobi.” He frowned, tapping a finger against his knee. “Perhaps the Third only thought it would be unnecessary pressure, but perhaps…” His lips tightened. “Go on.”

“I could tell that point disturbed Sasuke,” Neji-niisan continued, pointedly speaking to Hinata. “So, under battlefield exigencies, I spoke on your behalf to recognize him.” He shrugged one shoulder. “I don’t doubt the Fifth will agree to confirm him, and if she does, and the other noble clans agree, then it will stand. It focused Sasuke again, at any rate, and he declared Itachi outlaw.”

Hinata pressed a hand over her heart. “That must have hurt him,” she said, soft but sure. Sasuke had always scared her a little, so quiet and so focused, and yet blazing with naked wrath like his clan’s own fire. That passion could never have come from an uncaring heart. She looked up at her father. “Chichi-ue, if we are allies with Uchiha, we should see Sasuke-kun confirmed. It’s only right, since he’s taken up the responsibility, even when it’s so heavy.”

Her father seemed to come back from his own thoughts, mouth quirking a bit as he glanced down at her. “You do, hm?”

She nodded, trying not to quail at that look.

“Well,” he murmured, eying Neji-niisan, “since the motion was made in your name, perhaps you should take the case to the Hokage yourself.”

Tsunade-sama couldn’t possibly be as intimidating as her father was. Hinata only had to take a single breath before she could nod steadily. “All right.”

“There’s one thing more,” Neji-niisan said quietly. “Itachi said that Uchiha Madara was still alive, and that he is the will behind Akatsuki.”

Her father’s habitual stillness turned frozen. “Madara,” he breathed, after a long moment. “And the Senju’s ruling blood too diluted to stand against him again, save for Tsunade-sama.”

“There are other bloodlines in this village than the Senju,” Neji-san returned, eyes level on her father.

“Indeed.” His eyes were distant again. “Hinata. Take the case for Sasuke’s confirmation to the Hokage as soon as possible. And then…” he reached over to close his hand on hers. “Then there are some techniques I must teach you, the arts our clan holds against the darkness in the Uchiha.”

The very idea that she might have to face Uchiha Madara sent a chill of fear down her spine, but it was countered, here and now, by the warmth and pride that he was willing to teach her like his heir again. She straightened her back and her voice was clear, if low, when she answered, “Yes, Chichi-ue.”

Neji-san was smiling, and that warmed her too.


Neji-san was downright smirking two weeks later, when their training session was interrupted by a visit from Uchiha Sasuke.

“Was this your idea?” he asked Neji-niisan as he brushed through the doors of the training hall, waving a scroll marked with the Hokage’s seal at him.

“Only in the field,” Neji-niisan answered a bit smugly. “If that’s the declaration I think it is, you may thank Hinata-sama for it.”

Sasuke raised his brows at her and Hinata brushed back long, damp strands of hair from her face. “Chichi-ue suggested I be the one to raise the issue officially,” she agreed, still a bit breathless. “You’ve taken up the work; you should have the title and whatever recognition or support goes with it. The Hokage agreed.” She’d agreed so gleefully, in fact, that Hinata now had a small list of questions to ask her father about the political situation between the Fifth and the village Elders.

“The only support I have now is from outsiders,” Sasuke pointed out a bit dryly. Considering who his teammates were, Hinata didn’t think he was really discounting that fact, so she smiled.

“I’m glad to have been of assistance, then.”

Sasuke cocked his head, looking at her frank and curious. “You’ve changed.”

Hinata thought about the past couple years, about the weight of her clan that she felt behind her just about every day now. Suddenly, she wondered if Sasuke felt that kind of weight too, if that was what had driven his burning passion for so long. The shadows behind his eyes and the tension at the corners of his mouth looked familiar, now. It was this that led her to answer, “Hyuuga and Uchiha are still allies.”

The long, slow breath he drew looked very familiar indeed, and she met his eyes gravely when he finally looked up again. “Yes,” he agreed, quiet and formal. “We are allies, still.” He looked down at the scroll in his hand and smiled wryly, the formality dropping away again. “Thanks.”

Neji-niisan was giving her a soft, approving look, and Hinata’s cheeks heated a little as she smiled back. Her oldest friend believed she could do this.

She was starting to believe she could do this, too.


Rumor had been running through the village for months, among the shinobi and civilians both, stirred up afresh with each new scrap of news. Gossip and tension simmered hotter as Akatsuki attacked host after host, and today Hinata thought both had reached a boil. It seemed to her that half the shinobi of the village were clustered around the mission board in front of the administration building, and she had hung back with her yearmates while Shikamaru-kun pushed through the crowd to get details.

“If this is really a multi-national mission, it must be about Naruto,” Ino said, standing on her toes trying to see over the heads of older shinobi.

“Naruto and the remaining Cloud host,” Shino corrected quietly. “Most likely.”

“I don’t see Sakura-san anywhere,” Lee put in from the roof above them. “They must have already gotten their assignment.”

Finally, Shikamaru hauled himself back out of the murmuring crush in the square, nearly stumbling but for Chouji-kun’s quick hand under his elbow. “Air,” was the first thing he said, and the whole group joined Lee on the rounded, blue roof of the records office.

“It’s the hosts all right,” Shikamaru confirmed grimly. “The mission parameters are to provide security for Naruto and Cloud’s host in an undisclosed location. Mission time is listed as months, so it probably won’t last more than a year, but I’m guessing this could be a long-term one. Risk is listed as very high; it’s an A rank mission, even with a dozen or twenty people being called for.”

“They must expect at least some of Akatsuki to get through to this mission, then,” Neji-niisan said, arms folded.

“Or at least they’re preparing for that,” Tenten agreed, absently sharpening one of her scythes.

“Akatsuki will get a nasty surprise when they run into us.” Kiba lounged back on the roof with a toothy smile.

Shikamaru-kun shook his head sharply. “Not all of us. If the location is undisclosed, they’re hoping to hide the hosts, and that means the villages must be hunting Akatsuki in their own territories. Some of us had better stay, too.”

Hinata chewed her lip; a hide-out would be in great need of scouts to watch the approaches, but the hunting teams would need them just as badly. “Shikamaru-kun,” she asked at last, “where would my team be best placed, in this?”

Kiba leaned up on an elbow, blinking. “Isn’t that for Kurenai-sensei to say?”

“Kiba!” Hinata exclaimed. “Surely you’ve noticed! Or at least Akamaru must have!” She knew her mother sometimes muttered insulting things about men’s observational abilities, but surely…

Akamaru panted smugly and Kiba turned a little red. “Well, I mean, of course I have, but…!”

“Even if the medical rules won’t take Kurenai-sensei off duty for another month, the long duration of this mission suggests she will be disqualified to go,” Shino noted.

“Wait, wait, wait.” Shikamaru was looking back and forth between them. “Off duty? You mean Kurenai-san is…” he waggled his fingers in the vicinity of his stomach.

Hinata frowned a little. “Don’t gossip about it,” she said firmly, in defense of her teacher, “but yes.”

“Oh fuck.” Shikamaru’s elbows thumped down on his knees and his hands fell into his meditative position. “Asuma-san will be totally distracted, and he’ll never agree to leave now, that means it’s probably Genma-san along with Kakashi-san; there’re rumors Genma was kind of friends with the Two-tails’ host…” He frowned into the distance for long moments while the rest of them waited quietly. “All right,” he said at last. “Hinata, your team should go with Naruto. It will be unfamiliar ground, and you’re one of the best scouting teams; we can manage here without you, we’ve got the territory advantage. I need to stay, and I want Chouji here, but the mission will need as many sharp thinkers and strategists as possible to coordinate a mess like that against Akatsuki. Sakura will be sticking tight to Naruto.” He looked up at his other teammate, eyes steady. “Ino. It’ll have to be you.”

While Ino blushed a little at this vote of confidence from the best mind among them, Hinata traced the thought further along. With Naruto’s team gone, much of the village’s raw power would be reduced. And the village must still be guarded. She nodded to herself and spoke quietly. “Neji-san.”

Neji-san glanced over at her, brows lifted, and she met his eyes levelly. He would have to stay, he and his team with him, to guard everything she was leaving behind. He straightened slowly as their eyes locked, brows drawing down. “Hinata-sama!”

“You must,” she said, calm with the sureness in her heart that she was right. It felt good, to know that he wanted to protect her again, the way he had when they were very small; it made her warm again, whenever she thought about it, warm enough not to need her jacket so often these days. But the fact remained that the greatest strength of Hyuuga belonged here, protecting the village, not out wherever she was going protecting only her. She smiled just for him, tiny and soft, and knew he understood when he blew out a sigh.

“Very well,” he said quietly, bending his head a little. “I will stay.”

“Thank you.” And then she realized that everyone was watching them and looked down at her hands, flustered. When she peeked up through her lashes, Ino was grinning and Tenten’s eyes were dancing. Shino rested a calming hand on her back and Chouji-kun gave her a small, approving nod. Shikamaru’s smile was crooked.

“That was easier than I was thinking it would be,” he murmured. “All right, then, that’s us. Ino, see if you can put in a few words with Morino-san. Whoever else goes from Intelligence has to have some heavy-hitting techniques along with sharp eyes.” He nodded to Neji-niisan. “You’re the only jounin among us yet; if you can spread the idea of a lot of small teams hunting in cooperation, here, I think that’s our best configuration to find Akatsuki and still be able to lay hold of the strength to fight them quickly. I’ll talk to Asuma-san about the same thing.”

A chill ran through Hinata as she thought about being on a remote mission for so long, away from her clan, away from Neji-san’s reassurance and company. But she would have her team with her, she would be doing good work for the village. Important work. Work that was worth respect.

She clasped her hands tight and thought that maybe the chill was one of excitement.


When Hinata looked back on that mission, months and years later, she found much to be proud of. She had fought well. She had protected her friend, the boy who had given her an example to follow out of the darkness. She knew she had gained the respect of many of the mission’s shinobi, and all of that made warm memories to hold in her heart. But the best of them had almost nothing to do with the mission itself, or with Naruto. The best was of one early morning, standing watch over the island’s east side, perched up among the cliffs of the Turtle’s shoulder.

They took watches in pairs, on the principle that what deceived the senses of one scout might not catch both. Hinata’s partner for this watch was Noburu of Hidden Rock, a chuunin a few years older than she was, very strong in Wind techniques. Strong enough to bend air into lenses and listen along it as though the currents of the wind were strands of a spider’s web. He was quiet and professional, and Hinata found him a restful partner.

So she was a little startled when he said, out of nowhere, "You’re not what I expected."

She blinked "I beg your pardon, Noburu-san?"

He ran a hand through his short, stiff hair, and looked at her sidelong for a moment. "From a Hyuuga, I mean. I suppose all villages that have ever fought have tales of each other’s great clans."

Hinata blushed, twining her fingers together. Was it that obvious, still, that she wasn’t up to the standards of a clan heir? She’d tried so hard…

"They say Hyuugas are arrogant," Noburu went on, glancing out over the water. "Arrogant and ruthless. But here you are, heir to the clan, and you’re not like that at all." He tossed a small, rueful smile over his shoulder at her. "I suppose that’s a lesson not to believe gossip."

The cutting edge of uncertainty abruptly blunted. "You… you really think…?" She looked down at her hands, smiling helplessly. "Thank you."

"You’ve been as good a watch partner to work with as any from Hidden Rock, Hinata-san," he assured her earnestly.

She couldn’t help imagining her father’s expression on hearing such a compliment offered to his daughter, and then she couldn’t help laughing. "Thank you!" She smiled back at him, hands relaxed in her lap as she knelt on their shelf of stone. "Sometimes, you know, Hyuugas are like that. Arrogant, yes. And ruthless. But that’s not all that we are. That’s not all that we want to be. It makes me very happy, that you see more than that in us."

"Well." He cleared his throat and turned back to their watch over the ocean. "I’m glad, then."

Hinata turned back to the water also. "I’ll remember," she murmured. "When I hear gossip about Hidden Rock, I’ll remember, too."

He smiled a little, out over the waves. "Good."

She carried away from that watch the increasingly familiar satisfaction that she was accomplishing the mission her Hokage wished to be accomplished, and the unfamiliar excitement of knowing that a shinobi of another village judged well of her. It made her walk a little straighter, to remember it.

She thought was that it would make Neji-niisan smile, to know about it.


The day Hinata and the rest of the Konoha contingent came back from Cloud’s Island Turtle, Neji-niisan was away on a patrol. And, despite the busy hours of debriefing and reporting to her father, despite the small, warm glow of being told she would be at his side to attend the council on Shimura Danzou’s fate for ordering an attack on the Leaf’s own host, she found herself feeling bereft. She hadn’t realized how much she’d depended on the thought of getting back to Neji-san’s support, how hard she’d come to lean on that. And despite everything, she found herself trailing around the halls of the compound as if she were searching for something lost.

Which was where Neji finally found her.

“Hinata-sama!”

She could already feel the smile on her face as she turned, and it only got wider when she saw him standing on the engawa behind her. “Neji-niisa—” Her breath caught as he strode forward and caught her up in a tight embrace. She clung to him in return, breathless and startled.

“You’re all right,” he whispered against her hair, and abruptly slid down to his knees, catching both her hands in his and resting his forehead against them. “My lady.”

Hinata stared down at him. “Neji…-san?” The intensity of his greeting startled her.

“They said you were back, but I couldn’t find you anywhere I looked,” he said softly, not looking up. “And the rumors going around about your mission are… rather wild and full of talk about assassination attempts. Against whom varies, but one version said it was you.”

Slowly, her cheeks heated. Neji-san had been that worried? For her?

Since he apparently wasn’t going to move, she knelt down with him, knees bumping against his. “I’m all right,” she offered, a bit shyly. “I wasn’t injured.”

He finally met her eyes, smiling a little wryly. “I’m glad. I suppose that was obvious.”

She blushed a little deeper, starting to feel as flustered as she used to whenever Naruto was around. The thought made her pause, nibbling her lower lip as she met Neji-san’s eyes. They were warm; so warm, for her. Suddenly she felt like the day she’d activated her Byakugan for the first time—the world had gotten deeper and she saw what she hadn’t before; her hands tightened on his. "I never thought," she breathed, eyes wide and wondering. She’d never thought she could have this again, her beloved cousin, her first friend, looking at her like this. Not like she was the heir, or a good leader, but like she was Hinata and that was important to him.

Neji-san looked torn, hands tight on hers even as he straightened, as if trying to regain his usual reserve. "Hinata-sama…"

“You never said,” she whispered. “Neji-san… why didn’t you speak?” When they were very little, she’d assumed that of course she would marry her cousin, her protector, her best friend. When they’d gotten older and her failures and Neji-niisan’s bitterness parted them, she’d set the little girl’s dream aside because it was too painful. If they could have that back again… why on earth wouldn’t he have said? Was there something still in the way?

His looked unaccountably hesitant. “Hinata-sama, I don’t… It isn’t…” He looked away, face still. “It’s always been Naruto for you, hasn’t it?” he finally asked, low.

She laughed, soft and unsteady. “I like Naruto,” she admitted. “I had a crush for a while, even. And sometimes I’ve thought, if Haha-ue says it’s all right and if Sakura-san and Sasuke-kun don’t mind, I might ask for a child of Uzumaki blood. But it’s not like that. He doesn’t love me. It’s… he’s… he’s an example to me. He lives the way I want to be able to.”

Neji-san’s hands tightened round hers. “Not quite that loudly, I hope,” he said, husky.

“No, not quite that loudly.” She nibbled her lip for a moment, looking at her cousin from under her lashes. “Just that bravely, maybe.”

She took in a startled breath as Neji’s eyes flashed and his hands came up to close around her face. “You are that brave,” he told her fiercely. “That’s why I chose to follow you. That’s why…” he trailed off and cleared his throat, and Hinata was startled and just a tiny bit delighted to see faint color on his cheeks. “That’s why I love you,” he finished, very quietly.

She felt like a flower was opening in her chest, something unwinding, unfurling, something beautiful and delicate. “Neji-san,” she whispered, hushed with sudden happiness and a whirl of warm memories from when they were small, before anything went astray.

When he murmured back, “Hinata,” the warmth turned into something soft and heated, and she leaned forward willingly as his hands slid into her hair. It was just a little awkward, kissing on the floor with both of them leaning forward over their knees, and she never wanted to stop.

“I suppose,” Neji said eventually, stroking her hair tenderly back over her shoulders, “that I should ask Satomi-obasama to evaluate our boodline in consideration of a possible match. To be proper about it.”

“I’d like that,” she said, completely unable to stop smiling. “I’d like that very much.”


Her father’s response was, “It’s about time; I did wonder when you’d notice the boy was mooning over you again. Though I suppose flowers are a more usual token than noble titles, for most young men to offer.”

“Chichi-ue!” Hinata pressed her hands over her flaming cheeks, wishing she could will them cool. Her father’s distinctly amused look didn’t help any.

But none of that could make her any less happy.

Her mother was openly delighted by the match, and held forth excitedly at the dinner table about the potential benefits of the cross. "Now, I know you won’t want to weary yourself with too many children when you have the whole clan to worry about," she told Hinata, hands moving as if to shape a good gene mix out of the air itself, "but you might retire from the field a little early, you know, and have at least one before your father steps down."

"I’ll consider it, Haha-ue," Hinata murmured and took another bite of ginger salad. She added, more sternly, as she caught her mother giving Hanabi a speculative look, "Haha-ue."

"I wasn’t going to suggest it," her mother said, defensively enough that Hinata knew she had been thinking about it.

"Hanabi-chan is even more dedicated to the field than I am," Hinata said firmly. "It wouldn’t be fair at all." She caught the faint relaxation of her sister’s shoulders and patted Hanabi’s knee under the table. She wouldn’t let anything interfere with her sister’s chosen career, certainly not clan breeding plans. Her sister gave her a tiny smile.

Her team took the news fairly well, too, though she hadn’t quite figured out how to tell them before Akamaru sniffed her over one afternoon and whined inquiringly. That brought Kiba over to take a good scent from her inner wrist, and then there was yelling of course, but it only took him fifteen minutes to stop shouting about all the ways he was going to maim Neji if he hurt her. Hinata shared a tiny smile with Shino; Kiba was clearly happy for her.

"I’m sure this will please your clan," Shino murmured, standing under their meeting tree beside her as Kiba threw sticks for Akamaru and pretended they were Neji’s arms. "Will it please you as well?"

"Very much," Hinata said softly, fingers twined together. "I never thought we could come back here, after everything that happened."

Shino touched her shoulder, and a few of his insects danced around his fingers in a secret smile. "I, on the other hand, am unsurprised."

Hinata blushed.

The best part, though, were the times she and Neji met in the training hall and Neji wedged the door firmly behind him with a length of wood and gathered her up in his arms, burying his face in her hair. And proceeded to complain volubly about the fuss everyone was making.

"…and then Shirou pulled me aside to lecture me on how women were different from men! As if I didn’t know that already; it’s like they think I don’t have a woman on my team. I haven’t dared tell Gai-sensei yet. Are you laughing?"

"Oh no," Hinata gasped, giggling pink-cheeked against his shoulder. "No, go on."

"Hmph." The fingers that stroked through her hair were gentle, though. "It suddenly makes far more sense to me, why your mother is so determinedly wrapped up in her medical research. I would wager it started as a way to ward off over-enthusiastic friends and relatives who wanted to fuss over the new consort."

Shyly, unable to help blushing a little, Hinata murmured, "You can always come hide from them in my room, if you want."

He held her closer, laughing. "Now that would give them something more interesting to talk about." He kissed her hair and added softly, "Perhaps I will. We can steal mochi from the kitchen, like we did when we were little, and hide under the covers and talk about which missions we want most."

Hinata snuggled against him, smiling brightly; he remembered those times too.

These were the best parts.


Fortunately for her blushes, and the patience of her betrothed, the village was too busy preparing to meet Uchiha Madara to spare very much time on teasing even newly betrothed nobles.

"Your chakra must flow uninterrupted," her father instructed them as Hinata and Hanabi sat, hands pressed palm to palm. "That flow must circle on itself and leave no opening for another’s to be imposed."

Hinata chewed her lip and concentrated on the flow of her chakra from palm to palm. She could maintain a closed circle as long as her hands were touching, braiding the two outward flows together, but as soon as she moved her hands apart she lost it. She heard her father sigh quietly.

"Hinata, practice that for a while. Come here, Hanabi, work on holding the closed chakra flow while you move and strike."

Hinata concentrated harder and resolved to ask Neji for help. Neji was, she’d slowly come to realize, a much better teacher than her father.

Of course, that meant she had to show him the technique, and that meant she had to broach the subject that had been on her mind ever since her father started training them in this jutsu.

"Chichi-ue," she breathed softly, trying not to interrupt her chakra flow.

"Hm?"

"If Madara is expected to attack the village, would it not be wise to teach this to as many of our clan as possible? The more people who can defend themselves from his Sharingan the better, surely?"

"This is a technique of the main house," he answered sharply.

Hinata kept her eyes on her hands. "So it is, Chichi-ue."

It wasn’t an agreement.

Her father actually huffed with annoyance. "Turning into quite the revolutionary, aren’t you?"

"I speak only of practicality, Chichi-ue," Hinata murmured, braiding her chakra together more tightly and slowly standing. "Only of the good of our clan and village in face of a powerful enemy." She breathed in and out in careful, even rhythm, and stepped slowly across the room taking care with every shift of her weight and chakra. There was a heat in her chest, building with every step, and she spoke out of it. "We should be as strong as we can be!"

After a long, silent moment, her father said, "I will consider it."

Hinata lifted her gaze from her intent concentration on the circle of her chakra to see her sister making a tiny victory sign in front of her chest as their father looked away from her. Hinata promptly lost the technique to a burst of delighted giggles. She didn’t even mind when her father shook his head with disapproval. Hanabi was smiling.


Hinata knew her sister was fiercer than she was, fiercer and stronger in combat. In the fire and chaos of the night Madara finally struck, it was Hanabi who went with the teams outside the walls, coursing the forest to find their strange, black and white attackers in the dark, tracking them through earth and wood. That had terrified Hinata for her sister’s safety, especially once the casualties started filtering back out of the forest.

And yet, she was glad of it now. She and Neji were the ones who’d been sent to the south gate to aid their Hokage against Madara if they could, and Hinata didn’t want her little sister anywhere near him.

Neji knelt on the top of the wall beside her, eyes sharp on Tsunade-sama as she fought Madara. "We’re not the only ones who discovered how to repel the Mangekyou Sharingan," he murmured, a breath of humor through the cutting tension of the night. "Look at the Hokage’s chakra."

Hinata breathed slowly, carefully keeping her own chakra folded in on itself. Which was not, she couldn’t help noting, quite what Tsunade-sama was doing, and her mouth quirked a little. "I think that’s just because Tsunade-sama is too strong for him."

Neji made a satisfied sound through his bared teeth, at that. "Probably why he’s stopped trying to revive his Amaterasu. I think Sakura can let her counter go."

Hinata glanced aside at Sakura-san, kneeling a few arms lengths away on the wall, Kakashi-san beside her. Sakura’s chakra was slowly drawing back from the brilliant flood of the technique that had smothered Amaterasu and let Sasuke-kun through to guard the Nine-tails as it fought Madara’s demon. "I think she knows."

Just then, though, Sakura flinched and gasped, "Intruder… first!" The strain in her voice pulled Hinata’s shoulders taut. Sakura-san sounded like she could hardly speak! But it was a warning worth fighting to give; if the first wave of attackers, the black and white ones, were coming into this area, all of them were in danger. Those intruders would be coming through the very earth itself. Every clan member watching on the walls or ranging the forest had seen that much.

Though often not until too late.

Hinata bit her lip, thinking hard enough that her chakra flow started to unbraid itself and she had to wrestle it back into the proper knot, stream sliding over stream. There must be something they could do to see further, to guard the Hokage and Naruto inside the Nine-tails!

Sakura-san invoked the pure earth again with her jutsu only to gasp, wavering, off balance as if her strike had been dodged on the training floor. The wild life of Konoha and its land, flowing through Sakura’s hands, ran faster still, wild as a river in flood.

A river. A stream. Like the streams of chakra Hinata was directing through and over each other right now. Could she do that with the chakra Sakura held? Slide her own through and over such vast power?

Sakura’s own chakra was starting to run ragged; there was no more time, and Hinata took a deep breath for courage. "Neji, watch the Hokage," she whispered. He looked at her sharply and she could almost see the protest hovering on his tongue, but he bit it back, only reaching up to touch her hair with silent, desperate tenderness.

"Be careful," he whispered back, and Hinata added the warmth of those words to her courage.

She turned toward Sakura, releasing her chakra from the flowing knot she’d held and reached out to Sakura instead. "I’ll try to see them," she said, soft and determined. "Sakura-san, can you hold on?"

Sakura jerked a nod, and Hinata laid her palms over the major tenketsu of Sakura’s forearms, sending her chakra flowing lightly over the flood that ran through Sakura-san’s hands. It was like sliding down a rope made of lightning, wild and terrifying and beautiful, and Hinata felt for a breath that there was spirit as well as life in it. Not human spirit, but a soul deep and ancient and wordless and new, changing like the colors of the sky and the surface of a river. "Permit me," Hinata begged, terrified and exhilarated by the vastness of this thing. "Life of our land, Will of Fire, permit me…"

And perhaps she was heard, because her awareness and her chakra slipped over and through that wild flow without drowning or burning, and she heaved in hard, panting breaths as her vision exploded outward. She could see a dozen knots in this stream, all converging on them, but the movement… the movement was strange. As if she saw a single hand drawing into a fist. No, two! "All of them," Hinata gasped. "All of them are coming. But they are only two. Only two that we need to find."

She saw the brightening of Sakura-san’s chakra, her agreement. She concentrated harder, biting her lip, focusing the way she’d focused to learn this technique from her father, looking for the two centers approaching. "I see it," she whispered. "I see them! Neji! They’re coming for the Hokage!" She pulled away from Sakura-san and the land’s life with a gasp and would have staggered as she stood but for Neji’s hand under her arm.

"Two of them?" he demanded.

"Coming to bracket Tsunade," Hinata gasped, dizzy.

Neji’s chakra unknotted from its defensive flow and pressed against hers, steadying her like his hand on her arm. "Can you do Eight Trigrams, Two Mirrors?"

Hinata swallowed and tried to stand upright. It worked. She nodded to Neji, determined, and he smiled, bright and sharp and proud. "Let’s go, then."

They sprang from the wall together, turning in counterpoint as they came down to flank the Hokage, and Hinata felt her breath opening up at the feel of Neji on the other end of this technique, sure as sunrise, there for her to lean against as she set her feet on the earth and drew her chakra in, spinning. This time she wasn’t out of control or out of rhythm; this time she had someone to mark the correct time, and her chakra flowed up from her feet, through her center, into her hands in perfect sequence.

She and Neji spun together, and struck as one, her hand against the white creature and his against the black. The attackers blasted back from them, broken, and Hinata saw the flare of Tsunade-sama’s chakra between them, triumphant and proud. She was smiling as she and Neji sprang back to leave their Hokage room to strike her enemy, and she saw that Neji was, too. They had done it.

Together, the way the Hyuuga clan should be, they had won.


Jiraiya-sama came to the Hyuuga compound, after it was all over, to ask how she’d thought of the possibility of touching Sakura-san’s jutsu, let alone dared to act on it.

"I’ve never seen anyone but a priestess do something like that and not die of it," he said, watching her keenly over his cup of tea as they sat in one of the outer parlors.

Hinata clasped her hands to keep from shrugging helplessly. She felt very young and inexperienced, facing one of her village’s legends, reduced to a child’s stature again just by contrast to the square power of his frame. "It seemed like a possible application of the technique I was already using, and a reasonable risk at the time. I knew it would be dangerous, but once I’d touched the chakra she held it felt…" She hesitated. "Well, the records of our ancestors sometimes speak of seeing, not just chakra, but the spirit itself. It seemed to me that Sakura-san was touching the spirit of our land, and perhaps that spirit would help us defend it from attack."

Jiraiya-sama’s brows had risen while she spoke, and she nibbled her lip, hoping he wouldn’t think her foolish. Even her own clan sometimes gave her odd looks when she said such things. "An unusual approach, for one of your clan," he murmured. "I had thought Hyuuga’s training emphasized only the reality of what can be seen directly."

At Hinata’s shoulder, where he’d insisted on being for this interview, Neji stiffened. "My lady is the vision of Hyuuga," he stated, giving Jiraiya-sama as dark a look as if he’d questioned Hinata’s legitimacy. "What she sees is real."

"Neji." Hinata laid a quick hand over Neji’s, glancing at Jiraiya-sama. "Forgive us, Jiraiya-sama, I’m sure you didn’t mean…"

Jiraiya-sama was smiling. "I see she is your clan’s heart, as well," he said mildly, and Hinata blushed while Neji sat back, looking satisfied.

"It isn’t truly that unusual, Jiraiya-sama," Hinata said, more concerned with the defense of her clan than her person. "Over the generations of Hyuuga, this is something that rises over and over again. I only took the example of those who have come before."

"And that’s the scale of time you think in, hm?" Jiraiya-sama was still smiling faintly, but he was also watching her with sharp eyes. Hinata just nodded; wasn’t that the scale any clan head had to think on? Jiraiya-sama set his cup down and rose. "I will be very interested to see what your vision makes of the Hyuuga." His gaze was warm, as it met hers, and he held out a large, square hand to her. "I think it might be something that hasn’t quite been seen before."

Hinata rose also, hesitating a moment; she hadn’t ever set out to be any sort of revolutionary, honestly! But finally she lifted her chin and took his hand; hers wasn’t as lost in his grip as she’d expected, either. "I will do my very best for the people in my care, Jiraiya-sama. Whatever that turns out to be."

His smile broadened. "Of that, I have no doubt whatsoever."

Hinata thought about the smile Hanabi-chan had given her when she’d left two days ago on her first C-rank mission, and the softness of her voice as she’d promised Hinata she’d be back soon. She thought about her father’s lack of surprise when he’d come to tell her that one of the Legendary Three was here to see her. She thought about her oldest friend, standing straight and proud at her shoulder. And, at the bottom of her heart, she found that she didn’t doubt it either. She had people to stand beside her when she guided her clan, family and even a beloved who believed in her and the future she worked for. She was reviving her clan with her own hands and will. She would succeed.

And when she found herself thinking that, hearing the thought in her own voice this time and not Naruto’s, she could only laugh.


When Hinata was fourteen, she wondered whether she was strong enough to change fate, the way Naruto did.

Four years later, looking back, she knew that she always had been.

 

End

 

Complement Art: by the lovely and talented Mitsuhachi Follow Only You, and Will of Fire, Permit Me.

Story Notes:

Language

For the etymologically curious: We have almost nothing, in canon, about the internal structure or address used within the Hyuuga clan, so I borrowed from similar situations in other manga and spent some quality time with the dictionary to invent some background for them. What Neji calls Hinata is 総領 or souryou, a now archaic term for the eldest child who will carry on the clan name; it has the advantage of having, in some periods, been used as a title for the actual clan lord. My theory is that this is not the usual title for the heir; Neji is using it to make a point about his current loyalties. What Neji and everyone else calls Hiashi is 当主 or toushu, a similarly rather archaic term for the leader of a family or clan. (That actually is canonical for the noble clans.) The connotations of that one are a little less broad and encompassing than those of souryou or, for that matter, soushu. All of this is a little beside the point, because I’ve translated the terms, but for those who were wondering about Neji calling Hinata "lady", well, this is the background thought that went into that.

Genetics

This is the model of ninja genetics that I came up with with the gracious help of Fer de Lance (all remaining genetic bloopers are my own).

Ninja talents arise from a wide variety of alleles and their combinations. The most "basic" one is the allele that controls the presence or absence of chakra-manipulation ability, let us call it C. CC results in strong ability, C0 in moderate ability, and 00 in none. In addition to this, there are six other alleles whose presence or absence preconditions what elemental affinities a person has. The first five of these relate to the five basic elements of the Naruto world, and the sixth to yin or yang; YiYi results in an affinity for yin, YiYa in either no affinity or a double affinity depending on a different allele completely, and YaYa in an affinity for yang.

Bloodline talents are stable mutations that affect the expression of these seven alleles.

In the case of the Hyuuga, an allele related to the C allele produces their particular chakra-vision. Let us call this modifier H. What we see in the manga is a relatively small clan with a very strong phenotypical similarity (ie, they all look very alike). The phenotype could quite reasonably be the result of endogamy; the clan marries inside the clan whenever possible to keep their talent closely held and as common as possible among them. My supposition to explain the clan size despite the power and value of their talent is that H is next to some important fetal development sequence, and often interferes with it. Further suppose that, in the process of "locking" H into their bloodline, the Hyuuga engaged in some pretty ruthless culling and line-breeding, which means vanishingly few of the clan escaped having genes with a messed up copy of that fetal development sequence. This would result in fairly few live births. The apparent frequency of warfare among the clans, both before and during the hidden villages era, would be plenty of reason to focus on locking in a valuable talent and perhaps not realizing that the frequent miscarriages were directly related until too late. Or perhaps even accepting them at first as the price of doing business. In either case I posit that this connection between the Hyuuga talent and reduced live births, once realized, resulted in a reduction of active culling and an increase in fanatic record-keeping and arranged marriages so as to maximize both live clan members and the Hyuuga talent. Increased sophistication of genetic theory and technologies over time would only have refined this habit.

The next question, of course, is how this results in the Uchiha (note that, in this ‘verse, I jettison the Sage descent story completely and return to the earlier hints that the Uchiha descend from the Hyuuga). The Uchiha appear to be a far larger clan, enough to police one of the biggest villages and have a whole subdivision of the village of their own, and not quite as phenotypically similar. I speculate that the mutation that produced the Uchiha talent involved an alteration in H and the addition of modifying allele U, in such a way that they no longer messed up the fetal development sequence as often. I further speculate that one of the reasons for the Uchiha splitting off into their own clan was the founder’s disagreement about the intense degree of endogamy the Hyuuga practice. So the Uchiha founder encouraged somewhat more frequent exogamy, and allowed outsider spouses into the clan a bit more often. This both supplied undamaged copies of the fetal development sequence, and greater phenotype variation. It also explains why the fully expressed Sharingan seems to be less common among the Uchiha than the Byakugan is among the Hyuuga. It may even explain why very Uchiha-looking black eyes seem to crop up in Konoha at large, as in Kakashi and Sai.

In all cases of a major bloodline talent, though, I have to suspect that established clans would regard marriage out of the clan as something akin to military espionage. That would be like taking secured blueprints off to a potential enemy. The formalities for gating outsiders into the clan would likely be fairly stringent also. It seems very likely that all noble/ancient clans practice endogamy as their default.

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Thirteen

Kakashi slid past the Hokage’s door rather warily and waved a handful of message-paper strips at her. “Latest batch from the relays; Shizune asked me to bring them up with me.” He swapped himself reflexively with the coat hanger as a cup went hurtling past where his head would have been and smashed into shrapnel against the wall. “I can see why she did,” he added.

Tsunade stood over her desk, clenched fists planted on it, breathing hard. “Give them here.”

“You’re sure about that?” But he came out of the corner and handed over the slips.

Tsunade flung herself back down in her chair hard enough to roll it back from the desk and started reading, glowering down at the paper with tight lips. “Idiot,” she hissed, tossing one over her shoulder. The next one got a sour “Moron!”. The third didn’t rate anything more than a glare, but the fourth shot her up onto her feet again yelling, “Don’t you try to patronize me you dried up old fart!”

“The other villages still aren’t responding well?” he hazarded. An easy guess; the traffic of messenger birds had been heavy over the past few months and every time he saw the Hokage she seemed more pissed off.

She stalked around her office, now, glaring at anything that fell in her way. Kakashi prudently removed himself to the top of her file cabinet.

“I’m going to have to haul them in to a meeting in person,” she finally growled. “Gaara is willing, of course, and I think the Mizukage is too, but that blowhard A and Oonoki, old sot that he is, are being stubborn. They don’t think Akatsuki can truly threaten a strong village, because they’ll never be able to control or secure the loyalty of more than one or two hosts.”

“And the smaller villages?” Kakashi asked. Presumably, with enough of the small village Masters on her side, Tsunade would be able to swing even the other Kage to her course. He had a difficult time imagining that many of the Masters were truly willing to have Akatsuki running around with any tailed beasts at all.

Tsunade’s lip curled. “So far, I’ve mostly gotten variations on ‘you first’. None of them want to be caught in between if the great countries disagree badly enough over this to go back to war.”

“Hard to blame them,” Kakashi murmured. Tsunade just snarled.

“And then there’s the Master of the Waterfall, who says that, if Akatsuki is behind this, the Leaf must have hired them! Because we’re the only one whose host hasn’t been attacked!” She paced another round, hands flexing ominously. “Hanzou refuses to get involved at all, the bastard. He thinks Rain can hold out no matter what Akatsuki does, and if we all reduce our strength taking Akatsuki down without him all the better!” She snatched up the sandstone paperweight from her desk and slowly crushed it to rubble in her hand, growling.

“It was already sure that Rain wouldn’t get involved,” Kakashi couldn’t help pointing out, though he kept a cautious eye on the erstwhile paperweight. “They never go beyond their borders, these days.” Which was, honestly, a nice change for everyone else.

Tsunade let the rubble fall and snorted. “He’s gotten paranoid ever since that civil war in Rain. I was kind of hoping he’d bite this time, though; the leader of the other side become a member of Akatsuki, after all. But no such luck.” She finally sat back down, leaning back with a sigh. “The one bright spot is the Master of Sound. He seems to have seen this coming, and his latest message offered Hidden Sound as a meeting place for us.”

“Mm. About as neutral a location as possible,” Kakashi agreed. A new village with no axes to grind and no history of war with anyone but Leaf, and as close to centrally located as possible. It disturbed him just a little that he was starting to know all these things off-hand.

“Exactly. And if A and Oonoki know that Gaara and Terumii and I are all going, they’ll come too just out of suspicion.”

“Not the most productive mindset for negotiations,” Kakashi murmured.

“No, it’s not. Which is why,” she fixed him with a sharp eye, “you and Nara Shikaku are coming with me as aides and bodyguards."

Kakashi froze and then tried to pretend he hadn’t. “Taking the Jounin Commander makes sense,” he said as casually as he could, “but wouldn’t someone like Jiraiya-san be more impressive as your other attendant?” Someone who was not him. He’d figured out exactly what administrative job she thought he’d be good for, once she started sending him around as her personal representative, and he’d been doing his damndest to deflect her from the idea.

“Jiraiya is out looking for more of Akatsuki’s bases and hideouts. And quit playing dumb,” she told him sternly. “I won’t live long enough to see Naruto come off active duty and learn the rest of this job, and I’ve come to the sad conclusion that there’s no one else qualified. It’s going to have to be you in this chair after me. Live with it.”

“The jounin have to confirm the Hokage,” Kakashi said a little desperately. He couldn’t do this; he knew himself, he knew how deeply he bonded to his teams even when he tried not to, taking on the entire village would kill him. “Are you really sure they’ll—”

“They approve of you more than anyone else,” she cut him off. “Shikaku won’t have it; I asked. Jiraiya’s refused it twice and he’ll probably be dead before me the way he lives, and I won’t see it go to Danzou.”

That shut him up. He’d been trying, for years, to get proof of what he was sure Danzou was doing, and the thought of that man in charge of his village sent a sharp prickle of rage down his nerves. Even taking on a commander’s responsibility for the whole village, crushing as he knew it would be, was better than that. “Yes, Hokage-sama,” he gave in at last, voice low.

“Better.” She waved a hand at him. “Go tell Shikaku to start packing while I get the messages ready.”

Kakashi nodded quietly and slipped out, trying not to feel like doom had come to hover over his shoulder.


A couple of weeks later, Kakashi watched five Kage and ten attendants all trying to keep an eye on each other as the Master of Hidden Sound led them up a flight of wide, spiraling tower stairs. At least, he reflected, this meeting promised some amusement. They finally emerged at the top of the tower and he raised interested brows. There was a curving hall of red stone, with narrow windows in the outer wall at regular intervals, and a single door in front of them. Naridasu turned to his gathered guests.

“This room has only one door, and the tower below it is solid stone for two floors. We are high enough to see any attempt at attack or eavesdropping coming. Given that security, I believe this meeting will be,” he paused judiciously and finally decided on, “least chaotic if only the Kage are present, and your attendants stand guard in the hall here.”

There was a silent moment, full of sidelong looks and suspicious frowns, before Gaara spoke up. “That will be quite acceptable.” He nodded briefly to Temari and Kankurou, and paced forward to the door of the meeting room. He paused on the threshold to look over his shoulder with bland inquiry.

Kakashi smirked just a little. Gaara was learning how to play politics very quickly; he was impressed.

“It seems reasonable, yes,” Terumii, the Mizukage, murmured, and waved off the muttered protests of her older attendant.

“Fine,” the Raikage growled, stomping forward, and Tsunade sauntered after him, nearly grinning.

Oonoki of Hidden Rock stumped after them, muttering complaints about stairs and his back and insolent young whippersnappers, completely ignoring his attendants. The young woman who had come with him rolled her eyes.

“Well,” the older of the two from Cloud said slowly, as the door closed. “I suppose we should spread out and each take an approach to watch, then.”

No one moved. Kakashi sighed to himself; he hoped Tsunade knew what she was getting herself into, trying to pull together some international cooperation. It wasn’t looking like an easy job. So, since it was unfortunately clear that he wasn’t going to be able to escape politics much longer himself, he supposed he’d better start doing something to make it work.

He raised his forehead protector to show his Sharingan.

A frisson of tension swept the group.

Slowly, Kakashi reached into a pocket of his vest.

Hands dropped to hidden weapons or slid toward scrolls. The older of the Mist nin flicked up his own eye patch to reveal a Byakugan. The younger of the Cloud nin slid his hands together into the Ram, expression grim.

Kakashi pulled out the latest Icha Icha book and flipped it open. He smiled sunnily at the chokes of absolute disbelief and the way a few stances wobbled. “Well! Clearly, the pair from Mist should take the stairs, as the Byakugan will see even an approach that’s cloaked in illusion.” He nodded cheerfully to the young Cloud nin, who was looking outraged, and the elder, who was looking thoughtful and had a hand on the younger’s shoulder. “And since illusion appears to be one of your specialties, perhaps Cloud should take the opposite approach, so we’re as well covered as possible by the sensing specialists.”

Everyone was staring, except for Temari who was looking grudgingly impressed.

“Can’t take you anywhere,” Shikaku muttered, through the hand he’d clapped over his face.

Kakashi flipped pages to find his place and started strolling along the curve of the hall. “We’ll take the left, if that’s agreeable.”

“Hatake Kakashi,” Temari said, in a tone that suggested that was all the comment needed, and clapped Kankurou on the shoulder. “Sand will take the right.”

After a moment of vibrating conflict, the young woman from Rock hissed something annoyed, and probably very rude, under her breath and stomped off after Temari, dragging the large young man who was her partner along. Kakashi nodded with approval. With a Sharingan on the left, it was the right that should have the extra pair to watch. If that girl was who he thought she was, Rock would be well served when she eventually took over as Tsuchikage. He settled his back against the wall of the meeting room, noting with satisfaction that he could see both Mist and Cloud teams from the corners of his eyes, and turned a page.

Shikaku slumped against the wall next to him. “May the Hokage live for a hundred years,” he said, low and fervent, “because I don’t want to be the one who has to pick up after you, when you take over.”

Some bass roaring reverberated through the wall, followed by Tsunade’s more piercing shout of, “You never hired them because you were doing the dirty work with your own hands, now sit down and shut up and listen!”

“You sure I’d be worse than Tsunade-hime?” Kakashi asked, delicately turning another page. Shikaku gave the book a dour look.

“Yes, Kakashi-kun, I’m very sure. Don’t think that’s going to stop me from approving you, though, no matter how cack-brained you try to act.”

Well, the Nara clan was known for their intelligence, after all. Kakashi sighed and tucked the book away, giving up his pretense of frivolousness. That reflex of concealment was one he might just have to break, now, anyway—at least among his own people. Instead, he amused himself trying to follow the progression of the Kage’s arguments by the things that were shouted loudly enough to be heard through the stone walls.

The howl of “Madara!” was more than one person, he thought. So Tsunade had decided to tell them of Itachi’s words, unconfirmed though they were.

A shattering crunch followed by a softer but sustained impact against the wall was, he thought, most likely the Raikage breaking something and the Mizukage taking exception.

It was only a guess, but he thought that Tsunade’s shriek of “Absolutely not!” was most likely in response to a proposal that the two remaining hosts be killed to keep their beasts out of Akatsuki’s hands. At least, it was followed by a cracked shout of “You’re naive!” from the Tsuchikage, and everything Kakashi knew of the old man suggested the kind of ruthlessness that would think killing the hosts was perfectly reasonable.

Those shouts were followed, though, by a long period of someone speaking low and steady. Either Gaara or Terumii, Kakashi thought.

It wasn’t long after that that the door opened again, and all of the attendants gathered quickly back to their Kage. The Raikage was frowning, but that was nothing unusual. The Mizukage looked relieved, as did Tsunade herself; negotiations must have succeeded well enough to go on with. The Kazekage looked as calm as ever, but the Tsuchikage was watching him with thoughtful eyes that weren’t as hard as they had been when they all went in. Kakashi wondered what Gaara had said to the others, to put that expression on the face of a hard-bitten old shinobi like Oonoki.

Tsunade beckoned him. “We’re going to sequester Naruto and Cloud’s Killer Bee under a multi-national guard while all of us work on flushing out Akatsuki in our own countries. I think the smaller countries will be willing to participate, now, with Sound to lead the way.” She scowled. “And Hanzou will damn well keep them out of Rain if I have to go bend the old bastard’s ear about it in person. At any rate, I want you to find people for our part of the hosts’ guard.”

"How many?” Kakashi asked, already tallying in his head who he could truly trust with Naruto’s safety. It couldn’t be just anyone, even now. He wondered if he could convince Jiraiya to command the detachment.

“At least a dozen from each of the great nations,” the Raikage rumbled. He nodded at the older of the Cloud attendants. “Darui, you’ll lead ours. Take Samui and her team, too. Keep my brother safe.” Darui nodded soberly.

The Mizukage had a hand on her younger attendant’s arm. “Choujuurou, I’ll want both you and Suigetsu to go; try to keep him out of trouble.” The boy looked dubious, and Kakashi wondered whether this Suigetsu was another of the Swordsmen; all the Seven Swordsmen of the Mist tended to be a little wild. Maybe it was the tooth filing that did it to them.

The Tsuchikage was already stumping toward the stairs. “Kurotsuchi! Akatsuchi! Hurry up, we’re going. And Kurotsuchi, fetch your father when we get home. He’s going to be in charge of our unit.” He gave her a beady look. “You’re going too.” The girl groaned and he glared. “And don’t complain! You’re not the one having to take creaky old hips down these damn stairs again…” His complaints trailed down the spiral stairwell.

“Temari,” Gaara said quietly. “For everything Naruto’s done for us… keep him safe.” Temari drew herself up and saluted sharply.

“So where are we putting them?” Shikaku asked as Tsunade followed Oonoki down the stairs.

Tsunade’s mouth quirked. “Well. I suppose you could say they’re taking a cruise.”


Naruto stared around the dark, wooded crags of the island, wide eyed. “This is really a turtle?”

“Indeed. I’d heard of it,” Jiraiya said behind him, “but never visited. Outsiders have never been welcome. Fascinating.”

The old pervert was showing his true colors, Naruto thought, with an affectionate glance. For all he acted like he didn’t have a thought in his head but the next drink and the next pair of boobs, there was a lot more to him. Even Sasuke admitted that, though it just seemed to make him that much more pissed off over the pervy act. He was giving Jiraiya That Look this very moment—the frustrated one that hinted he might try to strangle the man with his own ponytail.

“The encampment is this way,” their guide, Motoi, said meaningfully, and Naruto sighed and trailed along with everyone else, gawking around as they went. This was one huge turtle.

What did I just step in?” Ino’s voice echoed up the line of Leaf shinobi.

“Please be careful of the island’s wildlife while you’re here,” Motoi added blandly.

“Big animals all around, huh?” Naruto asked, with perfect innocence, and grinned when Sakura had to stifle giggles.

“Very big,” Motoi agreed. “B-sama has tamed them, and they seem to accept the encampment for his sake, but they’re normally quite savage. Do be careful.”

B was the other host, wasn’t he? Naruto walked on, thinking about that. Maybe he could make friends with B, the way he had with Gaara.

Even that possibility couldn’t distract him from the island itself for long, though. There were even buildings on this turtle! About a hundred shinobi, from what he could see, were scattered around the narrow valley they were led down, going in and out of a clutch of weathered, moss grown stone buildings.

“A temple?” Sakura wondered, at his shoulder. “Look at the approaches.” She pointed to a wide, paved way heading off into the crags.

“It was part of a temple complex, once,” Motoi agreed. “It’s well hidden, defensible, and close to the best concealment for the hosts.”

“A fine choice,” Kakashi-sensei murmured, not taking his nose out of his book as he paced along at Jiraiya’s side. Naruto exchanged glances with Sakura and Sasuke, and they all rolled their eyes a little over their teacher’s personal security blanket. He’d been using it a lot more, lately, and Naruto was starting to wonder if something was actually wrong.

Well, aside from Akatsuki and all that. Besides that. Something personal, maybe. Mission stuff never bothered Kakashi-sensei this much.

Motoi showed them to their very own building. “We thought it wise to give the different nations separate quarters.”

“Yes,” Kakashi-sensei sighed, finally snapping his book closed. “I’m sure it will be just a joy to integrate this group.” He raised his voice. “Everyone find rooms and settle in! Don’t make trouble, and don’t let anyone provoke you into making trouble. We’re here to complete a mission. Remember it.”

Naruto nodded to himself. Personal, definitely. As soon as he was doing mission stuff, Kakashi-sensei was just fine, if a little scary at times.

“Be quick about it, you three,” Kakashi-sensei added as Naruto and his team filed past. “You and I will be going with Jiraiya-san to meet the other people in charge of this effort.”

They threw their packs into an empty second floor room and, as they hurried down again to join Kakashi-sensei, Naruto heard Ino arguing with Kiba about who should take the rooms beside it, and Iruka-san’s aggravated voice raised over both of them, telling them to knock it off. The fifth member of Ino’s Intelligence team, the lean pale guy, smiled wide and cheery as he stood aside for them on the stairs, apparently oblivious to Ino’s temper; maybe he was used to it already.

“It’s too bad Shikamaru and Chouji stayed in the village,” Sakura muttered. “I mean, I’m glad for Ino that she was put in charge of the unit from Intelligence, but she’s a lot calmer when they’re both around.”

“She is?” Naruto asked, skeptical, dodging aside for Genma-san and the pack-loaded chuunin he was directing into the first floor rooms. He’d never noticed Ino being calm about anything, ever. Sakura’s mouth quirked.

“Deep down.”

They emerged into the misty chill of the valley again, and Kakashi nodded, pushing away from the wall. “Good, that’s all of us. Let’s go.”

Naruto looked around some more as they trailed after Kakashi-sensei and Jiraiya across the cracked, grass-grown plaza toward the last building before that broad avenue and stairs out of the valley.

“There’s always some friction when shinobi from different villages try to work together,” Kakashi-sensei told them as they detoured around a woman with the Mist insignia and a man with Cloud’s, up in each other’s faces and arguing about the best way to keep watch for an attack from the air. “So I’ll repeat this. Keep your tempers. Don’t provoke anyone and don’t let yourselves be provoked.” For a moment, the cool, businesslike tone left his voice and he glanced over his shoulder at them with a rueful tilt to his eyebrow. “And when someone does lose his temper, I expect the other two to sit on him. Or her.”

“Not a problem,” Sasuke murmured.

“Hey, who said it would be me getting sat on?” Naruto bridled. As if Sasuke actually had any better of a temper than he did.

“Who said anything about that? I just said it wouldn’t be a problem.” Naruto growled at the bland look on Sasuke’s face, and Kakashi sighed, and Jiraiya laughed, and they were all satisfyingly relaxed when they went into what Naruto guessed was the headquarters building around here. The low, square building turned out to be pretty much one big room with boringly blank, windowless walls and a huge oval table made of black stone. The camp chairs looked flimsy, circled around it.

There were a bunch of people already there. Checking forehead protectors and insignia, it looked like two from each of the five great nations plus Sound, Grass, and Valley. He waved cheerfully at Temari, who rolled her eyes in response even as a corner of her mouth twitched. Cloud had an extra three people, sitting a little back from the big table. One of them must be the host of the Eight-tails, he figured, wondering who it was. The huge guy? One of the two young shinobi, about his own age? That might be kind of cool.

“Hatake Kakashi, of the Leaf,” Kakashi-san was introducing himself, distracting Naruto. “Jiraiya-sama, of the Leaf’s Sannin. Our host, Uzumaki Naruto, and his teammates Haruno Sakura and Uchiha Sasuke. Pleased.”

“We’re all here, then,” the dark, serious looking Cloud guy said, only to be interrupted when one of the two from Mist sat bolt upright and pointed at Sakura.

“Ah! Wall!”

Naruto was pretty sure everyone was blinking along with him at that one. Sakura sure was. “I beg your pardon?” she asked.

“At that Sound lab! I almost had that snake bastard and you stopped me!” He frowned. “Wait a minute, if you’re Leaf…”

Sakura’s mouth tightened, and Naruto edged closer to lean his shoulder against hers. “Orochimaru was a Leaf renegade,” Sakura said quietly. “I was there to execute him.”

The Mist guy crossed his arms with an exasperated huff that blew his silvery bangs out of his eyes. “Well then why did you stop me?”

Naruto could feel the shift as Sakura’s spine straightened and she answered coolly, “Your chance of success was too low. You’d been captured, so he knew at least some of your abilities and weaknesses. He appeared inattentive, but that was almost always a ruse with him. There were ten other shinobi present who would support him. I calculated you had less than a fifty percent chance of success, whereas defending him at that point would considerably increase my later chances of killing him.”

The Mist guy was a little wide-eyed by the time she was done, and the red-haired girl from Cloud whistled. “That’s pretty cold,” she said.

“It’s good strategy,” countered the sharp-eyed, dark-haired girl with the Rock insignia, with an approving look at Sakura.

The guy from Mist eyed Sakura thoughtfully. “So, did it work?”

Sakura twitched against his shoulder and Naruto was pretty sure she was forcing herself not to look at the two from Sound. The guy they’d met before, Tomita, he just looked serious, but the woman with him was definitely glaring. Sakura took a deep breath. “I drove my hand through his spine and saw the body burned,” she said flatly. “Will you accept that as restitution for your capture?”

The first part of that had made Naruto suck in a quick breath, because Sakura wasn’t the type to boast about her kills, but the second part made it all make sense. And the straight line of Tomita’s shoulders softened as he listened to Sakura offering her kill to shield Sound from repercussions.

“Huh.” The Mist guy smiled, mouth full of sharp teeth. “Yeah, I guess I will.”

Naruto snuck a sidelong look at Sakura, smiling. She nodded back just a little, relaxing against him. He and Sasuke shared a satisfied glance behind her. Yes, their teammate was just that awesome, and thoughtful, and caring. And scary, but Naruto thought it was probably okay if the other villages appreciated that part too.

“As I was saying,” the Cloud leader said quite calmly, “perhaps introductions are in order. I’m Darui. This is my second in command, Samui,” he gestured at the pale woman beside him, “and her team Karui and Omoi,” that was the two younger Cloud nin, “who are particularly assigned as bodyguards to B, the host of the Eight-tails.” The really big guy leaned back in his chair, which creaked.

Naruto tried to keep track of everyone as they went around the table, even though he kept getting distracted by watching B out of the corner of his eye. Tomita from Sound, he knew, and the glaring woman was Karin. The sharp girl from Rock was Kurotsuchi, and her father Kitsuchi was in charge of the Rock contingent. Haruto of Grass looked like the serious type, while his lieutenant, Souta, was lounging in his seat watching everyone lazily. Temari had come from Sand, and she’d brought Baki, the scary half-veil guy. Hidden Valley had sent a brother and sister from the Yasumori clan, Takuma and Yuzuki; Sasuke murmured that that clan was supposed to be really good with Wood techniques. The Mist guy who knew Sakura was Suigetsu, and the other one, who seemed to be really shy, was Choujuurou. They were both part of the Seven Swordsmen, apparently, and Naruto still wondered what was up with the filed teeth thing.

When everyone had been introduced, it was Darui, again, who said, “We need to choose someone to lead this mission. There are too many of us to try to command by consensus.”

Silence fell while everyone at the table looked warily around at each other. Naruto nearly groaned out loud; it was going to take forever to get anywhere at this rate. Well, fine, if it wasn’t obvious to anyone else…

He kicked the seat of Jiraiya’s chair, providentially placed right in front of him. “Hey, ero-sennin. It had better be you hadn’t it?”

Jiraiya looked around to glower fearsomely at him. “Naruto!” Naruto just crossed his arms and glared back.

"What? It’s true!"

“Why him?” the red-haired Cloud girl, Karui, demanded.

“He’s the oldest here, isn’t he?” Naruto waved his hands; why wasn’t this obvious? “And that means he’s got the most experience, and he’s survived all of it! And that’s kind of the point of us being here, isn’t it?”

After a quiet moment, Samui murmured, “He does make a good point.”

“Sand knows things to the credit of Jiraiya,” Temari allowed, though she added, “if he’s being serious.”

“And will he?” Kitsuchi wanted to know, leaning his stout elbows on the table. “Will he take on this kind of responsibility? Jiraiya of the Leaf is known to have left his village some time ago. He doesn’t even wear Leaf’s insignia any more.”

Yuzuki stirred beside her brother. “Perhaps that would be well, in a situation like this. Perhaps we need someone whose first loyalty is not to a specific village. The River Country also knows of Jiraiya-san. He has never acted against Leaf’s interests, but on his travels he has always been willing to lend his strength to the other villages and countries in time of trouble.”

Jiraiya finally left off glowering at Naruto and sat back with a sigh. “Leaf is still my home village. But it’s true that the dictates I try to follow are those of Mount Myouboku.”

“Hatake-san,” Choujuurou of the Mist said quietly, looking down at his folded hands on the table. “Will you vouch for the ability and dedication of Jiraiya-san?”

Kakashi-sensei was quiet for a long moment. “Jiraiya-san has both great knowledge and great wisdom,” he said at last. “No matter how much he sometimes pretends he doesn’t.” Naruto and Sasuke caught each other’s eye, and Naruto grinned at the look of grudging agreement on Sasuke’s face. “If he accepts leadership of this mission, he will lead it well and, I think, impartially.”

“Hey, wait a minute, why are you asking him?” Suigetsu wanted to know, poking Choujuurou in the ribs. He stopped and drew back, though, when Choujuurou looked up. He didn’t look shy at all, now.

“Hatake-san was the one who sent Kisame-senpai’s body and sword back to us,” Choujuurou said, low. “Intact. The Mist will accept his judgment, in this.” He gave Jiraiya a level look. “Will you accept it, Jiraiya-san?”

Jiraiya’s mouth quirked up at one corner. “It’s always the quiet ones,” he murmured, and straightened. “If this command group can reach a unanimous decision, I will accept it.”

Temari shrugged. “Mist and Leaf seem to agree. So does Sand.” She raised a brow at the two from Valley, and Yuzuki nodded.

“Hatake Kakashi is Haruno-san’s teacher,” Tomita observed. “And we have cause to trust her judgment, as Mist has cause to trust Hatake-san’s. Sound will accept her teacher’s judgment as well.”

Kitsuchi was watching Kakashi-sensei, who had gotten very still, looking amused. “You didn’t really think no one had noticed, did you Kakashi? Your judgment was what carried more than one engagement in the Leaf’s favor. Considering that, Rock agrees also.”

“Good enough,” Souta of the Grass drawled, and nudged his commander. “Haruto-san?”

“If my intelligence specialist agrees, then Grass accepts Jiraiya-san as well,” Haruto said calmly, ignoring the annoyed look Souta gave him. Naruto figured Souta hadn’t wanted anyone to know his specialty; Intelligence people tended to be like that, if Ino was anything to go by.

Everyone looked at Cloud. Darui considered Jiraiya for a long breath.

“Jiraiya-san,” he finally said, “it’s known that you have a close relationship with Leaf’s host. Can you tell me with surety that you’ll guard B as closely as you will Naruto?”

“I will,” Jiraiya answered without hesitation, assurance ringing in every word, and Naruto smiled a little. Just like Kakashi-sensei had a particular tone he used when he was being serious about mission stuff, Jiraiya spoke like this sometimes and you just believed him.

Darui nodded. “Then Cloud agrees, also. Jiraiya will command this mission.”

“If you can give me a similar assurance,” Jiraiya shot back immediately, “I would like you to act as second in command, Darui-kun.”

Darui smiled just a little at that, and gave Naruto a long look. “Yes,” he finally agreed. “I will defend Naruto of the Leaf as if he were our own.”

“All right, then.” Jiraiya glanced over at Kakashi-sensei. “Kakashi, you’re in charge of the Leaf contingent. Tell Genma he’s your second.” Kakashi nodded silently and Jiraiya turned back to the rest of them. “If I’m to plan well for this mission, I need to know the abilities of the people you’ve brought.”

Naruto tried to pay attention, but it was hard to be all that interested in lists. His attention kept wandering to the Cloud host, B. Sakura had gotten all the gossip available on Cloud’s host from Intelligence, before they left, and she’d said whoever it was was supposed to be one of the few hosts who completely controlled the power of the beast sealed inside him. Naruto had to wonder what that would be like.

“…well supplied with sensors and scouts, then,” Jiraiya was saying, when Naruto tuned in again, hands folded loosely under his chin as he thought. “I’ll want everyone’s input on how to best place the rest of our people for defense, if we’re discovered. Before that, though, Motoi mentioned that there was a place on this island where the hosts could be completely undetected?”

B finally spoke up. “The Tailed Beast temple. Chakra doesn’t pass its walls, either in or out.”

“That may be very useful for keeping the two of you from Akatsuki, if they find the island in the first place,” Jiraiya said approvingly. “If they can’t sense you at all, they may be convinced this encampment is a decoy.” Naruto sat up straight at that.

“Hey, hey, wait a minute,” he protested. “You can’t just stuff us in a temple if there’s trouble! I mean, I’m not just going to hide while everyone else is fighting!”

“You’re their target,” Jiraiya told him inflexibly, so level and serious that Naruto knew, with a sinking feeling, he really meant it. “And we will not permit them to take you. If that means hiding, you’ll do it.”

“But—!”

Sakura laid a hand on his shoulder. “Naruto,” she said gently. “I know you’re worried. You want the people you care for to be safe, even if you have to put yourself in danger to make sure of that, right?”

He crossed his arms, vindicated, and nodded firmly. “Yeah!” At least someone understood.

And then he yelped as Sakura grabbed the front of his shirt in her fist and dragged him up nose to nose with her. “Then what the hell makes you think we feel any differently?!” she yelled.

Naruto blinked at her, ears ringing. “Oh. Um.” He rubbed the back of his head, sheepish; he hadn’t quite thought of it like that. “Right.” He glanced around the table, face getting a little hot. Darui-san was looking amused, Temari wryly approving, and Tomita looked downright nostalgic. Sakura sniffed and dropped him back into his seat. She didn’t quite dust her hands, but Naruto thought she might as well have. He took a breath and rallied. “But! Itachi is gone, so whoever comes can’t just put that eye thing on us. They have to beat us first, right? So, so!” Naruto just about bounced; this was important. “So if you guys are defeated because we weren’t there to fight with you, we’ll have a worse chance of winning by ourselves!” He folded his arms again. “So we totally should fight with everyone else.”

“And what if it’s Madara himself who comes after you?” Jiraiya asked sharply.

Naruto scowled, but he supposed that was a point. “If it’s Madara, I’ll hide,” he agreed. “But if it’s anyone else, I’ll fight too!”

Jiraiya opened his mouth and closed it again. “Hm.”

B stirred. “You really going to be that much good to the fight?” he asked, leaning his protesting chair back on two legs. “How much of the Nine-tails’ chakra can you draw, anyway?”

Naruto lifted his chin. “Enough to give a jounin a complete chakra transfusion,” he said challengingly. A soft murmur of surprise rustled around the table and he sat back, satisfied.

B snorted. “That’s nothing compared to what the Nine-tails has on tap.”

Naruto bristled. “Fine, then! Show me!” B cocked his head and Naruto jumped up, pointing at him. “You’re supposed to be able to access all of the Eight-tails. So show me how! And I’ll do it! Because I’m not leaving my friends to fight alone!” He jammed his fists on his hips, glaring. “The fox already agreed to pay me rent. I bet I can get him to do this too!”

B’s chair wobbled on two legs for a moment and his brows vanished under his forehead protector. “Rent?” After a long moment, he laughed. “You’re a feisty one. I kind of like that. All right, kid; let’s see if you can do it.”

“Well,” Jiraiya said dryly, “that much seems to have been decided. Have fun. Let us know how it’s going.”

Naruto grinned at him and gave him Gai-san’s thumbs up sign, which made Sasuke groan faintly and Kakashi-sensei twitch. “You bet!”

B stretched up out of his chair, just as huge as he looked sitting down, and clapped his hands on Omoi’s and Karui’s shoulders. “Come on, you two. You can keep an eye on us.” Sakura and Sasuke promptly stood too, at Naruto’s back.

Karui gave them all a smirk. “You’ll never be able to do it.”

“Just watch me,” Naruto told her, and strode out of the building after B.


“These are the Falls of Truth,” B said over the low thunder of falling water that filled the little clearing. “The temple is behind it. To reach the temple, though, you have to face yourself first.”

Naruto puzzled at that for a moment and finally tilted his head at B and just asked, “Huh?”

“Sit there,” B pointed to a flat stone at the foot of the falls, “and meditate on the water. You’ll have to pass whatever appears out of the falls, to get to the temple.”

Was this where some of the giant animals would come in? Naruto shrugged. “Okay then.” He took a step toward the river, focusing his chakra for water walking, only to be stopped by a hand on his shoulder.

“Naruto,” Sasuke said quietly, “while you’re doing this… remember us. Okay?”

Naruto blinked. “Well of course I’ll remember you. You’re right here.”

Sasuke gave him an exasperated look. “That wasn’t what I meant. It’s… look, just…” he finally huffed out a breath, pulled Naruto around, and kissed him.

Naruto made a startled sound, but this… this was one of the special kisses, the ones that were slow and coaxing and like Naruto was the only thing Sasuke was thinking of in the whole world. So Naruto mentally tossed over his shoulder all the questions about why now and leaned into it. It made him feel like he was special when Sasuke kissed him like this, and Sakura was warm against his back, arms wrapped around them both. Sakura would protect them from everything; she always did.

“Don’t get too knotted up inside your own head, okay?” Sasuke said softly, when he finally drew back. “Remember this.”

“Okay,” Naruto agreed, husky.

Both Karui and Omoi had their brows raised when Sakura and Sasuke let him go, but B was wearing a tilted little smile. “Good guess,” he told Sasuke, and added to Naruto, “Well, go on, then.”

Naruto thought maybe he could have walked on water without any chakra at all, after that. But staring at the falls was boring. He shifted on the rock and sighed and stared some more.

And… was there a shadow in the water? He swore he could see his reflection, only the water had to be too rough for that…

The reflection solidified and himself stepped out of the waterfall.

It was definitely himself. Himself with the still, distant look on his face that Naruto never, ever, ever showed anyone else. What good would it do, after all, for anyone to know when he felt that way? That face was wet from the waterfall. Wait, no…

Wet with tears, running down from those dark, empty eyes without stopping.

“They don’t think you exist,” himself said quietly. “They look at you and don’t see you. Only the Nine-tails. You don’t exist at all.”

The words were like a fist against a broken bone. “That’s not true!” Naruto burst out.

“Sometimes they see the Fourth’s son, now,” his own voice said, his own face, looking straight at him. “But who’s that? You never knew him, except that he’s the one who chose this life for you. Does that really make his son something good? No. Just another empty form.”

“But I’m not,” Naruto wavered, remembering the times he’d wondered how his dad could do this to his own son, and he grabbed reflexively at his oldest shield. “I’m not! And it doesn’t matter! I’m going to be a hero!”

“Only until you fail,” himself said, soft and flat. “Like you did with Gaara. Too late. Not good enough. Then they’ll all say it’s no surprise, won’t they? Because you’re nothing, after all.”

Naruto wrapped his arms around him, suddenly cold in the blowing droplets from the falls. People would say that, yes. He could hear them, like he’d heard them for eighteen years, cold words spit at his back, and even his face, whenever he tried to succeed. They piled up like rocks on his shoulders until he was hunched down under the weight.

“How will you live, then?” himself asked. “Without anyone who really sees you at all. Wouldn’t it be better not to? The Nine-tails will die too, that way. Akatsuki won’t get it. There will be time for someone who actually chooses this to step up to be a host. Isn’t that what your father should have done?” He took a step closer. “And if you kill the fox that way, maybe then they’ll finally say you were a hero.”

“I won’t!” Naruto yelled, putting his hands over his ears. His own eyes were burning, now. “I won’t, I won’t let them win! I’m better than that! I am!”

“Who says so?” himself asked, so disinterested Naruto could tell he thought it was impossible.

“Sakura says,” he shot back, “and…” He stopped and blinked. “And… Sasuke. Sasuke said…”

Don’t get too knotted up inside your own head, okay?

“And, and Shikamaru said,” Naruto whispered, remembering.

We’ll keep ours safe.

"And Hinata," Naruto said softly. "And Kiba, and Chouji…"

Naruto-kun…

Naruto!

Hey, Naruto…

He remembered faces smiling at him. “And Gaara said I’d helped.” He felt again the little roughness of sand, swirling around his hand and lifting it to meet Gaara’s and clasp hands good-bye like friends. “And that ero-sennin said it would help if I fought beside everyone. Even though he didn’t want to!”

“Are they really telling the truth, though?” himself wanted to know. He was very close now, and the emptiness in his eyes was everything that had terrified Naruto when he woke up alone at night for years and years. But…

“Sasuke and Sakura love me,” he said, and knew it was true. And in knowing, himself got a little see-through for a moment. Naruto took a deep breath. He knew what this was, now. “All that… that’s from the past. It’s not now. Now is different.” He could feel the warmth of Sakura’s arms around him, of Sasuke’s mouth on his, and he smiled even if it was wobbly, holding tight to them. “Now is different.”

“How do you know for sure? What if it’s just a lie? What if it goes away?” himself whispered, and Naruto had to laugh out loud even though his own eyes were wet with that fear, too.

“I know because of this,” he said, husky, and reached out to wrap his arms around himself, just like Sakura had for him. And kissed himself, gentle and careful, the way Sasuke did for him.

Everything blurred through the water on his lashes, and when he blinked them clear he was looking at the waterfall and himself was gone. He looked around hastily, and found Sasuke and Sakura on the river shore along with B and Karui and Omoi. Naruto scrubbed a sleeve over his face and sucked in a deep breath and stood up. He felt… light.

Also a little dizzy, and he wobbled as he stepped back off the water and onto land.

B put a hand on his shoulder to steady him, looking down at him with a cocked brow. “So?”

“Well… I’m pretty sure I dealt with what I found, yeah.” Naruto’s smile got a little crooked for a second, and B’s matched it. Yeah, B was a host too, after all; he probably knew.

“Good. That was the easy part.”

Naruto thought about that. He guessed he could believe it; the falls had hurt some, but he’d already known all that stuff wasn’t true any more. He’d just needed to, well, to tell himself.

Still…

“Can we get something to eat first, then?” he asked.

He didn’t know why everyone seemed to find that so funny. It was a perfectly natural question.


The next morning, after a good breakfast, the six of them went back to the temple, all the way inside this time. It felt really weird, not being able to sense anyone’s chakra but theirs. The wall carvings were kind of cool, though, with lots of tentacles.

“All right,” B told him, once they were inside the inner building, arms crossed. “You’ve talked to the Nine-tails before, right? So you need to do that again. The more you talk, the more reasonable he’ll get. Probably.”

“Probably?” Sakura asked, wary.

“Well.” B scratched his head. “See, thing is, the tailed beasts don’t normally have much in the way of human thought. Or speech. They get that from us, the hosts. The more we talk, the more of our kind of sensible the beasts get. But Eight-tails, he says that Nine-tails is kind of an ornery bastard all the time, so he might stay pissed off longer.”

“Huh.” Naruto thought about that. It made sense. The Nine-tails did seem to spend most of his time really pissed off. “So I’ll just keep talking until he settles down. I can do that. Um.” He glanced around at them and cleared his throat. “So. Um.”

“Naruto,” Sasuke asked, eyeing him suspiciously, “do you actually know how to do this?”

“Of course I do!” Naruto drew himself up, indignant. And then deflated again. “Except, um. The times I’ve done it before I’ve kind of been about to die.”

Sasuke buried his face in his hands with a groan. “I knew it.”

B snorted a laugh. “You’re something else, kid.”

“There is another time you’re close, though,” Sakura said slowly. “When you’re really upset about one of us. When someone you care about is in danger. That’s when the Nine-tails’ chakra gets visible and…” she hesitated and finished, eyes narrow, “when you don’t seem to hear words any more. The Nine-tails must be really close, then.”

“So if I think about how much I need this, to protect all of you,” Naruto started, perking up. He could totally do that, and it would be a lot easier than getting one of them to throw him off the falls for something.

“That’s a dangerous way to do it,” B rumbled. “It might just send you out of control.”

Abruptly, Sasuke swung around, back to all of them.

“Sasuke?” Naruto asked, worried, reaching out a hand to him.

“If it’s necessary,” Sasuke said to the floor, tight and stifled, “I can get you back. But that will probably piss the fox off twice as much, so try not to need it, okay?”

“O…kay?” Naruto hazarded, not sure exactly what was going on behind that except that something sure was.

B stirred, where he was leaning against the stone steps of the little inner pyramid. “Uchiha,” he said, like the answer to a question. Sasuke twitched, and Naruto scowled at B. “The records from the founding say Madara was the first one to bind the Nine-tails—and not by sealing it.”

“I’m not him,” Sasuke said, flat and hard. “But a powerful Sharingan can control the beasts, especially if a host isn’t helping them resist.”

“But the fox would be even more pissed off to be reminded,” Naruto worked it out. “Yeah, I guess I’d be pissed off too.” He came and jostled Sasuke gently. “Don’t worry. I won’t let him get loose.” So his teammate wouldn’t have to do anything like what Madara did.

Sasuke huffed a soft laugh at that, finally looking around. “Yeah. If you’re going to be stubborn about it, I won’t worry. You’re more pig-headed than an elemental demon fox any day.”

“Of course I am.” Naruto smiled, satisfied, and climbed up the stairs briskly to sit on the platform at the top of them. “Okay, here I go.”

He closed his eyes and thought about the village. About Tsunade-baachan and the ero-sennin. About Kakashi-sensei and Iruka-san. About his year-mates, sitting around a grill table and fighting over yakiniku and bragging about their latest missions. About the hospital, and the way the other medics and the doctors smiled when he came in for a shift. About the kid whose hand he’d held through a tooth extraction, and the man whose bone he’d set and bonded because he had to take a mission in a week to pay for a new baby on the way, and the screaming panic inside him when he’d attended the birth and had to stop a hemorrhage, and how everyone in the room had cried when they knew the mother and baby would both pull through.

He thought about Sasuke and Sakura.

He thought about Akatsuki. About Gaara’s lifeless body and what it had cost to bring him home again. About what Akatsuki would do to everyone between him and them, if he didn’t find the power he needed to stop them.

He opened his eyes and glared at the Nine-tail’s cage. “Hey! Fox! I need to talk to you!”

An earth-shaking growl rumbled through the hall he was standing in, vibrating the water underfoot. “So, it’s you again, brat. What do you want this time?”

“I need your power!” And then he remembered that he was supposed to be talking, and probably cooperating, and coughed. “Um. Please.”

The fox stepped forward out of the dark and curled a lip up, showing one massive fang. “You’re in no danger. Why should I?”

“Shows what you know,” Naruto muttered. “Look, if I can’t fight with all your power, then Akatsuki is probably going to get us in the end, and you’ll be stuck with Madara and whatever he’s—”

“Madara!” The fox reared up behind his bars, roaring so loud the walls vibrated and Naruto’s ears hurt. “Show me where he is, and this time I’ll devour him!”

Naruto folded his arms and snorted. “And he’ll just do that eye thing on you, and you’ll be stuck again.”

A whole lot of really big teeth were bared right at him as the fox growled.

“But Sasuke said that a host can help you resist that,” Naruto offered, determined not to edge backwards.

Nine-tails stopped growling, ears cocked. “Just so you can keep me bound to your own purposes instead,” he said suspiciously. “Like three generations of your damn village before you.” He spat with disgust, which was actually kind of impressive to see, coming from something that size.

Naruto opened his mouth and slowly closed it again, thinking. “I don’t really know what my purposes are supposed to be,” he said at last. “I mean, I know what I want. I want to protect the people who are important to me. And I want the village to acknowledge me, but, um,” he smiled, remembering the falls, “people kind of do that already. So it’s mostly just protecting. And, since you’re here, and it’s kind of about you this time, yeah I want your help. But usually? Hell, I can protect people with my own strength.” He looked up at the huge, red eyes above him. “If there’s something more I’m supposed to be doing with you, no one ever told me.” He shrugged, jamming his hands in his pockets. “So screw that.”

The fox blinked at him.

Naruto scratched his nose thoughtfully. “Do you have, um, ‘purposes’?” he asked. “I mean… there must be things you want to do, too.” He’d never really thought about that before. Wow, it must kind of suck to be stuck inside someone else and not be able to do what you needed to.

Honestly, no wonder the fox was pissed off.

“I destroy corruption,” the Nine-tails said after a long, silent moment. “That’s the nature of my being, the nature of all the tailed beasts. I am a spirit of the pure world, and I burn away what becomes twisted.”

“Corruption?” Naruto scrunched up his mouth, trying to puzzle that out. He really doubted the fox meant garbage heaps, or at least if it did he was going to laugh really hard. Maybe less literal. Like gambling and stuff? Only maybe bigger and more serious… “Oh!” His eyes opened wide and he snapped his fingers, pleased with his insight. “Like Madara!”

The fox snarled like stone tearing apart. Naruto took that for a yes.

“Well, that’s easy, then! We can do that.”

“We can what?” the Nine-tails asked, as if it really hadn’t understood a word he’d said. Naruto came closer to the bars, looking up at him seriously.

“I mean it. Taking out the people like Madara, who are hurting everyone and… I guess you’d say corrupting the world. I’m good with that.” He cocked his head. “It’s what I came here to ask for help with!”

The fox actually drew back from the bars. “You say that now, because he attacks you. But if it were someone in your own village, you’d think different. Even sealed away, I could smell the corruption of that creature Orochimaru. But did that damn woman listen to me? Ha!”

“I would have listened,” Naruto pointed out. “I mean, it was my own teammate, Sakura, who killed Orochimaru.”

The fox settled back on his haunches, and his growl turned approving. “The girl you’re so foolish for? A suitable end. She’s touched by the chakra of the world herself, now.”

“I’d have been a lot happier if you’d spoken up and we could have taken Orochimaru out ourselves,” Naruto grumbled, crossing his arms. “That was a really hard mission for Sakura; it really hurt her!”

The fox’s tails flicked out like shrugging, but its eyes were fixed on him. “Do you truly think you can do this? Be the hands and vessel of a great spirit? Burn out the world’s rot?”

“I’m not saying I’m going to just let you rampage off whenever the hell you feel like it,” Naruto snapped. “You don’t get it all your own way! You’re here and you have your own thing, and I’ll help with that whenever we can, but I’m here too! If I help you, you have to help me. Not to destroy—to protect!”

The fox curled up his lip to show a fang again, disdainful. “Mouthy brat, aren’t you?”

“So maybe I get it from you,” Naruto grumbled back. He wasn’t sure this talking thing was really going to work.

But that, of all the things he’d said, made the fox throw up its head and laugh like the rush and leap of a fire. “You claim you’re kin to me? Bargain like it, then!” he declared, and in one stride he was right up at the bars, nose to enormous nose with Naruto. “You will let me watch the world through you. You will hear and heed when I tell you that there is corruption that must be destroyed. I will lend you all my power to do that. And if you do those things, I will also lend it for the protection of your ‘important people’.”

Naruto looked the Nine-tails in the eyes. Or eye, since he could really only meet one at a time, this close. “I’ll let you watch,” he agreed. “And I’ll help with the corruption thing as long as we can do it without destroying anything else.” He ignored the low growl at that. “And you can get words and thoughts from me, so you can understand why that’s important.”

The fox blinked and drew back a bit. “Hmph,” he said at last, and the force of that snort plastered Naruto’s clothes against him for a moment. “I suppose that will do for now. And,” he added, as he faded back into the darkness past the bars, “we’ll see who influences who.”

“Stubborn damn fox,” Naruto grumbled and opened his eyes on the temple again. His butt was cold from sitting on stone; he must have been ‘gone’ a while, this time. Five pairs of eyes were fixed on him, and he grinned back. “He agreed.”

Sasuke and Sakura both relaxed, which made him notice how tense they’d been, and he rubbed the back of his head and gave them an apologetic look.

“Well, let’s see it, then,” B told him, waving him down off the steps.

“Sure thing!” Naruto bounced up, excited by the idea of getting to spar with this kind of stuff. He suddenly wobbled with his foot on the first step, though. His eyes widened. “Hey!”

“Naruto?” Sakura and Sasuke were up the steps beside him in a flash, Sasuke’s eyes red and Sakura’s hands hovering in the first seal of her activation.

Naruto barely noticed, busy glowering at thin air. “The ‘damn woman’ who didn’t listen… He was talking about my mom! That damn fox was insulting my mom!” He brandished a fist in the air, yelling at the flicker of fire he could feel in the back of his head. “Don’t you say one bad word about my mom, damn it!”

A faint chuckle threaded through the temple, or maybe it was just his mind, and for half a breath a handful of tails brushed forward around him sending Sakura and Sasuke jumping back. Naruto crossed his arms and scowled ferociously. He was totally not letting the fox off the hook for this one, no matter how much power or how many tails it waved at him.

“Well,” B broke the silence in the temple. “This’ll be interesting.”


In the inner space where the demon fox curled behind his bars, the seal tag closing those gates shifted ever so slightly.

A/N: Sorry folks, there will be no hip-hop rhymes for B here. I suck at rhyming, and not in an in-character sort of way. My rationale is that, in this universe, B only rhymes at opponents in battle or with people he really likes and trusts, and a dicey international mission doesn’t fit either yet. As for the Nine-tails, the second half painted him as a lot more vicious and toxic than the first half, and I like the first half better; he even seems to have a bit of a soft spot for Naruto in the first half, insofar as an arrogant, pissed off elemental demon can. So I’m sticking with that characterization.

A Cup of Sugar

The sake had gone around a couple times, and they were getting to the stage of competitive gossip and confidences that might have been embarrassing later if they hadn’t had a firm pact never to speak of Girls’ Night Out in the cold light of day.

“So come on, Sakura.” Ino leaned forward precipitously over the table of their booth at Shushuya while Tenten giggled and Hinata blushed. “The three of you are practically inseparable, no matter how many solo missions any of you take. It’s totally the three of you together in bed, isn’t it?”

Sakura leaned back with a smug smile. “Of course it is.” At the squeals of glee, she waved her sake cup. “Not that the two left behind don’t keep each other company, but it just feels best when it’s all three of us. Besides,” she grinned into her cup, “Sasuke’s got amazing attention to detail, and Naruto is just unstoppable, and I’m a fantastic strategist; the field isn’t the only place that’s an advantage.” More squeals. She took another sip, thoughtfully. “Though I gotta say, I really think Sasuke was showing off on purpose when he took Naruto to bed the night I got home last time. It was a really nice view to come home to.” Squeaks this time. Sakura laughed and nudged Tenten’s knee. “So what about you?”

Tenten held out her cup for a refill. “We’re not as, you know, committed as you three, but yeah sometimes it’s all of us.” With a glint of challenge in her eye she went Sakura one better on detail and added, “With us it’s mostly just mouths and hands, you know. Lee’s got amazing fingers, you should give him a try some time, Sakura.” Everyone laughed and Sakura toasted Tenten’s score.

She couldn’t help asking, though, curious, “Do Lee and Neji ever…?”

Tenten nodded, eyes sparkling. “Mm. Sometimes, especially if Neji thinks Lee was taking a stupid risk and Lee keeps trying to justify it with Gai-sensei’s ideas about youthful passion. Sometimes I really wonder if he does it just so Neji will snap and kiss him to shut him up.” She laughed. “But then, sometimes when we’re back from a mission and Lee just won’t stop bouncing, Neji actually hits the pressure points to make him sleep.” Her smile softened as everyone laughed. “And then he puts Lee to bed. It’s really sweet to see.”

Softly, looking down at her drink, Hinata said, “Neji-niisan is a kind person.”

Sakura could see the speculation behind Ino’s faintly narrowed eyes and pursed lips; they’d both wondered a bit about Hinata and Neji lately. But what Ino actually asked was, “So, is your team in bed at all, Hinata? I have to admit, the three of you never struck me that way.” She gave a delicate shudder and slugged back the rest of her sake. “And I know it has to work out somehow, but seriously—sleeping with an Aburame?”

Hinata turned red as a rose. “It’s not…! I mean…! Um…” Her fingers tangled together and she looked down at them.

“Hey, hey.” Sakura wrapped an arm around her. “You know Girls’ Night rules; you don’t have to say if you don’t want to.”

Hinata actually laughed, soft and breathless. “Actually it’s… they hold me.” She peeked up at Sakura with a tiny smile. “Kind of like this. A lot.”

“Yeah?” Sakura smiled and turned toward her, drawing Hinata closer and cuddling her. “Like this?”

Hinata blushed some more, but nodded and leaned into her, and Sakura settled her close. Ino turned a little more to face the room, leaning an elbow on the table, watching Sakura’s back as casually as ever. Sakura grinned across at her.

“Um,” Hinata murmured, unexpectedly. “Shino-kun and Kiba-kun do. Sometimes.” She peeked up from Sakura’s shoulder with a furtive sparkle in her eyes. “I think Kiba-kun likes it a lot when Shino-kun holds him down.”

Tenten squeaked breathlessly and Ino looked just as wide-eyed as Sakura felt. “I think Hinata is winning this round,” Sakura declared, and laughed when Hinata ducked back down against her, blushing deeply but also triumphant. “So, what do you say, Ino? Got anything to top that?”

“Hmmmm.” Ino took another drink. “You know,” she said, more thoughtful than salacious, “Chouji and Shikamaru are a little like that too. Only with them, it’s all in their heads. But Chouji always looks to Shikamaru, even now we’re all chuunin. And when Shikamaru takes him to bed…” she looked down at her cup. “Well, it’s just really sweet. He takes really good care of Chouji.” She smiled wryly. “When they get like that, I just go flirt with Anko-san until she tackles me onto the couch; I always learn something new from her.”

Sakura laughed and Hinata squeaked. Anko had taught the week of “female sexual physiology” for their year at the academy.

“I’ll tell you this, though.” Ino shook off her serious mood and grinned. “When I am in bed with Chouji? His tongue can go for hours.”

Everyone squealed over that, and the contest dissolved into laughter and another bottle of sake.

As they were leaving, though, Sakura touched Hinata’s shoulder and said softly, “If this is none of my business, just tell me. But… it sounded kind of like you don’t really go to bed with anyone.” Hinata blushed, and Sakura hurried on. “And, really, you can totally tell me if this is a ‘no’, but…” she touched Hinata’s cheek gently, “would you like it if I showed you how it goes?” The easy way Hinata had cuddled into her was really making her think Hinata needed another woman to figure this out with.

Hinata’s eyes got very wide, and Sakura prepared to backpedal if necessary. “You…” Hinata’s hands were clasped tight together again. “You wouldn’t mind?” she whispered.

Sakura had to stifle a fast flare of anger at how timidly Hinata asked that, and reached out to hug her close again. One of these days, she swore, she was going to give Hyuuga Hiashi a piece of her mind, and he wasn’t going to enjoy the experience. “Of course I wouldn’t mind!” She cupped Hinata’s face in her hands and said softly, “Hinata. You’re a beautiful woman. Your heart is strong enough for any two people. I truly respect all of your work. And I would be honored if you want to come home with me tonight.”

Hinata was flushed, now, pink and shy and breathless. “I… I’d like that, please. Yes.”

Sakura cuddled her close for another breath before managing to let her go, and took her hand. “I’m glad.” She kept hold of Hinata’s hand as they wandered back through the evening streets, which meant Hinata was still pink-cheeked when they reached Sakura’s apartment. It was really awfully cute, she thought privately, and pondered the possibilities for whacking Naruto upside the head with a clue about Hinata’s crush on him.

“Oh, hey,” she said, struck by a sudden thought as she unlocked her door, “is your clan going to panic if you don’t come home? I mean, am I going to have Neji breaking down my door at three in the morning?”

“Oh, I’m sure he wouldn’t break it down,” Hinata answered with every appearance of earnestness. “Neji-niisan trusts your team.”

Sakura paused for a breath to contemplate the implied alternatives of Neji picking her lock, or possibly camping outside her window, and shook her head. The noble clans were their own thing all right. “Well, if he’s still here in the morning, I suppose I’ll just make breakfast for three,” she sighed, and led Hinata inside.

She didn’t bother to turn on the lights. There was plenty from the windows, for tonight.

When she turned back in the middle of the room, though, Hinata was still hovering by the door and Sakura reminded herself firmly that Hinata was a lot shyer than most shinobi. Most shinobi who were interested in sex to begin with, anyway. She came back and cupped a hand around Hinata’s cheek, kissing her softly. “Still good?”

Hinata nodded, pale eyes wide in the dimness.

“Here.” Sakura eased off the soft, lavender coat Hinata favored and hung it by the door. Without it, in only her mesh shirt and dark pants with nothing hiding her full figure and sleek muscles, Hinata looked older, stronger, considerably more dangerous. Sakura paused, head tilted. “Is there a need,” she asked softly, “to hide what you are, here in Hidden Leaf?”

Hinata didn’t pretend she didn’t understand, biting her lip and looking aside. “I suppose… not any more. Not really. But I was also so cold for so long—it got to be a habit.”

Cold. Frozen out of her own family, given what Sakura knew of Hyuuga politics, and she had to take a long breath for calm. It was bad enough that Hinata suffered physical effects from it, she didn’t need to also be alarmed by Sakura throwing things at the wall.

Maybe she’ll just tell Naruto about this, and let him work on Hiashi for a while. And then she could put in her two cents once the man was already pounded into the ground a little. By this point in his medical training Naruto would know exactly what it meant, that Hinata had been physically cold. That kind of effect on a shinobi’s chakra was sabotage, pure and simple. She could explain that calmly and sensibly to people while Naruto was discussing the issue with Hiashi.

And then they would let Sasuke have him.

That was for later, though. For now she just gathered Hinata close, one hand rubbing slow circles over her back. As Hinata relaxed again, she smiled and bent her head to brush a soft kiss against the curve of Hinata’s neck. She half expected Hinata to squeak, but instead she gasped, soft and breathy, and the sound went right down Sakura’s spine to curl low and hot in her stomach. “Bed?” she suggested, husky. Hinata nodded.

Sakura took her hands and coaxed her step by step across the wide room to where she’d spread her futon before going out tonight—it was easier than doing it very drunk later if it turned out to be one of those nights. The analytical corner of her mind observed that it was likely a good thing she’d acquired a taste for older style bedding from Sasuke; she imagined it would be more familiar to Hinata, too.

And it wouldn’t creak, the way Naruto’s bed did under two or more.

She took her time undressing, and helping Hinata undress, pausing with every garment to kiss the uncovered skin. She wanted to give Hinata as much time as she needed to be comfortable, of course; she also really wanted to hear more of the little sounds Hinata made. By the time she’d stripped off their underwear she was flushed and warm, herself, just from listening. When she traced a line of open-mouthed kisses up Hinata’s stomach and between her breasts, Hinata’s soft moan made her shiver.

“You’re incredibly sexy, you know that right?” she murmured against Hinata’s shoulder. Hinata gasped a small laugh.

“Sakura!”

“It’s true.” Sakura leaned up on an elbow and stroked a gentle hand down the line of Hinata’s body. “For starters you’re built like a work of sculptural art, but that aside…” she bent to kiss Hinata softly and nearly moaned herself at the way Hinata’s lips parted for her, the little breath of sound that answered. “Mmm. Just the way you are, like this, would make anyone hot, trust me.”

Hinata looked up at her, and even in the dim light she was blushing and bright-eyed. “Really?” she asked, and Sakura smiled helplessly back at the soft note of delight in her voice.

“Really.” She stroked her fingertips along the curve of Hinata’s breast. “Let me show you?”

Hinata’s nod was more confident than it had been all night, and Sakura’s inner strategist made a satisfied sound. She knelt over Hinata and slid both hands up to lift her breasts gently. Just that made Hinata arch a little, and Sakura was practically purring when she traced a slow spiral over one breast with her tongue to close her mouth on the nipple.

“Oh!” Hinata’s hands flew up to catch Sakura’s hips.

“Mmm,” Sakura answered, stroking her tongue over Hinata’s nipple, feeling the tiny shivers spilling through her, listening to her breath coming quicker. She cupped the other breast and circled her thumb gently over that nipple too. Heat curled tighter between her legs when Hinata moaned.

“Sakura,” Hinata gasped.

Sakura drew back slowly, sucking a little, and the sound Hinata made when Sakura’s lips pulled away from her nipple made Sakura’s voice husky. “Starting to feel it?” she whispered, and slid her hand slowly down Hinata’s body to cup lightly between her legs. “Down here?”

“Oh… yes.” Hinata’s eyes were half closed, lips parted.

“Will you let me show you more of that?” Sakura wasn’t even trying to hide the want in her own voice. She thought that was what made Hinata smile.

“Yes.”

Sakura kissed her smile, deep and slow, sliding her tongue through Hinata’s mouth as she pressed her hand more firmly between Hinata’s legs, kneading just a little. Good for increased blood flow, Anko leered cheerfully in her head, and Sakura had to shove the memory back down before she laughed. Hinata was making those breathless little sounds again, and Sakura couldn’t help the husky sound she made in answer as her fingertips dipped into the wetness of Hinata’s entrance.

“Here,” she whispered. “Just let me…” She kissed her way down Hinata’s body until she could settle between Hinata’s legs. “I want to taste.”

“Sakura…!” She could almost hear Hinata blushing, and rested her cheek against Hinata’s thigh.

“Is it okay?” she asked, fairly sure that the tinge of shock in Hinata’s voice was from excitement, but this was Hinata’s first time with another person. There were rules among kunoichi about making very sure that went as well as possible. The rules were no less absolute for being unwritten.

Hinata’s fingers stroked shyly through her hair. “Yes. I’d like… yes.”

Sakura smiled. “Okay, then.” She nibbled on the tendon of Hinata’s thigh, just to hear her gasp, and gently spread the folds of her open. She made a pleased sound herself as she dragged her tongue slowly against Hinata, soft and easy, and felt the tense-and-release of Hinata’s muscles.

“Ohh…”

“Mmm.” Sakura lapped slowly at her, until Hinata’s hips were moving with her and she could taste the salt of Hinata’s wetness. That was when she slid two fingers into her, and purred at Hinata’s low moan.

“Nn… Sakura, oh… yes.” The sleek flex of Hinata’s muscles made Sakura breathless herself, and she lapped firmly at Hinata’s clit as she worked her fingers in and out. Hinata’s hands tugged and pushed at her shoulders, and Sakura attended those cues with the concentration she’d give a new jutsu, working Hinata higher and higher until she gasped and her whole body pulled taut. “Sakura!”

Sakura drove her fingers in deep and sucked on Hinata’s clit, and Hinata came apart with a shudder, hips jerking against Sakura. Sakura shivered, listening to her breathless sounds, and lapped at her softly until Hinata collapsed back against the bed. Sakura knew that her smile was smug, as she eased her fingers free and slid back up to lie beside Hinata, but she felt that was justifiable.

Hinata smiled up at her, flushed and damp and nearly glowing in the dimness. “Thank you,” she murmured.

Sakura laughed, blushing just a little herself, and kissed Hinata lightly. “It was very much my pleasure.” And then her breath caught as Hinata’s fingers stroked a delicate line between her breasts.

“Can I try, too?” Hinata asked, and the mixture of shyness and mischief in the way she glanced up at Sakura nearly made Sakura melt.

“Of course.” She kissed Hinata again, and made a soft, pleased sound when Hinata kissed back. “I’d like that very much.”

As Hinata kissed her more boldly, and Sakura leaned into it with a sigh, she made a mental note to have a little talk with Neji, if Sakura and Ino’s suspicions turned out to be right. Just to be sure that he’d treat Hinata with all the care she deserved.

Kunoichi had to look out for each other, after all.

End

Up on the Angel’s Shoulders

Hatake Kakashi was known and feared through the five great countries and a dozen little ones. Sharingan Kakashi. The Copy Nin. The man who copied a thousand jutsu.

What no one seemed to remember was that Kakashi had graduated as a genin at five. Had passed his chuunin exam at six. And he had been jounin at thirteen, before he ever received the Sharingan.

Of course, that forgetfulness was mostly his own doing. The Sharingan’s greatest single use to him was not expanded perception, or the ability to copy others’ techniques, or even intimidation value. Its greatest use was as camouflage. No one had to wonder why the man with a thousand jutsu kept winning; the answer was self evident.

It was also wrong.

Kakashi was not a collector of jutsu. He was a scholar of them. He rarely used what he had copied except as a psychological ploy. Instead he studied them, looking for patterns among them, looking for the deeper answers to why one technique succeeded and another failed, looking for the weaknesses one could point out in another. Looking for the reasons and roots of chakra itself.

Right now he was sitting on the edge of his apartment building’s roof, staring into the wind and thinking about the Sharingan.

Common knowledge, if a clan secret could be called such, said the Sharingan activated under great stress or emotion. Kakashi thought he saw a much more specific pattern than that, though. Of the three activations he had seen himself, all of them had been in the field. None of them had been triggered by fear for the Uchiha’s own life. No, all three had been triggered by need, an absolute, driving need to protect, not themselves, but their fellows. To protect an emotional bond of great importance.

Really, it was no wonder the First had offered the Uchiha guardianship of the village itself; it was a purpose wedded perfectly to the nature of their bloodline. It was almost the mandate of their clan—always provided the bonds of the village were ones the Uchiha cared for. Some generations that worked out better than others.

That was a conclusion Kakashi had come to years ago, though. It wasn’t what brought him up to the roof today. No, what brought him up to the wind and height, seeking perspective, was something new.

Something Sasuke had brought to him earlier that day.


“Kakashi-sensei.” Sasuke stood at the foot of Kakashi’s tree, looking up and frowning. “You know a lot about seals, right?”

Kakashi raised a brow. Not the usual kind of question from Sasuke, who liked direct attacks and large explosions almost as much as Naruto did. He dropped lightly to the ground beside his student, head cocked. “Quite a bit, yes. Though I should warn you right now, I’m not going to help the three of you break into the library at the Hokage’s Residence, or the Records room at the academy.”

Sasuke gave him a faintly annoyed look, but didn’t rise further to the bait. Kakashi guessed it must be serious, whatever it was. Sasuke held out a scroll. “Is there a seal on this?”

“Hm.” Kakashi took the scroll and unwrapped it’s tie delicately. It was an old one, the paper dry and crackling under his fingertips. “Where is this from?”

“The Naka Shrine,” Sasuke said quietly, eyes fixed on the scroll, and Kakashi’s hands stilled for a moment. He’d only been an affiliate of the Uchiha clan, not formally adopted; he’d never taken part in most clan rituals. But he’d at least heard of a few, and the Naka Shrine was where the deepest and oldest had been held. Records from the shrine could only be clan secrets.

The thing was, he’d never actually told Sasuke he was affiliated with Uchiha. As far as Sasuke knew, he was asking an outsider to unseal a clan record.

“Sasuke,” he said softly, “what is this about?”

Sasuke shifted under his eyes, fidgeting. Kakashi waited him out. “There’s… a record tablet there,” his student finally muttered. “It talks about the Sharingan. Itachi told me to find it, when he… left.” Sasuke swallowed hard, hands fisting for a moment. When he went on his voice was a little ragged. “It’s mounted, and the mounting is a box. There were three scrolls inside. I took them out, then, but I… I never read them.”

“Probably a good decision, considering everything on your hands at the time,” Kakashi murmured, when it seemed like Sasuke had run aground in his explanation. “Did something change your mind?”

“Jiraiya-san,” Sasuke said to his feet. “He said… I mean… He was always making me think about clan things. Really think.” He half-laughed. “I hated it. But this last mission.” Finally, he looked up, and his eyes were haunted. “I need to know everything. What if we did something like that man in Hidden Stone did? The Mangekyou Sharingan is bad enough! What if there’s worse?!”

Kakashi rested a hand on Sasuke’s shoulder. “Easy, now.” He waited for his student to take a good breath and asked, “What is it about the Mangekyou Sharingan that’s so bad?” The way Sasuke was talking, he didn’t think it was just that Itachi used it.

Sasuke chewed on his lip for a few moments. “It’s…” His eyes slid away again, but not before Kakashi caught a flash of shame in them. “It’s wakened by killing your closest friend.”

Kakashi sucked in a sharp breath. Now he understood why their last mission, and the absolute betrayal of Stone’s shinobi by one of their own researchers, had brought this back to Sasuke’s mind. He spared a moment to hope, very hard, that the fact he’d never heard of the Mangekyou before Itachi returned meant that it was an aberration, that only a very few of his second clan had ever been tempted into that kind of depravity. No wonder Sasuke was so tense. All he said, though, was, “All right, let’s see what this scroll can tell us.” He unrolled it carefully.

It wasn’t all that long and he skimmed through it quickly. Warning followed dire warning about the method of waking the Mangekyou Sharingan that Sasuke had mentioned; a handful of names were listed, renegades who had taken this path and been executed for it. The death of both soul and chakra were cited as consequences of attaining the Mangekyou that way.

It was all curiously vague, though, and his fingers tingled faintly with each turn he unrolled.

“Hmm.” Kakashi traced his fingers over the back of the scroll thoughtfully. “I think you may be right; there’s probably more information hidden in here. Well, there’s always the obvious thing.” He nudged up his forehead protector and looked with his Sharingan.

“I tried that,” Sasuke said quietly. “It didn’t change anything, though.”

“Mmm.” Nothing was changing, no, but Kakashi’s eye itched just a little, the back-of-the-eyeball itch that he’d felt sometimes trying to look through something that had a barrier seal on it.

Or something that had a very strong genjutsu shielding it.

“The curious thing about the Sharingan, you know,” Kakashi said, peering closer, “is that it’s an extremely localized technique. No chakra touches the object of your vision unless you deliberately turn it outward; rather, an alteration to your own chakra and eye structure changes the nature of your perception. Your own chakra control has a great deal of impact on how deeply you can perceive through the Sharingan.” Sasuke was frowning at him in puzzlement and just a little annoyance at this recitation of the basics, and Kakashi’s mouth quirked. “Remind me to teach you this.”

He sent his hands flashing through the forty-three hand seals of the focusing technique Kazuo-san, his tutor among the Uchiha, had taught him long ago, focusing his chakra pin-point tight until his vision telescoped and the scroll’s characters burned in his sight.

Burned and divided. Sentence lay over sentence, on the scroll, each one in the overlay continued by the one beneath it in the underlay.

“I learned that because my chakra isn’t completely compatible with this eye,” he said, jaw clenched against the disorientation of reading two layers at once. “It isn’t usually taught to beginners. It burns chakra faster, but it deepens your perception.” He broke the technique with a short gasp, squeezing both eyes shut for a moment to clear his head. “You should read that yourself,” he said at last, “but in short it details all the consequences of awakening and using the Mangekyou Sharingan, none of which are pleasant.”

Sasuke’s shoulders relaxed all at once from their tight line. “Nothing else?” he asked, relieved.

Kakashi re-rolled the scroll carefully and handed it back. “Nothing else.” At least, it recorded no more demons in the Uchiha past. Fortunate, that. The ones already mentioned were bad enough. Sasuke held the scroll in both hands, head bowed, and nodded.

After a moment, though, he took a deep breath and looked up, chin set and determined, shrugging out of his demons’ hold. “That technique you used. Teach it to me.”

Kakashi smiled, quiet and proud behind his mask. “Of course.”


Kakashi drew up a foot against the edge of the roof and folded his hands around his knee. He’d told Sasuke the truth. The scroll spoke of nothing but the Mangekyou and its consequences: madness, blindness, corruption, death. But there were little turns of phrase in how those warnings were given that kept coming back to him.

The scroll spoke of those consequences following the forbidden awakening.

Was there, perhaps, another way?

Three times, he had seen the Sharingan awakened by the need to protect an emotional bond. Not always a completely friendly bond; indeed, in two out of three, the bond had been downright adversarial. But each had been powerful and deeply meaningful.

The best known way to awaken the Mangekyou Sharingan appeared to be taking just such a bond and breaking it.

Madness, yes. But that pattern suggested something more to Kakashi’s scholar’s eye: not only madness but conflict. The tension of opposites. In the beginning, the user killed to protect what he loved. In the end, he killed what he loved and had bloodied his hands to protect. Tension like that could tear a heart in two.

Tear it open.

That, he thought, might just be the key. Any path to the Mangekyou Sharingan must tear open the heart, right down to the core, far deeper than the first awakening. That wasn’t the kind of pain any sane person would court. It was, however, a pain that came to shinobi sometimes, sought for or not. It was a pain Kakashi had known himself.

Could that knowing serve his village?

His lips quirked as he came face to face with what he was thinking. No wonder he’d sought the roof today, and not the Memorial. This wasn’t a decision Obito could help him with. Obito would almost certainly have told him he was an idiot to even consider it and that he needed to spend more time healing his poor, battered heart instead of cutting it open all over again. Obito would have had a good point. But, for all his passionate attempts to keep Obito’s spirit alive in his actions, Kakashi’s life and heart had always been dedicated to Konoha’s service. That was what had led him to war, to ANBU, to teaching, of all things, in the end.

“I’ve already paid this price,” he murmured to the wind, to Obito’s memory. “If handing over the measure I got for it will buy more strength, protection for my people… I’ll do it.”

Idiot, he could hear Obito chide, but the memory of his teammate smiled crookedly, the way he’d smiled at Kakashi that last day when they’d finally worked together as one. Kakashi closed his eyes and smiled back, wry. The high wind over the village kicked up in a gust for a moment, ruffling his hair and curling down the back of his neck. Kakashi bent his head, reminded of another counter in his measure, one who would surely have had his own words to say about this plan. “Yes,” he agreed softly. “Your student is still as reckless as always, Minato-sensei.”

The wind sighed, but gently.


Kakashi sat in the middle of his apartment, table and cushions pushed back against the wall, paper spread over the floor mats to hold the rings and radials of the seal he’d drawn around himself. There was another on the door, a barrier. He didn’t want to be disturbed, and he didn’t want any neighbors to be injured if he lost control. He could have requested one of the sealed rooms under Intelligence, of course, but then he’d have had to say why. He wasn’t at all sure he could explain, at least not in a way that wouldn’t get him bundled off at once to whoever was doing operative evaluations this year, to have his head examined.

“I never claimed to be sane to begin with,” he muttered to Minato-sensei’s memory, as he knelt in the middle of his seal rings. He could almost see his teacher’s disapproving look as he set a cloth weapons roll in front of his knees and slowly unrolled it. This one didn’t protect kunai. Instead, each section held a memento—the dark ones he hid away and never looked at.

Kakashi took a slow breath, closing both eyes for a moment. Today his forehead protector, with the muffling seals stitched and etched into the underside, lay beside him; he could already feel the hum of chakra through his Sharingan, released of all restraints. One by one, he released the restraints he normally kept on his heart as well—the light humor that hid his ferocity, the careful distance from his fellows that hid his passionate attachments, the pretty books that distracted him from the blood and shadows of his work, the cool calculation that kept at bay his wild need to act. He released them all until the core was bared, blazing free.

Love. Guard. Protect. Whatever it takes.

Slowly, flinching, he reached out to rest his fingers on the first memento, the knife his father had killed himself with. A faint sound forced itself out of his throat as he let himself feel the full weight of conflicting need and reality, of his hot need to protect and the cold memory of death and failure, of his father’s body still and lifeless and a pool of blood soaking into the tatami. It hurt, like steel claws in his stomach.

He forced himself to touch the next one. A scrap of Obito’s jacket, stained at the edge with blood. He’d cut the scrap away just before they left him behind, bones crushed to fragments, half his organs burst under the falling stone, eye socket empty. The empty body of the teammate who’d admired him, railed at him, challenged him, not with jutsu but with his heart—they’d left him behind, the one who’d made him understand Minato-sensei’s words, the one he could have loved if he’d only known sooner! Love. Protect. They wrenched against Dead. Lost. Kakashi hunched in on himself, teeth clenched as water gathered in his wide, staring eyes.

One after another, he touched them and made himself remember. Rin’s forehead protector, scratched and bent from the ambush that had killed her on a routine relief mission he hadn’t been there for. A charred bit of wood from where Uchiha Hiashi, the only one he’d been willing to call his clan head, had been found, surrounded by dead Cloud-nin, both his eyes pierced by his own hand. The long lock of silky black hair that Haruko, ANBU’s Swallow, had left him, her captain, along with her note of forgiveness the night she’d hunted down her own cousin unflinchingly and then walked out into the dawn and into the river to drown. An embroidered Uchiha insignia that he’d taken from the shoulder of Mai’s uniform when he’d found his sometime lover dead in the streets with the rest of the clan, guts sliced open and sprayed up the wall beside her, laughing eyes empty and staring at the dark sky. With each memory, he fanned all the wild fire of his love and urge to protect as if there were still something he could do, even as he held the mementos tight and reminded himself of reality, the chill of death in their flesh when he’d found them.

Finally, the last memento was under his shaking fingers. One of the marker tags from Minato-sensei’s final battle, edges torn and charred. Memory stabbed at him, of coming too late, far too late, of arriving only to see the Third straightening Minato-sensei’s limbs and brushing blank, staring blue eyes closed. He’d been too late, followed too slowly when the Nine-tails turned away from the village and he’d seen flickers of Minato-sensei’s chakra in the distance. He’d failed. Failed to protect his teacher, his Hokage, the one he loved and had sworn in his heart to serve with his life. The one he’d needed, above all, to guard.

Memory piled on memory, of love on love and death on death, and he clung tight to his burning need to protect over against the stony chill of failure until they both screamed in his mind and heart, shrieked and howled with all the fire and grief that was in him and the fragment of mind left sensible wondered if this was madness. Red darkness clouded his vision.

And broke.

The very air stilled and brightened around him. He could see every current of it and every dust mote, every thread of wood grain and every fiber of straw. Drawn to the snapping point between the two poles of need and reality, his chakra shifted and his Sharingan answered. Here was strength to serve his need, to break reality if need be.

The world warped around him.


The next thing Kakashi was aware of was someone banging fast and hard on his door.

“Kakashi?! Kakashi! Open this fucking door and let me in or I’ll blow it in, I swear I will! What the fuck is going on?! Kakashi?”

Anko. Of course. He tried to speak, to reassure her that everything was fine and there was no need for property damage, and only managed to cough in a very raw throat. He noticed he was flat on his back, too, looking up at his ceiling. Maybe he could get up and go to the door, where he wouldn’t have to speak as loudly. Yes, that was a good idea. Only he didn’t seem to be able to move much. Kakashi frowned to himself, considering this dilemma.

“Kakashi!” The door burst inward, barrier seal smoking and shredding under the force of Anko’s kick. She stopped short just inside, eyes widening. “Sweet demons fucking, what did you do?!” She swooped down on him, heaving him efficiently upright, hands moving fast in an ungentle damage check. Kakashi’s eyes widened as he saw the mess in the middle of his room. The paper of his containment seals was shredded and there was a hole or a crater in his floor, where he’d been sitting.

The mementos were gone.

“New technique,” he managed to rasp, leaning on Anko’s shoulder heavily. “Stronger than expected.”

“I’ll say it fucking was!” Anko glared at him. “Why the hell are you experimenting with new jutsu in our apartment building and not—” Abruptly she broke off, staring at him. No. At his eye. “Kakashi-san,” she said, low and sharp, “what did you do?”

He grinned wryly behind his mask. “Clan secret.”

She frowned, but didn’t argue. Anko always had been serious in the field. “I’m getting you down to the medics. Hospital or Intelligence?”

“Neither.” As her frown turned darker, he sighed. “Shizune first.” He didn’t want news of this going any further than was absolutely necessary. He saw comprehension in Anko’s eyes, even though her mouth was still tight and disapproving.

“Fine.” She propped him roughly against his table and hunted through the shredded paper until she came up with his forehead protector. Both of them eyed the end of the band that had been cut or torn away. “Other end doesn’t seem to be here,” Anko observed flatly.

Kakashi smiled. “Interesting.”

Anko glowered at him and clapped it over his left eye. “Tie that. I’ll be right back.” In the doorway, she glanced back over her shoulder and added, quietly. “You’d better know what you’re doing. I don’t think we can afford to lose you right now.”

Kakashi knotted the band clumsily as she propped his door shut behind her. His fingers were shaking. Chakra drain, he judged, feeling the chill of his extremities—not completely incapacitating, but he was undoubtedly in for a little bed rest. Well, maybe he wouldn’t argue too hard. Once Shizune and Tsunade were both done yelling at him for taking stupid risks, he figured they could all keep busy talking over this destructive or warping ability he seemed to have gained.

Part of him hoped they’d take a while yelling, though, because his heart was shaking worse than his hands. He felt wrung out, scoured, but still vibrating with an edge like a combat high. Part of him felt stricken, bruised, that those mementos had probably been destroyed. Another part of him felt settled, contented that they had been lost in this way and for this cause, as though they were a suitable price. At the same time, he felt numbed, as if he’d burned the memories out by focusing on them so hard. He still remembered; there was still pain. It was just the bloodletting edge that felt a little dulled. He didn’t know whether that was a relief or a betrayal of his loved ones.

“Was it the right thing to do, sensei?” he asked thin air, softly.

In answer, the door banged open again and Tsunade herself strode through it with Anko shadowing her. “What the hell did you do to yourself this time, brat?” she demanded, hands on her hips.

The breeze from the swinging door ruffled through his hair like light fingers, and Kakashi bent his head into it for one moment, yearning with all his torn heart for the lost touch of his teacher’s guidance and forgiveness. And then he looked up at his current Hokage with the most insouciant expression he could manage.

"Well, there was this scroll…"


Kakashi drifted up out of sleep to the feeling of fingers carding through his hair.

"That was an extremely foolish thing you just did," Minato-sensei said quietly.

"Mm. Had to," Kakashi murmured, sleepy but stubborn. Minato-sensei’s sigh was familiar.

"You did not have to, but I don’t expect you to admit that." He could nearly hear the quirk of his teacher’s mouth. "Not out loud, at any rate."

Kakashi turned on his side and curled up against Minato-sensei’s knee, the same way he’d hidden from and silently apologized for reprimands so long ago. So many years since he’d done it last, since he’d heard Minato-sensei’s soft huff of amusement or felt gentle fingers tugging on his hair in answer. So long.

Wait.

Kakashi slowly opened his eyes and stared up at the man sitting beside him on his hospital bed. It really was Minato-sensei, long pale coat folded and crushed under his thigh, smiling a little at his shock as Kakashi leaned up on one elbow. "What…" he managed, raspy and harsh.

Familiar blue eyes were sober. "You tore your chakra, Kakashi-kun, right down to the root. The damage is echoing in both your body and spirit. Tsunade-san is wise to keep you under observation, here." A small smile, quiet but bright as anyone else’s laugh. "But it does mean you’ll be far more sensitive to the presence of spirits for a time, so I took the opportunity to scold you in person."

"You’re… really here?" Kakashi whispered, shaky. "I’m not… I mean…" Of course, years in the field reminded him, if this was a dream or hallucination, it was perfectly capable of telling him it wasn’t, so nothing was proved. In fact, he told himself sternly, bracing for the inevitable disappointment, any claim of being real should probably be taken as evidence that this was a figment of his own pain and imagination.

Minato-sensei leaned back against the wall beside Kakashi’s flat hospital pillow, crossing his arms. "Define ‘really’." Kakashi choked on a disbelieving laugh at that, and his teacher smiled, eyes glinting like he knew exactly what Kakashi had been thinking. "I’m as here as I’ve always been. And you are… not exactly dreaming."

That was not the answer he’d expect from a dream, no. It was definitely a Minato-sensei original. But then… "Why have you stayed?" Kakashi demanded. "How have you stayed?" None of the Hokage were in-shrined; the First had forbidden it, saying that no one who dirtied his hands and conscience with the things a good village leader had to do should ever be venerated.

"The Hokage Monument makes a very good shintai, actually," Minato-sensei observed lightly. "There are even offerings left there, sometimes, by those who feel too soiled to stand on purified ground in the shrines. As for why…" He looked down at Kakashi, eyes level. "Do you really have to ask that?"

Kakashi’s eyes fell. "I suppose not," he said softly. The Monument. Which meant that Naruto had been clambering all over his father’s actual face and painting it new and interesting colors; Kakashi wasn’t sure whether that was unbearably sad or incredibly funny.

Wait. Naruto. He looked up again sharply. "Minato-sensei, if you’re still here why haven’t you spoken to Naruto?" Surely the village’s host was spirit-touched enough to hear.

Minato-sensei slumped a little against the wall, sighing. "I wish I could. But the Nine-tails holds more than a bit of a grudge and drowns me out whenever I come too near." Sadly, he added, "I can’t even really blame him."

As badly as his own heart ached tonight, Kakashi couldn’t bring himself to press further against the darkness in his teacher’s eyes. "I’m sorry."

Minato-sensei gave him that small, true smile again, and warmth curled through Kakashi. He’d cherished that look for as long as he’d known Minato-sensei, very nearly living from smile to smile and hoarding the reassurance and approval in them.

And then he’d lost them.

Abruptly his eyes were wet and he hastily flopped down again, turning his head a little into the pillow to blot them.

"Kakashi." Minato-sensei’s fingers brushed his hair again, stroking through it gently. "I haven’t left you. No matter how my most bullheaded student has infuriated or terrified me over the years, I haven’t left you."

"I couldn’t… I wasn’t in time…" Kakashi started into his pillow, thick and choked, and his teacher’s hand closed on his nape and gave him a light shake.

"Enough of that," Minato-sensei told him firmly. "It wasn’t your job to save me. You didn’t fail."

"But," Kakashi started, stubbornness waking again. He’d been a jounin already, surely it had been his job to support his Hokage! And then he gasped softly as Minato-sensei’s hand tightened a little, strong and warm on the back of his neck.

"You did not fail." That was his Hokage’s voice as well as his teacher’s, and Kakashi subsided, just a little daunted, as always, by Minato-sensei’s rare sternness.

"Yes, Minato-sensei," he murmured, lying quiet as that insistent absolution settled into his heart.

"Better." His teacher’s hand was gentle again, stroking his hair. "Sleep now, Kakashi. Rest. Heal up from doing such a damn foolish thing."

Kakashi’s cheeks were just a little hot. "Yes, Minato-sensei." He curled back up against his teacher’s knee, and heard Minato-sensei’s soft chuckle. Slowly his eyes did slide closed under the steady stroke of Minato-sensei’s fingers through his hair.

"Remember," Minato-sensei’s voice said quietly as he drifted back down. "It wasn’t your fault or failure. None of it was."

When Kakashi opened his eyes again it was daylight, and there was no one sitting beside him. No sign anyone ever had been.

But his heart didn’t hurt as much.

End

A/N: Looking at the scene with that record tablet, it doesn’t look like there’s room for much detailed information on it, even in two or three layers; I’m assuming that it’s actually just the summary, what was written by the first generation to deal with the Mangekyou. Other information was added later in the form of those scrolls tucked away inside/behind the tablet.

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Twelve

When they reached the stone temple again, in the late, silvery light cast up by the swamp waters, Neji dumped Itachi’s body next to Hoshigake’s and the now headless bird-riding Akatsuki, and they went to join the others. Sand’s shinobi all stood beside Gaara on a scrubby rise of hill.

Or at least, beside his body.

Even in his own daze, Sasuke drew closer to Naruto, trying to offer a little support. Naruto had been so determined to save his friend, his fellow host.

“Is he really…?” Naruto asked, voice rough.

Chiyo sighed and sat back on her heels beside the body. “You’re a healer too, Naruto-kun. You know as well as I.”

“It isn’t right!” Naruto’s hands clenched helplessly.

“No,” she said, very softly. “No, it isn’t.” Her hands rested on Gaara’s chest in a way that plucked at Sasuke’s observation, even with the Sharingan closed down. That touch wasn’t the farewell or silent plea for forgiveness of a medic who had failed. He’d seen that before. She held her hands like a healer preparing for a jutsu.

“Gaara,” Kankurou whispered, kneeling on the other side of the body, face twisted with grief. The grief of losing his brother.

Sasuke remembered his promise to Temari and flinched.

“Kazekage-sama,” Fuunotora said softly, folded hands pressed against her mouth. “He was taken because he tried to protect us instead of escaping.”

“The other villages and hosts will know, now,” Sakura offered, just as soft, eyes fixed on Gaara’s body. “We’ll find a way to destroy Akatsuki for this. That, at least.”

“There may be something more.” Chiyo’s words dropped into the soft sounds of grief like pebbles into a pool.

Kankurou looked up with a jerk, and Naruto flung himself down beside her, all in one moment. “What?” Naruto demanded, eyes blazing. Chiyo looked back steadily. “You have great reserves of chakra,” she said. “It may be enough, if you will lend me your strength.”

“Anything,” Naruto promised, tautly, reaching out to her, chakra already spilling into reddish visibility around his hands.

Kankurou whispered, voice harsh, “Chiyo-baasama…”

“Hush, boy,” she told him with a faint smile. “It’s my choice. I was the one who got Gaara into this mess, after all.” She beckoned Naruto closer. “Feed your chakra to me, Naruto-kun. Don’t falter. It will be a heavy draw; this is a deep technique.” Softly she added, “And a forbidden one.”

Naruto froze in mid-reach, eyes even wider than before. “Forbidden…?”

She smiled, quite serene, and Sasuke’s heart twisted with the utter contrast between her expression and Itachi’s mad calm. Chiyo’s eyes were deep and shadowed, but content. “To bring back one who is already gone, my own life must be given.”

Naruto flinched back. “But—!”

Chiyo reached up and rapped him over the head with her knuckles. “You hush too,” she scolded. “I said it was my choice, and it is. It’s one you may face someday, too, though I will hope not. It’s a choice that comes to very powerful healers in time of war, though, all too often. And war is come on us again, I can see that.” She looked around at the Sand-nin standing, stunned, around her. “Understand. This is my gift to our village, that our leader may live and be strong, and we may not be deprived of his will and wisdom. I believe young Gaara has both those. Don’t let the silly boy brood, clear?” She fixed a sharp eye on Kankurou and he swallowed.

“Yes, Chiyo-baasama,” he said, husky.

Chiyo nodded briskly. “Good. Now, then.” She raised a brow at Naruto, who was biting his lip hard. The thought prodded at Sasuke that his team wasn’t just his anchor; he was theirs also, and Naruto obviously had no real idea why Chiyo had chosen this. He shook himself out of his daze and went to kneel beside Naruto. He was too tired to yell or argue, the way they normally would, so he settled for just thumping down behind Naruto and resting his forehead against Naruto’s back, nearly clinging to his shoulders for balance.

“It isn’t wrong,” he whispered. “It isn’t your fault, because you want him back. Okay? It’s her choice. As a noble, she’s chosen her duty to her village and clan and Kage. Help her do it.”

Chiyo’s mouth crooked. “You’re so sharp you’ll cut yourself, boy,” she murmured. Sasuke arched a tired brow at her. She didn’t exactly hide the signs that she was from one of the Sand’s noble clans. The influence she and her brother had, the size of the compound he’d heard some Sand-nin talking about—and with access to an underground river, in this desert village—wasn’t it obvious? His thoughts were wandering. He hauled them wearily back.

“You’re sure?” Naruto said, low and uncertain.

Sasuke tightened his hands for a moment. If Naruto was sometimes his voice, maybe he was Naruto’s history—all the things Naruto should have been taught, as the son of the Fourth, but never had been. “I’m sure," he said softly.

“Okay, then.” Naruto scooted forward, and Sasuke swayed, reaching out to brace himself against the ground to keep from falling over. Hands tipped him back upright, though the hands themselves were shaking. He looked up to see Kakashi looking down at him, drawn and gray like Sasuke had never seen before. The corner of his visible eye was crinkled, but not with the usual smile lines—with something softer and sadder. This mission had wrung out a lot of hearts, he thought distantly.

He managed to straighten up a bit, at least long enough for Sakura to kneel beside him and wrap an arm around him. They watched Naruto’s hands pressed over Chiyo’s on Gaara’s chest.

“It was a technique for puppets,” Kankurou muttered, broad shoulders tight, eyes fixed on Gaara. “To give them life. But it always cost a life. Chiyo-baasama forbid it herself.”

Light grew and refracted around Naruto and Chiyo’s hands. Sasuke wondered what he would see if he’d been able to muster chakra for the Sharingan. Gai had come to stand with them, one shoulder under Kakashi’s; their commander must have spent all his reserves, too, to be accepting support like that in public. Sasuke leaned against Sakura and blinked. Lots of public. There were… more people here than there had been.

The rise of ground before the temple was filling with new figures, one after another. Shinobi of the Sand, he realized, slowly taking in the uniforms they wore. One of them was Temari.

“Gaara!”

Kankurou caught her. “It’s okay,” he said, low and rough, as she tugged against his grip on her shoulders, dark, scared eyes fixed on their brother. “It’s okay. Chiyo-baasama has him.” His mouth twisted. “And Naruto, too.”

Whispers ran through the tripled crowd as he told her what had happened, that four of Akatsuki were confirmed dead. That Sand had killed their own renegade, and Leaf theirs.

“I couldn’t confine Hoshigake,” Gai was saying quietly to Kakashi, behind them. “I only barely defeated him, and that took opening the seventh gate. Nothing we have available could have held him, if he’d regained awareness.” For once that booming, bluff voice was hard. Dark.

“Best that you killed him, then.” Kakashi’s voice was cool. “We’ll see if we can make out anything of their plans from what the four of them said during battle.”

The light around the two healers faded and Kankurou hurried forward to catch Chiyo as she fell. Naruto looked grim and drawn, across from her, hands still resting on Gaara’s chest. “I’ll look out for him for you,” he whispered, eyes on the old woman’s body. “I promise.”

From the crowd, Chiyo’s brother came forward and took her from Kankurou, laying her out carefully a few steps away with some low, murmured words that Sasuke thought were probably goodbye.

Gaara stirred and breathed. By the time he opened his eyes, he was wrapped in Temari’s arms as she hid tears against his shoulder. “Nee-san,” he murmured, and that pulled a single, muffled sob out of her.

“Hey,” Naruto told Gaara, softly, smile crooked. “Everyone was just coming to save you.” He looked around at the crowd and Gaara followed his glance, eyes a bit wide. Noise broke over the crowd, sounding everywhere of relief as Gaara slowly stood with Naruto’s hand under his arm.

“Our turn,” Sakura murmured. “Can you stand?”

“I’m not the one who died,” Sasuke muttered. “Just help me up.”

So he was on his feet to offer his respects to Chiyo’s spirit, as Gaara requested. That was proper. Naruto came to join his team as Gaara’s siblings and people closed around their Kazekage, and Sasuke reached out and hauled him closer. “It was what she wanted. Her spirit thanks you,” he murmured, leaning against Naruto.

Naruto scrubbed a rough sleeve across his eyes and muttered, “You noble types are really crazy, you know that?” He leaned back, though, and some of the prickly tension Sasuke had felt, seeing Gaara dead and tossed aside just for the sake of his beast, settled in face of Naruto’s solid, living presence.

That would not happen to Naruto. Not ever. Sasuke had stopped Itachi, he’d kept his family alive, he’d do it again as often as he had to.

“…and if we have another healer around who can stop decomposition,” he heard Kakashi saying off to one side, “we’ll take Itachi’s body back to Konoha.”

Sasuke spoke without thinking. “No.” He turned to face Kakashi and two of the Sand shinobi, who were all looking at him, a bit startled.

“We don’t dare leave one of our advanced bloodlines just lying around,” Kakashi observed, brow raised.

“Then burn him here.” Certainty spilled through Sasuke with the words, and he straightened a little between Naruto and Sakura. “He chose this,” waving a hand at the temple and, by implication, all of Akatsuki’s works. “Let him stay here. He is banished from the clan, and his spirit is none of ours.” Against his side, he felt Sakura relax, and her arm tighten around him.

“All right,” Kakashi said after a long, thoughtful moment. “Naruto. Do you still have enough chakra for a sustained fire?”

Naruto glanced questioningly at Sasuke and, at his nod, patted Sasuke’s shoulder and stepped forward. “Yeah.”

The rest of the Leaf teams gathered around Sasuke as he watched Itachi’s body burn, wild and hot. Considerably hotter than he’d expected, actually, and his mouth twitched as he caught the vindictive glare Naruto was giving the body.

“What was it Tsunade-sama said about him?” Sakura murmured with a hint of laughter in her voice, apparently having noticed too.

“A pathologically overprotective beast host, who can be counted on to follow right after any kidnapping, setting forests on fire with his chakra as he goes,” Sasuke recited, having had exactly the same moment in mind.

"Not that you have a lot of room to talk, yourself," she added.

They were smiling as Naruto turned back to them, and he smiled too, some of the tight lines around his mouth relaxing again.


It was a slow journey home. They went back to Sand, first, so Naruto could make sure Gaara was all right and Kakashi could talk the Sand Council into returning Hoshigake’s body to Mist intact.

“We will need good will among the great villages very badly and very soon,” he’d told them bluntly, and eventually they’d agreed. Sasuke thought Kakashi-sensei really was very good at diplomatic stuff when he wanted to be—though he had no idea why it made Kakashi flinch when Sakura voiced the same thought out loud.

Kakashi and Sasuke were both still tired and had to go slowly. Lee’s ankle and hand had been set but weren’t fully healed. Gai had pushed himself too hard while he was still recovering from the Eight Gates and had been yelled at very firmly by an exasperated Sand medic and forbidden to run at more than half speed. Neji was trying to hide it, but he was still wincing now and then from taking even an interrupted Tsukuyomi.

And Sasuke’s mind wasn’t focusing the way it really should. Akatsuki was out there, and here was Leaf’s host in the open and only lightly guarded. He had work to do. He had a clan to re-found. He should be focused.

Instead, little random moments replayed in his mind’s eye. The expression on Gaara’s face when he overheard some of the Sand girls squealing over him. Sakura’s excited remarks over dinner one night about fish in the underground river. A curl of sand lifting Naruto’s hand up to meet Gaara’s, when they parted. The Naka priestesses dancing in the empty streets of the Uchiha compound.

He nearly stumbled over his own feet at that memory, and Naruto was instantly beside him, frowning worriedly.

“Hey, are you okay? Do you need to rest? Hey, everyone, we’re taking a break now!”

“I don’t need to rest,” Sasuke started.

“Medic says!” Naruto snapped, glaring at him.

“Use that too often, and it isn’t going to work some day when you need it,” Sasuke grumbled, but the group was already alighting at the foot of a tree and he resigned himself to a break whether he needed it or not.

And maybe it was best not to be running, for a moment. He leaned back against the tree and absently accepted the water bottle Naruto pressed into his hand, and looked into the past.

He hadn’t thought about the cleansing in years. The village had paid for the priests and priestesses of the Naka Shrine to cleanse the compound, after the bodies were taken away. To burn the handful of buildings that couldn’t be cleansed. He had vague memories of someone talking to him about the clan’s accounts, of signing something to pay for an auxiliary shrine, and for a priest to tend the murdered dead of Uchiha until their violence was appeased.

And the compound had had to be cleansed so that people… so that people would move in. He hadn’t thought about that, either. Not past the decision never to visit, never to see other people living in his clan’s place.

That was not, he understood in the abstract, any way for the head of a clan to act. But he didn’t know if he could do any differently.

“Hey.” Sakura, sitting next to him, nudged his shoulder with hers. “You doing okay?” She was looking away into the trees instead of at him, which he was glad for.

“It’s… there’s… something I need to think about.”

“Not surprised.” She gave him a little, sidelong smile. “You know we’re not leaving you, right?”

Sasuke snorted. “Since the two of you have barely left me alone in the bathroom for the last three days, I kind of figured, yeah.” His mouth had curved up at the corners, though, and Sakura looked satisfied.

“Just making sure.”

Sasuke was quiet for a moment. “After we get home,” he finally said. “Stay with me.”

Her eyes darkened for a moment, and she nodded.

Sasuke closed his water bottle and stood up. “Let’s get going, then.”


Eventually, they got back to Konoha and Kakashi went off to make reports and Naruto bullied the hospital staff into letting them all go after a check-up. He was getting good at that, Sasuke reflected, watching him wave his arms vigorously and lecture a faintly amused-looking doctor about all the tests and observations he’d made of the team on the way back.

And then he was finally home, walking through the darkening streets of his village as the lamps lit here and there, and climbing the stairs to his apartment with his teammates beside him.

Sakura promptly spread his double futon and pushed him down onto it, settling behind him. “All right,” she said firmly, strong hands kneading his shoulders. “We’re home. There’s no one else to see. You can let go.”

“Knew it,” Naruto grumbled from the kitchen nook.

“You just hush up and cook,” Sakura directed.

Sasuke didn’t know what he wanted to say until he heard the words, “I really loved my brother,” coming out of his mouth. Sakura took in a quick breath at that and wrapped her arms around him. Sasuke was glad for that; it kept the shaking in his stomach from taking his whole body. “I loved him,” he said again, slowly, painfully. “And then he turned into… that.”

“Maybe something happened to him,” Naruto suggested, from the direction of the stove. “Like Orochimaru tried to happen to you.”

Sasuke’s breath caught. He didn’t often think of that, these days—of the months when he’d been going, in retrospect, slowly crazy. “Oh.”

Sakura’s arms stayed strong around him, stilling the shaking, and he leaned back against her, just breathing. After a long, silent moment while she rocked him gently, Sakura asked, “Sasuke, what age did your clan inherit at? I mean… if there was any kind of recognition or ritual for the heir, when did that happen?” Her voice was slow and thoughtful.

“Thirteen,” Sasuke answered, automatically; another reason Orochimaru had gotten to him so easily, that year when, if he hadn’t been the last one alive, he should have been acknowledged, should have taken on more responsibilities. And then he froze. Thirteen. When he’d been seven. The year that his father and Itachi had started to quarrel. The year that his brother changed.

“Sasuke?” Sakura asked softly, one hand rubbing his back steadily.

“He changed, then,” Sasuke whispered, starting blindly at the wall. “He did. He and Tou-san argued. That… that was the year his best friend died.” A shudder ripped through him. “For the Mangekyou Sharingan… he said….”

“Said what?”

“Itachi killed him.” Sasuke tried to swallow, and found his throat too dry. “That night… when we fought… he said to go to the shrine. I found records about it. You have to kill the person closest to you.”

“To achieve that second Sharingan?” Sakura asked, and he just nodded.

“Well, but hang on.” Naruto came to the futon with hot mugs of ramen, of course, for all of them. Sasuke folded shaking hands around his. “Kakashi-sensei has one of those. He used it while we were chasing Deidara; that’s what got him in the end. Whoa, hey!” He put a fast hand under Sasuke’s cup to keep it from spilling as Sasuke jerked forward, staring at him.

“I told him,” Sasuke whispered, cold tightening on his chest. “After that mission to Hidden Stone, I told him, I asked him to help me unlock the records. But he couldn’t…” Please no, please not again.

Naruto’s snort broke the panicked circle of his thoughts. “Of course Kakashi-sensei hasn’t killed anyone!” He paused. “Well, not like that. I mean… he was in the last war. He’s killed people; he’s a shinobi after all. But not like that.”

No. Not like that, not Kakashi-sensei, the one who had taught him how not to listen to Itachi. Sasuke slowly relaxed again and managed a sip of his broth without spilling it, limp with relief.

“So there must be some other way to achieve it, then,” Sakura pointed out.

He blinked. “There… was something about that. I remember. The record of the Mangekyou, it said something about killing being the forbidden way, almost like there was more than one. But it didn’t say what any others might be, so I thought it must not mean that.”

“Well, it’s a forbidden technique,” Naruto said reasonably. “They wouldn’t want to say too much.”

“So we know Kakashi-sensei figured out a different way; good,” Sakura said firmly. “But that timing… I think something must have happened to Itachi. Something he had to do for the ritual or something he found out, then.”

“Maybe it was the clan records themselves,” Sasuke said, low, looking down into his noodles. “The records that were sealed in the shrine. I didn’t know about them until Itachi told me. They were secret.”

“He graduated young, didn’t he?” Sakura murmured. “And then went into ANBU, and he’d been a kid during the last war. I bet he was under a lot of pressure. Maybe it was just too much.”

Maybe the clan had been Itachi’s anchor, Sasuke thought, and maybe finding something like the Mangekyou in its history had just been too much. But a lot of people had been under heavy pressure and none of them had murdered all their relatives. So it had to be something about Itachi himself too. That was the thought that led him to mutter, “I wonder if it’ll happen to me, too.”

Naruto thumped his cup down by the bed. “No, it won’t,” he said, very definitely, and rocked forward on his knees to wrap Sasuke in his arms. “You lost everything once, and it didn’t happen. Even when people were trying to make it happen, it didn’t happen! And we won’t let it.” He leaned in and kissed Sasuke, gentle and awkward, and said, more quietly, “Okay?”

Sasuke let himself lean into them, into the rare, serious softness of Naruto’s eyes holding his and Sakura’s hands on his shoulders, and whispered, “Yeah. Okay.” His team. His anchor. His… family. They would keep him safe from this, too.

“Good. Then finish eating,” Naruto ordered, giving him the medic-look instead.

Sasuke picked up his mug of ramen, raising his brows. “This is your idea of good nutrition, as a healer, is it?”

“Hey, it’s salt, sugar, and carbohydrates!” Naruto protested. “What more do you want?” He sounded indignant, but he was grinning.

Sakura leaned against his shoulder giggling, and Sasuke ate a bite of ramen and felt himself settling back into his right place.


The season was turning before Sasuke could bring himself to visit the Uchiha compound. When he did he found that it wasn’t, any more.

He’d known, in theory, that part of the reason the village had paid for the cleansing of the compound from the deaths was so that people could live there again. And he’d been aware that he was, technically, the landlord of many people living on the compound’s ground. But he’d never paid any attention to that. The bank had assigned a trustee to the Uchiha accounts, there was more than enough money in them when he needed some, and he’d left it at that.

Now he actually saw what the figures on those quarterly statements he’d stuffed away without reading meant.

Parts of the compound were still empty, but in other places there were people: slow extensions of the surrounding neighborhoods, or a store reopened and a clutch of houses reoccupied around it. There were people walking in the streets, talking and arguing and laughing. Live, solid people, out in the sunlight under the changing leaves.

They just weren’t Uchiha.

He recognized every meter of this place, and it was all strange to him. The clash of past and present was so disorienting he had to stop now and then while Naruto or Sakura gave him their hands to grip until he could walk again.

They stayed close to him, and he caught them, once or twice, silently warning off someone whose eyes widened with recognition on seeing him. He was glad of that; if someone had asked him if he was Uchiha Sasuke, he wasn’t entirely sure what he would have answered. Even his own self felt strange to him, today.

Finally they came to the river, and the Naka shrine, and Sasuke stopped and stared.

There were people here, too.

The auxiliary shrine was built on a broad walk around the side of the main hall. It was well tended; the stone was clean and the paint bright. And there were people here. A woman stood before the offertory box, hands pressed together. A young couple were waiting quietly for her to finish. Two mothers and their children stood at the gate talking, smiling, perhaps waiting for the woman who prayed.

No one was afraid. No one walked too softly. They weren’t here to propitiate angry ghosts. They were here because it was the compound’s shrine, here to honor the clan who had held the land they lived on.

It was so much as it should be, so right, that he had to reach out for Naruto and Sakura again, and they gathered him into their arms, quick and protective.

He took what felt like the first full breath that day and said, “I need to come back here. This… I need to be here again. Here, where it’s new.”

He had feared, for years, that if he set foot back in the compound the weight of memory, the weight of that night, would crush him. And, at the same time, he had feared the intrusion of others, of outsiders who would desecrate the memory of his clan and his vengeance. Instead he had found… life. Life going on and yet honoring what had been, what had been his.

That was what, finally, let the tears he’d denied for almost ten years break through.

Naruto and Sakura held him through it, warm arms around him and quiet murmurs without meaningful words. And it was Sakura who found a tea shop inside the district for them and made him sit down where he could see the people passing while Naruto got hot tea and some sesame dango for them.

“This might be a nice place to live, right around here,” Sakura said softly, looking around. “One of the empty areas is near here. You could take something at the edge of that.” She smiled at him over the rim of her cup. “And have room to expand.”

The thought, the mental image of a house known but not too familiar, was a good one. More than that, the thought of having clan again, or at least the plans and space for one, made some cranky sense of something-off at the bottom of his heart subside.

Naruto leaned his elbows on his knees and smiled at Sasuke, sidelong. “So, hey, will you give us discount rental rates, if we move in around here?”

Sasuke couldn’t help smiling, even if it did stretch the rawness of his cheeks. “You can pay me part of it in babysitting.” The appalled look on Naruto’s face made him laugh.

“Oh, go on, Naruto, you’d be good at it,” Sakura said, ruthlessly. “And it’s not like I’m going to take too much time off for it.” She hesitated suddenly and added, not quite looking at either of them as her cheeks turned pink. “I mean. If you want me to. I figure I would be okay with it. Having Uchiha kids.”

Sasuke’s face heated, and he had to clear his throat. “I’d like that. Yeah.” He had a hard time imagining anyone else, though he supposed he’d better, eventually. He doubted Sakura had any intention of retiring to play clan-mother.

“Oh well, if they’re yours, I guess it’s okay; I’ll watch ’em,” Naruto muttered, also a little red himself. They all drank their tea in flustered silence.

As the thought settled in, though, Sasuke had to admit it felt good. It felt right.

His family. This time, the thought didn’t hurt.


Sasuke had barely settled on a suitable house when Sakura was recalled to work by Intelligence. Naruto wasn’t at all sure he approved of this.

"I’d tell them where they can stick this assignment," she told them, driving her hands through her short hair in frustration, "but Tsunade-sama is the one who requested me. It must be important."

"Can you tell us what it is?" Sasuke asked quietly.

"It’s a diplomatic mission, sort of. To Hidden Valley, to tell them about the Akatsuki base in their country so they can take care of it."

Naruto frowned. Okay, yeah, that was important. But so was their team! "Can we come with you?"

Sakura’s mouth tilted and she leaned back against one of the trees of the training ground with a thump. "They might let you go, but no one is going to pass Sasuke for duty yet, and I’m not leaving him here without you to look after him."

Sasuke didn’t say anything at all to that and Naruto scooted over on the log they shared to lean against him, worried. Sakura came and sat on her heels in front of Sasuke, resting her hands on his shoulders. "It’s okay," she said softly. "Kakashi-sensei is leading this mission. Even if we run into any more of Akatsuki, none of the rest of them are going to go after me to get a lever on you, right?"

Sasuke relaxed a little, and Naruto’s eyes widened. Was that what he’d been worried about? Sakura looked over at him meaningfully. "Take care of Sasuke while I’m gone, all right?"

Stay with him so he had at least one of them in view, Naruto was betting that meant, and nodded firmly. He could do that.

Sasuke snorted. "Shouldn’t you be telling me to look after him, so he doesn’t eat nothing but ramen and store bought onigiri while you’re gone?"

That sounded more like their Sasuke and Naruto grinned even as he drew himself up indignantly. "Hey, I can cook!"

"Yes, you can," Sasuke answered blandly. "You just don’t."

Sakura laughed and everything was okay again, even a day later when they saw her off at the gates. Sasuke got quieter again once the gates closed, though, so Naruto steered them toward a takoyaki stand just to make him roll his eyes. It worked and the food tasted great. Complete win.

"If you’re going to hang around," Sasuke told him, having obviously figured that part out, "you can help me pack. With luck it’ll be done by the time Sakura gets back, and she can lend a hand with moving."

"Okay," he agreed around a mouthful of dumpling, and chalked up another win at the long-suffering look Sasuke gave him for his lack of manners.

Someone had to keep Sasuke from getting too serious, after all.

Packing to move was strange. Naruto was pretty sure it violated the laws of physics, because even when there was as much boxes of stuff as there had been space to put stuff, there was still stuff left. It was also, he decided after no more than an hour, not a good thing for Sasuke to be doing when he was already in a low mood. The third time he caught Sasuke sitting there on the mats, staring at a photo or a book or a kunai, he decided it was time to take measures. Sakura had entrusted Sasuke to him, after all.

The problem was what measures, and he thought about that as he wrapped up plates and bowls, of which Sasuke had about five times as many as he did. Sasuke wouldn’t agree to food again so soon. He might agree to some training, but if he’d gotten into the wrong mood that might just make him even more dark and broody, the way he got sometimes when he was seeing ghosts in place of his actual target.

Well, if those were out, there was always their other popular team activity.

Naruto grinned, tucking away the last bowl. Yeah. That should work. He closed the box, stacked it with the rest and strolled over to where Sasuke was sorting his shelves. "Hey, Sasuke?"

"What?" When Sasuke looked up, Naruto took the opening and swooped down to kiss him.

Sasuke made a startled sound, one fist closing in Naruto’s shirt as if to throw him. Naruto laughed, which made the kiss a little odd for a moment, and slumped forward, letting his weight bear Sasuke back to the tatami. Sasuke growled at that, eyes lighting up properly, and rolled.

They half wrestled over the floor for a few turns, laughing and groping, until Naruto got his hand into Sasuke’s pants. That made Sasuke’s eyes half close, and he ground his hips down against Naruto. "Mmm."

Naruto grinned. "I win," he declared, breathless.

"Oh you do, huh?" Sasuke looked down at him thoughtfully, eyes glinting, and finally smiled. "Try this, then." He closed both hands around Naruto’s face and kissed him. A different kiss than usual.

It was slow and… gentle. Coaxing. And something else, too. Sasuke’s mouth moved over his carefully, and his hands cradled Naruto’s face like… like Naruto was something precious he didn’t want to drop. That thought made a little sound catch in the back of his throat, and Sasuke’s arms wrapped around him with that same care.

"I know it sounds weird for me, of all people, to say," Sasuke murmured, resting his forehead against Naruto’s. "But not everything has to be a competition."

Naruto swallowed, eyes wide. "O… okay." Slowly, he wrapped his arms around Sasuke, too, and it made his heart do turny-flippy things when Sasuke relaxed, letting Naruto take his weight.

"Itachi," Sasuke said quietly. "That… that wasn’t a competition either. But I want to be better than him."

"You are!" Naruto said fiercely, holding Sasuke tighter. "You already are!"

"Mm." He could feel Sasuke smiling a little against his neck. "Not stronger yet, though."

That felt wrong to Naruto, and he thought about it. "You were in the end, though," he finally said, slowly. "You won, Sasuke. That’s stronger, isn’t it?"

"I couldn’t block Amaterasu, though," Sasuke objected and Naruto frowned.

"So what? You won. Quit trying to find reasons for it not to count!" He pummeled Sasuke’s shoulder for a moment before wrapping his arms back around him. "Besides, Sakura looked in the Intelligence records and said it sounded like that Mangekyou thing is really dangerous and makes you go blind. Is that true? You’d better not be thinking of doing that if it’s true."

After a taut moment, Sasuke snorted and relaxed over him again. "Yeah, okay. I guess… I did win." He leaned up on an elbow, looking down at Naruto soberly. "And yes. The Mangekyou Sharingan leads to blindness if it’s used too often. I want to find a different way."

"Well that’s okay, then." Naruto settled his arms comfortably around Sasuke’s waist. "We’ll help."

"Yeah," Sasuke said softly. "I know you will." He slid back down to lie against Naruto and added, a bit muffled against his shoulder, "Thanks."

Naruto smiled and just held him. "Yeah."

A/N: Little changes: Kakashi has slightly better aim than in canon because I’m not going to faff around with multiple rounds against Akatsuki, and Gai’s fight with Kisame goes very much the same as in canon except that it’s the real thing, which means he has to open up another level to beat him. I’m thinking Sasori’s fight also goes quite similarly, only Chiyo has Fuunotora and her teams instead of Sakura. Since those are all basically canon-replays, I’m not going to do them up in detail. You already know pretty much what happens.

Without Fear or Favor

Kakashi had passed out on his way back to the village from his first mission as a jounin, the mission that had changed his life yet again. He’d been told, once he woke up, that Minato-sensei had used his Hiraishin to get Kakashi to his home and then the hospital before the Sharingan killed him. Because, of course, that had been the problem. The Sharingan drained chakra. Normally, a critical drain would cause the Sharingan to deactivate, but Kakashi’s hadn’t.

“Hatake-kun, you must let us operate to remove it!” Arakaki-sensei exhorted him, leaning over the side of his cot earnestly. “You aren’t an Uchiha; your body can’t handle it!”

“It was a gift.” Kakashi folded his hands over his stomach, looking up at the ceiling with his own eye. The eye Obito had given him was now under a bandage with a suppression seal written on it.

Arakaki sighed and rubbed his forehead. Kakashi got that reaction from the medics a lot. “There might not be a choice, you know. The Uchiha clan has heard about this, and there’s a summons waiting for you as soon as you can get out of bed again. You know they won’t want their bloodline talent in the hands of someone outside their clan.”

Kakashi didn’t imagine they would, no. Just a week ago, he might well have accepted that. But Obito wouldn’t have, hadn’t, and so he wouldn’t either. Not now, when he was all of Obito that was left. “When will you release me, then?”

“You’re not going anywhere for at least two days.” Arakaki gave him a stern look. He’d been Kakashi’s attending medic before. “The north front is quiet and you’re not setting foot outside these walls until I’m sure that eye isn’t going to kill you!”

Kakashi nodded quietly. Two days, then. In two days, he would find a way to convince the Uchiha to respect Obito’s will. He closed his eyes and sent himself down to sleep.


The Uchiha were the village’s largest clan. They’d grown beyond a single compound, even one like the sprawling Aburame or Hyuuga complexes, and lived in their own district of the village.

At least half of them seemed to have something they wanted to say about Kakashi’s new Sharingan.

“…far too great a risk to the boy…”

“…can’t set a precedent like this! Before you know it the village would be stripping Uchiha bodies in the field!”

“…graft wasn’t rejected, though, so he must be compatible; perhaps he could marry in…”

Kakashi sat in calm seiza, just off to the side of the clan head, Hideaki, and his heir, Fugaku. The long room nearly rang with the babble of Uchiha clan members shouting at each other, despite the high rafters and crowd of bodies.

“…can’t control it, obviously…”

“He actually used it, within minutes of implantation! Those are some genes worth having…”

“…conflict of interest, if he’s the last of his name…”

“…fact is, it’s against our laws, and we don’t dare let the village’s law come before a clan’s own control of its bloodline!”

Kakashi unfocused his eye a little, so he could watch the moment of the room as a whole. There were knots of opinion, but no consensus yet, nothing he could target yet. He would have stifled a sigh if he hadn’t spent years training such revealing expressions out of himself. Instead, he sat still and watched the play of leaf shadows on the paper screens of the outside wall, and waited some more.

At last, Hideaki stood and called out, “Enough!” over the babble. It quieted slowly, and he sat back down. “I have heard your views,” he said, rather dryly, and Kakashi was amused to see a number of the Uchiha flush. “Now I think I would like to hear Hatake Kakashi.” Piercing black eyes caught Kakashi’s, and he straightened a little. “Why did you accept the Sharingan, and why do you wish to keep it?”

“It was Obito’s dying wish.” Unexpectedly, Kakashi had to stop and discipline his voice to keep huskiness out of it. He continued, as formally as he knew how, hoping that would move a noble clan—no matter how much they were acting like a class full of pre-genin right at this moment. “He bequeathed it to me to protect the things he cared for. I accepted that charge, and I will not dishonor his memory by releasing it.”

“Even though you can’t fully control it?” Hideaki asked, sounding more curious than dismissive. “You’ll have to re-train in all your techniques, both to use one eye and to use the Sharingan with a regular eye. You’ll have a significant weakness, now, too. If any enemy realizes the drain the Sharingan is on you, they have only to take away your seal,” he nodded at the eye-patch Kakashi had stitched a River Under Mountain seal into while he waited out the medics, “to incapacitate you.”

“Closing the eye slows the drain,” Kakashi said, keeping still and straight-backed. “Re-training will require an effort, but I believe my previous record indicates that it will not keep me out of the field for an unreasonable length of time.”

“Hmm.” Hideaki was watching him like he was a puzzle. Minato-sensei had watched him like that, sometimes, his genin year. “And what do you think Obito cared for?” he asked at last, quietly. “What have you dedicated yourself to protect in his place?”

Kakashi breathed freely for the first time in days. Hideaki-san understood. “The village. Our teammate, Rin.” He spread a hand out toward the room. “His clan.” He hesitated for a long moment, but the last answer tugged at him, and he had promised this to Obito also, even if he’d never said it out loud. Finally, Kakashi looked down at his hands and added, softly, “His friends.”

“Uchiha Obito was a credit to us,” Hideaki said gently, and Kakashi fiercely swallowed down the tightness of tears in his throat. “And Hatake Kakashi,” he continued, louder, speaking to the whole clan, now, “has willingly taken up the responsibility to continue on that path. I say this is admirable, and that the codes of our clan must approve. Nevertheless, it is true that our laws say only members of Uchiha may bear the Sharingan.” The listening clan members stirred, and Kakashi waited tensely to see what the price of his choice would be. Would they require a marriage? An adoption? He’d just started coming to some kind of terms with his father’s legacy, he didn’t want to have that covered up or taken away…

“Hatake Kakashi will be affiliated with us,” Hideaki said calmly. “His name will be carried in the records of our clan. If he wishes to marry or father children outside the clan, he will require the same permissions as anyone born of our blood.” A few people looked disgruntled, the ones who had been insisting most loudly that Kakashi not be allowed to keep Obito’s eye at all, but most of the room was nodding, satisfied. Kakashi, on the other hand, had seen a tiny quirk at the corners of Hideaki’s lips, and was waiting for what came next. “He will be carried in our records as one of us. But the fact remains that he was born to another line, and one that was long honored in our village. I say that, if it is his will, he may remain on the Hatake family register, rather than the Uchiha.”

Kakashi couldn’t help himself from drawing a long, shaky breath of relief at that, even as sharp exclamations burst out among the crowd. Hideaki raised his voice over them.

“Would you really have me take his name from him, when he has clearly been striving to do it honor? Is that the justice of our clan?” He frowned at his gathered clan members, most of whom subsided sheepishly. “It’s decided then.”

“Unconventional,” Fugaku observed softly to his father, as people started to leave, talking quietly among themselves. “Some won’t think it’s enough.”

“You’ll find you can rarely make everyone happy, in any large decision,” Hideaki returned, a bit wry. “We do the best we can, by the precepts of our clan.”

Kakashi didn’t think Fugaku entirely agreed, but he nodded quietly and slipped out after the last murmuring clan members. That left Hideaki and Kakashi, and he looked up at… well, his new clan head, he supposed. “What are my duties, as a… an affiliate of Uchiha?” he asked, wanting to offer something in return for the name Hideaki had left him.

Hideaki was watching him thoughtfully again. “Learn to use what you have inherited. Fulfill Obito’s last wishes. I think, if you do that, you will make a fine clan member.” His mouth quirked. “I don’t think you’ll need to think about marriage for some time, yet, but when you’re older you should consider taking a lover from the clan once or twice; we would welcome your blood, and there are traditions we keep among ourselves you might like to learn.” He stood and Kakashi followed, smoothly. “I’ll assign Kazuo to tutor you in the uses of the Sharingan.”

Kakashi nodded. “Yes…” he hesitated, thinking, and finally finished, “Toushu-sama.” At least he thought that was what Obito would have called his clan head.

Hideaki’s sharp, black eyes softened, and he laid a hand on Kakashi’s shoulder. “Obito was a precious son of my clan,” he said softly. “For all that his carelessness was sometimes the despair of his teachers, he delighted in the life around him, in all its beauty and detail. He would have been a very great shinobi, if he’d grown to pay as much attention to his duties as he did to good food and good company and the life of the village.”

Kakashi didn’t think it would serve anything for him to become careless. But appreciating the little bits of village life… perhaps he could do more of that, yes. In Obito’s memory. He nodded again, quietly determined.

Hideaki patted his shoulder. “Remember that you can call on this clan as your own, now.” He left Kakashi to make his own way out through the Uchiha district, freely as if he’d actually belonged there.


Kakashi had always been proud, and he never had called on the Uchiha, his second clan. But the offer had stayed with him, as a little warmth in his heart, for seventeen years.

For another seven after that, it burned as one more reminder of the things he couldn’t keep.

In the end, though, when he had the chance to gift that belonging back to the last son of Uchiha, he decided he was glad to have had it.

End

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Eleven

Naruto and Kankurou’s voices still rang off the walls when Gaara hit the floor with a dull, boneless thump.

“Well,” murmured the blond Akatsuki, looking toward the broken temple door, “that was faster than we expected, hm?” He smiled very unpleasantly. “Just not fast enough.” As two of the four dark robes remaining faded back into the shadows, he strolled toward them, stepping over Gaara’s body and carelessly kicking it in passing.

Sasuke wasn’t surprised when Naruto snarled with absolute rage and charged the man, red flickering around him.

“Naruto,” Sakura shouted, sharp, “it’s you he wants, don’t be an idiot!”

Sasuke’s vision tracked the man’s hand as it dove into his pouch and a pale, grayish white bird bloomed up from it, growing large enough for the man to spring onto and ride. Not an elemental transformation but what might well be unlimited shaping of his medium, trained observation noted coolly; that was dangerous.

Sasuke snapped his hands together, fast and sure with the knife-edge perception of the Sharingan, and blew fire at the bird while the Sand team showered kunai, needles, and a loop of razor wire on the other remaining Akatsuki. At the edge of his field of vision, he saw that attack blocked with what looked like a jointed tail. The bird he was aiming for swooped up over his flame, and he took in the flicker of alarm over the blond one’s face. “That stuff burns badly,” he reported, flat and fast. “This is the explosives expert.”

“This one is Sasori,” Chiyo grated. “Leave him to us.”

Gai flickered through the temple’s shadows, coming up to flank the one on the bird. “The other two are gone. Let’s take this one down with the passion of youth!”

The blond just laughed. “But that wouldn’t be what I want.” He swooped down again, fast and hard, and the bird-thing scooped up Gaara’s body.

“Gaara!” Naruto leapt for him, fingers clawed. Kankurou whipped around and was nearly cut down by Sasori’s tail before Fuunotora tackled him to the ground.

“You want a dead body that much, hm?” the blond taunted, and flitted right out the door. Naruto bounded after him, chakra boiling off him, and for the first time he could remember Sasuke heard Kakashi swear. Sasuke couldn’t blame him at all and held on to the still, sharp judgment of the Sharingan by his bare fingertips while fear for his idiot teammate wrenched at his control.

At least Itachi didn’t seem to be here.

“Chiyo-san, we’ll handle this,” Kakashi snapped.

“And we’ll handle this one,” Chiyo said grimly. “Go!”

As they bolted out the door again after Naruto, Kakashi called, “Remember the illusions in the swamp! And remember that the other two might not have actually left!”

Fear and fury jerked at Sasuke’s control again, at the reminder. He forced them down, teeth gritted.

Naruto was leaping through the trees already, chakra shredding the traps in his way as he followed the bird and they followed him. The next grove wasn’t lit from the right angle, though, and Sasuke barked, “Illusion!”

He exhaled with relief when Naruto landed short of it; Naruto was listening after all.

“Pit trap,” Neji reported, staring deep into it. “Jump ten meters.”

“Wait.” Sasuke perched on his branch and looked past the illusionary clump of trees. “There’s something past it…” Just a flicker of light in the wrong place, but… and then he hissed through his teeth. Naruto had already jumped. Idiot!

“Tenten,” Gai called, “saturate the other side!”

“On it!” Tenten leaped straight up, above them all, and unfurled a long scroll. Weapons rained down on the place where Naruto would land in just another second.

Nothing else happened. Had he been wrong? Naruto had landed and leaped again, and Sasuke prepared to follow, worry over his teammate’s loss of control clawing at him even as he kept his eyes focused, searching the other side for that hint of something askew. He was in midair when one particular patch of reeds caught his attention. What was it? What was wrong, what was he seeing? He looked closer.

“Sasuke!” Sakura hit him from the side, taking them both down in a tangle of limbs and very hard ground for someplace so wet. “What?” he gasped, winded, trying to spot that place he’d found again.

“Don’t look,” she commanded, catching his face in her hands and holding his eyes, hers wide and alarmed. “Look at me, not at that! It’s not real, whatever you see is an illusion, that’s Itachi standing there!”

For a moment the shock was so great he couldn’t make sense of her words. And then he understood and squeezed his eyes shut, slamming his hands together in the release. “Kai!” he barked, as much at himself as at the illusion, turning his focus inward.

There. He had been influenced, yes. He flared his chakra hard and sharp, throwing off the pressure, and opened his eyes again. The Leaf teams had landed around him, and Itachi was standing where he’d seen a suspicious patch of reeds—suspicion that had made him focus on them. “Very clever,” he grated, glaring at his brother’s chest.

“Gai,” Kakashi said softly, beside him, “can you deal with this one again?”

“Yes,” Gai answered, serious for once. His eyes were focused on Itachi’s feet. A detached part of Sasuke’s mind was impressed. That was a difficult approach. The clan had always trained to watch the chest, which telegraphed more clearly, even if it was a little more dangerous, a little easier to catch the opponent’s eyes that way. And Gai wasn’t clan; he must have figured it out on his own.

“I’ll go after Naruto, then. Be careful!” Kakashi vanished down the path of crushed grasses and shredded traps, after Naruto. Good. That was good, that someone would be there to look after Naruto.

Sakura gripped his shoulder hard. “Are you all right?” she asked, low. Sasuke took a slow breath and yanked his thoughts back into order. Naruto was going after Gaara’s body, and Kakashi would take care of him. The Sand teams probably had Sasori in hand. He was here, with Sakura and Gai’s team, and Itachi was in front of them. He had backup, today, to go with opportunity, and his brother was standing in front of him. Now. The time to take Itachi down was now. That was all he needed to think about.

“I’m all right,” he said, settling his shoulders under her hand and focusing again.

Neji’s head snapped around. “Someone’s coming! Someone with a huge amount of chakra!”

“Can Akatsuki have one of their own hosts with them already?” Sakura suggested tightly.

“Not that, but… close. Closer to a host’s chakra than I’ve ever seen.” Neji turned smoothly, falling into one of his clan’s defensive stances.

“Looks like you got more than just your brother,” a rough voice said from the shadows of the red reeds, and another black cloak materialized out of them. “Want me to take the extra off your hands, Itachi-san?” The newcomer bared sharklike teeth that reminded Sasuke with a sharp twinge of their very first mission as a team, and the Swordsman they’d faced.

“Swordsman of the Mist,” Sakura confirmed softly. “With that shape sword… Hoshigake Kisame. The strongest of his generation.”

“That would be very kind of you,” Itachi murmured, and Sasuke couldn’t help flinching at the sound of his voice.

“Gai-sensei,” Neji said, quiet and grim, “I don’t think any of us but you will be able to deal with Hoshigake. And maybe not even you alone. Take Tenten and Lee. I will stand with Uchiha Sasuke until you return, as a jounin of the Leaf and as a Hyuuga.”

It was a long moment before Gai rumbled, “Very well.”

“We’ll concentrate on wearing Itachi down, then,” Sakura whispered, not moving her lips, and Sasuke felt himself relax just a little. Sakura was their strategist, the one who thought ahead; he had her help this time. And he was the striking hand of their team, after all. All he had to do was listen to her, and focus, and he would have his chance for revenge.

“All right,” he agreed. “Call it.”

In the moment Hoshigake’s hand went up to the hilt of his massive sword, arm blocking a little of his vision, she snapped, “Scatter!” The six of them spun away, into the trees, into the reeds, into the water.

“Hmm. Well, then, perhaps we may move our discussion to a calmer and drier place,” Itachi said to the air, quite serenely, and took to the trees with a bound that barely stirred his robe.

“Track,” Sakura’s voice directed from the tree line. Sasuke nodded to himself and made for Itachi’s right, as Sakura would be making for his left, trusting Neji’s Byakugan to see them and show him his spot in the middle of the V. Naruto’s regular spot.

An explosion echoed over the swamp from the direction Naruto had gone, and Sasuke jerked, wavering on his landing for a breath. Naruto would be all right, he told himself fiercely. And Sasuke would keep Itachi away from his teammate. Far away. Itachi wouldn’t take anyone away from him again.

Itachi led them out of the swamp and into merely damp forest, alighting in a clearing, quite calmly out in the open. They bracketed him, and Sasuke pushed down a rush of tension, waiting for Sakura’s call. It was Neji stepped out of the trees first, though.

“Hyuuga,” Itachi murmured, tilting his head. “Neji-kun, if I recall correctly?” His eyes changed and Sakura’s voice whipped across the clearing.

“Illusion, Neji, look out!”

Neji stiffened for a long moment, and Sasuke saw Itachi’s mouth start to curve. It stopped when Neji shouted and his chakra flared for one instant into visibility, hard and edged. “The Uchiha descend from the Hyuuga,” Neji said, voice rough now. “We have known them from the beginning. Did you think we kept no techniques against the thing that some of you became?”

“Ah. The honor of the Hyuuga. And where is your honor now, when you stand against the inheritor of Uchiha? Is your clan not allied to mine?” Itachi inquired.

Sakura landed beside Sasuke, pulling his attention off the conversation, off his brother, off his own rising horror and fury. Once again, Sasuke found himself grateful for Kakashi’s wisdom; an anchor against the storm in his heart might be his strongest weapon right now.

Neji’s voice dripped with well-bred scorn. “The inheritor? You?” He snorted. “You are a renegade and traitor. None of our obligations are to you any more. They are owed now to Sasuke alone.”

“Ah?” Itachi raised his brows just a shade. “Am I misinformed, then? I had thought the Third and his filthy Elders too fearful of the Uchiha’s influence to allow Sasuke to take his place properly as the head of the clan. Without a clan head, without that authority to declare, I cannot be a traitor.”

Sasuke jerked behind his screen of tall grass, and felt Sakura’s hand close on his shoulder, tight and steadying. It was true; he had never been recognized as the head of Uchiha and… he should have been. When he graduated and had formal rank as a shinobi, if no sooner. He’d always been open about his intent to refound the clan. Why…? Sudden uncertainty shook him half out of the concentration of the Sharingan.

Neji was quiet for a moment before he shrugged. “Well, we’re a little short of the formal witnesses, but such things have long been acceptable on the battlefield.” He raised his voice. “Sasuke? In the name of the noble clans of Hidden Leaf, I ask: do you accept responsibility for the clan of Uchiha?”

The question shivered down Sasuke’s nerves. The responsibility of the clan head. For all of Uchiha, and that meant for Itachi, too. For the dead and for the insane blood of that night. For all their past. For the whole weight of the clan. It crushed down on him like a boulder, and for a moment he couldn’t breathe.

…don’t have to prove every bit of their honor all by yourself…

It was Jiraiya’s words, echoing in his head, that broke the weight, sudden as a lamp turning on to light a dark room. The past… the past took care of itself. His teacher had said so, said that the Uchiha ancestors carried the weight of the clan’s honor for him—carried it well. He screwed his eyes shut for a breath and told over the generations in his mind, and remembered, as he did, that even the banishment of a clan head had not killed the Uchiha honor. Quite the reverse.

And now, it must be done again. Not that much of a problem, surely, if it had been done once already. His clan didn’t weigh him down; they stood behind him. The understanding made his shoulders lighter and he straightened them.

He took a deep breath and called out, “I accept responsibility for my clan.”

Neji smiled, and even from this angle, Sasuke could see it was thin and hard. “I serve the heir of Hyuuga directly, and I speak with her voice. The Hyuuga acknowledge Uchiha Sasuke as the new clan head of Uchiha.” That stated, he fell silent, waiting. Waiting for what had, inevitably, to come next.

Sasuke bit his lip hard, felt Sakura behind him, both hands on his shoulders. Heard another explosion, more massive than the last, off in Naruto’s direction and nearly broke up laughing. That was exactly the way his idiot teammate would express his support.

Anchors.

Sasuke took another breath and spoke clearly. “Uchiha Itachi, I declare you traitor to our clan, and outcast.”

“Large words, from the boy who’s still too weak to face me himself,” Itachi murmured.

That really did make Sasuke laugh, and the faint stir of Itachi’s robes as he shifted at the sound made Sasuke smile, teeth bared. “You won’t catch me that way. Not again. If others help me find my strength, it’s still my own strength.” That, he was sure of in his heart.

Itachi sighed faintly. “I was afraid this might happen, when you were assigned to Kakashi-senpai. Ah, well. Not all traps close firmly.”

The glorious irony of hearing Itachi say that at the very moment Sakura’s hands were flashing through seal on seal, almost made Sasuke laugh again as the ground opened just under Itachi’s feet. Fuunotora must have taught Sakura that technique at some point, he thought, light-headed.

Itachi flickered aside from the earth traps, and that was Neji’s cue to strike. Really, Sasuke thought, wasn’t it about time he pitched in? He didn’t have to do it all himself, no, but surely it wasn’t fair to make everyone else do all the work either.

That sounded alarmingly like Jiraiya, in his head, but at the moment he didn’t care. He was still on the edge of dizzy laughter as he threw the wired kunai for his Lightning Dragon into Itachi’s path. He and Sakura had to spring apart after he triggered it; that one showed his location clearly. But that was all right. He could feel it again, now, the anchoring solidity of his team beside him, behind him. His mind was moving again, reading Sakura’s intent in the pattern of footing traps she set under Itachi, one after another. Sasuke’s part was to harry Itachi from above, to sting him with distance attacks so that Neji had a chance to close and whittle away his chakra.

It wasn’t going to be easy.

Itachi was fast, and half the time his kunai picked Sasuke’s out of the air, and though fire techniques left the trees and ground smoldering Sasuke hadn’t singed him yet. Neji had only gotten in two solid strikes, and those weren’t to vital points. If Itachi’s chakra was getting deranged, it wasn’t obvious yet.

It was Itachi’s focus that was the problem. Sasuke watched, eyes sharp again, observing the way Itachi avoided their attacks, the smoothness of his movements. They needed another distraction. And even though the idea made his stomach clench, Sasuke thought he knew what would work.

“Why?” he called out, throwing his voice a little along the edge of the clearing. “Why did you kill our clan?”

“It’s our way, little brother.” The bastard barely even sounded out of breath. “Surely you’ve read our history by now. Friend to kill friend for power.”

“That’s a forbidden technique!” Sasuke yelled and hurled another shuriken viciously. “It isn’t our way!” No matter how many had tried, down the years. Dozens of people, attempting to gain power and make someone else pay the price. But it was listed as forbidden in the clan’s own records!

“On the contrary.” Itachi slipped aside from Sakura’s wire trap and flickered out of her earth jutsu trap again. “It’s the way of all shinobi. The villages fight each other, regardless of the damage to their own countries or to others. The villages fight themselves, and factions twist their own people in the name of victory or of rightness.” He turned, eyes catching Sasuke in the trees and following him, though Sasuke avoided meeting them. “Don’t you think it’s interesting that both sides always proclaim themselves right, justified over and above their opponents to take whatever action they must, and so take exactly the same actions? This corruption is the one thing we all share, no matter what badge we wear.” He turned a shade too far and Neji lunged, palm striking Itachi’s side, not solid enough to finish him but enough to make him grunt and spin away with less grace than usual, robe flapping.

It was working, Sasuke told himself coldly. Keep going.

“So you thought you’d be a better monster than anyone else, is that it?” he called, and ducked under the illusion screen Sakura had woven into the grasses.

“Oh, no,” Itachi answered, eerily calm as he met a flurry of Neji’s hand strikes, losing Sasuke’s track again. “I intend to destroy the entire thing: Hidden Leaf and all the other villages. Consider. The Uchiha were the police force of Konoha, and its first line of military defense at home. If they were destroyed, the village would be vulnerable.” He whirled to meet Sasuke’s Fire Blossom with his own, completing the spin to fend off Neji again. “Sooner or later, another village would attack it, but the Leaf wouldn’t die easily. So even in victory, the other village would be wounded and easy prey in their turn. The Leaf would have died and the Sand been next, three and some years ago, if it hadn’t been for the Nine-tails’ young Sacrifice. If that interference is removed, all will go well.”

Sasuke slid down to his knees in the grass, control shaken by sickness. Sakura landed beside him, eyes wide and horrified, hands clenched against her chest. Even Neji fell back, staring at Itachi. “You’re mad,” he said, husky.

“Your clan is, itself, an example of what shinobi do,” Itachi noted. “Though not the worst, by any means. Ask the Elder, Shimura Danzou, what ‘Root’ is, when you return. If, of course, you return.” He smiled faintly. “You have dropped your guard, Hyuuga Neji-kun.”

His eyes changed again and Sasuke swore, groping for another shuriken, or another coil of wire as Neji went stiff again for a breath. Then another.

“That won’t be enough to break his hold,” Sakura muttered, and her hands flashed through the activation of her seal. The Sharingan saw it flare to life, all the wild colors of nature energy, and Sakura was gone, heel blasting into Itachi’s back.

Neji fell to hands and knees as Itachi rolled to his feet again, and Sasuke dashed out to drag him clear, checking him over with the first aid Naruto had made both he and Sakura learn. Pulse was ragged, muscles spasming, and Neji’s eyes couldn’t quite focus. “Tsukuyomi,” Sasuke gritted out, like it was a curse.

“Half,” Neji gasped. “Be all right. Help Sakura.”

Sasuke nodded tightly and left him in the shelter of the trees, circling back around Sakura’s lightning-fast fight with Itachi. Her hands blurred, even to the Sharingan’s vision, as she slammed up stone walls and slammed down the brutal weight of water. She was, he thought, faster even than Itachi. But he was only using his chakra to defend against the jutsu, lunging again and again to close with her hand to hand. Even the power of the seal couldn’t give Sakura the kind of experience Itachi had at that. Again and again, he performed a block or disengage she didn’t know, made her spend her chakra to counter physical attacks with an elemental technique. Sasuke flung scavenged kunai to break Itachi’s form in the air, sent fire at his legs to break it on the ground, but the clock in his head was ticking inexorably down and Itachi was still going.

And then, finally, one attack got through, straight and true. Sakura’s heel smashed into Itachi’s ribs, and Sasuke could see it as they gave way.

And they were out of time.

Sakura’s face was twisted with frustration as she broke off and swapped herself into the trees, hands weaving the deactivation as she fell to her knees beside Neji. “Okay?” she panted.

“Caught me with some of that demon illusion of his,” Neji rasped. “Not the whole thing. With his ribs gone, I might be able to fight him again.”

“We’ll try to buy more time, then,” Sakura said, mouth in a grim line. “I have a little energy; I can’t use the seal again, but I can keep away from him I think. And the others should be coming soon. I hope.”

“My turn to take point, then,” Sasuke said, low, and Sakura squeezed his shoulder.

“Be careful,” she ordered, and he smiled.

“As much as I can.” The smile crept wider at the disgruntled face she made at that, and he slipped through the trees to emerge from them a third of the way around the clearing.

On the principle of further distraction, he asked, as he stepped out, “Why did you leave me alive?”

Itachi raised his brows, though Sasuke could only see the edge of that with his gaze fixed on Itachi’s chest. “To take your eyes, of course,” he said with an edge of patience, as though it should be obvious. “Once you’ve achieved the Mangekyou Sharingan, I will take your eyes and my own sight will be preserved from deterioration. I believe it’s actually an effect of incompatibility,” he went on as Sasuke froze in horror. “It must be a sibling’s eyes, to make them compatible enough to use techniques at full strength. But the fact that they are not one’s own provides just enough dampening of the chakra resonance to prevent a recurrence of blindness.”

“I will never kill the friends closest to me,” Sasuke whispered, barely remembering to keep his eyes on Itachi’s chest.

Itachi actually sighed. “I had gathered that. It’s unfortunate, especially after all my encouragement the last time we met. But luckily I believe there is another way.” He smiled just a little. “A way to produce just that depth of grief and guilt that will awaken this potential in our blood. We shall see.” And he sprang up, cloak whirling out as he sent a rain of shuriken spinning down toward Sasuke.

Sasuke, who could taste his own rising rage like blood in his mouth. His hands slammed into the only seal he needed these days for the Great Fireball, and he sent it howling up, blasting the shuriken aside, engulfing Itachi and rising out of the trees to burst in the sky. Itachi was smoking as he landed, but that faint smile was still here.

“Yes. I think perhaps it will work.”

Sasuke bared his teeth.

Fire raged and flared against fire as they fought across the clearing, and the clearing was a good deal wider the next time they both paused, red eyes fixed across the bare-burned ground.

It was then, of course, that Naruto pelted into the space, right between them, eyes wild and teeth bared.

“Ah,” Itachi murmured. “Good. I did think this one would be a surer bet than the girl.”

Naruto was turning toward the voice, and Sasuke was already airborne as he yelled, “Don’t look in his eyes, you idiot!” He landed nearly on Naruto’s head and, as they both went sprawling, hauled him close and tumbled them both unceremoniously back toward the tree line.

“I’m watching, take a minute,” Sakura rapped out as she landed beside them, eyes steady on the clearing. “Naruto, are you all right? Any injuries?”

“I’m fine,” Naruto growled, struggling back up. “That blond Akatsuki is dead. We got… the body back.”

Sakura pulled in a hard breath, jaw setting. “We’ll see if there’s anything we can do once Itachi is put away. Listen. I think he’s going to try to kill one of us first, not Sasuke.”

“Yeah, well good luck to him on that,” Naruto spat, and suddenly the clearing was filled and overflowing with Shadow Clones, all of them with Naruto’s feral, slitted eyes.

“Naruto!” Sasuke snapped, shaking his shoulder. This wasn’t good. Itachi was a strategist like Sakura, no matter how insane he ultimately was. If Naruto stopped thinking and also stopped listening…

“They’re not getting any more of you!” Naruto yelled, and the clones rushed forward like an avalanche falling on Itachi.

For a moment, Sasuke thought it might actually work. Naruto had gotten better at controlling the clones, and right now he had the focus of a predator. Itachi went down in a welter of claws like steel and the storm of Naruto’s rage. Sasuke took a breath, starting to think…

The clearing erupted in black flame.

Sasuke shouted and wove his hands together with frantic speed, backburning around where Naruto was, in the middle of the clones, of course, the idiot

His flames were smothered by the black ones. As if the flames themselves were being consumed. The ground blasted up around Naruto’s feet to form a break, a shield, and he saw Sakura, beside him, on her knees and shaking with the drain on her chakra.

The black flames ate the earth itself and closed in. Sasuke’s throat was torn with a shout that matched Sakura’s, and he lunged one useless bound forward.

The flames died. In their wake was Itachi, standing beside a scorched and dazed Naruto. “Amaterasu, the fires of the underworld,” he explained, quite calmly. “The final technique of our clan. Of fire itself. It will consume anything.” He smiled into Sasuke’s eyes, and when had Sasuke looked up? “And now your friend will die. Because of you. Only because of you, and for the sake of your power. Know this.”

The words clawed at Sasuke’s mind as Itachi reached under his robe and drew a sword. His fault. His doing, that his friend would die. The accusation, the knowledge, the approaching fate twisted deep into his thoughts. His friend, his teammate, the one who was always with him, thoughtlessly giving and guarding and arguing and name-calling.

You’re ours. That’s all.

He was theirs, and they were his, and even refusing to say the words hadn’t kept this fate from coming for them. Itachi would kill his family again.

His new family. His only family. His anchor in the middle of the rage rising through him now.

No. No.

“NO!” Sasuke screamed, ripping himself free of the illusion twining around his mind. The sword was coming down. Naruto was only stirring, groggily, still stunned by the return of all those burned clones. Sakura’s hands were coming together in the second hand seal of her activation, tears starting down her cheeks. She would kill herself and it still wouldn’t be fast enough. There was no time; it was impossible.

He didn’t give a damn.

Sasuke snatched up chakra from the bottom of his bones, from the corners of his soul. There was nothing to send it through, nothing to channel it, and he didn’t care. His family would not die. Not again. He threw his hands forward, locking them at the last moment into the Bird, and screamed again as lightning blasted out. It lashed out, directed somehow and he didn’t know how, but unchanneled, unshaped, grounding into the trees, nearly hitting Neji as he interrupted his lunge for Itachi to fling himself flat.

And it struck Itachi.

It threw him back from Naruto, twitching and gasping, and he lay still where he landed. Sasuke stood, panting for breath, shaking with the raw force he’d blasted out, and it was long seconds before he managed to stagger to Naruto’s side. Naruto was hauling himself back to his feet, looking around dazed and shocked but with his hands still clenched. His lip curled back when he spotted Itachi, and he took a step in that direction.

Sasuke whacked him across the back of the head. “Moron!”

“Ow, hey!” Naruto covered his head with his hands and glared at Sasuke. “What the hell, jerk?! I’m trying to protect you, here!”

“Fine job you did of it!” Sasuke snapped back. “Nearly got your idiot self killed, and the demon hells only know how I got that last lightning strike to work trying to save your sorry ass!”

“Who asked you to?” Naruto demanded, now nose to nose with him.

“Who the hell had to ask?!” Sasuke yelled. “You don’t ask your team for that!”

“I think,” Neji interrupted them rather dryly, dirt streaked as he crawled back to his feet, “you might want to stop before you make Sakura any worse.”

“Huh?” Naruto looked around, eyes wide and alarmed.

Now they weren’t yelling, it was easy to hear Sakura again. She was on the ground with her face buried in her hands, laughing so hard she could barely breathe.

Okay, maybe Neji had a point. Sasuke straightened up and cleared his throat, self-conscious.

“Well,” a cracked voice rasped behind them. “Perhaps you should take my eyes, instead, then.”

Sasuke and Naruto stumbled as they swung back around, and Sakura gasped, flowing up to her feet again.

“What would I want them for?” Sasuke demanded, the first thing that came to mind as he flinched at the sight of his brother and tried to close his heart to the burns over Itachi’s exposed skin.

Itachi actually smiled. “You may want them to face our twice-great-grandfather.”

The world froze around him and Sasuke couldn’t hear anything but the rush of his own blood in his ears. His own blood. Twice-great…. “Uchiha Madara is dead,” he whispered. “He died after his battle with the First.”

“He stays out of sight, usually. But it’s his hand that guides Akatsuki.” Itachi’s eyes were black, Sasuke observed, distracted. This couldn’t be a hallucination. “I suppose he will accomplish my goal, in the end.” Itachi looked up at the sky and sighed. “He thinks the villages will submit to him. But it will simply be war. The greatest war. That will do, I suppose.” He smiled up at nothing. “So?”

Sasuke walked slowly to stand over Itachi, looking down at him, at that calm, mad smile that was waiting for his answer. “The Uchiha,” he started and choked on the name. Madara. A head of the clan, before he was banished. What was the Uchiha clan, after all?

You’re the last Uchiha, I don’t see why you can’t do whatever you please and call that what Uchihas do.

Sasuke actually huffed out half a laugh as Jiraiya’s voice came back to him. Old pervert thought he had an answer for everything. He looked down at Itachi, who now had his brows raised a little in his burned face.

“No.”

He called Chidori into his hand, tiny but focused, and slammed it down into Itachi’s chest, over his heart. One spine-cracking spasm and it was over.

Over. His revenge was accomplished. He felt no satisfaction, and wondered for a dizzy breath if he was disrespecting the memory of his clan. Or perhaps he was just too tired. He was very tired. But then he caught Neji’s eye, across the clearing, and the fog in his head parted a little. Something needed to be said, after all.

He straightened his shoulders and said, firmly. “The Uchiha do not use forbidden techniques. We uphold the laws of Konoha. At need, we execute them as well.”

Neji nodded back to him, soberly, accepting his judgment for the village’s noble clans.

Not revenge. Protection. To protect his people, whatever the cost. That was the duty of the Uchiha.

And the Uchiha were not dead. Sasuke managed a full breath.

Naruto laid a hand on his shoulder. “Hey. It’s over. Okay?”

The Uchiha weren’t dead, but his brother was—the last of his family. A shudder ripped through Sasuke and he reached out blindly, more grateful than he’d ever been before for Naruto’s complete lack of decorum, the immediacy with which arms went around him and pulled him tight against his teammate. Sakura’s hands spread against his back, rubbing slowly up and down in the rhythm Naruto had taught them to counter shock. “This part is over,” she said softly. “Now you can come home. It’s all right, Sasuke. We’ll take you home safe.”

She had gone away, too, and come home again. She understood. And Naruto wouldn’t leave him. His team would bring him home.

Home to them. His family.

Another deep breath and the choking in his throat eased, the band around his chest loosened a little. “I’m okay,” he whispered against Naruto’s shoulder, husky. “Okay for now.”

Naruto was looking suspicious and overprotective as Sasuke straightened up, but Sakura squeezed his shoulders one last time and let him go. Neji was tying the last knots of rope around Itachi’s body, preparing it for carrying. “Ready?” he asked, tactfully looking down at the rope.

“Yeah,” Sakura said for all of them. “Let’s go.”

A/N: Kishimoto’s retconning of the Uchiha history in general was almost as hideously clunky as his retconning of Itachi in particular. There are too many conflicts with prior canon, and the result is too boring. So in this story the Sage of Six Paths, and the eternal enmity of the Senju and Uchiha, and the corollary that the Uchiha are Doomed to Do It Wrong… yeah, none of that happened. The Rinnengan is its own thing, because for pity’s sake not every eye-technique needs to be related. The elders, and Danzou in particular, did indeed fear the clan’s power, but there were no clan-wide plans for rebellion, Itachi was not assigned to kill the clan as some kind of sick attempt at “peace”, none of that happened. Itachi is insane, period. The vast majority of the Uchiha were entirely honorable, if also rather messed up, as the noble shinobi clans do tend to be. And the whole go-round with Tobi did nothing but annoy me, and feels way too much like Kishimoto wondering what the heck to do next, so I’m ignoring all that. Akatsuki knows who Madara is, and there are no minions.

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Ten

Sasuke dangled his legs over the weathered edge of the Nara house’s engawa and listened to the soft tick of stones as Sakura and Shikamaru played a game of go an arm’s length away. It was the first time both teams had been home at once for a few months, and everyone was enjoying a bit of a break.

“Hey, that almost singed my hair you jerk!”

The less quiet sounds of Naruto and Ino sparring broke through the brown and gold shadows among the trees of the back garden. Everyone had their own definition of “taking a break”.

“It just doesn’t make sense, you know,” Sakura said, out of the blue, frowning down at the board. “There’s been another attack on a host. This makes both of Rock’s hosts taken!”

“Sakura,” Ino said warningly, touching down on the grass. “That’s information from the files; even if it isn’t really confidential, you shouldn’t be sharing it outside Intelligence.”

Sakura flapped an impatient hand. “We’re the yearmates of our village’s host. If it comes down to guarding Naruto from Akatsuki, we’ll most likely be the inner line of defense. If anyone needs to know this, we do.” She frowned. “Besides… I don’t think it’s a coincidence that our year and the one before have so many shinobi who are this strong this young.”

Shikamaru looked up from contemplating his next move, eyes sharp. “What do you mean?”

Sakura chewed her lip. “Look, I know this sounds like superstition, but… we’re the ones who spent the longest time closest to Naruto. I don’t have very solid evidence yet, but I think that had an effect.”

“So I’m, like, an amplifier?” Naruto asked, flickering down from the trees to the grass after Ino. “Cool.”

“You’re an annoyance,” Sasuke corrected without sitting up. “I suppose that does tend to goad a person forward, yes.”

“Jerk.” Naruto pounced on him and they wrestled for a moment before Sasuke got a foot behind Naruto’s knee and flipped them over, pinning him down on the satin smooth engawa with a little smirk of triumph; Naruto was a lot better at hand-to-hand these days, and pinning him was getting to be an accomplishment. Sakura was probably rolling her eyes over them, but she didn’t bother to move as they rolled around behind her.

“No, you have a point just from the numbers,” Shikamaru said, mouth quirking as he watched them. “I mean, normally it takes five to ten years to pass to chuunin, and look at us. One to three years, for our entire cohort.” He laid a stone down and Sakura made an annoyed sound.

“All right, if we’re breaking security, let’s do it right.” Ino came to sit on the stone step beside Chouji and steal one of his chips, which he actually let her do. Sasuke guessed their team really was close with each other. “So, the Akatsuki attacks are continuing. Rock is down both their hosts, and Cloud is down to one. And we’ve had one probe years ago.” She poked Sakura in the knee. “I’ve been out on missions, not snooping in the secure files. Who else has gotten hit?”

“I think Mist still has both of their hosts,” Sakura murmured in a distant tone, eyes fixed on the board though Sasuke wouldn’t give any odds she was actually seeing it. “I don’t know for sure about the Waterfall, though.”

“Given the timing involved in the attacks, I suspect they’ve already got that one,” Shikamaru murmured, eyes dark and thoughtful. “The Mist might have lost one by now, too.”

Sasuke propped himself up over Naruto on an elbow, frowning. “You think this really is a systematic thing. Kidnapping the hosts.” The hand that had been holding Naruto’s elbow away from his ribs fell to his chest and spread there firmly. No one was taking Naruto away. Especially not Itachi. Not again, Sasuke wouldn’t let him.

Chouji looked up at Shikamaru, popping another chip into his mouth. “So, what do we do?”

“We keep ours safe,” Sakura said, setting down a white stone more firmly than necessary.

“That too,” Shikamaru agreed. “If we can, it would be ideal to share information with the other villages who have hosts, see if we can find a pattern in the attacks.”

Sakura and Ino looked at each other. “Not Morino-san,” Ino said. “He hates the idea of sharing information with other villages. And Hoshiashige-san doesn’t listen to me as well as Miuhara listens to you.”

“Mm. Actually, Kakashi-sensei might be our best bet,” Sakura suggested. “He’s not formally part of the Intelligence division, but he was, and everyone still knows him. And he has the Hokage’s ear.”

“We’ll start there, then,” Shikamaru said, laying down another stone. “And,” he smiled, tight, “we’ll keep ours safe.”

Naruto was looking around at them all, a little flushed and wide-eyed. “Idiot,” Sasuke told him, more gently than usual, and sat up to look over Sakura’s shoulder at the game. He left his hand on Naruto’s chest, though.


Kakashi stood in front of the Hokage’s desk, just as bland as could be, waiting attentively for any questions she might have about his report.

"Hm." She was smiling, small and tight, as she set down the folder and turned her chair to face her windows, looking out through the hazy blue morning over the roofs of the village. "You know, Kakashi," she murmured in a whimsical tone, "the more I see of Naruto’s generation the more I think… the Elders don’t know what the hell they’re going to face in just a few more years."

"I couldn’t agree more." And it was a thought that kept Kakashi warm at nights, he had to admit, especially as applied to Danzou. "But they don’t have the rank to support you against the Elders right now."

"Despite having reached exactly the right conclusion." She sighed and tipped her chair back. "We’re going to have to do this more slowly than any of us would like. Get back to them, Kakashi. Let them know they’re right; encourage them to talk this up to their own superiors. The more people in favor of a little international cooperation, the more freedom I’ll have to act." She smiled slowly. "Ask them to try to take jobs close to home for a while. If any international missions or delegations open up, I think it will be some of them that I want to send. And the old goats can complain after the fact." She gave cocked a brow at him. "Brush up on your diplomacy, too. I expect it will be you I send them with."

Kakashi winced at the thought and gave her his very best hangdog look, to no avail. She just snorted. "Get used to it, Kakashi. It’s getting to be about time you started picking up more diplomatic and administrative jobs. Just be glad I’m not making Shikaku name you his official successor as Jounin Commander. Yet."

Kakashi held up his hands in hasty surrender. "Missions it is! Missions are fine!"

She settled back in her chair, satisfied. "Good." Her smugness still had an alarming tinge of speculation, though, and she murmured, "Actually, you know, it might just be you I tap for—"

"I’ll just go have my dress clothes cleaned and pressed, then, shall I?" Kakashi cut in, sidling toward the door before she could come up with any more horrifyingly responsible jobs to threaten him with.

Tsunade laughed. "You do that." Her amusement drained away, though, as he got a hand on the knob, and she added quietly. "Be ready, Kakashi. If I do have to take you off field work for a foreign mission, it will probably be urgent."


Sasuke bounded through the tall trees and deep gorges of the eastern Fire Country and wished he had enough breath to swear properly. But even moving at their top speed, Naruto was outdistancing the rest of them.

“Naruto!” Kakashi called the next breath, “Stay in closer.”

There was no sign at all that Naruto had heard him—and an edge of visible red was flickering around him. Sasuke exchanged a tense look with Sakura. When Tsunade had told them and Gai’s team that the Kazekage had been kidnapped and they were going to assist, a flash of feral rage had slitted Naruto’s eyes, but he’d seemed to come back after just a second.

Maybe he just didn’t want to listen, now, but this wasn’t a good sign.

Sakura’s mouth tightened and she nodded sharply toward Naruto. Sasuke nodded back and gathered himself. One breath, a moment of solid footing, and he flickered forward on a burst of chakra-speed to land in front of Naruto. Right in front. Despite Sasuke’s preparation for it Naruto was still moving too fast, and they went down hard against the branch under them. Only Sakura’s fast grab at Naruto’s shoulders as she came up behind them kept them both from falling.

“Cut that out!” Sasuke barked at him, a bit winded. “You can’t get too far out front of us!”

“Gaara,” Naruto started, and though his eyes weren’t slitted they weren’t as focused as Sasuke liked.

“You want to give them two for the price of one?” Kakashi asked mildly, landing beside them.

“But I have to…”

Sasuke gave up on logic, as he so often had to around Naruto, and just shook him. “Shut up and listen to me,” he said, low and deadly. “I am not letting you run yourself right into an ambush. Understand? Not by those bastards and not because you were too unbelievably bullheaded to Stay. With. Your team!” Three more hard shakes punctuated that, and Naruto finally blinked at Sasuke like he knew who was in front of him.

“Oh,” he finally said, and Sasuke restrained himself with difficulty from banging his head on Naruto’s shoulder a few times. It was as good as a brick wall. Or maybe that should be Naruto’s head.

“That’s the true spirit of youthful teamwork!” Gai boomed above them, and Sasuke groaned.

“Now see what you’ve done?” he muttered. He took Sakura’s hand up and hauled Naruto with him. “Get a hold of yourself, or we’ll do it for you.”

Naruto smiled at that, like he knew perfectly well it was a promise and not a threat. “Yeah, okay.” As they started out again, in better order this time, he added, “Thanks.”

Sasuke just snorted, not really pleased to have had to show the inner working of their team to other people like that, even people from their own village. Still, better to work it out now than after they were in Sand, he supposed.

A few more strides and Neji fell in beside him. “The demon chakra has subsided again,” he said quietly. “That was well done. Will you and Sakura be able to pull him out of it when we’re in battle, though?”

“We will do,” Sasuke said precisely, “whatever it takes.”

Neji nodded. “Let us know if we can help.” At Sasuke’s raised brow, he smiled faintly, still looking straight ahead through the tossing green of their tree path. “Naruto carries this burden for all of us. It’s only fitting that we all assist as we can.” After another leap, he added, “Hinata-sama would wish it.”

Sasuke nodded acceptance of that, silently. Whatever it took.

They were waved through casually at the edge of River Country and, half a weary day later, with frantic haste at the borders of the Wind Country. They ran on until Kakashi decreed a stop, well after dark. Naruto, predictably, protested, and Lee was right behind him.

“We won’t be any help if we’re exhausted when we get there,” Sakura told them, pushing Naruto firmly down onto the sand of the hollow Kakashi had chosen to camp in and putting a water bottle in his hand. Tenten gave her a grateful look as Lee wilted at Sakura’s scolding, and chivvied her partner out of his pack.

They weren’t going to be much help if Naruto didn’t recover his scattered brains, either, Sasuke reflected. He was their medic, after all, and a battle with Akatsuki promised injuries, to say nothing of what they might find at Sand in the wake of a raid. After contemplating this fact for a few bites of his pressed fruit bar, he sighed and scooted over to sit back to back with Naruto, leaning against him. “Hey.”

Naruto made the kind of sound a person makes when their mouth is way too full and Sasuke rolled his eyes. “So, if Akatsuki has Gaara, what are we going to do?”

“Get him back,” Naruto growled fiercely.

“I was hoping for a little more detail than that,” Sasuke said dryly. “It isn’t fair to make Sakura do all the work. For example, if Gaara is hurt, you might need to stay with him while we chase Akatsuki, you know.”

Naruto’s back relaxed against his a little, at the reminder that he could probably do something about any injuries the Kazekage might have picked up. “So. I guess I shouldn’t just run in and beat up anyone with red clouds on their coat, is what you’re saying?”

“Well,” Sasuke allowed, “at least not until we’ve got Gaara safe and know they aren’t going to do anything to you.”

Naruto was quiet for a moment. “So. You think Itachi will be with them?”

It was Sasuke’s turn to tense, and Naruto leaned back against him more firmly. “He wasn’t reported,” Sasuke said tightly, “but he’s the one I’m worried about taking you.” He breathed through the twist of memory and sickness and managed a snort. “Normal top rank criminals, I’m not as concerned over.”

“Heheh.” He could hear the smug grin in Naruto’s chortle and stifled a smile of his own. No need to encourage him. “Hey, don’t worry.” Naruto nudged him with an elbow. “I won’t let him get me. And this time you’ll kick his ass.”

“This time,” Kakashi said out of the dusk, voice hard, “you’ll run faster unless you have a lot more backup.”

That was voice of Sasuke’s commander, more than his teacher—the same voice Kakashi had used that first time, after the bad fight with Naruto. That was the voice that understood what was at stake, and had never pretended Sasuke would be content with anything less than Itachi’s blood in the end. And that was why, as Naruto was inhaling to protest, Sasuke said quietly, “Yes, Kakashi-sensei.”

Naruto twisted around to stare over his shoulder at Sasuke, eyes a little wide. “Are you okay?” He put a worried hand on Sasuke’s forehead, which Sasuke batted aside with an exasperated glare.

“He’s being at least temporarily sensible,” Kakashi-sensei said dryly. “Now if only I can get you to do the same at some point I will have reached the pinnacle of my teaching career.” Raising his voice a little he added, “Everyone get some sleep. I have first watch.”

Ignoring Gai-sensei’s immediate insistence that they play jan-ken-pon for it, Sasuke tugged the blanket out of his pack and lay down. Now that they weren’t moving, the night was turning very cold; he remembered that from the chuunin exam.

He remembered his solution for it, too, and his mouth quirked, invisibly in the dark, as he ran his hands through the seals for Inner Fire. Almost immediately, as he’d half expected, he had a teammate snuggled up on either side. “I showed you how to do this yourself,” he whispered, nudging Sakura, making her squeak and swat at his hand. “And you don’t need it,” he added to Naruto.

“You do it better,” she whispered back.

“Yeah, and you’re warmer,” Naruto added from the other side. Sasuke rolled his eyes.

“Okay, fine, whatever. Just don’t toss around like you usually do.” That was mostly to Naruto’s address, though both he and Naruto had wound up with black eyes when Sakura had one of her nightmares.

Firmly ignoring Tenten’s giggling, drifting across the hollow, he closed his eyes and pursued sleep.


It didn’t take long to get to Hidden Sand the next day, and it was Temari who met them at the wall. Her face was tight and there were dark smudges under her eyes. “There were at least two from Akatsuki,” she said as she led them through stunned silent streets to the hospital. “We think there may have been more than we saw, though. They headed over the north wall when they left, we know that, but none of the guards saw a thing. One or two agents among us I could believe, but a dozen?”

“Genjutsu, do you think?” Neji asked quietly.

“An incredibly strong one, if so.” Temari bit her lip as they hurried up stairs and through the curving hospital halls. “I can’t think what else it might have been, though.”

“Itachi,” Sasuke said, low, rage and fear surging out of his control for a breath to wind his nerves another twist tighter.

“We know that Uchiha Itachi is part of Akatsuki,” Kakashi supplied at Temari’s questioning look. “And he’s achieved levels of genjutsu control I’d never heard of before.”

“At least three then. Explosives, illusions, and poison.” Temari’s jaw set hard. “Kankurou encountered the poisoner.” She pushed open the door of a private room, bright from the skylights and painted a soft, comforting apricot like the bands Sasuke had seen in some of the rock formations on the way here. It didn’t make it any less a hospital room.

Sasuke had never liked hospitals. The first time he’d found himself in one was after his clan was killed, and later visits hadn’t done much to break a bad first impression. The harsh, hoarse gasps of the man on the hospital bed yanked at his nerves; there was pain here, and he couldn’t do a thing about it.

He wasn’t at all surprised when Naruto pushed forward. “Poison?”

The very old woman by the bed said without turning, “More than one. Sasori’s poisons are tricky, too. We’re still trying to isolate them, and none of the general anti—” she looked over her shoulder and broke off, eyes widening. “White Fang!”

Sasuke was caught just as flat-footed as everyone else when she dove for Kakashi with a shriek of rage, but he slapped Naruto’s shoulder as Naruto started to wheel back; whatever was going on, he and Sakura were here. Naruto should concentrate on what only he could do.

By the time they’d both spun back to their right jobs, Naruto to the bed and Sasuke to their commander, it was already over. Sakura was spinning away from the kick that checked the old woman in midair, and an equally old man had come forward to stop the woman. Gai’s team spilled into the room after Kakashi, and once it became clear that it was Kakashi’s father the old woman had a grudge against everyone seemed to relax again.

“Okay,” Naruto said briskly, from the bed, having ignored the whole thing, “His liver already knows what this shit is, I’ll start there and burn it out.”

“We already tried a direct flush,” one of the other medics started, and Naruto grinned.

“Yeah, but you aren’t me.”

Sasuke’s mouth twitched. He’d always kind of figured that Naruto’s bedside manner forced people to get better just so they could avoid drowning in the overflowing self-confidence.

The old woman’s brows lifted as Naruto set his hands on Kankurou’s stomach and his chakra spilled into the visible range. “Who is this?”

“Uzumaki Naruto,” Kakashi provided. “The Hokage’s apprentice in healing, of late.”

The woman paused. “She sent her own apprentice?” she murmured, almost to herself.

“Tsunade-sama takes our treaty obligations seriously,” Kakashi answered, sober.

Sasuke listened with half an ear, keeping an eye on Naruto, who was starting to sweat. “Crap,” Naruto finally muttered, glaring at thin air. “I’ve got it out of his blood, but it’s… damn it…”

“Is it in his bones already?” the old woman asked sharply, coming to hover beside him.

“No, not that. It’s… it’s a reservoir, yeah, but not the bones, it’s…” Naruto narrowed his eyes, “I think it’s poisoned his chakra.”

The woman hissed through her teeth. “Sasori! He did create that one after all.” She bowed her head, hands locked tight. “Then there’s nothing we can do.”

Naruto growled. “There is! I just can’t burn or break it like the stuff in his blood! If I could just find a way out for it…” Blue eyes widened and his head jerked up. “Neji!”

Neji stepped forward, frowning. “What?”

Naruto grinned at him, and it was the grin he got in the middle of a fight when he’d figured out how to win. Sasuke smirked and settled back against the wall as the tightness in his gut eased.

“Open his tenketsu!” Naruto told Neji. “All of them, all the way! You can do that, right?”

Neji’s eyes widened. “But…!” He took a breath. “Naruto, if I do that, his chakra will all drain away. He’ll die.”

“Not while I’m adding more. Chakra transfers were the first thing I learned to do. And I’ll tell you when to close them again.” Only Naruto, Sasuke reflected, could make a suggestion this crazy sound perfectly reasonable. Neji had the slightly disbelieving expression of any normal person hearing it; fortunately, it wasn’t the first time, for him and Naruto.

“He needs to be standing upright so I can reach all sixty-four key points,” he said slowly. “Naruto, you’d better be right about this.”

“I am.” Naruto’s eyes were fixed back on his patient, and his confidence this time was quiet and sure.

“All right.”

The other medics got Kankurou upright and Neji set his feet, preparing, and engaged his Byakugan. One breath. Another. And then there was a whirl of strikes, blindingly fast, absolutely precise, and Neji was in front of Kankurou again, only to leap back. “Naruto!”

“Got it!” Naruto blazed up with the force of chakra he was concentrating, hands pressed to Kankurou’s chest. Another breath, and Neji hissed, still holding the Byakugan.

“It’s moving…”

Sasuke thought everyone in the room might be holding their breaths, hanging on Neji’s terse reports of Kankurou’s chakra levels as Naruto stood like stone in front of him, scowling in concentration.

Sasuke was keeping an eye on Naruto’s chakra levels, frowning at the rapid drain. But Naruto wasn’t turning muddy or jagged, so he kept his mouth shut. And kept watching. He’d been party to more than one of Tsunade’s lectures to Naruto about having a spotter when he tried a new technique, and he’d seen Naruto get so concentrated on his work Shizune had to knock him out to stop him.

“Almost,” Naruto panted. “Al… most… got it! Neji, close them down!”

Neji struck again, fast and sure, and Naruto slumped against the next bed. “Okay,” he rasped, as Sasuke released the Sharingan, with a covert sigh of relief. “See if that got it.”

The wide-eyed medics lifted Kankurou back into bed and the old woman passed her hands over him. “He’s stable,” she said, rough and shocked. “His pulse, his muscles, his chakra… all clean.” She turned and stared at Naruto. “How could you possibly feed enough chakra to him to replace his and still be standing?!”

Naruto grinned, pushing himself upright. “Well, me and Gaara have some things in common.”

The old woman actually sputtered. “Are you telling me the slug girl taught Leaf’s Sacrifice to heal?”

“Naruto is a very strong healer,” Kakashi observed blandly before Sasuke and Sakura could do more than stiffen at what the woman had called Naruto. “The village is very glad to have him.”

The old woman’s eyes darkened. “I see,” she said, very low. “That… was wise of the girl.” More briskly she added, “And an ingenious solution, boy. You’re a credit to your teacher.”

“Chiyo-baasama?” The whisper from the bed drifted through the momentary silence, and everyone spun to see Kankurou pushing himself slowly up. “What…?”

“Kankurou!” Temari just about tackled him back to the bed with a hug. And then she grabbed his shoulders and shook him hard. “You idiot! You went without backup! Never, ever, do that again!”

Sasuke caught Sakura’s eye and had to stifle a snort of laughter; that sounded extremely familiar.

“They have Gaara!” Kankurou flailed a little trying to sit back up again. “We have to go after them!”

“There are tracking teams already on the two trails we found, and support teams following each of them,” Temari told him. “As soon as they get a bird back to us, a full strength party is going in pursuit.” She smiled a little. “The Leaf sent us help, too.”

“Heh.” Naruto straightened all the way. “Yeah, don’t worry about it. We’ll bring Gaara back!”

“Uzumaki.” Kankurou looked around, and frowned. “Wait, how did I… did you…?”

The old woman, Chiyo, patted his arm. “Indeed. Naruto-kun was the one who cleared the poison from you.” She held out a hand and ordered. “Grip!”

Obediently, Kankurou gripped her hand tight, and she nodded judiciously. “Almost fully recovered.” She cocked her head at Naruto. “I’m very impressed. It was a completely brute force approach, but you actually undid most of the muscular and arterial damage. It seems the slug girl became a good teacher, as well as a good medic.” She brushed her sleeves straight and added, quite casually, “When the team leaves to go after Gaara, I will accompany it.”

“I’m coming too!” Kankurou swung his legs off the bed and pushed himself up with determination and only a little shakiness.

“Kankurou, you should stay put and recover,” Temari exclaimed. “I’ll go.”

Kankurou smiled, crooked. “You know the council won’t listen to me the way they will to you, Nee-san.”

Temari made a frustrated sound, and Sasuke thought he knew what hidden fear was underneath her anger. Fear of the hell he’d lived in himself, of losing everything. “We’ll bring them back,” he said, quietly. “Both of them.” It could still be done for Sand, at least. That thought was actually a little comforting.

“We’ll absolutely bring everyone back,” Naruto seconded, with downright alarming intensity.

Temari looked at them for a long moment. Finally, very softly, she asked, “Why?”

Naruto looked away, shrugging one shoulder. “Like I said, Gaara and I… we have some stuff in common.” He looked up at Sasuke and Sakura, and then beyond them at Gai’s team. “But I found people who accepted me. And he didn’t. I know how it hurts, and I’m not going to let it keep going on.” He looked back at her, again with that absolute determination of his. “Now that he has people, I’m not going to let him lose them!”

Sasuke nodded silently. It was true enough for him, too, though it was Temari he was thinking of and the expression that would be on her face if she had to stand and watch her family taken away from her. That was more than he was going to say to another nation’s shinobi, though, no matter how much sympathy he had.

Temari had a hand pressed to her mouth. She blinked hard and swallowed, and whispered, “Thank you.”

Naruto ran a hand through his hair, sheepishly. “Hey, don’t worry. It’ll all be okay.”

Temari drew a slow breath and pulled herself together. “Come with me, then. I’ll find rooms for you while we’re waiting for the tracking parties to report.”


Word came in the small hours of the morning, which Sasuke thought was a good thing. Much longer and Naruto would have produced Shadow Clones and gone chasing after both trails at once himself.

It would have been easier if the trail back toward River Country had been the true one, and it certainly ended in a convincingly warded cave, but there was no scent or trace of Gaara. Kankurou and Chiyo both agreed that trail had been laid by a puppet. The trail north into Sky Country, on the other hand, kept both Sasori’s scent and Gaara’s. A Sand patrol already near the border was ordered to close up and support the trackers, and Chiyo led Kankurou and the two Leaf teams out of the village herself.

“We’ll just have to hope no one from Rain stumbles over this,” Chiyo said grimly, as they ran north over slowly lightening sand and rock. “Because we don’t have time to beat sense into that idiot Hanzou’s head and then wait for the village to contact all their border patrols and convince them to stand aside.”

“Akatsuki have gone to ground, haven’t they? They won’t be moving again without us catching them; we can take a little while to explain to the border patrols if we have to,” Gai said, and gave her one of his embarrassingly optimistic thumbs up signs. “We’ll have the Kazekage back in no time!”

Chiyo gave him a quelling look that Sasuke entirely approved of. “Depending on how many of them are gathered at this hidey hole of theirs, it’s possible they’re going to attempt an extraction.”

“Extraction?” Both Gai and Kakashi looked puzzled.

Chiyo was silent for a few strides. “I don’t know how Leaf does it, but Sand always extracted the tailed beast from the Sacrifices when they became too worn down to control it any more. It allowed us to store Shukaku in a stable form between embodiments. Akatsuki may have their own Sacrifice to transfer the One-tail into.”

Sakura hissed between her teeth and Sasuke glanced over to see her eyes widening, sharp with calculation.

“But…” Neji was frowning. “Forgive me, Chiyo-san, but a beast’s chakra mixes very deeply with the host’s. Wouldn’t that scar the host very badly?”

“It kills them,” Chiyo said bluntly, dark eyes fixed straight ahead.

That choked off everyone for a moment, and Kankurou lost his next stride. “Gaara,” he whispered.

“It takes time,” Chiyo said. “Time and a great deal of chakra. If there aren’t too many of them gathered, we’ll still be in time.” She shot a sidelong glance at Naruto. “I’m glad you’re with us, Naruto-kun.”

Naruto was starting to look a little feral again, and Sasuke and Sakura immediately closed in at his shoulders. Chiyo’s brows twitched up, but she turned back to keeping their pace without comment.

“This is it,” Sakura was muttering. “This is what they’re doing! Not keeping control of the hosts… gaining control of the beasts!”

“Sakura,” Sasuke asked, very quietly, “how many have been confirmed taken?”

“Five,” she said, tightly. “More than half.”

Sasuke felt something very cold sink down into his stomach. “I think this mission just became important to more than Sand and Leaf alone,” he said, a little husky.

“I think you’re right. Kakashi-sensei,” Sakura called.

“We’re all that can get there in time, this mission,” Kakashi answered, and Sasuke wasn’t surprised he was already on the same page. “But the villages have to know, one way or the other. Sasuke, can you summon on the run? Yours will be fastest.”

Despite the sudden grimness of the situation, Sasuke’s mouth quirked as he remembered the training Jiraiya had harried him through in this very country. “It’ll be nostalgic,” he murmured, and pulled a summoning scroll out of his pouch while Naruto took point and Sakura dropped behind to watch his back. A nick of his thumb, and blood to carry the summons, and Youchi swooped down over his head, wings shadowing them against the high, steel blue of the morning sky.

“On vacation again?” the hawk asked sarcastically.

Sasuke ignored the attitude. He was used to it; it was even comforting in a way, to have something around with a sufficiently caustic outlook on life that he didn’t feel the need to contribute any extra cynicism. “Get word to the Hokage,” he directed. “Akatsuki may be extracting the tailed beasts from their hosts, either to hold or to seal into their own candidates. Everyone needs to know this, not just us.”

“Okay, but if Leaf’s message keeper tries to mew me up again, I’m going to take his scalp off for real this time.” Before Sasuke could answer, Youchi was winging away to the east, straight and fast.

“Have I mentioned that your summons is a jerk?” Naruto asked.

“Have I mentioned that yours is an idiot?” Sasuke shot back. He still hadn’t forgotten the time Gamakichi glued all of his underwear to the bottom of his pack, not even on Naruto’s orders.

“I bet your summons is nice and smart, Sakura-san,” Lee chipped in, ever hopeful.

“I haven’t contracted with one,” Sakura said rather dryly from behind him, “but if I had I can guarantee you it would be more sensible than both of theirs put together.”

Sasuke and Naruto shrugged at each other. That one was pretty hard to argue with.


A little more than two days took them over the border of Sky Country to meet with one of the trackers at the edge of a swamp.

“Kurota,” Kankurou greeted the man, “report.”

“There’s an old building, well into the swamp, perhaps an abandoned temple.” The man gestured almost due north. “The way to it is a maze, half reality and half illusion, seeded with some very subtle chakra triggered traps. We only broke all the way through this morning, and we don’t have anyone with us who can open the door into the place.”

“Show us,” Chiyo rapped out. Kurota paused to bow deeply to her, which, Sasuke was distantly amused to note, made her hand twitch as if to cuff him. Sand did seem to have a feisty bunch of Elders.

The swamp path was a maze all right, and Sasuke was impressed the Sand teams had made it through with, apparently, no deaths. Even he and Sakura together would have been hard pressed to pick apart the tangle of subtle illusion that led the foot toward quicksand here, a sinkhole there, cloaked the already faint ripples of water predators in another spot. The obvious routes through clumps of trees were seeded with strangling traps. It took hours to work their way through, even with a guide, and he watched both Naruto and Kankurou getting tenser with every turn they had to take away from the path straight north.

It distracted him from his own tension, which cranked higher every time he couldn’t keep from thinking about who might well have set these illusions.

Fortunately, Kankurou had Chiyo next to him to tweak his ear admonishingly whenever he tried to hurry ahead. As for Naruto… well Sasuke and Sakura both stayed close, with a hand on his arm or shoulder when they could. Naruto’s eyes kept flickering toward the feralness of the fox.

When they finally broke out of the maze, they found the rest of the Sand teams gathered at the foot of a gray stone building in the square, tiered style of Sky Country, though it had none of the windows those tiers of roofs usually sheltered.

The tall, narrow doorway was blocked with stone, too.

Turning away from it was the dark-haired woman Sakura had met during the chuunin exams.

“Kankurou-san!” She stopped for a startled moment. “Chiyo-baasama.”

“Yes, yes, spit it out, what’s the problem?” Chiyo demanded testily, and Fuunotora regathered herself.

“The whole temple has a reflective seal woven through the stone. Any chakra technique at all is reflected back on the user. We need to break through with pure taijutsu, and none of my people are that strong; Shinji reports the walls and that door are over a meter thick. Perhaps one of your puppets? Or can one of our allies do such a thing?” She cocked a brow at Sakura.

Chiyo grunted unpromisingly, and Sakura glanced at their second team. “Gai-san? Lee?”

“Lee,” Gai said firmly, laying a hand on Lee’s shoulder. “Knowing the difficulty, even I might slip and bring my chakra to bear.”

Lee stood very straight. “Right!”

“Any intelligence about the door itself?” Kakashi asked Fuunotora.

“Shinji!” Fuunotora called, and the Sand nin kneeling with his hands pressed to the stone in the door looked over his shoulder. For a second, Sasuke thought the man’s eyes were as black as his, but then he blinked and his pupils shrank abruptly to show brown around them.

“This is definitely the weakest structural point,” he tapped on the stone at a little over head height. “Aim here.”

An eye technique. Which, of course, made Sasuke think of Itachi, and he shook himself, set that aside for later when they knew one way or the other. Instead, he breathed, cleared his mind of one thing after another, and slid into the place where the Sharingan turned the world clear and precise, watching like one of his hawks for the movement that signaled prey.

Kankurou was ordering the Sand teams to make a charge once the door was open, or clear more traps, whichever was needed. Kakashi waved the Leaf-nin to fall in behind them. Lee stood in front of the door, breathing slow and deep. Neji had his Byakugan active and was watching the temple tight-mouthed.

“Hurry,” he said quietly. "It isn’t just the reflection jutsu distorting things; there’s something strange going on in there."

Lee nodded and sprang high into the air, spinning as he came down, and Sasuke could see the fine precision in how gravity and momentum came together with Lee’s own strength in a single heel strike at the precise point Shinji had indicated.

Cracks starred the rock on impact, and one of the Sand nin gasped.

Lee landed in a crouch and spun up in a fluid wheel to punch the impact point with a kiai that was nearly a scream.

The rock shattered.

So, Sasuke noted, had two of Lee’s long hand bones. His ankle was severely strained. Neji was swearing viciously under his breath even as he looked past his teammate into the building. “No traps,” he shouted, “go!” The whole lot of them charged forward over the rubble.

The Sharingan highlighted for Sasuke every detail of what was inside. A single, open room. A huge, fading shape, shoulders and hands and a demon face. Five of nine figures fading with it. A body in unfamiliar dark robes but with red hair he recognized falling through the air. As it hit the ground, Kankurou’s and Naruto’s voices nearly as one, frightened and furious.

“GAARA!”

A/N: Another thing I never found believable was that one of the major villages wouldn’t have any trackers of their own to have sent after their freaking Kage, and would not have sent any of their own teams along with the Leaf team to rescue him.

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Nine

“All right,” Kimiko, Sakura’s attending Intelligence medic, declared, handing her back her shirt. “You’re clear. No seals or techniques that would turn you, no sleepers that I can find, and you’re impressively healed from Heart In a Net considering that you just about ripped it out by the roots. Have I mentioned how stupid that was?”

“This is the fifth time,” Sakura sighed as she ducked her head through her shirt collar.

“Remember it,” Kimiko directed firmly. “Hokage-sama?”

“Mmm.” Tsunade frowned at her, arms crossed. “I still don’t like that new seal of yours. It could kill you far too easily. By all rights it should be named a forbidden technique.”

Sakura made a face. “Do you want to try to take it off?” She really didn’t look forward to that at all. Besides… well, never mind.

“No, I suppose not.” Sakura tried to ignore her leap of pleasure at those words as Tsunade ran a diagnostic palm over her shoulders again. “The surgery to sink this into you was very thorough, and getting it out would be even chancier than taking off that one of Sasuke’s. Besides,” her lips quirked, “you don’t want to let it go, do you?”

Sakura winced a little. “It’s not… I mean, it’s just…”

Tsunade laid a hand on her shoulder. “Sakura. It’s all right to like being strong, you know. That’s what makes us all keep moving forward. You’ve demonstrated pretty conclusively that you want that strength to protect the village. I’m not worried.”

Sakura bent her head. “Thank you, Tsunade-sama,” she said softly, feeling another small band of fear loosen from around her chest. She looked up with a tiny smile. “You heal hearts too, I guess.”

“Ah, go on with you.” Tsunade gave her a little shove. “If Kimiko’s cleared you, you’re ready for the fun part.” Both medics gave her alarmingly cheerful and toothy smiles and chorused, “Paperwork!”

Sakura contemplated this with a sinking stomach. “…you’re sure you don’t want to poke at the seal a little more?”


…It was at this point that I first started acting as a mission commander for a variety of Sound ninja, both genin and chuunin. I suspected, after the first two missions with entirely different teams, that Orochimaru was using my own experience to help train the Sound-nin to a higher standard; most of them did not possess the sophistication or training one would expect from an established village and tended to rely too heavily on their martial skills alone.

Sakura put her pen down and shook out her hand vigorously. In some ways, this was an easy section, a lot easier than putting her sparring with Kabuto into words. And then, in some ways, it might be the hardest. She had liked most of her teams, at least once she’d kicked a few asses and they knew to take her seriously. She thought most of them had liked and respected her, in the end. After all, she’d helped them. She’d made the missions a success and pointed them in a professional direction.

And she’d also killed their leader. If she ever met them again, they’d be completely within their rights, under the loose accords of the villages, to kill her. They might well try.

The part that actually troubled her was that she didn’t mind too much. She didn’t like the thought; she’d like it a lot better if they all decided that Orochimaru had been a sucking leech of a madman and they were all better off without him! But if the Sound shinobi, many of whom had never lived in Orochimaru’s personal base or seen his madness first hand, chose to blame her and seek revenge… well, that was their choice. She’d live with it.

And she could still look back and feel that she’d done a good job both ways: placing herself to kill Orochimaru after getting all the information about Sound that she could, and also doing her professional best to lead and improve the Sound shinobi under her command. She was… proud of them. Proud, even, of the skills they might be about to turn on her.

She was starting to wonder if this was what people really meant when they talked about Intelligence and twiddled a finger knowingly next to their temples.


Sakura took her chair in the incongruously bright, warm debriefing room in the basement of the Intelligence complex. She folded her arms tight over her stomach, and waited for today’s first question.

“First of all, Haruno, are you sure you want Hatake Kakashi to be here for today’s work?” Miuhara asked her as he pulled up his own chair on the other side of the table. “I know he was your jounin-sensei, but I have to tell you he can be pretty brutal when he’s doing Intelligence work.”

Sakura managed a small smile. “He could be pretty brutal as a teacher, too. I’m sure.” She trusted Kakashi-sensei’s judgment, and right now she felt very in need of some extra, trustable judgment. She was starting to doubt her own.

“All right then.” Miuhara nodded and Kakashi-sensei propped himself quietly against the soft yellow wall just behind her shoulder and out of her sight. Typical, Sakura thought with irritated affection.

Miuhara was paging through the thick folder of her report, but it was her other debriefer, Hitomi, who asked, “So about Kabuto. You said he was acting for his own purposes all along; do you think he’s going to take Sound for his own, now?”

Sakura shook her head, unhesitating. “No. I don’t think he has any interest in leading or ruling, himself.”

“What is he interested in, then? Research, like Orochimaru?”

Slowly, trying to put months of observations together, Sakura said, “The game. I think… I think that’s all he really cares about. I think that’s why he really stayed with Orochimaru, because Orochimaru played it too.”

“Hmm.” Miuhara frowned down at a page. “You said he defended Orochimaru without hesitation, at risk of his life, and yet was working against him the whole time.”

“Yes. That’s it exactly.” Sakura leaned forward, chasing the thought, trying to make sense for herself as well as for them. “I think that was the challenge he set for himself. To do everything Orochimaru wanted of him, to protect him even, and still successfully betray him in the end.”

Softly, Hitomi asked, “Like you did? Was that why you felt such a connection with him?”

Sakura flinched. “I…” She was quiet for a long breath, and finally whispered, “Yes.”

“Was that any part in your reasoning, when you let him go?” Miuhara asked neutrally.

“No.” That answer came to her quickly, surely, and she raised her head again. “No. That was plain calculation. I was running out of time, and if he could take me hostage he’d have a very strong position against Naruto and Sasuke. He offered something we wanted, too, and that tipped the balance.”

Miuhara nodded. “Good. Now, you just said that Orochimaru played the game, too. In your report, you emphasized his implication, on dying, that he had never assumed you were loyal until very near the end. Can you expand on that?”

Sakura’s arms tightened. “In retrospect, it’s very clear,” she said a little stiffly. “He probably always assumed I was an agent for Konoha. He… lured me. He showed approval for my apparent self-interest and eventually gave me a technique that is both very strong and does not control me. That seems contradictory, but all during the research process he was offering me bait. Leadership of teams; the respect of the Sound shinobi, especially as he appeared to trust me at his side; approval for every time I pushed back against him and for my planning abilities; my… my name.”

“Your name?” Hitomi murmured, eyes sharp over her folded hands.

“He didn’t call me by name, for a long time. It was always ‘kunoichi’. But when…” she had to swallow, “when I demanded more tests on the last version of the seal, more tests on other people, because I knew it would give me more time to gather intelligence on the bases, then he called me by name.”

“And if he thought all along you were an agent of Konoha,” Miuhara completed her logic coolly, “it follows that he was seeking to draw you into just that position, where you would be complicit with his atrocities. And he rewarded you for it.”

“Yes,” Sakura whispered, arms curling tighter. “And it worked.”

“How so?” Miuhara asked, perfectly calm. “Do you have any intention of performing that kind of forbidden experiment?”

“Not that,” she said roughly. “But I liked it! Even knowing what he was, what he was doing, when he recognized me, I felt…” She ran out of words and clenched her hands, frustrated.

Kakashi stirred against the wall. “You created your cover out of a part of yourself you don’t usually show or let run free,” he said quietly. “And Orochimaru saw that part and understood it, and showed approval for it.” He paused and added, lower, “And that part of you meant it when you swore loyalty to him and to Sound.”

“Yes.” Sakura was curled in so tightly now she was bent over her knees, hot, furious tears dripping onto the fabric of her pants.

“Do you believe you will betray the Leaf?” Hitomi asked.

“No,” Sakura said, rough and tight, but sure of that at least.

“Do you believe you would have stayed with him if he had not continued to seek Uchiha Sasuke’s life?” Miuhara asked, gently.

That one froze Sakura for long, tight breaths. “I… in the Net… in the Net, yes,” she whispered at last, shaking, eyes fixed on her knees, wide and blind. She covered her face with her hands and shuddered, breath choking in her chest.

Warm, strong hands settled on her shoulders. “And if someone had come to release the Net for you?” Kakashi-sensei asked, matter-of-fact.

Sakura clenched her hands together and pressed them to her chest, to her heart, biting her lip hard. She remembered the way Sasuke and Naruto had taken care of her that first night, the way they still showed up every day, to walk her home from Intelligence or to train with her after dinner. She felt the sureness, down at the bottom of her heart, that had driven her hand through Orochimaru’s chest, and finally she whispered, “If someone had released me… if my team had come for me… I would have come back.” She looked up at Miuhara and Hitomi, sitting quiet and unjudging at the table, and took a long, trembling breath. “Yes.”

Miuhara smiled. “I’m glad. Let’s take a break, then. We can continue when you’re ready.”

Sakura nodded and stood, though she needed Kakashi-sensei’s hand under her elbow for a moment to keep from falling over again, and went to wash her face.


Sasuke leaned against the tree across from the front doors of Intelligence, waiting for Sakura. Naruto had walked her home yesterday and he’d been scowling when he came to see Sasuke after. He’d said she looked like someone had dipped her in bleach and wrung her out. Sasuke had asked how Naruto knew anything about bleach, considering the condition of his apartment, and promised to wait for her today.

Whatever was going on with her, he needed to see.

So he waited, nodding silently to the occasional greetings of other shinobi as they emerged or entered. Both he and Naruto were becoming familiar sights, he supposed. Well enough; they were Sakura’s team, and the other agents might as well get used to them now.

He was starting to wonder if this was exactly how Kakashi had become so fanatical about teamwork and supporting team members. Had he lost someone, or had someone lost part of themselves, for his sake?

When Sakura finally came out the doors, he straightened up frowning. Naruto was right; she looked washed out and exhausted, and he found himself hurrying to her side to put a hand under her arm. “Hey. Are you all right?” He frowned more darkly at the building she’d just come out of. “What are they doing to you?”

The smile Sakura gave him was a little shaky, but it looked true, and she put a hand on his arm. “It’s okay, Sasuke. It’s… well, it’s not fun, I won’t lie, but it’s helping me. In the long run. Like training really hard,” she added, when he continued frowning.

His brows rose at that. “Training, huh?” He didn’t let go, but he did turn and walk quietly beside her.

“Kind of.” She walked slowly, slower than he liked to see, and as they started coming into busier streets he glared people out of her way with no compunctions. Sakura barely seemed to notice, and he wasn’t sure if that was good or bad. At last she said, softly, “He really messed with my head, you know. By the end. Partly because I was already under a technique to help me think and react… skewed. Like I resented you and Naruto, like we’d never come together as a real team. But also because he really was scarily good at that.” She looked up at him, eyes dark. “You know.”

He remembered years of solitary rage and desperation, and the few months when that desperation had been fed, tantalized with the promise of fulfillment and rest. And he shuddered. “I know.”

“So, it isn’t fun to talk about, and have Miuhara-san and Hitomi-san pick apart everything I did and heard and saw. But it helps. It helps me figure out how I really think and feel, so no one will be able to do that to me again. Or, at least, not so easily.” Her shoulders straightened and her chin lifted a little at that, more the Sakura he knew.

“Okay. I guess I can see that.” He looked down at her as they turned onto her own street. “Can we help?”

Her smile broke out like sunshine. “You already do. I promise.”

They stopped at her door and he said, quietly. “You… you did this for me.” Trying to find words to express his astonishment and fear and frustration, seeing the price she’d paid, he finally burst out with, “Why?”

Sakura’s smile turned bright and sharp as a knife. “Because you’re mine,” she said, making him blink, and added, softer, “You’re ours. That’s all.”

Theirs. Hers and Naruto’s. And because of that, she would do this thing and think almost nothing of it. Sasuke shook his head, helplessly. How was he supposed to make sense out of that? Only family did things like that.

The thought echoed in his head, and he flinched from it.

Sasuke swallowed, staring down at her blindly. He had no family. His family was gone. His whole clan. He had nothing left but the madman who killed them all, and that was why… why everything. But Sakura would do this for him. Naruto, who argued with him by reflex, like breathing, Naruto would, he was certain, say the same. And look at him like he was an idiot for questioning it, into the bargain. They were…

They were his team! He shook his head violently. They were his team, that was all. That was why. Team, like Kakashi-sensei always said. (Family dies. Not family.)

“Sasuke? Hey, Sasuke?” Sakura frowned and poked him in the arm. “Did you skip lunch today or something?”

“No,” he muttered, “I… I just…” He swallowed down a rush of queasiness, of almost-fear. There was nothing to be afraid of; they were his team. “Never mind.” He hesitated. “Sakura…”

“Hm?” She cocked her head, eyes clear and patient.

Ignoring the sudden stares of the civilians around them, he stepped forward and gathered her up, holding her tightly. “Thank you,” he whispered against her ear. “For… everything.”

After a startled moment, she hugged him back, just as tight. “You’re welcome. Always.” She pulled back a little and smiled, softly. “And thank you, too. I don’t think you know for how much.”

“Maybe I know a little.” He let her go, hands sliding down her arms. “So. More talking about it tomorrow?”

She made a face and nodded.

“Okay. We’ll wait for you again tomorrow, then.” He waited until she was safely inside before taking to the roofs to head back to his own apartment.


Sakura stood in her underwear with her hands on her hips, staring at the clothes tossed over her dresser. It was obvious once you looked at them, piled layer on layer.

She’d worn a completely different outfit every day this week. One day her old red tunic and snug shorts. Another, her actual chuunin uniform. A third her black pants from Sound and her net shirt. Yet another, a dress she barely remembered buying before she left. She’d cycled through one after another, as if her clothes could tell her who she was now, and never even realized it.

Kakashi-sensei was probably laughing.

All right. This wasn’t a question she could answer by random dips into her wardrobe. It was something she had to decide. Who did she want to be? And what did that person want to wear today?

Slowly, she sorted and folded her clothes. It was easy to hang up her dresses. That hadn’t ever really been her day to day style. After a moment of hesitation she folded away her red tunics and blouses also. They were bright and cheerful and… too young. Too young for how she felt now. Her hands clenched in her black Sound clothes as she folded them and she had to stop and bite her lip and remind herself of the things she’d come to understand about herself in the past week. This was part of her, yes. But only part. Still, her fingers lingered on her black leather vest. It zipped down the front, the same as many of her tunics did. She’d never quite seen that before.

She laid the vest on the bed. Perhaps… perhaps this was something she would keep. A reminder that, even as deep under as she’d gone, she’d still found a tiny connection to keep. She’d still known who she was, at the very heart.

And who she was was a shinobi of the Leaf. She knew more of what that meant, now, and she wouldn’t turn away from it. This was her calling. Thoughtfully, she pulled out her Leaf uniform pants and laid them on the bed too, looking at the combination.

That might do.

She dressed, wrapping her calves snugly and pulling on her sandals, and tied her forehead protector. When she took a breath and turned to look in the mirror, she smiled. That looked like someone she knew. Like a self she knew.

There was still something, though.

After a moment’s thought, she reached up and tugged at a strand of hair. It was cut at her shoulders these days. It was attractive enough, and easy to care for. But right now she was remembering when it had been even shorter, a time when that had been her mark of determination. Perhaps that would be right to have again, now. She hesitated for a moment, wondering if she was just being silly or overthinking this, but… all of them had changed over time, hadn’t they? Outward signs of inward changes. Naruto wore black or blue, these days, aside from the ever-orange jacket. Sasuke had slowly left off wearing his high-necked shirts and started wearing wrapped tops, that and a belt that hid more shuriken than the local weapons shop. Naruto had teased him about stealing from Tsunade-sama’s closet until Sasuke had rolled his eyes and pointed out a few essential differences in fit across the chest.

Looked at that way, Sakura was actually behind on her changes. She nodded firmly to herself in the mirror and hopped out her window, heading for Ino’s house. And just because she was in an impish mood, she snuck up behind Ino silently, in the flower shop, and tapped her on the shoulder. "Hey."

Ino jumped and spun, lifting the scissors she’d just been cutting ribbon with, poised to slash or stab. Sakura grinned. "Tense today?"

"Sakura!" Ino exhaled explosively, lowering the scissors. "Don’t do that!" She paused and frowned. "Since when did you get that good at stealth?"

Sakura’s mouth twisted. "This last mission. It was… kind of intense."

Ino’s eyes darkened and she nodded silently. Ino had entered Intelligence, too; Sakura didn’t have to say anything else, and Ino wouldn’t press for details. Sakura inhaled, relaxing into her friend’s understanding. "So, hey. I want to get a haircut; what’s the best place to go to, these days?"

"Still Kitagawa’s," Ino said promptly. "Thinking of a new style?"

"Yeah." Sakura smiled a little wryly, running a hand through her hair. "I just want something a little different. Shorter, I think."

"Hmm." Ino eyed her steadily for a moment. "Okay. Let me tell Tou-san, and I’ll come along and introduce you."

Sakura smiled more naturally. "Thanks, Ino."

Ino escorted her through the streets, keeping just a hair ahead, passing on gossip with plenty of expansive gestures that kept the other people around them at a little distance. Ino really was pretty perceptive, Sakura reflected; she was a kind and good friend.

Of course, Ino was also an insufferable know-it-all, and, once they were at the hair-dresser’s, engaged Mie-san, the senior stylist, in a long discussion over the pros and cons of different styles for Sakura’s face shape and hair texture. Sakura shook her head wryly and cut in. "I just want something very short and easy to take care of," she said firmly. "Nothing I have to spend a long time on in the morning. Something that looks good even if I slept in a tree the night before and finger combed it when I got up."

"Ah, a working hairstyle." Mie-san sounded a shade disappointed, but her eyes also gleamed at the prospect of a challenge. "Well, now, let me see."

Sakura suffered herself to be washed and conditioned and turned this way and that while Mie-san muttered over her hair. Eventually the clippers came out, and there was more muttering and snipping here and there, and hand-long hanks of silky pink hair, dark with water, started to fall around the chair. Eventually there was a reassuringly small bit of blow-drying and some reassuringly basic brushing, and Mie-san whisked her towel away. "There! What do you think?"

Sakura stood and looked in the mirror. Her hair was short, a soft mop of flyaway strands with unpredictable waves and flips here and there. "Does it really do that?" she marveled, running a hand through it.

"Oh yes. Your hair has surprising body for such a fine texture, especially if you don’t blow-dry it."

Sakura smiled, standing straight. She looked like someone confident. Someone who knew who she was. For the first time in a long time, longer than eight months she thought, her outside felt like it matched her inside.

She really had fallen behind on her changes.

"I like it very much," she said softly. "Thank you."

"It suits you," Ino offered, head cocked. "I wouldn’t have thought it, but it does."

A style she had chosen for herself, rather than listening to what other people thought was pretty. Sakura grinned. "Yeah. It does, doesn’t it?"


A summons came for her team five days later. It directed them, not to the mission room or even the Hokage’s office, but a room on the ground floor of the Hokage Residence. They gathered outside it, glancing questioningly at each other, but before anyone got up the guts to suggest just going in, a vision in long pale robes came sweeping down the hall to meet them.

Sakura stared at the Hokage, and the boys stared with her. She’d never actually seen Tsunade in her formal robes before.

“Tsunade-baachan?” Naruto sounded just as startled as she felt. “Why are you all got up like that? And why did we have to wear our uniforms?”

Tsunade sighed and waved them into the room, kicking her robes out of her way as she walked. “We have a bit of a situation.”

The room looked like an extremely formal version of her office, wood paneled and hung with banners, with a huge desk in front of what was nearly a throne, and sumptuous chairs set out before it. Other people were there ahead of them, and Sakura’s eyes widened further as she realized that half of Tsunade’s council was here—all three of the Elders. But not the ANBU or Jounin Commanders or the clan heads. So this is important, but she doesn’t want to give it too much weight. Her eyes narrowed. “Tsunade-sama? Who are you receiving?”

Tsunade settled herself at the throne-desk and smiled tightly at her. “The Daimyou of Sound Country.”

Sakura’s breath drew in sharply, and she was glad when Naruto and Sasuke closed in at her shoulders. “Why?” Sasuke growled, sounding more like Naruto for a moment than himself.

The Elders stirred and gave the three of them dour looks, but Tsunade’s mouth just quirked. “Take it easy, we’re not giving Sakura up to them or anything.”

Relief flooded through her, but Sakura couldn’t help asking, “Why not? If it’s required for the village to save face…” The Elders were giving her slightly more approving looks, now.

“Orochimaru was our criminal,” Tsunade declared firmly. “Our claim on his life had priority. So.” She beckoned. “Sakura, come stand here beside me and look as calm as possible. You two,” she pointed to the boys, “stand at the door and make like guards and keep your mouths shut.”

Only a few moments after everyone sorted themselves out, a small bell by the wall rang. “Here they come,” Tsunade murmured, straightening and folding her hands on the desk before her.

The Daimyou that Shizune escorted in was accompanied by two shinobi of Sound, and Sakura had to bite her lip to keep from twitching when she recognized them. One of them was Tomita, and the look of betrayal he gave her before fixing his gaze firmly on the wall twisted her heart. There was no other way, she wanted to explain. I never wanted to hurt any of you.

But she couldn’t say that here and now. Might not ever be able to say it. So she took a breath and fixed her eyes in turn on Naruto and Sasuke. She was deeply grateful to Tsunade-sama’s foresight for putting them there, the reminder of why it had needed to be done in the first place.

The Daimyou barely let Tsunade get her greeting out before he interrupted. “Hokage! You have sent shinobi of the Leaf to attack my country and kill the leader of my hidden village! What do you have to say for yourself, in face of this?”

Tsunade raised her brows, and suddenly it wasn’t at all hard to believe that she was older than the man in front of her. “I sent my shinobi to execute a criminal of our own village. I regret any inconvenience this may have caused you, but if you harbor such creatures I’m afraid you must be prepared for a certain amount of inconvenience.” As the Daimyou drew breath to respond, she held out a hand to Shizune, who placed a folder in it. “For example,” Tsunade cut over his first syllable, “in searching Orochimaru’s bases for any of our citizens he may have taken, we discovered quite a few of your citizens. Some we released before they could be harmed, but some, I regret to say, had already fallen prey to Orochimaru’s experiments.” She laid out three large, glossy photos on her desk and pushed them across to the Daimyou with delicate fingertips, as if she didn’t want to touch them too much. Sakura could guess what was in them, and didn’t blame her.

The Daimyou, after one look, turned pale and pressed his sleeve over his mouth.

“Perhaps,” Tsunade said softly, “you were not entirely aware of Orochimaru’s propensities for this kind of thing.”

“I… no, I never…” the Daimyou stammered, horrified eyes locked on the images. “Those were really…?”

“Considering that he did not limit himself to missing-nin but captured shinobi in good standing from other villages, as well,” Tsunade noted coolly, “I believe you are fortunate that we got there first, and with a tightly targeted assassination rather than a general attack that might have decimated your village as a whole.”

The Daimyou swallowed and rallied a bit. “Tightly targeted!” He pointed at Sakura, “That woman had her fingers in just about every Sound mission for half a year!”

Sakura felt she had the rhythm of this down by now. She tightened her clasped hands behind her and ventured to answer for herself. “My only target was Orochimaru, my lord. The other work I did, I did to the best of my ability and in good faith.” She cocked her head, actually starting to enjoy this. “Are you displeased that the capital’s mayor is no longer conspiring with the capital’s criminals? Or that the lord of Kouzen is no longer—”

“Enough, enough,” he cut her off hastily. Sakura inclined her head and continued to look politely inquiring. Beside her, Tsunade coughed into her fist, clearly fighting laughter.

The Daimyou harumphed and glowered. But after a few moments, the glare faded and he gave Sakura a more thoughtful look. “So,” he said slowly. “You say that you don’t wish to damage my country, or destabilize it. Wise of you, considering the border we share with Fire. But the fact remains, my hidden village is now missing a leader.”

“We do regret that necessity,” Tsunade-sama allowed, hands folded immovably again.

The Daimyou smiled. “Then you should have no objections to making a good-will gesture that will fix the problem.” He pointed to Sakura again. “Give me her, to be the new Master of Hidden Sound.”

Stunned silence held the room for a breath and Sakura had to bite her lip again to keep from squeaking with shock.

“An interesting proposal,” Tsunade said at last, slowly. “I take it you were, in fact, satisfied with Sakura’s work? Aside from her mission of execution, of course?”

The Daimyou flicked his fingers at the photos with distaste. “Even that would appear to have been in the country’s interest.”

Tsunade looked up at Sakura and said quietly, “I won’t make it an order. This is too heavy a job for anyone but a volunteer; I should know. But if you wish to accept it, then you may.”

A dozen thoughts spun through Sakura’s mind: her pleasure at the respect of the Sound-nin, the betrayal in Tomita’s eyes, the utter mess that the village and bases must be now, the potential for an alliance that would strengthen Leaf, the fact that she would have to stop thinking like that and shift her allegiance…

Her eyes fell on Naruto and Sasuke, and the spinning stopped.

She took a breath and met the Daimyou’s gaze. “I’m sorry, my lord. I don’t believe I could serve Sound with my whole heart.” Logic, lagging behind today, finally kicked in and she added, “I’m not at all sure it would serve you best to have two Masters in a row come from the Fire Country, either. It would set a bad precedent, and I fear the shinobi of Sound would always have to doubt my true allegiance. Especially after their experiences with Orochimaru.” She lifted one hand, palm up. “May I suggest, instead, appointing Naridasu Katsuhito? He is the most professional of Sound’s jounin, and I believe he would do well for the village.” He was certainly the one who had seemed to be hiding the most distaste for Orochimaru’s ‘research’. Since the Daimyou was looking disgruntled, she offered, “If you do wish to permit an alliance between Sound and Leaf, I would be entirely glad to aid in training your chuunin and genin further. I’m sure any of our trainers would be. That was…” she couldn’t help glancing at Tomita, “that was my pleasure.”

The Daimyou snorted, but the corner of his mouth quirked up. “You bargain well, girl, I’ll say that. Very well. I’ll consider Naridasu, and I’ll hold Leaf to that offer of aid.” If he noticed Tomita stirring beside him, he ignored it in favor of fixing Tsunade-sama with a stern look. “Next time you have evidence that one of my people is engaged in criminal activity against my own country, bring it to me before you start mounting covert operations across my border.”

“If it is at all possible, of course,” Tsunade-sama murmured. Which was not, Sakura noted, a yes. From the way the Daimyou harumphed some more, she thought he’d noticed that too.

“Ninja!” He stood, shaking his traveling robes into order, and swept out without another word.

Sakura let her breath out as the door closed behind him and his attendants, and leaned on the edge of the desk. Her knees were shaking.

“You handled that very well,” Tsunade told her, clasping her shoulder for a moment. “Get your breath back and take your boys off before they both glare holes in me for even considering sending you away.”

Sakura laughed a little. “Yes, Tsunade-sama.” Another breath and she walked steadily enough across the room to where Sasuke and Naruto were indeed glaring a bit. “Hey, cut that out. I wouldn’t leave Konoha.” She smiled, and tugged on their sleeves. “I wouldn’t leave my team.”

“You’d better not.” Naruto was nearly pouting at her. Sasuke just hustled them both through the door and down the hall, as if he were afraid the Hokage would change her mind.

“I won’t, I won’t, I promise,” Sakura laughed for real, light-hearted. She could never leave this. Never.

She rocked to a stop as they emerged from the building, though. Tomita was waiting for her, leaning in the shadows of the great doors. “Tomita,” she said softly.

“Did you really mean it?” he asked, not looking up from his crossed arms. “That you liked the work you did with us?”

Sakura took a slow breath, remembering the things she’d found and spoken during her debriefing last week, feeling the silent support of Naruto and Sasuke close beside her. “I meant it. Orochimaru was a menace, to my people and yours both, but Sound itself, the village and not his headquarters… you’re good shinobi. If I really had been unaffiliated, I’d have been glad to stay.” It was far more tangled than that, but those were the only parts she was going to explain to an outsider, even a maybe-ally. There was one more thing, though, she could give him. “I took that mission because Orochimaru threatened what was precious to me. If I had stayed,” she said quietly, out of the surety in her heart, “I would have killed him for Sound’s sake, in the end.”

Finally, he looked up at her, and the earlier betrayal had become only the shadows in any shinobi’s eyes. “I believe you.” He straightened up and turned to go, and hesitated. Finally, with a quick breath, he spun back to face her and saluted her, fist to his heart, sharp and precise as he had that day on the border. “For that truth.” And then he was gone in a swirl of smoke.

And Sakura turned and reached out blindly for her teammates, blinking back the wetness in her eyes as their arms wrapped around her.

“Hey, it doesn’t matter what another village thinks about you, right?” Naruto asked, anxiously. “I mean, since you know we care about you.”

“I’m just glad,” she said, husky. “I know it was the right thing to do. I know I did well for them whenever I could. I just… it’s good to know he believes me.”

“You have an end to it, now,” Sasuke said, quietly.

“Yes.” Sakura looked up, feeling the words match the shape of the world around her. “Yes, that’s it. An end. Not stopping, but… an end.”

Sasuke nodded, silent.

“Hey.” Naruto pulled Sasuke tighter against them. “Quit worrying. We’ll get an end for you, too.”

Sasuke looked aside at that, color rising just a shade on his cheekbones. Sakura and Naruto smiled at each other, pleased and complicit. “So, hey.” She nudged them both. “I think we deserve a treat. How about Dangoya for tea?”

Naruto perked up. “And then we can do Ichiraku Ramen for dinner!”

“This,” Sakura said trenchantly, “is why my mother has hysterics every time I talk about moving out; because she’s afraid I’ll start eating like you.”

“Your mother,” Sasuke observed with cutting accuracy, “is afraid you’ll live like any other shinobi and not bother getting married, and then she won’t get to orchestrate a grand wedding reception.”

“Yeah,” Sakura sighed. “That too. Okay, let’s do ramen, so she can worry about that instead.”

Not stopping, she thought as they made their way down the steps, never stopping. But finding the ends to their life threads. That was a good way to live.

The three of them could do that, together.


A week and a bit after their visit from the Sound Daimyou Tsunade sat at her regular, human-sized desk and folded her hands against her mouth, frowning into the air. “Another one.”

“Nii, who holds the Two-tails. The more stable of Cloud’s two hosts,” Asuma confirmed. “It’s all over Cloud; the whole village was in an uproar when we got there. For a while I wasn’t sure they’d let us leave again, diplomatic mission or not.”

“What does Akatsuki think they’re doing?” she demanded, aggravated, raking a hand through her hair. “They’ve been mercenaries for two generations! And after this they’ll never get another job from any of the great villages!”

“Could they be trying to become a village themselves?” Nara Shikaku suggested from where he leaned a hip against her windowsill. “Gain enough power to settle somewhere and hold it against their enemies?”

“That’s looking like all of us, at this rate,” Asuma noted dryly, teeth clicking on his senbon.

“If they have all of the tailed beasts under some form of control, they might yet stand against us all,” Shikaku murmured.

Silence followed that extremely unwelcome thought.

“All of them.” Tsunade tried to imagine it. “How could they possibly control all of them, though? Even if Itachi can control one host, I can’t imagine any form of the Sharingan that would allow him to control more than one. Maybe they just want us not to have them.”

Asuma glanced at Shikaku. “Do we have any agents in Akatsuki at all?”

“Not for about ten years, now, according to Morino and the ANBU Commander.” Shikaku didn’t look happy. “That was just about the time Itachi joined them; he’d have known who the agents were.”

“He having been ANBU. Of course.” Tsunade sighed. “We’ll try again. I imagine Cloud and Rock will be too. Hopefully one of us will get someone in and find out what the hell Akatsuki thinks they’re doing.”

Before they found out the hard way, she hoped.

"All right, then." She rolled up onto her feet, and beckoned Shikaku after her. "Thanks, Asuma. I’m glad to know about this before this month’s meeting."

She strode down the halls of the administrative building, turning over one possibility after another in her thoughts, and none of them made any kind of sense. Akatsuki couldn’t possibly have the hosts they’d taken so far under control; they must have killed them and be hoping to do whatever it was they were doing before the beasts could revive. She looked up as Shizune fell in beside her, handing over a folder, and smiled a little; this was a much more cheerful thing to think about. "You got it all in order?"

Shizune nodded brisk confirmation. "All three of them have fulfilled the usual requirements. This should be easy."

"Mm." In Tsunade’s experience so far, nothing was ever easy with her Council. But it should be simple anyway.

Shikaku stepped ahead of them to get the door to the meeting room where the monthly Council met and Tsunade took a breath and swept through, head high. A fast glance around the green-draped room showed the ANBU Commander and the three Elders all present, and she nodded to them. "Let’s get started, ladies and gentlemen."

She listened with half an ear as Shizune reported on the arrangements for this season’s chuunin exam in Hidden Valley, and Shikaku listed the jounin who had volunteered for the good-will mission to Sound. It was a shame they couldn’t really send Sakura herself back, but her teammates would never let her go without them and Tsunade had bigger fish to fry with those three, right now.

"We should definitely send Yamanaka Inoichi," Utatane said, folding her thin fingers on the solid, old table. "He has experience in the Interrogation unit. He’ll be able to find out how much threat Sound still is to us."

"Inoichi is certainly just the person to lead the mission," Tsunade agreed, knowing there was an edge in her voice and unable to help it. Unsure she even wanted to help it. "He has an even temper and a diplomat’s manners, which is just what a good-will mission needs."

Mitokado snorted, and Tsuna reminded herself yet again that she couldn’t strangle her own first councilors just because they were a couple of war-crazy old goats. Shame, that. "If calm is what you want on that mission, you should send Aburame Shibi too," the old man suggested, sarcasm clanging in every word.

Tsunade bared her teeth at him. "An excellent suggestion. His self-possession will be very valuable, and I’m sure a little quiet would be appreciated by everyone." Shizune coughed meaningfully behind her and Tsunade made herself sit back. She knew she shouldn’t let these two get to her, but it had been a very long time indeed since anyone dared treat her like some raw graduate.

Danzou stirred. "If two jounin are going on this mission, that will stretch the village a little thin. Especially considering the recent Akatsuki incursions among the great nations."

Tsunade picked up the folder she’d dropped on the table, wondering one more time exactly what contacts Danzou still had among Intelligence that he always knew about the classified reports. "A very good point. Fortunately, we have three chuunin who have been nominated for promotion this quarter." She slid the topsheets across the table to the Elders and the ANBU Commander and waited.

"Completely unacceptable!" Mitokado exclaimed.

"All three of them have been properly nominated by jounin who were not their field-teacher," Shikaku pointed out a bit dryly. "All three of them have displayed mastery of high level techniques in at least two elements and completed the minimum number of B-rank and above missions."

"Haruno-kun is considered, by all those who know of her recent mission, to have displayed unusually good judgment under high-stress conditions," the ANBU Commander added quietly, hands tented under his cat mask.

"Haruno, certainly, but you can’t possibly promote Uzumaki." Mitokado dropped the topsheet with an air of finality. "The kind of missions a jounin goes on are far too great a risk." He frowned and added, "And he’s only displayed mastery of one element, hasn’t he?"

"Wind, yes." Tsunade had her hands folded so tight her knuckles were white. "And yang chakra. The Nine-tails’ chakra, to be precise."

"That cannot possibly count toward the promotion requirements," Mitokado nearly sputtered.

"What’s your problem with Naruto?" Tsunade asked bluntly. "You certainly wouldn’t try to tell me that my yin mastery doesn’t count." Not if the old goat wanted to live to see sundown, anyway.

"He’s the village’s Sacrifice! His training with you has kept him in the village, and that’s as it should be. The idea of sending him out like any other jounin is preposterous."

And if he were formally promoted, Tsunade reflected grimly, there would be a lot of pressure to do just that. "Sacrifice" or not. Which was the idea. "So you want me to withhold the rank that he’s earned from him? Set him apart even more? Keep alienating him from the village we all hope he’ll protect?"

"Tsunade," Utatane broke in. "It’s not just that. In time, Uzumaki may demonstrate the ability to take on jounin level missions, but right now you can’t deny that he’s still very immature."

"And how will he gain maturity without experience?" Tsunade argued.

"Vital as this question is," Danzou murmured from where he’d been sitting quiet and still, "I believe the nomination of Uchiha Sasuke is even more problematic. An immature shinobi may gain experience, if you are willing to take such a risk, but will an unstable one become any more stable?"

"Both his teachers attest that Sasuke has indeed become more stable over the last two years," Shikaku answered calmly before Tsunade could get her teeth unlocked to tell Danzou exactly what she thought of his argument.

"Stable enough, though?" Danzou shook his head as if sadly. "I have no objection to Haruno, of course, but Uzumaki and Uchiha… no. They need more time. Surely there’s no need to rush them into promotion and possibly unsettle their development as shinobi."

Both Mitokado and Utatane settled back and nodded firmly in agreement, and Tsunade breathed deeply to keep from screaming with frustration. Just as any jounin could nominate a chuunin for promotion, enough of the Council could block the nomination. With all three of her Elders standing firm, they were deadlocked and she couldn’t very well call in the noble clans on a promotion question; that would open the door to all sorts of accusations of favoritism and factionalism. "Very well," she said through her teeth. "Shikaku. Inform Haruno of her promotion. Shizune, clear some time in my schedule tomorrow; Naruto and Sasuke deserve an explanation. And an assurance that their Hokage does not doubt them."

And on that note, the meeting broke up. Tsunade went to get some stomach soothing tea from Shizune’s stock and wondered if it would be too extremely disrespectful to pray at the Senju’s Touki shrine for her Elders to die peacefully in their sleep, someday very soon.


The next day, though, it wasn’t just Naruto and Sasuke who came to her office at the appointed hour. Sakura was with them too. In fact, she was the one who actually marched up to Tsunade’s desk while Sasuke and Naruto waited by the door. She threw her promotion letter down and crossed her arms.

"Is it true that Naruto and Sasuke were supposed to be promoted and were blocked?" she demanded, nearly glowering.

Tsunade pursed her lips and leaned back in her chair. Apparently Danzou wasn’t the only one who could take advantage of the Intelligence grapevine. "I’m afraid so," she admitted. "I have every faith in them, as do the field commanders, but a majority of the council has to approve jounin promotions."

Sakura’s eyes narrowed and Tsunade would be willing to bet the girl had understood exactly who was left in opposition to her partners, if the Hokage and the field commanders had no qualms. More significantly, given Tsunade’s win/loss record, she thought Shizune would be willing to bet, too. "I see. Well." She snapped her hands together in the Tiger and spat pointedly at the letter, which went up in flames. "You can tell them that they can take my promotion, fold it in corners, and stick it up their asses! I’ll advance with my team or not at all!" With that she whirled and strode out of the room leaving a small pile of char on top of Tsunade’s desk. Naruto, grinning all over his face, swaggered out on her heels. Sasuke paused to give Tsunade a brief bow and a definite smirk before following.

When Shizune came in five minutes later, Tsunade was still laughing. "Tsunade-sama?" she asked, cautiously.

Tsunade wiped her eyes as she caught her breath again. "That girl is going to be a first councilor herself one day, you know she will." She dissolved in chuckles again. "Naruto will change Konoha when he’s Hokage, all right! I don’t see how he could help it with those two beside him!"

A/N: I’m positing some differences in vocabulary in how people refer to the tailed beast hosts, here. I’ve translated jinchuuriki as "Sacrifice". But whenever someone refers to them as "hosts", that’s yadonushi, which is a considerably less dire and freighted word. I really think that friends and (sane) family would be more likely to use something like that than jinchuuriki.

As for the Council I’m constructing here, we don’t even meet Danzou until part two, but he sits with the group deciding who gets to be the new Hokage; clearly Kishimoto decided he was going to be an important part of the village’s governance. This begs the question of why we never saw anyone but Utatane and Mitokado taking part in governance decisions in the first half, and why we keep seeing far larger groups advising the other Kage. To reconcile all this, I invented the office of "first councilors" to serve as the Hokage’s immediate advisers and widened the Hokage’s Council to include the heads of the noble clans and the field commanders. I posit that there’s actually a four-way balance of power (Hokage, Elders, clan heads, field commanders) and that what counts as a majority varies depending on how the "sides" are divided up on any given issue.

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Eight

“Once more,” Orochimaru told them.

Sakura nodded and wove her hands through the six seals for activation. She rocked on her toes as the interlocking seals spread over her back and shoulders roared to life with wild power that flooded her whole body. This time, at least, she was expecting the jumble of elemental “tastes” in it and they didn’t dizzy her. She rode the upsurge, feeling her seal like a typhoon wind at her back. But this wind blew through her, poured out of her hands and feet, driving them against the floor and walls of the stone arena as she tumbled and flew, evading every one of the blades Kabuto threw. Her hands flickered through the seals for the Violent Wave, faster than she could have even seen before, and water crashed down where he’d been.

Sakura spun on her toes, tracking him, holding the inrush of energy with a light hand, balancing it against the part of her that still tasted of her own spirit. This was like playing a game of shoji against Shikamaru and playing the koto at the same time. She could do it, though. She could do it.

She saw Kabuto gathering himself for another attack, caught the faint haze at the corner of her eye that often showed up when someone laid illusion on her, and leapt just as a wire trap snapped down. “Kai!” The dispelling swept the arena, blowing away the seeming of rock Kabuto had hidden himself behind, and she touched down, braced a foot, and drove herself towards him like the wind.

The hint of something coming was barely a crinkle down her nerves, barely a suspicion, but in this state it was enough. She turned in mid-air, arms crossed and guarded by her kunai, and Orochimaru’s snake lashing toward her back got a knife in the mouth instead. The force of the attack drove her back against the stone wall, bruisingly, but she got her feet under her in time and her body held, coiled, absorbed the force. Hidden for that one still moment, she exchanged herself with blinding speed for a loose stone and drove her knife toward Orochimaru’s unguarded back.

Kabuto caught it on his glove-guard, just short.

“Good,” Orochimaru purred, eyes alight, and Sakura knew her own were glittering back at him. She could feel the air on her bared teeth. She loved this, that he would expect her, prefer her, to attack him from behind, to test him exactly the way he tested her.

It took a moment to draw herself back and disengage from Kaubto, and a longer one to make herself fold her hands into the Horse and send her seal to sleep once more.

“Very good,” Orochimaru approved as Kabuto straightened and Sakura sagged against the wall behind her, wobbly with the sudden release of that pressure on her own chakra. “Because of its construction, you will always require hand seals to activate this, but that seems a minor drawback all things considered. I think we may call this operation a success.” He folded his arms, smugly pleased.

Sakura nodded. “It doesn’t give me any skill I don’t already have,” she reported wearily, “and the effort of controlling the nature energy is very wearing. My absolute endurance is still the upper limit on this; it’s hard to feel my strength depleting directly, too, I have to pay attention to the stability of the balance I’m holding. But while I can hold out, everything is stronger, faster, clearer.”

“Your abilities are boosted at least threefold,” Kabuto confirmed, brushing himself off and straightening his tools back into their usual impeccable array. “That was more than the final test subject achieved.”

Sakura hauled herself upright and stretched; the release took some getting used to, but she thought she could see already how to balance her new strength, its duration, and the weakness after it in her strategy.

“So?” Orochimaru cocked his head at her. “Are you satisfied?”

Sakura straightened her shoulders and nodded. “I am. Have you decided where you want me to show myself, to draw Naruto and Sasuke in?”

“Hmm.” He tapped a finger against his lips. “It should be something showy, of course.” He smiled slowly. “I’d thought to send you against one of Akatsuki. Kabuto might enjoy the chance to kill his old master, and Sasori’s grudge has become wearing.”

Sakura gave him a skeptical look. “And how were you planning to get one of them alone? Every mission of theirs we’ve spied on was a pair.” And even with the seal she wasn’t about to take on two of Akatsuki, not with only Kabuto to back her up.

“Unfortunately, yes. They’re getting more consistent about that. A shame.” Orochimaru waved it off. “Well, then. Two renegades from Cloud seem to have crossed through Hot Springs Country to our eastern border and be harassing our border post. At least one of them is jounin; Karajin Ryouta, if I’m not mistaken. Vanquishing them should be a good debut for you.”

Sakura snorted, amused by this phrasing of it. “I’ll want another week or two to train, if I’m taking a jounin plus helpers. But that should do.”

“Excellent. I’ll have a letter sent to the Daimyou, then, he’s been getting really quite tedious about the matter.” Orochimaru swept out the door, leaving Sakura mouthing “tedious?” at his back with raised brows.

“Orochimaru-sama does like to apply all his attention to his researches,” Kabuto murmured, but Sakura thought she could hear a thread of laughter under his bland respect.

“He should pay better attention to politics, or else get someone who can,” she said firmly. “Or even he won’t stay ‘Otokage’ long.”

“Well, perhaps that will be you, Sakura-san.” While she was processing the combination of pleasure and wariness that answered his suggestion, his recognition, he added, “You know, you might be able to activate your seal without the hand seals.”

(What agenda of his will that serve?)

(useful for when I turn on them)

Sakura crossed her arms and leaned back against the stone wall, eyeing him curiously, not shaking her head like she wanted to a little from the echoing under-persona thoughts. “In time, I suppose. I know a technique one is very familiar with can be formed without seals eventually.”

Kabuto smiled. “Ah, but even before that, if your control is fine enough, you can form the seals in your spirit without using your hands.”

Sakura whistled softly. “Seriously, no wonder you make such a good spy.” He laughed.

“Indeed.”

Did Kabuto think her loyal enough to Orochimaru, now, that this would serve and not harm his master? Or was this another step in Kabuto’s own game? Always that question, with him.

Well, there was no way to know but to play it out.

“So I need to form the seals without actually forming them?” Sakura frowned, thoughtful. “That… makes sense, actually. I suppose familiarity couldn’t make the hand motions unnecessary, otherwise. I hadn’t quite thought that out before.”

“All you’ve ever needed is a little pointer here and there,” Kabuto murmured.

“I’ll do my best to justify your confidence,” she returned, meeting his eyes. They gleamed.

“I’m sure you will, Sakura-san.”


The shinobi at the eastern border post were definitely glad to see her.

“The second one isn’t jounin rank, I don’t think,” Tomita, the chuunin in charge of the post, reported to her, “but he’s still strong, especially with illusions. Two caravans have been plundered because we just couldn’t find them.”

“That should make things interesting,” Sakura murmured, turning over possibilities in her head. “I understand that Karajin is a taijutsu specialist?” That was a strong team, if they cooperated at all. She had to assume they did.

“Yes, ma’am.”

There were advantages, Sakura reflected with some amusement, to Orochimaru’s habit of giving her a new team every month or so. Many of the genin and chuunin of Sound knew her or knew of her from a partner.

“…know about her?” one of the post’s two genin was whispering to the other, behind her, in fact. “They call her Orochimaru-sama’s left hand!”

The rage and thirst for strength in her heart drank that in and purred.

“All right,” she said at last. “We need to take out Karajin’s partner first. How long can you keep Karajin busy for, while I stalk the illusionist?”

Tomita’s mouth twisted. “Five minutes, at the most.”

“I’ll organize some traps and maneuvers for you to use against him, then. That should be long enough.” She pulled a fresh sheet of paper across his desk and started sketching the ground in front of the border crossing. “Once I’ve dealt with the partner, fall back to here.”

“That far?” Tomita stared at her. “Haruno-san… we won’t be able to support you at all from that far back.”

She smiled tightly. “Don’t worry about that.”

She could tell he wanted to argue, but in the end he kept his mouth shut and only offered a few insights on the terrain around the post and the border, and showed her to her room himself.

The next caravan came two days later, not coincidentally one from Fire Country, returning from Lightning Country and still trailing its Leaf escort. Since Hot Springs had dissolved their village, no one trusted local escort across that land. And even traveling through a country whose village one’s own village was at odds with was better than a country where no one was keeping the bandits in check.

Sakura perched on the gate pillars that marked the border, observing the caravan as it approached. She’d wagered with herself on just how Karajin’s partner was disguising himself or the target caravans. He almost had to be hiding in the wagons themselves; the longer someone had to weave an illusion, after all, the more strongly it took and the less chance of anyone pulling free of it.

Which was why Sakura crouched with her eyes closed as the caravan passed under her, hands in the Snake, watching her own chakra. The one skill that using her new seal had sharpened fastest was sensing the flows and small differences in her own chakra, and, sure enough, she felt the brush of another influence against her as her ears told her the third wagon passed under the pillars. She traced the touch back, narrowing down the location of its source slowly, feeling like she was squinting to pick out details at dusk, and wishing she had Sasuke’s eyes present to do this faster.

(Don’t think about that.)

But there. There it was, the source of the subtle disturbance, which she was sure she wouldn’t see if she opened her eyes. Not without performing a dispelling, and that would make her far too obvious. Instead she waited, concentrating, following the trace she’d found.

The moment the caravan passed all the way into Sound, the ground under the front wagon exploded. Now, Sakura thought fiercely at Tomita and his team. And, indeed, she heard them coming, heard them ordering Karajin to halt, heard the Cloud-nin’s laugh.

Felt the flare of chakra from her target, brushing over her own as he reached out to confuse their senses.

Now. She dropped down from the pillar without opening her eyes, feeling the tingle of exhilaration and terror as the world whirled around her in un-solid flashes of chakra. She suddenly had far more respect for the discipline the Hyuuga must exercise to fight like this. She had to open her eyes at the last moment, to land safely, but she had burned the location of her target into her memory and came out of her landing crouch with an unhesitating thrust at, apparently, thin air.

The world wavered just faintly, and there was a shinobi on the end of her knife, bleeding and glaring at her. Sakura bared her teeth and whirled, heel smashing into his temple.

Few genjutsu specialists trained to fight without the aid of their illusions. Their loss.

“Get the caravan under cover!” she ordered as she sprang down from the wagon and bounded toward the whirl of combat where Karajin was throwing Tomita and the genin, now including one from Leaf as well, around with careless ease. She set her feet at the edge of the fight, wove her hands through the activation of her seal, and shouted, hoarse with the rush of strength, “Get back!”

The battered Sound ninja sprang away from Karajin, Tomita hauling the Leaf-nin with them as she’d directed him to, and Sakura launched herself forward.

It felt like the world should blur with the speed of her strike, his guard, her rebound, the whirl of blows before they broke apart. But everything was clear, almost etched in her vision: Karajin’s surprise, the narrowing of his eyes, the way he set his center to take her on seriously.

Not that she was such a fool as to face a taijutsu specialist head-on. She feinted another rush only to veer aside, hands flashing, and slapped her hand down to initiate the Rock Pillar Prison. While Karajin was busy breaking the pillars, she sank herself into the power of her mixed chakra and wove an illusion. Sight, sound, scent, touch, all of them told Karajin that she was not where she was—now ten degrees to the right, now fourteen to the left, always shifting. Exaltation surged through her as she completed the technique; this was more powerful, more complete, than anything she’d ever have been able to do before. And once the illusion closed around him it was easy, so easy, to slide past his misaimed strike and drive her knuckles into his throat. Cartilage crunched under her hand, and his eyes snapped to focus on her for one breathless moment before he attempted to inhale and passed out.

Sakura stood over him for one moment, savoring her victory. But she could feel her endurance starting to wane, and folded her hands through the release of her seal before it got any worse. She’d timed it right, this time, she thought, taking deep slow breaths as the world-energy flowed past without touching her again. This time she didn’t fall down.

So she was on her feet and only a little worn-looking when the caravaners crept out of hiding, starting to chatter with relief. Tomita and his genin were approaching from the other side, the Leaf-nin trailing behind them.

“Um, shinobi-san,” the caravan master started hesitantly, bobbing a bow to her, “the body…”

“Yes.” Sakura waved a hand at one of the Sound genin who trotted over to haul the illusionist’s body out of the wagon. “We’ll take care of them.” Orochimaru would want both, no doubt. She mustered a smile for the caravan master. “I’m sorry you were troubled by this. I think I can assure you the rest of your route is safe, though.” She nodded at the Leaf genin, who nodded warily back.

Tomita’s genin had clearly spent some of the fight filling his ears with tales of her—also as she’d directed. The man was no one she knew personally, which would make things easier. He’d have no personal stake in trying to persuade her back to Konoha this moment, and had just had a vivid demonstration of why he didn’t want to try anything other than persuasion. She could almost see the moment he reached the decision to let well enough alone and just report when he got home.

Tomita saluted her, crisp and correct. “Thank you, Haruno-san!”

His tone startled her. It took her a moment to realize that this wasn’t just putting on a good face for outsiders. Everything, from the straightness of his spine to the glow in his eyes, said that this was real.

Real respect.

The tautness of her old bitterness eased another notch even as her thoughts jangled against each other.

(Useful for keeping my cover in the end-game.)

(it’s not right, not here…)


“That will do very nicely,” Orochimaru said, rather distractedly as he prodded at Karajin’s body with a chakra probe and scribbled another note. He finally looked up and cocked his head at Sakura, where she leaned against the lab wall. “And what will you do, once I have Sasuke and perhaps Uzumaki as well in my hands, and our bargain is ended?”

Sakura hesitated. “I’ve… been thinking about that.”

His smile was knowing. “Hmm?”

“I haven’t done badly out of my time here,” she admitted. “Even aside from the seal. Hidden Sound respects me.” And it was very sweet, that respect, that deference, the speed with which any Sound-nin under her command obeyed her. It tasted sweet to every part of her, and the aftertaste of wrongness in her heart was easy enough to hide.

“So?” he murmured. “Would you swear yourself to Sound, after all? To me?”

Sakura returned his gaze for a long moment and finally nodded. She stood away from the wall and touched her fist to her heart in salute, straight-backed and on her feet. “I offer myself as a shinobi of Sound, and my life into the hands of Sound’s Master.”

A flash of annoyance broke through the lurking amusement in his eyes at the title she used, but Sakura just looked back blandly. She wasn’t calling the village leader for a country the size of Fire’s peninsula Kage. In the end, Orochimaru’s lips quirked, acknowledging the fact. “I accept you as a shinobi of Otogakure,” he murmured. “Your life will not be spent lightly.”

Kabuto looked up from across the room, where he was working on the illusionist’s body, with a cheerful smile. “I’m so glad you chose to stay, Sakura-san. Welcome!”

That open, friendly smile sent a chill down her spine that was harder to hide than her gut’s protest over swearing to Sound. “Thank you, Kabuto-senpai,” she answered softly, wondering yet again what his game was and what her place was in it.

(We’ll all know soon.)

(soon)

She wondered how Naruto and Sasuke would react to the news that should be reaching Konoha in just another week or two.


“She’s what?!”

Sasuke stood very still as Naruto surged to the edge of the Hokage’s desk, feeling ice settling in his stomach. “Are you telling us,” he said, very evenly, “that Sakura has been with Orochimaru these last eight months? That was the undercover mission she left on?”

“Yes,” Tsunade answered, sober.

“Are you all crazy?!” Naruto howled, and Sasuke was glad because that was just what he wanted to say and Naruto could say it louder.

“She volunteered and planned the infiltration herself,” Tsunade snapped. “She was working with Intelligence; she knew just how much pressure Orochimaru was putting on the village.”

To find me. She did it for me. The thoughts weighed down on Sasuke like lead, and pressed out the rough whisper, “Why?”

Kakashi finally stirred by the shelves he’d been leaning against since they got here, apparently reading. “Because her team means more to her than anything else, and she has the courage to act on that.”

“No one else could do the job as well,” Tsunade added as Naruto started to round on Kakashi, bristling. “Her cover… well. Anyone looking at it from the outside would find it very convincing.”

“What cover?” Naruto demanded, voice hard.

Tsunade looked back at him levelly. “The cover of a very skilled shinobi who nevertheless has very little power, teamed up with an acknowledged genius and the host who controls the chakra of the Nine-tails.”

Naruto flinched back, eyes wide. “But… but Sakura doesn’t…” He spun around to stare at Kakashi, openly appealing. “She doesn’t, does she?”

Kakashi reached out a long arm and whapped Naruto over the head with his book. “Idiot,” he pronounced. “Of course Sakura doesn’t resent you. Either of you. She loves you. But,” he added as Naruto visibly melted into a puddle of relief, “anyone who didn’t know you all, and know you well, would find it easy to believe she did. Especially someone as obsessed with power as Orochimaru.”

That made sense, even though Sasuke felt like his brain was frozen, his thoughts crystallized. Finally one thought made it through that felt important and he cleared this throat. “Why are you telling us this now?”

There was compassion in the Fifth’s eyes as she met his. “Because you two are part of the end of this. The bargain she struck, as her cover, was that Orochimaru would give her the power he once promised you; in return, she would bring you to him. We’ve just received a report that Sakura has surfaced, acting openly for Hidden Sound. For Orochimaru’s consumption, the story is that Naruto, hearing this, drags you off with him to reclaim your teammate. That’s what Orochimaru is counting on, and what Sakura has been preparing him to think all this time.”

“In reality of course,” Kakashi put in, propping an elbow on a shelf. “You’ll be the front of the extraction and execution team. The three of you together should be able to kill Orochimaru, and there will be a support team shadowing you to help get you out after, while our largest force strikes for his major bases as soon as his death is confirmed.”

Naruto was settling down as they listened to this. “All right, then,” he half-growled. “You should have told us sooner, but I guess this is okay.”

Sasuke listened to the whispers eight months and Orochimaru running round and round his head, and wasn’t so sure. “Is she… all right?” he finally asked, low. “Do we know?”

“We won’t know for sure until you get there,” Kakashi said quietly.

Naruto frowned again, ferociously, looking back and forth between Kakashi and Sasuke. “What’s that supposed to mean?”

Kakashi and Tsunade exchanged a long look and Kakashi stood. “Come on down to Intelligence, and we’ll get you briefed.”

Sakura was the only thought that came through the jumble in Sasuke’s head clearly. The rest was just a slow twisting in his heart, where the friendship he’d acknowledged and the tenderness he hadn’t quite put a hot, cutting edge on his fear. Sakura!


Orochimaru was deeply amused as he read over the message scroll. “They’re racketing through the south of the country like a charging boar through underbrush.”

“That’s Naruto,” Sakura muttered, arms crossed. “So, how are we doing this? Ambush?”

“Of sorts, of sorts. You and I and Kabuto will go to meet our impetuous young shinobi, I think. Quite openly. Kabuto can take the young Uchiha undamaged, I imagine. I wish to see what Uzumaki is made of.” He turned from his pacing through his shadowy main hall and captured her gaze, smooth and hypnotic as one of his snakes. “And will you be able to fight your former partner beside me? Sakura?”

Sakura looked back at him, silent for a moment. “You’re the one who gave me power. And…” she looked aside, “a place. A real one, fit for a real shinobi.” She lifted her chin. “It’s the place I chose. I’ll stand here.” It was all the truth, except the last part, and even that was true enough the way she meant it. She would stand here, because her duty demanded it.

(and strike from here)

“Excellent,” Orochimaru purred. “Let us prepare ourselves and be on our way, then.”

Sakura bowed her head and went to pack her gear.


All it had taken was one message, left in the rooms Naruto and Sasuke had reserved, to bring them here, to this clearing in the southern forests of Sound Country. Sakura stood just behind Orochimaru’s shoulder, controlling her breathing carefully. She couldn’t control the pounding of her heart, and only hoped that it seemed reasonable to the two men next to her.

“Sakura!” Naruto took a step toward her across the clearing, and halted as his eyes flickered up to her forehead protector and the device of Sound on it. They hadn’t expected that, then. (Good; it will help him react better.) “Sakura? What…?” He looked genuinely lost, and Sakura held hard to her persona, to eight months of practice. They made her voice convincingly hard when she answered.

“Sound gave me real work, and a real place. Should it be a surprise that I swore to them?”

“To that?” Naruto hollered, absolutely incensed, pointing at Orochimaru.

Sakura flicked a glance at her Master, gauging how soon he would move. “He understands me.” She looked back at them, cool, and caught Sasuke’s eye for just a sliver of an instant. His mouth tightened and Orochimaru made an interested sound.

“Hmm. Perhaps I left off courting you too early, Sasuke-kun?” He smiled slowly and opened a hand, palm up. “My offer is still good, as Sakura can tell you.”

Sakura didn’t miss the faint crook of his fingers in Kabuto’s direction, though, and she took one last breath for balance, courage, hope, and sank her mind into the concentration Kaubto had taught her, pressing her very soul into the forms to awaken her seal. Now. It had to be now. Dog. Monkey. Slowly, feeling her nerves creaking, Horse.

“I think I have power enough already,” she heard Sasuke say, distantly.

“Against Itachi?” Sasuke stiffened and Orochimaru chuckled. “Indeed, I could tell you a great deal about that man.”

Monkey. Serpent.

“Why?” Naruto challenged, suspicious. “You took Sakura away from us! What do you want with Sasuke?”

Orochimaru sighed. “Ah, I should have taken you three years ago. You didn’t question so much, then.”

Naruto’s eyes narrowed, starting to burn. “You don’t want anything good, then,” he growled, hands slamming together, and two Shadow Clones appeared, leaping to form a Rasengan.

Wait for it. Wait for it. Hold on. Sakura set her teeth, sweat starting along her hairline and trickling down her back as she held on to the shape of the Serpent in her soul. The next seal would be the last. She unfocused her eyes, watching all of them, watching Kabuto especially.

Orochimaru eyed Naruto with interest. “Mmm. That’s nothing I haven’t already learned from that buffoon, but I suppose there might be more to you. We shall see.”

Sasuke’s eyes were red, piercing and watchful. Naruto was growling as he crouched to drive the Rasengan forward. Kabuto was relaxed and smiling. Orochimaru laughed and crooked a forefinger at her, not looking around as Naruto started to move. “Sakura."

Horse.

Power roared through her like a river bursting a dam and Sakura drove a spear hand hardened with chakra, with all the strength and speed the seal could give her, straight through Orochimaru’s spine and out his chest, blood flooding hot around her arm.

Naruto shouted, Sasuke vanished, she caught Kaubto’s hands lifting in the corner of her eye. She punched the base of Orochimaru’s skull, spinning around as his body jolted off her hand, using every bit of speed she had to form a Fire Wall to meet Kaubto…

Who leapt back.

They all froze, the Rasengan blowing into nothing as Naruto plowed to a stop. Sakura held the Wall just short of release, poised.

“Ah,” Orochimaru’s hoarse voice broke the stillness, and Sakura’s eyes widened with tangled horror and frustration and guilt. “I see I didn’t quite have you long enough. I salute your cunning, little kunoichi. I thought I had you when you swore to me.”

Not before that? But Sakura pushed the thought down, pushed all her thoughts down under the needs of this moment, and snapped, “Naruto. Make sure he dies. Sasuke, Kabuto.”

“Already there,” Sasuke’s voice came from the trees above Kabuto, and a rush of gratitude that he remembered her strategy-shapes so well, and still trusted them, shook her.

“Naruto,” Sakura repeated, husky, when he didn’t move. She could hear the breath he let out.

“Yeah. Okay.” His voice was tight, but she knew he’d do what he had to. She knew it, down in the heart of her, where she was burning and aching.

Orochimaru’s laugh was wet and raspy. “I salute you, indeed. Sakura.”

Despite all the control she could muster, a shudder raked through her and one word wrenched out. “Yes.” She knew.

There was a faint, silken sound, and she gave thanks that medical ninja were thoroughly trained in giving mercy. The open glow of Naruto’s chakra washed past her and a burst of flame followed, actinic and scorching. “Done,” Naruto said, rough.

Kabuto, who hadn’t moved yet, eyes locked with Sakura’s, sighed. “Ahh. That was a waste, Sakura-san. There were years of use left in him.”

“My game had to conclude before yours,” she said, low. She was starting to feel the strain of balancing her seal’s chakra; how was this going to end?

“So I see.” He smiled and spread his hands. “Well, so it goes. But, you realize, this leaves you alone to face the greater threat.”

“Itachi?” Sasuke asked, voice as harsh as Naruto’s.

Kabuto laughed. “Oh, goodness no. Well, not in and of himself. No, no, Akatsuki. Orochimaru was one of them once, you know. He knew some of their plans.” He sighed, sounding sincerely rueful. “I don’t think I’d quite gotten all of what he knew. It really is a shame.” He shrugged as if to set it aside. “Well, you’re on your own against them, now, since I have no intention of standing in their way myself. Few of them would be of any interest to me; afterward… well, we’ll see.”

“You talk like you think you’ll be walking away free,” Sasuke observed.

Kabuto smiled into Sakura’s eyes, and she remembered that he’d been part of all those exercises to time her endurance under the seal. “You didn’t find the location of the last remote base, Sakura-san,” he said softly. “The one that holds most of the experimental subjects. The woman in charge won’t let them go, you know, even with his death.” An artful pause, and she could see exactly what was coming. “But I could free them.”

After a stretched moment, trying to weigh morality against morality, as her control pulled tighter and tighter, Sakura said, thinly, “All right.”

“Sakura!” Naruto stared at her. “He can’t possibly escape all three of us! Interrogation can get it out of him.”

Sakura shook her head, feeling time bleeding away, and with it her margin of survival. “It’s about to be just two of you and a casualty, and he knows it. He’ll keep his word on the deal. I think it’s the best we’ll get right now.”

“Acute as always, Sakura-san,” Kabuto murmured, and Sakura bared her teeth.

“If we ever meet again, I’ll get something better out of you.”

He gave her a genuine smile, dark and pleased, and bowed to her. "Afterward, then." And vanished.

Sakura let Fire Wall go, wove her hands through the release of her seal and sagged to her hands and knees, panting.

“Sakura!” It was Sasuke beside her, holding her shoulders. “Naruto, get the flare up to call the backup squad in!”

Fire burst again, far overhead, and Sakura hauled her head up to look at her teammates. Her… her friends. Yes. The ones she’d done this to protect, and that had been her desire, her free choice, her need. Even though eight months whispered that it could only have been misguided guilt or the need to prove herself, mustn’t it?

Naruto flung himself down beside them, eyes wide and worried. “Sakura, are you okay? What’s wrong?” Even as he spoke his hands were passing down the line of her spine, and he frowned deeply. “You’re completely drained, what did you do?”

“Seal,” she panted. “Nature energy. Hard to control.” And then she laughed and flung her arms, one still red with Orochimaru’s blood, around their shoulders. “Finally. It’s finally you… you came.” Her certainty that they always would pulled hard against her whispering knowledge that they only would because they understood nothing of her, pulled like scar tissue and she gasped with the inner pain. She freed her hands, swaying until they caught her shoulders again, and formed the first seal to undo the Heart In a Net technique, struggling to remember the second through the growing pain.

“Haruno!” Miuhara was suddenly beside her, dropping from the trees with a whole squad of Leaf-nin, and he grabbed her hands. “Wait, not yet!”

“Have to,” she gasped. “It’s pulling loose anyway!”

“Shit.” He stared at her in the babbling swirl of the squad splitting, some dashing on. After Kabuto, she thought fuzzily. Of course. “All right,” he said at last and grabbed for Naruto. “Uzumaki! You’re a healer. Listen up. She’s been under a neural realignment technique for the past eight months, and we have to release it now. You’ll have to stabilize her.”

“I don’t know how to do work that fine!” Naruto exclaimed, a little panicked, but he knelt beside her, hands reaching out anyway.

“That’s why you listen to me. Uchiha, hold on to her. Haruno. You understand this is going to be more work for you?”

“Need to re-key on my own?” she gritted through her teeth through the nasty, tearing ache. “Yeah. Just… leave me with them. Be okay.”

“I’m taking your word for it, and you’d damn well better be right. Release it now. Dog, Boar, Dog, Horse, Bird.” For a moment, breaking through the intensity of his orders, he grinned. “Go ahead and scream if you need to. This will hurt.”

Sakura formed the seals, one after another, almost mindless, focusing only on the shape of them. And as her hands folded into the Bird, something snapped loose inside her and lashed through her mind like fire.

She did scream.

When she could make the sounds around her make sense again, Miuhara was speaking low and quick to Naruto, talking him through one seal after another, and her hands were clenched bone-grindingly tight on Sasuke’s shoulders. Sasuke held her tight, one leg hooked over hers to keep her from thrashing out from under Naruto’s hands. At least she thought that was why. Her mind felt bruised.

“All right,” Miuhara said at last. “That’s as good as we can do for now.” He drew a long breath. “She says the two of you can help her re-establish her normal pattern of thought and response, so you’ll need to stay with her. I’ll get a few of the squad to escort you to a secure site.” He stood. “Anything you can do to remind her who she usually is, you do it, understand?”

Sasuke’s arms tightened around her. “We understand. Come on, help me get her upright,” he added over her head.

Sakura wobbled to her feet, an arm over each of their shoulders, looking around at the quiet bustle of the squad. “Feel like a dishrag,” she panted. “With a headache.”

“You’ve earned it, so just let us take you somewhere safe for a little, okay?” Naruto looked torn between scowling at her ferociously and giving her puppy-dog eyes. The alternation made her giggle.

“Kay.”

Three of the squad closed in around them and Sasuke said quietly, “Let’s go.”


By the time they reached the nearest town, Sakura had her breath back, though she still ached all over. She was very glad to duck in the window of the house their escort directed them to.

“Food first,” Naruto declared. “You drained yourself way too hard, and I want a look at that seal.”

“Bath first,” Sakura countered, trying not to look too hard at what still spattered her chest and arm.

Sasuke rolled his eyes, reassuringly normal. “You get food,” he told Naruto. “I’ll make sure she doesn’t drown before you get back.”

He seemed to take that seriously, too, helping her get undressed and insisting she sit down before he pulled off her sandals. “I’m not really injured,” she protested.

“I think you are, actually.” He touched the base of her skull, very lightly. “Up here. That Miuhara guy said you’d been under a technique that affects your mind and nerves, and you said it was pulling loose. Besides,” he set her sandals aside and tugged off his own shirt, “Kakashi-sensei said to do whatever we could for you, on the way home, and not to let you overextend yourself. He’s done this before, right?”

Sakura’s mouth pulled into a crooked smile. “Yeah. He probably makes a better senpai than Kabuto.” But thinking about that made her head hurt more, so she ignored Sasuke’s choking sound and concentrated on getting all her tools out of her pants so she could throw them in the wash.

Sasuke was quiet for a few breaths, but seemed willing to follow her lead. “Come on, the water’s hot now. I’ll get your back.”

They were both halfway through scrubbing down by the time Naruto got back with what looked like half a kitchen. “Hey, no fair!” he told Sasuke, who was indeed washing Sakura’s back at the moment, but he was grinning.

“You can get her hair,” Sasuke told him. “She hasn’t said so, but I think that headache’s still there.”

Sakura blushed. “Okay, okay, I probably did hurt something, but seriously—”

“You hush,” Naruto scolded her, and she blinked. He gave her a medic-scowl. “I can’t do much about healing the actual nerves yet, but I can sure take care of bruising and muscle damage. So eat this and quit arguing.”

Sakura took the steamed bun he put in her hand and ate, blinking back sudden tears at that rough, straightforward care while Naruto hopped from foot to foot getting out of his clothes.

She hadn’t cried in eight months.

Naruto’s fingers really did feel good, moving over her skull, draining away little bits of heat and pressure until it didn’t hurt when he worked in some shampoo. “Thanks,” she sighed, as she reached for the sprayer to rinse off. “That did help.”

“Eat some more,” he told her, and when she glanced over her shoulder he was blushing a little.

“Water’s ready,” Sasuke said from the other side of the room.

Sakura sighed with pleasure as they sank into the steaming tub and giggled when Naruto pointedly put a glass of cold water and a plate of dumplings beside her. “Tsunade-sama has been training you well.” She leaned back and asked, softly. “Tell me about it. Talk to me. About the village and everything.” She needed to remember.

“It’s really cool,” Naruto started, only a little hesitantly. “I kind of suck at the chemistry, so she finally gave up on antidotes and taught me how to cleanse blood with chakra techniques instead. I won’t be able to do Mystic Palms for another year, she says, but I think she’s hedging. I bet I can do it in another six months!”

“Your control isn’t good enough yet,” Sasuke observed, dampeningly, and Naruto glowered.

“So I’ll use Shadow Clones for that too!”

“I’ll look forward to hearing what the Fifth has to say about that.”

Sakura sipped her water and nibbled her dumplings and let herself float in the familiarity of their bickering, of Naruto’s boasting which wasn’t just boasts any more, of Sasuke’s dry, quiet humor. It warmed her, like the water did, deep inside. She could feel her heart finally relaxing.

And that was when she completely dissolved into tears.

Naruto and Sasuke left off their argument over whether Jiraiya was a more annoying teacher than Kakashi, and gathered in around her at once. Naruto just held her and made really kind of funny soothing noises while Sasuke rubbed her back, slow and quiet.

“I liked it,” she wrenched out past the sobs, past the unsteady ache deep inside. “I hated it, I hated him, but by the end I liked being there, I liked that he wanted me, he respected me, I hate this!”

“He was good at finding what you wanted and using it,” Sasuke murmured. “It isn’t your fault.”

“Yeah, look how long you went, and you still did everything you needed to,” Naruto put in, anxious. “I mean, he never corrupted you, not for real, and that had to be really, really hard! It’s okay.”

That made her cry some more, but she was laughing a little too. Naruto really was good at seeing to the heart. And Sasuke… Sasuke understood.

“Come on,” Sasuke said, gentler than she thought she’d ever heard him. “Let’s get out before we really do drown.”

They didn’t seem to want to let her out of arm’s reach, now, which made drying off a bit comical, but that was okay. She wanted to be close. When they spread out the futons and lay down, she was glad to be held again.

They’re my team. They love me, and I love them. It’s okay again. She pressed closer against Naruto and tugged shyly on Sasuke’s wrist, and made a contented sound when he slid up snugly against her back. It felt good, they felt solid and made her feel solid too, and, oh wow, Sasuke’s hands felt really good rubbing her shoulders. She sighed happily and it was the most natural thing in the world to lift her head and brush her lips against Naruto’s.

Naruto made a slightly startled sound, but he kissed her back, shy and soft.

“Sure you’re ready?” Sasuke asked against her shoulder, and she buried her head in Naruto’s chest and laughed, suddenly remembering their last year at the Academy, and the pedantic recommendations in their textbook for how to handle “intimacy within a field team”.

“Textbook,” she managed to gasp, and that set Naruto off too. Sasuke just snorted at both of them. When she’d recovered a little she leaned her head back against Sasuke’s shoulder and said, softly. “Thank you. Yeah. This is a good time, I think.”

“Mm. I think so too.” He slid his hands down her body and spread them across her stomach, and her breath caught at the little rush of heat between her legs. “Naruto?”

“Yeah,” Naruto answered, husky, and bent his head to nuzzle the arch of her neck.

It felt good, so good, to feel their hands on her, to feel their skin under her palms, to know she was wanted and they were hers and it was all going to be okay. All of their hands were calloused, from knives and wire, but Naruto’s were warm on her breasts and Sasuke’s fingers sliding carefully between her legs made her gasp. She tightened her arms around Naruto and pulled him down to kiss her, wet and open-mouthed, breath coming deeper as Sasuke made a satisfied sound and rubbed his fingers against her.

She freed her mouth at last to gasp, “I want…” and Sasuke left off mouthing her shoulder and said, husky, “Yeah, just let me…” His fingers slid back further and she moaned as two pressed into her. Sasuke just about purred and slid his fingers free, reaching under the curve of her rear this time to press three in. That stretched a bit, but it felt good too. Sakura wrapped her leg around Naruto’s hip and rocked against him, panting; well, so was he, and she liked the feel of his arms locked around her. She shivered when Sasuke nibbled on her ear and murmured, “Ready?”

“Very,” she said, fervently, and Sasuke reached forward, and she heard Naruto gasp as Sasuke guided him against her. When she looked up, Naruto’s eyes were so wide she had to smile at him and ask, a little teasing, “Ready?”

“Yeah,” Naruto whispered, and that made her feel warm all the way through. And then he pushed against her, biting his lip, and the solid feeling of him inside her made her press closer, breathless. “Oh.”

“Okay?” Sasuke asked, softly, hands kneading her lower back, stroking over her thighs, and she nodded. “Yeah. Mm, more.” Naruto gasped a quick laugh and pushed in, and she moaned openly; it felt good. So good, to have them both pressed up against her, all of them moving together. When Sasuke’s fingers slid between her folds again she shuddered with the tighter twist of pleasure. “Oh… oh yes.” Naruto was rocking against her faster, kissing her hot and open and breathless, and she kissed back, liking it when he moaned, jerking hard against her.

“Fuck,” Naruto muttered. “That was… um.”

Sasuke laughed. “Good thing there are two of us.” Naruto stuck out his tongue and Sakura laughed too, a little light-headed, and it really was funny as they fumbled around a little, and then Sasuke was sliding into her instead and oh that felt good. She arched in their arms, and smiled up at Naruto, and he grinned back, just a little mischievous. When he bent down to kiss her breasts, open-mouthed, hot and wet, she arched harder. “Ohh…” Someone’s fingers were rubbing her firmly, and Sasuke was thrusting deep into her, and it all made her body feel like it should be glowing, hotter and hotter.

She gasped when the heat in her flashed like fire and rushed through her veins, and Sasuke groaned abruptly against her shoulder. It felt so good, the solidness of him inside her, and she jerked her hips hard to get more of that.

Suddenly she was past the crest, and all the sensation was too much. She grabbed for, yes, it was Naruto’s wrist to still his fingers and buried her head against his shoulder, panting as Sasuke shuddered against her back. “Oh. Oh wow.” Finally, they were all still again, pressed up against each other.

“That was… really good,” Naruto murmured against her hair. “I mean, um. Thanks.”

Sakura giggled. “Thank you too. Both of you.” This was new. It wasn’t just the past; right here and now, her team cared for her and wanted her. And she loved them back. It settled into her mind, solid and soothing.

Now, now she could think about going home.

And We’ll Laugh About It

Sooner

The third time Naruto blew up his study room, trying to separate out the fox’s chakra from his own once he’d already expressed them together, Tsunade didn’t even yell. She just gave him a narrow look, hands planted on her hips, and called for Iruka-sensei.

Naruto kind of thought that was cheating.

Iruka-sensei, when he arrived, cast an experienced eye over the smoking splinters of Naruto’s work table and crossed his arms in that immovably teacher-y way of his and declared, “No sparring with Sasuke-kun until you finish this exercise. Without blowing anything up.”

Naruto stared at him in absolute betrayal. “That’s cheating!” He pointed at Iruka-sensei, outraged. “Tsunade-baachan, that’s cheating! I mean, that’s just mean!”

“Naruto!” Iruka-sensei drew himself up, and Naruto wilted a little. “Do you think bandits or enemy shinobi are going to wait until you’re not distracted? You need to learn control of the Nine-tails’ chakra, and you need to learn how to focus on your work. Even when you’re worrying.”

“But…” Naruto mumbled at his feet, “it’s Sakura-chan. I mean, what if something happens? How will we know?” Iruka-sensei stopped looming quite so much and reached out to rest a hand on his head.

“Sometimes we don’t know,” he said more gently, “and that’s a painful thing to live with. But that’s our job. That’s what we are, Naruto.”

Naruto crossed his arms tightly. He knew that. Of course he knew that. But he’d never had to do it before. Even when Sasuke had been gone, they’d know Jiraiya was with him. Wherever Sakura was, she was all by herself!

Tsunade-baachan finally pushed away from the wall where she’d been leaning and shook her head. “Go get something to eat, kid. And then you’re going to come back here and do this exercise right. And then,” he could totally hear the grin in her voice, “you can go out to play with Sasuke.”

He straightened up and glared at her. “We’re not kids.”

She was grinning all right. “Glad to hear it. So you’ll come back this afternoon and concentrate like a working shinobi, right?”

Naruto grumped and huffed to himself. This was blatant entrapment, was what it was. “Okay, fine. Yes.” He pointed at Iruka-sensei again. “But I want ramen first!”

Iruka-sensei was trying to look stern, still, but a corner of his mouth was twitching up. “Just one bowl,” he specified.

“Deal!” And he would get the exercise right, Naruto resolved as he followed Iruka-sensei down the stairs of the administrative building. Because he really, really needed to see Sasuke every day and make sure he was okay.

He kind of thought Sasuke felt the same way.


Naruto sprang out of a tree, grinning hugely as he bore straight down on Sasuke; this time he had him!

And then he squawked as a leg wrapped around his and arms snaked through his elbows, locking his knife hand. A weight that could only be Sasuke was against his back, and the illusion on the ground flickered out, and the ground itself was coming up fast. Really fast.

Thud.

It took Naruto a few moments to get enough breath back to wheeze, “Fuck.”

“You really need to work something out so you’re not so vulnerable to illusion,” Sasuke agreed against his shoulder. He didn’t sound nearly as winded. Of course, he’d had Naruto to cushion his landing. “You’re not nearly as observant as S—” He cut off abruptly, and Naruto lay quietly, not fighting it as Sasuke’s hold tightened. When Sasuke spoke again, his voice was rougher. “Hell, neither am I. So you need to compensate. Will your Shadow Clones be any good for this?” Finally he let Naruto go and pushed up to his feet.

“I dunno.” Naruto wriggled his fingers and toes to make sure everything was still attached and rolled to his feet. “I guess if I hid one to watch… but I’d have to yell or signal to warn myself.”

“Not necessarily,” Kakashi-sensei spoke up from his perch on one of the training ground’s huge boulders, eye fixed on his book. “You haven’t noticed so far, which, I must say, says a few things about the lack of organization in your brain. But Shadow Clones return experiences to their originator when they disperse. It’s one of the reasons the technique is so dangerous.”

Naruto’s eyes widened. “Wait, wait. So you mean… I could have had Shadow Clones do all my homework while I was out eating ramen and painting the monument?” And no one had told him?

Kakashi-sensei actually looked up from his book, and his expression was pained. “Naruto, Shadow Clones are complete copies of you. They would have blown the homework off too, and if they hadn’t they would still have returned just as much boredom as you’d have experienced doing the homework yourself. Multiplied.”

Naruto quailed at the thought. Okay, maybe that wasn’t such a good idea. Sasuke had collapsed cross legged in the dust and had a hand over his face, shoulders shaking with stifled laughter. “You would totally have done it. Your face would have been great.”

“Oh shut up.” Naruto glared, but not too hard, because Sasuke wasn’t laughing very often lately. “So anyway.” He folded his arms with dignity and looked back at Kakashi-sensei. “If the Shadow Clone just disperses once it spots an illusion, then I would know?”

“If you were paying attention,” Kakashi-sensei murmured, turning a page.

“Great!” Naruto produced about twenty, who grinned back at him and scattered through the trees. This time he’d definitely get Sasuke!

Sasuke was smirking. “This should be interesting.”

Sasuke could be a total bastard, and way too smug about using his Sharingan to set illusions on all Naruto’s clones at once so they all came back at once with nearly two dozen different views of Sasuke. But he gave Naruto an ice-pack for the headache afterwards, so Naruto figured he’d forgive him this time.

Besides, it kept them from thinking too hard about Sakura.


Naruto sat on Sasuke’s bed and sulked as Sasuke packed. “Why do you have to go?”

Sasuke rolled a spare mesh shirt and stuffed it into his bag. “He says it’s because Hidden Stone might be researching forbidden techniques, and the team that goes in has to be both as strong and as small as possible.”

“So why can’t I go too?” Naruto grabbed Sasuke’s medical kit out of his hands to double check it himself, before it was packed.

“Because the Elders still want to chain you to the Hokage’s desk," Sasuke pointed out dryly, stowing ration bars instead.

Naruto growled as he went to rummage in Sasuke’s kitchen for ingredients to make some extra warming pills; Sasuke always managed to exhaust his chakra if no one was around to watch him, and then he caught chest colds, and then he was a pain-in-the-ass patient for weeks. “They’re gonna have to let me go some time,” he declared, grinding dried ginger like it had the Elders’ faces on it.

“Some time, probably,” Sasuke agreed, checking his shuriken one by one. “But not this time.” They were both quiet for a few minutes. Naruto was rolling paste into pills when Sasuke said, “I’ll be back in three weeks. Even if I have to tie the old pervert up and drag him back.”

Naruto cracked a grin at that mental image and relaxed a little. “Yeah. Okay.” He gave Sasuke back his medical kit and met his eyes steadily. “I’ll be here.”

Sasuke’s shoulders eased a little, too, and he nodded.


“Sasuke,” Jiraiya said, exasperated, the fifth time Sasuke circled their camp, “sit down already. Everything’s secure. Have a drink or something.”

“You drink enough for three, let alone two,” Sasuke shot back, but it was half-hearted. He knew he was more wound up than he should be. Or, at least, wound up over things that weren’t their mission. Witness the way he jumped, startled, when Jiraiya’s hand fell on his shoulder.

“Sit down,” Jiraiya said firmly, pushing him down beside their tiny fire. “Sakura’s first status-check said she was all right, and Tsunade will keep Naruto from blowing up the village while you’re gone.” He paused and added thoughtfully, “Probably.”

“But they wouldn’t tell us what her message actually said!” Sasuke burst out.

“Mm, it’s always hard to have a partner in Intelligence.” Jiraiya sat down beside him. “We’ve been doing this for a long time, though, Sasuke; you aren’t the first. Intelligence has learned not to lie to a shinobi’s working partners.”

“Do we still count as that?” Sasuke could hear how uncertain he sounded, and bit his lip, looking away. Jiraiya’s large hand rumpled his hair until he looked back around just so he could glare. Jiraiya was smiling.

“I’ve heard some of the things Kakashi says to them about the three of you. You count.”

Sasuke took a breath, charging himself to remember that, and that Intelligence had said that Sakura’s message was a ‘so far so good’. “Okay.” Lower, he added, “Thanks.”

“Get some sleep,” Jiraiya told him, more gently than usual. “We’ll be home again soon. Until then, we have work to do.”

Sasuke nodded silently. Hell, maybe this trip would even take his mind off things for a while.


Every now and then, not often but now and then, Sasuke was willing to admit that his infuriating and cheerfully perverted teacher really did have a certain amount of wisdom. Today he would admit it, because the first thing Jiraiya asked when they reached the gates of Konoha was, “Is Naruto on shift at the hospital, today?”

The four genin on gate duty, none of whom Sasuke knew by more than sight, looked at each other. “I… don’t know?” the oldest said.

“Oh, hey, Sasuke!” Ino popped out of the gate house. “You guys are back! Yeah, Naruto’s up at the hospital again.”

“Again?” Sasuke asked, wary and frowning. What was Ino doing on the gate? She was Intelligence, like Sakura. Shouldn’t she be out on annoyingly incommunicado and very likely dangerous missions, too?

“Yeah, again. After that first week you were gone, when he almost trashed an operating room and the Hokage made him mediate for, like, four days without stopping,” Ino supplied, sauntering up to them. “Smugglers,” she breathed through unmoving lips, and gave Sasuke a bright, slightly bloodthirsty smile. “So, yeah, go on, you can find him there.”

Ah. That made more sense, yes. Sasuke liked it when the world made sense. He should probably repay Ino for that by playing along. He smirked at her and murmured, “Have fun babysitting the gate, then.”

“You shut up!” Ino shot back, loud enough to bounce off the nearest buildings. “It’s only for a little while, because we’re short handed!” All four of the genin edged away, and she bared her teeth with self-evident satisfaction. The gleam in her eye told Sasuke that she probably would have a great deal of fun, just as soon as she caught her smuggler targets. That was right and proper, too, and he breathed just a little easier as he followed Jiraiya into the village.

“Go on and see Naruto,” Jiraiya said quietly once they were a few streets in. “I’ll report what we found to Tsunade.”

“I’m perfectly capable of making a report like a decent professional,” Sasuke bit back.

“I don’t doubt that.” Jiraiya looked down at him, eyes dark and old. “But you need to see him, and he needs to know you’re back safe.” His mouth quirked up at the corner, though that didn’t erase the tight lines there, and he clasped Sasuke’s shoulder. “More efficient this way than waiting for him to come crashing into her office in the middle of a mission report. Go.”

Sasuke swallowed, feeling the shivers building up, only stilled for a moment by his teacher’s firm grip; he’d felt them all the way home. “Okay.”

He took to the roofs to reach the hospital, flinging himself through the air as if it could sweep away his memory. It couldn’t, though, and he must have been showing the fact because as soon as he came through the hospital doors the tall, thin medic on the desk zeroed in on him and came out, moving slow and smooth and keeping his hands where Sasuke could see them. “Can you tell me where you’re injured?” the man asked quietly.

Sasuke shook his head, every movement sharp with the tickle of potential laughter and potential screaming in his throat. “I’m not— There’s nothing— That’s not it. Just… is Naruto available?”

The medic didn’t look like he entirely believed Sasuke, but he just nodded and waved at a passing orderly. “Get Naruto. Tell him there’s an AFS requesting him at the front desk, no C/O. IMP is basic NNS.” note

Sasuke twitched away from the man’s hands as he was herded over to a chair; he was pretty sure that last bit had been some direction about what to do with him. But it had been directed to Naruto, he reassured himself, so he could pretty much depend on it being ignored. And it was only about four minutes, by his count, before Naruto burst into the waiting room like a medically scrubbed, blond whirlwind.

“Okay, so what’s— Sasuke!”

Sasuke swallowed and leaned into the hands suddenly locked around his shoulders. They were bruisingly tight, but that was okay; he needed the anchor. “Naruto.”

“Sasuke?” Naruto frowned. “What the hell happened? You’re not actually hurt, are you? If you’re hurt and you didn’t say so…”

“Shut up, idiot,” Sasuke ordered, relaxing into this familiarity, into the stable point of his teammate’s loud impatience and concern. He lifted his hands to wrap them around Naruto’s arms, staring at him. “You’d never do it,” he said quietly. Naruto would never, ever countenance or perform or let be performed the operations he’d seen the results of up in Stone. And Naruto still insisted he was going to be Hokage, and, even if that didn’t work out, at this rate the idiot was looking to be Konoha’s top medical ninja after Tsunade. So that was all right.

“Never do…?” Naruto’s question trailed off as he looked at Sasuke and his mouth tightened. Abruptly, he pulled Sasuke against him, one hand sliding up into Sasuke’s hair and pressing his head down very firmly against Naruto’s shoulder. “No,” he said with bedrock surety. “I’d never do anything that would make you look like this. Never. So breathe, damn it.”

Sasuke laughed instead, unsteadily, fingers digging into Naruto’s jacket, until Naruto thumped him on the shoulder.

“I said breathe,” he barked, and the startling authority in his tone made Sasuke suck in a breath and let it out. “Better. Keep doing that. Just a little at a time and pause. Little more. Little more. Now let it out. There.”

Sasuke followed Naruto’s directions, and felt his lungs finally relax, and his stomach too. Apparently Naruto had been learning more than chakra manipulation. He was starting to feel a little light-headed, though, and asked dryly, “Can I stop yet?”

“Well you can’t stop breathing, no.” But Naruto finally let him lift his head again and examined him with a critical eye. “Wanna stick around for the end of my shift?”

Sasuke looked around the entry of Konoha’s hospital, its off-white tile, and alarmingly cheerful pink and yellow stripes at waist height on the walls, and the chipped edges on everything because this was, after all, the hospital of a hidden village, and shuddered. Just about the only difference was that Ishi’s hospital had more green, and had slate floors. But it wouldn’t happen here. He wouldn’t let it, and Naruto wouldn’t let it, and when she got back Sakura certainly wouldn’t let it. He had to remember that. “Yeah,” he finally answered, a little rough. “Yeah, that would be good.”

Naruto’s eyes on him were sharp for a moment, but he didn’t ask, just nodded. “Okay. Come on.”

Sasuke followed after him, quiet and contained, watching the reassuringly normal routine of the hospital as Leaf’s medics dealt with reassuringly normal spills and scrapes and training injuries. Not here, he reminded himself. It won’t happen here.

Maybe it was even a good thing Sakura was out on her own mission, right now, because otherwise she might have been the one sent to Hidden Stone. It could have been her who saw the results of one too-charming medical researcher’s experiments, cared for now as best their village could manage for however long they would live. He didn’t want her to ever have to see something like that. Not her, not Naruto, they shouldn’t have to look horror in the face.

He knew that was a stupid thing to hope, for two other working shinobi, but he still hoped they wouldn’t have to. And if it did happen, the way his gut knew it might well, if it did… well, it wasn’t like Sasuke hadn’t seen horror before. He’d help as best he could.

He breathed a little easier once he decided that.

 

Later

Naruto trudged into Sasuke’s room and slumped down over his table. It hadn’t been a good day.

“Told you they wouldn’t tell us anything more,” Sasuke said, not looking up from the shuriken he was sharpening, cross legged on his bed.

“It’s been over five months,” Naruto groaned.

“She said it might be a year.”

Naruto shuddered. “Don’t say things like that.” After a moment he sighed and added, “I’m so incredibly bored.”

Sasuke finally sighed and put down his shuriken. “You are such a baby. Okay, fine, if we go out on patrol, will you stop complaining?”

Naruto perked up. “Patrol? Hey, yeah, they’d let me do that!” He paused and frowned. “Will they let you do that? I mean, without the ero-sennin? ‘Cause he’s away for two more weeks, isn’t he?” Allegedly on a mission, but Naruto had seen the look on Tsunade-baachan’s face when she agreed to it and kind of figured it was another of those ‘research’ trips where Jiraiya would spend most of his time in bars and baths and definitely not come home before he had to.

Sasuke smirked and fished a folded piece of paper out of his sleeve, flicking it at Naruto so it bounced off his forehead. “Kakashi-sensei can come along instead.”

“You sure?” Naruto eyed his teammate with some doubt, even as his fingers worked the paper open eagerly. “Kakashi-sensei’s on light duty. Tsunade-baachan said so herself, and you could hear her all the way down the other end of the hall.” But there it was in black and white on the paper, a six week rotation of short patrols for Uchiha, Uzumaki, and Hatake. Naruto grinned hugely. Finally, something to do.

Something he didn’t have to feel guilty over being happy about, the way he’d started to with the bone-healing Tsunade had started letting him help with.

“I think he argued that, for the great Copy Nin, short patrol is light duty,” Sasuke said dryly. “He’s got a point, especially if he’s out with both of us.”

Naruto looked up at Sasuke for a long moment and smiled. “Yeah. Don’t worry, I’ll make sure he gets better.”

Sasuke looked away with a short huff. “Not like I was worried.”

Naruto gave him a tolerant look. “Yeah, yeah. Okay, then, let’s go terrorize the bushes and bandits, and shit.” If he couldn’t take care of Sakura right now, at least the rest of his team was where he could keep an eye on them.


Kakashi raised an eyebrow as Naruto crashed out of the trees followed by four Shadow Clones carrying two bandits between them. At least he assumed the pair were bandits; they were wearing enough pieced-together armor and knives for it, as far as he could tell under the coils of rope that nearly cocooned them from neck to knee.

Naruto was grinning hugely. “There! Now I’m ahead again!”

Kakashi stifled a smile behind his mask. “Sasuke came back with one more while you were gone. The two of you are even.”

Naruto pouted indignantly (all five of him) and dumped the latest catch at the end of today’s line. “Then I’m going to sweep the river next! I’ll get lots more than him there!”

And he was gone.

Kakashi shook his head and marked his place with a finger, regarding Naruto’s most recent contribution to the safety of Konoha’s roads. A man and a woman, both fairly young looking though that might just be their dazed expressions. He picked up a pebble and flicked it up to hit Shikamaru, napping on a branch above him, on the ankle. “Shikamaru, you’re the recorder for the day. Get statements from these two.” Since this was, after all, nominally Shikamaru’s patrol sector; best to keep the paperwork in order. He went back to his book as Shikamaru grumbled his way down the tree and slouched over to run through the formalities.

Most of the bandits Naruto and Sasuke’s little competition had brought in had been too shocked by the speed of their abduction to even try lying about their business before it was too late. The five ninja from other villages they’d caught so far had been sent back for Interrogation to deal with.

“Someone should have thought of this sooner,” Genma murmured lazily from under his own tree, one ankle propped on the opposite knee. “It’s doing them good to take out their worry on something productive. Doing the patrols good, too; everyone was getting a little worn down covering both the short and long rotations while we get back up to strength. Good to have a little break while those two take over for a bit.” He accepted one of the skewers of meat and vegetables Chouji had been carefully roasting for lunch and took a satisfied bite.

“Mmm,” Kakashi agreed around his own very tasty mouthful. “And now I see why this year’s patrol commander is hanging around in this sector.”

“I visit all the sectors sooner or later.” Genma grinned and licked a bit of savory sauce from the corner of his mouth. “I just take a little longer in Shikamaru’s. An Akamichi’s cooking is something to take a little time over, even in the field.” He eyed the day’s handful of bandits critically. “You might be moving on before I do, in fact. They haven’t caught nearly as many today as they were bringing in two days ago. When you get to the next sector, remind whoever you send off to cover the one you’re supposed to be in to relieve Hikaru and tell her where to join back up with Shikamaru.”

“I’ll make sure,” Kakashi promised. He didn’t actually want to disrupt the regular schedules of the other patrols, after all. Not more than was therapeutic, at least. Not more than would keep his team from fretting themselves and everyone around them to bits.

Not more than could be helped. For now.

He stared at his book, unseeing though his eyes traveled slowly over the lines. Another two weeks and he’d have completed his evaluation of the shinobi currently on patrol. He already had a list of a dozen or so who could be pulled off this duty without impairing their teams too badly, without showing too clearly that the Leaf was raising strength to attack someone. Soon.

They had the location of enough bases, now, to gut Hidden Sound if they had to, and Miuhara was confident Sakura could get them the last few. Soon they would have enough people gathered to get Sakura out of Orochimaru’s main base, even against resistance. He could feel the tightening of nerves that said this operation was nearing its end, approaching whatever climax it would come to.

This had all been a lot easier when he was the one in the field, not his student.

Be safe, he told Sakura silently, turning another page. Stay smart. Let me have been right to teach undercover skills to you, of all my students. As he heard the rustle of someone dragging something large through the brush, again, he gave one last silent hope to the wind to carry away.

Let her come home safe.

End

A/N: Medical jargon in more than one country is characterized by a certain morbid humor and tendency to shorten by elision or acronyms. IMP and C/O come from US hospitals and stand for “impression [of what the problem is]” and “complaint of”. AFS and NNS are original to the Naruto-verse and stand for, respectively, “Another Fucking Shinobi” and “Ninja Needing Sedation”. In other words, “there’s a typical shinobi at the front desk saying he’s perfectly fine; I think he’s full of it and may be about to snap, so bring the good drugs/knockout jutsu”.

Actually, of course, those are translations, localizing the jargon for English speakers. The "original" terms are probably something more like:

AFS = ImaKuShi: Imahitotsu Kuso Shinobi (いまくし or いま糞忍 in writing), "another shitty shinobi".

C/O = probably not shortened, since most of the words for "complaint", for example "fuhei", are already only two syllables and two simple characters.

IMP = Me: "eye" as in "looking at it" or "eyeballing it" (め or 目 in writing).

NNS = NiChiNyuu: Ninja Chinsezai Nyuuyotte iru (にちにゅう or 忍鎮入 in writing), essentially "ninja needing sedation".

Personally, I suspect there’s a lot of hiragana used in ninja patient records, both to keep patients from snooping and for speed. back

It’s Just That Any One of Us Is Half Without Another One Is You – Chapter Seven

Kabuto tapped politely on Sakura’s door before looking in. “Orochimaru-sama wants to see you.”

“About time.” Sakura rolled up off her bed, where she’d been examining her ceiling and getting increasingly bored, and strode after him down the hallways of Sound’s hidden heart.

She blended into the torch-shadows like they did, now. The one thing Orochimaru had done, in the three weeks she’d been waiting, was give her the run of Sound’s outfitting supplies. Sakura suspected it was a test of sorts, but that was all right. She was done hiding what she was (and that made the best cover of all). She’d tossed her chuunin uniform into storage and chosen instead a snugly zipped leather vest, loose pants, and half gloves. All in black. She was done trying to be pretty and unthreatening, too. Orochimaru had chuckled.

Today he waited for her in one of his laboratories, smiling and cold-eyed and avid. “You’ve been wanting an opportunity to prove yourself. Here’s a bit of research that I believe your skills might assist me with.” He waved a hand at the table spread with diagram scrolls.

Sakura studied them and gave him a faintly disgusted look as she flipped them into what had to be the proper order. What was this, an exam? She ignored his smirk as she read. The heart of it was the Earth, Wind and Fire seal, but so woven into grounding channels that all its force seemed to be siphoned off. A strange approach for a technique that was supposed to tear a whole battleground into fissures and rubble. But the grounding also seemed to circle back. A feedback loop? “A power source,” she finally said, slowly. “Looping the explosive energy until it’s concentrated in one path. There’s no outlet, though.”

“Well, that’s up to the subject, isn’t it?” Orochimaru asked.

Sakura’s world flipped over and she imagined the seal drawn on a person, not the ground. She snorted and let the scroll under her hand roll up. “I didn’t come here to be your guinea pig.”

“It’s a technique still in development. You wouldn’t be the first tester, of course,” Orochimaru purred. “But I’m sure you’ll wish to oversee the stages of testing and refinement.”

(I can’t do that, I can’t…) Sakura forced down a twist of sickness and curled her lip. “I didn’t come here to be your own personal torturer, either,” she said and jerked her chin at Kabuto. “That’s what he’s for, isn’t it?”

Orochimaru raised his brows. “Scruples, little kunoichi?” he murmured, and there was danger in his voice.

Sakura crossed her arms. “What you do is your business. What I do is mine. I’m here because you have something I want, and I have something you want; don’t think that means I’m going to swear myself to Sound or follow your path. I’ve got my own.” She stared back at him with all the fury of finally speaking and acting her mind, after all those years of muffling herself; she wasn’t going to just accept a new blanket to throw over her own will, having finally fought free (it only made sense that she wouldn’t).

“Hm.” He studied her, finally smiling again. “I suppose I’ll have to send you on a field assignment, then, to see what you’re made of.”

Sakura shrugged. “That’s what I like best. Just as long as whatever goons you assign me know the difference between ‘betraying Sound’ and ‘halfway decent strategy’.” She smiled back at him, chilly. “I wouldn’t like being killed by accident, and you wouldn’t like how many you’d lose doing it.”

He laughed low in his throat. “Very practical. How refreshing. Kabuto,” he waved a hand, turning back to his diagrams, “introduce her to Sakon’s new team. She can plan the trip into Earth Country.”

(Sakon, only survivor of the snatch for Shizune, has one of those seals like Sasuke’s.) Sakura prepared herself to show no sign of recognition as she followed Kabuto out into the halls again. Filing clerk, she reminded herself; pissed as fuck not to have known about the attack despite working for Intelligence, if they mention it.

“He seems to like you,” Kabuto said conversationally. It took Sakura a moment to remember he was talking about Orochimaru, not Sakon. “I think he sees himself in you.”

After the conversation they’d just had about testing (torture), that was a jab. Sakura snorted and jabbed back, as he’d surely expect her to. “What, because I finally figured out, after years of trying, that what I am is never going to be good enough for the precious Leaf? Never acceptable, no matter how good I am? Never right and normal? I suppose I can see how that would seem familiar, yes.”

She could feel him stiffening beside her, just for a flash of an instant, and for that same instant his glance was dangerous. And then he smiled again and murmured, “Perhaps.”

“I’m very good at what I do,” she said softly, feeling for her footing in this exchange, remembering Kakashi’s words about Kabuto being the real danger to her cover. She had to convince him, and that meant pushing back against him. “I hid it for years and years under sweet, soft manners. I know what can hide behind a polite smile. Kabuto-senpai.”

His smile turned more genuine for another flash, dark and sharp. “Will that knowledge keep you alive?”

She shrugged one shoulder, starting to enjoy this sparring though it made her pulse run faster. “You said yourself that he sees himself in me. As long as he can get something he wants out of me, there’s no reason to kill me. And,” she added, gambling that a man who kept that sweet mask, even here, would have his own agenda, even here, “as long as I’m not a threat to your ends you’ll enjoy me while I’m around.”

Kabuto’s smile was inscrutable again and he laid his hand on a door. “Perhaps. Here we are.” As she walked past him into the room, he murmured, “Just remember that I did swear myself to Sound.”

So. Either he was saying that he didn’t actually have any agenda separate from Orochimaru’s, and was genuinely loyal; or else he was saying that he was even more ruthless in pursuit of his separate agenda than she was, even to giving an oath he meant to betray. If her answer assumed either one, and the other was true, Sakura would be dead. Sakura felt a flash of the same thrill she’d felt facing Fuunotora across the sands of the Exam arena, and smiled back.

“I’ll remember, senpai.” And let him make what he would out of that.


Sakura didn’t like Sakon, or his team. They were arrogant. They were careless. They were idiots. She found herself wishing, a little wistfully, that they really would mistake her sensible precautions for sabotage and try to kill her, so that she’d have a really good excuse to activate the trap seals she’d prepared for each of them. Unfortunately, she suspected that Orochimaru, who was mad but not stupid, had told them to just report her actions back, whatever she did.

(It nauseated her, at night, when she was falling asleep and sliding down deeper than her persona, to feel that callous urge to eliminate them and know it was at least partly real. She buried the disturbance under her persona as soon as she could, every morning.)

She’d certainly have preferred a more subtle group with which to track two of Akatsuki, who were reported to be, in turn, tracking the host of a tailed beast. Especially considering that one of those Akatsuki seemed to be Uchiha Itachi.

A field test indeed. Her lip curled. Orochimaru was subtle, even if his tools weren’t.

(She wanted, so very much, to get this information back to the Leaf; another sighting of Itachi, after years of traceless silence. But she didn’t dare. That would be just what Orochimaru was watching for.)

“What the hell, so we only get to watch them?” The one called Kagura lounged back against the sandy rock of their vantage point. “Boring.”

“Orochimaru-sama’s orders.” Not that Miyu was watching anything but her knives as she sharpened them.

“You and your weird crush on the boss,” Kagura muttered, turning over to take a look over the edge of the boulder again. “If we’re watching, we should be closer.”

“Not while Uchiha Itachi is down there,” Sakura said flatly. Again.

“Like he could handle all three of us.” Sakon paused and added. “Well, all four, I suppose.” He gave her a smirk that said, clear as words, that he meant his brother-self as the fourth, not her.

“Don’t be more of an idiot than you can help,” Sakura directed, cold. “I realize that may not be much, since you apparently can’t read a background briefing. Itachi has a new level of the Sharingan; one look and you’ll be down for days with the after-effects. None of you are careful enough to be trusted to avoid it.” Ah, it felt so good to just say that.

“Illusions,” Kagura sneered.

“Physical effects,” Sakura corrected. “Now shut up and watch; I think they’re making their move.” At least they were finally approaching the tall shinobi in the red armor they’d been tracking. They seemed to actually be talking to him. Trying to recruit him?

Apparently not, since the Rock-nin leaped back, steam suddenly spinning around him like a vortex. Itachi’s partner tossed his head back as if he’d laughed and pulled his enormous sword off his back.

“So if the Uchiha is all that, why’s it the sword guy going in?” Kagura demanded.

“The swordsman seems to be enjoying himself,” Miyu observed, fortunately before Sakura gave in to temptation and strangled Kagura.

It was true enough that the swordsman—one of Mist’s Seven Swordsmen according to the briefing—seemed to be amusing himself, fighting with broad, showy strokes whose flash didn’t conceal their brutality. (Sakura remembered Zabuza with a shiver. But she could feel that glee, that enjoyment inside herself, now.) And Itachi stood quietly aside, waiting with every appearance of patience.

“Huh,” Sakon commented, elbow on their concealing boulder. “That’s some chakra the red one’s got going.”

Sakura wondered if that was what Akatsuki was after; the chakra of the tailed beasts, the greatest weapon of the hidden villages. But how did they think they could control the hosts? Surely the beast’s chakra would overwhelm any brainwashing technique attempted on the host.

…or perhaps that was what Itachi was for, with his strange, new Sharingan.

(Naruto!)

Sakura watched the fight below with narrowed eyes and hoped the white knuckles of her hand gripping the rock would be taken for fear. Her breath hissed in as the host started to manifest visibly and she said to her temporary team, low and tense, “Be ready to move back.”

“What, more?”

Sakura didn’t even look at Kagura. “You weren’t there when the One-tail got loose, were you? Stay if you want; I’ll report back on how small a smear you left.” Chakra was whipping around the red armor below, though the Swordsman’s strange blade seemed to be keeping him clear; absorbing chakra, or deflecting it? She couldn’t tell from here. Hints of a long, narrow head rose above the host.

And then Itachi stepped forward. He just stood there, unmoving, but abruptly the gathering chakra blazed, ragged and wild. And collapsed.

“What the fuck did he do?” Sakon demanded.

“I told you,” Sakura said through her teeth, trying to keep her voice from shaking with the sudden knot of cold fear in her belly. “Come on,” she added, as Itachi’s partner hauled the tall Rock-nin over his shoulder. “We’ll follow them as far as we can. But if any of you get too close and get caught, you’re on your own.”

“Yeah, fine,” Kagura muttered, looking unsettled.

Sakura directed them out into a tracking formation and started after the two Akatsuki as soon as they were out of sight. Which took a while as the two strolled across the plain below, careless of concealment.

She would report all her suspicions to Orochimaru. And would not seek any of her message drops to Konoha. Not yet.

(Naruto! Sasuke! Oh, stay safe, be careful, don’t let them catch you!)

The wind, here in Earth Country, was making her eyes tear up and she blinked to clear them.


A scream rang down the hall and in an instant Sakura had her back to the thick stone wall and a knife in hand. Another two weeks of waiting after her "test" mission had pulled her nerves tight.

“Admirable reflexes, Sakukra-san,” Kabuto murmured, “but unnecessary.” He looked down the hall. “Shall we see if the latest tests were successful?”

(Because of me, no, no, no…) Sakura took a slow breath. She couldn’t pretend she hadn’t known from the start where the power Orochimaru promised came from. She made her kunai vanish and followed Kabuto down toward where greenish light spilled out of an open door.

Inside, Orochimaru stood with folded arms, watching a man in the middle of the bare, stone room with an expression of dissatisfaction. He looked up as they came in and made a small tch of annoyance. “The Eight Gates won’t do for this at all, Kabuto; I was on the right track with the first seal. If the power released is internal, there’s no chance at all of limiting it.” He waved a hand at the man.

Sakura swallowed hard, knowing her eyes were stretched wide. The man looked like he was on fire, crouched on the floor with heat and sweat and chakra boiling off him, shedding themselves into the visible spectrum. He made another sound, hoarse and desperate, and abruptly collapsed onto the stone. The raging heat and light around him died down and down and finally out, along with his last, faint movements.

He wasn’t breathing.

Orochimaru sighed. “No, that won’t do at all. But don’t worry, little kunoichi,” he smiled at Sakura, slow and more than a little mad. “There’s always a way, if one just searches for it deep enough.”

(Deep enough in nightmare, no, don’t think, don’t think, don’t feel, anger, that’s all there is) Sakura cleared her throat. “I hope so. I certainly have no interest in power that’s too unstable to use.”

“I assure you, I’m working diligently on it,” Orochimaru murmured, watching her with dark amusement. "And for your part?"

Sakura folded her arms, looking down at them. “All right. As long as you’re working on that, I’ll work for you.”

“Excellent!” He clapped his hands, sounding pleased. “I’m sure there will be plenty of missions that will suit you, here.”

She knew it was true. (Would have to be true.) That was why she’d come here. She was shinobi, and she’d killed before. She would again. She clung to the bitter anger she’d fanned up in herself and turned her back on the body sprawled over the floor.


It was a little strange, how familiar missions made life. No matter the country, the wants of the people never seemed to change that much. Some people wanted protection, and some people wanted others gotten rid of. Someone always wanted to know what someone else was doing or saying. And all of those people came to the shinobi for help. So here she was, with a new team, lounging in the most upscale baths in Sound’s capital and waiting for the mistress of the mayor to make her daily visit with her friends so that Sakura could find out where the mayor would be tonight. Even Orochimaru couldn’t wring financial support out of a Daimyou without taking on some political jobs.

Kikyou slipped through the curtains and murmured, for Sakura’s ears only, as she passed, “She’s coming.” Sakura nodded just a hair and swished her fingers under the water to send ripples toward the far corner. Kikyou waded that way and sank down into the water with a contented sigh, apparently indifferent to the two women already in the pool.

There was the one difference from her old familiar missions, though. This time, Sakura was in charge. Openly and officially, with no hidden orders to watch her.

(And so the message, finally dropped for Leaf after two and more months of waiting: the location of Hidden Sound, the tight-coded map, the warning about Akatsuki on the move, the don’t-come-yet signal because he hasn’t trusted her yet with the locations of more than two of the other bases. One tight roll of onion-skin paper she’d dropped blind and had to believe would be picked up.)

She liked the taste of being in control; it was a delicious contrast to her previous missions.

A drift of laughter preceded four beautiful women through the curtain.

“…and he brought the most gorgeous flowers, but I suspect it was his assistant who actually picked them out.” Kotone of Kamura, the mayor’s mistress waved one elegant hand, her laugh sweet and low even as she heaped scorn on her client. “I imagine the poor woman is relieved when I take up his attention.”

None of the women had brought anything in with them and Sakura stretched her left arm out along the pool edge, signalling. Akemi slipped out of the pool and by the four women, bobbing her head timidly as she passed. She would check their clothing and things for any written assignations.

“So where is he taking you tonight?” one of the other women asked, coiling up her long, sleek hair.

Kotone touched a soft fingertip to her red lips. “It’s a secret.” She laughed as her friends protested. “Well, I’ll tell you this much. It’s in Fujiura territory.” She slid into the water and leaned back with a full, pleased smile as her friends gasped with scandalized delight.

So it was true; the mayor was using his mistress’ contacts to make deals with the city’s yakuza clans. It remained to be seen whether he really thought he could replace the country’s lord, as the Daimyou feared, but it was starting to look like that was the plan. Sakura closed her eyes and leaned back more comfortably, listening as Kikyou took the signal and stood. Under her lashes, she watched Kotone’s gaze sharpen and follow Kikyou, and nodded to herself. Kikyou would lay a false trail, ending in perfect innocence, while Sakura and Akemi slipped into the Fujiura-run Mana restaurant to find out the details of this deal.

Everything was running smoothly, and exactly to her orders. Sakura relaxed into the water and fed her inner bitterness on satisfaction, drawing its veils more firmly around her heart to suppress worries about her message.

Yes. She liked the taste of this quite a lot.


Sakura stared at the twisted flow of stone in front of her. “This is what you call working?”

“It demonstrates that the principle is sound,” Orochimaru lectured, as if this were a classroom. “Despite the subject’s failure to control the process, it is, in fact, the correct process.”

At least she didn’t have to listen to any screaming this time. Actually, insofar as the thing still had a face, the statue (statue, not person, statue, think that) looked rather peaceful. It just wasn’t human. “I’ve seen plenty of transformations before,” she said, pushing down her flickers of queasiness and distress, “but none that ended in stone. Not unless it was a bloodline talent.”

“Mm, yes. I do have samples of such things, but grafting them is always touch and go. In this case,” Orochimaru flicked casual fingers at the statue, “the petrification is the result of an overflow of energy. The body can no longer withstand it and crystallizes.”

“I trust,” Sakura said dryly, “you can think of a way around that problem.”

“In time.” He looked down at her with the predatory edge she was actually getting used to. “There’s a way around every problem in time, my little kunoichi.”


Working with, and for, Orochimaru could be troublesome and disturbing, but it had been four months and she’d managed to get used to that. Traveling with him, on the other hand, was turning out to be unexpectedly and utterly exasperating. Orochimaru was finicky about where they stopped to sleep and would press on for extra hours to reach a town with lodgings he considered acceptable, but he was also distractable as a cat when some new thought struck and would stop them nearly midstride in a tree to write up experimental possibilities. Sakura was having downright (painful) flashbacks to Naruto in pursuit of ramen. And she could not, no matter how she protested or lectured or, eventually, in desperation, cajoled, get Orochimaru to keep to his alleged travel schedule. (So familiar, miss it so much, but not, no, never Orochimaru…)

And that wasn’t even mentioning the actual route.

“How do you ever manage to visit your other bases often enough to keep them running?” she demanded as they rounded yet another switchback to a hidden gate. “It’s going to take longer to get in than it does to inspect the place.”

“If it bores you, I suppose I can bring Kabuto along as I usually do, instead,” Orochimaru murmured, fingers flickering over the door, completing seals of unlocking.

Sakura ground down her sudden flare of alarm, checking their backtrail so he wouldn’t see anything she couldn’t conceal, and managed to grumble, “Why didn’t you bring him this time, then?” (Have to be here, have to find all the bases.)

“Kabuto has a job of his own this month.” He glanced at her sidelong, slyly. “One of the places I’m afraid I can’t send you.”

Spying in Konoha most likely, then. (Have to trust my cover holds.) She shrugged. “If this is what you need me for, fine. But, honestly, this is overkill.”

“You’ll see.” He completed the seals and the door opened.

There were at least ten ninja behind it.

“Orochimaru-sama!” One of them hurried forward. “Suigetsu has escaped, please be careful!”

“Again?” Orochimaru sounded more intrigued than worried and Sakura fought the urge to roll her eyes, keeping a sharp eye on the room around them. “Show me the container. How did he get out this time?” He turned back to close the gates, head cocked at the man who’d warned him, and a silvery shimmer flashed out of the shadows, striking for his back.

Sakura was moving before she thought, following hard on her thrown kunai, watching as it went through what was attacking, driving her hands through the seals for Earth Wall even as she dove forward. She rolled and slapped a hand down to initiate the technique and breathed out as a thin wall of stone shot up just in time to intercept the attack.

And now, as the other ninja present started shouting and throwing around earth and lightning attacks, calculation actually caught up with her, murmuring in the back of her mind. (Chance to kill him, but might not, escapee, captured before, surprise attack but how often is Orochimaru really surprised? fifty-fifty chance, not good enough, defend him.)

That calculation wasn’t why she’d moved.

Sakura crouched by Orochimaru, most of her waiting, poised, to defend again if necessary. But a little part of her, hidden and sheltered as long as she’d been able, was shivering. (exasperating, familiar, my team, miss it so much, acted to defend that memory, he’s not them, but it feels so close…)

As the base ninja finally blasted earth through the attacker, who resolved into a half-liquid human figure, Orochimaru stepped up beside her and touched her shoulder in passing. “Well done, little kunoichi.”

Satisfaction edged his voice and the base ninja nodded respectfully to her as she stood. It was the same way the people at the Sound village looked at Kabuto, Orochimaru’s right hand. Trusted. Sakura took a silent breath in and deliberately pushed the wail of (not them, not the same, not!) further down inside.

(I’m shinobi. Whatever it takes. Use it.)

She followed Orochimaru into the base, alert at his back as she would be to guard any shinobi she was assigned with.

(not team!)

Her new team, she supposed.


Another month, another experiment. Whoever had given Orochimaru a science kit as a child had a lot to answer for. There was an unholy light in the man’s eyes as he explained the changes he’d made since his last experimental subject had exploded all over his lab.

“Absolutely not,” Sakura said flatly, stepping back from the table full of diagrams and seals. “This one draws on your control to supplement mine. The instant you let that lapse, I’m either soggy shreds or else a stone statue. An extremely strange one. You’re just circling back around to the conclusion you reached with the elemental seals.”

Orochimaru gave her a sour look, seeming right on the edge of pouting, and Sakura leaned her hip on the counter and snorted. “You like challenges,” she reminded him. It was a lot of why she was still alive, she sometimes thought. That and his amusement at her measured insolence. “This approach is stalled; you need another. Tell me how the core of this works.”

Orochimaru’s brows rose. “I beg your pardon?”

Sakura sighed and rubbed a gloved hand over her face. He could be such a temperamental, pain in the ass, diva to work with; worse than Sasuke, honestly. (Want it back. Don’t think about that.) “For one thing, I’m not letting you do anything to me that I don’t understand. For another, I’m a damn good researcher, and I’ve been reading your library when you don’t have any missions for me.” She waved a hand at his papers. “I can already see what you’re doing with the outer seals, channeling and looping the force to stabilize it. But why use a glorified explosive tag as the core in the first place?”

Now he smiled, slow and pleased. “Ah, but it isn’t. The Earth, Wind and Fire seal is far more than that." He settled into a chair and crossed his legs. “Do you know the actual power source for that technique?”

Sakura cocked her head. “Isn’t it the shinobi’s own chakra? The warnings on it make it look that way; it draws chakra out so abruptly and in such volume that it can kill the user if they’re not strong enough.” That was, in essence, how every technique worked.

His smile got wider. “Oh, no. The reason the warnings call for only jounin rank to use this is because it requires that much strength to control the power source. Which is the energy of nature around us, you see. That is what kills the users.”

Sakura blinked. “But… wait a minute. There are plenty of techniques that link the user with the energy of the world around them. That’s the source of every elemental technique there is!” She paused in thought for a moment and added, slowly, “Though… not the power source, I suppose…”

“Precisely.” Orochimaru leaned back in great good humor. “Ninja use the resonance between their personal energy and that of the natural world to form techniques. But not to power them. Because, unless the user has both great power of their own to balance the inrush, and also phenomenal control to shape what is, after all, an alien energy… well. The results can be very interesting.”

Sakura reflected on what kind of thing Orochimaru found interesting and had to hold back a shudder. “And this is what you want to draw onto me, like I was some kind of really big parchment tag?” she asked. It wasn’t actually a rhetorical question, considering who she was talking to.

“Ah!” Orochimaru held up a finger, eyes brightening again. “But you have the control. You will be able to shape it, once you have it. What must be supplied is a backstop, as it were. Some bracing to hold you steady against the flow and aid you in cutting it off before it runs out of balance.”

“Hm.” Sakura gave him a long, narrow look, and finally turned back to the diagrams, examining them with a new eye. “Are there any other techniques that use that source?” she asked absently, and looked up, startled, at the disgusted sound he made.

“The so-called ‘Sage’ techniques. That fool only made it work by having helpers, though, summons who could feed the energy to him. That seems to tame it a little.” He smiled, very unpleasantly. “Though it also transformed the user a little bit into the form of his helpers. Very appropriate, I thought.”

Sakura considered Orochimaru’s sour expression, and the only person she’d ever heard referred to as a sage, and nodded to herself. Jiraiya. Interesting. “Well, then, what we need here are some ‘helper’ seals, isn’t it? Separate seals to receive the force from Earth, Wind and Fire and feed it into a whole different channeling system. I bet I know one that would work, too.” She grabbed some paper and started writing, chewing the end of the brush now and then as she thought back to how, exactly, these had gone. “Not the Summer River seal; that will contain it but not smooth or slow it at all. Channel it through the Three Gates and the Dragon at Dawn, and then smooth the output through Summer Rain.”

(Seals that Tsunade had used to let Sakura channel Naruto’s—no, the Nine-tail’s—chakra to her. With Tsunade’s work to contain the force, just maybe Sakura could trust this to be used on her.)

She smiled with tight satisfaction as she wrote the last line. “There.”

Orochimaru examined her work closely, brows slowly rising. “Hmm. An unusual approach, but, as the source is external, this might work yes.” He glanced at her, eyes gleaming. “It will rely wholly on your judgement, to stop the inflow before it burns you out.”

Sakura raised her chin. “My control is second to none. I can do it.”

(It will work, oh god it will work, this is it and it’s too soon, can’t delay any more, wait!, yes, can…)

“Well, then,” he murmured, and she cut him off.

After that’s been tested to my satisfaction.” She crossed her arms and stood firm against his burning excitement, hard and unmoving. No one was going to control her or burn her out for his own amusement. No one. That was her only concern. (Has to be.)

He looked at her for a long moment and finally laughed, low. “Very well, then.” His mouth curled. “Sakura.”

It jolted her. He’d never used her name to her before. Never… recognized her like that. The change struck her breathless and flustered, habitual anger easing. Whatever else Orochimaru was, he was one of the Leaf’s Sannin, and he acknowledged her.

“Come.” He gathered up the papers and swept out the door. “Let us see how this works.” Knowledge lay dark under his smile as he looked over his shoulder at her.

(can’t go there!)

(Have to go there.)

She nodded silently and followed him down the shadowy halls toward the sturdy stone testing areas.


Sakura slung her pack into the corner by her bed and stretched. This had been a long mission, though at least her subordinates were finally jumping properly when she told them what to do. Orochimaru had assigned her yet another team (not her team, remember somehow) over a month ago, and it had taken her a while to harry them into shape. She suspected Orochimaru of using her to train the less experienced shinobi of Sound, but she couldn’t do a very fast job of it when he was also pulling her aside after every mission away to watch people attempt to use the seal he’d… they’d created. Attempts that had failed so far (Good, it’s an excuse to wait, to build more information.), and when he asked, she’d chosen a mission over watching the latest round.

(she’d dropped the next message, they’d be ready to come when she showed herself, would brief Naruto and Sasuke to play their parts)

At any rate, the rural lord whose ambition the Daimyou of Sound had been worried about was dead, and the country’s leader bound that much tighter to his “Otokage”. She rolled her eyes a little over that self-bestowed title. Though Orochimaru did have the ability to match it. Not the clout, not the influence, and not the country, but the ability. No one could deny that.

“Sakura-san?” She turned to find Kabuto standing in her doorway. “Good timing! I think your procedure is ready for you.”

Adrenaline spiked through her. “The seal? It’s ready?”

He smiled. “The final tests went very smoothly. The subject managed to halt the power before he lost control, and showed significantly increased speed and reserves.”

She took a slow breath. Power. Orochimaru’s half of their bargain, she was going to have power to match almost anyone. And once the bargain was fulfilled, she’d agreed to show herself openly enough to attract Naruto’s notice and bring Sasuke in his wake.

(Over half a year, this is it.)

(counted every day)

(Still don’t have the last base location, but have to keep him from suspecting, have to be trusted, have to do it…)

She looked Kabuto in the eye, flushed with anticipation. “Let’s do it, then.”

Kabuto set down a small box on her table. “Take these before you sleep. They’ll help calm your chakra in preparation for binding the seal to you.”

“‘Calm my chakra’ hm?” She flipped open the box and eyed the two pills inside. “You’re saying I have to make myself vulnerable to the imprint of the seal for it to take?”

For a breath, his eyes glinted. “I’ve admired the quickness of your understanding from the start, Sakura-san.”

Another move in their constant sparring, always full of double and triple meanings. Did he mean she understood him? Understood Orochimaru? Understood only the surface, the technicalities?

“I’m flattered, Kabuto-senpai,” she murmured. She only called him that when they spoke alone like this. Double and triple meanings.

“Only the truth.” He slipped back out, closing the door softly behind him. “Sleep well, Sakura-san,” drifted back through it.

She took the pills and slept deeply and walked into Kabuto’s operating room the next morning with a firm step. She thought he’d probably put sedatives in there, too.

Orochimaru turned, smiling. “Ah, Sakura. There you are.” His eyes were bright, but more focused than was usual when he was in the grip of experimentation and invention, which was reassuring. He’d already gotten the early, jittery excitement out of his system, apparently.

Kabuto made a reassuringly normal medical fuss around her, getting her prepared and onto his table. “I’ll need to work along your spine, so if you’ll lie on your stomach,” he directed, draping a sheet modestly over her.

“I have watched this before,” she pointed out, settling herself. Kabuto laughed, warm and comforting.

“I know; it’s just medic patter. We’re trained to do this, you know, to set people at ease.”

“No wonder you’re such a good spy,” she muttered. “You were trained to lie.”

Kaubto paused and she could imagine the quirk of his mouth that went with his suddenly darker tone. “Well, yes, I suppose I was.” He chuckled and added, “I won’t downplay how much this will hurt, then. It’s chakra re-alignment, after all.”

“I’ve noticed that, yeah.”

“And have the will to pursue your strength, even so,” Orochimaru murmured, and a startlingly warm hand rested on her back, almost as soothing to her nerves as that acknowledgment was to her anger. “Let us begin, then.”

Sakura set her teeth into the bite-pad under her chin and closed her eyes. As ink traced over her shoulders and down her spine and wrenched harder and harder at her nerves and soul, she held tight to her purpose. She would have power, and she would never be ignored and set aside again.

(She would keep what was important to her safe.)

(love them, love them, kill him...)

As the seal sank into her, burning like fire, the screams broke loose, layers of her self running together in the unified rush of pain. Orochimaru’s voice followed her down into the dark.

“Everything will be well, Sakura.”

It actually helped.